JP7137872B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines (generally called "pachinko machines") and reel-type gaming machines (generally called "slot machines").

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there has been known a gaming machine in which a special game is played in which a large amount of prizes can be obtained when a winning prize is won.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning of a game ball into the starting hole. Then, when the game ball enters the starting hole, a judgment process for judging whether or not a hit is won is performed. Also, at this time, the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined display device for a predetermined variation time. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the winning prize has been won, and the opening and closing member of the big prize opening is operated, thereby increasing the number of players. provide a special game in which a prize of

JP 2017-006393 A

With such a conventional game machine, there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in amusement in a game.

Means 1: Judgment means for making a judgment;
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means being a special result;
A reception state can be generated, and when reception validity determination is made to make a specific action by a player as a valid operation in the reception state , a reception state execution capable of executing a post-reception change according to the type of the generated reception state . means and
a display device having a display area in which a display image is displayed;
an action target display means capable of displaying , in the display area, an action target display suggesting the target of a specific action by the player;
A plurality of reception states including a specific reception state are prepared as the reception state ,
The display area includes a specific display area,
The specific reception state can occur while the operation target display is not displayed using the specific display area , and when the specific reception state occurs, the reception validity determination is permitted. or an acceptance acceptance sound that suggests that the acceptance validity determination will be allowed,
In the specific reception state, a first specific allowable section in which the reception validity determination is allowed while the operation target display is not displayed using the specific display area, and the operation target display is the specific display. and a second specific allowable section in which the acceptance validity determination is permitted in the display using the area, and in the second specific allowable section, the degree of expectation that the determination result is the special result The operation target display can be displayed using the specific display area in any one of a plurality of different aspects of
When the reception validity determination is made in the first specific allowable section in the specific reception state, the operation target display is moved to the specific display area at the time when the change after reception according to the reception validity determination is started to be executed. is not displayed using , but when the acceptance validity determination is made in the second specified allowable interval, the operation target display is changed to the specified is displayed using the display area of
moreover,
a holding storage means capable of storing determination information used for determination by the determination means;
symbol variation execution means capable of selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination information stored by the reserve storage means and executing symbol variation in the selected variation pattern;
with
The plurality of reception states further include a special reception state,
The special acceptance state is a case in which specific BGM is audibly output after a predetermined time has passed since the execution of symbol variation in the first variation pattern is started, and a second variation pattern different from the first variation pattern. There are both cases where the specified BGM is in an inaudible state when a specified period of time has elapsed since the start of execution of the symbol variation in the second variation pattern,
moreover,
When the special reception state occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output and the reception validity determination is made in the special reception state; In the case where a reception state occurs and the reception validity determination is made in the special reception state, the same aspect can appear as the change after the reception.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to this invention, it is possible to suppress a decline in amusement in a game.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with a door frame opened from a main body frame and a main body frame opened from an outer frame; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the rear; FIG. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled an outer frame and was seen from the front. (a) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. be. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper hinge member; Fig. 10 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the body-side upper hinge member is attached to the; It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect|action of the locking member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19; FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 19; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit in a door frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit, which is disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is a front view of the production operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (a) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production|presentation operation unit from the back. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends; FIG. 34(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a). FIG. 34B is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production|presentation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, which is exploded and viewed from the front; FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which an operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37; (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a portion of the operation button is cut away to show the portion that is to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of an operation button to be hidden by a first button decorative portion, a button frame, or the like in a cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. . (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. is a perspective view. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame left side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 47(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL. (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door-frame right side unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). 51(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a front perspective view of the door frame top unit, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the door frame top unit. is. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the door frame top unit, and was seen from the back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. 56; It is a front view of a game board. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63, viewed from behind; FIG. It is an explanatory view showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63 as seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind; It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input to and output from a game ball lending device connection terminal plate that relays electrical connections between a payout control board that constitutes the main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 69; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU; FIG. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control part. It is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram continued from FIG. 75; It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows a power failure monitoring circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an inter-board communication interface circuit between a main control board and a peripheral control board; FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit etc. of a payout control part. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram continued from FIG. 81; It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. 4 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit; FIG. 4 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the arrangement of output terminals on an external terminal plate; 4 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 4 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board; FIG. 90 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board in FIG. 89 to the peripheral control boards; FIG. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of connection recovery processing; 4 is a timing chart for explaining the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC for the upper tray liquid crystal; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a special design and special electric accessary goods control processing (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process (step S5232). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage process (step S5234). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S5238). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing symbol determination tables. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process (step S5281). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation process (step S5283). It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal design and normal electric accessary goods control processing (step S116). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing (step S5402). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (step S5403). It is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by a fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control using a fixed channel method; It shows the relationship between the game state, the playback sound, and the playback channel. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production|presentation time chart. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of sound control by an automatic channel method as the embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method; It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state, a reproduction sound, and a priority. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a production|presentation time chart. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of automatic channel control work information stored in an AUTO group channel control work area provided in a peripheral control RAM; It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128, notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions). (a) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. is a diagram. (b) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (c) is an example of processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. It is a figure which shows. (a) is a diagram showing an example of processing when output conditions (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group are satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced; is. (b) is a diagram showing an example of processing when output conditions (state detection) for the notification sound belonging to the third notification group are satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced; is. (c) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced; is. (d) is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced; is. 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; 4 is a time chart showing one example of a mode of notifying the state of the gaming machine; It is a figure explaining separately the information state of the said pachinko machine 1 about the content of the notification process under production|presentation progress. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of channel allocation when suppressed operation sound output processing is performed; FIG. It is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of the game machine provided with the sword effect operation unit. It is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of the production pattern in the production mode in which the sword drawing production can be executed, (A) showing an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword drawing preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) shows an example of a selection table for selecting whether or not to draw the sword. FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sword portion (blade portion) itself, (A) sword drawn state, (B) first sword drawn state, (C) second. Indicates the sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; FIG. 4 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sheath, showing (A) the sword drawn state, (B) the first sword drawn state, and (C) the second sword drawn state. FIG. 4 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member; It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production|presentation display apparatus in the princess ready-to-win production, and the operation|movement transition of the sword decoration. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of the operation buttons, and movement transitions of the sword ornament in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons used in many ways. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device, state transitions of operation buttons, and movement transitions of sword ornaments in the ready-to-win effect. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword ornament used for pseudo-continuous effect. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is operational during the ready-to-win effect by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. 10 is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed. FIG. As with the first suggestion pattern described above, when it is determined that either the operation button or the sword decoration is to be operated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Although the second suggestion pattern is performed as a pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration does not become operationally valid, and the operation button becomes operationally valid once, and then the sword decoration becomes operationally valid. It is a figure which shows about the suggestion production|presentation before operation of a pattern. It is a figure which shows the 1st production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 1st production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 2nd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the 3rd production|presentation aspect regarding specific operation-related production|presentation. It is a figure which shows another example of specific operation-related production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect when a “specific operation-related effect” is set as the effect target of the timer effect; 4 is a time chart for explaining an example of performance contents for each type of performance when a plurality of types (forecast performances A, B1, B2, and C) are prepared as portent performances. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and the effect content when a predictive effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of the contents of an effect when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which a button image BTG is displayed in a mode (specific effect mode) with a princess character added; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a player makes an operation error between a first operation mode and a second operation mode in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when a player makes an operation error between a first operation mode and a second operation mode in an effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode; It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation when a 1st omen production|presentation is performed. It is a time chart which shows the example of a production|presentation when a 1st omen production|presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation which an expectation level is shown by an automatic production|presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation which an expectation level is shown by an automatic production|presentation function. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the production|presentation which an expectation level is shown by an automatic production|presentation function. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation unification control in an automatic button presentation state; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation unification control in an automatic button presentation state; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining operation unification control in an automatic button presentation state; It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the details of processing when a timing tm1 at which a new pattern variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing processing details when timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state; FIG. It is a time chart for explaining a mode when a new restoration operation timing (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during the execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart for explaining a mode when a new restoration operation timing (start timing, end timing, etc. of symbol variation) arrives during the execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to its original position. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a state transition is carried out between a non-game state and a game execution state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example when an expected effect is performed in which a princess character is displayed large as a background image during execution of a specific effect pattern. 201 is a diagram showing a display example when a help image is displayed in the state where the expected effect shown in FIG. 200 is being performed; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by the player's operation; It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when generating the production restriction period in the non-gaming state. FIG. 10 is a time chart for explaining an example of the process when the effect restricted period is terminated early; FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the process concerning a special period (period only for opening of a store). It is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started during the opening dedicated period (special period). It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1st operation reception production|presentation. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2nd operation reception production|presentation. It is a time chart which shows the example about special operation acceptance production|presentation. 4 is a time chart showing how channels of sound data including acceptable sounds are allocated. 4 is a time chart showing how channels of sound data including acceptable sounds are allocated. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of the production|presentation when the low expectation suppression reception production|presentation is performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of the production|presentation when high expectation suppression reception production|presentation is performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the content of the production|presentation when high expectation suppression reception production|presentation is performed by an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the modification when high expectation suppression reception production|presentation is performed by an automatic reception mode. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which a first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when an “unsuppressed operation acceptance effect (here, unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect)” is generated; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which a “weakly suppressed mode” and a “strongly suppressed mode” are sequentially generated in the effect according to the high expectation fluctuation pattern; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which a “weakly suppressed mode” and a “strongly suppressed mode” are sequentially generated in the effect according to the high expectation fluctuation pattern; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which a “weakly suppressed mode” and a “strongly suppressed mode” are sequentially generated in the effect according to the high expectation fluctuation pattern; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of a presentation (restricted movement acceptance presentation) that appears in the suppression/automatic acceptance presentation "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target". FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when variation pattern 1 is selected in variation pattern determination; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when variation pattern 2 is selected in variation pattern determination; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when variation pattern 3 is selected in variation pattern determination; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the content of effects that appear when the "implicit reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "unsuppressed mode"; 4 is a time chart conceptually showing an example of a processing procedure when realizing various display effects using scenario data and blocks; It is a flowchart which shows the example about the process when there is no operation detection before and after the production|presentation reception period (effective period). 227 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the "m+1"-th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226; FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2”-th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226; FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2”-th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226; FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m−3”-th frame in the effect accepting period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226; Regarding the effect acceptance period (effective period) when the timing of "operation (setting) the operation status flag to ON state" in the frame is performed after the "judgment process related to the effect reception" It is a flow chart which shows an example. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated model image from the start to the end of the effective period; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of an integrated model image from the start to the end of the effective period; It is a figure which shows the example about the progress of production|presentation when a 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production|presentation progress when a 1st valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production|presentation progress when a 1st valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production|presentation progress when a 1st valid period occurs. It is a figure which shows the example about the progress of production|presentation when a 2nd valid period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second validity period occurs. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the presentation that indicates the degree of expectation for the integrated model image in stages. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an integrated model image; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of progress of rendering during an effective period in which an integrated model image is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of progress of rendering during an effective period in which an integrated model image is displayed; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of progress of rendering during an effective period in which an integrated model image is displayed; FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of the content of effects when the second acceptance allowable state occurs; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of the content of effects when the first acceptance allowable state occurs; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content when the second reception permission state occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the effect content when the first reception permission state occurs; It is a time chart which shows an example of the content of the presentation when the fourth reception permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the content of the production|presentation when the 5th reception permission state generate|occur|produces. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a first reception period (first reception effect) occurs as a result of determination that a first condition is satisfied; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a second reception period (second reception effect) occurs as a result of determination that a second condition is satisfied; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a third condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a third reception period (third reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a fourth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing an example of the content of effects when a fifth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a sixth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs; FIG. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing an example of effect contents when a seventh condition is satisfied as a result of determination and a seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 2nd reception period (2nd reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which a 2nd reception period (2nd reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which 4th reception period (4th reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which 4th reception period (4th reception production|presentation) generate|occur|produces. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. This is a modified example of the presentation regarding the acceptance period. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the reception period B (reception effect B) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the content of the effect when the reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. It is a time chart showing an example of the content of the effect when the reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. FIG. 10 is a table showing a setting example related to conditions for occurrence of reception periods A to D; FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which reception period A (reception production|presentation A) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which reception period B (reception production|presentation B) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which the reception period C (reception production|presentation C) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which the reception period D (reception production|presentation D) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the variation pattern which the reception period E (reception production|presentation E) generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation in the reception period E. FIG. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 2B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 3B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which the 3B acceptance period generate|occur|produces. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1B acceptance period occurs; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 3B acceptance period occurs; It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 2C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3C acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows the example about the 3C acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1C acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 1C acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a figure which shows the example of the production|presentation of the variation pattern which 2C acceptance period generate|occur|produces. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of the effect of the variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 1C acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing another example of a variation pattern in which the 3C acceptance period occurs;

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the body frame and the body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame, game board, main body frame and outer frame and viewed from the front. FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear after being disassembled into two parts; FIG.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls are hit by.

The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 20 are connected to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 .

The outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front. and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 . The body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a vertically extending rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating back and forth, and a through hole of the door frame base unit 100.例文帳に追加A handle unit 300 which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to hit a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the plate unit 320 and a plate unit 320 attached to the center of the plate unit 320. According to the game state that changes when a game ball is hit into the game area 5a, the player can A performance operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory performance, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320. , a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, a door frame left side unit 530, and a door frame right side unit 550. and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame base unit 100 .

The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 consists of a frame-shaped body frame base 600 which can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the body frame base 600. It is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the side lower hinge members 150 are rotatably attached, a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and a main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 for hitting a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600, which is attached to the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and a locking unit 700 for locking between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse side mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in the front view to pay out game balls to the player side. An L-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable and attached to the main body frame base 600. and a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the.

The dispensing unit 800 of the main body frame 4 includes an inverted L-shaped dispensing unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a dispensing unit base 801 attached to the top of the dispensing unit base 801 and extending to the left and right to open upward. A box-shaped ball tank 802 for storing game balls supplied from an island facility (not shown), and a ball tank 802 attached to a payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 in front view and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 are detachably attached to the lower side of the payout unit base 801 and paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. and a payout device 830 attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 to guide the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward and to release the game balls according to the state of storage of the game balls on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. An upper full ball path unit 850 that discharges from either a normal discharge port 850d or a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801 and discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 A normal guiding path 861 that guides game balls forward and guides them from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and guides forward game balls released from the full tank release port 850e to guide the game balls forward and guides the game balls forward from the front end to the full ball passage 273 of the door frame 3. and a lower full ball path unit 860 having a full guideway 862 leading to the tank ball receptacle 274 .

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a lower part for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921 , a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and accommodates the power supply board inside, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920 . An interface control board box 940 housing an interface control board inside, and a payout control board 951 mounted across the power board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 to control the payout of game balls are housed therein. A payout control board box 950 is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of a game area 5a into which game balls are hit, and shoots game balls from the ball launching device 680 into the upper portion of the game area 5a. A front structural member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that guide to the front, and a flat plate-like game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. there is

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a player rotates the handle 302 while game balls are stored in the upper tray 321, the ball launcher 680 shoots the game ball with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 . Then, when the game balls hit into the game area 5a are accepted by the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 by the paying-out device 830 according to the accepted winning openings. Since the payout of the game balls can enhance the interest of the player, the game balls in the upper tray 321 can be hit into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 16(a) is a perspective view of the upper hinge member on the outer frame side of the outer frame, omitting the left frame member, as viewed from below, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) exploded. It is a diagram. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are separated vertically and extend left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 are connected to each other. and a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending to. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear width. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 . Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the laterally outwardly facing side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are flush with each other. It is

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in a front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 .

In addition, the outer frame 2 includes a panel member 50 attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 by connecting the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, and attached to the rear side of the panel member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively; a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 at a position to the left from the center of the left and right; A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 . The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. In addition, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hooking member 90 and a lower hooking member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side) of the right frame member 40 and engage an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 which will be described later. , is equipped.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
An upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. Upper lateral fixing portions 87 of an upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch portion 11. As shown in FIG. In addition, the upper frame member 10 has mounting steps 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end in front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12 .

[2-2. Lower frame member]
A lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is made of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that its lateral length and vertical thickness are the same as those of the upper frame member 10, and its front and rear width is equal to that of the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the front and back width of the . The lower frame member 20 has engagement cutouts 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear than the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right ends. In the engaging notch portion 21, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of a left lower connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is attached.

In addition, the lower frame member 20 has front end notches 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20 , the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10 . When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2 , the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the panel member 50 .

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed by extrusions of metal such as aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position rearward of the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the lateral outer side surfaces. It has concave portions 31 and 41, and protruding portions 32 and 42 which protrude from the side surfaces opposite to the concave portions 31 and 41 and have hollow interiors. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42 . Further, lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 are inserted and attached into the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively.

In addition, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. When the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility such as a game hall or is transported by the plurality of grooves, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be enhanced.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extension portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape with a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically in a size that allows a game ball to pass through on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension part 51, A vertical wall portion 54 extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 51, and a front surface bulging forward from near the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54. and a return portion 55 that inclines toward the rear as it goes toward.

The curtain plate member 50 is mounted on the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 on the front side and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51 . A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position that coincides with a later-described discharge hole 74 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2 . Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in the assembled state with the outer frame 2 . The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52 .

Further, the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 on the right side of the rear extension portion 51 is inclined so that the front end side is lower. The curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the top surface, and a right mounting portion 56 for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the top surface. a portion 57; The bottom surface of the body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82 .

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Although not shown, the panel member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper fixing portion 61 extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. , a bearing groove 63 extending from the right end of the forward extending portion 62 to the center of the front extending portion 62 toward the front and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61 in plan view. A flat plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the left end of the forward extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 opens around the front end thereof. A flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 is provided (see FIG. 16(b), etc.).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). there is Further, the forward extending portion 62 extends forward beyond the front end of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the horizontal fixing portion 64 is inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above and fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to move the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 consists of a band plate-shaped lock body 66a extending forward and backward with a predetermined width on both sides and an operation portion projecting rightward from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a and then obliquely forward left, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d and. This lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the forward extending portion 62 of the outer-frame-side upper hinge member 60 with a mounting screw 67 .

The rear end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is attached to a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the forward extending portion 62 of the outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. Further, when the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. The hanging portion 65 of 60 extends forward so as to come into contact with the portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a abuts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame upper hinge member 60. As shown in FIG. The lock member 66 is biased in a direction in which the front end thereof rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 near the front end is in contact with the drooping portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space capable of accommodating a body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620, which will be described later, is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. By operating the operation portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in a direction in which the front end thereof moves leftward, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. can be in a state in which the As a result, the main frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63 or removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 includes a flat plate-like horizontal portion 71 extending horizontally and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 which is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A raised plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 are penetrated vertically so that only one game ball can pass through. and a sized discharge hole 74 . The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a leftward position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 . The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 in an inverted U shape. This discharge hole 74 is formed to have approximately the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 .

When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the panel member 50 and the rear extension portion 51 . is fixed to the panel reinforcement member 80 by a screw (not shown) passing through the upper surface of the panel member 50 . When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 . In cooperation with the hinge member 60, the body frame 4 can be attached so that it can be opened and closed.

In addition, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 . Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 . More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 move between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the gap between the two gradually narrows, the ball rolls to the rear side where the gap is wide, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 74 . At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the body frame 4 when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. A game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is discharged from the discharge hole 74 so that it can be easily prevented from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for a game ball to stay at the part of the lower hinge member 70.例文帳に追加

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting members 85 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connection member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40. As shown in FIG.

The connection member 85 includes a flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-like upper lateral fixing portion 87 extending upward from one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the horizontal fixing portion. A flat plate-like lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion of 86 from which the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends is provided. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. extending downwards. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10 . The upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10 . Further, the front lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw that is inserted into the projecting portions 32, 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes further rearward than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and further protrudes further than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the left lower connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 projecting from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. As shown in FIG. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20 . Also, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notch portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the lateral end surfaces of the lower frame member 20, respectively. be.

[2-9. Lock Mechanism of Upper Hinge Member on Outer Frame Side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the locking mechanism of the lock member 66 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. will be described with reference to FIG. 17(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed from the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an outer upper side view. FIG. 4 is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which a body-side upper hinge member is attached to a hinge member; 18A and 18B are explanatory diagrams showing the action of the locking member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a is adapted to block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V-shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

The support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a is mounted. is close to the right drooping portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right drooping portion 65, and they are in contact with each other). ), the centers of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally shifted and opposed to each other. state.

In this normal axially supported state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 that supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of lock body 66a. In other words, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. As shown in FIG. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 can be smoothly rotated when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. there is Also, in the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is applied with an acting force F in a direction to pull out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and comes into contact with the arc-shaped front end face of the lock body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is the component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the arc-shaped front end face, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. and the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). , the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 does not rotate in the direction away from the right drooping portion 65, and the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is positioned between the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surfaces is maintained.

For this reason, even in a normal axially supported state or a state in which the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always subjected to a load, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c, and prevent the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 from falling out of the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the rightward direction by applying an excessive force, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts the drooping portion 65 and cannot move further. Since it does not rotate, the locking member 66 does not protrude outside the front extending portion 62 .

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the front end of the lock member 66 may be positioned toward the outside of the front extending portion 62 so that no rotational moment is generated by the action of the force component F1. By locating the center of rotation of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts the hanging portion 65 , so the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62 .

When the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 supports the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert hinge pin 622 . When the main body frame hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the main body frame hinge pin 622 contacts the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is pushed against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates around the mounting screw 67 so as to move leftward. As a result, the lock body 66a closing the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, so that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is released by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to its normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is accommodated in the space on the front side of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63 , and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can rotate in the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 . state is held (locked).

When removing the body frame upper hinge pin 622 from the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock body 66a moves leftward, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63 .

[2-10. Crime Prevention Mechanism and Ball Engagement Prevention Mechanism at the Location of the Lower Hinge Member on the Outer Frame Side]
Ball biting prevention for preventing a game ball from being caught between a crime prevention mechanism at a portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be explained.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the front view left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. As shown in FIG. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer-frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the panel member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51 . The curtain plate member 50 has a standing wall portion 54 rising upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, Since the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, further insertion of the unauthorized tool to the rear side can be prevented. , tampering through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with a return portion 55 extending forward, when an unauthorized tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 bends the tip of the unauthorized tool. can be further folded forward, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and fraudulent actions can be performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side. can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side in a state where the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When dropped onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not ejected backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54. There is a risk of being caught between On the other hand, in this embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extension portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 are provided with a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass. , and the right ejection hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be ejected downward from the ejection hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be ejected downward. It is possible to reduce the pinching of the game ball between.

Therefore, if a game ball is caught between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 may be damaged, or the main body frame 4 may not be closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the body frame 4 and fraudulent acts using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. FIG. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-section cut along line CC in FIG. It is a diagram. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into the main members and viewed from the back.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 has a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100. a handle unit 300 attached to the door frame base unit 100, a plate unit 320 attached to the front lower portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. A door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 attached to the front upper portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 .

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions, and has a vertically extending rectangular (quadrangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, although the details will be described later. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closing the through hole 111, a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, The door frame 3 and the body frame 4, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110 and can be opened and closed, and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked. a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball shooting device 680; and a ball shooting device 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. and a foul cover unit 270 for receiving a game ball which is shot by and does not reach the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower tray 322. - 特許庁

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 rotates the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, which will be described later in detail. The ball can be hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong force.

The plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to a portion below the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. A production operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 includes an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be hit into the game area 5a, and an upper plate 321 arranged below the upper plate 321 for receiving game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored, an upper tray ball extraction button 327 for extracting game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and within the range of the balance of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending game balls to the player, a return button 329 for returning the cash or prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game balls lent from the ball lending machine, and the cash put into the ball lending machine. , a ball rental/return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player when presenting an effect, A lower tray ball ejection button 333 for discharging game balls downward from the tray unit 320 is provided.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is possible. Although details will be described later, the effect operation unit 400 includes a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so as to be visible from the player side and can display the effect image. and a display device 460 .

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320 and to the left of the through hole 111 in the through hole 111 ( It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described later in detail, is attached to the front right portion on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320, and the through hole 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes farther forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides, and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided at the front end. A right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although details will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center of the front surface, and left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 with light emission.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31-33. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. Fig. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable (hinge rotatable) so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the body frame 4 . The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower corner of the front surface, a plate unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame right side unit 550 and a door frame top unit 570 are attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111 and the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front and having a through hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. , a frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a frame-like reinforcing unit 130 attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, projecting forward from the door frame base 110 and projecting from the main body frame 4. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the door frame base 110 and the front surface of the through hole 111. A door frame left side decorative substrate 160 mounted on the left side of the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a glass unit 190 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 are detachably mounted. and a glass unit mounting member 170 for.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner in front view, and is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a cylindrical handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 for closing the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 for covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening/closing cylinder unit attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210 , a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, pressure detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , the upper speaker 573 , etc., and a door body relay board for relaying connection with the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4 .

[3-1a. door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. The door frame base 110 has a quadrangular (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. The door frame base 110 penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a through-hole 111 formed in a generally rectangular shape extending vertically in the inner peripheral shape when viewed from the front. The through-hole 111 has an upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner circumference thereof, and is close to the outer circumference of the door frame base 110 , and a lower side forming the inner circumference extends vertically from the lower end of the door frame base 110 . It is located at about 1/3 of the height of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole with the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear directions. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 has a handle mounting seat surface 112 which is formed at the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and is inclined so that the left end side projects slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112 and a through hole 111. A cylinder mounting portion 113 to which a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted is recessed from the rear surface toward the front near the right end in front view between the and the cylinder mounting portion 113, and the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates in the front and rear at the cylinder mounting portion 113. The cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrated in the front-rear direction on the left side of the front view. and a ball feed opening 115 for facing the ball.

In addition, the door frame base 110 penetrates in the front and rear direction at a position on the left side of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. A passage opening 116 for a lower tray and a through-ball passage 273 of a foul cover unit 270 are penetrated in the front-rear direction so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through-opening 111 near the left end of the door frame base 110 in front view. A plate passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner circumference of the through opening 111 and into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and both upper left and right sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion opening 119 penetrates in the front and rear direction at the corner and through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. reinforcement unit]
The reinforcement unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (the door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 extending to the left and right and attached along the upper edge of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 , and a middle reinforcing sheet metal extending to the left and right attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 . A sheet metal 132, a vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the front view left side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a vertically extending right reinforcement sheet attached along the front view right side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A metal plate 134 and a lock engaging portion 135 that is attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing metal plate 134 and engages the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 .

In the reinforcement unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. Fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 which will be described later. Therefore, the reinforcement unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the lock engaging portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch 132a penetrating back and forth at a position corresponding to the upper tray passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110 .

Although not shown in detail, the reinforcement unit 130 includes an upper reinforcement sheet metal 131, a middle reinforcement sheet metal 132, a left reinforcement sheet metal 133, and a right reinforcement sheet metal 134, each of which has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part not only increases the strength and rigidity, but also prevents unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flathead screwdrivers from entering from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 includes a door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a pair of projecting pieces 141a that are separated vertically, and a pair of projections of the door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 that passes through the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a on the door frame upper hinge pin 142. A disc-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame, which is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower projecting piece 141a of the pair of projecting pieces 141a. and a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece connecting the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. It is shaped like a letter. The door-frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece that connects a pair of protruding pieces 141a and is attached to the rear surface of the door-frame base 110 with screws.

The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) that protrudes upward from the upper projecting piece 141a. Further, although illustration is omitted, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower projecting piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. This bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, thereby restricting upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. As shown in FIG.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer circumference of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 . The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has its upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and its lower end in contact with the lower projecting piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed in a compressed state between the flange member 143 and the projecting piece 141a on the lower side, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

In the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by a lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door-frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

When an operator holds the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a. Therefore, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 can be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 or removed downward. can be done. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame upper hinge member 140 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame upper hinge member 620, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view is moved. , can be hinge-rotatably supported with respect to the body frame 4 .

Further, in the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140, a portion of the door-frame-side upper hinge pin 142 supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door-frame-side hinge shaft bracket 141 is attached to the door frame of the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150, which will be described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152 . As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state by the door-frame-side upper hinge member 140 and the door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 .

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door-frame-side lower hinge member 150 includes a door-frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that is attached to the door-frame base 110 and has a flat plate-like extension piece 151a that extends forward, and A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) projecting downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a horizontally extending flat plate-like extension piece 151a. is formed in a substantially L shape. The lower door frame hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

The lower door frame hinge pin 152 has a truncated cone shape that narrows downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 to be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 .

The door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 . can support

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative board 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side of the door frame base 110 in the front view to the height near the center of the through opening 111 in the vertical direction. A frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and a door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the position below the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper tray passage opening 117 a substrate 162;

A door-frame left-side upper decorative board 161 and a door-frame left-side lower decorative board 162 of the door-frame left-side decorative board 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of emitting light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is positioned behind a door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, with the door frame 3 assembled, and has a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110 and is used to detachably mount the glass unit 190 . The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base portion 171 mounted rotatably about an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-like member protruding from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. and a protrusion 172 that

The glass unit mounting members 170 are rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the rear. In this position, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 or removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118 .

With the glass unit 190 inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 , the glass unit mounting member 170 rotates so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 . The rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 is brought into contact with the rear side of the glass unit 190 to restrict the upper portion of the glass unit 190 from moving rearward.

The center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is positioned within the projecting portion 172 because the protruding portion 172 protrudes from the disk-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110 . . Therefore, when the glass unit mounting member 170 is freely rotatable, the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171 and is stable. In the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is restricted by the projecting portion 172. Even if the member 170 is subjected to vibration or the like, the whole does not rotate so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is not naturally released. do not have.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110 .

[3-1g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 . 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and a rear end of the tube portion 181 extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An extended annular flange portion 182 and a plurality of ( In this example, three) ridges 183 and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 112 with screws while the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 .

The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300 . One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side inside the tubular portion 181 and the remaining two are provided on the lower side inside the tubular portion 181 . These three ridges 183 are formed in the handle base 301 at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c. Therefore, in the handle mounting member 180, the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be regulated.

Since the axis of the cylindrical portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the cylindrical portion The axis 181 is tilted so as to extend forward right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a similarly tilted state.

[3-1h. glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 includes a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118 , and a glass frame that closes the inside of the glass frame 191 and has a glass frame on the outer periphery. and two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191 . The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26, etc.).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of flat mounting pieces 191a extending outward from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band projecting downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. and a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. A mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can abut against a projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 . The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

This glass unit 190 is obtained by inserting the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the reinforcing sheet metal 132 in the reinforcing unit 130 from above. , the front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projecting portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface of the door frame base 110 .

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the procedure can be reversed. Thereby, the glass unit 190 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 110 .

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The crime prevention cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 projecting short rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201, and is spaced apart from the left and right. and a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the body portion 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 .

The body portion 201 of the crime prevention cover 200 is formed such that its lower end protrudes downward beyond the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110 . Further, the upper end of the body portion 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a on the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. More specifically, the upper end of the body portion 201 is shaped along a portion of an inner rail 1002, an out guide portion 1003, a portion of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed along substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201 . Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed into a shallow box-like shape that is opened rearward by the body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the body portion 201 that is different from the outer peripheral edge of the body portion 201 . A rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body part 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front structural member 1000 of the game board 5 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. ing.

Note that the rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion positioned between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 . As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball shot by the ball shooting device 680) does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is within the game area 5a. It does not interfere with hitting the game ball into.

A pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110 . Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110 .

When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 abuts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the part protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is The removed rear projecting piece 202 is inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. In addition, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open/close cylinder unit]
The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 positioned between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the vicinity of the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4.

The opening/closing cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 to rotate a key inserted into the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits rotation to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can be rotated by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of .

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at opposite positions across the central axis from the rear end to the front. It has a pair of cutouts 212a that are cut out in the same direction. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the body frame 4 can be inserted from behind, and projections of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 are inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted into the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the lock unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and has a convex shape that protrudes forward when viewed from above. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of flat plate-like side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. and a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape from the respective rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b in directions away from each other. The cylinder lock 211 penetrates the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. Of the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side in front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side in front view is attached to the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 . As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 .

When the opening/closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100 , the front end of the cylinder lock 211 projecting forward from the front plate portion 213 a of the cylinder mounting plate 213 extends from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the cylinder insertion hole. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110. A front plate portion 213a and a pair of side plate portions 213b of a cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is open rearward. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. FIG. 34(a) is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Also, FIG. 35(a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 34(a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 34(b). FIG. 39(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34(b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. is.

The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape, and the central side except for the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and the production operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decoration board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415 with light emission, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having an operation button 410 and a decoration board unit 420 attached to the front side, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410 and effecting A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image is provided.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42(a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 42(b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the rear. The operation button 410 has a circular outer shape with a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the plate unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface (a shape of a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the center side bulges forward. It has an annular button frame 412 attached thereto, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are made of a member that does not easily transmit light.

The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed to have a smooth curved surface without unevenness on the front side. The button lens 411 extends for a predetermined length toward the center (inner side) in a recessed state with a W-shaped cross section from the rear surface of the button frame 412 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A first button decorative portion 411a extends on an axis toward the center in a recessed state with an arcuate cross section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side of the first button decorative portion 411a, and is arranged in a circumferential direction within a predetermined angular range. and a plurality (six) of second button decoration portions 411b provided.

As shown in the drawing, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends toward the center from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer toward the center than

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 each extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three each on the left and right sides. These second button decorative portions 411b are formed to face from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward such that the front side thereof is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exerts a lens effect of refracting light due to unevennesses having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side cannot be seen clearly.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and has a plurality (six) of frame openings 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the circumferential direction in an arc shape with a predetermined length. The six frame openings 412 a are provided three each on the left and right sides, corresponding to the six second button decorations 411 b of the button lens 411 . This button frame 412 has a plated layer with metallic luster on its surface.

The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and an annular flange portion 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c projecting rearward along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and from the rear side of the flange portion 413b along the outer periphery of the main body portion 413a. A plurality (three) of detection pieces 413d protruding rearward in a band-like shape and arranged in the circumferential direction, and a detection piece 413d extending forward and backward through the flange portion 413b outside the main body portion 413a and along the outer circumference for a predetermined length. A plurality (six) of base openings 413e are formed in the circumferential direction, and a base opening 413e extends forward from the front end of the main body 413a. and an inner extending portion 413f that narrows toward (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four upper, lower, left, and right corners with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. 413 d of three detection pieces are arrange|positioned at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two may be distribute|arranged to the upper side and one to the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main-body part 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

The six base openings 413e are provided three each on the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decorative portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. As shown in FIG. At the base opening 413e of the button base 413, part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f are recessed inward from the outer circumference. The inner diameter of the inwardly tapering front end of the inner extending portion 413 f substantially matches the inner diameter of the button frame 412 .

The front surface of the operation button 410 bulges forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), and is formed transparently. can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide bosses 413c slidably inserted into holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and an operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. is urged forward by The front side of the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 abuts against the frame unit 415 due to the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430 . By pressing against the , it moves rearward until the rear end abuts the front surface of the base unit 430 . When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413 d is detected by the pressure detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 . Detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440 means that the operation button 410 has been operated.

In addition, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 .

Further, the operation button 410 has a button lens 411 and a button frame 412 that close the front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 . A transparent portion that allows the rear to be visually recognized is formed so as to narrow from the outer periphery to the inner side with respect to the outer diameter of 410 . The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 of the base unit 430 .

In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413 a ) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and extends from the front surface of the decoration board unit 420 . It will protrude backwards. As a result, the lights emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are emitted from the button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button top interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button bottom interior of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413 . Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button It is possible to prevent the LEDs mounted on the lower interior decoration board 436 from illuminating the parts other than the part to be luminous decoration, and the luminous decoration can be performed with good appearance.

[3-4b. frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button 410 from the front side, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame main body 416 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 and having a circular central opening 416a, and frame main bodies 416 on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side to the frame, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. there is

The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A plurality (six) of outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and arranged in rows in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c having a predetermined width in the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , is equipped with The central opening 416 a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 . As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening portion 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided three each on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by frame side lenses 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

The frame main body 416 also includes a substantially tubular inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening portion 416a and the outer peripheral opening portion 416b, and has a cutout portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c. In the state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylindrical portion 416d is arranged so that the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 are respectively arranged. and partitions between the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame body 416 has a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward from the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, respectively, and are mounted to the effect operation unit mounting portions 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. As shown in FIG. The frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400) is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right portions of the pair of attachment portions 416e and cutout portion 416c.

The frame main body 416 has a metal cover on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) across the central opening 416a. A glossy plated layer is formed.

The frame side lenses 417 close outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 three each, from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 has a smooth surface without unevenness on the front side, and a plurality of unevenness along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these multiple unevennesses, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. In addition, the frame top lens 418 has a plurality of concave and convex portions extending in a zigzag pattern on the rear surface side along the periphery of the central opening 416a and arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen because light is refracted by these unevennesses.

In the frame unit 415, in a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are connected to the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420, respectively. , and the frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted thereon can be decorated with light. .

[3-4c. Decoration board unit]
The decoration board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decoration board unit of the effect operation unit, viewed from the front. The decoration board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400 .

The decoration board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 whose upper side is open, and an operation button left external decoration board 422 and an operation button right external decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. , and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 .

The substrate base 421 has an inner circumference that is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and an outer diameter that is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415 .

The operation button left external decoration board 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button left external decoration board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. and a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right external decoration board 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the board base 421 . The operation button right outer decoration board 423 has a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner periphery of the board base 421 on the front side, and a plurality of first LEDs 423a on the inner periphery of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. and a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. Both front and rear surfaces of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotating shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decoration board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400 , the rear end side of the cylindrical main body part 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421 . Further, in the decoration board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b, 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. As shown in FIG. In addition, in the state assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the frame The inner tubular portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 illuminates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 with light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated with light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b.

Further, the decoration board unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 400. FIG.

[3-4 f. Effects of production operation unit]
Operations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away to be hidden by the first button decorative portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site|part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site|part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the production|presentation operation unit. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the appearance of the production operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the effect operation unit 400. The player can be entertained by participating in the performance presented to the player by operating the button 410.例文帳に追加

The performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a total height substantially equal to the height of the portion below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 . Further, the performance operation unit 400 is formed to have a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The effect operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction under the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

The production operation unit 400 has the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326 a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 . When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is formed between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. is formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the plate unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis line CL of the transparent operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (the shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so that it moves upward as it goes forward. Thus, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is placed above the plate unit 320 (the effect operation unit 400). Since it is positioned in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes through the vicinity of the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 inside the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in good condition.

The effect operation unit 400 has four guide bosses 413c of the operation button 410 slidably inserted into four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and is biased forward by an operation button spring 438. As shown in FIG. In a normal state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the operation button spring 438 pushes the front end of the flange portion 413 b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 toward the frame unit 415 . It abuts on the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 (center axis line CL side). there is In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface), a portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37, etc.).

Incidentally, in this embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is set to about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) faces the frame unit with respect to the direction of the central axis CL of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front of 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 , the operation button 410 moves backward along the center axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 . When the rear end of the operation button 410 contacts the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the player presses the button lens 411 that protrudes forward in a curved surface shape (shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the performance operation button provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. likely to be To be more specific, the operation buttons for presentation in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that their central axes extend substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the presentation operation unit 400 of the present embodiment are attached. is installed with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as indicated by the white arrow in FIG. A portion of the operation button 410 away from the center axis CL is pressed.

By the way, since the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed on a flat surface to be pressed by the player, if the operation buttons are enlarged while the portions to be pressed are flat surfaces, When a part of the operation button deviated from the center is pressed, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part retreats first, and the operation button cannot retreat straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation becomes impossible.

On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (partial shape of a substantially spherical surface) that bulges forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. can be done. Therefore, even if any position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without being tilted. You can fully enjoy the performance to operate.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the board base 421 of the decoration board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is plated so that the effect operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the attachment part. , the entire effect operation unit 400 can be greatly (strongly) vibrated, and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the effect operation unit 400. - 特許庁In addition, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player pressing the operation button 410 It is possible to transmit strong vibrations to the player, and surprise the player and enjoy the performance.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 form the lower surface. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or struck, the frame is not held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i. The attachment portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the like bend downward, thereby absorbing the impact. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is regulated, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the plate unit cover 326 are attached to the effect operation unit. It is possible to avoid applying an excessive force to the portion 326a and the like, and to prevent damage to the effect operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is pressed and an effect is presented to the player, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit is not pressed. Since the 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. can be suppressed.

As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, so that the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity of the button lens 411 are higher than those of the case, and even if the button lens 411 is hit strongly, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

46, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The decoration by unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button interior decoration portion 432f, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the back side is the front side (player side). ). In addition, since the plate thickness changes in the parts where these uneven decorations are formed, the light is refracted in a complicated way, so it is difficult to see the rear side through the parts where the uneven decorations are formed. .

Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center, the first button decoration portion 411a is decorated with unevenness. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion inside the button lens 411 . Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the direction of the center axis CL), there are the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the inner decorative member 432 of the operation button. 432a, and the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap is positioned from the front side (player side) to close the gap on the outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432. can be made invisible. As a result, even if the operating button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed is provided inside the operating button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the operating button 410 from deteriorating in appearance. It is possible to prevent the player from having an unpleasant feeling, and it is possible to arrange the operation button internal decoration member 432 inside the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.例文帳に追加

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is configured such that the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 are arranged so that the outer circumference of the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is adjusted. The unit base 431, the decoration board unit 420, and the like on the rear side (back side) of the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411.例文帳に追加Specifically, in FIG. 45, the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player's side. In this way, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side and the inner side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are difficult to see and hidden. It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, in turn, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in rows in the circumferential direction. A second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 arranged inside and behind the operation button 410 extends in a modified octagonal shape around the center axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the concave-convex line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the concave-convex line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect with each other. The decoration can be shown to the player.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends). With the second button inner decoration part 432g, a deep and three-dimensional geometric pattern can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

Furthermore, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concave-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the player can see the decoration with movement, and the player can be entertained.

In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides a moving and three-dimensional decoration to the player by using the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the pachinko machine 1 can strongly attract the player's interest and have a high appeal.

In addition, in the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decorative member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button An upper interior decoration board 435 and an operation button lower interior decoration board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surfaces thereof emit light, thereby causing the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 to emit light. can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433 , the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434 , the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435 , and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 . As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are as follows. As viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is arranged inside the cylindrical main body portion 413a, so that the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body portion 413a. , only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

In addition, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 positioned near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 in the decoration substrate unit 420 is positioned behind the second button decoration portion 411b. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are arranged, and by lighting these first LEDs 422a and 423a, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission. can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are formed by the cylindrical body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. 415 and the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylindrical portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is arranged behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, the second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board A second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be decorated with light emission by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right external decoration board 423 are located between the cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lenses 417 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light. .

In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of lenses mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. , the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission. A plate-shaped light shielding wall portion 431c protrudes forward from the lower side of the portion of the base unit 430 to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to near the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the side of the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. FIG. Fig. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame left-side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door-frame left-side unit viewed from the back. FIG. 50 is a sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. 47(a). The door frame left side unit 530 is arranged above the tray unit 320 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160). It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100 . The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the left side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent property arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown), and a left unit top that is attached to the upper front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, protrudes forward in a cylindrical frame shape, and extends vertically. a decoration base 534, a left unit lower decoration base 535 attached to the front lower portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decoration lens member and protruding forward in a frame shape shorter than the left unit upper decoration base 534; A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front sides of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536 .

A left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear directions. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 has LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162). It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. The openings 531a of the left unit base 531 are formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned substantially in the vertical center when the door frame 3 is assembled. The left unit base 531 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the left unit base 531 has a left reflecting standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. As shown in FIG. ing. In the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. This reflective surface can be provided not only by forming the inner surface itself of the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 from a reflective material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflecting vertical wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a portion (left portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The left unit diffuser lens member 532 is made of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffuser lens member 532A and a lower diffuser lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a that is circular in front view and corresponds to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a rectangular lens portion that is square in front view and corresponds to the square opening 531a. and a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and square lens portion 532b. formed.

A circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged in the rear can be emitted forward in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with light emission by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c recessed rearward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , an input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and an input lens portion 532e on the rear surface that is entirely outside of the input lens portion 532e and that extends forward as it goes away from the input lens portion 532e. and a forward reflecting portion 532f that is slanted for movement.

The front diffuser lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffuser lens portion 532d has grooves recessed rearward in an arc shape in a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and a mountain portion between the grooves extends forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. In addition, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the peak portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line that divides it in the circumferential direction.

The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portions are formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a triangular cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, with peaks between grooves sharpening rearward, and is formed in a serrated shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the grooves and peaks move forward as the distance from the center increases. In addition, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that groove portions and mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with respect to the radially extending line dividing the portion in the circumferential direction. The radially extending line that divides in the circumferential direction coincides with the radially extending dividing line in the front diffuser lens portion 532d.

When this rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately behind the input lens portion 532e.

Light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input into the square lens portion 532b from the input lens portion 532e. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges rearward into a curved surface (convex lens shape), it refracts the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a so that it travels forward in parallel. Almost all of the light can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is directed perpendicularly to the longitudinally extending axis (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. direction), and travels outward along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b from the center side. Also, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected outward from the central side in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame reaches the saw-shaped forward reflecting portion 532f, it is reflected forward by the surface of the forward reflecting portion 532f. reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as it moves away from the center. (see Figure 50). As a result, light that is reflected outward over the entire thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwardly reflected by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. can be reflected.

The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions. light can be emitted substantially uniformly forward (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) from the front surface of the .

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then forming a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as boundaries. are shifted in the radial direction, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern of light and shade. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light forward with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multifaceted decorative portion in front of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 . The left unit decorative lens member includes a circular decorative portion formed in a portion positioned in front of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and a portion positioned in front of the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. and a multifaceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts arranged in a vertical direction on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles arranged in a vertical direction on both sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is shaped like this. The circular decorative portion and the multifaceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multifaceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 of the door frame right side unit 550, respectively.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536 . In addition, the left unit decorative lens member is configured such that the circular decorative portion is projected forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532, and the multifaceted decorative portion is projected forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. By the light irradiated to each of them, they are decorated with light emission.

The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in the shape of a rectangular tube extending back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 has a portion forming a lower surface on the outer periphery, which is inclined so as to protrude downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is made of an opaque member.

The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed in a U shape that opens upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined from the approximate center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so that the upper side moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of an opaque member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530 . The left unit decorative cover 536 has a vertically intermediate portion that is bent rearward. A V-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535 connects the lower end of the upper V-shaped part and the upper end of the lower V-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and a.

The left unit decorative cover 536 is attached at both upper and lower ends to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is made of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 537 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is made of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. Fig. 51(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. 1 is a perspective view seen from . 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51(a). FIG. 55(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51(a), and FIG. 55(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51(a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320 .

The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the right side of the through hole 111 in the front view of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. and a door frame right side decorative board 552 attached to the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552, which is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front view center and extends in the vertical direction and the front and back direction. A transparent plate-like right unit left diffusion lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decoration member. and a transparent plate-like right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554 .

In addition, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 in front view, and on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the right side of the center in front view and the right unit left diffusion lens. A transparent plate-shaped right unit right diffusion lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and is decorated. and a right unit right cover 558 in the form of a transparent plate attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. there is

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is open on the front and right sides. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light shielding member 559 and an opaque right light shielding member 559 attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and a right unit right light shielding member 560 having a flat plate shape.

The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right diffuser having a polyhedral decoration on the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decorative lens member 561 , the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , the front end sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front and rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. and a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563 . Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting with the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 has a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The right unit base 551 is made of an opaque member.

In addition, the right unit base 551 has a right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front from the glass plate 192 disposed so as to close the through hole 111. ing. In the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568, the inner surface which has a flat planar shape and is provided so as to face the through hole 111 is provided as a reflecting surface capable of reflecting light. As with the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 itself is made of a reflective material such as metal or resin. It is also possible to provide such as by attaching a seal for use. As will be described later, the right reflecting vertical wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a portion (right portion) of the reflecting vertical wall portion 33 described above.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 includes a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a left LED 552b mounted on the center of the front surface in the left-right direction. and a plurality of medium LEDs 552c. The left LED 552 a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for lighting up the right unit left decoration member 554 via the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Also, the right LED 552b is for lighting up and decorating the right unit right decoration member 557 via the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed white on both front and rear surfaces. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is connected to the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, A plurality of notch portions 553c are cut out in a rectangular shape leftward from the right end of the rear wall portion 553b when viewed from the front, and a plurality of notch portions 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. 554, input lens portions 553e protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a and provided in a plurality in the vertical direction, and on the right side of the main body portion 553a when viewed from the front. A plurality of side reflection portions 553f are arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is positioned at the center in the vertical direction.

The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a vertically extending quadrangular shape in side view. It is formed in a shape that is slanted to move to the Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the body portion 553 a projects forward to a greater extent than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The right end of the rear wall portion 553 b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of cutouts 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of them correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . When the door-frame right-side unit 550 is assembled, the inner LEDs 552c of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 face forward from the plurality of cutouts 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light by the plurality of inner LEDs 552c. can be decorated.

The housing recess 553 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the left decorative member 554 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is vertically divided into 6 equal parts, it is formed at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a concave portion forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 553e are positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 553e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 553f are formed so that groove portions and ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with radial lines separating the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit left diffusion lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the left LED 552a is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the left LED 552a spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door-frame right-side decorative substrate 552 so as to move to the right in front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 553a through the input lens 553e hits the flat left surface of the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 553a due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the body portion 553a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 553f on the inner surface of the left surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 553f, is reflected leftward in front view, and travels outward from the left surface of the body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 passes through the main body portion 553a and is irradiated to the left side. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main portion 553a and the light emitted rightward from the side reflecting portion 553f are emitted from the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 to the left. Since the light reflected to the right and passed through the body portion 553a is irradiated to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the body portion 553a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 553f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of lines extending radially, and the plurality of concentric circular grooves are shifted in the radial direction with respect to the dividing lines to form concentric circular grooves. are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, the light emitted outward (leftward) from the left surface of the main body 553a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. This makes it possible to irradiate leftward light with more uniform intensity. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is made of a transparent member, the side reflection lens member 553 formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body portion 553a (the side where the accommodating recessed portion 553d is formed) A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of the performance presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall projecting short to the left in front view from the rear side of the main body portion 556a. 556b, a plurality of notch portions 556c that are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end of the rear wall portion 556b to the right when viewed from the front and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; A front view of a housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a and are provided in the vertical direction, and the main body portion 556a. A plurality of side reflection portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is centered in the vertical direction on the left side.

The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a vertically extending rectangular front end with an upper corner notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and a lower side extending upward toward the front. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to the right direction, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is aligned with the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so as to move leftward in the front view as it goes forward from the rear end side. Slightly slanted. The front end of the main body portion 556 a projects forward farther than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 556b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled with the door frame right side unit 550 . The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts against the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 556c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. As shown in FIG. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 . Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a square opening penetrating back and forth between the notch portion 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. is formed, and the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The housing recess 556 d has a flat bottom surface, and the shape of the outer circumference substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is vertically divided into six equal parts, it is formed at the approximate center in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e has a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending square protrudes rearward, and a recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. It has a part and a. These input lens portions 556e are positioned in front of the right LEDs 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in the assembled state of the door frame right side unit 550 respectively. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves circumferentially divided by lines extending radially from the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side farther from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape, when cut in the radial direction centered on the input lens portion 556e, formed in a sharp triangular shape in which the peaks between the grooves face toward the center. , the whole is formed in a saw-like shape. In addition, the side reflecting portions 556f are formed so that the groove portions and the ridge portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with respect to the radial line that divides the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves in the circumferential direction. ing.

In this right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is directed into the body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the light from the right LED 552b is refracted by the curved surface so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads. will be radially diffused toward the front from the center.

The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the main body portion 556a moves leftward in a front view as the whole goes forward. Light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration board 552 and incident on the main body 556a through the input lens 556e strikes the flat right surface of the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated to the outside from the left surface of the body portion 556a due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the body portion 556a, and is reflected toward the side reflecting portion 556f on the inner surface of the right surface. becomes.

The light incident forward into the body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the sawtooth side reflecting portion 556f, is reflected rightward in front view, and travels outward from the right surface of the body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 passes through the main body portion 556a and is irradiated to the right side. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected rightward by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main portion 556a and the light emitted leftward from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560. Since the light reflected to the right direction and passed through the body portion 556a is irradiated to the right side, the right decorative member 557 of the right unit attached to the right side of the body portion 556a can be decorated with good brightness. can.

In the side reflection portion 556f, the plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the plurality of concentric arc grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing lines as boundaries to form the concentric arc grooves. are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the light irradiated outward (rightward) from the right surface of the main body portion 556a is prevented from becoming light with concentric striped pattern shading. It is possible to irradiate rightward light with more uniform density. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 accommodated in the accommodation recess 556d on the right surface of the main body portion 556a can be decorated with substantially uniform light emission.

In addition, since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, it is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a in front view (the side on which the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves and radially extending lines in the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion. portion can be decorated with the side reflecting portion 556f.

The right decorative member 557 of the right unit is formed in a thin sheet shape, and decorations such as the logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in line with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is designed to have The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555 . Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 when viewed from the side. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape that is open on the front and right sides. The right unit left light shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view in a short flat shape, and a rear wall portion 559b. A plurality of notch portions 559c are cut leftward from the right end of the wall portion 559b in a front view and have a plurality of cutout portions 559c formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat reinforcement portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 has a vertically extending rectangular shape in which the upper corners on the front end side are notched obliquely in a C-chamfered shape, and the lower side extends upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 .

The left end of the rear wall portion 559b extends to the right from the approximate center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 contacts the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and some of the cutouts 559c correspond to the LEDs 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 . The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, respectively. Therefore, when the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of cutouts 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c emit light from the right unit decorative lens member 561. can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets spaced apart by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, one pair of reinforcing portions 559d having a height substantially equal to the left and right widths and spaced apart in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind a decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563 . The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are enhanced by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

The right light shielding member 560 of the right unit has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner on the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 . The right unit right light shielding member 560 closes the right opening opened to the right of the right unit left light shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 .

The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 as shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to be close to the body portions 553 a and 556 a of the left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction, forming a space extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the horizontal direction. . Through the space formed between the body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is emitted from the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

In addition, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of an opaque member, and the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 illuminate forward, respectively. The light emitted is prevented from interfering with each other. Only the middle LED 552c can be used for luminous decoration.

Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing parts 559d. It is possible to prevent light from interfering between the spaces by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, which is located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561. , can be decorated independently. In other words, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be vertically divided into a plurality of (four) areas, and each area can be illuminated independently.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and which extends short in the front-rear direction. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of rows of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts arranged vertically on the front surface of a rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of rows of polyhedrons made up of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed into a shape as shown.

More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 has a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b divided into four spaces by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d of the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three regions located in the front, the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction is provided with one multifaceted decorative portion 561b on each of the upper and lower sides. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563 . The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged in the rear.

The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shapes of the front and upper ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 . The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561 . The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550 . This right unit decorative base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 . The right unit cover 563 is made of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative members 564 extend short in the vertical direction and are attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is made of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 vertically divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four.

When the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 530 protrudes forward in a large plate shape, and slightly forward than the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. there is The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both projecting left and right sides, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. can be decorated with luminescence.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exhibit a function and effect like a partition between. As a result, the players playing the pachinko machine 1 can be given the illusion that they are playing in a private room, and the players can play in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around them. can be done.

In addition, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, in a game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the door frame right side unit 550 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the island facility can be installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where many pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not positioned near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book can be seen from a distance. The existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly appealing to the players.

Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides By making the member 561 or the like luminous and decorated in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately inform the staff of the game hall of the occurrence of the trouble and make them recognize it, so that the trouble can be dealt with quickly. Therefore, the interruption of the game by the player can be resolved early, and the player's frustration and loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. Figure 56 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is mounted above the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 .

The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the left and right sides of the center base 571 that is mounted in the center in the horizontal direction above the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 . A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and extending to the left and right, with the center in the left and right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a passing through the pair of upper speakers 573 in front of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box-like shape with an open rear, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center. It has a plurality of slits 574b (three on each side) extending vertically and penetrating them in the front-rear direction. A unit main body 271, and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Here, although illustration is omitted, the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) each have an internal space that is open only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the internal space of the opening window, the outer peripheral light emitting portion 34 (left outer peripheral outer light emitting portion 34a, right outer outer peripheral light emitting portion 34b) provided so as to emit light from outside the outer periphery into the opening window, and from inside the outer periphery of the opening window outer peripheral light detectors 35 (left outer peripheral outer light detector 35a, right outer outer light detector 35b) for detecting the light outside the outer periphery.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and is attached to the top inner decorative member 576 having translucency, and to the rear side of the top inner decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a plurality of slits 574b attached to the front surface of the unit body 271, respectively, and left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top inner decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 attached to the left and right sides and respectively covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decoration. A top center left decorative member 581, which is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each lens member 580 and extends from both left and right sides of the top center decorative member 576 to near the center side end of the opening 574a, and A top middle right decorative member 582 is provided.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inner side of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and LEDs are mounted on portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578, respectively. A door frame top left decorative board 583 and a door frame top right decorative board 584 pass through, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on both left and right sides of the center in the left and right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door attached to the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. It is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the front side of the frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, and the door frame top center left decoration board 586 and the door frame top center right decoration board 587, respectively. A pair of light blocking members 588 are provided.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 within the unit main body 271, and a central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. An attached relay board cover 590, an upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and a unit cover 591 so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. and a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271 .

A central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. The center base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of unevenness on the front surface. A pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. A pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. When the pair of upper speakers 573 are assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the respective front surfaces are obliquely attached so that the side near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone speakers capable of outputting sound over a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portions near the left and right ends of a square extending in the left and right direction bulge downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that a square extending in the left and right direction is notched with a trapezoid narrowing upward from the lower end side when viewed from the front. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right in a plan view, and a portion of about 1/2 of the total width (length in the horizontal direction) centered on the center in the horizontal direction on the front edge side of the rectangle. A trapezoid protruding forward and a quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are combined to form a shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 is arranged such that both sides of the portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface are aligned with the lines connecting the left-right end portions of the unit main body 271 and the left-right direction end portions of the front ends of the portions protruding forward. It is located posteriorly (recessed).

The unit main body 271 has openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions extending from the right and left ends of the front surface to positions outside the portions projecting forward. In addition, the unit body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend left and right at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and that penetrate in the front-rear direction at a portion that protrudes forward in a trapezoidal shape on the front surface and that extends obliquely. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend laterally from the vicinity of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271, which extends obliquely forward, to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Also, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be separated vertically by three.

The unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c formed by notching forward from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d formed by notching from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , is equipped with An upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by an upper cover 591. As shown in FIG. Also, the lower opening 574 d is closed by a lower cover 592 .

The unit main body 271 also has a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. This unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion that protrudes forward from the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a shape when viewed from the front that is a modified pentagon bent so that the center of the lower side of the substantially square in the horizontal direction is positioned downward, and extends laterally outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape as if it were a combination of a substantially right-angled triangle connecting the tip of the edge and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the modified pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The door frame top middle decorative board 577 is arranged behind the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to follow the front surface of the modified pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576 . side mounted. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top interior decoration substrate 577, and the interior top decoration member 576 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LEDs to emit light.

The light guide member 578 is made of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front surface of the unit main body 271 protruding forward. The side near the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 is defined as the end side, and the side near the center is defined as the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape with a large radius so as to move forward from the central end side of the straight portion 578a toward the central side. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b has a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction. The straight portion 578a of the light guide member 578 has a constant vertical height, and the circular arc portion 578b has a vertical height that decreases toward the center. When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. there is

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and formed of sawtooth unevenness, a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b and formed of a plurality of irregularities, It has

When the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends of the light guide member 578 face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative board 586 or the door frame top center right decorative board 587. FIG. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. As the light advances toward the center, the light is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and the portion in front of the straight portion 578a of them is decorated with light emission.

Light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 enters the light guide member 578 from a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light.

In this way, the light guide member 578 is connected to the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 , or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 . By guiding the light from the LEDs 584a and 587a, the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be decorated with good (uniform) light.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 579 a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids protruding forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574 e of the unit body 271 . That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated by the LEDs 583 a and 586 a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578 .

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271 . The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. A decorative lens portion 580 a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578 and covers the front surface and both upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578 . On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, concavities and convexities of truncated square pyramids projecting forward are arranged in rows on the left and right sides.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574 f of the unit body 271 . That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 . The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated by LEDs 584 a and 587 a of a door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and a door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578 .

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579 . The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574 a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576 . The top center right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in the state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front surface is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580 . The top center right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

The door frame top left decorative board 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted directed rightward. The door frame top left decorative board 583 has an LED 583a mounted at a position facing the left end surface of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can be made to emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted directed leftward. On the door frame top right decorative board 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can be made to emit light independently. By means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is illuminated via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The pair of board bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion in the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical with each other. The substrate base 585 has side walls that are substantially square in side view and have sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is square in front view and extends outward in the left and right direction at right angles from the rear sides of the side walls, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The line connecting the upper sides of the side walls to the middle is the oblique side, and the upper side of a substantially right-angled triangle connects the upper sides of the side wall and the back wall. and a right-angled triangular lower wall, and is formed in a triangular prism-like box shape with an open space between upper and lower oblique sides. The board base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271 . A door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or a door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left rear side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 . be done. The door frame top center left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It is in a slanted state. As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes almost parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top center left decorative board 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center left decorative board 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570 , a plurality of LEDs 586 a face forward from the three slits 574 b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 . The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to light-embellish a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top center decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 mounted on the rear side of the unit main body 271 on the right side of the left-right center so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front. be done. The door frame top center right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It becomes inclined. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b are formed on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. becomes almost parallel to .

A plurality of LEDs 587 a are mounted on the door frame top center right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit body 271 . As a result, when the door frame top center right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to light-embellish a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

A pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at positions between the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the unit main body 271 . The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top center right decorative substrate 587 which are arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. partitioning. With this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward only by the LEDs 586a and 587a positioned immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 579 can be guided forward. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily light-emitting and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. It relays the connection between the frame top center right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 . The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door main body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550 . The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590 .

The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces of both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curved backward. Therefore, the player can be given the illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest in the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted.

In addition, the door frame top unit 570 attaches the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center to the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 . It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed on both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. As shown in FIG. As a result, the front upper portion of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated with the door frame top unit 570 .

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each in the vicinity of both left and right ends where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. The speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three vertically spaced decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be listened to by the player in good condition, and the player can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

Further, the door-frame top unit 570 has a top left decorative lens member 579 and a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top right decorative lens member 580, so that the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 583 are arranged. Light from substrate 584, door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be directed to top left decorative lens member 579 and top right decorative lens member 580, and top left decorative lens member. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be well decorated with light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light-embellish the entire upper front surface of the door frame 3 including the front side of the left and right upper speakers 573 .

[3-8. Effects of door frame]
Effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a through-hole 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, which is made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than the conventional pachinko machine. , the vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 is reduced. is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , corresponds to a game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111. , and the front surface of the lower half (the portion below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front lower decorative portion 326c) is hollowed backward (dish unit 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the production operation unit 400, the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 are positioned rearward. ing. As a result, the performance operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude forward greatly, so that the performance operation unit 400 is made conspicuous and emphasized to the player. , and the effect operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

The door frame 3 tilts the performance operation unit 400 arranged in front of the plate unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large semispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation buttons 410 face the player's head (face), and the player lowers his/her line of sight and presses the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen almost in the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be strongly recognized, and the expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 can be heightened. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good condition, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 which is large in diameter and protrudes forward in a round shape and has a diameter substantially equal to the total height of the plate unit 320, the operation button 410 can be operated by moving the hand over a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is mounted in a tilted state, it can be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine. It can be operated satisfactorily even from the front or from the front, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the performance using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is attached with the effect operation unit 400 in a state of being suspended by the plate unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 for generating vibrations in the lower part of the effect operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 according to the state, a strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player is startled by pressing the operation button. The production using 410 can be made even more enjoyable.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (effect operation unit 400) extending over the entire height of the plate unit 320 at the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less conspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for players who are familiar with the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and appeal strongly attracting the interest of the players. The pachinko machine 1 with high power can be obtained.

In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that opens on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the capacity of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be sufficiently secured. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his or her left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his or her finger on the lower plate opening 326d, Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower tray 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of incongruity, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game and increasing the size of the lower tray opening 326d. The fact that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that can also be made tactilely recognizable.

Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper tray 321 are discharged to the lower tray 322, and a lower outlet for discharging game balls from the lower tray 322 to a dollar box or the like below the tray unit 320. The countersunk ball extraction hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in front view. That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outer side of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the tray unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be improved. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, in the lower tray 322 of the door frame 3, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in front of (directly in front of) the lower tray ball supply port 323c. As a result, the game ball discharged from the upper tray 321 or the like to the lower tray 322 is immediately discharged from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a to the dollar box or the like below as soon as it enters the lower tray 322. At this time, since the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like to the dollar box through the lower tray 322 also increases. can't see This allows the player to have the illusion that the game balls on the upper tray 321 or the game balls or the like paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper tray 321 being full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game (striking operation of the game ball, effect images, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In the lower tray 322, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a at a position closer to the front left of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 is erected on the right side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall part is obliquely curved to face the direction of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is directly discharged. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or it can be reflected by the wall on the right side and indirectly guided to the ball hole 322a. As a result, while the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is located in the area on the left side of the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a in the lower tray 322. (Lower tray first area A1), since it can be ejected downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 is not visible to the player. Game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a (the performance operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower tray opening 326d or puts his hand into the lower tray 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be favorably output forward, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his or her hand into the lower tray 322 or approaches it, the player can feel the vibration caused by the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921 forwardly output from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a plate-shaped right side unit 550 projecting greatly forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give the illusion that the player is there, and to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around.

Further, the door frame 3 can be decorated with light on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward. In the pachinko machine 1, even if it is not positioned in front of the pachinko machine 1, the existence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from a lateral direction along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the players. machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through hole 111, and the front surfaces of both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are The top middle decorative member of the door frame top unit 570 is more concave than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the top middle decorative member 576 can be made conspicuous and emphasized to the player, and the top can be seen to be emphasized. Strong attention can be drawn to the middle decorative member 576 .

By the way, the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine is equipped with a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other to the left and right, and the two upper speakers stand out. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 has a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal on both left and right ends. A speaker 573 is provided, and a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of a central top middle decorative member 576 through the front of a speaker cover 575 to both left and right ends are provided. The entire front surfaces of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light. As a result, the upper part of the front face of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are not conspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing to the player by allowing the player to recognize at a glance that it is there, and the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

In this way, the door frame 3 of this embodiment has the effect operation unit 400 attached to the plate unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 below and above the through hole 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward at the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to present to the player a decoration with a sense of unity in the top and bottom in which the imaginary line passing through the center in the left-right direction is conspicuous, and at the same time, the decoration gives a sophisticated feeling. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appeal.

In addition, since the door frame 3 has the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 and the production operation unit 400 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction protrude forward, the top middle decorative member 576 When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged at the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 or the like.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the part of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a into which game balls are struck by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. As shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and a front structural member 1000 that is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to cover the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that partitions, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, and the game is played by hitting the game ball into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content to be played. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (not shown).

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side performance display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions in the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to accept a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by this, and the first special lottery that is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A big prize winning opening 2005 is provided in which game balls can be accepted either according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It has an upper part 2300 and a frame-like center accessory 2500 having a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600 is provided.

Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper center attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front constituent member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65 and the like. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 and the impact part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes the outer side of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 near the lower ends thereof extending substantially vertically, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1008 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1008 projects backward from the security cover 200 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security concave portion 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire attempts to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the crime prevention concave portion 1008. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front component 1000 also has a plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002 . By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 , the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearwardly from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (the game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. FIG.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1011 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1011 is aligned with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these notches 1011 and 1127 are passed through the lower full ball path. Front end openings of a normal guideway 861 and a full tank guideway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIGS. 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

In addition, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 which are circular holes arranged near the outer circumference and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and long holes 1114 arranged near the outer circumference at the lower left portion and penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , is equipped with These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5 a and are used for positioning with the panel holder 1120 . Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging stepped portions 1115 recessed on the front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. These engaging stepped portions 1115 are cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116, the inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 detachably holds the panel plate 1110 and has a holding stepped portion 1121 recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a front-to-rear direction inside the holding stepped portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a. and a through hole 1122 penetrating through.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110 , and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the same as the panel holder 1120 . Almost flush with the front surface. Further, the holding stepped portion 1121 is formed in such a size that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 on the front inner peripheral surface thereof. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and changes over time, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding stepped portion 1121, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It extends and has a plurality of projecting pins 1123 that can be fitted into and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 . By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging stepped portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends forward from the front surface of the holding stepped portion 1121. It protrudes toward and elastically engages with the engaging stepped portion 1115 . The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120 .

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding stepped portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging stepped portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 . The engaging piece 1125 is arranged along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 on the upper side ( center side) by a predetermined amount. By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 , the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the rear lower side of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126. - 特許庁

Further, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1127 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This cutout portion 1127 is aligned with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, these cutout portions 1011 and 1127 are penetrated to form the lower full ball path unit 860. Front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full-tank guideway 862 face forward.

The panel holder 1120 also has a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front structural member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front structural member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 can be attached to the front structural member 1000. 1120 (gaming panel 1100) can be positioned.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a square insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the notch 1127 . The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129 .

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 , the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide section 1003 and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 .

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the game panel 1100 described above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel in a form different from that of FIG. 63, seen from the front together with the front structural member, the substrate holder, and the main control unit; FIG. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is made of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 described above.

The game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same outer shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000 . The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. In the game panel 1150, the rear lower side of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.例文帳に追加

In addition, the game panel 1150 has a cutout portion 1152 having the same shape as the cutout portion 1011 of the front structural member 1000 and a cutout portion 1152 which penetrates in the front-view left side of the lower end in the front-rear direction and which is open downward, and which is located above the cutout portion 1152 in the vertical direction. and a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of inner rails penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the positioning projections 1009 can be fitted in positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning projections 1009 projecting rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. A fixing hole 1154 is provided. In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating back and forth at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front structural member 1000 . By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front component 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel 1150 can be attached to the front component 1000. 1150 can be positioned.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating back and forth for mounting the front unit 2000 in the same manner as the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 described above. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 , and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front structural member 1000 . As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the rear unit 3000 can be received. It is possible to discharge downward from the discharging portion 1201 that is positioned.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, game ball payout, etc., and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

The main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When one sealing mechanism is used to close the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be traced. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

Each of the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 is provided as a transparent member so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. there is That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 have surfaces inferior in fraud prevention performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 outside the play area 5a, as shown. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing game balls through the gate section 2003. Ordinary pattern display 1402 consisting of, normal holding indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 A first special design indicator 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the first special lottery result, and a first special reservation consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the first start port 2002 A number indicator 1404, a second special symbol indicator 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, and a second start port 2004 A second special reservation number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., the big winning opening 2005 A round indicator 1407 consisting of three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern is mainly provided.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although illustration is omitted, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part for controlling effect images. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center thereof. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is capable of displaying still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves which are open on the left inner circumferential surface in a front view inside a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010 described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. The two left fixing pieces 1601 are inserted into 3010c from the oblique rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. front unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment is capable of receiving a game ball hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are located within the game area 5a. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept game balls at different positions, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball A second starting port 2004 that enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the part 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

A plurality of general winning holes 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially directly below the impact portion 1006 on the upper right side in the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate portion 2003 to the right in front view. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126 .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is attached directly above the out port 1126 at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a big winning port 2005. A start port unit 2100 and a start port unit A lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of 2100 when viewed from the front and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and a side unit attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper part 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has a gate part 2003 and a second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out port 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end portion of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starter opening unit 2100, the first starter opening 2002 opens upward to a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time, and the big winning opening 2005 receives a plurality of game balls at once ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) extend to the left and right with an acceptable size, and are formed so as to be openable and closable according to the game state.

The lower side unit 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of receiving game balls at all times.

The upper side unit 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front in the game area 5a, at the upper left side of the lower side unit 2200 in the front view, slightly below the center in the vertical direction. When the upper side unit 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball that has flowed down along the inner rail 1002 is directed to the right (game area 5a). center in the left-right direction).

The center accessory 2500 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front. installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units provided in the back unit 3000 are visually recognized from the front. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, except for the lower side, so that a game ball hit into the game area 5a is projected inside the frame. It is impenetrable.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 which is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in the front view so that game balls in the game area 5a can enter, and a game ball which has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be released into a frame. It has a warp exit 2522 that is open and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball discharged from the warp exit 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. A starting port unit 2100 is arranged directly below the stage 2530, and when a game ball is released downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the game panel 1100 . Also, behind the back unit 3000, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached.

The rear unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front. The rear wall has a square opening 3010a. A box-shaped performance drive board box 3042 is provided so as to be rotatable about an axis extending left and right along the axis and housing the performance drive board.

The back unit 3000 includes a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 from the center in the vertical direction on the left side in front view, and a back left center decoration unit 3050 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back top left movable effect unit 3200 attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side in the front view, and the back box. A back left movable production unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in the back box 3010, and a back upper middle attached from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A movable effect unit 3400 and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 are provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and a square opening 3010a penetrating through the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-like shape protruding rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a at intervals. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. , and a notch portion 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 at the center in the vertical direction of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view.

The opening 3010 a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the game board side effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface in a vertically slidable manner.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

The back unit 3000 uses a back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, a back top left movable effect unit 3200, a back left movable effect unit 3300, a back top middle movable effect unit 3400, and a back bottom front movable effect unit 3500, etc. , luminous effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented from decreasing.

[6. Game content]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are released by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , the ball passes between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game balls can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. , the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and game balls are placed on the obstacle nails. By coming into contact with the game ball, the speed at which the game ball flows down is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, it hits a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down. When the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 , it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530 .

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves left and right, and is released forward. When a game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is received by the first start hole 2002 with a high probability because it is positioned directly above the first start hole 2002. - 特許庁When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting port unit 2100. - 特許庁A game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open big winning opening 2005, or the like.

By the way, if the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the upper side unit 2300, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

On the other hand, when the game ball hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right hitting), On the downstream side, it flows through a region provided with a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 .

Then, when the right-handed game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and if the lottery result of the normal lottery is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is opened for a predetermined time ( For example, between 0.3 to 10 seconds), it will be in an open state, and the reception of game balls to the second start port 2004 is possible. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, 4) game balls are paid out to the upper tray 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. be.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0.5 hours). 01-60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the result of the ordinary lottery ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of pending lottery results is set to four, and even if the game balls pass through the gate section 2003, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 sets an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot", " A lottery for the special lottery result that generates a medium hit, a small win, a variable probability win, a reduced time win, etc. is performed. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by receiving the game ball in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", " 15R big hit”, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time saving (time reduction) hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, “probability change time saving hit”, etc.

If the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state , After the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive game balls in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When game balls are received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls are sent from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. is dispensed to the upper tray 321 . Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 can receive the game balls, by making the big winning hole 2005 accept the game balls, a lot of game balls can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

If the special lottery result is a "small win", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a predetermined short period of time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) to accept a game ball. Repeat the opening and closing pattern multiple times (eg, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of accepting game balls, or the opening to the big winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, a predetermined opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable in a closed state is set. Repeat a number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big win game, change the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn ("variable hit"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. There is a "hit" to do ("time saving hit").

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and the second Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball is accepted in the second start port 2004, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. be. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600 . The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to flash for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and a special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is variably displayed by changing each symbol row in a state in which three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction. The pattern rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stopped and displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small winning game, a big winning game, etc.) is generated according to the drawn special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (LED flashing time (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates). A longer time is set for the function display unit 1400 than the time until the finalized image is displayed.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 on the door frame 3 is displayed according to the special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc., and the game can be played by various effects. It is possible to keep the player's interest in the game from declining.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in this embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main frame 4 in this embodiment is the main unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the present invention. , the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment and the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in this embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

In addition, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in this embodiment, the main screen 471 and sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorations of the present invention, The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 each correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

Further, each LED and sub-screen decoration substrate mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the luminous body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 of the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 each correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 protruding forward in the door frame 3 is operated. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A) The peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped decoration, the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlapped decoration, etc. Since it is possible to show the player the decoration full of decorativeness with a sense of perspective, it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. The pachinko machine 1 can be made expensive.

In addition, the operation button internal decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the movement direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. As a result, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) approach or separate, A change in the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second inner button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) changes the distance between the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that overlaps the button inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) and the first button decorative portion 411a. The decoration (intersection mode) by the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral edge decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, which is the side opposite to the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the first decorative body Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the player, the distance from the button lens 411 to the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button of the operation button inner decorative member 432 The distance to the inner decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the screen is not on, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second inner button decorative portion 432g (or the peripheral edge decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) are displayed. Since the intersecting state (overlapping condition) with the decoration changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Furthermore, since the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the central side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided The operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 on the back side can be visually recognized well through the first button decoration portion 411a. The player's line of sight can be directed to the center of the button lens 411 by the decoration of , and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame It is possible to draw the player's attention to the side effect display device 460 strongly.

In addition, since the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with the second button interior decoration portion 432g having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered around the center, the button lens 411 can be seen from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, so that the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g The pachinko machine 1 can be made to have a high appeal to players by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g conspicuous. can.

In addition, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centering on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g By the decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 visible in the center of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Furthermore, each LED mounted on the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 (or the sub-screen decoration substrate 477) When the LED 477a) emits light, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) can be decorated with light emission, and the button lens 411 can also be decorated with light emission. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can also be entertained by light emission decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are operated by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decoration substrate 436 can be diffused, in the second button interior decoration portion 432g, the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, and the operation button top Direct light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 emits light for decoration. Indirect light diffused by the portion 432g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminous decoration, while the second button inner decorative portion 432g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminous-decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, the LEDs of the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, the operation button right interior decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper interior decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated. (or the LED 477a) is illuminated, and the perspective is emphasized when the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) are viewed from the outside. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing by showing the decoration to the player and strongly attracting the interest of the player.

In addition, since the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door There is no need to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move to a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to be made as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. In addition, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for movement outside the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be The pachinko machine 1 can be made highly decorative and highly appealing to attract the attention of players by improving its appearance.

In addition, since the center of the button lens 411 bulges outward, the button lens 411 has a flat shape when the player hits the button lens 411 and applies an impact to a part of the surface. Compared to the case, the applied impact force is more likely to disperse over the entire button lens 411, so the button lens 411 can be made less likely to break (be less likely to be damaged). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the breakage of the button lens 411 during the game, which interrupts the game and makes some players feel frustrated and lose interest. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the front through the through hole 111 in the door frame 3. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 protruding forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. Operation buttons 410 that are movable (advance and retreat) by being operated by the player with a circular shape of about 15 cm within a range of ~30 cm, and decoration inside the operation buttons that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation buttons 410 Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, the conventional Since the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) having as large an operation button 410 as possible can be seen at a position where the storage tray for the game balls is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see the performance operation unit 400 at a glance. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and a translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. 411b, and attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b. First LEDs 422a and 423a for decorating the second button decoration part 411b with light emission and second LEDs 422b and 423b for decorating the frame side lens 417 with light emission are provided, and the frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided. An inner cylindrical portion 416d of the frame main body 416 partitioning the decoration portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 partitioning the second button decoration portion 411b and the central side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the second LED 422b , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently decorated with light emission. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly decorated with light emission, and a good-looking light emission effect can be performed. In addition, by appropriately combining lights off, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc., for the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other, various patterns of light emission effects can be performed. This makes it difficult for the player to get bored, entertains the player, and suppresses the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the first LEDs 422a and 423a that decorate the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b that decorate the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are combined into one operation button left outer decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration part Compared to the case where 411b (operation button 410) is provided with a substrate, the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently emitted. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration portion 411b in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly decorated with light emission, the appearance of the light emission decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (the second base unit 450), the operation button left external decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 advances and retreats. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right external decorative board 423 is not bent or stretched, and disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (the second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring will not be disconnected. The player can be entertained with the luminous decoration without any problem, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

In addition, since the second button decorative portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the transparent button lens 411 can be passed through the rear operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edges of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. By appropriately lighting the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen behind. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417, which decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411, can be decorated with light emission in various patterns. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the light emission effect, the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted. It is possible to entertain the effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decorative portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the operation, the player can enjoy the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation type performance), and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, when executing the player-participation type production, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated with light emission, thereby attracting the interest of the player to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Furthermore, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the opaque main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f that can be decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a, 423a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not decorated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is brightened so that it is positioned backward. It is possible to prevent the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be decorated with light emission in a good state, and the transparent button lens 411 can pass through the transparent button lens 411 to the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with decorations, light-emitting effects, and the like, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 having the frame side lenses 417, the frame side lenses 417 and the second button decoration of the operation button 410 are arranged on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The portion 411b can be completely partitioned by the inner cylindrical portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) of the inner tubular portion 416d near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylindrical portion 416d is positioned closer to the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external decoration board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left external decoration board 422 and the operation button right external Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. never do. Therefore, it is possible to realize the pachinko machine 1 that reliably blocks the light by the inner cylindrical portion 416d and reliably exhibits the above-described effects.

In addition, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (the button lens 411), the rear side of the operation button 410 has the second button decorative portion 411b. and the central side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the body portion 413a and the inner extension portion 413f. On the other hand, the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 are located near the end (rear end) of the main body 413 a near the operation button left external decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right external decoration substrate 423 . , the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not pass through the rear end of the main body portion 413a, and light from entering the central side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is completely blocked. can be done. Therefore, the second button decoration part 411b can be illuminated in a favorable state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the transparent button lens 411 can be used to illuminate the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 ( The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be sufficiently entertained with the decoration and the light emission effect, thereby suppressing the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is placed in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is positioned, the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the door frame side second The second button decoration portion 411b can make the outside member and the rear side (back side) of the effect display device 460A) difficult to see, and the deterioration of the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented. Also, at this time, if the second button decoration portion 411b is decorated with light emission by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b is changed by the operation button interior decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made difficult to see. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player can A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b The side lens 417 has an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, it is possible to create a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player an effect, a light-emitting effect in which light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., the player can be kept from getting bored with various light-emitting effects, and the player can enjoy it. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper tray 321 used for the game by hitting the game balls stored in the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a is formed. At the same time, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and lower side of the upper plate 321 to create a mounting space of a predetermined size behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 of the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed from that portion. Since the part corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 is extended inside to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. As a result, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, when the present pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be seen at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray are vertically aligned in the conventional pachinko machine. A highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of making a player recognize that it is different from a conventional pachinko machine at a glance and strongly attracting the interest of the player. can.

In addition, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, it extends upward from the upper end of the main body vertical wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since lower tray covers 340, 340A for regulating movement of the game balls are provided, the game balls in the lower tray 322 are prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A). , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 contact or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted due to the breakage of the performance operation unit 400 (the second performance operation unit 400A), thereby preventing the player from losing interest, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Also, lower plate covers 340, 340A for restricting movement of game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j are provided in the portion of the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322. , it is possible to prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable due to the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, thereby enhancing the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 is covered by the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces within the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be reliably prevented from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. In addition, since the portion of the lower tray second area A2 of the lower tray main body 325 is covered by the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the player can easily move the lower tray main body 325 toward the lower tray first area A1 (lower tray opening). 326d) into the lower tray second area A2, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A can prevent the fingertips from entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. etc. can be prevented from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), etc., and the player can play in a safe state. can be done.

Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball against the lower plate covers 340, 340A Even if is acted, it is not transmitted from the lower tray covers 340, 340A to the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower tray second region A2 in the lower tray main body 325 of the lower tray 322, since the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. In this state, the game balls discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 323c can enter the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a as it is and be discharged downward (dollar box), and the game balls can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball will not reach the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the player's interest in the game. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body vertical wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. The moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated by climbing the bottom surface. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball contacting the lower tray covers 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower tray covers 340, 340A reliably restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. In addition, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball hits the lower tray covers 340, 340A and the main body vertical wall portion 325b, thereby suppressing damage to them.

Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are formed as separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. 1 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center of the front surface in the left-right direction bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. After the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 is provided, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging portion thereof, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. and a lower plate 322, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is provided with the outer side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. It has a lower tray first area A1 and a lower tray second area A2 positioned in the rear space of the mounting space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when viewed from the front. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made small and inconspicuous. can. Therefore, since the conspicuous production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in the part where the upper tray and the lower tray were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing and capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is Although it is smaller, the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the installation space 326j behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, game balls can be stored in a range (lower plate second area A2) of the lower plate 322 that cannot be seen from the front. can. Therefore, since a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured contrary to the appearance from the front, the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of game balls in the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加This allows the player to enjoy the game and suppress the loss of interest.

Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension section 325B and the second extension section Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the portion 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, the second extension portion 325C, and the like having different sizes are prepared in advance. By attaching the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C of sizes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the plate unit cover 326, etc. The volume of dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension portion 325B, and the second extension portion 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the space behind the mounting space 326j. Since the size of this rear space depends on the rearward projection amount of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), various production operation units 400 (second production operation unit 400A) with different rearward projection amounts can be used. The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the production operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

In addition, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a downwardly recessed container shape, and the game ball can be reliably stored. In addition, since the lower tray covers 340 and 340A have the cover vertical wall section 340a that rises from the upper end of the main body vertical wall section 325b of the lower tray main body 325, various shapes of the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (attaching) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A having shapes corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, etc., various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to achieve the same effects as those described above.

In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, since the part of the lower tray 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower tray main body 325, the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340, 340A are placed on the part where the load of the game balls is increased due to the storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower tray main body 325, even if many game balls are stored, the lower tray cover 340, 340A will not be pulled away from the lower tray main body 325. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off the lower tray main body 325.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, an upper plate capable of storing game balls is provided below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is performed such that the game balls are accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and a lower plate 322, and a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including the and is made invisible from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made neat and attractive, and the player is interested. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting . In addition, since the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a is made difficult to see by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can play the game inside the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the bottom plate of the lower plate 322 to guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a Since the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guide means such as the ball guide part 322c and the buffer part 322d is made difficult to see, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is kept open, , the game balls supplied to the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c are guided by the guiding means and are smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to create the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and to make the player concentrate on the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a difficult to see from the front, so it is probable that In addition, the lower tray ball supply port 323c, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are positioned behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since half or more of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front is different from the actual size of the lower plate. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 as compared to its appearance.

Also, in the state where the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game ball released into the lower tray 322 from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is transferred to the lower tray ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322 Since the guide means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d, which are located between the ball hole 322a, the ball can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball hole 322a and discharged to the bottom of the lower plate 322 (dollar box). , the game ball can be prevented from circulating in the lower tray 322, and the game ball circulating in the lower tray 322 can be reliably made invisible from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower tray 322, thereby preventing the player from being distracted and suppressing the loss of interest in the game.

Furthermore, if the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray 322 is immediately released by the ball guiding portion 322c or the like without the player noticing it. Since the game balls can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the player is given the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower tray 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower tray 322.例文帳に追加can be done. This makes it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower tray 322, and allows the player to devote himself to the game to suppress the loss of interest.

In addition, by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is made invisible from the front, so the lower plate visible from the front Since the actual lower tray 322 is larger than the visible size of the lower tray 322, a sufficient amount of game balls can be reserved as with the lower tray of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 protruding forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game such as receiving game balls into the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Effect operation unit attachment for attaching a large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the plate unit cover 326 at the center in the left-right direction of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. In addition to having a portion 326a, the lower plate front decorative portion 326c on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped out rearward from the center in the vertical direction. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a can be seen to protrude greatly forward, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect The operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous. Therefore, the large production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper tray and the lower tray were arranged vertically in the conventional pachinko machine. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to be highly appealing by making the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine just by looking at it. The lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part is wrapped around the back of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the amount of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322) can be sufficiently secured. The player does not have to worry about the lower plate 322 being filled with game balls while playing, and the player can concentrate on the game, enjoy the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his or her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertip is It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible for the player to perceive that a sufficient amount of game balls is secured even by touch, and in a state in which the game balls are stored in the lower tray 322, Since it is possible to recognize that many game balls are stored in the space, the player can be given a sense of satisfaction, enjoy the game, and suppress a decline in interest. In addition, since the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower tray 322 are less likely to touch the rear wall of the lower tray 322, the lower tray cover 340, etc., the player feels the same as the lower tray in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of incompatibility given to a player who is used to the conventional pachinko machine, and to reassure the player and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. , and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the amount of game balls stored in the lower tray 322, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be attracted. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the sides and upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A), the player cannot move inside the lower plate 322. When a player puts his or her hand in, it is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and get injured. The game can be played in a safe state. Also, the lower tray cover 340 can prevent game balls from entering (spilling out) from the lower tray 322 into the tray unit cover 326 .

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be operated from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous and highly appealing, capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players, and the decoration by the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player entertained with decorations and effects of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), thereby suppressing a decrease in interest of the player.

In addition, since the lower tray 322 is provided with a lower tray ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper tray 321 and a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a that penetrates vertically so as to be openable and closable, the conventional pachinko machine can be used. Since it has the same function as the lower tray 322, when a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine plays a game with this pachinko machine 1, the function of the lower tray 322 is not confused and the same as the conventional one. The game can be played with a relaxed feeling, and the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. In addition, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a are arranged. A pachinko machine with a high appealing power, in which a lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is not visible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted. machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 protruding forward below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a of the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The operation button inner decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (the screen unit 470) is attached so as to surround the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 whose diameter is about 15 cm and whose center bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) is attached. A cylindrical button base 413 that includes a first button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protrudes from the button lens 411 side toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. , the first button decorative portion 411a, the button base 413, etc. allow the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second It is possible to reduce visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the two-effect display device 460A, and the appearance of the operation buttons 410 can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc., and improve the appearance of the player. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the button lens 411 and the button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) to pass through the gap between the button lens 411 and the button base 413. Since it is possible to make the outer edge and inner side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) can be 470) is relatively large, it can be satisfactorily hidden by the first button decoration part 411a and the like, so that while preventing deterioration in appearance, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm can be used. 410 (button lens 411) can be implemented without problems. Therefore, since the operation buttons 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strongly enhanced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made attractive and highly appealing.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting in a cylindrical shape from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the objects outside the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) so that they cannot be seen. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

In addition, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the outer periphery of the button lens 411 The surface is a plane formed by the front end side opening of the button base 413 (a plane perpendicular to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the advancing/retreating direction of the operation button 410). ), the light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the first button decorative portion 411a, the second button decorative portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge are combined to form the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). ), the outer edge of the operation button internal decorative member 432 (screen unit 470), the inner side, and the like can be made difficult to see through the gap, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

In addition, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases. The side effect display device 460 (the second door frame side effect display device 460A) can be made larger or made easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player through the operation button 410.例文帳に追加460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can entertain the players more can be embodied.

Furthermore, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with design (decorativeness). can be made to face, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

In addition, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is made opaque. It is possible to reliably hide the inner side of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) from being seen through the gap between the lens 411 and the inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

In addition, the button frame 412 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 covering the entire circumference with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to allow the player to Since the gap between the body portion 413a of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the body portion 413a and the operation button interior decoration member 432 ( The gap between the screen unit 470 and the screen unit 470) can be increased, and the space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be easily secured. can be moved well.

Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the operation button 410 can be moved smoothly and easily because there is no directivity in the outer periphery compared to the polygonal shape. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is made large, it can be pressed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is made larger, when the player-participation-type production is executed in which the player operates the operation button 410, the operation button 410 can be easily operated without confirming the position of the operation button 410. Since the operation button 410 can be easily touched and pressed, the player can easily participate in the player-participation type performance using the operation button 410, which amuses the player and reduces interest. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is manipulated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) In addition to being able to entertain the performance, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410 by means of a performance image or light-emitting performance by the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A). , the decline in interest can be suppressed by making the player actively participate in the player-participation type performance and amusing it. In addition, by executing the performance within the operation button 410, it is possible to make some players think that something good will happen, thereby heightening the expectation for the game and suppressing the decrease in interest. can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the portion inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation buttons 410 of the pachinko machine 1 are clearly different from the operation buttons of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the players is high. It can be used as a pachinko machine 1, and at the same time, heightens the player's expectation for the performance using the operation button 410 and the door frame side performance display device 460 (door frame side second performance display device 460A) in the operation button 410.例文帳に追加It is possible to suppress the decline in interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

In the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 is formed with the first button decorative portion 411a on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the button lens 411 without the first button decorative portion 411a may be used.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation button 410 has the opaque button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 . A decorative portion may be formed around the entire periphery of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 to hide the rear side.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the second Although the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450) side is shown, it is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one projection may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to partially surround the entire outer periphery of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape that follows the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape that does not follow the outer circumference of the button lens 411 . The button base 413 may have decorations (planar decorations such as pasting stickers or printing, or three-dimensional decorations such as unevenness such as reliefs) on at least the inner wall side. Furthermore, the button base 413 may be translucent or opaque. Also, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Also, when the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as embossing, slits, prisms, and the like.

In the above embodiment, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326, but this is the case. but not limited to, recessed backward from both left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), and a lower plate that is connected to each other behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) 322 may be used, and only the part on the right outside of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is recessed rearward, and a part of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) wraps around to the rear. You can let it be.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (front lower decorative portion 326c) of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved rearward. Although an example of a recessed shape has been shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be recessed in the shape of a polygonal prism or a polyhedron.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ``equipped with a rotating body having a decoration on its surface,'' ``equipped with a decoration with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration,'' and ``a game Equipped with decorations that three-dimensionally imitate characters, items, logos, and scenes (diorama), etc. in line with the concept of the game machine", "Characters, items, logos in line with the concept of the game machine, and predetermined models A member such as a unit or a panel having decorations such as "," etc. applied by stickers, printing, etc. may be attached. Moreover, the member attached to the attachment space 326j (the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a) does not need to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be attached. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

In the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is provided with the frontwardly opening effect operation unit attachment portion 326a for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the plate unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) that does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the plate unit cover. In addition, on the front surface of such a plate unit cover, decorations such as characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. in accordance with the concept of the game machine can be applied by stickers, printing, attachment of decorative members, etc. desirable.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as a cover. Although an example is shown in which it is difficult to see from the front, the present invention is not limited to this. The entire plate 322 may be made invisible from the front.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are arranged in an arc shape partially in the circumferential direction. , and the second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be formed in an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the operation button inner decorative member 432 in the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The second inner button decoration portion 432g may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including ovals) centering on the center.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410, the operation button inner decorative member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is shown to be visible at all times, it is not limited to this. may be provided with a variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized by satisfying the above. Here, as the variable light transmitting means, there are two types of means, such as a magic mirror, which makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side, and a liquid crystal film, which becomes transparent when the power is turned on and off. or become opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized”, and the like. In addition, the front member and the rear member may be relatively movable, or relatively non-movable.

At least one of the front member and the rear member has a variable light transmission means, so that only the front member or both the front member and the rear member are visible in a normal state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. A member and a back member, or a front member, a back member and a member behind the back member can show overlapping decorations. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player using the front member and the rear member, making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game and entertaining the player. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

More specifically, for example, when the front member has a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the front member is decorated by darkening the rear side of the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by light from a light emitting part such as an LED, the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member are satisfied, and the rear member passes through the front member. The member can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member are superimposed.

Alternatively, when the front member is transparent and the rear member has a variable light transmission means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state, so the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. A player can be shown the surface and decoration of the . Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light from the light-emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmission means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) can be seen by the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be seen by the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by light emitted from a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the sufficient condition of the variable light transmission means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration by the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light emitted from the LED or the like). ), and the satisfaction conditions of the respective variable light transmission means in the front member and the rear member are satisfied, respectively, and the member behind the rear member (for example, a display device, a decoration such as a character) through the front member and the rear member can be shown to the player. Accordingly, by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmission means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened. A glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means is explained as something like a magic mirror. In addition, if a liquid crystal film or the like is used as the variable light transmission means, it can transmit light even in an opaque state (it has translucency). If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light) by the light of the light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a variety of effects such as light emitting effects and decorative effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, the control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input and output to the game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays the electrical connection with the display board. FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control section.

The pachinko machine 1, as its control configuration, as shown in FIG. 69, in addition to the process of generating control power supply (for example, +5V, etc.), a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls. , and a second control unit SCG that performs effects related to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 serves as the first control unit MCG. , a payout control board 951, and a power supply board 931, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931 will be described in this order. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310, which controls the progress of the game, controls power-on processing executed when the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that stores various control programs such as a main control program that controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , and a blackout monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors signs of blackout or momentary blackout of a predetermined voltage.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in A hard random number circuit 1310an” is built in. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value to 32767 as the maximum value is preset), A predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value to a clock signal ( Based on a clock signal output from a main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without overlapping at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When finished, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a without duplication. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various detection switches are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND). A main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset terminal provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a main control output circuit without a reset function 1310cb having no reset terminal and not having a reset function. and consists of The main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the main control system, which will be described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs signals based on it from its various output terminals.

As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, and general A detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects a game ball that has entered the winning hole 2001 and a signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. is entered in 60, a gate sensor 4003 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a count sensor 4005 for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A detection signal from a magnetism detection sensor 4024 attached to detect fraudulent activity using a magnet is supplied to a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5, and a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d outputs a drive signal to the starter solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or outputs a drive signal to a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161, and through the function display unit 1400 first special symbol display 1403 , Second special symbol indicator 1405, first special reservation number indicator 1404, second special reservation number indicator 1406, normal symbol indicator 1402, state indicator 1401, and round indicator 1407 or output a drive signal do.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 or outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, the main control with the reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In this embodiment, non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the first starting sensor 4002, the second starting sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. For the general winning hole sensors 4020, 4020, contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first starting hole sensor 4002, the second starting hole sensor 4004, and the Detection of game balls by the gate sensor 4003 also occurs frequently. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first starter sensor 4002, the second starter sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. FIG. Also, when a big winning game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and game balls enter frequently, so that the count sensor 4005 frequently detects the game balls. For this reason, the count sensor 4005 also uses a long-life proximity switch. On the other hand, in general winning openings 2001 and 2201 into which game balls do not enter frequently, detection by general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, the general prize winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 use mechanical switches that have a shorter life than the proximity switches.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs to the main control board 1310 a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, thereby inputting the predetermined serial input port from the main control input circuit 1310b. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it sends a signal (main pay ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. It outputs to the circuit 1310ca, and outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. , various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around a main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control serial I/O ports, etc., are connected to the bus 1310ah. (See FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. (Fig. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. It is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310aea to start transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In this embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has a storage capacity of 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits multiple commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting multiple commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. ) and BC0 (see FIG. 75). This capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from power on. Is output from the payout control board 951, through the main control input circuit 1310b, is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU1310a, and is completely erased from the main control built-in RAM by the main control MPU1310a (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Out of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of game balls, etc. includes, as shown in FIG. and an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, the operation switch 954, which also functions as a RAM clear switch, controls the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on the detection signal output by being operated. .) outputs a RAM clear signal to completely erase the information stored in the memory.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and also controls the payout of game media that is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on. A payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor containing various control programs including a payout control program that controls operations, a ROM that stores various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., and detection from various detection switches related to payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting drive signals to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. 952 d and a CR unit input/output circuit 952 e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 . The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"). It also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially converts various information (game information) on the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands on payout to the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. to receive serial data. In addition, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the game ball payout operation, and operates the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are sent as serial data to the payer. As a signal, serial data is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, this payout control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main processing is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is executed and payout control is started, the payout When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame open command (first door open command) when a detection signal (door frame open detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame open switch 618. , when a detection signal (body frame open detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame open command (first body frame open command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) associated with the closing operation is input from the body frame open switch 619, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information that the detection signals from the various detection switches are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information It is configured as a circuit output from an output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and various signals are input to its various input terminals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like. A payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, and a payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb having no reset terminal and having no reset function. and consists of The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. is configured as a circuit in which no signals based on are output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit that outputs a signal based on it from its various output terminals.

A ball run-out detection sensor 827 for detecting run-out of game balls in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 for detecting game balls released from payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. A detection signal from a blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is inputted to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through a payout control input circuit 952b. Note that, for the sake of explanation later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch 618 for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are applied to the payout control input circuit 952b. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting whether or not the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in a serial data format at the input terminal of the serial input port, or receives an operation signal (detection command) of the operation switch 954. signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, it outputs a payout control signal with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. Various commands are transmitted from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310 as serial data.
When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951 to that effect. This signal (primary payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control input circuit 952b.

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, or outputs the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED indicator By outputting the drive signal for displaying on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is outputted from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board with the payout control board 951), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it informs that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the dispensing device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotator and the game ball engage near the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult to rotate the payout rotator. ), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "payout detection sensor error" is occurring), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit). is displayed, and when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored). game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (electrical connection at any point from the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6 is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it is "in stock (with prize ball stock (not paid out))" (specifically, game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached the predetermined number of balls).

In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually put out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. , the number of game balls actually put out is output to the external terminal plate 784 via a resistor (not shown).

In addition, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via resistors (not shown). The external terminal plate 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). ), the number of game balls and various information (game information, contents of errors related to the payout operation of game balls, or the fact that there was an error) are communicated to the hall computers installed in the game balls.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are in a state of being electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers. It is designed to prevent the computer from malfunctioning or breaking down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout etc. It is designed not to malfunction or break down due to application of abnormal voltage. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

A game ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and a prepaid card return requesting signal from the return button 329 are first sent to the frequency display plate 365, the main door relay terminal plate 880, and then the game ball lending device connection terminal plate. 869 to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input/output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and sends a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending/returning display unit 330. This signal is output to the lending device connection terminal plate 869 , the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the frequency display plate 365 , and this signal is input to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . In addition, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 receives the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

In addition, the power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 has a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. there is Due to this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various kinds of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is transmitted through the payout control input circuit 952b to the payout control MPU 952a. It is input to the input terminal of the input port, and the payout control MPU 952a judges it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

[7-2-2. Exchanging various signals with the connection terminal board for rental equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout control section 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, but also connects the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. , the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 and the degree display plate 365 are electrically connected). Between the board between the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, between the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The terminal plate 880 is electrically connected to the substrate, and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the frequency display plate 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness). AC 24 V, which will be described later, is supplied from the power supply board 931 to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 . The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V")) from the supplied AC 24V by a built-in voltage generating circuit (not shown), and generates the voltage together with the ground LG. , to the payout control board 951 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 , and to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . .

A ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, is mounted on the part surface of the frequency display plate 365 at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch is mounted at a position corresponding to the returning button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball rental/return display section 330 as a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining rental display section 363 of the rental ball unit 360 .

The ball lending button 328 and return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 . When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 . When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (turned ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869 .

The ball lending/returning display unit 330 is composed of three segment displays arranged in a row, and the segment displays of the three digits are sequentially driven one by one by a so-called dynamic lighting method. The lighting of the digit segment indicators is controlled. With such lighting control, the ball lending/returning display section 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error in the CR unit 6 . The ball rental/return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a single-digit segment display out of three-digit segment displays, and the designated single-digit segment display. segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by lighting the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal When input through the plate 880, the 1-digit segment displays are sequentially illuminated according to the input digit signals DG0-DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A-SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of the luminescence of the vessel can be visually recognized through the remaining lending display portion 363 .

A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the degree display plate 365 adjacent to the ball lending/returning display section 330 . A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input to the CR unit lamp 365 d via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880 . A predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lendable signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via a CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 with a built-in voltage creation circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are valid and the ball lending state is possible controls the logic of the ball lendable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending/returning display unit 330 through current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 .

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is sent from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rental balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which is equivalent to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, outputs EXS, which is a signal for notifying the start or end of one payout operation, to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. to output to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device PRDY, which is a signal to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is possible or not possible. 869 to the CR unit 6. For example, if the hall clerk or the like has set the CR unit 6 in advance so that game balls worth 200 yen are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. is performed twice in a row, and when 25 balls worth 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls worth 100 yen will be paid out, and a total of 50 balls worth 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, when the return button 329 is pressed, the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328 .

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power board 931 includes a power switch 934 that can electrically connect or disconnect 24 volts AC (24 VAC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and a power control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , and a shooting control section 953 that performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control section]
The power control unit 935 operates a power switch 934 to operate a synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. and a power generation circuit 935d for generating power.

[7-3-2. Launch control section]
A firing control section 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The shooting control circuit 953a receives an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the intensity (shooting intensity) at which the game ball is shot toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the game ball is forcibly stopped (shooting) by the player's will. , and are inputted via the handle relay terminal board 315 . In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal is input via the payout control board 951 to notify that effect. .

The shooting control circuit 953a adjusts the driving current for launching (shooting) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the shooting solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 through the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the batted ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control section SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 with respect to the first control section MCG. 19, a performance display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side performance display device 460, a peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), a game board side performance display device 1600 and a door. While performing drawing control of the frame side effect display device 460, a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 performing sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information specifying the date and time A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information specifying seconds, and the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are controlled by rotating the knob. and a volume adjustment volume 1510a that is adjusted by operation.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control, controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b for storing various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and control performance operations, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady-state processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and light emission modes such as various LEDs and information for managing the schedule data that defines the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot game state and special A peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing information for managing effect flags, etc.) and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally ".) and are provided.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored contents only for a period of time when the power is restored immediately after an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the power is cut off for a long time (when the power is cut off for a long time). ), the peripheral control SRAM 1511d loses its contents, whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as "SRAM electrolytic capacitor"). As a result, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. By providing an SRAM electrolytic capacitor on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. It loses its contents as it can no longer be held.

The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decoration board of the game board 5 is controlled based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to multiple LEDs etc. The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and for outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the motor drive board serial Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I/O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, and for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 Data is transmitted from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Peripheral control output of door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the plurality of LEDs etc. provided on each decoration board in 3 from the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED It is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 .

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Also, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400 and a press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194, and the serialized performance operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the serial I/O port for detecting the performance operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are sent to the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180 . Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, this serialized movable object detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit through the peripheral control input circuit to the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input/output of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"). It is diagnosed whether or not

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comprises a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I/O controllers. /O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog/digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A/D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads/writes various data from/to the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah. Various data are read from and written to the peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h. Various data are read and written via an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and an external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d. /O port 1511ag and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. to DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a peripheral control various serial I/O port 1511ae built into the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af. , peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, to transfer data independently. In addition, while reading and writing the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control various serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and Reading and writing are performed with respect to input/output devices such as the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which are externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between input/output devices such as O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to transfer data independently, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read and written via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h. Serial I/O port 1511ae, WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control, peripheral control various parallel I/O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak, and other input/output devices are connected via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. read and write.

A peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls an internal bus 1511ah, a peripheral bus 1511ai, and an external bus 1511h to control a central processing unit of a peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control RAM 1511c. Storage devices such as SRAM 1511d, input/output devices such as peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control parallel I/O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A/D converters 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control serial I/O ports 1511ae are serial I/O port for lamp drive board, serial I/O port for motor drive board, serial I/O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, frame decoration drive amplifier board LED , a serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor, a serial I/O port for the main control board, and a serial I/O port for acquiring the performance operation unit information.

A peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period (until the timer expires), it is reset. will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the WDT 1511af with built-in peripheral control within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag outputs various latch signals such as the game board side motor drive latch signal and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. and outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I/O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED, and serves as a decision notice lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big win game state has been decided. In this embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag are directly connected electrically, the path between the LED and the peripheral control parallel I/O port 1511ag can be shortened. Therefore, noise countermeasures can be taken for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. The lighting control of the LED is executed in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later, and the other LEDs except for this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit regular processing described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume control volume 1510a, and its resistance value is varied by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value and converted to a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying pachinko machine 1 clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent acts on the pachinko machine 1, and contents related to game effects are announced. (For example, to make the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to notify the player that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state that is advantageous to the player, etc.). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, and from mute to maximum volume. can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 can be made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, or the game state can shift to an advantageous game state for the player. You can also notify them of high prices.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects, etc., and electrical drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The schedule data for screen generation is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is defined. It is The schedule data for generating the light emission mode is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the VDP built-in sound source 1512a. A track number is defined for indicating in which track among a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Some of the various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read out from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed. Some are read and executed. Various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are also read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and are stored in various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, which will be described later, when the power is turned on. In some cases, what is copied in is read out.

In addition, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, a program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is stored. A brightness correction program is included. This luminance correction program corrects the decrease in luminance due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the internal RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is used based on the correction information. to correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in a range of 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set. Therefore, when six months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the luminance When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness of 80% obtained by adding 5% which is the acquired correction information to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first powered on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, and the effect display device on the game board side is displayed. When lighting the backlight of 1600, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by adding 10%, which is the acquired correction information, to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A managed work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup managed work area 1511ca, and a backup area stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing copies of various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and copies of various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. various control data copy areas 1511ce for dedicated storage; backup unmanaged work areas 1511cf for dedicated storage of various types of information updated by execution of various control programs that are not backed up; is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written into the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf to be cleared to zero. For the work area 1511ca to be managed, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. and to indicate the game state (for example, to indicate the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr ) as a backup target, and effect information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed each time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs, is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as an object. Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511 cc, which will be described later, are of the same storage area as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(1fr)" is, as will be described later, when the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a A V blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed every time, "Bank 0", "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" are respectively appended (effect information (1fr) and effect Backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As will be described later, "(1 ms)" means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. and "Bank4" (effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs, etc. provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 are stored. This is a storage area in which door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting signals is set. In the received command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area where various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a described later) is set. is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to commands received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set

Bank 0 (1 ms) includes frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door-side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, which is a storage area to be set, a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is stored. This is a storage area in which the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. This is a storage area in which various types of information obtained by acquiring the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. Rotation (direction of rotation) of the dial operation unit 401 and operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, dial created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400) Rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set, and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak has an effect display drive board 4450 on its periphery. Drawing data is received from the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the control board 1510, and if the received drawing data is determined to be abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 output based on the LOCKN signal described later to notify that fact. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained by acquiring the frequency of troubles and the state of occurrence of troubles between connections with the effect display drive board 4450 are set.

The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in Bank 0 (1 fr), the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511 cab, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf in Bank 0 (1 ms). and the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa when the peripheral controller steady-state processing described later is executed. , when the next peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady-state Each time the process is executed, the game board side emission data SL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control unit steady process, the previous peripheral When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL is stored in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side light emission data STL-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. be. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control unit steady process, When the previous peripheral controller steady-state processing was executed, the process proceeds based on the door-side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame-decoration driving amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It's becoming

In the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, when the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf stores the door When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is stored in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When set, the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing was executed. Based on this, the process proceeds.

In the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing was executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It's like

Next, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc dedicated to storing copies of performance information, which are various types of information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Effect information (1 ms), which is copied to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. , as effect backup information (1 ms), is sent to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. Copied quickly. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1 fr) and Bank2 (1 fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are set as one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. This page is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) match.

In the backup second area 1511cc, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). Memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is done depending on whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) match.

In this way, in the present embodiment, the first backup area 1511cb has Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing pages, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of 2 pairs, with Bank 3 (1 fr) and Bank 4 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as performance backup information (1fr) by the peripheral control unit every 1 frame. Each time a routine process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to the first backup area 1511cb and the second backup area 1511cc, and the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is the normally used storage area. is backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc each time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs and a peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed as effect backup information (1ms). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac executes high-speed copying by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in common. In other words, in this embodiment, the performance information (1fr) and the performance information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (common program execution).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da for exclusively storing information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs; A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing copies of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. It should be noted that the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state command from the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 89) when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure). indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state (for example, when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the power-on, it instructs the start of the effect). ), it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the first backup area 1511cb, and the second backup area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is designed to be By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, history of occurrence of a big hit game state etc.), on the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da includes performance information (SRAM), which is various information that continues over the course of the day (for example, information for managing the history of the occurrence of a big hit game state and for managing a special performance flag). information, etc.) to be backed up. Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly explained. As described above, "Bank" is the minimum management unit representing the size of the storage area for storing various information. The following "0" means a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. In other words, "Bank0" means that the size of the normally used storage area is the minimum management unit. "Bank 1", "Bank 2", "Bank 3", and "Bank 4" provided in an area extending from a first backup area 1511db to a second backup area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as "Bank 0". It means that it has a size. "(SRAM)" is for backing up various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , and “Bank 4” (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM), which will be described later, are also used with the same meaning).

Next, a backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc dedicated to storing a copy of performance information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc are managed as one page, with two banks forming one pair. Effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Then, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks that constitute the page match.

Specifically, in the first backup area 1511db, a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are paired, and this pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are transferred to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA each time the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each frame. This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first backup area 1511db is an area for managing a pair of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing a pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as "internal sound source"), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are drawn. Sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 In addition, various kinds of music, sound effects, etc. A liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, an audio data transmission IC 1512c for transmitting serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is sent to the effect display drive board 4450 which is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. A differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, into a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, and when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is a compulsory switching circuit 1512f that is connected so as to transmit the signal, and is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input; It has The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores sprite data used for displaying screens and images, which will be described later, such as ring image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and for displaying an operation menu background image, which will be described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selected display object image data used to display at least one selected display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale to be described later, volume adjustment icon to be described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, body frame back image data used for displaying the body frame back image that allows the position of each part on the back of the body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the player, display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for , break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the rest timer setting screen, and during rest screen image data used for displaying the during rest screen are stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestive display object image data used to display a suggestive display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400. FIG.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to commands from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a, when a V blank signal (to be described later) is input, the first screen data is extracted according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The following screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. In this manner, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the screen data is output one by one from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator.

Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a copies the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After extracting various control data from the control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, when the V blank signal is input, the leading data is extracted according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and receives the V blank signal. Each time, the sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one from the top sound command data.

[7-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-described built-in tone generator, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source controls the game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. The side character data and the top dish side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. A VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and outputs the drawing data for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is sent from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame periphery. A terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display stored in the plate unit 320 by being arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450 . As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short due to being attached to the game board 5 respectively, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 can The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because the control board 1510 outputs to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of wiring required for the path of CH1 is much longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication system called "Registered Trademark", it is a mechanism that is less susceptible to noise.

Channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is serialized by the door frame side performance transmitter IC 4610d and stored in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 . The serialized various signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data for one screen to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460. frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side is output. Image data for the performance display device 460 is sent from the channel CH2 to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and a performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means that the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is stored in the built-in VRAM. It is the data for generating above.

In addition, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 through the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Then, it outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a to notify that it is ready to accept screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a executes peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, in response to the input of this V blank signal. Here, the interval at which the V-blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . Also, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a are mounted.

Note that the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer system" is a frame buffer (built-in VRAM) that holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. , drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 .

In addition, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source displays the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Contains the subvolume value to be used. Specifically, for the effect sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400 and shifting to a later-described setting mode.

The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is Actually, it is amplified up to the master volume value which is the sound volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound, and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that it flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume value for adjusting the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used By synthesizing the set volume adjustment volume 1510a with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. is amplified to the master volume value, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. Synthesizing the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, The volume of this synthesized notification sound is amplified to a master volume value that is the volume actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. .

Here, when the performance sound is being played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is simple. First, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the sound effect is incorporated to mute, the sound data of the track in which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, and the notification Synthesize the sound data of the track in which the sound is embedded and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the informational sound is set to the maximum volume, and change the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the informational sound It amplifies to the master volume value which becomes the sound volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, serializes the amplified effect sound and notification sound, and outputs them as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound progresses according to the above-mentioned schedule data for sound generation. In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data for the production is set again as the sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400 When the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjust, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 flowing.

In this way, when the performance sound is played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the informational sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation, so that the predetermined period of time has elapsed. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound does not start playing again from the point at which the information sound started to flow, but continues according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the information sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b stores, as shown in FIG. are stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, effect sound, notification sound, notification sound, etc. are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
The audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source, and converts the right audio data into positive and negative signals as differential serial data to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and frame peripheral relay. It is transmitted to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is output to a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. , the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 , and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 . As a result, music, sound effects, and the like are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in accordance with various presentations.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as differential serial data between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194. For example, the positive signal of the left audio data, Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal are combined by the frame-decorating drive amplifier board 194 into one left-side audio data, Since noise components are removed by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side rendering transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. Channel CH2 uses a parallel interface as described above. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. , the green video signal, and the blue video signal each consist of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In this embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to distinguish, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a.

Three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d transmits three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronizing signal, and a vertical synchronizing signal. and a clock signal, and serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 , the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 , and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 .

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for (the first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is transferred from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and then the door. Since it is output (sent) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (the first 2 path) is much longer than the wiring length required for the first path, it is very susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4 shown in FIG. For example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 provided in the door frame 3, on the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closing side of the body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 can guide the game balls. A full-tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding paid-out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank becomes full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. In this way, various wirings for electrically connecting various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full-tank branch unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by the driving of the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the game balls and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The environment is subject to noise, etc.

For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the wiring for sending drawing data is much longer than channel CH1, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is provided by Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. By adopting a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the system is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as a wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the transmitter and the receiver. is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel wires. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case in which parallel lines are employed as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source that the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is much longer than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, THine Electronics Even if a differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" is adopted by Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, such a hardware configuration alone will not cause damage due to electrostatic discharge of game balls. When the serial data on the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 in the affected state. , the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being different from normal and disturbed data, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it appears like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that an image is displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what the image is at all.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is used for the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator, which has a much longer wire length for sending the drawing data than the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. In the performance transmitter IC 1512d, THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method communication is adopted to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration Therefore, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that enters the wiring is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of game balls, noise intruding into the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a Drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, the image generated by the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image it is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's desire to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play due to the influence of the noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which will be described later, are provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. , that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally constructed, but are separately assembled and attached to the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be reduced by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed. However, if the defect occurring in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3' is attached to the body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is replaced. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the side of the body frame 4, various boards provided on the side of the body frame 4 and various wirings provided on the side of the door frame 3' can be connected. and the substrate can be electrically connected.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 adopts differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Thine Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) was employed as the differential one-pair cable to electrically connect between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the effect display drive The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by twisted pair cables, while power supply wiring and wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the differential serial data transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, Power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed apart from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined distance. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, video transmission terminals formed on these multiple relay terminal boards are provided. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, and the output level of the signal is lowered. occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in this embodiment, as described above, between the substrates between the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, between the substrates between the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and between the substrates of the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The terminal plate 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, while the power supply wiring and other wiring for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. However, one wire of the twisted pair cable is red and the other wire is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other multiple wires are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 that is housed. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is supplied to the forced switching circuit 1512f in addition to the signal output from the door frame side performance transmitter IC 1512d. is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e and input. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into differential serial signals (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which is provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and will be described later. , that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is transmitted as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 . The forced switching circuit 1512f, when two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, connects the circuits so as to transmit these two signals. When the two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It is As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e When the two differential signals of the plus signal and the minus signal are not input, the door frame side effect transmitter is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the start screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510).

When a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 serializes various and a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

Door frame side presentation receiver IC SDIC0 receives the drawing data from VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, and if it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal (to be described later) to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 to convey that fact. , and output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a controls VDP 1512a with built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is established based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to game board side effect display device 1600. is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to notify.

Further, when the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, it outputs a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 . As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input. While it can be determined that there is no problem with the performance display drive board 4450 housed in 320, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.") is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and a notification sound (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device ) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the notification sound is played from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control section]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a incorporates a RAM 4165aa (hereinafter referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa") that holds calendar information and time information. The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is used in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. In other words, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without receiving any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and time information by power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. Based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. As such effects, for example, on December 25th, a screen of a Christmas tree and reindeer will be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown will be displayed. The screen to be executed is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the like. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. there is The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. . The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and brightness adjustment information for the currently set game. The luminance of the LEDs that are the backlights of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are included.

In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as information on the date and hour, minute, and second first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date and time information is also stored.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs ON/OFF control of the backlight or only ON when the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are of the cold cathode tube type. It is designed to

Various types of information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date and time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa are set on the production line of the game machine manufacturer. In order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the production line, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

In this way, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores, in addition to calendar information and time information, brightness setting information and input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , the information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a jackpot game state with a low probability or a high probability) can be stored.

In addition, depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture. , sometimes too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. brightness can be adjusted. The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LEDs stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described luminance correction program, so that if the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight, the game board side effect This corrects the decrease in luminance that accompanies aging of the display device 1600 . Peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, and uses calendar information and time to specify the year, month, and day. Acquire time information specifying minutes and seconds to specify the current date and time, and adjust the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. Luminance setting information including luminance adjustment information for playing and the currently set luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, based on the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on and the current date and time, if six months have already passed since the time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first powered on, Acquire the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is lit, this 75% Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted so that the brightness is 80%, which is the correction information acquired by adding 5%. and lights up, and if 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the acquired correction information of 10% is added to this 75% to obtain 85%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on so as to achieve the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. and the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., which are output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob. As described above, the sound volume control volume 1510a is adapted to vary the resistance value by rotating the knob portion thereof, and the electrically connected peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into values in 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. FIG.

In this manner, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotating operation of the knob. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect (For example, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is made more powerful, or the possibility of shifting to an advantageous game state for the player is announced. etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, and the sound is muted. to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. As a result, for example, even if the hall clerk or the like rotates the knob of the volume control volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound becomes smaller, when the pachinko machine 1 has a problem or when the player commits a fraudulent act, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be emitted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the By operating the push operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to a setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation part 401 or the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration by the game board side production display device 1600 is being performed in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 . By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob of the volume control volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is By adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. there is This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music and sound effects is incorporated, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound and notification sound described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is used. and adjusting the volume of music or sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of . Since the volume control volume 1510 a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 , the body frame 4 must always be left open from the outer frame 2 . Then, the person who can rotate the knob of the volume control volume 1510a is the store clerk in the hall. However, with the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, the player may find the music and sound effects to be too soft and difficult to hear, and the player may feel loud and the music and sound effects loud. Therefore, within a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed in a customer waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the effect is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 of the presentation operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. The dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

Further, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is in a non-playing state for a predetermined period of time and the customer waits for customers, the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). , the volume adjusted by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is set to the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. As a result, when a player who has played a game while seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the adjusted sound volume is too small to hear the music and sound effects, the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation part 401 and the pressing operation part 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the player sat in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and played a game. If the player who has been playing the game feels that the adjusted volume is loud and the music and sound effects are loud, this time, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game can turn the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, the volume can be reduced to a desired volume.

[8. power supply system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various substrates and the grounds (GND) of various terminal plates are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power substrate 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

The power board 931 includes a power control section 935 and a firing control section 953, as shown in FIG. The power control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from the 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. A section 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the shooting solenoid 682 of the ball shooting device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 through the power supply board 931, and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. This synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate DC +37V (DC+37V, hereinafter referred to as "+37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. This smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied +37V ripple, smoothes the +37V, and supplies it to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generating circuit 935d of the firing control section 953, respectively.

Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (withdrawal control built-in RAM).

A shooting control circuit 953a of the shooting control unit 953 uses the +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and shoots the game ball at a launch strength (launch strength) that matches the rotational position of the handle 302. While adjusting the drive current for hitting (shooting) toward the ball and controlling the output to the shooting solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feeding unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 A feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and performs control for feeding the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the shot ball launching device 650 side.

The power source generation circuit 935d supplies from +37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c to DC +5V (DC+5V, hereinafter referred to as "+5V"), DC +12V (DC+12V, hereinafter referred to as "+12V"), and DC +24V (DC+24V, hereinafter referred to as "+24V") is generated and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, respectively. A power system to which +5V is applied is a +5V power line, a power system to which +12V is applied is a +12V power line, and a power system to which +24V is applied is a +24V power line.

The +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. +5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM through the diode PD0. ing. +12V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is supplied to the +5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This +5V creation circuit 1310g creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from +12V from the payout control board 951. The +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM through the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951, and the payout The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. In other words, the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM, which is forward due to the diode PD0, and the capacitor BC1. The positive terminal is designed to allow current to flow toward it. In this way, the capacitor BC1 is connected to +5V by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is returned to the payout control board 951 and then again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the power generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a because it is blocked by the diode PD0, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. , and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 on the main control board 1310 . In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g causes current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. A current flows in the direction of Thus, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with +5V and charged by an electrical connection method in which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the +5V creation circuit 1310g can create +5V. When it is exhausted, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, a diode is connected to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the memory contents are retained. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline about the voltage supplied to each control board etc. is demonstrated, Then, the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board are demonstrated.

The three types of voltages +5V, +12V, and +24V generated by the power generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Two voltages of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 . The three types of voltages +5 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power source creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, are supplied to the peripheral They are supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 respectively.

The three voltages of +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are applied to the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180, as shown in FIG. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decoration boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for the board 5 .

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a +3.3V generating circuit 1510b that generates DC 3.3V (DC+3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") from +5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. ing. The +3.3V generated by the +3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG. Also, the +12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power source 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600. FIG.

On the other hand, the three voltages of +5V, +12V and +24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76(b). The frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 has a +9V generating circuit 194a that generates DC +9V (DC+9V, hereinafter referred to as "+9V") from +12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. +9V generated by the +9V generation circuit 194a and +5V, +12V, and +24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3 and the like.

In addition, +12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper tray side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x generates +3.3V from +12V. The +3.3 V generated by the upper tray liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. and the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage generated by the upper tray side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450 y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460 .

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. This payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with +5V from the power supply board 931, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952, for example. +12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal plate 784 is a circuit for outputting a signal that conveys the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc., to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). is. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by ascertaining the number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1, game information of the pachinko machine 1, etc. from signals output from the external communication circuit 784a. In addition, +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used at all in the payout control board 951 .

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a +5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, etc., in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this +12V. In the main control board 1310, the +5V power line is a power supply system to which +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied. In this embodiment, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and the +5V power supply of the main control board 1310 The +5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310, either.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V produced by the +5V production circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a, for example. +12V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b and the like, +24V from the payout control board 951, for example, is supplied to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with +12V and +24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these +12V and +24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a through the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Also, the power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . 76(b), the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, they are input to the decoration substrates of the door frames and the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 .

In this embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltage applied to each of the +12V power line and the +24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line. Signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure can be detected more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to the power supply.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit etc. of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. FIG. 77 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing an interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a diagram. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, followed by the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, the main control MPU Various input/output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the interface circuit for communication between the peripheral control boards 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a +5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, peripheral circuits include a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (24 megahertz (MHz )).

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h is mainly composed of a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its 1st terminal applied with +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, its 2nd terminal connected to the ground (GND), and its 3rd terminal to remove noise components. +5V is output. The +5V applied to the No. 1 terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is first removed. are smoothed.

The +5 V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC3, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded (GND).

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is connected to the ground (GND). is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, the +5 V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 through the diode MD0. is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, the +12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate +5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a Although the main control MPU 1310a does not operate because the current is blocked by the diode MD0, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 as shown in FIG. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and includes a delay circuit. The delay capacitor terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor MC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the elapse of the delay time when +5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal, which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. While being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca with is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC7 grounded to the ground (GND), and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
The +5 V from which noise components have been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, as shown in FIG. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, this smoothed +5 V is also applied to the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals. The main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to these A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and receives a 24 MHz clock signal. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded (GND), and the D terminal that outputs the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically unconnected to the outside. state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to signals, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the power on. It is operated to clear the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, and error cancellation after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). and a function to perform Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 951 has, when an operation signal is input from the operation switch 954 within a predetermined period from power on, the main control It is judged as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and processing for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

The main control board 1310 receives an operation signal whose logic is LOW from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated. becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be given later).

The transmission line that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time of power-on is, as shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 through the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR0 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to +12V by pull-up resistor MR2. The main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW and is input, while the operation switch 954 is operated. When it is on, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by an operation signal from the operation switch 954. FIG.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning off the transistor MTR0 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. When the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal pulled up to +12 V by the pull-up resistor MR2 and logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, thereby turning on the transistor MTR0 and switching the switch. The circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. I judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to +12V by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951 . That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, in order to suppress the influence of noise entering the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than +5V A voltage of +12V is used to improve signal reliability. Therefore, in this embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the +12V side by a pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and +12 V and +24 V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of +12V and +24V, and when a power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, a power failure warning signal is sent as a power failure warning to the main control MPU 1310a and a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952 a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510 . Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of +24 V power failure or momentary power failure, +12 V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring, and the output of a power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Configuration of blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly comprises a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. +5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in this embodiment) that serves as a comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded (GND).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) , +12V are used to compare the monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of +24 V is applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of +12 V is applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the sixth terminal, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21B. These comparison results are input to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21, one end of which is grounded (GND). , the ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is connected to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. +24V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +24V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by comparing the +24V monitor voltage V1 and the reference voltage Vref with the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of +24V is applied, is a resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the +24V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and the other end of the capacitor MC23 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V1 of +24V applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +24V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are such that, when +24V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +24V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 21.40V). The monitor voltage V1 of +24 V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the voltage is applied.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC24, one end of which is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the No. 1 terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. +12V blackout or momentary blackout monitoring]
The +12V power failure or momentary power failure is monitored by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitor voltage V2 and the reference voltage Vref as described above. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitor voltage V2 is applied, is a resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and the other end of the capacitor MC25 grounded to the ground (GND); are electrically connected. The monitoring voltage V2 of +12V applied to the fifth terminal, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by +12V according to the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are such that, when +12V power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from +12V and becomes the preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (in this embodiment, it is set to 10.47V). The monitor voltage V2 of +12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref when the reference voltage Vref is applied.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A. A preset D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor MC24 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. Capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter as described above.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is +5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. A signal that has been pulled up to the side and has a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is the ground (GND). A signal that has been pulled down to the side and has a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Power failure warning signal output]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and stores this stored value. (logic) is output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a signal whose logic is LOW at the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, it releases the latched state and resets the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the same logic as the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal). (a logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal). On the other hand, when a logic HI signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the latch state is set. In addition, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is configured to set the latch state by inputting a signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, the logic of the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is LOW. is input, the state of outputting a signal with logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is maintained (at this time, the signal output from 1Q with the logic inverted is negative logic maintains the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a D input terminal 1D terminal and a clock input terminal 1CK terminal that are both grounded (GND). The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is stored and is not output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a PR terminal, which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors momentary power failure, is input, and based on these signals, a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC22, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the voltage is applied to the Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. +5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal as the ground terminal is grounded (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal that inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal as the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. It is in an unconnected state.

In the present embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal. This power failure clear signal is designed to be stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed after starting to be output in the main control side power-on processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with the logic being LOW. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latched state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. is output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI through the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function and is input to the CLR terminal. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is adapted to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs to the payout control board 951 as a payout power outage warning signal, and outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the amplifier MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR20. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR20. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are met, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is output to the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Input to PA1.

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the payout control board 951 as the payout power outage warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the wiring is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). In addition, when the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 in the payout control board 951 In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is a switching circuit of the preceding stage, and a circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34 and the transistor MTR22 of the succeeding stage is a switching circuit of the latter stage, and is a D-type flip-flop. It is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC 22 .

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR21. The switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the subsequent switch circuit is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning on the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power outage warning signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 951 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is applied to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21. The input turns ON the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, thereby turning off the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 through the wiring (harness). A payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951 .

In addition, the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal is open as shown in FIG. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. is electrically connected to The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control section 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. , one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

A circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, turning off the transistor MTR23. , the switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side, turning on the transistor MTR23. The switch circuit is also turned ON.

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the logic HI signal is preset to the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the PR terminal, which is the terminal PR, the logic becomes LOW and the signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. is input to the peripheral control board 1510 .

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since the signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes HIGH in logic and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness). 1510.

In this way, a main control input circuit 1310b that transmits a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a blackout warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. A main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a signal output from a peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal and a main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function each have one transistor. While the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510 is the same logic, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is issued to the payout control board 951. The main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs a power failure warning signal has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage. The logic is the inversion of the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

The collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the main control MPU 1310a through the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb is connected via wiring (harness) to the payout control board. In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit without reset function 1310cb The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to a pull-up resistor one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are located between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board, whereas the power failure warning signal logic (ON / OFF signal) using +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a 951 and between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is performed by the power failure warning signal logic (ON/OFF signal) using +12V, which is a voltage higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU 952a and the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

[9-6. Various input/output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal as the main control output without reset function. The main payment serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the circuit 1310cb without reset function from the main control output circuit 1310cb to the payout control board 951, and the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310 cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition to the above-described operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above A payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are input via the main control input circuit 1310b. respectively entered or equal.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, a main payment ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. and output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. For the device, a drive signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various displays, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output to the payout control board 951 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, an interface circuit for communication between main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 1310 is supplied with +12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise entering the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress this, +12V, which is a higher voltage than +5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is used for transmission, thereby increasing its reliability.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. It is On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 includes, as a communication interface circuit, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC built-in). It is composed mainly of

+12 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, for example, due to a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 +12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 μF) shown in FIG. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data can be transferred to the transmission shift register 41aea by the unit 1310aec and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as main peripheral serial data.

The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using +12V, which is higher than +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, +12 V is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 so that it is applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits it. When it is transmitted from the shift register 1310aea as main cycle serial data, it is possible to transmit a main cycle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI by +12V from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a is 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data of up to 10 packets are stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Also, in this embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (third terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 on the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). A resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

A TXB terminal for outputting a main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND).

A circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded (GND). As a result, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, forward current does not flow through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50, turning on the transistor MTR50 and also turning on the switch circuit. . As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6), which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the +5V side by AR11 and electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler AIC10, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is transmitted as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. is input to the input terminal of

As a result, as described above, when the +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or momentary power failure, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as +5V. When a power outage or momentary power failure occurs, +5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU 1310a. The transmission of the data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main-circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed. The peripheral control board 1510 can reliably receive the data without missing or missing data.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor MR50 to turn on the transistor MTR50, thereby turning on the photocoupler AIC10. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I/O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. . Thus, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of

Thus, in this embodiment, the +5V power line to which +5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied, and the +12V power line to which +12V which is the communication voltage applied via the diode MD50 are applied. , measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the +5V power supply line, the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, even if a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the +5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h which is the first auxiliary power supply By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, it is possible to maintain the state in which the control reference voltage is applied. +12V applied to the +12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage for the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the communication voltage is applied from the +12V power supply line through the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained by applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply. there is As a result, the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 can be prevented from being interrupted, and the command can be prevented from being lost. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate command failures immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or during an instantaneous power failure.

In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all used as main peripheral serial data, and are composed of the resistor MR50, the resistors MR51 and MR52, and the transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. and 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset so that all of them function as interface circuits as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the non-functioning main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt or drop multiple commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. can be received without fail.

[10. Circuit of Payout Control Board]
Next, the circuit etc. of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. FIG. 80 is a circuit diagram showing the circuit of the payout control unit, etc., FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input/output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input/output diagram showing various input/output signals to/from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input/output signals with the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Dispensing Control Filter Circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a is mainly composed of a payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The 1st terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with +5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). The +5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 outputs +5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 has one end connected to the ground (GND), and the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). By being electrically connected to each other, the +5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is further smoothed by removing ripples. This smoothed +5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, etc., which will be described later. . It should be noted that the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is supplied with the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off. It is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after generation.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. A VSS terminal, which is a ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, is grounded (GND).

Moreover, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end is grounded (GND) and the capacitor PC4 which is grounded. is electrically connected to the other end of the The VBB terminal of this payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4. electrically connected to the terminal. That is, +5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC1 is intended to be applied to the positive terminal of As a result, as described above, when the +5V generated by the power source generation circuit 935d of the power source substrate 931 shown in FIG. As it is supplied to the payout control board 951, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate. The memory contents are held by applying the VBB voltage. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of Payout Control Unit]
The payout control unit 952 includes a payout control MPU 952a, a payout control input circuit 952b, a payout control output circuit 952c, a payout motor drive circuit 952d, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e, and peripheral circuits as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 that outputs a clock signal (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment). Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, followed by the payout control crystal oscillator, payout control input circuit, payout motor drive circuit, CR unit input/output circuit, and various input/output signals to the payout control MPU.

[10-2-1. Dispensing control system reset]
+5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, as shown in FIG. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and incorporates a delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacity of this capacitor PC5. It is possible to do so. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when +5V input to the power terminal reaches a threshold value (eg, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The output terminal is an open-collector output type capacitor, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the other end of which is grounded (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of PC6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is greater than the threshold, the output terminal is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output with reset function While input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is applied to the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. Input to the reset pin respectively. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function The attached payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. One end of the power supply terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND) and the other end of a capacitor PC7, and the +5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Also, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is electrically unconnected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Dispensing Control Crystal Oscillator]
+5V from which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, as shown in FIG. This VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC8, one end of which is grounded (GND), and the +5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VCC terminal, this smoothed +5V is also applied to the OE terminal, which is the output enable terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0. The payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout controlled crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives payout power failure notice signals from the door frame open switch 618, the body frame open switch 619, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. circuit, handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. . First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be explained, followed by the circuit to which the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input, the circuit to which the output power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. In addition, the full tank detection sensor 279 and various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3(a). Circuit where the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame open switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 3 is closed by the body frame 4, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is a pull-up resistor PR20, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via a resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20, one end of which is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR20 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR21, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

Further, the No. 1 terminal of the door frame open switch 618 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 through the resistor PR21. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 through the resistor PR24. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR22 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR20 and a capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed with the body frame 4, It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR21, PR22 and transistor PTR20, a circuit composed of resistors PR24, PR25 and transistor PTR21, and a circuit composed of resistors PR26, PR27 and transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. It is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by a detection signal from 618 .

When the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on. Therefore, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. be. Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . Further, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 22 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 through the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is off, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR20. , the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR21 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784. FIG. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is raised to +5V, thereby turning the transistor PTR22 ON. Then, the switch circuit is also turned ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this way, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open signal whose logic is HI is sent to the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a by turning on the door frame open switch 618. The outer end frame door open information output signal which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal plate 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, When the door frame 3 is closed to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. , the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

[10-2-3(b). Circuit where the detection signal from the body frame open switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 is of a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the switch is turned off (disconnected). The No. 2 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is grounded (GND), while the No. 1 terminal of the body frame open switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line. , and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via a resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded (GND). In addition, the first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness). electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR23 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23, and the signal is input to the external terminal plate 784 as the outer end frame door open information output signal.

The first terminal of the body frame open switch 619 is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22, and the wiring (harness) shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 . When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. By turning ON/OFF the transistor PTR24, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as the main frame door opening signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR28 and a capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in voltage from the body frame open switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which the contacts forming the body frame open switch 619 repeat ON/OFF for a short period of time.

A circuit composed of resistors PR29, PR30 and transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of resistors PR31, PR32 and transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from body frame open switch 619. FIG.

When the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR23 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI. is input to the external terminal plate 784 . In addition, when the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 24 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310 .

On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side at the external terminal plate 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer edge frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated. It is input to the external terminal board 784 . When the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR28. , the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is generated by the main control board. 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned ON to input the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic is HI to the external terminal plate 784. A main frame door open signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the main body frame open switch 619 is turned off to turn off the logic. is input to the external terminal plate 784 , and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310 .

In this embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 69, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 receives the main frame door opening signal. Although it cannot be determined whether the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the body frame 4 is open, which does not occur during a normal game, and that an outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since the outer end frame door open information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, the hall computer outputs the door frame door open information output signal based on the outer end frame door open information output signal. 3 is released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 are opened. It can be determined that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

In this embodiment, as described above, the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are normally closed switches. Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body frame open switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. By adopting normally closed switches for the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 in this manner, it is possible to output the main frame door open signal to the main control board 1310 even in the event of a short circuit, and A frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

If the door frame open switch 618 and the body frame open switch 619 are changed from normally closed switches to normally open (normally open (NO)) switches (door frame open switch 618' and body frame open switch 619'), , the door frame open switch 618' is turned ON (conducting) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turned OFF (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4. . The body frame open switch 619 ′ is turned on (conducting) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2 and turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 . Then, even if the door frame open switch 618' is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the door frame 3 will be in a state of being released from the body frame 4. Even if the frame release switch 619' is broken and the switch is turned OFF (disconnected), the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. FIG. In this way, even if normally open switches are used for the door frame open switch 618' and the body frame open switch 619', the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. An outer end frame door open information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 .

[10-2-3(c). Circuit to which output power failure warning signal from power failure monitoring circuit is input]
A transmission line for transmitting a power outage warning signal from a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 has one end electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR40 electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, and the other end of the resistor PR40. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of transistor PTR40 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and the non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR40 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as the payout power failure warning signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR41, PR42, and transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a payout power failure warning signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310. FIG.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of the two voltages of +12 V and +24 V from the power supply board 931, and when the power failure or momentary power failure signs are detected, the reset function is disabled. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the +12V and +24V voltages for signs of power failure or momentary power failure, and as described above, the +24V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the +12V voltage is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of the large condition are established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of +24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf When the condition is established, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is pulled up to the +12V side by the above-mentioned pull-up resistor PR40 through the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When both the condition that the voltage of +24V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is greater than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V. Occasionally, since a payout power outage notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, thereby turning off the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +5V side by resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power outage warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of +24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of +12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of +12V and/or +24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 to turn on the transistor PTR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltage of +12V and / or +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. This is because, as described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of +12V and/or +24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltages of +12V and +24V, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3(d). Circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. is entered in The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is circuit-configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded (GND), and one end is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line in the payout control board 951. is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. This three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, magnetically shielded with ferrite, and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is grounded (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50 is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 via a resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50, and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after noise components are removed in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full-tank detection sensor. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded (GND), and is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. Capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR47 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Payout control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it.) It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR41 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full tank signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR45, PR46 and transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. FIG.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of stored game balls. In this embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, In the payout control board 951, a signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the housing space is filled with the stored game balls. , the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. is input to the payout control board 951 .

When the accommodation space is not filled with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315, and through the power supply board 931, to the payout control board 951. A signal pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and logic HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning on the transistor PTR41 and also turning on the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full-tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 via the payout control board. At 951, the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41, thereby turning off the transistor PTR41 and also turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC50. Although it was a circuit configuration, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball out detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. It has a circuit configuration in which it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full-tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , the path for transmitting the detection signal is extremely long, and is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is filled with stored game balls. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the accommodation space is full of stored game balls, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotator. It is designed to control. In other words, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a detects that the game balls in which the accommodation space is stored are not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the accommodation space is full of game balls stored. When the game balls are filled up to the upstream side of the winning ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotor to continue the payout of the game balls, the payout rotor itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 is abnormally loaded, the payout motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up and breaks down. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first filtered by the full tank detection sensor 3-terminal filter PIC 50 to remove the noise component so that such a problem does not occur. adopted.

[10-2-3(e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The first and second output terminals of the operation switch 954 are grounded (GND), and the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) at one end and the other end of the capacitor PC41. ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 via a resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53, one end of which is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR54, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. By turning ON/OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the preceding stage and the subsequent stage, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage changes, and the signal is the RWMCLR signal input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. is entered in

The third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to +5 V by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor PTR42 via a resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5V side by a pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 through a resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is connected to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR44 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

A circuit composed of a pull-up resistor PR48 and a capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact forming the operation switch 954 repeats ON/OFF for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the operation switch 954 caused by .

A circuit composed of resistors PR49, PR50 and transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the previous stage, a circuit composed of resistors PR52, PR53 and transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the latter stage, and resistors PR55, PR56 and transistor PTR44. is a switch circuit, which is turned on/off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954 .

As described above, the operation switch 954 is set to the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or to cancel the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, and to cancel errors after the power is turned on (after a period of time during which the RAM clear function has passed, that is, after a predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on). It has a function and The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ), it becomes an error cancellation signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to +5V by the pull-up resistor PR48. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn on the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage applied is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled up to the +5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the error is not instructed, and error cancellation is performed when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). It is judged that it is not instructive.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the third and fourth output terminals of the operation switch 954 are pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is generated by the transistor PTR44. , the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is raised to the +5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the third and fourth terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is output to the preceding transistor. The voltage is input to the base terminal of PTR42 to turn off the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage applied is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor PTR43 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs RAM clear for erasing information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. If the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), the error is cleared. It is judged to be an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is being operated, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 to turn off the transistor PTR44, thereby turning off the switch circuit. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A clear signal is input to the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives a RAM clear signal whose logic is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above. is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is an instruction to perform RAM clear for erasing information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Dispensing Motor Drive Circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d is mainly composed of a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the +12V power line and the +5V power line, respectively, and +12V and +5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). Grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to a power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is designed to be The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the third terminal and the tenth terminal which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. , and +12 V or +5 V is applied as a motor drive voltage to the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 via the Zener diode PZD 60 based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supplied to the terminal and the tenth terminal, respectively, and also supplied to the payout motor 834 .

The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, 6th terminal and 7th terminal, are grounded (GND) respectively, and the base terminal of the drive ICPIC 60 is grounded. A payout motor drive signal is input to certain 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals via resistors PR60 to PR63. The 2nd, 4th, 9th and 11th terminals that are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are connected to the 1st, 5th, 8th and 12th terminals that are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, the excitation signal A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834, respectively. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via the resistors PR60 to PR63. Outputs are made to base terminals 1, 5, 8 and 12, respectively. These drive pulses are generated by switching exciting currents flowing through the phases (/B phase, B phase, A phase, and /A phase) of the payout motor 834 to rotate the payout motor 834 . When the driving pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/B phase, B phase, A phase, /A phase) is interrupted by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. If this back electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 will be damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 is electrically connected to the front stage of the 3rd and 10th terminals, which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. A circuit configuration that

[10-2-5. CR unit input/output circuit]
Next, a CR unit input/output circuit 952e for inputting/outputting various signals to/from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. The payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 as described above. , are supplied, and a predetermined voltage VL (+12 V) and ground LG generated from AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Through the terminal plate 869, an EXS signal to inform that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible. and output As shown in FIG. 84, the input/output circuit for inputting/outputting these various signals and the like is mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (which incorporate an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. A cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 . A resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of PTR71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and also electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line.

The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR75 having one end electrically connected to the +5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. 80 through ICPIC80 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) without inverting it.). is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR70 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is not only electrically connected to the resistor PR72, but also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line. is electrically connected to the other end of the The ON/OFF of the transistor PTR71 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71, and the signal is input to the power substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

A circuit composed of resistors PR71, PR74, and transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR70 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned ON, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. be.

A circuit composed of resistors PR72, PR76 and transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on/off by turning on/off the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, thereby turning on the transistor PTR71 and the switch circuit. It turns ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply substrate 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply substrate 931. be.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the power supply substrate 931 through the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply substrate 931. be done.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. A resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as the BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6. FIG.

A predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. A resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. there is The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line. and a non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 has eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) without inverting it.). It is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON/OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a as a BRQ signal.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the +5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic has become HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. Thus, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same logic as the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6. FIG.

An EXS signal that tells that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb, and is output to the payout control output circuit without reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC73 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is connected to the CR unit 6 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. The ON/OFF of the photocoupler PIC73 changes the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73, and the signal is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW becomes the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting EXS is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

A PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out rental balls from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is sent via a resistor PR84 to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74. is entered in The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line. A resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, while the photocoupler PIC74 is ON, +12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a The photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF when the logic of the PRDY signal that is output from the output terminal of through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded with the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is connected to the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. , is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. By turning ON/OFF the photocoupler PIC74, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

When +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. 6 is input to the built-in controller. On the other hand, when +12 V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a through the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned OFF, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The resulting PRDY is input to the built-in controller of the CR unit 6 . Thus, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input/output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input/output signals input/output from input/output terminals of various input/output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives serial data from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b as a main payment serial data reception signal. be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be sent to the main control board 1310 is sent as the payer serial data transmission signal to the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb. A payout serial data transmission signal is transmitted to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit without reset function 952cb.

Each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a receives the above-described RWMCLR signal, payout power outage notice signal, door open signal, full tank signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection signal 1, etc.), etc. are input, for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310, which notifies completion of normal reception of the payer serial data reception signal described above, is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. Also, detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are inputted via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and the EXS signal and the PRDY signal are output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input/output circuit 952e, the voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, and the voltage switching signal is sent from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Alternatively, the payout motor drive signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout motor drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition, for example, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a payer ACK signal to inform that the main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs the payout control output circuit 952ca to the payer. Output the ACK signal to the main control board 1310, or output the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. For example, output to the error LED indicator 860b.

[10-3. Various input/output signals with the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input/output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input/output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input/output signals with the main control board 1310 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(a), the payout control board 951 controls the above-described payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, etc. is output to the main control board 1310 . These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310. FIG.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 provides, in addition to the above-described main payment serial data reception signal, main payment ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal), a main prize number information output signal, a 15 round big hit information output signal, And 2 rounds jackpot information output signal such as jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting entrance winning information output signal etc. A game information signal, a payout blackout warning signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310 . These input signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85(b), in addition to the above-described outer end frame door open information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. Jackpot information including a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round big win information output signal and a 2 round big win information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Game information signals such as an output signal, a probability fluctuation information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start winning prize information output signal are output to the external terminal plate 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the +12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal plate 784 . In other words, two signals are output to the external terminal plate 784, the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and the prize ball number information output signal, and the main prize ball number from the main control board 1310 side is output. Information output signal, 15 rounds jackpot information output signal, 2nd round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special pattern display information output signal, normal pattern display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting entrance winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951 .

A signal output from the external terminal plate 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the games played by the players. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer outputs the number of jackpots with two rounds (2-round jackpot ) and the number of big wins with 15 rounds (the number of occurrences of 15-round big wins) is the sum of the number of big wins of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the 2-round big wins and the number of occurrences of the 15-land big wins from the total number of big wins. , it is not possible to grasp whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. A data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players refer to the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter to select whether or not to play the game. Some do.

However, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased toward the number of occurrences of the two-round big win, so even when the player starts playing, only the two-round big wins occur. Sometimes the 15 round jackpot doesn't happen easily. In this way, the number of occurrences of the big win game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may unnecessarily stir up the gambling spirit of the player.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, by separately outputting the 15 round big win information output signal and the 2 round big win information output signal to the hall computer as the big win information output signal, the hall computer can output the number of occurrences of the 2 round big win, The number of 15-round big hits and the number of occurrences can be accurately grasped. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big wins actually occurring in the pachinko machine 1 is the 2-round big win or the 15-round big win, and the data counter stores 15 rounds. Since the number of occurrences of the big win and the number of occurrences of the 2nd round big win can be separately displayed or only the number of occurrences of the 15th round big win can be displayed as the number of occurrences of the big win game state, it is possible to stimulate the gambling spirit of the player more than necessary. do not have.

In the present embodiment, the 2-round big win information output signal is output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round big win to the end of the 2-round big win, and the 15-round big win information output signal is also output when the 15-round big win occurs. It is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the time it occurs to the time it ends. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round big win occurs, the 2-round big win information output signal is output for a predetermined period. The 2-round big win information output signal and the 15-round big win information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round big win occurs, the 15-round big win information output signal is outputted to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer only for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of Output Terminals on External Terminal Board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. The external terminal plate 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with an external terminal plate cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal plate.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 outputs the outer end frame door open information output signal, the prize ball number information output signal, the main prize ball number information output signal, the 15 round big win information output signal, and the 2 round big win information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the probability fluctuation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 .

Briefly describing these various signals, the outer end frame door open information output signal is not generated during a normal game when the player says that the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 are open. This is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is generated each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize number information output signal is the first starting hole 2002, the second starting hole 2004, the general winning holes 2001 and 2201, and the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to inform that each time the number of game balls scheduled to be put out as prize balls based on the entered game balls reaches 10 balls, and the 15-round big win information output signal is a 15-round big win. The 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that indicates that a 2-round jackpot is occurring, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that a probability fluctuation occurs. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the special symbol display information output signal is the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal that informs that the variable display is finished (stopped). It is a signal that tells that it is in a stopped state, the time saving medium information output signal is a signal that tells that a time saving state is occurring, and the start winning prize information output signal is the first start shown in FIG. Each time a game ball enters the opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, it is a signal to notify that effect.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal plate 784 . The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. In the embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the number of prize balls information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls each time the number of prize balls information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of the put out game balls.

The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door open information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door open information output signal indicates that the door frame 3 and/or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and/or the body frame 4 are opened. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer controls the door frame 3 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is being input. / Or it can grasp that the main body frame 4 is opened.

The output terminal PT3 is colored gray and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal terminates (stops) the variable display of special symbols on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the end (stop) of the special symbol fluctuation display in the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3 It is designed to be output for 0.128 seconds at times. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of special symbols has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to display the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 can be grasped.

The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a start winning prize information output signal. As described above, the starting hole winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 shown in FIG. , Every time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting hole winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting hole winning information output signal is inputted. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting hole 2004, count the number of times the starting hole winning prize information output signal is input, and send it to the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

The output terminal PT5 is colored black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. The 15-round jackpot information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 15-round jackpot is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round big win information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the pachinko machine 1 generating 15-round big wins while the 15-round big win information output signal is being input. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 15-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 15-round big win information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a 2-round jackpot information output signal. The 2-round big win information output signal is, as described above, a signal that indicates that a 2-round big win is occurring. It is designed to be output. When the 2-round big win information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is inputted to the hall computer, the hall computer keeps the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round big win information output signal is being inputted. The state can be grasped, and the total number of occurrences of the 2-round big win in the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by counting the number of times the 2-round big-win information output signal is inputted.

The output terminal PT7 is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal that informs that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is designed to be output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. FIG. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. In 1402, it is possible to grasp that the variable display of normal symbols has ended (stopped), count the number of times, and display the total number of variable displays of normal symbols on the normal symbol display device 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. The number of times can be grasped.

The output terminal PT8 is colored red and outputs a time saving information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during time saving is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving information output signal is input. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times that the information output signal during time saving is input.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs a probability fluctuation information output signal. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal that indicates that a probability fluctuation is occurring. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the information output signal during probability fluctuation, and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the probability fluctuation is occurring. In addition, it is possible to grasp the total number of occurrences of probability fluctuations in the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of times the probability fluctuation information output signal is input.

The output terminal PT10 is colored light blue and outputs a main prize number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. This is a signal that notifies each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the played game balls, and is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds in this embodiment. It has become so. When the main prize number information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the pachinko machine 1 outputs 10 prize balls each time the main prize number information output signal is input to the hall computer. It is possible to grasp that game balls are scheduled to be put out as prize balls, and to grasp the total number of game balls to be put out by the pachinko machine 1 by counting the number of game balls to be put out. can do. It should be noted that game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on game balls that have entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 When the number of balls reaches 20 or more and the main prize number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds, It is designed to be output with an interval of 0.128 seconds as if it were one continuous signal.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal plate 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, while the output terminals PT3 to PT10 output the main control board. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged to be output via (pass through) the payout control board 951 . The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are colored, respectively. By electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, respectively, it is possible to mistakenly connect other wirings. can be prevented from being connected to each other. Various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed, and various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 are arranged in a line on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are arranged on the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a row from the left side of the center toward the right side, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side It is possible to prevent erroneous electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main winning ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively sent from the external terminal board 784 to the hall. configured to communicate to a computer. This is because, for example, game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When the number of game balls is running low, if the pachinko machine 1 happens to hit a 15-round jackpot, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the game balls are paid out. (For example, if ball clogging or ball entanglement occurs in the payout device 830, game balls cannot be paid out unless this is resolved). Then, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches ten. Since it is a signal that conveys that every time, when game balls cannot be paid out, the payout control board 951 outputs a winning ball number information output signal and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a hall clerk or the like. A hall clerk or the like checks, for example, a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 to identify the position of the clogged ball (or, for example, to Then, by specifying the position of the clogged ball or the position of the jammed ball and resolving it, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, since the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress even when the hall clerk or the like is proceeding with the work, the game balls are paid out by the work of the hall clerk or the like after the jackpot of 15 rounds is completed. When the state is restored, the payout control board 951 will pay out the game balls that have not been paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in a period when the 15 round big win is completed and the 15 round big win is not occurring. Every time the number of game balls actually put out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10, it outputs a prize number information output signal to notify that effect and transmits it to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784. It will happen. As a result, an extremely large number of game balls are put out even though the 15-round jackpot has not yet occurred. , a problem arises in that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between .

Therefore, in this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the prize balls are actually paid out, that is, the number of prize balls information output signal output by the payout control board 951 is different. As a signal of the main control board 1310, the game ball that entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2201, and the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect, and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal plate 784 are output. A system was adopted in which the information was transmitted to the hall computer via the system. As a result, even if the above-described troubles (ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle, etc., ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball jamming, etc.) occur, the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this game state The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the relationship can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the game state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls to be paid out in the game state.

[12. Circuit of effect display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 450V for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing in the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. Liquid crystal module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 is mainly composed of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives a serial signal (serial data) from the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effects on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. are transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the positive signal and the negative signal are input by the common mode choke coil SDL0. Noise can be separated from negative signals. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are inputted to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a termination resistor (terminator) and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, thereby preventing disturbance of the serial signal.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, and It restores to three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal (that is, restores to a parallel signal before being serialized). Although the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source are each 8 bits, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are , the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, for a total of 18 bits.

The liquid crystal module circuit 450V receives serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. Two signals obtained by differentiating certain LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also inputted. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured so that the circuit is connected so as to As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. , is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the two differential signals of the positive signal and the negative signal are not input to the motion circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A signal output from the transmitter IC 1512d for frame side effect is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V.

The forced switching circuit 1512f outputs the signal output from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door-frame From the transmitter IC 1512d for side effects, the serial signal (serial data) by THine Electronics Co., Ltd.'s "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential method is used as a positive signal and a negative signal, and from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, it is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentially converted into a plus signal and a minus signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, respectively. Door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in differential circuit 1512e are input, A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 . This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 .

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, is used to produce the startup screen on the game board side when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period during which the display is displayed on the display device 1600, or during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is being performed, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 is operated. This is sent as an operation confirmation request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, THine Electronics Co., Ltd. The data format is completely different from the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 judges that the signal is not output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and an abnormal event occurs. Assuming that it is data, a LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal, which will be described later. In other words, in this embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by utilizing the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 to output the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from that of the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 By outputting it, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+3.3 V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application form, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminals of the frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal that serves as the ground for this digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply is supplied to the VDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal that serves as the ground for this TTL output. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal that serves as the ground for this LVDS input, and the capacitor SDC2 is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. It removes high frequency noise from the +3.3V power supply line.

The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal that serves as the ground for this PLL circuit, and the power is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the +3.3V power supply line.

When +3.3 V is supplied (applied) to the PDWN terminal, the logic becomes HI, indicating normal operation. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via a resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of a varistor SDZ0, one end of which is grounded. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltages on the +3.3V electrical line supplied through resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later. (logic transitions from LOW to HI) or falling edge (logic transitions from HI to LOW). As shown, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to +3.3V, a rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal instructs whether or not to permit output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals, D0 to D17 terminals, and CLKOUT terminal) to be described later. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal, the output is always enabled. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to +3.3V, it will be in a state where it cannot be output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them. Operation modes include a normal mode and a handshake mode. In normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are generated based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. and three synchronous signals (3-bit synchronous signals) of a horizontal synchronous signal, a vertical synchronous signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is connected. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). This shake hand mode is automatically switched.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal, For some reason, the parallel signal restored by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is abnormal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the damping resistor SDR2, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and controls the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510 . The peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d in order to inform the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d of the establishment of a predetermined condition based on the input LOCKN signal. to output When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the door frame side presentation drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Send to receiver IC SDIC0. When such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is received by the door frame side presentation receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. In addition, the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door A direct electrical connection may be made via the relay terminal plate 882 .

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal for outputting a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistance SDR2, which is the damping resistor of the performance display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511 a of the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510 .

The SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals output three synchronizing signals, a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on serial signals (serial data) respectively input to the RXIN+ terminal and the RXIN- terminal. terminal. In this embodiment, the SYNC0 to SYNC2 terminals are unconnected terminals because the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used.

The DE terminal outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that indicates whether the data output from the D0 to D17 terminals, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid. A DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via a resistor SDR3, which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4, which is a damping resistor.

The D0 to D17 terminals receive three video signals (18 This is a data output terminal for outputting a 1-bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and the signal lines of the red video signals R0 to R5 are damping resistors. They are respectively input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the same ground. It's becoming

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and FIG. is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, will be described, followed by various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board, and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be explained.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicate with the pachinko machine 1 and drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 which are storage trays (a device that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88(a), the main control board Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951. Command 10H designates one prize ball, and command 11H. , 2 prize balls are specified, . . . , 15 prize balls are specified by command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 to pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322, which are storage trays, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. Commands 20H to 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be sent to , command 20H designates one prize ball, command 21H designates two prize balls, and command 2EH designates a prize ball. 15 spheres are specified. The payout control board 951 controls to drive the payout motor 834 and pay out game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88(c), and this command 30H designates a self-check. If an ACK signal output from the receiving side as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input. Check connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 checks the connection state with the CR unit 6 .

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. and a mode showing variations of effects having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

Various commands, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, are related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power on, normal figure synchronization effect related, normal electric role effect related, notification display, status classified into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect relation is based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and state designation at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned a status of "A*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 1 specification command specifies loss, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. , Toku-zu 1 synchronization production end command is intended to indicate the end of Toku-zu 1 synchronization production, the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and time saving state. In addition, in the probability and time saving state, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state, a low probability It consists of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (as a normal game state, A low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of hitting the jackpot is set higher than the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, normal by the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time during which patterns are variably displayed as compared with a non-time-saving state (normal game state) and stop-displaying in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result, the ordinary lottery result by the ordinary lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is obtained. The number of times of stop display is increased compared to the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is increased compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state). By increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of the game ball to the second start port 2004 shown, it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of balls (in other words, compared to the non-time saving state By increasing the number of determinations as to whether or not to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and by lengthening the period of the opening and closing operation of the pair of movable pieces when the pair of movable pieces are to be opened and closed, the second starting port 2004 It is a state of increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of game balls to.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization production start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol 1 synchronization production start, special figure 1 synchronization The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the special symbol win-loss information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

[13-2-2. Special Figure 2 Synchronization Production Related]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. It consists of a command named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end regarding the second special symbol display device 1405 of. These various commands are assigned a status of "B*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the special pattern 2 specification command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization production instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization production.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, special figure 2 tuning The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 fluctuation time elapses (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, the section related to big win includes big win opening, big win 1 open Nth time display, big win 1 closed display, big win 1 count display, big win ending, big win pattern display, small win opening. , small-hit open display, small-hit count display, and small-hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned a status of "C*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command instructs the start of jackpot opening. During or start of opening of the N-th round of the large winning opening 2005), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is the start of the closing of the large winning opening 1 between rounds (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). The command for displaying the number of game balls from 0 to 10 (count 0 to 10) indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or has started closing between rounds (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that entered the big winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the big winning ending command instructs the start of the big winning ending, and the big winning design display command It instructs the display of pattern information.

In addition, the small hit opening command instructs the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is the start of the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting unit 2100 at the time of the small hit or opening start), and the small hit count display command is a small hit middle and big winning opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during a small hit is detected by the count sensor , and the small-hit ending command instructs the start of the small-hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is sent at the start of the jackpot opening, and the big win opening 1 Nth display command is when the big win 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (of the starter unit 2100 When the large winning opening 2005 is opened for the Nth round), the large winning opening 1 closed display command is transmitted when the large winning opening 1 is closed (start closing of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100), The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 and when the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot pattern display command is sent when the big win opening is opened (when the big win opening 2005 of the starter unit 2100 is opened) ).

In addition, the small winning opening command is transmitted at the start of the small winning opening, and the small winning opening display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small winning (at the time of opening the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 at the time of the small winning), The small hit count display command is transmitted when the small hit middle and large winning opening is won (when the game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small winning), and the small winning ending command is , Sent at the start of the small winning ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on consists of a command named "power-on state" and "return destination of main control at power-on". These various commands are assigned a status of "D*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command instructs the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. When the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. Information to instruct when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure). .) In the above-mentioned, low probability short working hours state, high probability short working hours state, low probability non-short working hours state, and high probability non short working hours state Information that indicates whether to return in which state (probability and short working hours state) , and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, what kind of game specification (for example, probability variation occurs In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol is changed is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (so-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of a pachinko machine consists of a series code for specifying which type of machine type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type, and a series code for specifying the copyright of the work. and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the game specification that the state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs, in addition to the probability change in a state where the number of special symbol fluctuations is limited and a game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes

The main control return destination command at power-on instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

As for the transmission timing of the power-on state command and the main control recovery target command at power-on, when the main control board power is turned on ) is sent to Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, the main control side power on time processing described later is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is executed. In the transmission process, a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Related to Futsuzu Synchronization Production]
The general pattern synchronization production relation is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. Consists of commands with the names of normal pattern synchronization production start, normal pattern designation, general pattern synchronization production end, and change state designation regarding the device 1402. These various commands are assigned a status of "E*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal pattern synchronization production start command instructs the start of the general pattern synchronization production with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern specification command specifies a loss, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronous production end command indicates the end of the normal figure synchronous production, and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation indicates the probability and the time saving state. In the probability and time saving state, as described above, a low probability time saving state indicating that it is a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability state indicating that it is a time saving state High probability time saving state It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually As a game state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern synchronization production start command is sent at the start of normal pattern 1 fluctuation, the general pattern designation command is sent immediately after the general pattern synchronization production start, and the general pattern synchronization production end command is , It is transmitted when the normal pattern fluctuation time elapses (normal pattern confirmation), and the state designation command at the time of fluctuation is transmitted immediately after the normal pattern win-lose information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
8, which are opened and closed by driving the starting solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. It consists of commands named hit opening, general electric open display, and general drawing ending. These various commands are assigned a status of "F*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The general pattern per opening command is to instruct the general pattern per opening to start, and the general pattern open display command is the start of the general pattern open state, or when expanding), and the ending command per normal pattern instructs the start of ending per normal pattern.

As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the general pattern opening command is sent at the start of the general pattern opening, and the general pattern open display command is sent when the general pattern is opened (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the start solenoid 2107 When spreading in the direction), the ending command per normal pattern is sent at the start of the ending per normal pattern. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display consists of commands named Winning Abnormal Display, Connection Abnormal Display, Disconnection/Short Circuit Abnormal Display, Magnetic Detection Switch Abnormal Display, Door Open, and Door Close. These various commands are assigned a status of "6*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 when the winning opening is entered except during the big winning (when the condition device is in operation). is detected by the count sensor 4005). It instructs the start of connection abnormality notification when there is a connection abnormality. 4005 or the like, it instructs the start of disconnection/short-circuit abnormality display. It instructs the start of the magnetism detection switch abnormality notification when a

Further, the door open command is based on the detection signal (open signal) from the door frame open switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the door frame closing command instructs the door open notification, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 . It instructs the end of the door open notification when it is in the state of being opened. On the other hand, the body frame open command is based on the detection signal (open signal) from the body frame open switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the body frame is in the open state, the body frame closing command instructs the body frame open notification. When the door is in a closed state, it instructs to end the notification of opening the body frame.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a large winning opening other than during the jackpot (during operation of the condition device), and the connection abnormality display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 It is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission to, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is the first start sensor 4002, the second start sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. The magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door open command is transmitted when door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a state of being opened with respect to the body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch 618). The main body frame open command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619), and the main body is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 619). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display is divided into commands named Frame status 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command), Error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the error cancellation command) and Frame status 2 command. there is These various commands are assigned a status of "7*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. Along with setting the status, the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error cancellation navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7*H" is added to these received commands. is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is transmitted when power is restored, when the frame state changes, and during error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted when power is restored. , and when the frame state changes. Note that these formatted frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-9. test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section consists of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" indicates a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various tests of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration board shown in FIG. 72). This is for inspecting various substrates such as the driving amplifier substrate 194).

As for the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at times other than the RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and the RAM clear. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[13-2-10. others]
As shown in FIG. 90, the other divisions include start-up winning, variable reduction operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and It consists of a command named special symbol 2 memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9*H" and a mode of "**H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). , which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command instructs the start of starting opening winning effect, and starts the effect when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004, respectively. The high-probability end designation command instructs the state transition from the high-probability state to the low-probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command. , special symbol 1 reserved 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. The number of balls that have not been held (number of reservations)), and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 8) The second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (number of reservations) that has not yet been used for the variable display of special symbols, and the normal symbol storage command is normal symbol 1 reservation 0 to 4 It conveys the number of balls (the number of balls (retained number) that have passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and have not yet been used for normal symbol fluctuation display on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400). There is, and the special symbol 1 storage prefetch effect command is read ahead and the special symbol 1 is reserved before the special symbol 1 is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 Based on the first special symbol display device 1403, it is intended to instruct the start of the pre-reading effect to notify the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of special symbols in the device 1405, it prefetches and instructs the start of the look-ahead performance to announce the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting entrance winning command is issued at the time of starting entrance winning (when the game ball enters the first starting entrance 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting entrance sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second When the game ball enters the second starting hole 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting hole sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation reduction operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the stop period has passed), and the high-probability end designation command is , In the case of "high probability N times", it is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the high probability number of times has been digested (after the stop period has passed), and the special symbol 1 storage command is the special symbol 1 operation pending ball number change When the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and the first special symbol display device 1403 of the function display unit 1400 has a reserved number that is not yet used for variable display of special symbols, further the first start When the game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of reservations increases, or when the number of reservations decreases by using the first special symbol display device 1403 for variable display of special symbols from the number of reservations). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of special symbol 2 operation pending balls changes (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 changes the special symbol. In a state where there is a reserved number that has not been used yet, when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the second special pattern display 1405 fluctuates the special design. used for display and the number of reservations has decreased), and the normal design memory command is transmitted when the number of normal design 1 operation reservation balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the normal design of the function display unit 1400 In a state where there is a reserved number that has not yet been used for variable display of normal symbols on the display device 1402, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 and the reserved number increases, or from the reserved number, the normal symbol display device 1402 is displayed. ), and the special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls has decreased by using it for variable display of normal symbols, and when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls increases (the game ball is in the first start port 2002 The special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is transmitted when the number of reserved balls increases by entering a ball), and the special symbol 2 memory prefetch effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls in special pattern 2 operation increases (a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the number of reservations increases increased). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is issued when the starting opening wins (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the second starting opening When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), it is transmitted from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start-up winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is designed to be used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start-up winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not give voice notification.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, various commands from the payout control board 951 are divided into commands named frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and frame state 2. Frame state 1, error cancellation navigation, and The order of priority is set in the order of frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (equivalent to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, abnormal connection, and unconnected CR. represents a bit.) is set to 1, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when the tank is full, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1 when 50 or more stocks are in stock, and connection failure A value of 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value of 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 1 command have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the error cancellation command) is prepared for ball catching, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. An error sets bit 3 (B3) to the value 1, and a retry error sets the value 1 to bit 4 (B4). Here, the "payout detection sensor error" indicates whether or not there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. A "retry error" indicates that an inconsistent game ball was repeatedly put out by a retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have value 0 for B0, value 0 for B1, value 0 for B5, value 1 for B6, A value of 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is provided with "draw ball", and bit 0 (B0) is set to "1" during ball draw. Bits 1 (B1) through 7 (B7) of the Frame State 2 command have a value of 0 in B1, a value of 0 in B2, a value of 0 in B3, a value of 0 in B4, a value of 1 in B5, a value of 1 in B6, and A value of 0 is set in B7.

As transmission timings for these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at power restoration, frame state change, and error cancellation navigation, the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation. is sent when power is restored and when frame status changes. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart showing. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for judging a big hit for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and a reach (reach loss) when not generating a big hit game state. Reach determination random number for use in determination, shown in FIG. 69, the variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 A random number for a display pattern, a random number for a jackpot pattern to be used for determining a jackpot pattern derived and displayed by a first special pattern display device 1403 and a second special pattern display device 1405 when a jackpot game state is generated, and the jackpot pattern. A random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol is derived and displayed by the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 when generating the small winning game state. A small-hit symbol random number for use in determining a small-hit symbol and a small-hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the small-hit symbol random number are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for normal symbol hit determination used to determine whether or not to open and close the movable piece shown in FIG. A random number for determining the initial value for determination of a normal symbol hit, and a random number for normal symbol variation display pattern for use in determining the variation display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402 shown in FIG. prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the big hit judging random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control internal hardware random number circuit 1310an incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first receives a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a with a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. (a clock signal output from the main controlled crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is regarded as a numerical value, and the checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total is stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for determining per normal symbol is the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. extracts the ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM, and based on this extracted ID code, performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol per determination. It is a mechanism that executes and sets this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for determining a normal winning pattern is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a The first security measure is that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if the ID code is stored in the external device, and the initial value derivation process is executed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on .

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the taken out ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece shown in FIG. A game state in which a game ball can be received into the starting port 2004 cannot be generated.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is circuit-configured such that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

92 and 93, the above-described main control program performs main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. FIG. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage section).

Following step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated, the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts clocking, and the watchdog timer clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT 1310af with built-in main control is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the measured time reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S12, the main control program performs power failure clear processing (step S14). In this power clearing process, first, output of a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. A comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, compares +24V with a reference voltage or +12V with a reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. The result of this comparison is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, with logic HI when no power failure or momentary power failure has occurred. Its logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

In the power clearing process, first, by starting to output a power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with the logic being LOW from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. It is possible to invert and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and to monitor the signal from the 1Q terminal.

Subsequently, in the power clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure (phenomenon in which power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is Determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure warning signal.

If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on and becomes stable, the main control program outputs the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is sent from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the logic HI, and passes through the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC. is entered in As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D-type flip-flop MIC22 to the latch state. When the D-type flip-flop MIC22 latches the state in which the PR terminal, which is its preset terminal, is LOW in logic, it outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is its output terminal.

Following step S14, the main control program makes it possible to execute RAM clear processing for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. This is done depending on whether or not the Based on the logic value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, it is not an instruction to perform RAM clear, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is being operated by judging that it is an instruction to clear the RAM.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The above-described RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG indicates whether or not to erase game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc., stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. do). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When it is determined in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

When it is determined in step S24 that there is no power failure warning signal input, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased, and is set to a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S28, the main control program compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). If they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is normally terminated, the main control program sets the work area of the main-control built-in RAM as when power is restored ( step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. "Restoration of power" refers to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and fraudulent means (e.g. A state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as a result of the subsequent various processes being performed. If FLG is not set to 1, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S26, that is, when game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30 , or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power failure processing is not normally completed, the main control program writes all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program writes the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as the initial value. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a executes processing when the logic value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 instructs RAM clearing and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is cut off. When not completed normally, the unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and based on this taken out ID code, the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal design per determination. Perform an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from, and this fixed value is set to the normal symbol per determination initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of the normal per symbol determination random number described above. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the working area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input/output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951, serial input/output ports for the peripheral control board 1510 (reception channel and transmission channel ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control program initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control program performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hardware random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the jackpot determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state by hardware In addition to setting the hardware random number setting register to latch and acquire the random number, the hard random number setting register is set to activate the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, a high-speed predetermined clock signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values within the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. A random number (random value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number as a big hit determination random number.

Following step S48, the main control program sets a reservation for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), FIG. A power-on state command and a main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, even if the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this game information are stored. be. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). By this setting, the main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Subsequent to step S52, the main control program issues an error cancellation navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main control side main processing is started. Execution of game control side RAM clear processing triggered by receipt will be regulated (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing based on the concept of time-sharing to use the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954 as an error cancellation navigation command for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Triggered by the input, RAM clear processing is executed (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, even if the error cancellation navigation command is input, the execution of RAM clear processing is regulated ( Game control side normal operation control means), handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification accompanying the error that occurred. In other words, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel an error that occurred in the payout operation, is replaced as a game memory unit for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. Main control built-in RAM (and payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) function as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization, or after the predetermined time has elapsed, the game It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred regarding the ball dispensing operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no power failure warning signal input in step S54, the main control program performs non-hit-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number, normal symbol variation display pattern random number, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM and protecting the game information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing for starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear processing of step S14 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program is shown in FIG. , 2nd special reservation number display 1406, normal design display 1402, normal design memory display 1188, state display 1401, round display 1407 etc. stop the drive signal which is output (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting the RAM access prohibition, access to the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) becomes impossible, so that updating of the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program, under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. By double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM in this way, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing proceeds. I will explain the problems in

The VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, charges the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the power from the pachinko island facility will be restored by applying +5V charge charged to the hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power has been cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control-side main process or a main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the pachinko island facility is interrupted. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be completed without fail.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, during the wait time standby process of step S22 when power is restored, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A waiting time (boot timer: in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds is set) until the system that controls drawing of the device 460 starts to count, and immediately before reaching the waiting time. If an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in hardware such as the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 , the interrupt initialization is performed, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. It may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started again when the power is restored without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk or the like, and even if the hall clerk or the like does not express the intention of clearing the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared to restart the clocking. is disabled, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Before performing the wait time waiting process of step S22, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is supplied with power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the processing at the time of power failure on the main control side, which is composed of an infinite loop. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64). Since the judgment is made, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT 1310af causes the main control MPU 1310a to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure while the main control side power-on processing is being performed at the time of power restoration, the main control MPU 1310a The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal, as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In step 24 immediately after, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 is performed. By repeating the determination, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared and restarted. When the clock cannot be started, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. By forcibly resetting the main control MPU 1310a by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, steps after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then step S52 It is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) from being updated by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later). adopted the mechanism. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off, the part provided by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM will not be changed at all, and the power supply on the main control side The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are covered by hardware so that the interruption processing is surely completed and the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all. game information) can be reliably prevented from being changed.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to convey this, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. As described above, the main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. there is Here, first, when the main control return destination command at power-on does not include the information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2107 and the information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. , that is, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on as the main control return destination command at power-on is not performed in step S50.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, by restoring the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred, the attacker Driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the state in which the big prize opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107 is shifted to the state in which it is open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and can be returned. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the game ball that entered the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107 when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 of the large winning opening 1 closed display command instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, start closing between rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100) When the information is sent to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening/closing member 2107. A 5th big winning gate opening display command for instructing the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the big winning gate 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state from the screen corresponding to the probability and time saving state described above, and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. becomes.

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that indicates that the movable piece is expanded) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen to be communicated to the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting solenoid 2107 to display the pair shown in FIG. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs when the movable piece of the is expanded in the left and right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 stores the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, by restoring to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to drive and paired. The movable piece moves from a state in which it rises substantially vertically to a state in which it spreads in the left-right direction.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state, and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and returned, it becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and becomes a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen for telling the presence of the player in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is possible to forget that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration. In spite of this, when the power is restored, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 powers on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on classified into power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member 2107. Since it is possible to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 that the transition to the state of ) cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, but in the jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member 2107. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, ``This is a big win. A display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the big winning hole 2005 after the power is restored, and For example, in the above-described example, in the state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then it is restored. When the power is turned on, a screen (for example, "Movable piece The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display area of the game board side production display device 1600 (a screen that conveys the message to the player). can be displayed to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 side can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the state command at power-on and the main control return destination command at power-on, can be stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored in As for these commands, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the main control return destination command at power-on is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown is operated to clear the RAM, information to instruct that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is Including when power is restored.) Return in any state (probability and time saving state) from the above-mentioned low probability short working time state, high probability short working time state, low probability non-short working time state, and high probability non short working time state and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine is used for the copyright of any work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specifications (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, It is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which a probability change occurs in a state where the game is played 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line. For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. The main control board 1310 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In order to transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command including information indicating the power-on state command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU 1310a have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol indicator 1403 and the second special symbol indicator 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors control process described later, the normal In addition to the time when the normal symbol indicator 1402 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and normal electric auditors control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are sent to the payout control board 951. Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal is input to inform that the receiver has been received normally. Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. Then, when the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control program detects, for example, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, and a game ball that has entered the first start opening 2002 shown in FIG. A detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and a detection signal from the second starting hole sensor 4004 shown in FIG. , a detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. The detection signal and the payout control board 951 indicating that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later are read, respectively, and the input information is read. is stored in the input information storage area. In addition, the detection signal from the first start hole sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first start hole 2002, the detection from the second start hole sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second start hole 2004 When each signal is read, the corresponding start-up winning command shown in FIG. 90 and classified as others is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starter sensor 4002, a starter winning command corresponding thereto is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 4004. Then, a start-up winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area.

In this embodiment, detection signals from general winning gate sensors 4020 and 4020 that detect game balls that have entered the general winning gates 2001 and 2201, and a count sensor 4005 that detects game balls that have entered the big winning gate 2005 A detection signal from, a detection signal from the first starting hole sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first starting hole 2002, and a second starting hole sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting hole 2004. The detection signal from the gate 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 2003 are read for the first time when the switch input process is started, and read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs ), each is read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball.

Thus, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003, By performing double reading for a total of two times by comparing the 1st to 3rd times and comparing the 2nd to 4th times, the effect of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 Reliability can be improved.

Following step S104, the main control program performs win/lose random number update processing (step S106). In this win-lose random number update process, the above-described random numbers for the big-hit design and random numbers for the small-hit design are updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-win/lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the random number for the big win pattern and the random number for the small win pattern are related to the win/lose judgment (big win judgment), each counter counts up only each time the win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up to the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for judging normal symbol hit is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit/lose random number update process updates the initial value determination random number for big hit determination. The random number for determining the initial value for judging a normal pattern hit can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern hit. .

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-win-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a prize ball command shown in FIG. When the number of scheduled game balls reaches 10, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, or A self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for checking the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 shown in FIG. has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payout control board 951 does not receive the payout ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has received the prize ball command normally, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. A self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951 . If the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls exceeds 10, as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as prize balls, the number of balls in excess will be added to the number of balls in the next game. In the prize ball control process, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added, and the added number of game balls is calculated. is reached, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, and is stored in the output information storage area as the output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program executes various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the state displays shown in FIG. to send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error generation command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error cancellation navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954 .
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to notify the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. store in the area. In addition, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified by state display in FIG. 90 (frame state 1 command, error release The navigation command and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error generation command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, an abnormal state regarding prize balls is checked. For example, when the input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when not in the jackpot game state (when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005), etc. 90 as an abnormal state, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. (random number) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and this acquired random number is set as a jackpot determination random number. And the big hit judgment random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, whether or not (Determine whether or not to generate a big hit game state (referred to as "special lottery")), take out the value of the counter for updating the random number for the big hit pattern, and store it in advance in the main control built-in ROM It determines whether or not it matches the probability variation per determination value (determines whether or not to generate probability variation). Here, "probability change" means that the probability of winning a big hit changes to a high probability (probability variable time) set higher than the normal time (low probability). In this embodiment, as the range of the above-described jackpot determination value (jackpot determination range), a value of 32668 to a value of 32767 is set for a low probability. ~ value 32767 is set and read from the probability variation time determination table. Thus, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of step S114, the random number for judging the big hit (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a with built-in main control) and the built-in main control When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start sensor 4002, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. In some cases, create various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning performance shown in FIG. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, and store it in the output information storage area described above as the output information do. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands (big win opening command, big winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1) classified as related to big win shown in FIG. Closed display command, big win opening 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or the opening and closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round display lamp 1407a of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. In some cases, the output of the lighting signal to the 15th round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator 1401 is set so that the presence or absence of variation is lit in a predetermined color, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on the result of this determination, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is extracted as gate information, and the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted. memorize to

This gate information storage area has 0th to 3rd divisions (four divisions), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0th division, the 1st division, the 2nd division, and the 3rd division. It's like For example, if the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information in the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information in the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information in the third partition of the information storage is shifted to the second partition of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third partition of the gate information storage becomes a free area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first and second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two partitions is shifted to the first partition of the gate information storage, and the second partition of the gate information storage and the third partition of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information so that the total number of the stored gate information is used as a holding ball and the normal symbol storage display 1188 is lit. Based on this, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining per normal symbol is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the second start opening 2004 becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received, which is advantageous to the player. It becomes a game state. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above, and various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and sent as transmission information. While storing in the above-described transmission information storage area, set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 so as to light the normal design display device 1402 according to the determined normal pattern variation display pattern, and set the output of the lighting signal to the normal design display device 1402 as the output information Store in the output information storage area. In addition, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric role effect shown in FIG. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol per determination random number does not match the normal per symbol determination value pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation is based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random number. Determine the display pattern, create various commands classified into the normal pattern synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and is stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 951 has been normally received, the payout control board 951 , or when in a jackpot game state, a drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member 2107 of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is output to the starter solenoid 2107 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize number information output signal, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game such as time saving information output information, start winning prize information output signal, etc. are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area and transmits the transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified into special figure 1 tuning effect related, shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, big wins based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering the big win opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general pattern synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric role effects, Fig. 90 , various commands classified as notification display (door open command, door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, etc.), various commands classified as status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation commands and frame state 2 commands), various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The data can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310aea as the main-circumference serial data. When the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on status command and the main control return destination command at power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM , as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, and the game information is read according to this game information. various commands may be stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit ) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command having the form shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error cancellation navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame open command (first main body frame open command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame open command (second main body frame open command) is transmitted to (rendering control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame open command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the production control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the body frame closing command having the form shown in FIG.

In addition, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT 1310af in step S22 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the clocking by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the clocking, thereby preventing the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The processing can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup processing was executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. 89, which instructs the driving state of the starting solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical driving sources, by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. It is designed to be able to output to That is, the main control board 1310 is the main controller in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, in order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored), a power-on state command and a power-on state command classified into power-on shown in FIG. A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. effect can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the device is out of order because the player sees the device in the broken state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

In addition, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. and the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the main peripheral serial data constitutes the power-on state command, The status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in that order, and then the main control board inspection is performed in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitutes the main control return destination command at power-on. Send to the inspection equipment in the process. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of times of special symbol fluctuation is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processing of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When this peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the performance control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, the hot start/cold start determination process, the process of setting the wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing this peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs from the main control board 1310, shown in FIGS. , various commands such as commands relating to the control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) are compared, and effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1 fr) and Bank4 (1 fr) in the backup second area 1511cc are compared. The performance backup information (1 fr), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (1 ms), and the performance backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank 4 (1 ms), are compared, and the contents of the comparison are compared. are identical, the performance backup information (1fr) which is the content stored in Bank1 (1fr) for Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. While performing a hot start by copying back the effect backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1 ms), to Bank0 (1 ms), when the compared contents do not match (i.e. , mismatch), a value of 0 is forcibly written into each of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, to perform a cold start.

In the hot start/cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. (SRAM), and the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the second backup area 1511dc. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is stored in Bank0 (SRAM) which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. 0 is forcibly written to cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is forcibly written with a value of 0 to be cleared to zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the date and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. is set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. In addition, in the current time information acquisition process, the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the brightness of the LEDs included in the acquired brightness setting information to the brightness of the game board. Processing is performed to adjust the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 and turn it on. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%. It includes the set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 .

Specifically, in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set to 75%. is lit, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device, correction similar to the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated into the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting processing of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted is input from the VDP 1512a with built-in tone generator. A value of 1 is set in the partial V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. there is

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), the process returns to step S1008 to repeatedly determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. After determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get caught.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 (step S1009). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs continuous DMA serial transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, serial I/O port serial transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When this lamp drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the data shown in FIG. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process to be described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the top address is sent to the lamp drive board serial I/O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of As a result, the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to transmit 1 byte of the transmission shift register. data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is transmitted, byte by byte, via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board, the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronism with the board-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, transmission of 1-byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board.

In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED. When this frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. In 1511cab, door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 is generated by the lamp data generation process described later. is set by default.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area. The first byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the top address of 1511cab is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial signal via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the I/O port. As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration driving amplifier board LED transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Start transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame-decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port). 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , and by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I/O port receives this written data. The data in the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, transmission of 1 byte data in the transmission shift register is started bit by bit, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I/O port.

Following step S1012, the production control program performs production operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation button 410 etc. is operated based on the detection signal from the various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. determine as appropriate whether or not to reflect

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the VDP with built-in tone generator 1512a from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. It outputs to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 . In the display data output process, if the drawing exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is sent to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in the processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. It is a mechanism that allows you to prioritize synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match the time.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation process described later as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. When serialized audio data is input from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data into differential serial data with a positive signal and a negative signal, and sends the data to the frame decoration driving amplifier board 194. At the same time, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame-decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data with positive and negative signals. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and notification sounds and notification sounds are also stereo-reproduced.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the performance control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series that constitute the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of screen data from the first screen data is stored in the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in time series that constitute the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the number of light emission data from the head light emission data is changed to light emission of various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate which mode to use.

In the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data of the notification sound and notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated to indicate what order of the sound command data from the top sound command data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

In the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the first drive data is The pointer is updated to indicate which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly instructed to the drive data that should be originally instructed.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis process, the effect control program, the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, various Various commands received in the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means), which will be described later, are analyzed (command analyzing means). Based on the information transmitted from the performance display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the performance control program generates screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound. The schedule data for generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. In addition, the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt processing, for example, starting mouth winning command for instructing the start of the starting mouth winning effect, the number of normal symbols pending Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), pattern synchronization production start command for instructing the start of the pattern synchronization production, pattern storage command output when the number of starting reservations changes, large winning opening 2005 A large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time a game ball is accepted, or a frame state 1 command (second error generation command, It analyzes (command analysis means) whether it is a full tank error generation command or not, and recognizes which game state it is at present. In addition, this effect control program, after a predetermined time has passed since the power is turned on, the command received by this peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is a body frame open command, a body frame close command, a door open command or a door frame close Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands, shown in FIG. , various commands classified as related to normal figure synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame open command , door frame close command, body frame open command, body frame close command, error cancellation navigation command (equivalent to the second error cancellation command), frame status 1 command (equivalent to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands classified, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others.

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, furthermore, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The schedule data for screen generation, the schedule data for emission mode generation, the schedule data for sound generation, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, are stored in the peripheral control unit 1511. It extracts from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and sets them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of abnormalities can be simultaneously monitored without losing information that one abnormality has occurred due to the occurrence of another abnormality after the occurrence of one abnormality and before the abnormality is resolved. can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands, for example, an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a manner different from the normal production mode accompanying the production operation, for example, the game board side Effect display device 1600 (effect device), door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), lamp (effect device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside ( error reporting means). By doing so, when a malicious player tries to input an error cancellation navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 in spite of being in the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent cheating on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the performance control program stores in the calendar information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage section are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the time information storage unit, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the year, month, and month, which are the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit. date is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer is designated among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decoration boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for frame decoration driving amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the screen data indicated by the pointer are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and displays the effect display device on the game board side. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 are generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the presentation control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the tone generator built-in VDP 1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated in accordance with the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set in accordance with the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A/D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob 1510a is converted into 1024 steps of values from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the values in 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume. Each is set so that the volume increases toward the volume 6. - 特許庁Control the built-in VDP 1512a of the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 so that the sound volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and transmit the audio data as the audio data obtained by serializing the sound data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512 c, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 .

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be changed smoothly from mute to maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into 7 steps described above. For example, even if a hall clerk or the like turns the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the production sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are small. However, when there is a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a large volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk from noticing the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent behavior due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to the music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is made more powerful by increasing the volume of the sound, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to notify that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in a first backup area 1511db and a second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, reception command storage area 1511cac, RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and Effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa performs a peripheral control DMA controller. 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank2 (1fr) in the first backup area 1511cb, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr ) up to the end address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are successively stored by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously transferred to Bank4 ( 1fr) are copied in order from the first address.

In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up every frame in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. Effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) is transferred to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of backup first area 1511db as effect backup information (SRAM) by peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed. , and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). 1511ac specifies to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank2 (SRAM) in the first backup area 1511db, and copies the contents stored in the top address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM ) up to the end address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the first backup area 1511db.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) at the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511dc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte). SRAM) are copied in order from the first address.

Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG as the execution completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, V blank signal detection flag VB -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006. Thus, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1009 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing, effect control program, first step S1009 peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed and starts from setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG, 1 ms in step S1010 , and step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, the normal processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 as execution completion of the peripheral controller normal processing. is set to complete. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal is input from the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. A description will be given of the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing that is executed with the . When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 96 (step S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Each is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

If the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1) in step S1045, that is, if the peripheral controller steady-state processing is being executed, this routine ends. On the other hand, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), Exit this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. They are each set to a value of 0 when no routine processing is executed.

In this embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In some cases, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the peripheral controller steady-state processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the execution of the peripheral controller steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, in step S1009 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady-state processing) of FIG. By setting the value 1 to the processing in-progress flag SP-FLG, the effect that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. By setting the value 0 to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the processing at the time of turning on (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the completion of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is indicated by the peripheral control unit V blank which is this routine. By notifying the signal interrupt processing, it is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. It is determined whether or not it is completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input, which is a so-called processing failure.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within a time of about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that has failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer occurs due to activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller regular processing of the peripheral controller power-on processing of FIG. 95, will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. is determined (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which blank signals are input is approximately 33.3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is prioritized over the peripheral control unit V Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (incremented, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the schedule data for the electric drive sources set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration driving amplifier board motor is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I/O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are transmitted. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the production operation unit 400 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. It is set in the amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the top address of the area 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. transfer and write to the transmit buffer register of the serial I/O port for As a result, the serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. starts transmitting 1-byte data bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac receives a transmission interrupt request for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port (in this embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is not using the bus, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame-decoration drive amplifier board-side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is transferred 1 byte at a time to the external bus 1511h and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad and via the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port for writing, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I/O port receives this write data. transfer the data in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, start transmitting the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and frame decoration drive amplifier board Continuous transmission is performed by the motor serial I/O port.

In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial I/O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board. When the motor drive board serial I/O port continuous transmission is started, first, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. and the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created. 73 is set in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a designates transmission of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the top address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first byte of the received game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is sent to the transmission buffer of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to a register. As a result, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the data written in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Start sending byte data bit by bit.

Every time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board occurs, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I/O port for the motor drive board The 1-byte data written is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register becomes empty because there is no more 1-byte data.), the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the rest of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is transmitted 1 byte at a time via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. , by transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I/O port for the motor drive board, the serial I/O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed through the serial I/O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable object information acquisition process, history information (for example, original position history information) of detection signals from various detection switches is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The original position, movable position, etc. of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah.

Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this production operation unit information acquisition process, history information (for example, operation Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is set in the control MPU 1511a and the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When a determination is made, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. , that is, a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device acquires the frequency of failure and the failure occurrence state between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. 460 drawing state can be obtained.

Following step S1110, backup processing is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the first backup area 1511db and the second backup area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed each time a 1ms interrupt timer occurs in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. Each time, Bank0 (1 ms) to be backed up includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah. , and effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, is stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb as effect backup information (1 ms). The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) are specified to be copied to Bank1 (1ms) in the first backup area 1511cb, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) are copied to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The contents up to the stored content are copied in sequence from the head address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) increments, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa executes the peripheral control DMA controller. Copying the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank2 (1 ms) in the first backup area 1511cb is specified as the request factor of 1511ac, and the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) are copied to Bank0 (1 ms). ) up to the end address of Bank 2 (1 ms) of the first backup area 1511cb in sequence from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, ) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously stored in units of predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. , and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa designates copying of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Then, the contents stored at the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the contents stored at the end address of Bank0 (1ms) are continuously transferred to Bank4 of the backup second area 1511cc (1 1ms) are copied in order from the first address.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will cause the peripheral control unit After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Also, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The interval at which the V blank signal is output may vary slightly even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510 . In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 1-byte (8-bit) information is fetched into the receive buffer by the substrate serial I/O port, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral controller MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, when it is within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port for the main control board built into the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not 3 in step S1206, that is, following the status which is the 1st byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the 2nd byte of the main circumference serial data, and the 3rd byte of the main circumference serial data. is not taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, when the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3 in step S1206, that is, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and then the 3 bytes of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value of the byte is sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, they generate static electricity and generate noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. in a sanding environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, the received main-circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (step S1216) and terminate this routine. This received command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumferential serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumferential serial data are Stored in the 1511cac peripheral controller receive ring buffer. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the status assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data when storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. is stored in association with the mode assigned, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Alternatively, in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is executed as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 75, a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this judgment, the routine ends as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If two macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the routine returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. If the signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. In other words, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

If the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started in step S1304, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is extinguished, the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 is turned off, and various LEDs are extinguished. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the externally attached peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In this command backup process, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copying of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. Then, a predetermined byte (for example, , 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of the received command storage area contained in Bank1 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb. copy the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and store in Bank0 (1fr) From the contents stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. are copied in order from the first address of the received command storage area contained in Bank2 (1fr) of the first backup area 1511cb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and includes it in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. specified to be copied to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr), and stored from the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). 1511cc of the backup second area 1511cc in sequence from the head address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and then copy all of the received command storage area sequentially by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and then the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Copying is specified, and the content stored at the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is specified. Bytes (for example, 1 byte) are successively copied from the start address of the received command storage area contained in Bank 4 (1fr) of the second backup area 1511cc.

After step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clearing process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 1511a from being reset. .

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By endlessly continuing determination in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. is not output, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is started again.

As described above, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 to perform the peripheral control immediately before the power failure state. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creating process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to notify that fact. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is stored in 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 judges that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , a transmission request for a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal (normal data). predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the transmission of the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the receiver for effect on the door frame side ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift process, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is shifted to the highest bit B7←B6, B6←. B5, B5.rarw.B4, B4.rarw.B3, B3.rarw.B2, B2.rarw.B1, B1.rarw.least significant bit B0.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 1 (step S1506), and this routine ends.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted to the least significant bit B0 in such a manner that the most significant bit B7←B6, B6←B5, B5←B4, B4←B3, B3←B2, B2←B1, B1←least significant bit B0. , toward the most significant bit B7 by one bit.

If the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is set to 0 (step S1510), and this routine ends.

In this manner, each time the LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then shifted to the least significant bit B0. Since a value of 1 or 0 is set, it is possible to create a history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

[16-1-7. Connection failure determination process]
Next, a description will be given of the connection fault determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady-state process of the peripheral controller power-on processing shown in FIG. In this connection failure determination process, based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

72, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. FIG. As described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal output to notify that effect. and to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Subsequent to step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSD0 (step S1522). This determination is to determine whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. and exit this routine.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read out in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver in step S1522. (to count the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. It is designed to restore the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative count. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of having reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

In step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number of times. If the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 (step S1528), and this routine ends. On the other hand, in step S1526, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the accumulated count upper limit value CC-LMT, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the calculated cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 1 (step S1530), and this routine ends. The communication error flag CC-FLG indicates that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not established when the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. is a flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the accumulated state has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0 respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In some cases, the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG immediately before a power failure occurs is restored.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. and to confirm (restore) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. We will notify you to that effect.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the schedule data for screen generation among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is being activated (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation, the order of screen data from the first screen data to be output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source is indicated. Then, it is determined whether the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the presentation progresses according to the screen generation schedule data. When performance is completed along with the data and updating of the pointer is all completed, it is determined that the schedule data for screen generation has not started. In addition, in this determination, the period during which the start screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or the time period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It can be judged based on the schedule data for screen generation whether or not it is a period of time, and the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. When the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a customer waiting state and a demonstration is being performed by the game board side effect display device 1600, the process proceeds to step S1542 to be described later, while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600, or when the game board side effect display device 1600 is not in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 (simple state of waiting for customers), This routine is terminated as it is.

In step S1540, when the effect is progressing according to the schedule data for screen generation, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, this routine ends as it is, while in step S1540 When the presentation is completed and the pointer is completely updated, that is, when the schedule data for screen generation is not activated, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 (step S1542). 101. As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is set in step S1522 of the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (to count the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is even one.

If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it has not been determined that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, then this process is performed as it is. While the routine is terminated, if the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542, that is, even if it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even once. If there is, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, this communication error flag CC-FLG is set when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. A flag that indicates whether or not a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. is set to 0 when the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a problem in the connection of , does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If not, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine ends. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect provided on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby The transmitter IC 1512 d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC 0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 . This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (it is 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, communication error display processing is executed. (step S1548) and terminate this routine. In this communication error display process, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. process to draw to the . For example, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a message is displayed that reads, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Further, in the communication error display process, the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state are displayed. During the period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 is LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image to that effect (for example, "A problem has occurred in the upper tray side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed in the game. In addition to performing processing to display in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the upper tray-side liquid crystal display device.") is repeated from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Do the flow process. At this time, it is also possible to perform a process of lighting all the LEDs for lighting decoration provided on the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates provided on the game board 5 .

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed by the unit steady processing etc., and the main control side of the main control side power on time processing shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in The first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002 shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball into the start opening 2004 is "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is 1 round to 15 rounds. Up to 15 rounds in total, and in each round, within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), when game balls enter the big winning opening 2005 and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls), The round is completed, and every time one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out.

The first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second start port 2004, from the main control board 1310 Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that left side decorative symbols are displayed on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and central decorative symbols are displayed in the center. Then, on the right side, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery. can be recognized by the player, and at this time, the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result can be confirmed even in the design or the second special design. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design become translucent to the extent that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative design is displayed. The reels rotate from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the center decorative pattern from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative pattern from the upper right to the lower right of the display area. When the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stop-displayed, the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right-hand decorative design correspond to the stop-displayed left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design. The left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. In this way, the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and started to be displayed in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, The left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern, which are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and stopped, are synchronized.

Peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, the first special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the first start port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second start port 2004 Upon receipt of a command from the main control board 1310 to convey the result of the special lottery, the game board shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit steady state of the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is to be output to the built-in tone generator VDP 1512a from the data, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the data is displayed according to the schedule data for screen generation. Since the effect is in progress, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, and while the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, that is, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. , the determination in step S1540 in the connection recovery process is such that the routine is forcibly terminated.

As a result, the communication check counters CC-CNT are counted during the period from the start of the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 until the display is stopped. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, between the transmitter and the (connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is determined to be in a state of malfunction even once, the SYNC pattern output processing in step S1546 in the connection recovery processing is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are connected. and communication error display processing in step S1548 in the connection recovery processing is not performed. There is a problem with the side liquid crystal display device. Please call the store clerk." In addition to invalidating the LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door-frame-side effect display device 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door-frame-side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door-frame-side effect transmitter IC1512d. display.

When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control section shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the hour process, the effect is completed in accordance with the schedule data for screen generation set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated in the scheduler update process, and the schedule data for screen generation has not been activated, the power supply to the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the judgment of step S1540 in the connection recovery process shown in FIG. When the value of CNT is 0, that is, when it has not been determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the routine ends as it is, while the communication check counter When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that there is a failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times upper limit value CC-LMT is reached. If not, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, performs the above-described SYNC pattern output process, and terminates the routine. That is, when there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, the above-described communication error display process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC 1512d are displayed. If there is even one failure in the connection with ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number determined to be present does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the accumulated number of times that it is determined that a failure has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), by always performing the communication error display process, for example, " A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side. Please call the store clerk." The LOCKN signal from the door frame side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which conveys that the data is valid, is validated.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are displayed again. In the interval period until is started, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door-frame-side performance receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data, is validated, and the door-frame-side performance transmitter IC 1512d and the door-frame-side performance receiver IC DIC0 are validated. A state in which a failure occurs in the connection with the receiver IC SDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be is not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output processing is always performed, so that the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 In other words, while processing is performed to restore the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it reaches (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 A message "A problem has occurred in the liquid crystal display device on the upper tray side. Please call a clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started again (timing K2), as described above, the schedule data for screen generation is being activated, so the left decorative design and the central decorative design are displayed. , and until the right side decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the door frame side presentation provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if there are times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed. The communication error display processing in step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper plate side. Please call a clerk." Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started in the display area of the game board side production display device 1600, and then stopped, and then the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed again. In the interval period until the start of the variable display of the pattern, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is validated. On the other hand, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is operated until the variable display of the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern is started and stopped. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side rendering receiver IC SDIC0, which informs that the drawing data received from the IC 1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is because the result of the stop display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that the player is most interested in, and the player is profitable. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which a Then, until the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the effect image drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed due to the influence of noise, etc., and is not correct. Even if it becomes a state where drawing is not possible, instead of interrupting the production in the middle and recovering to a state where drawing can be performed correctly, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the By stop-displaying the right decorative pattern, the drawing of the information that the player is most interested in is completed.

In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the customer waiting state. This is very different from the case where the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided on the peripheral control board 1510 during the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing a demonstration. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for the period during which the startup screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or for the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is in a waiting state for a customer to perform a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period of execution, it is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This is sent as an operation confirmation request for the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the differential Two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. The forced switching circuit 1512f performs circuit connection so as to transmit the two signals when two signals that are differentially differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 . When the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is As described above, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has a different data format. Output to the control MPU 1511a. As a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input, and tells the effect display drive board 4450. While it can be determined that no trouble has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, a trouble has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 assuming that a trouble has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk.") is displayed on the game board side effect display device by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. 1600, and by controlling the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputting a notification sound to that effect (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display on the upper tray side") to the audio data transmission IC 1512c A notification sound is emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . As a result, the notification can be made by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 . At this time, all the various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative substrates provided on the game board 5 may be turned on.

In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which has received the LOCKN signal output request data, outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no failure in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver and that there is no failure in the door frame side effect display device 460. When the signal is not input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is malfunctioning. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the door frame side effect display device 460 is malfunctioning, the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 can be executed as notification processing. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a discovers a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the store clerk or the like of the fact by executing the notification process. A hall clerk or the like can very easily check whether or not the door frame side performance display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without much trouble. ing. Therefore, the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without much effort.

In addition, as described above, the LOCKN signal indicates that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined that there is, it is a signal that is output to notify that effect. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to confirm (restore) the connection between the ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is used for door frame side effects. When the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d cannot be received normally, the receiver IC SDIC0 receives the image due to a communication failure between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. A LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to notify that the drawn data is abnormal. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, to which the LOCKN signal is input, generates a connection confirmation signal indicating the start of transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems during image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a failure of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication failure during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the problem. It's like Therefore, by finding and eliminating the problem of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 which receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When normal reception is not possible, the effect control microprocessor outputs a LOCKN signal, which is a communication problem occurrence signal, to indicate that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, causing a communication problem. This generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a quickly discovers a malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication malfunction during image communication, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the hall clerk or the like or directly inform the hall clerk or the like who happens to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the hall clerk or the like can be notified when the trouble occurs. You can start working on resolving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, by early detection and elimination of the malfunction of the door frame side effect display device 460, it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the side effects receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating communication failures during image communication when the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the state of accumulation does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the cumulative number of times reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , can be output repeatedly. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is not progressed by starting and displaying the stop display, the communication failure can be resolved.

Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 controls the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect provided in the effect display drive board 4450 during the period from the timing K1 to the timing K2 (interval period). If there is even one failure in the connection between the presentation receiver ICSDIC0, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the failure occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state of being in the state of being in the accumulated state does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is generated to validate the LOCKN signal and eliminate the communication failure during image communication. A connection confirmation signal is sent from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to inform the start of transmission to the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0. While continuing to output repeatedly, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts fluctuating the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and plays the game. , the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect stops outputting the connection confirmation signal. (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It's like Thereby, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 fluctuates the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 By continuing to output a connection confirmation signal, which is a signal for resolving a problem, only during the period in which the game is not progressing by starting and displaying a stop display, the communication problem can be resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 and stops displaying. Only during the period in which the progress of the game is not executed, when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Even if the first special symbol or second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 (disturbance of the image) Each time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 restarts and ends the progress of the game (every time (interval period) between timing K1 and timing K2), it can be made to go in the direction of elimination.

According to the embodiment as described above, the pachinko machine 1 comprises the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. The main control board 1310 includes a first start port 2002 and a second start port 2002, which are starting regions in which game balls fired by the ball shooting device 650 toward the game region 5a defined on the game board 5 are provided in the game region 5a. A main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the fact that the ball has entered the mouth 2004, is installed. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands shown in FIGS. 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, has at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store game information even after the power is turned off.

The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information on payout even after the power is turned off.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment further comprises an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within a period from when the power is turned on to when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game information stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, is output as a RAM clear signal in FIG. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information related to payout, and a main control side power supply of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the process at the time of power-on is performed (or the period during which the process at the time of power-on of the payout control unit is performed after the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error that occurred regarding the dispensing device 830 is canceled. 82 as an error cancellation signal for the game control microprocessor to output to the payout control MPU952a payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal to the main control MPU1310a the game control microprocessor, .

In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information about is output to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the operation is performed within the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from when the power is turned on, A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. When operated after the period during which the determination process of step S16 is performed in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on) has passed, the payout device 830 An error release function to output to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. Since it has both functions, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error release function, respectively, by operating one operation switch 954 . Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error cancellation function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input part of the panel relay board 4161 is connected to various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, and the vibration detection sensor. , a circuit to which detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the like are input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, here, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. do.

Attempts to gain unfair profits by manipulating the falling state of game balls at will by bringing magnets (e.g., permanent magnets or electromagnets) closer to game balls hit into the game area in a game machine. There is no end to illegal gaming behavior.

In order to detect such fraudulent gaming behavior and suppress fraudulent behavior by means of light-emitting means, sound alarms, etc., magnetism detection sensors 4024 capable of detecting magnetism are provided corresponding to predetermined positions in the gaming area. there is

In the following, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be summarized with respect to the control of game progress and effects.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the pachinko machine 1 as a whole, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the results of the processes. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (design, various background images, characters, display images such as characters), It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (the performance operation unit 400, movable members, etc.) that contribute to the performance.

In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process every time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning process is performed. In this first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that the winning has been made, the processing of increasing the number of reservations on the corresponding special symbol side by 1, etc. done.

If the processing flag is 0 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the fluctuation start processing is executed. In this fluctuation start process, on the condition that the number of reservations is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and after memorizing the result of this jackpot determination (hitting or losing, its type, etc.) , update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when finishing the first and second starting opening winning processing, the variation pattern setting processing is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the stored result of the big hit determination and the current game state ( After determining and setting the fluctuation time from the start of the variable display of the special pattern until the stop display, etc., and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern, losing pattern, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the processing during fluctuation is executed. In this process during fluctuation, the fluctuation time determined and set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the fluctuation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device to stop After that, when the result of the big win determination stored in the variation start process is a big win, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big win determination stored in the change start process is not a big win (loss). , the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first and second starting opening winning processing is finished, the jackpot game processing is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of jackpot won, Based on this, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the type of the jackpot won is a special type, it is controlled to be in an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a variable probability state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process is restarted from the fluctuation start process.

As the variation pattern, a plurality of types of variation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In this embodiment, the plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a variation pattern for big hit variation, a variation pattern for loss reach variation, and a variation pattern for loss variation. The big win variation is a change that is performed when the result of the big win determination is a big win, and in the performance display device 1600, after the ready-to-win performance, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finally developed so that the big win pattern is fixed and stopped. The effect to be performed is executed. The loss reach variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is determined that the reach is performed by the reach determination based on the reach random number. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbols is finally developed so that the symbols are fixed and stop-displayed. The loss variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a loss and it is not determined that the reach is performed in the reach determination based on the reach random number, and the effect display device 1600 does not undergo the reach effect. , an effect is executed in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is finally expanded so that the missing symbols are fixed and stopped. Further, the variation pattern is defined so as to be able to specify which variation pattern is the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it, thereby making it possible for such a variation pattern of decorative symbols to appear. In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to causing the effect display device 1600 to appear a variation pattern of decorative symbols based on the acquired game information, the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation is changed, and the effect It executes control to change the mode (display and movement) in the operation unit 400 and to operate movable members such as the behind-the-bottom movable production unit 3100 and the like.

Next, game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program is shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal by the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting hole 2002) (YES in step S5231), the random number for judging the first big hit is obtained from the random number counter. The first start opening passage processing such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( Second big hit determination random number) is acquired from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big-hit execution flag indicating that the big-hit game state is being controlled is set (step S5235), and if the big-hit execution flag is set, the big-hit game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S5240a) is executed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variable jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) is repeated eight times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests "16R probability variable jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) After that, or when the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 16 times to control to a 16R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment process for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode that suggests "8R probability variable jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds ) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have entered the big winning opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated 8 times to control to the 8R jackpot game state,
・When the result of the judgment processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the second special symbol is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). A 2R jackpot game state in which an opening/closing pattern (round game) to be closed after playing is repeated twice is controlled.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed, and in situations where the time-saving control is not executed, it is more advantageous than right-handed hitting. As described above, hitting left-handed is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the first start port 2002, the jackpot game is open for a long time of 8 rounds at maximum. Only the state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball into the second start port 2004, the probability is about 50% (the allocation rate of the winning species ), 16 rounds of long open jackpot game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be obtained) are executed, and the expected value of the prize balls that can be obtained when winning the jackpot Therefore, when the ball is shifted to the right-handed state, it can be expected to obtain a larger amount of prize balls than in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, when starting the opening control of such a big winning hole 2005, first, the process of starting the operation of the condition device, the process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

In addition, in the jackpot control process, after such opening control of the jackpot 2005 is performed, as shown in FIG. Execute each set processing of the flag and the time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state, and is used in the big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109 to be described later. It is set when the big hit game state based on the probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B) is ended, and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) is reset by

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the jackpot game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on the big hit (8R probability variable big hit A, 16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B), and when the next big hit occurs, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the jackpot after the occurrence of the low-probability time-saving state, the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 114 to be described later. Or it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The variation number counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbols after the variation number counter is reset, and is used in the first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 to be described later. It is updated (for example, counted up) when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when starting a big hit game state based on.

Also, if the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the process of step S5236, whether or not the small hitting executing flag indicating that the small hitting game state is controlled is set. determine whether And as a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, small hit control processing (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In addition, in the small hit control process, the process of opening the big winning opening 2005 only for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after the opening control of such a big winning opening 2005 is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set processing such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110(a), a small win is never won in the big win determination.

Also, if the small hit running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of random numbers for the second big hit determination stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is On the condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process including the lottery process related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, if the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special design reservation storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special design 2nd special design process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of fluctuation display stop is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol in the pending state (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Only the lottery for the random number for judging the second big hit is continuously performed without interruption (prioritized execution), regardless of the pending status of the lottery.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the time-saving state (high-probability time-saving state), the player simply maintains hitting the game ball to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the two big hit judging random numbers can be performed continuously without interruption.

In addition, the special game (symbol variation) using the second special symbol (second special symbol) is limited to those that are executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (first special symbol) Instead, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the start winning prize occurs. In this case, a table is provided for storing data capable of specifying the order in which the starting prizes are generated, and execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It should be possible to determine whether

FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the above-described first starting opening passage processing (step S5232).

Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 4002 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for judging the big hit, random number for judging the reach, random number for the big winning design, random number for the fluctuation display pattern ) from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the first special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value. It is determined whether or not the (upper limit) is "4" (step S5242). In the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5244, each random number obtained in step S5241, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the first special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the first special symbol is an effect that suggests in advance the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side is required to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed and the content of the look-ahead effect (information related to win-loss for look-ahead determination, information related to symbol type for look-ahead determination information, information related to the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

FIG. 106 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S5234).

Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 4004 is in the ON state and a game ball has entered the second starting hole 2004, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second big hit determination, random number for second reach determination, second big hit symbol random number, random number for the second fluctuation display pattern) is obtained from the random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value. is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. , the following steps S5253 to S5255 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S5254, each random number obtained in step S5251, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

And next, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the second special figure side prefetching effect is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the side of the second special symbol is an effect that preliminarily suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure look-ahead processing, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (win-lose information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) required for determining whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect and the content of the effect, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, the SP reach group of the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group of the pattern type, the small hit group, etc., may be transmitted as the look-ahead command before being finally determined.

On the other hand, in the processing of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of pending second special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) (First hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is indicated in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (second hold number designation commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S5238). In addition, the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control processing are the same. , and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. A random number for judging a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and based on the random number for judging a big hit, a lottery process for a display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281 )

3. Executed in correspondence with the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the performance display device (game board side performance display device) 1600 First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing etc. are performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed

4. 1st special design fluctuation processing (step S5283) which waits until the fluctuation display of the 1st special design in 1st special design indicator 1403 is stopped

5. So that the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol

In addition, the initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, and the first fluctuation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the same main control built-in RAM. And then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reservation number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM First-in first-in random numbers related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the pattern is stopped (for example, the first jackpot judgment random number, the first reach judgment random number, the first jackpot pattern random number, the first fluctuation display pattern random number) Shift operation is performed in the First-Out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and the start winning prize to the first start port 2002 Random numbers extracted according to occurrence are stored in order from the first (earliest) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). . Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning prize to the second start port 2004 Random numbers extracted by the first (earliest) area are stored in order. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol occurred is stored so as to be identifiable, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

After that, as the process of step S5305, a big hit determination process, which is a process of determining whether or not the big win is hit or lost, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5306) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281), this process is terminated.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the game state is low probability for each type of special random number (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) (Low probability non-time-saving state, low probability time-saving state) Jackpot judgment table at low probability used in the case, and high probability to use when the game state is high probability (high probability non-time-saving state, high probability time-saving state) and a jackpot determination table at the time of probability. In the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 204 kinds of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332 The random numbers for judging the first big hit (65536 types) are respectively associated so that the random number for judging the first big hit of the type matches the loss judgment value indicating that it is a loss (the probability of a big hit at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the second special symbol jackpot determination random number (second jackpot determination random number) in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process In the low-probability jackpot determination table to be referred to, 204 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the player won the jackpot, and 65,332 types of second jackpot determination random numbers are the losers. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other so as to coincide with the judgment value indicating that the odds are the same (probability of a big hit at a low probability; roughly "1/321").

In addition, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random numbers, 2,040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination values, and 63,496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match. The random numbers for judging the first big hits are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the judgment value for winning (big hit probability at high probability; approximately "1/32"). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process , 2040 kinds of random numbers for judging the second big hit match the big hit judging value indicating that the big hit has been won, and the random numbers for judging the second big hit of 63496 kinds match with the judgment value showing that the above-mentioned loss. The random numbers for judging the second big hit are associated with each other (probability of big win at high probability; approximately "1/32"). It should be noted that the jackpot determination value set in the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number (jackpot determination value The number may be the same and the jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different)). In this case, at least one of the low-probability jackpot determination table and the high-probability jackpot determination table may have different jackpot determination values (both may be made different). .

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected jackpot determination table with the jackpot determination random number read out in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, and when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S5315 ), a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has won a jackpot is set (step S5316), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

Further, in step S5315, when it is determined that the big hit has been lost, the read-out big-hit determination random number coincides with the small-hit determination value indicating that the small-hit has been won based on the selected big-hit determination table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, since the random number for big hit determination that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), and in this step S5317, it is determined that a small hit has not been won (determined as a loss).

On the other hand, if it is determined to be lost in step S5317, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read out in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the game state is in a high probability non-time-saving state. A ready-to-reach judgment table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of 1 and a ready-to-reach judgment table in a low-probability state used in a case of a low-probability state of a game state (low-probability non-time-saving state) are provided.

Here, in the reach determination table at the time of the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match with . However, in the reach determination table in the high-probability time-saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game when in the time-saving state, all 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value that indicates that the reach is not reached. By doing so, it may be prevented from matching with the reach determination value indicating reach.

In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state reach. The random numbers for reach determination are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value shown and match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of random numbers for reach determination do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, at the time of the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is increased from the time of the high probability time saving state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state Five types of reach determination including random numbers The random numbers for reach determination are associated so that the random numbers for reach match with the reach determination values indicating reach, and the random numbers for reach determination of 67 kinds match with the reach determination values indicating that the random numbers for reach do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-working time saving state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is made the same as the low probability non-working time saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120) , a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach is set, and the process ends (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S5305) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. By comparing with the selected symbol determination table, a big hit symbol is determined as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, the random number for the first big hit symbol (here, total 200 (random number for the first jackpot pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. In addition, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol contains the second big hit symbol random number ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbol random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the big hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big win design. The symbol determination table of this example is set so that the kind of big win determined based on the random numbers for the first big-hit pattern and the kind of big-win determined based on the random numbers for the second big-hit pattern are different. . More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probability variable jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined based on the second big win symbol random number is larger than the expected value of the game balls that can be acquired by the big win determined by the random number. ing.

The following is a concise summary of specific game and performance contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big-hit game state, a battle production (battle victory production) is performed in which a specific character wins, and in the high-probability time-saving state 8R probability variable jackpot A controlled to the production mode shown in the production display device 1600 to be in a relatively advantageous state

2. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special symbols is digested 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are digested), and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state A battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which a specific character is defeated is performed, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 8R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which a performance display device 1600 indicates a relatively disadvantageous state.

3. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in , the game ball is controlled to a 16R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 16R big win game state is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 16R variable jackpot

4. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning hole 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning hole 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) eight times to be closed when detected, the game ball is controlled to an 8R big win game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the big winning opening 2103, and after this 8R big win game state is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R jackpot game state, the production of whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) is performed, and after a predetermined period of time from being controlled to the high-probability time-saving state has passed, the effect display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variable jackpot B

5. After the big winning symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a short period of time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or the count sensor 4005 detects that nine game balls have won the big winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when detected in 2 times, the game ball is controlled to a 2R big win game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2103, and after this 2R big win game state, special A low-probability time-saving state is controlled until the fluctuation display of patterns is completed 100 times (or a jackpot is won within the period until 100 times are completed), and a specific character is selected during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. performs a battle performance (battle defeat performance) in which is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, the 2R normal jackpot is controlled to a performance mode in which the performance display device 1600 indicates that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state.

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) for opening the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, and only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the big hits (8R probability variable big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol are generated. Similarly, the game ball does not enter the first starting port 2002 in the right-handed state. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and the big hits (16R probability variable jackpot, 8R probability variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) related to the second special symbol are generated.

In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at maximum, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating 16 times the opening and closing pattern in which the big winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at maximum.

In addition, when the 8R probability variation big hit A is determined in the first special symbol stop pattern setting process, the 8R probability variation big hit A symbol is determined as the jackpot pattern, and when the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern. decide. In addition, although not shown, when the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit pattern, and when the 8R probability variation big hit B is determined, the 8R probability variation big hit pattern is determined as the big hit symbol. When the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

Also, if the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of step S5333. And as a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol ( After determining (step S5334), the process moves to step S5337.

Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 decides on the losing design as the aspect of stopping the fluctuation of the special design (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5337, performs the lottery result (type of big win, small win, reach loss, or loss). (It may be one that instructs the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set. And after that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

In addition, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variably displayed, and the left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative pattern (the left, middle and right decorative patterns may be synchronously displayed with the same pattern and stopped and displayed at the same time)). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, a specific pattern combination (a combination in which at least one of left, middle and right decorative patterns is not the same as other patterns) is determined. In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with the reach (the left and right decorative patterns are a combination of the same patterns "0" to "9" and the middle decorative patterns are different; the reach loss When the missing pattern is specified, the missing pattern (combination of left, middle and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined. The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has passed (when the game effect is finished).

In any case, when a win is obtained as a result of progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) at the time of the win to appear before the start of the big win game, so that the big win game can be played. is started, the effect display during the jackpot game is made to appear.

FIG. 112 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag as shown in FIG. If it is (step S5341), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop design setting process (step S5342), small hit flag is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the small hit is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach ( (not shown) is selected (step S5346), and if none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag and the reach flag are set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the reach effect), at the time of loss is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variable pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set to start the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 (step S5349). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S5355) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283), this process is terminated. As a result, the variable display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display device 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol. will take place.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is a random number for judging the big hit (random number for judging the first big hit, random number for judging the second big hit) and random number for the big hit design (random number for the first big hit design, random number for the second big hit design). A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on. In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). They are stored so as to be associated with the random numbers for the first variation display pattern. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a reads in step S5302 of the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the random number for judging the big hit and the random number for the big hit symbol. By comparing with the random number for the fluctuation display pattern, and obtaining the fluctuation time information associated with the read random number for the fluctuation display pattern from this table, the special design (first special design, second special design) determine the variation pattern of As a result, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since there is no winning of a small hit, the variation pattern table at the time of a small win is not used. In this example, a small win is not won, but a small win may be won.

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so that the mode type of reach effect to be executed is determined by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the random number for the variation display pattern. It is For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of variable display pattern random numbers out of 241 types of variable display pattern random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 Random numbers for variation display patterns of types are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating execution of one of super ready-to-win performances with low expectations for big wins, and 18 types of random numbers for variation display patterns have high expectations for big wins. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super ready-to-win effects is executed.

In addition, the super reach performance (SP performance) is a player who has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach performance, and a player who wants to generate a big hit game state when the super reach performance is executed. expectations are rising. That is, such a super ready-to-win effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of the big win, and even if a loss is finally displayed by this, the player's expectation of the big win game state. will be able to increase However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectations for the jackpot game state, during the period when the super reach effect is being executed, a high-expectation notice effect that is drawn separately from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of loss used when determining the fluctuation time of the first special symbol provided corresponding to the random number for the first big hit determination and the random number for the first big hit pattern, the non-time saving state and the time saving state , and a fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss provided corresponding to the second big hit determination random number and the second symbol random number and used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds to as a time saving state A variable time of 12 seconds can be set, and a variable time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same during the time saving state and during the non-working time saving state, and during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 As well as prompting, the time for the player to enter the game ball to the second start port 2004 is ensured.

Also, if 0.1 second is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) Discharge without being subjected to lottery processing is suppressed.

That is, the right-handed game ball is supplied to the area directly above the gate portion 2003 . Then, when the same game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 from this area when in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal pattern is obtained (for example, winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously received one after another (almost all of the game balls hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) around ``about 1/32''. become possible.

And in this example, since the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds when the player is operating the handle 302, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state etc.), the second Game balls are often received at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this regard, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table when the second special symbol is lost based on the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 is extremely It can be set to a short time of 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the pattern variation is completed only in the time (0.1 seconds) less than the shooting interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where game balls launched at intervals are received one after another in the second starting port 2004, the game balls are prevented from being discharged without being subjected to lottery processing. .

FIG. 113 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S5282) for the variable pattern is set. As a result, when it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the randomly selected variable time has passed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of this step S5373, this process is terminated when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the variable time timer has not reached 0 even though the variable timer has been decremented by 1 (step S5371), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

FIG. 114 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined by the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device 1403, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing derived display of the display result of the decorative pattern corresponding to the stop pattern is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big win start command indicating to start the big win game state (step S5387), The standby time until the start of the jackpot game state (time for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set, and if the high-probability flag is set, the high-probability flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), and the variation counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is the initial value. When the process is updated to the first special symbol normal process (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the processing of step S5235, and the jackpot game is played in the jackpot control processing (step S5240a). state will be executed.

Incidentally, the jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a jackpot start command (8R variable jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot (8R variable jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R variable jackpot, 8R variable jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot) Jackpot command, 8R probability variable jackpot B command, 2R normal jackpot command) are set. As a result, the production of the jackpot game state (battle production or additional challenge production) corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command is executed by the production display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speakers, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations of the special symbols digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches the predetermined upper limit value (100 times), the conditions for ending the low probability time saving state are satisfied, and time saving The function is stopped and the normal game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) is entered (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). And as a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. Waiting time until the start of the state (time for displaying the effect of starting the small winning game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, set a small winning in-execution flag indicating that the small winning game state is being executed (step S5396), so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the small hit is set in the process of step S5236, and in the small hit control process (step S5240b). A small winning game state is executed. Incidentally, unlike when a big win is won, the game state is not changed when such a small win game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the flag during execution of the big hit or the flag during execution of the small hit is not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is started according to the state of suspension. (Lottery and symbol control) processing related to progress is performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, the main controller 115 is executed as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S5402, executes the gate part passing process such as acquiring the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. do.

Then, in the normal design process processing, one of the following five process processing is selectively executed according to the normal design process flag.

1. Ordinary symbol normal processing (step S5403) in which the ordinary random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and lottery processing for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number.
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S5404) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device 1402 based on the ordinary design fluctuation random number.
3. Ordinary design fluctuation processing (step S5405) to wait until the fluctuation display of the ordinary design in the ordinary design indicator 1402 is stopped.
4. Variation display of the normal symbols so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbols is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device 1402. Normal design stop processing (step S5406) to stop
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted to the second start port 2004. Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S5407)

In addition, the normal design process flag is operated so that the initial value indicates that the normal design normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value of the normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as the process of step S5411. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value of "4".

In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S5413, the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number are obtained from the random number counter. Then, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbols is not newly reserved. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, then as the process of step S5422, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially selected from the first (earmost) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area is read. , is moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurs is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a normal figure hit determination table (not shown) during time saving ( Step S5426), if the current gaming state is non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select the normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time saving ( Step S5427), it compares with the normal random number which is read out with normal design per decision table and normal design normal processing step S5422 which is selected (step S5428).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and is used when the game state is time saving (high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-working time saving used in the case of time (low probability non-working time saving state, high probability non-working time saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been elected. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. In this way, when the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the time saving, the game ball is always won in the normal game, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second start port 2004 Acceptance is controlled. Instead of all of the 255 types, more normal random numbers than in the non-time saving state may coincide with the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that the normal pattern is won.

In addition, in the non-short-time normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per decision value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, because there is no winning per normal figure, the movable piece 2106 is in the open state second start opening There is no control over the acceptance of gaming balls into 2004. However, as described above, it may be possible to obtain a normal pattern hit even in a non-time-saving state, in this case, the winning probability is lower than the time-saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal pattern is a hit. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, then move forward again to the second You may make it impossible to accept a game ball to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal pattern normal processing, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S5429 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S5430), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of comparison between the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of normal design normal processing, when it is determined that it is lost, the normal pattern fluctuation A general pattern loss pattern is determined as a form (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S5432). And after that, when the above-described normal design process flag is updated (step S5433) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S5404), this process is terminated.

While such control by the main control MPU 1310a is being performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-described various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a, thereby performing the above-described peripheral control unit steady-state processing (received command analysis processing ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect can be executed according to the game situation.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not there is a situation in which starting winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to pending display and look-ahead effects in response to starting winning. And after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped gaming situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting processing, production design fluctuation start processing, production design fluctuation processing, production design fluctuation stop processing, jackpot display processing , jackpot game processing, or jackpot end effect processing.

Variation pattern specification command reception waiting process: During the period until the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the design is not in a variation state and the control related to the big hit is not performed (demonstration etc.) Along with performing control, when receiving a variation pattern command related to the variation pattern from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the performance symbol variation start process.

Production pattern variation start processing: Various production contents (production pattern, advance notice production, etc.) in the pattern fluctuation period are determined based on the fluctuation pattern command, etc., and the variation of the decoration pattern is started based on the determined production contents. to control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during effect symbol fluctuation. Of the variation patterns (effect patterns), many of the "variation patterns (effect patterns) that stop with a big hit pattern" are prepared in a pair with "variation patterns (effect patterns) that stop with a losing pattern". , and they function as the same variation pattern (production pattern), so that a production is provided as to whether a big hit pattern appears or a losing pattern appears. Therefore, hereinafter, when describing the variation pattern (production pattern), when describing "predetermined variation pattern" or "specific variation pattern", unless otherwise noted, "stop with a big hit pattern It means both "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern)" and "predetermined variation pattern (specific variation pattern) that is stopped with a losing pattern", and as a result of the progress of the production content in the same manner It will arrive at a branching point where either a big hit pattern or a losing pattern appears.

Production design fluctuation processing: Various production contents determined in production design fluctuation start processing are controlled to start at each timing during the design fluctuation period, and when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the process flag is changed to production design Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.
Effect design fluctuation stop processing: Based on the reception of a command (design determination command) instructing to stop all designs, stop the fluctuation of the decorative design and perform control such as deriving and displaying the display result (stop design). When the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the big win pattern, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big win display process, and when the decorative pattern is to be stopped by the losing pattern, the value of the process flag is changed to the variation pattern designation command reception waiting process. Update to the corresponding value.

Big win display processing: Controls effects (display effects for informing the occurrence of a big win on the effect display device 1600, etc.) during the period from when the decorative symbols stop with the big win symbols until the start of the big win game. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during the big-hit game.

During jackpot game processing: Various effects are controlled during the occurrence of the jackpot game state. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (such as a display effect for informing the player that the big win game state has ended) is controlled during the period from the end of the big win game state to the change allowable state. . Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern specifying command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of an effect pattern (fluctuation effect) referred to in the effect symbol variation start process when the game is in the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, an effect pattern (variation effect) is associated with each of the variation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the variation pattern command. Therefore, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command based on the determination table T1, and determines the determined effect pattern. Based on (variation performance), control is performed so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started.

Note that the effect pattern (variation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond one-to-one with the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command. For example, one variation number indicated by a variation pattern command is associated with a plurality of production patterns (variation production), and one of these production patterns (variation production) is determined based on the production lottery or game situation. You may make it As will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also associates some of the variable numbers 1 to 22 with a plurality of effect patterns.

In addition, although this will also be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after thus determining the effect pattern (variation effect), a notice lottery (determination process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the change pattern. , the notice effect won in the notice lottery is controlled to appear at a predetermined timing while the determined effect pattern (variation effect) is performed (process during effect pattern fluctuation), so that a plurality of effect contents are displayed. The degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern is suggested by the mode of appearance of these patterns, which can be combined.

And conventionally, among such composite effects, there are cases where the same specific advance notice effect (for example, timer effect) is executed by making a plurality of appearances while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. Thus, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained. However, since the advance notice effect can be combined only when the expectation for the appearance of the big hit pattern is high, the frequency of executing a plurality of timer effects while one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is being executed naturally decreases. , it was considered difficult to sufficiently improve the interest in gaming.

As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during execution of the effect pattern (variable effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is set to a first predetermined numerical value. (e.g. "60 seconds") to a second predetermined value (e.g. "0 seconds"). is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A , B, etc.) are subject to the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (particularly, the advance notice side timer effect executed as a result of the advance notice lottery), at least when the count display is started, which effect is the object of the effect is kept secret. It is desirable to In addition, the ``target of the timer effect'' is the effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined value as the timer effect reaches the second predetermined value (for example, "0 seconds"). That is, in the timer effect, a count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect object occurs.

In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are displayed accurately. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as count up or countdown is performed, the elapsed time after the count starts ( seconds, etc.).

Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notice side timer effect) as the effect content that appears only when winning the advance notice lottery, the effect pattern ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) incorporated in advance as the effect content of the variable effect). That is, in this case, if the count effect display is executed as "the content of the effect of the advance notice effect that functions so as to increase the expectation of the big hit with respect to the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command", the timer effect on the notice side is executed. However, by executing it as ``the content of the performance pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command'', the expectation level of the big hit indicated by the performance pattern determined based on the variation pattern command is changed from the expectation level. It is possible to cause the count effect display (timer effect) to appear without wastefully adding up (accumulating the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of "winning in advance notice lottery"). For example, when the expected degree of jackpot when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is ``20%'', the expected degree of big win is increased by the function of compound effect when the advance notice side timer effect is further executed. As a result, it becomes "40%", for example, and the appearance frequency has to be reduced accordingly. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to "20%" (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the frequency of appearance can be preferably maintained.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation for a big hit when an effect pattern (variable effect) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the effect pattern), and basically, the greater the variation number, the greater the expectation for a big win. It tends to be higher. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), variable side timer effects are executed in which "conversation notice" is the effect target for all of the effect contents. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6) > variation number 9 (10) > variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) < variation number 9 ( 10) It is set so that <variation number 17 (18). Also here, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal game state will be described in detail, but even in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state and high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself A production pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which a variable side timer production can be executed is included, and can appear at a probability different from that in the normal game state.

Also, in the determination table T1, all of the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal ready-to-win effect is performed. It is different from variation numbers 3 and 4 in that respect. In addition, variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but variation numbers 9 and 10 execute a variable side timer effect for effecting a conversation notice, and variation numbers 11 and 10 12 executes a variable timer effect with cut-in A as the object of effect, and with variable numbers 13 and 14, a conversation notice and cut-in A are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Variation numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP ready-to-win effect is performed. At 20, a variable timer effect is executed with cut-in B as the object of effect, and at variable numbers 21 and 22, a conversation notice and cut-in B are executed, and a variable timer effect with them as the object of effect is executed. different in that they can be Note that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher when the variable-side timer effect with the cut-ins A and B as the target is performed than when the variable-side timer effect with the conversation notice as the target is performed. is set so that the degree of expectation for a big hit tends to be higher when the variable-side timer effect for both the conversation notice and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

In addition, "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (decorative pattern variation production) is executed, and is often accompanied by a relatively low level of expectation. On the other hand, cut-ins A and B can appear at a relatively late stage after the performance pattern (decorative design variation performance) is executed, and have a relatively high degree of expectation. It is a production that is often performed (or a production that always builds up a relatively high degree of expectation). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set to have a higher appearance rate (execution probability) than other effects (cut-ins A and B, character A and B described later) with higher expectations than this. It is supposed to be In addition, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the variable production is executed to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the production content of the notice production in character reach, whereas in SP reach, the notice It is executed so as to correspond to cut-in B instead of cut-in A appearing as the effect content of the effect.

Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (effect pattern ) is assigned as a variable side timer effect. On top of this, if the variation pattern is "predetermined type such as shortened variation or normal reach effect with low expectation (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.)", the count effect display as the notice side timer effect is displayed. The variation pattern is "variation pattern for executing the variable timer effect ( count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22)”, the variation pattern is the predetermined type (for example, variation (numbers 1 to 6, etc.) are designed to be low.

Here, 14 variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared as count variation patterns for which the variation side timer effect is executed, and two of them (0 Only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) corresponding to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.) correspond to the above-mentioned predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "2/14". On the other hand, 8 variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as variation patterns in which the variation side timer effect is not executed, and 4 variation patterns (variation Numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), so the applicable ratio is "4/8".

In such a configuration, when the effect content of the variation pattern is one that can perform the count effect display (variation side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is higher than the case of the variation pattern that does not perform the variable side timer effect. The ratio of determining that the count effect display (notice-side timer effect) cannot be executed as the effect content of the effect is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the appearance of a plurality of count displays within one production pattern (variable production) without increasing the level of expectation uselessly and lowering the frequency of appearance.

As will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (variation effect) determined in the effect symbol variation start process is counted as a count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), the rate at which the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect appears differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. The timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a moderate probability of lottery, and when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 are executed, the timer effect on the advance notice side can appear with a high probability of lottery. ing.

It should be noted that even when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the above-described advance notice-side timer effect may appear at a low probability. In addition, even if any of the performance patterns corresponding to the variable numbers 15 to 22, in which the timer performance on the announcement side can appear with a high lottery probability, is actually executed, the big hit is more likely than the loss. The announcement side timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability for the performance pattern that wins the 2nd prize, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16.例文帳に追加ing.

In such a configuration, the count effect display can be performed in advance depending on whether the change pattern is the first count change pattern (for example, change number 10) or the second count change pattern (for example, change number 22). The ratio of execution as the effect content (notice side timer effect) will be different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays in one production pattern (variation production) is high, the type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the ratio of appearance of a plurality of count displays, so that it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even if the same reach type effect content appears in the effect pattern (for example, character reach, SP reach), the variable side timer effect is included as the effect content. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22), the notice-side timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) that does not include the variable timer effect as the effect content. The rate at which the effect appears (the rate at which it is determined by the preliminary lottery that the timer effect on the advance notice side is to be executed) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer effects (fluctuation side timer effect, advance notice side timer effect) appear in one effect pattern only by requiring the degree of expectation for a big hit that one advance notice side timer effect is won in the advance notice lottery. As a result, the double timer performance opportunity can be realized without uselessly increasing the degree of expectation for a big win.

In addition, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the production pattern (variation production) determined in the production pattern fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, there are variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "conversation notice" is the object of production and variable side timer effects (variable side count effect display) in which "cut-in" is the object of production. , the mode of count display (the form and color of the count number, etc.) is different. That is, in this case, even if a production pattern (for example, variation numbers 9 and 11) having the same ready-to-win production as the production content is executed, the state of count display of the variable side timer production (variable side count production display) is confirmed. By doing so, coupled with ``the ratio of appearance of the above-mentioned advance notice timer effect is set to differ according to which count fluctuation pattern it is,'' the likelihood of appearance of the advance notice timer effect is recognized. can be expected.

Regarding the mode of the count display that appears in the notice-side timer effect (prediction-side count effect display), regardless of whether or not the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in), the variable-side timer effect (variation-side It may be different from (or at least different from) the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the count effect display), or may be the same as the same mode (or at least the same as either) .

However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice-side timer effect (preview-side count effect display) will be executed in a common manner regardless of the type of effect that is the object of the effect. This is useful in making the player aware that the forewarning-side timer effect, which is set to a high degree, is appearing, thereby improving the player's sense of anticipation. In this sense, it is more desirable that the notice-side timer effect be different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) appearing in the variable-side timer effect (variation-side count effect display). A plurality of modes with different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared for the above-mentioned common aspect of the advance notice side timer effect (prediction side count effect display), and one of them is executed. You may do so.

In addition, in order to more preferably recognize that the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed, the count display when the advance notice-side timer effect is executed and the count display when the variable timer effect is executed are displayed. It is desirable to make the count speed (for example, the speed at which numbers change during count-up and count-down) different. With such a configuration, after the timer effect is started, even during the period in which the count display is in progress, the count speed of the timer effect is made to be watched, and the expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make the player interested in which one of the advance notice side timer performance with a high degree of expectation is being executed and to suitably maintain the game interest during the timer expiration period.例文帳に追加

Also, at this time, in the variable timer effect, depending on the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in), the count display is performed at a speed relatively close to (or the same speed as) the count speed of the advance notice timer effect ( cut-in) and a mode (conversation notice) in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the counting speed of the timer effect on the advance notice side, it is possible to determine whether the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is possible to make it more interesting by varying the difficulty of judging. Also, in the variable side timer effect (or advance notice side timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating the appearance and disappearance of the count number, whereas in the notice side timer effect (or fluctuation side timer effect), the count number is displayed continuously. You may make it count-display by displaying.

According to such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the variable-side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice-side timer effect are executed at the same time, it is possible to easily grasp whether or not the advance notice-side timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to play games, and that the interest in games will be improved.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (count variation patterns such as variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, and 17 to 22) corresponding to the variation side timer effects. A plurality of production patterns with different start timings or end timings (total count or time required to complete all counts) are set as selectable production patterns. Then, when a variation pattern corresponding to the variable side timer effect is acquired, one of the plurality of effect patterns is determined based on a random number for effect, etc., and the count display of the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer are performed. By making the easiness of simultaneous execution with the count display of the effect different (for example, the larger the total number of counts, the easier it is to overlap), the easiness of determining whether or not the advance notice timer effect is being executed can be made different. I try to make it interesting

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of production patterns (the production target of the timer production and the reach The content of the production is the same), but there are multiple production patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display (total count or time required to complete all counts) (however, they are not subject to timer production. The type of effect to be executed and the type of ready-to-win effect to be executed as the effect content of the variation pattern may be the same for each effect pattern), and a plurality of different variation patterns may be prepared for one-to-one correspondence.

In addition, the number of counts displayed (total number of counts) when appearing in the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect are different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the variable side timer effect and the notice By making the selection rate of the specific count display number different between the side timer effect and the side timer effect, the difficulty of judging whether or not the advance notice side timer effect is being executed can be differentiated to add interest. .

Further, if the timer effect on the notice side is executed by countdown display, and the timer effect on the variable side is executed by the countup display, it is possible to definitely grasp whether or not the timer effect on the notice side is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to play games and greatly improve the interest in games. In addition, while the notice-side timer effect is executed with a countdown display, the variable-side timer effect for a specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed with a count-up display, and a different effect from the specific effect (for example, (Cut-in) is executed with countdown display, the difficulty of judging whether or not the notice-side timer effect is being executed is made different depending on the effect object, making it more interesting. be able to give.

Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the advance notice side timer effect, and there are cases where different effects are targeted for the effect. to control. And when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, compared to the case where different effects are targeted for the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect. It is set so that the rate of lowering the expectation of a big hit is high, and even if the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is made different.

That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, one of the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect is displayed first by a predetermined value. , and the other count display continues, so at this point, it is as if a different effect is being performed (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high-expectation mode). It looks as if Then, after that, the other count display that has been continued will reach a predetermined value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is the object of effect and will be terminated. Even if the timer effect on the end side reveals that a relatively low-expectation conversation announcement is targeted for effect, a different effect that can appear after that is targeted for effect ( It is expected that the sense of anticipation for the fact that the timer effect is being executed in a manner with a relatively high degree of expectation will be maintained, and that the interest in the game will be improved.

Also, in this way, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for effect in the variable timer effect and the advance notice timer effect, the timing when the variable timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the advance notice timer effect are predetermined. It is desirable to display separate indications corresponding to the end of the count (for example, "count successful!", "chance up!", etc.) at the timing when the numerical value is reached.

More specifically, a variable-side timer effect and an advance-notice-side timer effect for effecting "conversation notice" executed as a change-side or advance-notice-side effect appear within one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the variable side timer effect and the count display of the advance notice side timer effect are performed simultaneously. While the count display progresses according to the fluctuation side specific production ("Count success!", Effects according to the appearance of the conversation notice, etc.), the notice side timer production is related to the "conversation notice" Count display according to the notice-side specific effects that occur as the notice-side effects ("Chance Up!", Timer end display that appears according to the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined number of seconds before the start of the effect), etc.) By advancing the game, different indications corresponding to the end of the count will appear at different timings.

By the way, the effects of the conversation notice and the cut-in are required to be executed without fail when they are the object of the variable-side timer effect (when the count variation pattern is determined). In particular, conversation notice and cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation. It is required to appear in a highly expected manner. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the variable timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the above effect pattern (variable effect), and the variable timer effect and the effect object can be changed only by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable to make it possible for each of the effects to be performed (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to appear. However, instead of this, it is also possible to perform control so that when the variable-side timer effect is executed, the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) to be targeted for the effect is always selected in the advance notice lottery. .

In addition, if each effect of the conversation notice and cut-in is not subject to the effect of the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not it will appear as the effect content of the notice in the notice lottery described later. A judgment is made as to what mode (relatively high or low expectations) should be made to appear as the content of the side effect, and the appearance is controlled based on the result of the determination. .

Hereinafter, the production pattern determination processing using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the variation pattern command and the symbol type command from the main control MPU 1310a, first, based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command and the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command, the current game Refer to the determination table according to the state. For example, if the production pattern is determined based on the pattern type, it is possible to give bias (expectation) to the probability variation expectation when a specific production pattern appears, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state, etc. become.

Then, as the effect pattern associated with the variable number, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns with different start timings or end timings of the count display that appears in the variable timer effect) are prepared to be selectable. If so, one of a plurality of performance patterns with different start timings or end timings of count display is selected based on the hit/loss of the big hit determination. At this time, if the big hit judgment is won, the effect pattern is set so that the start timing or end timing of the count display is delayed at a high rate, and this makes it possible to set the start timing or end timing of the count display. The later it is, the higher the possibility that a big hit pattern will appear.

Also, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when a special effect condition is established, the count fluctuation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is obtained. Even in such a case, a performance pattern set so that the variable timer performance does not appear is selected from among the plurality of performance patterns.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the production pattern (the production from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation) that appears during the pattern fluctuation is thus selected, what kind of advance notice production is to be performed within the execution period of the production pattern. It will be decided whether to additionally execute (combine) in such a manner (advance lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already explained sound data creation process (step S1032 in FIG. 95), the automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be explained later. Therefore, next, the automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described. First, let me briefly explain the background.

In general pachinko machines, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of a game, thereby realizing an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach should improve the player's expectations, there are some that output a variety of sounds depending on the type, and others that do not. In such a typical pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene, including each such reach, and each such sound is assigned to a corresponding default channel. Channels are used for playback (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in general pachinko machines, even if there is a vacant channel, there are cases where the sound to be played cannot be assigned to the vacant channel due to channel allocation, and the sound to be played cannot be played. Therefore, there is a problem that it is difficult to realize various sound productions.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the purpose is to make effective use of empty channels to realize various sound effects and increase the interest of the player. Output means) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) dynamically assign and manage each channel for each sound to be output, while the number of combinations of sounds scheduled to be output is determined by each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds scheduled to be output according to a predetermined priority within the range of the maximum number of channels. (channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds scheduled to be output through each channel dynamically allocated within the maximum number of channels in accordance with the predetermined priority (sound output control means). . A specific description will be given below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
119(A) and 119(B) each show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target for this embodiment. FIG. 119A shows an example of sound reproduction channels. Sound control by the fixed channel method uses, for example, all 16 channels of reproduction channel 00 to reproduction channel 15 in the same manner as sound control by the automatic channel method according to the present embodiment, which will be described later. It should be noted that the "reproduction channel" shown in the figure omits the reproduction channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 119B shows an example of reproduction channel allocation for each sound. In sound control by this fixed channel method, each sound is assigned in advance to each reproduction channel to be used, as shown in the figure. Here, as for the basic sound reproduction rules, one sound requires two channels when output in stereo, while one channel is required when output in monaural.

As for the "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure, the sound that has started to be reproduced should not be silenced until the end of reproduction under any circumstances. As for the channel assignment method, a reproduction channel and a sound are exclusively assigned as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending prize winning sound" may be overwritten with another sound during reproduction to be muted. As for the channel assignment method, the same channel is assigned as much as possible so that reproduction timings do not overlap.

In sound control using the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel that is being output, the sound being output is muted and the new sound is output. For sounds that may cause problems if overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, definitions of playback channel number, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed for each sound category and sound name. there is Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the explanation is omitted.

The left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of “0xFF” indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 121 shows the relationship between game states, playback sounds, and playback channels. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the game state, and the game states are, for example, "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot in progress". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority, and the (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 122(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122(B) shows an example of a channel playback time chart, and FIG. An example of a problem is shown. 122(A) to 122(C) have a common horizontal axis as a time axis.

In FIG. 122(A), along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, the game states are shown in order of "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot". It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so that it becomes "medium".

In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, as a new sound as shown in problem 1 of FIG. 119(B), the "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "preliminary notice A", so "preliminary notice A ' is overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the 'first half notice A' sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

In the "second half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 122(A), for example, as a new sound as shown in problem 2 of FIG. 119(B), the "pending winning sound" is assigned in advance to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", so the "full screen notice ” will be overwritten with the pending winning sound, and the output of the “full screen notice” sound will stop (in the case of sound control using a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 123(A) and 123(B) respectively show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment.

FIG. 123(A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel, and the above-described sound control by a fixed channel means that the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to "AUTOch" in the drawing). The difference is that Here, that the channel division is an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to the rules described later (see above). (equivalent to "sound control by automatic channel method").

Sound control by the automatic channel method according to this embodiment uses, for example, all 16 channels of playback channel 00 to playback channel 15 in the same way as sound control by the fixed channel method described above. It should be noted that the "playback channel" in the figure is an abbreviation for the playback channel.

On the other hand, FIG. 123(B) shows an example of reproduction channel allocation for each sound. In this automatic channel system sound control, each sound is individually assigned a priority as shown. As mentioned above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure must not be muted midway through the start of reproduction, no matter what happens until the end of reproduction. On the other hand, the illustrated "normal BGM" to "pending prize winning sound" may be overwritten with another sound during reproduction to be muted.

In sound control by the automatic channel method, individual reproduction channels are defined as AUTO group channels (hereinafter abbreviated as "AUTO group"). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to play sounds for the AUTO group. When assigning sounds to AUTO groups, each AUTO group can specify an identifier and priority for specifying a particular AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if it is a sound defined in the AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced if there is an empty channel (unused channel) in the designated AUTO group.

In the above case, if there is no vacant channel, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced within the AUTO group based on the priority of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound being reproduced, the performance control program terminates the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority than or is not the same as the sound being reproduced.

FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel method. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel method, for each sound category and sound name, a playback channel number, an initial left/right pan value, an initial up/down pan value, an initial volume value, and a Identifiers and priorities for specifying AUTO groups (also referred to as “playback priority”), initial left/right panning values, initial up/down panning values, initial volume values, sound It manages definitions of number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting.

First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates in which AUTO group among multiple AUTO groups each sound is reproduced. The priority is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when each sound is reproduced at the same time. The order of priority indicates that the higher the numerical value, the higher the priority of the sound to be reproduced, while the lower the numerical value, the lower the priority, the lower the priority of the sound to be reproduced. In this embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, notification sounds having a priority of "25" ("notification sound 1", "notification sound 2", and "notification sound 3") , sound effects with a priority of "20" ("jackpot confirmation sound" and "button pressing sound"), BGM with a priority of "15" (such as "normal BGM"), and a priority of "10" Sound effects (such as "full-screen preview sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first half preview sound effect" to "second half preview sound effect"), pending winning sound with priority "01" and As a result, in a state where there is no idle channel, for example, when an information sound is to be reproduced, there is no need to reproduce it using a predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound with the lower priority (for example, the pending winning sound ) is being played back, the notification sound is preferentially played back.

As already described, the left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. This left/right pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that the signal is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). , the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, the difference in volume output from the left and right speakers individually becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

Also, as already described, the initial up/down panning value is set to the up/down direction of the pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound by the speaker. By dynamically changing the set value of the left and right panning during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . This up/down pan initial value is managed as pan information. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of “0xFF” indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of playback, and can be set, for example, in a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF". ), it is not affected by changes in volume due to the operation of one or more volume control devices installed in the game machine, and the volume is always played back at the initial value. represent. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

The seek point represents the reproduction start position number within the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In this embodiment, as the seek points, for example, "0" is set for each of "upper right speaker confirmation sound" to "first half notice A sound effect", while "second half notice A sound effect" and "second half notice B effect" are set to "0". "Sound" is set to "1". When the maximum number of sounds that can be registered in the sound source is exceeded by such seek points, it is possible to register sounds exceeding the maximum number that can be registered.

The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the illustration) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the drawing) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 125 shows the relationship between game states, reproduced sounds and priorities. The time axis, which is the horizontal axis, indicates the game state, and the game states are, for example, "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "jackpot in progress". ” can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents (reproduction) priority, and the (reproduction) priority increases from bottom to top.

FIG. 126(A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126(B) shows an example of an AUTO channel playback time chart. 126(A) and 126(B) have a common horizontal axis as a time axis. In FIG. 126(A), the game states are shown in order along the time axis, which is the horizontal axis, as "first half of variation", "second half of variation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " For example, the game is controlled so as to become a "big hit".

In the "first half of variation" shown in FIG. 126(A), as shown in FIG. equivalent to range A). Here, when trying to reproduce the pending winning sound as a new sound because there was a start winning (corresponding to "suspended winning" in the figure), playback channels 12 and 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , Since this pending winning sound can be played back using playback channels 12-13, none of the sounds being played back are overwritten by the pending winning sound (equivalent to "holding sound playback" in the figure), and other Output of all kinds of sounds continues.

As shown in FIG. 126(B), as part of the "second half of variation" shown in FIG. equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when a pending winning sound is reproduced as a new sound due to a start winning (equivalent to "suspended winning" in the drawing), playback channels 02 and 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , all other types of sounds continue to be output without overwriting any of the sounds being played back with the pending prize-winning sound (corresponding to “play on hold sound” in the figure).

In the "latter half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126(A), for example, a notification (corresponding to "notification 2 occurrence" shown in the figure) has occurred after that, so that the priority of the new sound is "25", which is the highest notification sound ( 126(B), it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing. Therefore, the sound with the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound with the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 and 05, the pending prize winning sound is reproduced as described above. Since it is higher than the priority (01) of the pending prize-winning sound, the pending prize-winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

FIG. 127 shows an example of automatic channel control work information stored in the AUTO group channel control work area provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control includes, for each channel, a setting reservation flag, requested sound number, playing sound number, automatic allocation group, priority during automatic allocation, elapsed time since registration, volume control, etc. for each channel as a work name. It contains work for control and work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to them.

If the setting reservation flag has a value other than "0", it indicates that setting reservation has been made. The requested sound number indicates "-1" for stop, and other than "-1" indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound to be reproduced. The sound number during reproduction indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying the sound being reproduced when "-1" indicates stop, and other than "-1".

In the automatic allocation group, a channel is fixedly allocated when the value is "0", and a channel is automatically allocated when the value is "1~" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). equivalent to ). Here, for example, if the automatic assignment group is "1", it indicates AUTO group 1, and if it is "2", it indicates AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority at the time of performing sound control by the automatic channel method, which will be described later.

The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound set to "0". In addition, the elapsed time from the registration is the time when a new sound is being played in a situation where multiple sounds with the same priority at the time of automatic allocation are being played. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer period of time is identified, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound to be erased.

Volume control work stores volume values of sounds to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the set values of the left-right pan and the up-down pan described above.

FIG. 128 shows a specific channel (hereinafter referred to as channel X) out of a finite number of prepared channels for sound control by a fixed channel system for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding effect sounds. ) shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the process of outputting only in the In this sound definition table, for each sound name, definitions of playback priority, left/right pan initial value, up/down pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting, and output type setting are managed. is doing. For convenience of explanation, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown here, and the definitions of the other notification sounds and dramatic sounds are omitted. In addition to the definition of the effect sound by the fixed channel method illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel method illustrated in FIG. It is also possible to use

The priority is a parameter used to determine which of the notification sounds should be assigned to channel X to be output when a plurality of notification sounds respectively satisfy the output conditions. A high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and output regardless of the allocation status of the notification sound having a lower priority numerical value to the channel X. As will be described later, when the priorities are the same, the notification sound assigned first to channel X is given priority, and after the output of the notification sound is completed, the notification sound assigned to channel X is output. It will be done.

The left/right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the sound by the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L and the upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the setting value of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference is generated in the volume output from the left and right speakers individually, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L). The difference in volume output from the left and right speakers, which are the combination of 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, is 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R).

The initial value of vertical panning is the sound image localization of sound by upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the set value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference in the volume output from the upper and lower speakers is created, and the sound image can be localized in any space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if it is set to "0x00", it indicates that it is output only from the pair of upper speakers 573. For example, if it is set to "0x80", it indicates the volume difference that is individually output from the combination of the upper and lower speakers. becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, a setting of "0xFF" indicates output from only the pair of lower speakers 921 .

The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set within a setting range from "0x00" to "0xFF", for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The playback type setting is loop playback (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly plays back the target sound, or 1SHOT playback (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that plays back the target sound once. It represents whether The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is to be reproduced in monaural or stereo.

FIG. 129 is a table showing, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128, notification content, notification mode, notification time, and conditions for termination of notification (cancellation conditions). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a finite notification time is set for each notification sound. This is a measure to maintain the status and refrain from outputting the notification sound after that.

As shown in FIG. 129, notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) indicates a state in which magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed). It informs you of something. And, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "boo, magnetism detected", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism detected") ) and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound six times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism detected". However, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the cancellation condition "return power on" is satisfied. It's becoming

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly), the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration (there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by a pounding act). state), and the count sensor 4005 (first big winning opening sensor or second big winning opening sensor or A notification sound that notifies that the detection by the winning opening sensor) is performed (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed to forcibly open the large winning opening in the closed state to win a game ball) 3 (large prize winning abnormality) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been performed, and the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are The notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo-boo vibration detected" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively. 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from when there is, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. Execution of the lighting is continued until the canceling condition "return power on" is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (big prize abnormality), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Boo Boo big prize abnormality detected", Display (for example, "A big winning error has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively executed, and as the notification time, 60 seconds after the detection by the count sensor 4005 (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times), the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated. The display and the lighting of various lamps are continued until the canceling condition of "turning on the power again" is satisfied.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group each adopt a different display mode. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for each of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. In addition, for the notification sound to be looped, the notification sound 1, such as "boo-boo", plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (a state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed). 3, and a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of informing individual identification as to which content of the notification is. The warning sound consists of a monotonous sound to give a warning under a tense fraudulent situation, and the message sound consists of a variety of sounds to clarify the distinction from other notification sounds. It is desirable to ensure that

That is, when reporting something belonging to the first reporting group (a state in which there is a high possibility that fraud has been committed), rather than specifying which reporting type it belongs to, the hall side's response to fraudulent activity It is important to expedite the initial action of In this regard, according to the above-described configuration, only by outputting a "boo-boo" notification sound or lighting modes unique to the first notification group by various lamps (light-emitting devices), those belonging to the first notification group (fraudulent behavior) Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state where there is a high possibility that it has been committed, it is expected to speed up the initial response of the hall side to the fraudulent act. Furthermore, a message sound indicating which type of notification is being output, following the notification sound of "boo-boo", or displaying within the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is expected that the treatment after the initial response to the hall side will be performed smoothly.

On the other hand, notification sound 4 (door open) is a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (the possibility that a fraudulent act is being performed by opening the door). However, it is possible that the door has been opened by the hall side's emergency response measures). The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "The door is open. ”) and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively. The notification time is 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound three times) from the time when the door frame open switch 618 detects the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong." ), the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting of various lamps are canceled by the release condition "Door closed detection (door frame open switch 618 turns on the main body frame 4 On the other hand, detection of closing of the door frame 3)” is satisfied.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the body frame open switch 619 detects that the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are being carried out by opening the body frame, the body frame may be opened by the hall side due to abnormal measures). , is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a medium degree of possibility that some kind of fraudulent act has been committed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are The mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common.

For example, in notification sound 5 (frame open), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and a display ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed respectively, and the main body frame opening switch is set as the notification time 619 30 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 3 times) from the time of detection, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is terminated, while the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, Execution of lighting by various lamps is continued until the release condition "detection of frame closure (detection of body frame 4 being closed with respect to outer frame 2 by body frame open switch 619)" is satisfied. It will happen.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group adopt different display modes. Regarding lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all of the various lamps must be lit) is set for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a form) is adopted. However, the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode of the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. In addition, regarding the notification sounds that are the target of the loop processing, message sounds (unique sounds) that play the role of notifying individual identification as to which content of the notification is, and those belonging to the second notification group (fraudulent behavior A state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that the there is

That is, in the case of notifying those belonging to the second notification group (the state in which there is a medium degree of possibility that a fraudulent act has been committed), it is possible to prevent the person who is playing a proper game from feeling disgusted. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side as quickly as possible. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for notifying which notification type it belongs to is output. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game will be less likely to feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, although the alarm sound is different from that in the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for those who are playing a proper game to feel disgust. In order to make it difficult for a player who is playing a proper game to feel disgust, the lighting mode is different from that in the case of belonging to the first information group, but is output in the case of belonging to the third information group. It is expected that the hall side's countermeasures against abnormalities can be speeded up to some extent by performing notification by lighting various lamps that are not used.

On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the non-time-saving state, but the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a. The passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the situation should be corrected to a proper manner (left-handed)). This is to inform you that The notification mode includes a loop process that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed play", and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed play"). ”) are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both the loop processing that repeatedly outputs the notification sound "Please return to the left hand" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in a non-time saving state. It is designed to end in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) from the time when the gate sensor 4003 detects it.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), the full tank detection sensor 279 detects that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls (lower tray A notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) for notifying that the game ball is in a state where the game ball in the 322 is in a state where the game ball should be removed is performed as a game guide for properly progressing the game although the possibility of cheating is low. It is regarded as belonging to the third notification group when it is in the power state, and for the notification sounds belonging to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and cancellation conditions are all set to be common. and

For example, in notification sound 7 (draw the ball guidance), as its notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" and A display (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") is executed respectively, and loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" as the notification time, and a game board The display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is completed in 20 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound twice) after detection by the full tank detection sensor 279. .

However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance), the sensor 2401, the When 279 is still in the detection state, the notification processing (notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance)) is executed again from the beginning.

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, only message sounds are output as the notification sounds 6 and 7. More precisely, for example, after the message sounds for 5 seconds have been output, silence for 5 seconds is output. Data is assigned to channel X and a corresponding sound (silent output) is output, and loop processing is performed to repeat the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and the silent data as a set. It has become. Since the notification sounds 6 and 7 both output silent data for the same amount of time, they function as unique notification modes different from those of the first notification group and the second notification group. Even the hall side can properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in the noisy hall. As for silent data, it is desirable to prepare in advance as one sound data (10-second sound data) including a message sound, and to perform loop processing while assigning this to channel X.

By the way, there may be silent portions in the notification sounds used in the first notification group and the second notification group (between the warning sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to give a "pause". It is clear that it is temporal and is fundamentally different from the above-mentioned relatively long period of silence (third reporting group) which has a group identification function.

According to such a configuration, an alarm sound such as "boo-boo" or "ping-pong-ping-pong" is not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silent time interposed. It is possible to notify the player about the game guidance without making the player feel disgust.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the same priority order is set for the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group. You may do so. Also, as the playback type setting, loop playback that repeatedly plays back the target sound is adopted, but this is not necessarily the case, and 1SHOT playback that plays back the target sound once may be adopted. . In addition, "boo-boo", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group, and "ping-pong ping-pong", which is commonly used in the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group, are related to the message sound. The sound data may be prepared separately for each notification sound, or may be prepared as sound data separate from the message sound, and when outputting, sound data is created by combining the message sound and the warning sound. You may assign it to a channel afterward.

FIG. 130(a) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 130(a), at timing tα1 at which no notification sound is output, if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94), the main The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetism has been detected. Next, information indicating that magnetism has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is provided for the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, the magnetic detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) shown in FIG. (Here, the loop of "boo-boo magnetism detected") is started, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to measure the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality).

When assigning notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel X, schedule data for sound generation corresponding to magnetism detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control is performed. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. On top of this, by assigning notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) to channel X, the notification sound such as "boo, magnetism has been detected" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetism detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetism detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "magnetism detected I did") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(a), 60 seconds have not passed since the timing tα1, and at the timing tα2 in which the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism has been detected" is being reproduced in a loop, step S112 ( It is assumed that vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 in the process of FIG. In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that vibration has been detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 at which the magnetism was detected. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that vibration has been detected is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is provided for the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is found that information on vibration detection is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to channel X. I don't do that. That is, since notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) with the same priority order is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 2 (vibration anomaly) is not newly assigned to channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and is continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to vibration detection is not set at the timing tα2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) will not be progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, however, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (60 seconds ) is set, and if the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is completed, a sound corresponding to the vibration detection is generated. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the notification sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boom vibration detected") Playback is executed.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to vibration detection is not set, the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to vibration detection and vibration detection are not set. By extracting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal and the lamp For lighting, these are executed.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal, the display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately from the position where the display corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is In lamp lighting, although the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode corresponding to the magnetism detection is already set and has the same priority. The lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the magnetism detection that has already been set is reflected in the light emission of various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the vibration detection is changed into various lighting modes. They are not reflected respectively by lamp emission. Similarly to the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for generation of light emission modes corresponding to vibration detection may not be set at timing tα2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the magnetism detection and the schedule data for generating the light emission mode according to the vibration detection have the same data contents, any of them can be used. Even if it is reflected, there is no change in lamp lighting.

After that, at timing tα3 when 60 seconds have passed from timing tα1, the notification sound "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) being timed out. The loop process to be executed is terminated. In this case, the time required to play the notification sound "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is set to 10 seconds, so the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) is set to the time. At the increased timing tα3, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "boo-boo magnetism detected" has been played six times.

At this time, since the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation according to the vibration detection, and By assigning the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for a period of time (the time (α) from timing tα2 to timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “Boooo vibration was detected" loop).

That is, at timing tα2, the timer for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to vibration detection is not set, but is set at timing tα3. Therefore, at timing tα3, it is possible to play the notification sound "Boo-boo vibration detected" from the head, and when the timer for notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) times up, "Boo-boo vibration detected." It is possible to prompt that the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing (for example, the timing of "Boo-Boo-Shake") of the notification sound such as "Done" and not to be reproduced.

According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 130 (a)), when the sixth warning sound (here, "boo-boo") and the sixth message sound (here, "magnetism detected") have finished playing, the seventh warning sound (here, It is possible to realize smooth switching of notification sounds as if "Boo-Boo") was played back. As a result, "boo boo magnetism detected" and "boo boo vibration detected" are connected in a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraud alerts in a tense situation (for example, If information sound 1 ends with "Boo-boo magnetism" and information sound 2 starts with "Motion detected", meaningless information such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" content and may confuse the site).

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of the vibration is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up at the alarm sound of "boo-boo", and the message sound ends. Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality detection has occurred at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing and reproduction is not performed (only magnetic abnormality is detected). In the case of notification, the notification sound is terminated at a good timing). As a result, when the notification sound stops halfway, it will be urged to check the display in the liquid crystal, and the display in the liquid crystal will say "magnetism detected" and "vibration detected" respectively. By being displayed, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetism detection and the vibration detection are performed.

FIG. 130(b) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

Here, the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) while referring to the above-described processing (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ) is roughly the same as

For example, as shown in FIG. 130(b), at timing tβ1 at which no notification sound is being output, frame open detection by the body frame open switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If there is, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame opening has been detected. Next, information indicating that frame opening has been detected is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided for the notification process in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, frame open detection is detected. When it is determined that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame open) shown in FIG. Start playing the notification sound in the mode (here, loop of "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong") and set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of notification sound 5 (frame open) .

When assigning notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel X, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to frame open detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating notification sound 5 (frame open) to channel X, the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection and the lighting mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection are copied from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until frame closed detection, which is a condition for canceling the frame open detection, is performed.

Through such processing, a notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is repeatedly executed for 30 seconds from timing tβ1, and a display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "the frame is It is open"), and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group) are executed respectively.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(b), 30 seconds have not passed since the timing tβ1, and at the timing tβ2 when the notification sound such as "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is being reproduced in a loop, step S110 Alternatively, it is assumed that the door frame open switch 618 detects door opening in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening has been detected, as in the case of the timing tβ1 at which the frame opening was detected. Next, information indicating that the door has been detected as open is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door has been detected as being open is output to the outside based on the state of the updated notification flag, and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of door opening) is supplied to the process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a analyzes the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame open) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is found that the door open detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), notification sound 4 (door open) shown in FIG. do not assign. That is, since notification sound 5 (frame open) with the same priority order is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 4 (door open) is not newly assigned to channel X. Thus, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (frame open) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of door opening is not set at timing tβ2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) will not be progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, however, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds ) is set, and when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is completed, if the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out, the door open detection is responded to. Set the schedule data for sound generation, assign the notification sound 4 (door open) to channel X for the remaining time, and perform the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong") It is for executing notification sound reproduction.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the schedule data for generating the sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is not set, but the schedule data for generating the screen corresponding to the detection of the door opening, and By extracting the schedule data for generating the lighting mode according to the door open detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for display and lamp lighting.

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal, the display corresponding to the opening of the door appears separately from the position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. there is In lamp lighting, although the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the door open detection is set, the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the detection of the frame opening is already set and the priority is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the detection of the frame opening which has already been set will be reflected in the light emission of various lamps, and the lighting mode of the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the detection of the door opening will be reflected. Aspects are not reflected in each type of lamp emission. Similarly to the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for generation of the light emission mode corresponding to the door open detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately thereafter).

However, as described above, in this embodiment, the schedule data for generating the lighting mode in response to the detection of the frame opening and the schedule data for generating the lighting mode in response to the detection of the door opening have the same data content. No change occurs in the lighting of the lamp even when either of them is reflected.

After that, at timing tβ3, when 30 seconds have passed since timing tβ1, a notification sound such as “frame is open ping-pong ping-pong” is played based on the timer (30 seconds) of notification sound 5 (frame open) being timed out. A loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. In this example, the time required to play the notification sound "frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" is set to 10 seconds, so the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 5 (frame open) is set to 10 seconds. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "the frame is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times.

At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 4 (door open) has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets schedule data for sound generation according to door open detection, and By allocating the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (β) from timing tβ2 to timing tβ3 from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door is open Ping-Pong Ping-Pong loop) will be played.

That is, at timing tβ2, the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) is set, while the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to door open detection is not set, but is set at timing tβ3. Therefore, at timing tβ3, it is possible to reproduce the notification sound "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" from the beginning, and when the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) times up, "The door is open It is possible to prompt the user to terminate the loop processing at an incomplete timing (for example, the timing of “the door is open, beep”) of the notification sound such as “Ping-pong, ping-pong” so that it will not be played.

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 130(b)), when the third message sound (here, "the frame is open") and the third warning sound (here, "ping-pong ping-pong") have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, it is possible to realize smooth switching of the notification sound as if "the door is open") was played back. As a result, "the frame is open ping-pong ping-pong" and "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" are connected in a strange place, and it becomes impossible to recognize the content of the notification in a tense situation. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence.

Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the detection of the door opening becomes short, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. As a result, it is possible to reliably grasp that the door is open.

FIG. 130(c) shows processing when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied. An example is shown.

As shown in FIG. 130(c), at timing tγ1 at which no notification sound is output, the game If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the area 5a with respect to the center accessory 2500 (right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state), the main In the control MPU 1310a, the information indicating that there was a right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (detection of right-handed hitting in the time-saving state) is provided to the process related to notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. become. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated within the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not externally output to the hall computer.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) when no notification sound is output, in a non-time saving state 129 is assigned to channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). set) to start the reproduction of the notification sound in that notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to left-handed hitting"), and a timer ( 20 seconds).

Regarding the detection of hitting to the right in the non-time-saving state, in this embodiment, the information to that effect is output as a command from the main control MPU 1310a. Only the information that the ball has passed is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether the detection by the gate sensor 4003 was performed in a non-time saving state. You may make it perform the process regarding the information sound 6 (left-handed guidance) based on having detected by the gate sensor 4003 in a non-time saving state.

In addition, when assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the schedule data for sound generation according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The data is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. On top of this, by assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to channel X, the notification sound "please return to left-handed" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

Also, at this time, in the peripheral control MPU1511a, schedule data for screen generation according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM1511b or the peripheral control RAM1511c, and the schedule data of the peripheral control RAM1511c By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the display in the liquid crystal described above is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the end of notification (the timer (20 seconds) for timing the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed out), which is the condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). It will continue to run until In addition, regarding the processing of the third notification group, which has a low possibility of fraud, it is important to avoid impeding the progress of the production, and the schedule data for generating the lighting mode according to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is set. will not be

Through such processing, the notification sound "Please return to the left hand" is repeatedly executed for 20 seconds from the timing tγ1, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is continued until the notification sound ends. Display within the area (eg, "Please return to left-handed") will be executed.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 130(c), 20 seconds have not passed since timing tγ1, and at timing tγ2 in which the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" is being reproduced in a loop, step S110 or It is assumed that the lower tray full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the main control MPU 1310a sets the information indicating that the lower tray full state was detected as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 where the right-handed stroke was detected in the non-time-saving state. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (lower tray full detection) is provided for the notification processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that) when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is issued in the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is found that the information on the detection of the lower tray being full is included, in the warning processing of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) shown in FIG. Do not assign to X. That is, since notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having the same priority order is already assigned to channel X, notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) should not be newly assigned to channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the schedule data itself for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full state is not set at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the notification sound 7 (guidance for pulling out the ball) will not be progressed without being assigned to the channel X.

On the other hand, however, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), a timer (20 second) is set, and if the timer (20 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (playback state) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is completed, the lower plate is full. Set the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to channel X for the remaining time, and set the notification mode (here, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray ” loop) to play the notification sound.

In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tγ2 (or immediately thereafter), although the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set, the schedule data for screen generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting them in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-described display in the liquid crystal display is executed. there is

In addition, in the display in the liquid crystal, the display corresponding to the ball pulling guidance appears separately from the position where the display corresponding to the left-hand hitting guidance is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It's becoming

After that, at timing tγ3 when 20 seconds have passed from timing tγ1, a notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed hitting” is generated based on the timer (20 seconds) of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) having timed up. A loop process that is repeatedly executed is terminated. Here, since the time required to reproduce the notification sound "Please return to left-handed hitting" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" has been reproduced for two times.

At this time, since the timer (20 seconds) for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guide) has not timed out, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the schedule data for sound generation according to the detection of the lower tray full. Then, by allocating the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (time obtained by subtracting the time (γ) from timing tγ2 to timing tγ3 from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here Then, the loop of "Please remove the ball from the lower plate") will be executed to reproduce the notification sound.

That is, at the timing tγ2, the timer for the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is set, but the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full state is not set, and is set at the timing tγ3. As a result, at timing tγ3, the notification sound "Please remove the ball from the lower tray" can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer for notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) times up , "Please remove the ball from the lower tray", the loop processing will be terminated at an incomplete timing (for example, "Please remove the ball from the lower tray") so that it will not be played. be able to encourage

According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 130 (c)), when the second message sound (here, "Please return to left-handed hitting") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball from the bottom plate") is heard. It is possible to realize smooth switching of notification sounds as if they were reproduced. As a result, the occurrence of a situation in which ``Please return to left-handed shooting'' and ``Please remove the ball from the bottom tray'' are connected at a strange point and the content of the notification cannot be recognized can be suitably suppressed. be able to

In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound is completed, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). It's like Therefore, when one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied, 5 seconds of silence data are interposed. Since the message sound of another notification sound will be played in , it is preferable to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the warning sound, and the notification content cannot be recognized. be able to evade.

FIG. 131(a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 131(a), at timing t-1 when no notification sound is output, if the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects magnetism in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94), As for the processing (magnetic anomaly processing) according to the magnetism detection, the same processing as described with reference to FIG. 130(a) is performed. Therefore, at timing t-1, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected", and the timing when the timer (60 seconds) for notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) times out At t-3, the loop processing ends at a good timing when the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131(a), 60 seconds have not passed since timing t-1, and timing t-2 is in the state of loop reproduction of an alarm sound such as "boo-boo magnetism detected". , it is assumed that door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetism detection has a higher priority than the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection (see FIG. 128). ), even if door open detection occurs, the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetism abnormality) is continued.

Usually, for the processing on the side with the lower priority, similarly to the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

However, the situation where the door is opened immediately after the occurrence of a magnetic anomaly is different from the case where the door is simply opened, and there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act is taking place. It can be said that the situation is such that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the second notification group with a medium degree of fraud possibility. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(a), at timing t-2, neither the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection nor the sound generation schedule data are set. , Only the flag is set according to the door open detection. Then, at timing t-3, based on the fact that the flag is set, the timer for notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to door open detection and the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to door open detection are set respectively. In addition to setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to channel X, and the notification sound reproduction in the notification mode (here, the loop of "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong") is started. . The execution of display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp in response to the door open detection is started from timing t-2.

According to such a configuration, even though the door frame open switch 618 detected the opening of the door by the door frame open switch 618 while the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism was detected" was being played back in a loop, "Boo-boo, magnetism was detected." From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as "" ends, the notification sound 4 (door open) corresponding to the detection of the door opening is reproduced for 30 seconds, "The door is open ping-pong ping-pong". The loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. In this way, by reproducing the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to the door open detection in a more polite notification mode, which is different from the processing based on the normal priority order, the notification belonging to the second notification group Despite the content (here, the loop of "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong"), it is expected to promote awareness of the fact that the possibility of fraud is high.

In addition, after the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected", the notification content will start with a message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group, which is under the most tense situation, It becomes possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification to which the user belongs has ended. On the other hand, by reproducing the warning sound "ping-pong ping-pong" after the message sound, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification does not belong to the third notification group.

FIG. 131(b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), at timing tδ1 when no notification sound is output, if the door frame open switch 618 detects door opening in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), As for the processing corresponding to the door open detection (door open processing), the same processing as the “frame open detection processing (frame open processing)” described with reference to FIG. 130(b) is performed. will be Therefore, at timing tδ1, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute the notification sound "Door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) for notification sound 4 (door open) times out. In this case, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the closing of the door, which is the condition for canceling the opening of the door, is detected.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131(b), at timing tδ2 where 30 seconds have not passed since timing tδ1 and the notification sound "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" is being played in a loop, step It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects right-handed driving in a non-time-saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) according to the door open detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 128), even if the right hitting detection occurs in the non-time saving state, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) will be continued.

That is, as described above, for the processing on the side with the lower priority, similarly to the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. is set, and the schedule data itself for sound generation is not set.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2, while setting the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), sound generation corresponding to right-handed detection in a non-time saving state Do not set schedule data for Then, at timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has not timed out, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is assigned to the channel X by the number of minutes, and the notification sound is reproduced in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Please return to the left-handed").

According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" does not include the warning sound such as "Please return to left-handed" at a good timing after the three times of the notification sound has been reproduced. is played back, it is possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. In addition, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after the output of the message sound is completed, silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to channel X, and a corresponding sound is output (silent output). It's like Therefore, even with such silent data, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of notification sound that has been reproduced has ended and that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. become.

FIG. 131(c) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tε1 when no notification sound is output, if the door frame open switch 618 detects door opening in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94), As for the processing corresponding to the door open detection (door open processing), the same processing as the “frame open detection processing (frame open processing)” described with reference to FIG. 130(b) is performed. will be Therefore, at timing tε1, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "The door is open, ping-pong ping-pong." In this case, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" has been reproduced three times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the closing of the door, which is the condition for canceling the opening of the door, is detected.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), 30 seconds have not passed since the timing tε1, and at the timing tε2 in which the notification sound "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong" is being reproduced in a loop, step S112 It is assumed that magnetism is detected by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 in the processing of (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection has a lower priority than the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) in response to magnetism detection by the magnetic sensor 4024. (See FIG. 128), priority is given to the processing of notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetism detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and regarding the processing of notification sound 4 (door open), both sound and lamp lighting are performed. The contents of the output will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, regarding the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during the execution of the notification with the lower priority. Even when a high-priority notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method for preventing the output content of either the sound or the lighting of the lamp from being reflected as the operation of each actuator, at the timing tε2, A process of canceling the set state of the schedule data for sound generation and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the door open detection may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection are generated. are maintained in the set state, and the schedule data for sound generation, the schedule data for screen generation, and the schedule data for luminescence mode generation corresponding to the magnetic detection whose priority is higher than each of these data are set respectively. state. Then, channel X and various lamp operations are allocated based on the schedule data for sound generation and the schedule data for light emission mode generation according to the detection of the door opening, and the schedule data for sound generation and the light mode generation according to the magnetism detection. By switching to the contents based on the schedule data for use, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 can be performed regardless of whether it is sound, display in the liquid crystal, or lamp lighting. The content is reflected as the operation of each actuator.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131(c), at the timing tε2, no operation is performed on the low-priority process (door open process) that is being executed. It is possible to change the notification contents based on the priority between two different processes (door opening process, magnetic abnormality process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(c), at timing tδ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected". When the time (60 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sound "Boo-boo, magnetism has been detected" has been played six times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is the condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

According to such a configuration, as soon as magnetism detection with a high possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is processed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, or lamp lighting. The contents of the output are reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, since the alarm sound such as "boo-boo" is played as the notification sound, the notification belonging to the first notification group is performed, and the fact that the situation has changed to a tense situation is quickly conveyed to the hall side. will be expected.

FIG. 131(d) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ 1 when no notification sound is output, the gate sensor 4003 in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94) right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state If there is, the same processing as the case described with reference to FIG. Therefore, at timing tζ1, a loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound "Please return to left-handed hitting" is started. Then, the loop processing ends at a good timing when the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" has been reproduced twice. In addition, the display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is the condition for canceling the left-handed guidance, expires.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 131(d), 20 seconds have not passed since timing tζ1, and at timing tζ2, the notification sound "Please return to left-handed" is being reproduced in a loop, at step S110 or It is assumed that door opening is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to the door open detection. Therefore (see FIG. 128), priority is given to the processing of notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection, and the output content of the processing of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. to prevent it from being done. In addition, regarding the display in the liquid crystal, since each notification is displayed at a different position within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, priority is given during the execution of the notification with the lower priority. Even when a high-priority notification occurs, the display in the liquid crystal on the low-priority side is maintained.

Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance), as a method to prevent the output content from being reflected as the actuation of the actuator, at timing tζ 2, right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state that had been set up until then A process of canceling the set state of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the set state may be performed.

In this regard, in this embodiment, at the timing tζ 2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state, but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state are also maintained in the set state, and the schedule data for generating sound according to door open detection, which has a higher priority than this, as well as the screen generation schedule data and light emission mode according to door open detection Set the schedule data for generation respectively. Then, the allocation to the channel X is switched from the contents based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state to the contents based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection. In the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open) in response to door open detection, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator in any of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131(d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed for the low-priority processing (left-handed guidance processing) that is being executed. It is possible to change the content of notification based on the priority between two different processes (left-hand guidance process, door opening process).

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131(d), at timing tζ2, a loop process is started to repeatedly execute a notification sound such as "the door is open ping-pong ping-pong", and the notification sound 4 (door open) is played. When the timer (30 seconds) expires, the loop processing is terminated at a good timing when the notification sounds such as "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" have been reproduced three times. In addition, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the detection of door closing, which is the condition for canceling the door opening, is performed.

According to such a configuration, as soon as door open detection with a moderate possibility of fraudulent activity occurs, notification sound 4 (door open) processing is performed by sound, display in the liquid crystal, and lamp lighting. , the contents of the output are reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, the message sound (the door is open) is played first. Notification belonging to the second notification group is performed by the alarm sound of "ping-pong ping-pong", and it is expected that the hall side will be notified as soon as possible that the situation has changed to the possibility of fraud. .

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in a situation where such an abnormality notification sound is being output. is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that some of the plurality of effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a situation arises in which a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to appropriately notify the content of anomalies, game guidance, etc. (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group in which the possibility of fraud is medium, the possibility of fraud may be higher than medium depending on other detection conditions. It is difficult to say that the current state of the game machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority of .

In addition, the notification sound is output not only when an abnormality with a high possibility of fraudulent activity is detected, but also when an abnormality with a low possibility of fraudulent activity is detected. be. In other words, if an abnormality is detected with a high possibility of fraudulent activity, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues. If there is, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained for the convenience of the hall side (response to various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state continues, the output of the notification sound will not necessarily be It is important to be able to execute more flexible notification processing according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1, such as not being required to continue.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. It is intended to realize notification in a manner that allows appropriate expression. The special notification process will be described below for each situation with reference to FIGS. 132 to 137. FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 132, door open detection by the door frame open switch 618 occurs at timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the schedule data for generating sound corresponding to the door open detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the schedule data for screen generation and the schedule data for generating the lighting mode corresponding to the door open detection are also set. set state. At this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is emitted for 30 seconds until the timing tα12 arrives. It will play for seconds.

On the other hand, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the detection of the door opening is maintained until the timing tα16 at which the door frame opening switch 618 stops detecting the opening of the door.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα13 when the reproduction of the notification sound in response to door open detection is completed and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority of the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection by sensor 4024 occurs. Therefore, with respect to lamp emission in response to door open detection started at timing tα11, the schedule data for generating the emission mode is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 arrives, but allocation to various lamp operations is maintained. , at the timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of lamp emission according to the magnetism detection.

That is, at the timing tα13, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetism detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. They are set. At this time, a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is generated for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. will be played throughout.

On the other hand, the display and light emission in the liquid crystal corresponding to the magnetic detection are maintained unless the power is turned off.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening has ended and the detection of the door opening by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor Magnetic detection by 4024 is occurring. In such a situation, after a person with the intention of carrying out some kind of fraudulent operation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, he/she waits until the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the detection of the door opening is finished, and then he/she leaves the door open. It is assumed that there is a possibility that the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 when trying to secretly place a magnet for illegal purposes inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, which is extremely malicious. Therefore, it is feared that merely performing notification sound processing according to magnetic detection is insufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 is already turned off, even if an attempt is made to take some countermeasure, the magnetism detection cannot be used as a trigger.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the timing tα14 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection ends, the door frame opening switch 618 continues to detect the opening of the door, Based on this, the "schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the door open detection" in which the notification sound has already been reproduced for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. special processing to reassign to Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is continued for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. is played.

With such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the end state, is played in a manner that is connected to the "reproduction of notification sound corresponding to magnetic detection", which creates a great sense of incongruity in the hall. It comes to be expected to bring about and attract everyone's attention. In addition, even those who commit fraud are relieved that "when the magnetic notification ends, the playback of the notification sound is all finished, and it is finally possible to make the fact that the fraudulent activity is inconspicuous." By playing a notification sound in response to the door open detection that should have been completed, it becomes an unexpected notification situation, so it is expected that the risk of further fraud is too great become.

As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period when the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and during the period when the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, other channels are used. A process (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) for suppressing the volume of the assigned effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds is performed. The specific value may be zero volume. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound during symbol variation assigned to other channels and the volume of other game sounds are not suppressed.

Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is to be suppressed) refers to whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormal state). state) and whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (reproduction of notification sound) is satisfied. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, in the period of timing tα11 to tα13 and the period of timing tα14 to tα16, based on the fact that the notification process by the first notification group is being performed, the symbol variation Processing to suppress the volume of the effect sound and other game sounds (processing to reduce the volume to a specific value) is performed, and in the period of timing tα13 to tα14, the first notification group and the second notification group Based on the fact that it is during the period during which the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds (the process of lowering the sound volume to a specific value) is performed.

In this embodiment, during the period (timings tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16) in which only the notification processing by the first notification group is performed, both the notification processing by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. The volume of the effect sound during the pattern fluctuation and the volume of the other game sound are reduced to the same value during the period when the symbol is changed, but the notification processing by both the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. During the period, a process of lowering the value to a lower value than during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states just by confirming the effect sound other than the notification, and it is expected that the initial movement on the hall side will be made more rapid.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα16 at which door open detection ends, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during pattern fluctuation and other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which had already ended, is played in a manner that is connected to the "reproduction of notification sound corresponding to magnetic detection", there is a possibility that an extremely malicious act has been carried out. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the detection of the door opening is finished, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol variation and other game sounds may be continued without being suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, as is clear from the processing in response to the door open detection, the display in the liquid crystal corresponding to the door open detection is displayed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is reproduced. The period during which the lighting is performed and the period during which the lamp is illuminated in a manner corresponding to the door open detection have the same start time, but different end times. In this way, the information sound, the display inside the liquid crystal, and the lamp emission are operated so that they have different roles, so that only a single channel (channel X) is used for various information sounds. In spite of this, it is possible to appropriately notify the contents of anomalies, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 133, after the notification sound (timings tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection is completed, at timing tα23, the gate sensor 4003 right-handed detection in a non-time-saving state occurred. Assuming the case. However, in this example, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 132, since the possibility of extremely malicious acts being performed is low, the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time-saving state is terminated At the timing tα24, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection, which has already ended, is not reproduced again. In addition, during the period from timing tα22 to timing tα23, there is no change in the mode of suppressing the sound volume of the effect sound during symbol variation and other game sounds. By the way, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door open detection ends, it is extremely malicious even if frame open detection occurs instead of right hitting detection in a non-time saving state by gate sensor 4003 Since there is a low possibility that such action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which has already ended, will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is finished.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 134, magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα33 after the notification sound (timings tα31 to tα32) corresponding to the detection of door opening has ended, as shown in FIG. Same as example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection ends at timing tα34, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 134, at the timing tα35 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which had already ended, is changed to "reproduction of notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection". There is no such thing as being played in a connected form. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 134, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 132, a person who intends to carry out some kind of fraudulent operation causes the door frame 3 to be opened and puts it in the open state. Waiting for the completion of the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the request, the magnet is momentarily placed within the detection range of the magnetism detection sensor 4024 when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for an illegal purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the water has cooled down. It is assumed that there is a possibility of being in a situation where However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetism detection is not occurring and the non-fraudulent state exists, even in such a non-fraudulent state, the magnetism detection is not performed. It is considered that the notification sound processing has played a sufficient role only by continuously reproducing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to appropriately notify the content of anomalies, game guidance, and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 135, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα43 after the notification sound (timings tα41 to tα42) corresponding to door open detection ends, as shown in FIG. is the same as the example above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at timing tα44, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 135, after waiting for the completion of the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened, the magnet was secretly placed inside the door frame 3 in a state of cooling. Sometimes, the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and in response to this, a notification sound of magnetic abnormality was played. It is assumed that the magnet is about to be put down again, and there is a possibility that a more egregious cheating is taking place. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the magnetism detection is maintained in the set state, while the notification sound 1 A process of resetting a timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic anomaly) is performed.

According to such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection over a longer period of time from the time of the first magnetic detection to the elapse of 60 seconds from the timing tα44 of the second magnetic detection. can be played continuously. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as "Boo-boo magnetism detected" is continuously reproduced without interruption during the period from timing tα43 to timing tα45. And at the end, a notification sound such as "boo boo magnetism detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at an incomplete timing such as "boo boo magnetism detected" Since it will be done, it will be expected that it will create a great sense of incongruity in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

Furthermore, at the timing tα44 after 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetism was detected, the notification sound reproduction has already completed the notification time (30 seconds). A special process of resetting the "schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the detection" and assigning the notification sound to channel X again is performed. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is continued for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. is played.

With such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed is played back in a manner connected with the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection", as well as the intermediate sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected". It will be played in a way that is connected to "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection" whose loop processing ended at an odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the end state, becomes higher, and a notification mode appears as if the notification sound of magnetic detection was stopped halfway and reproduced. It will be expected that it will cause even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 136, magnetic detection by magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα53 after the notification sound (timings tα51 to tα52) corresponding to door open detection is completed, as shown in FIG. is the same as the example above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 136, it is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration at the timing tα54, which is within the period during which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced.

In the example shown in FIG. 136 as well, when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for an illegal purpose inside the door frame 3 after waiting for the completion of the reproduction of the notification sound in response to the detection of the door being opened and after the temperature has cooled down. Although the magnet momentarily entered the detection range of the magnetism detection sensor 4024 and a magnetic anomaly notification sound was played accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 was shaken greatly without flinching from such a situation. It is assumed that there is a possibility that more malicious fraudulent acts are being carried out. Therefore, in this example, at the timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection is reproduced in a manner connected with the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection". At the timing tα56 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening, which has already ended, is reproduced in such a way that it is further connected to the "reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the vibration detection". ing.

Moreover, at the timing tα54 when vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the schedule data for sound generation corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, and a timer (60 second), and at the timing tα55 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection ends, the schedule data for generating the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. .

According to such a configuration, the loop processing will not end at a good timing when the notification sound such as "Boooo vibration detected" is not terminated at a good timing. Since the processing is to be terminated, it is expected that a great sense of incompatibility will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be focused.

Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the vibration ends, the reproduction of the notification sound has already finished for the notification time (30 seconds). Schedule data" is set again, and special processing is performed to reassign the notification sound to channel X. Also at this time, by setting a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open), the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door opening is continued for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. is played.

In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which was already in the end state, is further connected to the "reproduction of notification sound according to vibration detection" connected to the "reproduction of notification sound according to magnetism detection". In addition to being played back, it will be played in a form that is connected to "play notification sound according to vibration detection" whose loop processing is terminated at an incomplete timing such as "booboo vibration detected". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to door open detection, which has already been in the end state, is raised, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound for vibration detection was stopped halfway. It will be expected that it will cause even greater discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, it is assumed that the magnetism detection by the magnetism detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the end of the notification sound (timings tα61 to tα62) corresponding to frame opening detection instead of door opening detection. I assume.

In the example shown in FIG. 137 as well, it can be said that a situation in which magnetic field detection further occurs immediately after frame open detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent act is being carried out. On the other hand, however, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be opened, and even if the body frame 4 is opened, it is unlikely that the magnet will be useful. Therefore, it can be assumed that there is a possibility that the magnetic detection sensor 4024 may have erroneously detected the magnetic sensor 4024 when the hall side used a magnet to eliminate ball clogging in the ball tank or dispensing passage.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 137 as well, at the timing tα64 at which the reproduction of the notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection ends, the notification sound corresponding to frame open detection, which has already ended, is “the notification sound corresponding to magnetism detection. By playing back in a manner connected with "playback" (timings tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great sense of incongruity will be generated in the hall and that everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame open detection ends, not only each notification processing (notification sound, display in the liquid crystal, lamp) according to the frame open detection, but also the magnetic detection Special processing for terminating each notification process (notification sound, display in liquid crystal, lamp) is also performed.

According to such a configuration, while the function against fraudulent activity is preferably exhibited, when an erroneous detection is made on the hall side, only by closing the body frame 4, notification processing ( It is expected that the hall will be able to quickly respond to false detections and maintain a favorable atmosphere in the hall. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 137, even if the body frame 4 is closed during the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetism detection is being reproduced and the frame open detection ends, the frame open detection will not be performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to frame open detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to magnetic detection A special process for terminating the may be performed.

By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with the player side volume control function.

For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated in the processing of step S1108, and if it is determined that the effect selection left button 331 has been operated When it is determined that the effect selection right button 332 has been operated, the set value (player set value) of the speaker volume is set by the player (player set value). ) is raised. In addition, when the player setting value is lowered and the actually lowered volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Beep!") is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player setting value is raised and the actually raised volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is output at the raised volume value. , it is possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when the volume value is increased. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound is referred to when there are no more empty channels, and has a relatively high priority (for example, "20", which is the same as the button press sound), and the output volume of the effect sound ( A change in the volume of audible sound) can be more reliably transmitted.

Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, such sound volume adjustment processing is performed during a period (demonstration display, etc.) before the start of the game because the symbol variation corresponding to the judgment of the big hit has not yet been performed. Not only during the period during which the game can be performed, but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the judgment of the big hit is executed, the reception by the player is permitted, and a more important effect has appeared. By making it possible to change the setting of the volume value flexibly, the interest in the game can be maintained.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as also described above, in a situation where various effect sound channels are assigned according to the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic anomaly or door opening, processing is performed to allocate a specific notification sound among a plurality of types of notification sounds according to the detected content to a channel and output it. Also, at this time, it is possible to carry out an effect progress notification process that reduces the output sound volume to a specific value without canceling the channel allocation itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound out of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and output, the channel assignment itself of various effects sounds according to the progress of the display effect will not be canceled. Therefore, once the channel allocation of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state is terminated, the performance can be enjoyed again by appropriately restoring the output sound volume of the performance sound according to the progress of the performance display.

However, in the above effect progress notification process, since the channel assignment itself of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not canceled, the normal time ( As a result, more channels are used than in the non-notification state), and there are no empty channels to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation for a specific notification sound (notification state). tend to be more risky. If there is no empty channel to which no sound data is assigned before the channel allocation (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, any of the sound data To play back the discarded sound data that cannot be assigned to a channel even if the channel assignment (notification state) of a specific notification sound is completed, since one channel assignment must be discarded. As a result, there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Concerns about vacant channels related to such effect sound do not cause direct harm if the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the informational sound, but the fixed channel method is adopted for the channel allocation of the informational sound. or whether to adopt the automatic channel system should be determined from the viewpoint of the design of the game and production, so even if either channel system is adopted, the above production progress notification process It is important to prepare a processing structure that can adopt a common processing program in order to reduce the development cost of the pachinko machine 1 and to improve reliability. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel system or the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while the effect progress notification process is being executed, the effect is reduced to a specific value. The output volume of the production sound is not variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, even if there is an operation by the player, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound ("beep!" , it is expected that the risk of running out of vacant channels will be reduced by providing channels with margins corresponding to that amount.

However, in spite of the fact that the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when a more important performance appears, the output volume is set while the processing for notifying the progress of the performance is being executed. If it is not possible to change it, when the production progress notification process is executed due to an erroneous detection or a notification due to the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.), the appropriate volume value according to the content of the production progress It is inevitable that the interest in the game will decrease due to the fact that the setting cannot be changed immediately. In addition, as a result of the progress of the production during the period when the production progress notification process is being performed, if a large discrepancy occurs between the appropriate volume value according to the production content and the actual setting value, the output volume (possible Since changing the setting of the listening sound volume) has been permitted, it is necessary to accept the operation multiple times in order to change the volume to an appropriate value. As a result, even though the production progress notification process has finally ended, there is a concern that the production sound will not be output properly due to the lack of empty channels, which will reduce the interest in the game.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, while the production progress notification process is being executed, if the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the value will decrease to a specific value. While the output volume of the effect sound (volume of audible sound) is not variable and is maintained, the value set by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed. When the presentation progress notification process (the process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value) is completed, the output sound volume (the volume of the audible sound) reflecting all the operations up to that point is collectively changed.

According to such a configuration, if a change in the setting value (player setting value) by the player is accepted in accordance with the progress of the production while the production progress notification process is being executed, a new operation can be performed. , the output sound volume (the sound volume of the audible sound) reflecting all the operations up to that point can be collectively changed when the performance progress notification processing is terminated. In this way, even during the period in which the production progress notification process is being executed, the change reception of the setting value (player setting value) by the player is allowed, thereby ending the production progress notification process. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in a plurality of stages immediately after the processing for notifying the progress of the production is completed, and the volume adjustment completion sound of each time causes a shortage of empty channels. is also preferably avoided.

Note that, according to the above configuration, when the batch change of the output sound volume to the player setting value is executed when the production progress notification process is terminated, the game Regardless of the number of times the player setting value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound is reproduced only once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output by the sound (for example, "beep!") of the special mode different from that.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably solve the shortage of empty channels when the lower production progress notification process is completed, the number of times the player setting value is changed during the period when the lower production progress notification process is being executed, Regardless of the number of operations, it is desirable not to reproduce the volume adjustment completion sound itself when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is to be changed collectively upon completion of the production progress notification process. . According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress notification process caused by the notification due to erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate production is not performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it impossible to enjoy.

In the above explanation example, when the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection ends while the door is kept open, when the magnetic abnormality occurs after that and the notification sound corresponding to this ends, the door open detection is terminated. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs while the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is being output and the corresponding notification sound ends, the door open detection will not be possible even if the door remains open. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted "notification sound corresponding to door open detection").

When the door is in the open state, the lamp is emitted in response to the detection of the door being opened. This lamp emission is to be continued when the door is in the open state even after the notification sound corresponding to the detection of the door being opened ends. It is desirable to Furthermore, it is desirable to continue for a predetermined period of time after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state ends.

If there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound even if an abnormality is detected, and the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door remains open, the specific error It is desirable that the notification sound corresponding to the detection of door opening is output again based on the occurrence of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some kind of abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound in response to the detection of door opening.

Alternatively, even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output the notification sound, and if the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is terminated while the door remains open, A state in which re-notification is possible may be maintained without outputting the notification sound corresponding to door open detection again based on the occurrence of the specific error.

It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in a situation where such an abnormality notification sound is being output. is not reflected as volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that some of the plurality of effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

An example of the process from execution of such processing for notifying progress of production to collective change of the output volume (volume of audible sound) will be described below.

FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the content of the notification processing under production progress, separately for the notification state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

First, prior to explaining the processing from execution of the production progress notification processing to collective change of the output sound volume (the volume of the audible sound), the details of the production progress notification processing will be described with reference to FIG. I will briefly explain about. Here, for convenience of explanation, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 128 are shown, and descriptions of the other notification sounds are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 138, in this illustrative example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression mode of the effect sound, For example, in the first sound volume suppression mode, when changing the setting value (player setting value) regarding the sound volume, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be changed within the range of "20" to "50". Among the possibilities, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the dramatic sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to "0". Therefore, in the second volume suppression mode, the degree of suppression is greater than in the first volume suppression mode. It is exemplified as one that makes

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group with a high possibility of fraud When any of the notification processes is executed, the process of suppressing the output volume of the dramatic sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed in the second volume suppression mode, which is on the higher suppression level side. Moreover, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group (magnetism abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) is executed, even if the abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume ) is not terminated and is continued.

Note that in this explanation example, when the notification process for any one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound The period during which the process of suppressing the sound volume) is continued is the same as the period from the time the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) corresponding to the abnormality detection is played to the end of this. is set to

On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification processing for any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with a medium fraud possibility is executed, the degree of suppression The output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is suppressed in the first volume suppression mode, which is on the lower side of . However, in the case where notification processing relating to one of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, Then, the process of suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) in the first volume suppression mode, which is on the side of the lower degree of suppression, is terminated.

On the other hand, when the notification process for any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 belonging to the third notification group related to the game guidance among the notification sounds 1 to 7 (left-handed guidance, ball withdrawal guidance) is executed, performance is emphasized, and no processing for suppressing the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is executed.

In this explanation example, the suppression mode is different between the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. does not necessarily have to be different, and the output volume of the effect sound is set in one suppression mode when the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed and when the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. (Volume of audible sound) may be suppressed. However, the conditions for ending the process to be suppressed must be stricter when the notification sounds belonging to the first notification group are performed than when the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are performed. It is important to be able to

FIG. 139 shows the details of the volume adjustment process associated with the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process related to the notification sound has not been executed. It is a figure explaining.

In this example of explanation, the player's set value is variable by "1" within the range of "1" to "5" by operating the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332. It is set such that the smaller the value, the smaller the volume of the effect sound. In addition, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set by the player when the above-described suppression modes (the first volume suppression mode and the second volume suppression mode) are not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this illustrative example, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is variable within the range of "20" to "100" by the player's operation.

Now, as shown in FIG. 139(A), the player setting value for the sound volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. , the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to “60” which is 20 times that. In addition, if the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, and the jackpot determination is not performed and it is in a state of waiting for start winning, the left effect selection button 331 is simulated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. A display image 331a and a display image 332a modeled after the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and a volume adjustment guidance display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. At this time, in the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, a first sound volume value display OH1 is also executed, which makes it possible to recognize which of the player's current set values is "1" to "5". be. The volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be displayed all the time, or may be displayed during a specific period such as a super reach performance, which is a reach performance performed with the background image changed. It may be so arranged that at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2, which will be described later, appears when there is an operation by the player. Further, both the volume adjustment guidance display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may not necessarily be displayed, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

In the situation shown in FIG. 139(A), when the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated, the player set value is set to "1" each time the operation is performed. As a result, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20". Also, every time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "Beep!") is reproduced at the changed volume.

Also, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a second gauge indicating which of the player's set value range "1" to "5" is the current set value is displayed. volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 139(C)) is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, which will be described later.

If the left effect selection button 331 is operated when the player set value is "1", neither the player set value nor the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is lowered, and the game is played. The user setting value remains "1" (the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the left effect selection button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound should not be assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, its volume should be set to "1". 0" to prevent audible output. This is also the case when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player set value is "5".

On the other hand, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit is judged, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

In this respect, in the volume adjustment process according to this embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. It is designed to allow the reception by the player even during the execution period, and for example, when a more important effect such as the ready-to-win effect shown in FIG. As described above, the configuration is such that the setting can be changed.

That is, FIG. 139(C) shows the state after the player has operated the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the ready-to-win effect in the state shown in FIG. 139(B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed from "60" to 20 times that value. With the setting changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume of "80", and in the second operation, the player setting The value has been changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) has been changed from "80" to "100", which is 20 times the value, At the changed volume of "100", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and played back.

In addition, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to this embodiment, when the player setting value is changed by such an operation, , the second volume value display OH2, which indicates the current set value by means of a gauge display, is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This makes it clear which of the player's set values is in the range of "1" to "5" and which one is the current set value. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even though the player set value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, a numerical range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed in blocks, and the number of filled blocks out of these blocks increases/decreases according to changes in the player's set value. The current player setting value is indicated by displaying the current value.

139(D), the second volume value display OH2 starts when the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 139(C). After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the display is hidden, and thereafter the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is performed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in a manner in which the player set value is not changed (the operation of the right effect selection button 332 when the player set value is the maximum value "5"), the left effect selection button 331 Alternatively, as long as the right effect selection button 332 is operated repeatedly, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a manner in which the player's set value is not changed (an operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player's set value is the maximum value "5") is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, even though the player's setting value is the maximum value of "5", it is more preferable to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 from occurring. become.

On the other hand, in FIG. 140, the left effect selection button 331 or the right effect selection button 332 is operated while door opening detection occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation and the processing related to the notification sound corresponding to this is being executed. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the contents of processing related to sound volume adjustment associated with the event;

The situation shown in FIG. 140(A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139(A). In such a situation, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit is determined, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined production pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140(B), the detection of door opening belonging to the second notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the corresponding notification sound 4 (door open) processing is executed. More specifically, loop processing (30 seconds) for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "the door is open, ping-pong ping-pong" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, " door is open"), and various lamps (light-emitting devices) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are turned on.

Further, as described above, during the pattern fluctuation period, when door open detection belonging to the second notification group occurs and the corresponding notification sound 4 (door open) is executed, the first sound volume suppression mode is performed. A production progress notification process for suppressing the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140(B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 140(A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the original value (20 times the value set by the player). The contents of the performance will progress under the volume value.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated while such effect progress notification processing is being executed, the first specific While the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound), which has been lowered to a value ("10" in this case), is maintained without being variable, the value set by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) is changed. Acceptance of change of itself is allowed, and when the above production progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point. and are changed collectively as described above.

That is, FIG. 140(C) shows the state after the player has operated the effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the ready-to-win effect in the state shown in FIG. 140(B). Although the player's setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the right effect selection button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the user-set value (20 times the value set by the user) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound remains unchanged until the effect progress notification process (the process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value) ends. is not changed, and the contents of the presentation progress with the sound volume of the first specific value.

Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, although the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to the first specified value. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, "10"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player's set value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 that indicates by a gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", It is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value of the first volume value display OH1 is also changed from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and since the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", and the first sound volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Then, after that, the door frame 3 is closed under the condition that the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is executed again, and the processing related to the notification sound 4 (door open) and the notification processing under production progress (output volume up to a specific value). 140(D), the output volume (the volume of audible sound) reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the processing, as shown in FIG. 140(D). batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is stepped from "3" to "4" corresponding to the first operation and to "5" corresponding to the second operation during the execution period of the performance progress notification process. Therefore, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be changed from the first specific value (here, "10") to "80" corresponding to the first operation, and to "80" corresponding to the second operation. Instead of changing step by step to "100" according to , the first specific value (here, "10") is collectively changed to "100" reflecting all the operations up to that point.

In this way, even during the period in which the production progress notification process is being executed, the change reception of the setting value (player setting value) by the player is allowed, thereby ending the production progress notification process. It is expected that the decline in interest in games will be suppressed until the game is played. In addition, immediately after the production progress notification process is completed, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages, and each time the volume adjustment completion sound causes a shortage of empty channels or a lack of room. Occurrence of such a situation can be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this illustrative example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed (from "10" to "100") in accordance with the end of the effect progress notification process, the output volume does not change. Despite this, the channel allocation itself for the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress notification process caused by the notification due to erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall (door opening, etc.) has finally ended, the appropriate production is not performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation that makes it impossible to enjoy.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening have been exemplified as the specific states. The conditions for ending the progress progress notification process may be different from those of the process for notifying the player of progress of the effect in the state in which the game has been performed.

For example, first, regarding the production progress notification processing in the state where the door has been opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has passed since the door was opened (the door was kept open) ) will be terminated. However, in any case, when the output volume (volume of audible sound) is collectively changed (for example, from "10" to "100"), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound is changed even though the output volume changes. It is desirable to avoid doing the allocation itself.

On the other hand, the effect progress notification processing in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs is not terminated only when the state of the magnetic abnormality ends, but is continuously executed until the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. is desirable. In this case, the output volume (volume of audible sound) is collectively changed (for example, from "10" to "100") when the RAM is cleared or the power is restored from a power shutdown. Even if there is, it is desirable not to perform the channel allocation itself for the volume adjustment completion sound even though the output volume changes.

In addition, in the production progress notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the player setting value is changed, a display to that effect is performed, whereas in the production progress notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred Alternatively, when the player setting value is changed, the display to that effect may not be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions of the lower production progress notification processing in the state where the door is opened and the lower production progress notification processing in the state where the magnetic abnormality has occurred are different. become.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted by turning the knob of the volume control volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob is mainly performed by the hall side, it is not possible to output the volume adjustment completion sound (channel assignment) triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob. is more desirable in order to allow vacant channels to have a margin.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, various effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 are provided separately from the buttons for volume adjustment (the left effect selection button 331 and the right effect selection button 332). game lamps (lamps that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and are used for effects, etc., and game lamps such as special LEDs that are controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from brightness setting targets) ) are equipped with brightness adjustment buttons (brightness increase button, brightness decrease button, etc.), and when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated, the brightness of various production lamps It is possible to execute a process of changing the setting value (player setting value). In addition, when the player's set value related to brightness is decreased or increased, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at a volume value corresponding to the setting value for the volume at that time. I have to. In addition, the brightness of the effect lamp can be set and changed by the player's operation in both the state in which the symbols are not changed and the state in which the symbols are changed.

In addition, for the brightness adjustment completion sound, it is desirable to assign channels under the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. This results in a situation in which sound channel assignment itself is not performed, a situation in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output, and the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (such as whether or not the above-mentioned production progress notification process is being executed) when the setting value related to the brightness is changed instead of the volume. becomes possible. Note that the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a different sound from the volume adjustment completion sound.

Regarding the player's setting value related to the volume, if a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has passed since the demo screen was controlled), it is set to a specific value (for example, "3") without the player's operation. It may be changed. However, if the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player, a display indicating the current setting value (first volume value display OH1, second volume value display OH1, second volume value If neither the value display OH2) nor the output (channel assignment) related to the volume adjustment completion sound is performed, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 is declining. It is more desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

Also, if a new volume adjustment is made while the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment has been performed is being output, the volume adjustment sound that is being output will be output even if there is an empty channel. It is better to allocate a new volume adjustment completion sound to the same channel and output it (overwrite and output) in the form of ending halfway so that there is a margin in the number of empty channels. desirable.

In addition, when the player's set value is at the maximum value but the volume is further increased, or when the player's set value is at the minimum value, the volume is decreased. When the operation is further performed, even if there is an empty channel, the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel and is not output, so that the number of empty channels has a margin. more desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating the current set value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) is displayed. good too.

Volume adjustment by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is permitted, but a period during which the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation is not permitted may be generated.

On the other hand, in FIG. 141, when the state detection that occurred in FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the details of processing related to volume adjustment when a right button 332 is operated; FIG.

The situation shown in FIG. 141(A) is the situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140(A). In such a situation, when a start winning prize is generated and a big hit is determined, as shown in FIG. A decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined production pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound is output in accordance with the progress of the predetermined effect.

In the situation shown in FIG. 141(B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) corresponding to this occurs, and more Specifically, a loop process (for 60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "boo-boo magnetism detected" and display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetism detection") and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

Also, as described above, during the pattern fluctuation period, when the detection of magnetism belonging to the first notification group occurs and the corresponding notification sound 1 (magnetic anomaly) processing is executed, the second sound volume suppression mode is performed. Effect progress notification processing for suppressing the output volume of sound (volume of audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141(B), the player setting value is maintained at "3", which is the same as in the situation shown in FIG. 141(A). The sound output volume (audible sound volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value ("0" in this case) lower than the original value (20 times the value set by the player). The contents of the presentation are developed under the volume value (here, mute).

In this regard, even when the effect progress notification process corresponding to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, if the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated, the second specific value (here, "0 ”), while the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound (here, mute)) is not variable and is maintained, the value set by the player regarding the volume (the value set by the player) itself Acceptance of change is allowed, and when the above production progress notification processing (processing to lower the output volume to a specific value) ends, the output volume (audible sound volume) that reflects all the operations up to that point As described above, the change is made all at once.

That is, FIG. 141(C) shows the state after the player has operated the right effect selection right button 332 twice in accordance with the execution of the ready-to-win effect in the state shown in FIG. 141(B). Although the player's setting value has been changed from "3" to "5" by operating the right effect selection button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is the original value (game It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, "0 (mute)") lower than the user-set value (20 times the value set by the user) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the effect selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the effect sound remains unchanged until the effect progress notification process (the process of lowering the output sound volume to a specific value) ends. is not changed, and the contents of the presentation progress with the sound volume of the second specific value.

Also, at this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player setting value is changed from "3" to "4", but the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is set to the second specified value. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, "0"), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

However, in the first operation, the player's set value itself has changed from "3" to "4", and the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted. In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 that indicates by a gauge display that the current set value is "4" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", It is executed in place of the volume adjustment guidance display OAH, and the numerical value of the first volume value display OH1 is also changed from "3" to "4".

Also, in the second operation, the player setting value itself has changed from "4" to "5", and the player's operation for volume adjustment has been accepted, so the second volume value In the display OH2, a gauge display indicates that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the player set value range of "1" to "5", and the first sound volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed from "4" to "5" and displayed.

Incidentally, in this illustrative example, the magnetic detection itself is already in a non-detection state in the situation shown in FIG. 141(C). However, unlike the case of door detection, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is kept in the second volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic field is detected. is continuously executed.

Then, after a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has passed since the magnetism was detected while the volume adjustment guidance display OAH is being executed again, the effect progress notification process (the output volume is specified) 141(D), the output volume (volume of audible sound) reflects all the operations up to that point in response to the completion of the processing, as shown in FIG. 141(D). batch change. That is, in this case, the player setting value is stepped from "3" to "4" according to the first operation and to "5" according to the second operation during the execution period of the effect progress notification process. Therefore, the output volume (volume of audible sound) should be changed from the second specific value ("0" in this case) to "80" corresponding to the first operation and "80" corresponding to the second operation. Instead of stepwise change to "100" according to the second specific value (here, "0"), the second specific value (here, "0") is collectively changed to "100" reflecting all the operations up to that point.

It should be noted that when the notification process corresponding to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process corresponding to the opening of the door is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. Display in the display area of 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") and lighting by various lamps (light-emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 remain executed. there is That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality, when the notification sound is terminated, the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, and the effect sound is removed from the object to be suppressed and according to the player setting value. On the other hand, in the notification processing in response to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the effect sound remains to be suppressed while the notification by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp continue. It is supposed to be

In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, the player is allowed to change the set value (player set value) even during the period when the effect progress notification process is being executed. , it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed until the production progress notification process ends. In addition, immediately after the production progress notification process is completed, the volume value (the volume of the audible sound) is changed in multiple stages, and each time the volume adjustment completion sound causes a shortage of empty channels or a lack of room. Occurrence of such a situation can be suitably avoided.

Moreover, in this illustrative example, when the output volume (the volume of the audible sound) is collectively changed (from "0" to "100") in accordance with the end of the production progress notification process associated with the magnetic abnormality, the output Even though the volume changes, the channel allocation itself for the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress notification process caused by the notification due to the erroneous detection has finally ended, the lack of vacant channels makes it impossible to enjoy the proper production. can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Fig. 128, the notification sound corresponding to the opening of the door, such as "The door is open, ping-pong, ping-pong," and the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic anomaly, such as "Boo-boo, magnetism detected." Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the 3rd byte of the value, it is always played back with the volume set as the initial value regardless of the player's set value.

In addition, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball withdrawal guidance) is executed, the production progress notification processing is not executed. Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) can be varied as appropriate. However, as shown in FIG. 128, these notification sounds 6 and 7 are also set to "1" (0x1FF) in the third byte of the volume initial value. It will always be played back with the volume set as the initial value.

Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) and notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) belonging to the third notification group, "1" is not set to the 3rd byte of the volume initial value, You may make it include in the object of sound volume adjustment by a player.

140 and 141, not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also the state before the symbol variation is started, and the state detection in the form spanning the timing of the start and end of the symbol variation. Also when the notification process corresponding to is executed, it may be executed in the same manner.

140 and 141, after the production progress notification process is completed, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button is pressed in the same manner as before the production progress notification process is started. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) is changed accordingly. Then, every time the output volume of the effect sound (the volume of the audible sound) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "beep!") is reproduced at the changed volume.

140 and 141, the effect sound suppression mode during the period in which the effect progress notification process is being performed is different. It does not have to be different, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound as described above.

In addition, in the production progress notification process, the output volume of various game sounds (volume of audible sound) is suppressed. Some game sounds, such as sounds that are reproduced in response to winning (winning sounds), may be reproduced at the initial volume settings without being affected by volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily grasp whether or not the game is being continued despite the occurrence of an abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加In this sense, some of the sound (winning sound) played in response to the game ball winning the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 when the production progress notification process is executed As for the game sound, it is desirable to reproduce it as a special sound that cannot be output when the performance progress notification process is not being executed.

As described above, in FIGS. 128 to 141, by adopting a channel-saving control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents, etc., with only a single channel for various notification sounds, situations in which there is no available channel (Situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) I proposed that technical measures should be taken to make this situation difficult to appear. However, even if such a control structure is adopted, there may be a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound effect (effect sound) is to be allocated (the number of vacant channels is 0). Concern over the emergence of the above unintended sound output aspects still remains.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, various technical measures are taken before the situation where there is no vacancy in the channel (situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs regarding the channel assignment of the effect sound. I'm trying to work it out. Various technical ideas applied to the output of dramatic sounds will be sequentially described below. In adopting these technical devices for the pachinko machine 1, the above-described channel-saving control structure, which enables appropriate notification of abnormal contents, etc., with only a single channel for various notification sounds, is not necessarily adopted. You don't have to. In each example described below, either the fixed channel method or the automatic channel method may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Also, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-described priority may not necessarily be adopted, and when all the channels are in use, a process of discarding new sounds may be performed. good. In addition, each example described below can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine with a finite number of channels, even if a special result is obtained in the judgment by the judging means according to the winning, there is no vacancy in the channel to which the sound data is allocated. In (situation where the number of empty channels is 0), it is not possible to allocate a special sound to a channel corresponding to the fact that a special result has been obtained, and there is concern that this inability to output may reduce the enjoyment of the game.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the pattern variation is started and ended. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 carries out processing to progress the display effect according to the specific effect pattern, and assigns and reproduces the sound of "BGM playback" according to the specific effect pattern to the predetermined channel. process to cause Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM playback" remains assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed mode or silently ( The volume of "BGM playback" is lowered to a specific value and output), and when an operation on a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) is detected in this state, the big hit pattern (the A special effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that a special display mode in the effect pattern will appear is output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special effect may be 100%.

That is, in this case, when the special effect sound is output in response to the detection of the operation, although the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, it is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. As a result, it is possible to provide an atmosphere in which the usage of the channel seems to have plenty of room. Therefore, to provide a player with an operation opportunity to output a special effect sound while removing the anxiety that ``the channel may be full and the special effect sound may not be output''. can be performed, thereby suppressing the decline in game interest.

By the way, when a sound corresponding to a specific production pattern (“BGM playback” sound) is left assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed mode or silently, in general, the sound assigned to the channel It is assumed that a process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of "BGM playback") (a process of lowering the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such volume suppression processing is performed prior to providing the player with an opportunity to operate (generates the effective period of reception of the effect), a sound corresponding to a specific effect pattern (" It is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to operate (generate an effective period for acceptance of the effect) after the sound of BGM playback) is output in a suppressed mode or silently.

However, as is well known, when an operation opportunity is given to a player, an effective period for reception of effects is generated for a predetermined period of time, and operations (reception of effects) are performed at any timing within this effective period is indeterminate (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, when an operation (acceptance of effect) is performed within the valid period, even if it is possible to terminate the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value using this as a trigger, the volume is returned in this way. It is impossible to store in advance the sound of "BGM reproduction" so that the reproduction of the sound corresponding to this is started at an indeterminate timing.

In addition to performing processing to restore the volume when there is an operation by the player, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction dedicated to reproduction of special effect sound". It is also conceivable to carry out processing for reproduction. However, the sound of "BGM playback" is reproduced in accordance with the contents of various effects until the end of a specific effect pattern and the timing of pattern stop. At which timing the operation (acceptance of effect) is performed is uncertain (depending on the player), and if the operation (acceptance of effect) is used as a trigger to newly reproduce the sound of "BGM playback". , there is a concern that a so-called sound lag occurs between the timing of various effects and pattern stoppages after that, and the interest in the game decreases.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data ( For example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, sound data during the second half of the super reach effect, etc.) Perform processing for sequentially assigning to channels. Of the plurality of sound data stored as the "BGM reproduction" sound corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, the specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When it is assigned to a predetermined channel according to the chronological order, it is assigned to the predetermined channel and playback is started from the timing before the occurrence of the effective period of reception of the effect within the specific effect pattern, and the effective period ends. For a long period of time until the timing after this, the allocation state to the predetermined channel is maintained and reproduced.

In this regard, when the specific sound data (single sound material) is viewed in time series, some sections (special periods) have a suppression mode or a silent sound output process compared to other sections. is set in advance, and when the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in the time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a part of the section (special period), the effective period of acceptance of the performance occurs in a chronological relationship. In addition to this, even if the operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the reception of the effect that occurs within the special period (partial section), from the special period (partial section) to the special period A special effect sound corresponding to the reception of the effect is played over the period (other segment) after the end of the (partial segment) and the two segments in the specific sound data, and the sound of "BGM playback" A channel different from the assigned predetermined channel is used for reproduction in a non-suppressed manner.

According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data during normal fluctuation, sound data during the first half of the super reach effect, super sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) are sequentially assigned to predetermined channels in chronological order as specified by the schedule data for each sound generation corresponding to these, without adjusting the volume from the initial value. In both cases, it becomes possible to create a "suppressed mode or a state of silent output (special period)". In addition, when the player's operation is received in the "suppressed mode or silent output state (special period)" created in this way, the special mode is performed in a non-suppressed mode by a process with high immediacy triggered by this. While the effect sound is to be started to be played, the sound of "BGM playback" that is being played on a predetermined channel is output in a "suppressed mode or silent state (special period)" regardless of the reception of the effect. ” is maintained for a predetermined period of time. After that, a part of the specific sound data (single sound material) (suppressed mode or silent sound output) ends in a way that the special effect sound is played back. Since the data contents of other sections (unsuppressed sound output) are reproduced, it is possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM playback" to the unsuppressed mode. It is possible to provide a production sound without a sense of incongruity. That is, in this case, when an operation by a player is received in a state where the sound of "playback BGM" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the special effect sound is not suppressed by highly immediacy processing triggered by this. Although the reproduction is started at , it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of sound lag between the timing of various performances and pattern stop after that.

FIG. 142 is a time chart showing an example of channel allocation when such suppressed operation sound output processing is performed. A specific example of executing such a suppressed operation sound output process will be described below with reference to FIG. 142 .

As shown in FIG. 142(a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, at timing ts11, it is specified that the effect progresses on the game board side effect display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to the production pattern of 1 is assigned to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and is already being reproduced (in this case, stereo reproduction). This "BGM playback" sound is, for example, one sound data (one It may be reproduced based on the schedule data for sound generation as a sound material), or the entire period of pattern fluctuation is divided into a plurality of periods, and different sound data prepared for each period are used. may be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the . In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of "BGM reproduction" over the entire period in the figure including timing ts11 (a part of the pattern variation period) are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a playback state.

In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 142(a) and 142(b), one sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") allocated to channels 02 and 03 and in a state of reproduction is a special At timing ts12, which is before timing ts13 in which an operation valid period (valid period for reception of a performance) occurs, in which an operation opportunity is given as a trigger for generating a performance sound, a silent data content is set. It is designed to be in a playback state in some sections. As a result, even if the volume of the "BGM reproduction" sound is not adjusted from the initial value, it can be output silently while being assigned to the predetermined channel.

According to such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM playback" is in a playback state within a part of the section set as silent data content, and it seems that there is a margin in the channel usage status. While the atmosphere is being provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation valid period (effective period for reception of performance) during which an operation opportunity is given to the player. As a result, the player is provided with an operation opportunity to output the special performance sound while eliminating the anxiety that ``the channel may be full and the special performance sound may not be output''. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

Moreover, the operation valid period according to this example of explanation is the timing ts16 at which the partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" ends even if there is no operation by the player. At timing ts15, which is before the arrival of , the period is terminated so that the operation by the player is no longer accepted. Therefore, even if the player's operation is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the playback state is set within the partial interval set as the silent data content of the "BGM playback" sound. A special performance sound corresponding to an operation by a player can be generated in the presence of an atmosphere in which the cage channel seems to be used with plenty of room. Note that the operation effective period ends when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, and also when the player's operation is received as an effect. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, a special effect sound may be generated in the same manner as when the operation is performed by the player at that timing.

In this example of explanation, it is assumed that the operation by the player is accepted as an effect at timing ts14, and based on the acceptance of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM playback" is assigned. , 03, which are different from channels 08 and 03, are assigned special effect sounds and reproduced.

In this regard, in this illustrative example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the valid operation period (time from timing ts13 to timing ts15) is defined as "SY", and the valid operation period ends at this maximum time. to the end of the partial section in which silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM playback" (the time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is "BF", then within the operation valid period Even if the player's operation is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is assigned to channels 08 and 09 for a certain period of time "SY+α(>BF)" and reproduced.

According to such a configuration, even if the player's operation is accepted at any timing within the operation effective period, the timing ts16 always arrives when the special effect sound is being reproduced. It is possible to output the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a non-suppressed manner by blending it with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, although the time from the start of the reproduction of the special effect sound until the sound of "BGM reproduction" comes to be output in the unsuppressed mode is variable according to the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , the output period of the special effect sound is a buffer period for returning the sound of "BGM playback" in an unsuppressed mode (the sound of "BGM playback" is returned in an unsuppressed mode by being mixed with the special effect sound). By functioning as a period during which it is difficult to notice the fact that the game is played by the player, when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not restored in a non-suppressed mode, and the discomfort caused by returning after a predetermined time is eliminated. It becomes possible to make it difficult to remember.

After the "BGM playback" sound is thus restored as the data content (unsuppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM playback, the "BGM playback" sound is played back in the non-suppressed mode when the timing ts17 arrives. Playback of the special effect sound is ended while in the state.

In the above explanation example, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are determined by the player's operation, as shown in FIG. 142(b). Depending on the timing to be accepted, it will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted line arrow. , the normal section in which the data content (unsuppressed mode) of the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is started.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, it is possible to further remember the sense of incongruity caused by restoring the sound of 'BGM playback' after a predetermined period of time without restoring the sound of 'BGM playback' in the unsuppressed mode when the player's operation is accepted. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound higher than the initial value of the BGM reproduction in the normal section. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secretly shift the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section while attention is focused on the special effect sound with a large initial volume value.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when the operation by the player is received, the special effect sound is generated based on the reception of the effect. A special effect sound may be generated based on the acceptance of the effect only when the conditions are satisfied. Even if a specific effect condition is not satisfied, an operation effective period is generated at timing ts14, and when an effect is accepted by the player within the operation effective period, the effect is accepted. A predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced based on the fact. Then, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, while a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is being reproduced, the BGM reproduction sound is secretly changed to the reproduction state in the normal section. 142. It is desirable that the transition to .times..times..times..times.

However, instead of this, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced, the reproduction time is made shorter than when the special effect sound is played, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is reproduced. The sound of the BGM playback may be returned to the playback state in the normal section after the playback of the BGM playback is completed. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM playback sound returns to the playback state in the normal section is set to the playback of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). is set to arrive after the According to such a configuration, a silent period (depending on the operation timing) can be obtained from the end of the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) until the sound of the BGM reproduction returns to the reproduction state in the normal section. variable length) can be generated as a buffer period. In addition, if a resurrection performance with a high expectation level (which may be 100%) can occur during this silent period, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

Alternatively, when a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is to be reproduced, the pattern variation is stopped in a failing manner without returning the sound of the BGM reproduction to the reproduction state in the normal section. good too. In this case, at the timing ts12, the allocation of sounds for BGM reproduction to channels 02 and 03 may be ended, and these channels may be made empty.

Further, when a special effect sound is generated, a movable effect of moving a predetermined movable body based on the reception of the effect is also performed to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of the BGM reproduction. This is desirable in order to secretly shift the reproduced sound to the reproduction state in the normal section.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound of "playback BGM" is silently output in some sections, but the present invention is not limited to this. Anything that is output by Here, the suppressed mode can be exemplified by a mode in which the sound volume is relatively lowered, or a mode in which the vibration frequency of the cone of the speaker per unit time is reduced.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, by setting a time-series period in which the sound data itself of "BGM playback" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed or silenced, "BGM playback" can be performed. It is possible to create a state (special period) in which the sound is output in a suppressed mode or in silence only by reproducing the sound without adjusting the volume of the sound. However, it is not necessary to set the suppression mode or the time-series period of silence in the sound data of "BGM playback" assigned to a predetermined channel. Volume adjustment may be performed to lower the volume to a specific value (which may be mute). That is, in this case, even if the player's operation is accepted as an effect at timing ts14, the process of increasing the volume of the sound of "BGM playback" from a specific value (the process of returning the volume to the initial value) is performed with the acceptance of the effect as a trigger. avoid Then, when a specific effect condition is satisfied, when a predetermined timing ts16 arrives, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from a specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced. Processing (returning to the initial volume value) is performed. On the other hand, if the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM playback" is specified among the predetermined effect sounds (failure effect sound, etc.) being played, as in the other example described above. A process of increasing the volume from the value (a process of returning the volume to the initial value) may be performed. (processing to return to the initial volume value) may be performed, or the pattern variation may be terminated without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) from a specific value. good.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the restriction processing is performed to make it difficult to assign new sounds to empty channels over at least a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 to timing ts16. It is desirable to In addition, such restriction processing may be, for example, a block winning sound, a pending winning sound, a general electric effect sound, an adjustment sound, etc., and has nothing to do with the result of whether or not a big winning pattern appears due to the pattern variation being executed. It is desirable to set a specific game sound as a restricted target, and not to reproduce the restricted specific game sound without newly allocating it to a channel.

Further, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a pattern variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM (preferably not music but a dramatic sound such as a sound effect or dialogue so as not to overlap with the sound), and while the specific dramatic sound is being played, the timing ts12 arrives and the BGM is played. It is desirable to output the sound in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it becomes difficult to notice that the sound of the BGM reproduction is suppressed or silenced. It should be noted that, with regard to the specific effect sound, the reproduction state thereof should be terminated before the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). is desirable in terms of alleviating anxiety that the special effect sound is not output.

Here, with respect to the above-mentioned specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from channels 02 and 03, the reproduction does not necessarily start before the timing ts12. It may be one that is present and the reproduction is started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if a specific effect sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (normal mode) when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, once " Since it is possible to make it look as if the sound of the BGM reproduced in the "suppressed mode or silent state" has been returned to the playback state in the normal mode, the sound of the BGM playback is in the suppressed mode or silent state It is possible to make it difficult to notice that

Also, the phrase "for a specific effect sound, end its playback state before the timing ts14 at which the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14)" , ``The output of a specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the player's operation is received within the operation effective period, or the output is automatically terminated at a specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period).'' means that In other words, if the player's operation is not accepted until the specific timing within timings ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically terminated.

Further, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a pattern variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of BGM reproduction starts from the timing ts14 when a special effect sound (or a predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output dramatic sounds through a plurality of channels until the timing ts16 when the suppression mode or the silent state ends. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effects sounds including special effects sounds are output, it is possible to easily mix the sounds of the BGM reproduction into the effects sounds, and the sounds of the BGM reproduction can be reproduced normally. It will be possible to secretly transition to the playback state in the mode.

Regarding the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even if there is no operation, the production reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period, and the production after the operation (special production sound reproduction) is executed. You may do so.

Also, when the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs, the effect reception is allowed while the sound of "BGM playback" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. A "receipt acceptance sound" suggesting that the reception of the performance will be accepted (or that the reception of the performance will be accepted) may be output in an unsuppressed manner. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the "specific effect sound", and by assigning the "specific sound data" to the channel It may be output. That is, in this case, the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel before the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, and the corresponding specific effect sound is output in an unsuppressed manner. When the timing ts13 arrives, the "acceptable sound" is output as the sound corresponding to the "specific sound data" assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptable sound" is output from before to after the timing ts13 so as to straddle the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output, for example, as a precursor effect sound corresponding to the precursor effect (effect suggesting that the effective period will soon occur) performed before the operation valid period occurs. In this case, a “predictive effect sound reproduction interval” and a “acceptance allowable sound reproduction interval” are provided in one sound data assigned to a channel so as to straddle timing ts13. The "acceptance acceptable sound" may be set to a non-output state in the middle of the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15), or may be set to a non-output state at timing ts15. Although it is good, it is desirable to use this as a trigger to switch to a non-output state when a presentation is accepted while in the output state.

In other words, the expression "acceptable sound is output" here means newly allocating "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound" to a channel at timing ts13, The concept also includes making the "reproduction section of the acceptable sound" in the sound data to arrive in time with the timing ts13. Also, "put into a non-output state" here means canceling the allocation state of the "sound data including acceptable sound" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. , the concept also includes transitioning to a period in which the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

Also, in the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. Until the predetermined time value is reached, the special effect sound is reproduced in an unsuppressed manner on a channel other than the predetermined channel to which the "BGM reproduction" sound is assigned.

In this respect, when the effect is received during the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15), the effect display device 1600 also displays a special effect display corresponding to the effect reception. However, with regard to the special effect display in response to the reception of the effect, "the execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from the reception of the effect reaches the above-mentioned predetermined time value." Instead, it is desirable to "disappear when the predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the effective period". As the "predetermined timing within the production pattern", for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after timing ts15 and before timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even if the effect reception is performed immediately after the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, the timing must come before the timing at which the output state of the special effect sound ends. is desirable. According to such a configuration, regarding the processing related to the special effect sound, the output state must be continued until the timing that comes after the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is restored in a non-suppressed mode. However, since it is possible to end the special effect display before the special effect sound, it is possible to progress the effect after the operation after the operation at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such effects, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM playback" is restored or the timing that comes before the timing ts16. It can be said that it is important to

According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), based on the fact that the effect is accepted, "the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted is predetermined. A form in which the processing related to the special effect sound that continues the output state until the specified time value is reached” and the “processing related to the special effect display that continues the display until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives” , respectively.

For example, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing within the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), the "process for special effect display" in the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period of time. Of the post-operation effects, the "process for special effect sound" ends when a predetermined time value has passed since the reception of the effect. On the other hand, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing within the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), the "processing related to the special effect display" in the post-operation effect is executed only for a relatively short time. However, the "process for the special effect sound" of the post-operation effect is executed from the time the effect is received until the predetermined time value elapses.

That is, in this case, the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. If the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect (effective period), the output state will be maintained until the elapsed time from the timing of the effect acceptance reaches a predetermined time value. It functions as those for executing "processing related to the special performance sound to be continued" and "processing related to the special performance display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" respectively.

According to such an operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, it is possible to maintain the execution state of the "processing related to the special effect display" of the post-operation effect for a long time. As a compensation for this, the end timing of the "processing related to the special effect sound" in the post-operation effect will arrive at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate it for a while after the effective period occurs and operate it at a later time, the end timing of the "processing related to the special effect sound" in the after-operation effect will be relatively late. However, there is a disadvantage that the execution state of "processing related to special effect display" in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, during the effective period of operation (timings ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is most desirable for producing excitement.
・Do you want to enjoy this by extending the execution state of the "processing related to the special effect display" in exchange for the timing at which the "processing related to the special effect sound" ends earlier? or
・Will you enjoy this by extending the time until the end of the "process for special effect sound" in exchange for shortening the execution state of "process for special effect display"? operation), or
・Sacrifice little by little the time during which the ``processing for the special effect display'' is maintained as an execution state and the time until the ``processing for the special effect sound'' is completed, so as to achieve a balance as a whole. or (whether to operate at a timing that is neither early nor late within the validity period)
To provide an operation reception performance that is hard to get tired of by allowing a player to select an operation timing according to his/her mood by giving such a strategic operation performance to an effective period itself. will be able to

Here, in the above-described example, "processing for special effect sound" and "processing for special effect display" are performed as the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted during the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15). However, it is also possible to further execute "processing for operating a predetermined effect movable body", or instead of "processing for special effect display", "processing for operating a predetermined effect movable body" is performed. ' may be executed. However, regarding the "process for operating a predetermined effect movable body", as in the case of the above-mentioned "process for special effect display", "even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the valid period It is desirable to end the action state when a predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives. Here, "ending the action state" means that, in the case of the effect of moving a predetermined effect movable body to a specific position, the predetermined effect movable body that is in the action state at the specific position returns to the original position. It means to start the process to operate to return.

In the above explanation example, when the effect is accepted during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. , a process of operating a predetermined effect movable body)", and a "process relating to special effect sound" which is continued until the elapsed time from the timing of receiving the effect reaches a predetermined time value, respectively. and However, even if the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined production conditions are not satisfied ), even if the effect is accepted within the operation acceptance effect, the "processing related to the special effect display (or the process to operate the predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (Fig. 142), the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short, and the "process applied to the special effect sound" is performed as a different effect sound. more desirable.

However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), it may not be detected properly (detection error), and the effect may not be accepted. When the time period expires, the game interest of the player who sees that the "processing related to the special effect display (or the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed even though the operation is performed is lost. It is feared that it will decline. Therefore, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), and the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the production pattern arrives. (or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body)", and a "process for a special effect sound" that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value are executed respectively. It is desirable to ensure that As a technique for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and an effect mode related thereto, it is possible to use any one of the examples described above or later, or an appropriate combination thereof.

As described above, during the effective operation period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the "BGM playback" sound is being suppressed, the effect is accepted when the acceptable acceptance sound is output in a non-suppressed state. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect reception, and the output state of the reception permission sound is canceled at this point. In this regard, even when the normal effective period occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed, the acceptable acceptance sound is output in a non-suppressed state along with the occurrence. However, it is desirable that the acceptable reception sound is continued without canceling the output state even if the effect reception is made while in the output state. In addition, regarding the acceptable reception sound that is output when the operation valid period occurs (timings ts13 to ts15), the reproduction state of the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the normal valid period occurs is longer. , it is preferable to maintain the interest in the game even when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed.

In addition, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, N pieces of acceptance acceptable sounds suggesting the occurrence of the valid period (or the occurrence of the valid period). There are types (modes), and output (output in an unsuppressed mode) must be performed in one of these types. On the other hand, the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed mode suggests that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period has occurred). Only M types (modes), which are less than N, are prepared as acceptance acceptable sounds, and "output in one of these types (output in an unsuppressed mode)" and "output in any of these types It is desirable that there is a case where the sound data itself including the acceptable sound is not assigned to a channel and generates an effective period. It should be noted that it is desirable to suggest that ``the degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern varies'' depending on the type of acceptance acceptable sound.

Alternatively, either the effective period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or silent state or the effective period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduced is output normally in a non-suppressed mode , a plurality of types (modes) are prepared as acceptance acceptable sounds, but the rate at which acceptance acceptance sounds with high expectations for big hits appear occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. It is desirable that the effective period is relatively high during the active period, and is relatively low during the effective period that occurs when the sound of the BGM reproduction is output normally in an unsuppressed manner. . Also in this case, in the valid period that occurs when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, the acceptable acceptance sound suggesting that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period has occurred) is generated. While it is always output (output in a non-suppressed manner), in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in a non-suppressed manner, the effective period occurs ( or that the validity period has occurred) "when the acceptable sound is output in an unsuppressed manner" and "when the sound data including the acceptable acceptable sound itself is not assigned a channel and is not output". It is desirable to have

According to these configurations, when the sound of BGM reproduction is normally output in an unsuppressed manner, the degree of expectation implied by the acceptance acceptable sound is not detailed (M types less than N). In other words, they may not be able to fully recognize it, or they may not be able to expect much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the sound of the BGM reproduction is normally output in a non-suppressed manner, there is a possibility that the acceptable sound may be overlooked by the BGM reproduction sound. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the acceptable acceptance sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, in a situation where it is possible to make the sound output in a non-suppressed mode stand out, the acceptance acceptable sound is output. Since it will always be output in an unsuppressed manner, the degree of expectation implied by this can be looked forward to. Note that when either one (or both) of these modes is adopted, among the types of acceptance acceptable sounds that can be output when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or silent state" occurs , at least one type of acceptable acceptable sound (e.g., acceptable acceptable sound The type with the lowest jackpot expectation among them) may be included. However, the acceptable sound that can be output at the time of occurrence of the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" shall include the "BGM playback sound suppressed mode or no sound A type that cannot be output as an acceptance acceptable sound that can be output when the "effective period that occurs when in the state of" occurs is desirable. In addition, the number of effect types that can appear as effects after the operation in response to the reception of the effect in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" is It is desirable to make the number of effect types larger than the number of effect types that can appear as a post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect during the effective period generated when the sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state. Among the effect types that can appear as a post-operation effect in response to the acceptance of the effect in the "valid period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in an unsuppressed mode", "Sound of BGM playback At least one of the effect types that can appear as a post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect may be included in the "effective period that occurs in the suppression mode or in the silent state."

In addition, in the normal game state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability variation function operates, the valid period generated when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the BGM playback sound in the non-suppressed mode. When preparing a plurality of types (modes) with different degrees of expectation for a big hit as acceptance acceptable sounds, output during any of these valid periods Then, it may be possible to output a special reception acceptance sound "the percentage of stoppages in the jackpot pattern becomes 100%". It should be noted that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as special reception acceptable sounds.

That is, in this case, when the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or silent state" occurs, if the special reception allowable sound is output (non-suppression mode), the effect will be performed within the valid period. Even the post-operation production that is performed based on the acceptance is executed in a special mode that "the ratio of stopping with the jackpot pattern becomes 100%" when it appears. If the performance is accepted while the special reception permission sound is being output, the output of the special reception permission sound is interrupted, and when the special reception permission sound is output, the special reception "the ratio of stopping with the jackpot pattern becomes 100%". It is desirable to output a dramatic sound.

However, when the "valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" occurs, when the special reception acceptable sound is output (non-suppressed mode), the valid period As a post-operation production that is performed based on the reception of the production within, when it appears, it is executed in a special mode that ``the percentage of stopping with the jackpot pattern is 100%'' and in this special mode. It is desirable that there are cases where it is not possible. It should be noted that the special acceptance acceptable sound that is output at the occurrence of the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state" and the "BGM playback sound that is normally output in a non-suppressed mode". The special reception acceptance sound output during the "effective period generated when the user is in a certain state" may be reception acceptance sounds of different types. In addition, there are a plurality of types of special acceptance acceptable sounds that are output when the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM playback is output normally in a non-suppressed mode" occurs. , The type of the special reception acceptable sound output at the occurrence of the ``effective period generated when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppressed mode or in the silent state'' and the type different from the said type may be used. . If the effect reception is performed while the reception allowable sound (including the special reception allowable sound) is being output, the output of the reception allowable sound is interrupted, and the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect (the post-operation effect is special If it is performed in the mode, it is desirable to output a special effect sound that "the percentage of stopping with the jackpot pattern becomes 100%" when it is output.

According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction is in a suppressed mode or in a silent state (when it is in a situation where mishearing is unlikely to occur), if the special reception acceptable sound is output, Even as a post-operation performance performed based on the acceptance of the performance in , when it appears, it is always executed in a mode that ``the ratio of stopping with a big hit pattern becomes 100%''. On the other hand, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppressed mode (when conflict with the BGM playback sound is likely to cause mishearing), it is assumed that the special reception acceptable sound is output. Also, as a post-operation effect performed based on the acceptance of the effect within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in a manner that ``the ratio of stopping with the jackpot pattern is 100%''. Therefore, it became possible to have suspicion (suspicion of mishearing) whether the acceptable reception sound was output as "special reception acceptable sound", so that the tension could be maintained appropriately. Become. As a result, while the BGM playback sound is being output normally in a non-suppressed mode, emphasis is placed on ``how not to miss the reception acceptable sound'', and the tension until the reception acceptable sound is output. can also be suitably maintained. In order to heighten the sense of tension, in the operation acceptance effect, ``a special acceptance acceptable sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a manner that ``when it appears, the ratio of stopping with the jackpot symbol is 100%''. Compared to the case of the operation reception production, ``a special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation production is executed in a manner that ``when it appears, the rate of stopping with the jackpot pattern is 100%'''' It is desirable to suddenly generate the effective period by executing the effect (pre-permissible operation-related display and permissible pre-operation-related sound) in a relatively short time.

In addition, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation in which mishearing is likely to occur due to conflict with the BGM playback sound), "a special reception acceptable sound is output and the operation The post-production is not executed in a manner that ``when it appears, the rate of stopping with the jackpot pattern becomes 100%''. When it appears, the rate of stopping with a big hit pattern becomes 100%. In the operation acceptance effect (effective period) executed in the mode of "executed", the special reception acceptance sound is output as a reception acceptance sound of a different type from each other. Alternatively, it may be output as the acceptable acceptance sound of the same type. In addition, in a state in which the BGM playback sound is normally output in a non-suppressed mode (when there is a situation where it is easy to mishear the reception acceptance sound due to competition with the BGM playback sound), "output of the special reception acceptance sound The operation reception performance (effective period) may not always occur. In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (effective period), ``a special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation effect is not executed in a manner that ``when it appears, the rate of stopping with the jackpot pattern is 100%'''' Regardless of which type of sound is output, the post-operation effect is not executed in a manner in which ``the rate of stopping with the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears'', and the manner is prepared in the first place. It may be one that is not

In addition, during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed and during the normal effective period, an image display simulating the operation means used as the operation target and an effective A gauge display indicating how much time remains is displayed, and an operation prompting effect is performed to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this regard, at least during the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "playback BGM" is suppressed, when the effect is accepted, the gauge display remains (displayed) and the "effect Processing related to a special effect display in which the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives (or processing to operate a predetermined effect movable body)”, and “Elapsed time from the timing when the effect is accepted It is desirable to start "the processing for the special effect sound that continues until the time reaches a predetermined time value". According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the timing within the effective period when the performance reception is performed based on the gauge remaining amount left as a display after the reception of the performance. This makes it possible to predict whether or not the processing related to the special effect display (or the process of operating a predetermined effect movable body) will end soon. As a method for starting the post-operation production while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, one of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, or the contents of the description may be used. is possible.

In the above explanation example, regarding the number of production patterns prepared (stored) as the "particular type of production pattern" for outputting the sound of "BGM playback" in the suppression mode or silent mode, the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number of effect patterns to be less than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as "other effect patterns" that are not output without sound, in order to improve the game interest when the effect occurs. .

In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as "effect patterns" in which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, these effect patterns include a mode in which the sound of "BGM playback" is suppressed for the first set time. Alternatively, a performance pattern for outputting silently and a performance pattern for outputting the sound of ``BGM reproduction'' in a suppressed mode or silently for a second set time longer than the first set time are included, and these performance patterns include jackpot patterns. It is desirable that the expectations appearing are different. According to such a configuration, when the sound of 'BGM reproduction' is output in a suppressed mode or silently, the degree of expectation for a big win can be suggested by how long the state continues. .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) is changed by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the left effect selection button 331 and the right effect selection button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state (demonstration state, etc.) in which pattern variation is not executed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (processing for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing a process of changing the setting value (volume setting value) of the player regarding the volume even in the state where the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even if the volume setting value is changed while the pattern variation is being executed. That is, in a pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting ``an effect pattern for outputting the sound of BGM reproduction in a suppressed mode or silently'', the sound volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during pattern fluctuation regardless of the effect pattern. In this case, the player who sees that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, so it is expected that the game interest will be maintained appropriately. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. This is desirable in terms of making the person aware of it (be aware of the possibility that the "sound volume suppression effect" is being executed). "Do not output volume adjustment confirmation sound" means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but it is output at a volume of 0, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. .

The special effect sound that is output based on the fact that the effect is received while the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, is output for a time that is at least twice the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15). It is desirable to configure it so that the output state is maintained. According to such a configuration, even if the effect is accepted immediately after the operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 has passed is It can be made longer than the output time (special effect sound) up to timing ts15.

[A game machine equipped with a plurality of production operation units]
By the way, in the above description, the gaming machine having the plate unit 320 provided with the effect operation unit 400 capable of being pressed by the player and capable of presenting the effect image to the player has been described. With reference to 143 to 165, a gaming machine capable of further motivating the player to operate will be described. Note that the effect control of the effect operation unit described below is performed by the peripheral control board 1510 .

FIG. 143 is a front view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. FIG. 144 is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword rendering operation unit 5000. FIG. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged on the door frame 3 of the game machine 1 will be described, and the same reference numerals will be given to the same components as those described above, and the description will be omitted as appropriate.

The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side when viewed from the front. The sword effect operation unit 5000 contains a blade part 5010 having a blade part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the blade part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the blade part 5011 of the blade part 5010. A sword decoration 5001 is composed of a sheath 5020 that can be used.

The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 so that the sheath part 5020 can be moved in the left and right direction when viewed from the front. In addition, the blade portion 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword drawing direction and the sword retracting direction. The blade portion 5010 is normally in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, and in the blade drawing effect, the sword blade portion 5011 becomes visible to the player by drawing the sword. Then, the sword section 5010 in the drawn state can function as an operation means for receiving the player's sword sheathing operation and returning to the sword sheathed state.

Here, with reference to FIG. 145, a description will be given of an execution opportunity for the drawing effect involving the movement of the sword effect operation unit 5000 (sword ornament 5001). FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table for effect patterns in the effect mode in which the sword drawing effect can be executed. (B) shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence or absence of the sword drawing effect.

The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed after the sword drawing preparation transition production is executed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed without performing the sword drawing preparation transition production in advance, and a sword drawing preparation transition production is performed in advance. In spite of this, there is a pattern in which the sword drawing production is not performed, a pattern in which the sword drawing preparation transition production is performed and the sword drawing production is not performed. Two patterns are provided: a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member.

As shown in FIG. 145(A), depending on the type of variation pattern that is determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, whether or not to execute the drawing preparation transition effect is selected. Here, the plural types of variation patterns are classified into a variation pattern for big win variation at the time of big win, a variation pattern for small win variation at the time of small win, and a variation pattern for loss variation at the time of loss, and variations that result in advantageous results for the player. The pattern is set so that the probability of execution of the drawing preparation transition effect increases as the pattern increases. Specifically, the draw-sword preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, executed with a probability of 30% in the case of the variation pattern for the small win variation, and executed with a probability of 30% in the variation pattern for the loss variation. 20% chance of execution. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of losing variation may change the probability according to the presence or absence of the ready-to-win effect so that the probability of executing the sword drawing preparation transition effect is higher when the ready-to-win effect is performed than when it is not performed. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), whether or not to execute the sword draw main effect is selected according to the type of variation pattern and the presence or absence of the sword draw preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is set to be higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed. In addition, it is set such that the probability of execution of the sword draw main effect increases as the variation pattern becomes more advantageous for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, the execution of the sword drawing preparation transition effect is set to increase the probability of execution of the sword drawing main effect. Specifically, when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is executed in the variation pattern for losing variation, the probability of execution of the sword drawing preparation transition performance is higher than when the sword drawing preparation transition performance is not executed in the small hit variation variation pattern. It should be noted that, in the case of the variation pattern for the big hit variation, regardless of the presence or absence of the drawing preparation transition presentation, the sword draw main presentation is always executed.

In addition, when the main draw effect is executed, the draw preparation transition effect is executed in advance, and the probability of executing the main draw sword effect with the aura member increases as the variation pattern becomes more advantageous for the player. is set to It should be noted that here, in the case of the variation pattern for the small hit variation, the drawing main effect of the form with the aura member is not selected.

(State transition and operation of the aura member by drawing the sword ornament)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149, the sword drawing action of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword drawing effect (sword drawing preparation transition effect and sword drawing main effect) will be described. In addition, when the aura member 5030 is provided in the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) capable of receiving the sheathing operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its own constituent member (aura member 5030) (Fig. 146, 147), the aura member 5035 is provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is united with the member (aura member 5035) on the door frame 3 side. The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described in the case of forming an integral decoration (FIGS. 148 and 149).

146A and 146B are state transition diagrams illustrating the sword drawing operation of the sword decoration 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) itself. (C) shows the second drawn state. FIG. 147 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG. 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5030. FIG.

The sword ornament 5001 in the normal state is in a sheathed state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020, as shown in FIG. 146(A). As shown in FIG. 146(B), only the habaki 5011a portion of the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing preparation transition presentation is pulled out of the sheath 5020 and visible to the player. It becomes the first unsheathed state. 146(C), the blade part 5011 of the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword drawing operation in the sword drawing main effect is further drawn from the scabbard part 5020, and most of it becomes visible to the player. state. Here, the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state can function as an operation means capable of accepting the player's sheathing operation.

The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be operable independently of the action of drawing the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword ornament 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is in the sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sheathed state (Fig. 146(A)) to the first drawn state (Fig. 146(B)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved from the closed state (Fig. 147(A)) to the open state (Fig. 147(B)) as much as possible (maximum movement), and the blade portion 5011 is deformed. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even when the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 changes from the first drawn state to the second drawn state (FIG. 146(C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when it is fully moved, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first drawn state.

The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 147(A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. and a pinion 5033. In the aura member 5030, the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by a drive means (not shown), so that the rotational force is converted into linear motion in the rightward direction of the rack 5031a and in the leftward direction of the rack 5032a. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) projecting outward from the outline of the blade portion 5011 .

In addition, an LED board 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011. As shown in FIG. By emitting light from these LEDs, it is possible to decorate the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) with light emission.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sheathed state to the first drawn state, the closed state changes to the open state, Although the example in which the sword ornament 5001 changes from the first sword-drawn state to the second sword-drawn state is shown, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start to operate (deform) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the performance pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as the operation means (not limited to the mode of maximum movement, but also includes the mode of stopping the movement in the middle) ).

148A and 148B are state transition diagrams for explaining the sword drawing operation of the sword ornament 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath 5020. (A) sword sheathed state, (B) first sword drawn state, and (C). The second drawing state is shown. FIG. 149 is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to facilitate understanding of the operation of the aura member 5035. FIG. 147 and 148 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.

As shown in FIGS. 148(A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided in the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) is similar to the above-described blade portion 5010 (blade portion 5011). While the aura member 5030 provided in itself is movable in the horizontal direction, it is movable in the vertical direction. Also, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011 . In the case where the sword ornament 5001 is in a form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sheathed state, and changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (sword sheathed state). ⇔ first drawn state ⇔ second drawn state). As a result, the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) can be united with the frame-side member (aura member 5035) to appear as an integral decoration.

The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 149(A). The aura member 5035 is provided so that the upper end is below the habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the fully housed state, and a hollow columnar surrounding aura member 5036 is provided so as to surround the outer circumference of the blade portion 5011. and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. The enclosing aura member 5036 rotates the right pinion 5037a counterclockwise in front view and the left pinion 5037b clockwise in front view by driving means (not shown). This is converted into upward linear motion of the rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, and as shown in FIG. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum movement) to the upper limit of the movable range.

Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, and the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be decorated with light.

Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, according to the state change of the sword ornament 5001 (sword portion 5010) (sword sheathed state ⇔ first sword drawn state ⇔ second sword drawn state), the relative positional relationship is maintained. 5011 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start to operate (combine) after the sword ornament 5001 is in the second drawn state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword ornament 5001 in the second drawn state functions as an operation means (including the form with aura member of the state). Also, the aura member 5035 may be united with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player in the state from the sheathed state to the first drawn state.

(Other production pattern 1 using sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 150 to 152 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and motion transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess ready-to-win effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the aforementioned sword decoration body 5001 . First, the sheathed sword ornament 5001 functions as an operation means, and detects the player's sword drawing operation. Secondly, the sheath portion 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. It is possible to operate up to the front center.

When the changing pattern forms the ready-to-win state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative patterns becomes the ready-to-win state (FIG. 150 (A1)), and the start image of the princess ready-to-win is displayed (FIG. 150 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 when viewed from the front, and is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) in which a part of the blind is visible to the player. there is Further, at this time, the sword ornament 5001 is in the sheathed state.

In the princess ready-to-win effect, after an image of the princess facing behind the blind is displayed (Fig. 150 (A3)), an operation effect suggesting image suggesting an operation effect is displayed (Fig. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and the operation effective period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started, and at the same time, the display area of the effect display device 1600 prompts the player to draw the sword decoration 5001. An operation prompting image and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed (FIG. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY are moved up and down in small increments from the display of the operation effect suggesting image to the display of the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the operation effective period. good too. Then, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

The sword drawing operation by the player means an operation of pulling out the blade part 5011 from the sheath part 5020 by grasping the handle part 5012 of the sheathed sword ornament 5001 and lifting the sword part 5010 upward. When the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state, the player's sword draw operation is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification action may be any action that the player can feel through the handle 5012 gripped by the player, such as moving the sword 5010 (or the handle 5012) up and down, vibrating, and other actions other than the action of drawing the sword. Just do it. Also, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012 . Therefore, since the player can visually confirm the detection of the operation, unnecessary contact with the sword ornament 5001 (grabbing again to confirm the detection, etc.) can be reduced, and failure or damage of the movable body can be prevented. can be done.

Here, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear. However, when the player draws the sword, the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player according to the degree of expectation. You may do so.

When the end pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). state) is maintained, and a screen showing the end of the operation presentation by the sword ornament 5001 is displayed (Fig. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative pattern is stop-displayed in the missing mode "767" (Fig. 151 (C2)). At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. You may do so.

On the other hand, when the development pattern is performed, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is placed in the center of the front overlapping the display area of the effect display device 1600 (below the display area). It is dropped and moved to a state where only the reserved display area is visible (completely dropped state) (Fig. 151 (D1)).Then, the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, the sword decoration body 5001 maintains the second sword drawn state (FIG. 151 (D2)).At this time, the display of the shadow of the princess projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided in a plurality of patterns. By changing the color and size of the shadow, and the comments to be displayed afterwards, the degree of expectation of the lottery result by Princess Reach (expectation of winning, game profit when winning, etc.) may be suggested. .

Then, after a predetermined period of time has passed since the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second sword-drawn state by the player's sword-drawing operation, that is, after the shadow of the princess is projected in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword-drawn state is reached. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in the left-right direction on the front surface by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 151 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the front center position of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decorative member SDY returns from the completely fallen state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 with good visibility becomes An image of a surprised princess with the blinds removed is displayed (Fig. 152 (D4)). After that, the sword ornament 5001 returns to the original position where the sword drawing operation was performed, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a win, the win is announced with a smiling princess. An image is displayed (FIGS. 152 (E1) and (E2)), and an image announcing the loss is displayed along with a sad princess (FIGS. 152 (F1) and (F2)).

In addition, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. If the player cannot move because the player is holding the sword when executing , an announcement or display such as "please release the sword" is performed. Even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001, the effect itself proceeds. If it is held in the performed position, it will cause a delay in the left and right direction movement effect. However, regardless of whether or not the movement effect in the horizontal direction of the sword decoration body 5001 has been executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the falling movement effect of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) progress. Since it is configured so that the progress of the game is not stagnated. Note that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured such that when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001, the movable effect in the horizontal direction is immediately performed, or the movable effect is not performed. may

As described above, in the princess ready-to-win production, the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (effective operation) of the sword decoration 5001 is dropped and moved by the player's drawing operation (vertical movement) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 itself, which has been operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600, is moved forward of the effect display device 1600 (to the operating position) by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3. to the left). That is, based on the player's sword drawing operation, the sword decorative body 5001 itself can be moved to an operating position different from the operating position where the sword drawing operation was performed, thereby increasing the player's operational value and increasing the player's desire to operate. can suppress the decline of In addition, since one operation means can be operated in different stages (vertical direction at the time of operation, horizontal direction after the operation) according to the operation by the player, it provides an effect using a plurality of movable modes. It is possible to increase the operational value of the operating means compared to the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

It should be noted that the effect of moving the sword decoration body 5001 in the horizontal direction is for the purpose of performing an effect integrally with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the action position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the sword decoration 5001 is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the sword is drawn, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to perform a left-right movement effect in which the player is displaced to the left (the left end of the frame). In addition, since the operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example by the player is a movement in the up-down direction (sword drawing action of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from the bottom), the sword decoration 5001 is operated after the operation based on the operation. For the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword ornament 5001 moves in a direction (horizontal direction as in this example) different from the motion direction (vertical direction in this case) when operated by the player.

Further, when the player's sword drawing operation is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. can be judged. In addition, since the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually confirm it, it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again to confirm the detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the movement performance of the sword ornament 5001, or damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, even after the detection notification operation, if the movement effect cannot be executed due to contact with the sword ornament 5001, a warning such as an announcement is made to the player to let go of the player's hand, and the operation is requested during the operation valid period. Since even the contact is prohibited after the operation means finishes the detection notification operation, the operational value of the operation means can be increased.

(Another production pattern 2 using the sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 153 to 155 are diagrams for explaining the screen transition of the effect display device 1600, the state transition of the operation button 410, and the action transition of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect including the operation effect of the operation button 410, which is used in many ways. be. Here, as the operation effect of the operation button 410, there is a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation level suggestion effect is performed that suggests the level of expectation that the variation during execution will be a big hit, and the operation of the operation button 410 is performed. A pattern ((A) (B)→M in the figure) in which the suggestion and development of the operation presentation of the sword ornament 5001 is performed as the presentation will be described.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 153(A)), first, the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is 153(B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern.

First, in the pattern in which the expectation degree suggesting effect is performed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (Fig. 153 (N1)), an image suggesting the degree of expectation for a big hit is displayed (Fig. 154 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variation display (big win, loss) is notified (Fig. 154 (N3) or (N4)). It should be noted that a look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation level suggesting effect for the variable display being executed. A character that changes the displayed pending display may appear.

In addition, in the pattern in which the operation effect of the sword decorative body 5001 is suggested and developed by pressing the operation button 410, when the player's pressing operation to the operation button 410 is detected, the display area of the effect display device 1600 153 (M1) in which an effect image is displayed suggesting that an operation presentation requesting sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be performed. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a start image of the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, a message of the title "Chance to draw the sword" and the operation explanation "I want you to put the sword away") is displayed. At the same time, the sword ornament 5001 changes from the sheathed state to the second drawn state. The sword ornament 5001 at this time is in the form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum movement of the aura member 5030 (Fig. 155 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the second sword is drawn and the effective period of operation of the sword ornament 5001 begins, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain accessory) is moved in the initial state in small increments in the vertical direction. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of operation are displayed (FIG. 155 (M3)). Then, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, an effect based on the result of the current variation display is performed.

If the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state ( Figure 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, message “Good job”) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) simply stops moving in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (decorative pattern stop mode "767") is displayed to notify the loss (FIG. 155 (M6)).

In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation or developing an operation effect of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible. Subsequent expansion cannot be specified at the time of manipulating . Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to operate and the decrease in interest in the game, which are concerns due to the monotonous presentation after the operation.

In addition, in the series of ready-to-win effects, the first operation (pressing operation of the operation button 410) and the second operation (sword sheathing operation of the sword decorative body 5001) have different operation modes (pressing operation and sword sheathing operation). (press operation of the operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and to suppress the decrease in interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation without changing.

In this example, the operation button 410 is used as an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (sword sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. As the first operation opportunity, the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 may be an effective operation. In this case, the operation means to be effective for the second operation opportunity is the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410 with a relatively lower degree of expectation than the sword decoration 5001 of the first time. is desirable.

(Another production pattern 3 using the sword decoration 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160, another ready-to-win effect using the aforementioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 156 to 160 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the ready-to-win effect. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the figure) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 Even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not move and is displayed in the missing mode based on the pressing operation of , the pattern display in the missing mode is changed again, and the player is given an opportunity to operate again. Patterns ((A) (B1) (B2) → (P1) to (P4) → Q when given the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 / R when given the opportunity to operate the operation button 410) will be explained.

In the ready-to-win effect here, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the ready-to-win state (FIG. 156(A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here , and the message ``Move the movable body with a single push of a button'') is displayed (FIG. 156(B)). An operation facilitating presentation to prompt is performed (FIG. 156(C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is decorated with light. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 maintains the sheathed state. Then, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is performed according to a preset effect pattern. Note that the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is not limited to one hit (one time), and may be repeated hits (multiple times). In addition, in order for the player to easily grasp the object (movable body) that is moved by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state during the operation valid period of the operation button 410. You may do so. Further, when the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state at this point.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moves and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is completely dropped from the initial state. (Fig. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image (decorative design of A stop mode "777", a message of "good job") is displayed (Fig. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

In the pattern in which the specific decorative member SDY (blinds) is not movable, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decorative members SDY (blinds) are only stopped moving in small steps, and can be dropped. not. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative pattern in the shifted mode ("767") is oscillatingly displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 158 (P1). A pattern (FIG. 158 (P2)) in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state ("767"), or a resurrection pattern in which the ready-to-win state is revived is developed.

In the resurrection pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a resurrection start image (saying "not A samurai image) is inserted (Fig. 158 (P3)), and the decorative pattern is again in a ready-to-reach state and displayed in a reduced size in the upper right corner of the screen. is displayed (the face of a friendly samurai with his eyes closed) is displayed (FIG. 158 (P4)). As time elapses, the eyes of the displayed samurai are enlarged and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved up and down in small steps in the initial state (Fig. 158 (P5)). As a result, the player's sense of expectation for performance using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is heightened. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 may be decorated with light emission in a high-speed flashing mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be changed from the sheathed state to the first drawn state and moved up and down. Then, depending on the effect pattern to be set, the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword sheathing operation of the sword decoration 5001. (Sudare Yakumono) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is operated is set to have a lower degree of expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which the samurai's forehead is dripping with sweat in the operation effective suggesting image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is pressed. 410 is decorated with light emission (Fig. 159 (R1)). Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) continues to move in small steps, the operation button 410 is decorated with light, and the operation effective period of the operation button 410 starts, prompting the user to press the operation button 410. Promotion effect is performed (Fig. 159 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of an operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of times of operation, and an effective period of operation are displayed. Here, when the operation button 410 is operated a required number of times, it is no longer illuminated.

Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the completely falling state. (Fig. 159 (R3)). At this time, the decoration pattern displayed on the upper right of the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed on the lower right of the screen so as to be visible to the player. It should be noted that, at this point, it may be made difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decoration pattern, as in the case of the above (FIG. 155 (M4)). Next, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state from the completely fallen state, and the screen An image (decorative pattern stop mode “777”, message “Good job”) announcing a big hit is displayed in the center (Fig. 159 (R4)).

On the other hand, when the result of the variable display is a failure, when the player's pressing operation of the operation button 410 is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the display area, a decorative design in a displaced mode ("767") is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (Fig. 159 (R5)).

When the sword ornament 5001 is used as the operation means, an image (sword ornament A confirmation image) is displayed, and the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sheathed state to the second drawn state with the aura member (FIG. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be decorated with light. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the sword decoration 5001 is valid to operate, not the operation button 410. At this point, the sword decoration 5001 is in a form with an aura member. can be understood by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001 . Next, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved in small steps, the second sword is drawn and a predetermined period of time elapses. In the area, an operation prompting image for prompting the player to sheathe the sword ornament 5001 and a gauge indicating the effective period of the operation are displayed (FIG. 160 (Q2)).

Then, if the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that in FIGS. Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display is a loss, when the player's sword sheathing operation is detected, the effect transition similar to that of FIG. 159 (R5) described above is traced (FIG. 160 (Q5)).

In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the falling state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation is more powerful than the degree of expectation suggested by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed. Also, even if the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is not moved down based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. be done. Since the degree of expectation can be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game, which is a concern due to monotonous operation presentation without changing.

150 to 160 described above show three examples of production patterns of ready-to-win production using the sword ornament 5001, but various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of presentations, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. The form of the sword ornament 5001 described above has two types, a form with an aura member and a form without an aura member. are provided in two types.

FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the form of the sword ornament 5001 used for pseudo-continuous effect. The sword decoration 5001 here is provided so as to be able to change its shape in two stages by deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3, and the player can see from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears visibly in the The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 in the same manner as the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is the same as that of the aura member 5030 described above. 161(A) to (D) are diagrams showing the types (step change) of the form of the sword ornament 5001 in the sheathed state, showing the stage 0 form to stage 3 form in order. The sword ornament 5001 takes any form from stage 0 to stage 3 depending on the presentation.

As shown in FIG. 161A, the stage 0 configuration is the configuration in the normal state similar to FIGS. showing morphology. As shown in FIG. 161(B), the stage 1 configuration shows a configuration in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath 5012 by the action of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 configuration. As shown in FIG. 161(C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 from the stage 1 form spreads and moves so as to be divided into two parts to the left and right from the center, and the first decorative part 5012a emerges from inside. show. As shown in FIG. 161(D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative part 5012b is moved upward from the inside of the handle part 5012 in the stage 2 form to form a decoration integrated with the first decorative part 5012a. showing morphology. Here, the stage 1 to stage 3 modes enable the form change without the sword ornament 5001 being in the second drawn state. Furthermore, since the sword part 5010 capable of accepting the operation by the player as the operation part of the operation means and the sheath part 5020 which does not operate operate together to form an integral decoration, a more powerful operation means can be provided. can be done.

(Suggestion effect before operation using specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 162 to 165, a pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation valid period during which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operational valid in the ready-to-win effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means will be operationally valid by the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory). . Specifically, as a suggestive pattern by the pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is positioned at the initial position. There are a first suggesting pattern and a second suggesting pattern that generates an operation valid period in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggesting position. ) is operationally effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestion pattern (Fig. 162(B)) that generates the operation valid period with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) positioned at the initial position even during the operation valid period. is performed, the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)) generated by the operation valid period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggestion position. , the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 70% (including the step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes operable with a probability of 30%. A description will be given below of a production transition example corresponding to the action of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive production.

(First suggested pattern)
162 and 163 show either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the ready-to-win effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the variable effect (ready-to-win effect) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board 1310. is a diagram showing a transition example of a ready-to-win effect in which a pre-operation suggestive effect of the first suggestive pattern is executed when it is determined that the operation is valid. In this ready-to-win effect, when the three decorative symbols in the display area of the effect display device 1600 are in a ready-to-win state (FIG. 162(A)), the operation buttons pre-determined to be operationally valid by lottery of the peripheral control board 1510 The pre-operation suggesting effect of the first suggesting pattern is executed before the operation effective period for the operation means of either 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a specific effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation valid period is generated. is displayed (FIG. 162(B)), and at this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Also, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 .

Then, with the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) maintained at the initial position, an operation effective period is generated for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be effective. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is activated, the first suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the second suggestion pattern (described later) as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher rate than the sword ornament 5001. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 162(C), the operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) maintains its initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompt effect is performed in which an operation prompt image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. Also, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword ornament 5001 is operationally valid, the pre-operation suggesting effect may be executed in the first suggesting pattern, although at a lower rate than the operation button 410 . At that time, as shown in FIG. 162(D), an effective period of operation for the sword decoration 5001 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (strainer accessory) maintains its initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is performed in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (a form with an aura member), and the player can sheath the sword.

162(C) or (D), when an operation to an operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is effective for operation is detected, and if the result of this variation display is a big hit, The specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of this variable display is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 163 (CC3)).

(Second suggested pattern)
FIG. 164 shows that when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated during the ready-to-win effect, the pre-operation suggestive effect of the second suggestive pattern is performed. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the reach production|presentation performed. In addition, in FIG. 165, even though the second suggestion pattern has been performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the sword decoration body 5001 is not enabled for operation, and the operation button 410 is once enabled for operation, and then the sword decoration is performed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a pre-operation suggestion effect of a step-up pattern in which a body 5001 becomes operationally valid.

As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, which is pre-determined to be operable by a lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is executed before the operation validity period for the operation means of is generated. As a specific effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggesting image (aura rotation) suggesting that the operation means becomes operationally valid is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggesting image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggesting pattern, but in the second suggesting pattern, the operation effect suggesting image is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed. It operates from the initial position to a small drop state (suggested position) overlapping the upper part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 in front view, and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) moves up and down between the initial position and the suggested position. It is moved in small steps in a direction. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

Then, while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moved to the suggested position, the operation effective period for the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) whose operation is predetermined to be effective is set. generate. In this example, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is enabled, the second suggestive pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestive pattern as the pre-operation suggestive effect. In other words, when the operation valid period occurs while the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is in the suggested position, the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is made valid at a higher rate than the operation button 410. It becomes possible to suggest to the player.

When the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword decoration 5001 is set in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moving to the suggested position. generate At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation prompting effect is performed in which an operation prompting image prompting the player to sheathe the sword decorative body 5001 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 is changed from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (aura-attached state), and the player can sheath the sword. Further, even when the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, albeit at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), an operation valid period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is moving to the suggested position, and at the same time the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation prompting presentation, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the suggested position to the initial state. Further, the movement of the specific decorative member SDY (blind blind) to the fully fallen state or the initial state may be performed from the state of operation to the suggested position without being returned to the initial state.

164 (AA2) or (AA3) described above, when an operation to the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is detected, the above-described FIG. 162 (C) or (D) Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved from the initial state to the fully fallen state (Fig. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial state, a big hit is notified in the display area of the performance display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is cancelled. An image (decorative pattern stop mode "777", message "Good job") is displayed (Fig. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is a failure, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) remains in its initial state and is not moved, and the failure is notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An image (decorative design stop mode "767") is displayed (Fig. 163 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect in the first suggestion pattern.

Note that the movement pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the second suggestive pattern may be not only a pattern in which it is moved to the suggested position, but also a plurality of movement patterns. For example, when a plurality of types of action patterns are provided so that the rate at which the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally effective is different, the player's interest in the action can be heightened. It is possible to increase interest in the used pre-operation suggesting effect and operation promoting effect.

(step up pattern)
When the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern generated by the operation effective period is performed in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggested position, and the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, 164 (AA1) → (AA3) until the sword decoration 5001 becomes operationally valid, in addition to the basic pattern of following the effect transition of FIG. A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

As shown in FIGS. 165(BB1) to (BB4), the step-up pattern pre-operation suggestion effect is an operation valid period for the sword ornament 5001 which is pre-determined to be operationally valid by a lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. is generated, that is, before the effect for promoting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed.

In the step-up pattern, first, an image suggesting an operation effect (rotating aura) similar to that in FIG. 164 (AA1) is displayed and the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps (FIG. 165 (BB1). ). Next, an operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated while the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved to the suggested position. At the same time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is performed in which an operation promotion image prompting the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge indicating the operation effective period are displayed. (FIG. 165 (BB2)). Here, even if the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the effective period of operation of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggested image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the effective period of operation of the operation button 410 expires. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the second sword drawn state (with aura), and the display area of the effect display device 1600 shows that the operation buttons 410 to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 165 (BB4). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is in the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promoting effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation-promoting effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation-promoting effect (FIG. 163) in the above-described second suggestion pattern.

It should be noted that only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation prompting effect) at the time of FIG. 165 (BB2) described above. It is sufficient if the player's attention is once directed to the button operation 410 and then the sword ornament 5001 is operated. Also, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern, but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

In this way, in the pre-operation suggesting effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is operational-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY ) can be changed, and an operation means that can be operated according to the position is suggested. Specifically, in the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162(B)) in which the operation valid period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated. The second suggestion pattern (in FIG. 164 (AA1), the sword decoration body 5001 Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in order to grasp which operation means is effective. It is possible to enhance the interest of the production.

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is moved in small steps in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestive effect. Since the effect of the motion (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is also used for the notification of the result after the operation of the operating means (Fig. 163), a sequence of the motion effect (falling effect) from the suggestive effect before the operation, from the upward and downward movement, to the falling effect. It is possible to show the effect of this, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), that is, the degree of expectation that the operating means that becomes operable by the movable body is operable is shown. A display may be provided to indicate expectations. In addition, when the operation means to be effective is determined, the operation button 410 is turned on, or the sword ornament 5001 is changed to the second drawn state, and the operation means to be effective is moved by vibration or the like. You can

In addition, in the second suggestive pattern, in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) is located at the suggestive position, the operation button 410 is once activated (or after it is pretended to be activated). 2) A step-up pattern is provided in which the sword ornament 5001 becomes operable. As a result, the player is interested in both operation means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes operationally valid immediately after the pre-operation suggesting effect, it is possible to have an expectation that the sword decoration 5001 may become operationally valid after that, so that the desire to operate is reduced and the interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation valid period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is valid is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 162(B)), similar to the second suggestive pattern (FIG. 164(AA1)), the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is displayed from the initial position in the front view of the display area of the effect display device 1600. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (suggested position) that overlaps with the upper portion, and move in small increments in the vertical direction between the initial position and the suggested position. It should be noted that the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is returned to the initial position (rest) when the valid operation period is to be generated thereafter. As a result, the motion of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the motion in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested an operation effect according to the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to expect that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 will be valid even when the pre-operation suggestive effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed. Since the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) that is operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is moved to the suggestion position, the pre-operation suggestion is performed. It is possible to improve the interest of the production.

[Specific operation-related effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained in the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a specific effect Execute the rendition with the pattern. During the performance period during which a specific performance pattern is executed, a specific performance reception period (effective period) for establishing a specific performance execution condition by an operation by a player can be generated, and the operation is performed within the specific performance reception period. , it is possible to execute a specific operation-time effect (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege) based on the establishment of a specific effect execution condition. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested as a result of a specific operation-time effect may be 100% or 0%.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation means provided for such an effect at the time of operation (such as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation for granting a privilege when operated), an operation In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further provide operating means (such as the sword ornament 5001). In this regard, in a specific production pattern, based on the result of the production determination, the operation button 410 is provided with an opportunity to operate (when the operation button 410 is operated, a specific production execution condition is established). There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) (when a specific effect execution condition is established when another operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001, etc.), even if no operation is performed at the operation opportunity, the pre-operation effect in which the operation opportunity is given is generated. The player can recognize that the degree of expectation (big hit expectation) for awarding the privilege is higher than when the operation button 410 is given the opportunity to operate. The degree of expectation for awarding a privilege suggested when an opportunity to operate another operation means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) may be 100% or 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001), the operation time corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to improve the amusement of the game in the pre-stage where the performance is not yet performed and when the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, the desired performance result (such as a performance result suggesting that the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege is high) does not appear in the operation time performance corresponding to the operation of another operation means (such as the sword decoration body 5001). Even if the operating means cannot be operated within the specific effect acceptance period (effective period), the game interest can be improved through such operation-related effects. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornaments 5001, etc.) having such effects. In this case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunity is granted.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least
・After the “specific operation-related effect” that can appear even when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (makes it possible to receive the effect), the operation of the operation button 410 is activated (it becomes possible to receive the effect). ), and the operation of the operation button 410 is validated without the “specific operation-related effect” being started (making the effect acceptable). A plurality of effect modes are prepared, such as a second effect mode that generates an effective period (effect reception period) that is applied, and by executing one of these effect modes, the operation of the operation button 410 is validated (effect It is designed to generate an effective period (drawing acceptance period) during which the performance can be accepted.

According to such a configuration, there may be a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received for the effect. In either case of a period during which an operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can receive the effect, a common (specific ) can be executed, it becomes possible to make it interesting to see which of the specific operation means and another operation means can receive the effect. By allowing the player to perform the operation while the is being performed, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, one of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) is activated. At least at the time when the effect is started, it is determined which of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) the effect reception period will occur. should be kept confidential. In addition, for each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) before the effect acceptance period occurs. It may be possible to indicate whether the performance is to be performed (appear the effect result display), or during the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs, multiple operations It is also possible to indicate which of the means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001) to which the operation opportunity is given (appear the effect result display), and to what timing the operation-related effect is executed. It is possible to change it as appropriate.

Hereinafter, several presentation modes that can be employed when carrying out such common (specific) operation-related presentation will be sequentially described. In each of the following explanation examples and their other examples, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means for common (specific) operation-related effects. The types of operation means are not limited to these, and three or more operation means may be prepared as a plurality of operation means to be subjected to a common (specific) operation-related effect. In addition, the following production examples and their separate examples mainly show the production contents in the case where one of the production acceptance periods occurs after the common (specific) operation-related production is executed, and the common (specific ), the contents of the effect may be omitted if any of the effect receiving periods occurs without execution of the operation-related effect. However, if any of the effect reception periods occur without the common (specified) operation-related effect being executed, the effect content will be "when the operation button 410 is operated without the specific operation-related effect being executed. An operation instructing image prompting appears, or an operation instructing image prompting the operation of the sword ornament 5001 appears. Furthermore, in each of the following production examples and their separate examples, a common (specific) operation-related production is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach production A common (specific) operation-related effect may be generated as an image different from the effect image displayed as the ready-to-win effect during the period of execution, or common during the execution period of the jackpot game. A (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

It should be noted that each of the effects described below can be executed in appropriate combination with the different effects described later, and can also be executed in appropriate combination with each of the effects described above. It is possible. Each effect described below can be combined with another effect described later by replacing a part thereof, and each effect described below is performed when the first effect pattern is executed. Therefore, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is also possible to perform different effects, which will be described later. The same thing can be said between the productions of the different examples described later.

[First effect mode]
FIGS. 166 and 167 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is being executed after the specific operation-related effect has started. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation (1st production|presentation mode) performed.

In FIG. 166(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 166(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 166(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display that moves within each is performed. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means in the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword can be displayed simultaneously. While it remains unclear which of the decoration 5001 and the decoration 5001 can receive the effect, it suggests that the operation of any of these operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect. be able to

In FIG. 166(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166(b) progresses, and both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed. In a state in which they are stopped and displayed within the area, an instruction display prompting the user to operate one of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) (here, a text display such as "operate" and an effect reception This shows the production situation in which the bar display indicating the remaining time of the possible period) appears.

According to such an effect mode, even though the operation of at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) It is possible to make it unclear which of the above is allowed to receive the performance. This is because the same rendering mode (Fig. 166(c)) is available in both the situation where the operation of the operation button 410 can be received as an effect and the situation where the operation of the sword ornament 5001 can be received as an effect. It's because it's displayed. That is, in this production example (first production mode), the operation of at least one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) is performed before the production can be accepted. (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001), common (specific) operation-related operations as shown in FIGS. I'm trying to run a production.

Therefore, not only in this example of effect, but also in each example of effect described below and other examples thereof, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is limited to the contents shown in FIGS. 166(b) and (c). do not have. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect middle). With such a configuration, at least one of the operating means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) remains unclear which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect. It is possible to suggest that the operation for one is made rendition-acceptable. For example, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and sword decoration may not necessarily be displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, in order to more reliably conceal which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, it is necessary to consider the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect for the sword decoration 5001. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution (start of performance) of a specific operation-related performance to the occurrence of the performance reception period in the case where the reception period occurs.

In addition, as an operation instruction displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, it is unclear which of the operation means should be operated, but a display prompting the operation of one of the operation means ("operate ”, etc.), or always operate a specific operation means out of a plurality of operation means, regardless of how each of the plurality of operation means is enabled to receive the effect. may be displayed to prompt the user to In short, as an operation instruction, the same effect mode appears in both the situation in which the operation to the operation button 410 can be accepted for the effect, and the situation in which the operation to the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect. By doing so, it is possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping secret which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect.

166(c) shows an example of effect (first mode of effect), which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to receive the effect while it is kept secret. , even when the operation to the sword decoration 5001 can be received for the effect, and when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed to receive the effect (in any of the first to third situations described later) ), only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is in a luminous state, and the operation of the operation button 410 is encouraged. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be put in a non-luminous state, or light emitting means may be provided on the side of the sword decoration 5001 so that the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are illuminated. Both may be made to emit light.

Here, in this production example (first production mode), the production situation in which the image shown in FIG. Is it in the first situation where the effect can be accepted, or in the second situation where only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can accept the effect, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are set to be in one of the third situations in which the performance can be accepted. Of these multiple situations, if the second situation (situation where the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) occurs, the first situation (the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) The degree of expectation for granting the privilege is set to be higher than when the situation) occurs. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001) within the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is the first situation (operation opportunity to the operation button 410). It is desirable to lower the rate of occurrence of the situation where

In this example of presentation (first presentation mode), the operation button 410 is operated in either the first situation (operation button 410) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). is performed ("FF" progresses in the figure), the second situation (sword decoration 5001) or the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) When an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 (when "GG" in the figure progresses), an effect reception is performed, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation (Fig. 167(d), Fig. 167(f)) is to be carried out.

167(d) and (f), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area, and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (“Chance!!”) is executed. As the predetermined display effect, for example, "chance!!" suggesting a relatively low degree of expectation, and "great heat!!" suggesting a relatively high degree of expectation. By preparing a plurality of presentation modes such as , and displaying one of these presentation modes in response to reception of the presentation, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege. As for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, similarly, for example, by giving an effect mode that does not move to the front of the display area, and making one of these effect modes appear in response to the effect reception. , may indicate the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this example of effect (first effect mode), the effect is accepted by the player's operation in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 167(d) and (f). Then, based on the operation, the operation means can be controlled to be in an operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation).

More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167(d), even though the player has operated the operation button 410, the operation is not performed in response to the effect reception. Control for reciprocating the sword ornament 5001 on the side not being performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although there is a situation in which an effect reception is generated as a result of the operation of the operation button 410 by the player and the effect at the time of operation of the operation button 410 is executed, the "operation Even if the button 410 was not operated and the sword ornament 5001 with a higher degree of expectation was operated, an effect acceptance occurred and the sword decoration 5001 side operation effect was executed. ” can be appealed to the player.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167(f), as a result of the player performing an operation to draw the sword decoration 5001, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the sheathed position in response to the reception of the effect. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword at the unsheathed position (sword unsheathed state) instead of returning to the sheathed state. As a result, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sword sheathed position (sword sheathed state) to the sword drawn position (sword drawn state) based on the player's operation, and is maintained in such a sword drawn state. Occasionally, an effect will be performed at the time of operation. Therefore, even if the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed in the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side and the effect at the time of operation on the sword decoration 5001 side, the sword decoration at that time By confirming the operation state of 5001, it is possible to make the player feel that the effect at the time of operation caused by the operation on the side of the sword ornament 5001 is being executed.

Then, after the effect at the time of operation (FIGS. 167(d) and (f)) is performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 167(e), the ready-to-win state is formed and the ready-to-win effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword decoration 5001 is executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, either the effect when the operation button 410 is operated or the effect when the sword decoration 5001 is operated is selected. Even if it is executed, when a predetermined time has passed (before the ready-to-win effect is started), the sword decorative body 5001 is put into a non-operating state (sword sheathed position (sword sheathed state)). Control will be performed to return to However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 must be at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating motion or maintenance with the blade drawn) for a period of . As for the sword decoration 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

According to the production example (first production mode) shown in FIGS. 5001) is allowed to accept the effect or not, the common (specified) operation-related effect is started, and the common (specific) effect started While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is allowed to receive the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is not allowed to receive the effect. Since the operation button 410 will be able to accept the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) will be able to receive the effect. An operation opportunity can be given in a state in which whether or not the user is in a state of confidentiality.

In this production example (first production mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is allowed to receive the production, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is the production Regardless of whether the operation button 410 is not allowed to accept the effect and the operation button 410 is allowed to receive the effect, when an operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and Combined with the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration 5001 is designed to emit light, even if the sword decoration 5001 is capable of receiving an effect, the sword decoration 5001 is capable of receiving an effect. You will be able to deceive yourself as if it weren't there. In other words, in this case, it is possible to prompt the user to operate the operation button 410 on the lower side instead of the sword decoration body 5001, which is on the side of the side where the effect with relatively high expectations is performed, when the effect is accepted. When a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed, it will be expected to provide interest in determining which operation means should be operated.

It should be noted that, while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to receive the effect (the side that has not generated the effect reception period) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the effect acceptance period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

However, if the operation means on the side that is not allowed to receive the effect (the side that does not have the effect reception period) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the above operation time Although the acceptance of effects required for execution of effects (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effects, etc.) is not established, the detection of the operation itself is performed, and the operation on the side that can receive the effect based on the detection. A control may be performed to end the effect reception period for the means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that the operation opportunity will be lost. Therefore, it is possible to encourage the user to carefully consider which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect and operate it carefully. become able to.

In addition, in the above-described production example (first production mode), the same production (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display production, etc.) is provided for the operation button 410 side operation production and the sword decoration 5001 side operation production. Although it is executed, these presentations at the time of operation may have different content of presentations. For example, in the effect at the time of operation on the sword decoration 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed in the effect at the time of operation on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting part different from the effect display device 1600 emits light) , the generation of a unique effect sound, etc.), it is possible to more appropriately improve the amusement of the game when the operation to the sword ornament 5001 is received.

Also, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set. Effect acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration 5001, the operation button 410) is set. In either case, it may be possible to perform an effect at the time of operation when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 166(c). That is, in this case, when the first operation means is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and the effect acceptance period related to the occurrence of the different effect mode is set, When a different effect mode is executed as an effect at the time of operation, while a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the above-mentioned different effect mode is not set (second When there is an operation for the first operating means (when the effect acceptance period for the second operating means is set), another effect mode is not executed as the effect at the time of operation, but when the operation button 410 is operated. The same production at the time of operation will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the generation of the effect at the time of operation on the side of the second operation means is set to the second effect reception period. It is to be set for both the operation means and the first operation means. It should be noted that when another effect mode is to appear as the effect at the time of operation, the effect mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the effect at the time of operation on the side of the second operating means. The performance at the time of operation may be performed as a performance content different from the performance at the time of operation on the means side.

In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), the situation in which an instruction display prompting an operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed means that the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 Among them, the first situation in which only the operation to the operation button 410 can receive the effect, the second situation in which only the operation to the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, and the operation to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 It is set to correspond to any of the third situations in which both the operation for and the operation for the effect can be accepted. In this case, in the first situation and the second situation, when the reception of the production is made, the same operation-time effect appears. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode described above (also different from the effect at the time of operation of the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the production example described above, the third situation does not necessarily have to be present.

Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described presentation example is not provided as an operation means to which a driving force is applied under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means. 167(f) of the above-described effect examples (first effect mode), the player does not perform an operation, similar to the effect situation shown in FIG. 167(d). Alternatively, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, the control for operating the operating means on the side not operated by the player is performed at an earlier stage than before the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the action state and allow the player's gaze to naturally return to the game board 5 side.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different. may be the same drive source. Needless to say, the driving sources provided corresponding to these operating means are provided as driving sources different from the driving sources for the specific decorative members SDY (blind blinds). Further, examples of "movement" in the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) caused by such a drive source include modes such as "movement", "rotation", "oscillation", and "vibration". This is not limited to this example of effect, and the same applies to other examples of effect.

[Second effect mode]
168 to 171, specific operation-related effects are executed as effects showing the progress of effects until either the first effect result or the second effect result appears. When the first effect result appears as a result of (1), it is suggested that the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means occurs, and when the second effect result appears as a result of the effect, the plurality of operation means It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation (2nd production|presentation mode) suggesting that the production|presentation acceptance period with respect to the sword decoration body 5001 generate|occur|produces among them.

In FIG. 168(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 168(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 168(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168(b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword ornament 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. are simultaneously displayed within, and how the lightning image IZ acts on these images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, by simultaneously displaying a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, button image BTG and sword-decorated image SYG) respectively corresponding to different kinds of operation means within the display area, the operation button 410 and the sword can be displayed simultaneously. While it remains unclear which of the ornament 5001 and the decoration 5001 can receive the effect, it suggests that the operation of any of the operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect. be able to

In FIG. 168(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168(b) progresses, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 are displayed as an effect display. An effect is performed in which players push each other within the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area.

That is, the specific operation-related effects (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) related to this example of effect (second effect mode) are such that "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG push each other, and the images Which of BTG or SYG will be left in the display area?" When the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and an effect result (second effect result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration body 5001 occurs. Therefore, in this production example (second production mode), the production shown in FIGS. Even if is generated, it corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods".

168(c), the left figure depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains in the display area, but the right figure shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts the prevailing situation for remaining in the area. In a specific operation-related presentation, such inferior/superior status changes moment by moment according to the passage of time.

FIG. 169(d) shows how the effect shown in FIG. 168(c) is performed, and as a result, the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area. (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) is executed to suggest that an operation opportunity will soon be granted while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. As a result, the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed in the display area, and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (Fig. 169(d)). is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means can receive the effect (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs).

Also, at this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "press", bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. It is possible to recognize that the operation for the operation button 410 of the operation means is in a state where the effect can be accepted (during the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this presentation example, only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is made to emit light, thereby encouraging the operation of the operation button 410 .

In addition, the production shown in FIG. 169(d) is a case where the production progresses through a specific operation-related production (FIGS. 168(b), (c), etc.), and also without going through the specific operation-related production. Rendering progress (for example, rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 168(a)) may occur. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, if the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect It is desirable that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is made higher than that.

Also, regarding the length of the effect acceptance period, when the effect (FIG. 169(d)) in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed through a specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect The rate at which the length of the effect acceptance period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than when the effect (FIG. 169(d)) is performed in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 without going through should be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the later-described delay in the effect when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

FIG. 169(e) shows that, while the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is being performed, as a result of operating the operation button 410 among the plurality of operating means, the effect is received and the operation is accepted. This is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is performed.

The effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 169(e) is the same as that shown in FIG. 167(d). 169(e), the specific decorative member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect ("Chance!!") is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. Also, at this time, even though the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is moved to the first position and the second position in response to the reception of the effect. It is also the same in that it is possible to execute control for reciprocating motion between the positions (control for setting the operating state). As the predetermined display effect, for example, "chance!!" suggesting a relatively low degree of expectation, and "great heat!!" suggesting a relatively high degree of expectation. By preparing a plurality of presentation modes such as , and displaying one of these presentation modes in response to reception of the presentation, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege. As for the operation of the specific decorative member SDY, similarly, for example, an effect mode is provided in which the action of displacing to the front side of the display area is not performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear in response to the reception of the effect. , it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

Then, after such an effect at the time of operation (Fig. 169(e)) is performed, as shown in Fig. 169(f), a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-win effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that an effect using the sword decorative body 5001 is executed during the execution period of the ready-to-win effect, when a predetermined time has passed since the effect at the time of operation is executed (the ready-to-win effect is started In the stage before), control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 to the non-operating state (sword sheathed state). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the sword decoration 5001 must be at least half the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operating state (reciprocating motion or maintenance with the blade drawn) for a period of . As for the sword decoration 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 170(g), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. An effect depicting the state of being left is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur, and only the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) is executed to suggest that an operation opportunity will soon be granted while concealing which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed in the display area (Fig. 170(g)). is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means can receive the effect (the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs). .

At this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as "Draw your sword" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation for the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operating means is in a state in which the effect can be accepted (during the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit having the sword decoration 5001 (the sword decoration 5001 itself may be made to emit light) out of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is made to emit light. By doing so, the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is also prompted.

Note that the production shown in FIG. 170(g) is a case where the production is progressed through a specific operation-related production (FIGS. 168(b), (c), etc.), or without going through the specific operation-related production. Rendering progress (for example, rendering progress from the rendering state shown in FIG. 168(a)) may occur. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed, when the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, when the effect is performed without a specific operation-related effect It is desirable that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is made higher than that. Furthermore, when the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) is performed through the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. 170(g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

FIG. 170(h) shows that, while the effect shown in FIG. It is a depiction of how the production at the time of operation is performed.

170(h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 169(e). At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, a production mode such as "Super heat!", which suggests a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the reception of the production, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. "Chance!!" may be displayed. As for the action of the specific decorative member SDY, similarly, for example, an effect mode is provided in which no action of displacing the display area to the front side is performed, and one of these effect modes is made to appear in response to the reception of the effect. By doing so, it is also possible to suggest the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege. The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

However, in the effect at the time of operation shown in FIG. 170(h), based on the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the effect mode of the sword decoration 5001 itself changes to one of the multiple modes described above ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 161 to any of the stage 1 to stage 3 forms. Height is suggested.

Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170(i), even if the effect at the time of operation (FIG. 170(h)) ends and the specific decorative member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword ornament 5001 is not returned to the sheathed state, but is maintained in the drawn state. That is, in this production example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state, and thereafter (for example, during the reach production period), the sword decoration 5001 is put into the sheathed state. An operation opportunity to operate is further provided, and at that time, it is possible to further execute a performance at the time of operation according to the operation to the sword sheathed state.

According to such a configuration, one operation means (sword ornament 5001) is provided with two stages of operation opportunities, and the first stage operation (operation to draw the sword) and the second stage operation. (operation to the sword sheathed state) and each operation at the time of operation will be performed according to each operation. (operation to draw the sword) until the second stage operation (operation to sheath the sword) is performed, it is expected that the game interest in the operation is preferably maintained. Become so. It is desirable that the first stage operation and the second stage operation are different operation modes (in this case, operations in directions opposite to each other). Further, it is desirable that the presentation at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the first step and the presentation at the time of operation corresponding to the operation of the second step have different presentation contents.

In addition, when an operation effect (FIG. 170(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first step is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the drawn state, and is not maintained in the drawn state. In this case, it is desirable not to give the opportunity to operate the second stage. In the operation presentation corresponding to the first stage operation, whether the sword decoration 5001 is maintained at a position (sword drawn state) that allows the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sword drawn state to the sword sheathed state) to be given. It may be executed as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of whether or not. That is, when the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the sheathed state without being maintained in the sheathed state, it is practically impossible to provide the second stage operation opportunity (operation opportunity from the sheathed state to the sheathed state). It is clear that The degree of expectation may be "100%" or "0%".

As a result of the operation effect (FIG. 170(h)) corresponding to the operation of the first step, if the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the unsheathed state, after a predetermined period of time has passed (reach effect is started), control is performed to return the sword ornament 5001 to the non-driving state (sword sheathed state). However, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 remains in its operating state (reciprocating motion) for at least half of the period from when the specific decorative member SDY moves toward the display area to when it returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the movement, or maintenance in the state of drawing the sword). As for the sword decoration 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state at an earlier stage than before the specific decoration member SDY returns to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. It is more desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

On the other hand, in FIG. 171(j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168(c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area, as in the case shown in FIG. 169(d). Then, an effect depicting a state in which the button image BTG is left within the display area is performed. That is, in this production example (second production mode), when a predetermined time elapses after the production shown in FIG. 168(c) is performed, the production shown in FIG. , or the effect shown in FIG. 171(j). It should be noted that which effect content appears is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination process according to the result of the big hit determination.

However, in the production shown in FIG. 171(j), unlike the production shown in FIG. (Here, the lightning image IZ) is continued, suggesting the possibility that such a lightning image IZ will cause some change to the button image BTG.

In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(j), there is no instruction display prompting an operation (character display such as "press" or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period). ) is different from the production shown in . As a result, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains within the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. Something becomes recognizable.

FIG. 171(k) shows that as a result of the development of the rendering shown in FIG. 171(j), the lightning image IZ acts on the button image BTG, and the button image BTG is enveloped in a haze MY, and even its outline is lost. A production that will be broken is being performed.

That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(k), all the effect elements (button images BTG) suggesting that the operation of the operation button 410 can receive the effect are removed. Therefore, although the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) once suggests that the operation of the operation button 410 can accept the effect, the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) appears. By doing so, it is possible to make the player doubt whether the effect receiving period for the operation button 410 will actually occur.

Note that, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) as well, the effect display (here, the lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the state of the lightning image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is clearly shown which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period will occur is getting shorter. It suggests that

In FIG. 171(i), as a result of the development of the rendering shown in FIG. 171(k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) instead of the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A performance depicting the situation is being performed.

According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not yet displayed, the shape of the haze MY suggests the possibility that an effect acceptance period will occur for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410. be able to

Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 171(i), the effect display (here, lightning image IZ) performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the state of the lightning image IZ is further changed (immediately before it disappears) than in FIG. This suggests that the remaining time for

Then, in this production example (second production mode), when the production shown in FIG. An effect shown in (g) is performed.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)), the effect display device 1600 does not display the sword decoration image SYG and displays the button image BTG. 169(d), 171(j)), there is still a possibility that the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur, so that the interest in the game can be maintained. will be able to

In particular, in this production example (second production mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the production display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed (Fig. 169(d), Fig. 171(j)). 168(b), (c)), the effect for the sword ornament 5001 is confirmed by checking whether the effect display by the lightning image IZ that appeared in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168(b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to grasp whether there is still a possibility that the reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the interest in the game.

In this example of effect (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by Haze MY (FIG. When the effect progresses, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 170(g) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and causes the button image BTG to be displayed. It can also be said that this is an effect suggesting that the effect accepting period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 171(k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY is set so that it does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG ), and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG may be displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 169(d) may be performed. In the case where such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 171(j) and (k) are also made confidential as to which one of the plurality of operation means can receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

In addition, after providing the operation button 410 as an operable operation means, even in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 3, it may be possible to execute control for operating the operation button 410 on the side not operated by the player. In such control, it is important to operate at least the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the driving source for applying the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source for applying the driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different. may be the same drive source. Needless to say, the drive sources provided corresponding to these operating means are provided as drive sources different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain). Further, examples of "movement" in the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) caused by such a drive source include modes such as "movement", "rotation", "oscillation", and "vibration". This is not limited to this example of effect, and the same applies to other examples of effect.

[Third effect mode]
FIGS. 172 to 175 are diagrams showing examples of effects (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode, although they are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to specific operation-related effects. is.

In FIG. 172(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 172(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 172(a). However, as shown in FIG. 172(b), in the specific operation-related effect related to this example of effect (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. indicates that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be able to receive the effect.

Particularly, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are adopted as such predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated respectively. This makes it easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to soon be able to accept the effect from the time when the effect display related to the operation is not yet performed on the effect display device 1600 side. Make it recognizable. Here, control is performed to move the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 from the initial position to the operation position. Each of them is operated at a slow speed.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation means still has time left until the effect reception period occurs, or the operation means does not generate the effect reception period until the pattern change ends. Regardless, these operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) will operate respectively. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left until the production reception period occurs, or the situation where the production reception period does not occur until the pattern change ends, the game interest for those operations is increased. It can be maintained well.

Then, in this example of effect (third effect mode), a specific operation-related effect is produced not by the effect display on the effect display device 1600, but by each action (FIG. 172(b)) of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. After the start, basically the same production progress as in the second production mode is performed.

For example, first, among the effects shown in FIG. 172(c), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is displayed as if the button image BTG corresponds to the "movable operation button 410". , the content of the presentation is as described with reference to FIG.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172(c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It has become. The effect shown in FIG. 172(c) suggests that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect even with such a movable effect.

Further, in the effect shown in FIG. 172(c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are positioned at positions different from their initial positions (positions when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. , and is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from the operating position when an operation opportunity is given.

That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is delayed compared to the case where the operation-related effect is not performed and the operation opportunity is given immediately. When the operation means is adopted, even if such an operation-related performance is finally finished, it is necessary to operate the operation means on the side where the performance can be received at least to the operation position. Therefore, the performance related to the operation is further delayed by the time required for such actions, and there is a concern that such delays may reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are set to both the initial position (the position when not driven) and the operation position during the period in which the specific operation-related production is performed. It is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when a specific operation-related performance ends and a performance reception period occurs, the operating means on the side where the performance reception period has occurred is moved to the operation position in a shorter time, or the performance reception period does not occur. The operation means on the other side can be operated to the initial position in a shorter time, and the deterioration of the game interest due to the delay of the performance related to the operation can be suppressed. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operation means on the side to be operated is positioned in a position different from the operation position as an operating state, so that the production reception period is set even though it is in the operation state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this itself has not yet occurred.

Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 172(c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 410”, the effect is the same as described with reference to FIG. 168(c). However, even in the effect shown in FIG. 172(d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. , and is positioned as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied).

172(b) and (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driving position). While being simulated and displayed, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, by intentionally making the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 different from the mode of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001, they will be aligned in the near future. It becomes possible to suggest that the intended effect (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is changed, or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are operated) will occur.

When the effect shown in FIG. 172(d) is performed and the effect shown in FIG. 173(e) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is such that the button image BTG is at the operation position. Except for the fact that it is displayed as corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. 169(d).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It is in a state of operation at a position different from the (non-driving position) and the operating position. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 has moved toward the operation position from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving), the delay of the operation-related presentation is preferably suppressed. Become so.

As for the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), "display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (preferably displayed in a state in which it is moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed" is first performed. After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display prompting the operation by generating an effect reception period for the operation button 410 (character display such as “press”, effect A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a "mode moved to the operation position", whereas the operation button image BTG at the time of display is displayed. The state 410 is different from the "state of moving to the operation position". In this way, by intentionally displaying the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of a specific operation-related effect in a mode different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the discrepancies between the modes will soon be filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 173(e), when the effect shown in FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173(f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169(e), the operation button 410 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position). Also, the sword ornament 5001 is in a state of being operated at a position different from the initial position (the position at the time of non-driving) and the operating position.

After such an effect at the time of operation (FIG. 173(f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. is as described with reference to FIG. 169(f).

On the other hand, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 172(d), when the performance shown in FIG. 170(g), except that the instruction content is "push" and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the "mode moved to the operation position". It has content.

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174(h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. It is in an activated state, and the sword ornament 5001 is in an activated state at the operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (the position when not driven) toward the operation position, it is preferable to suppress the delay of the operation-related presentation. It will be done.

Note that, as the effect shown in FIG. 174(h), "the display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (it is desirable to be displayed in a manner that it is moved to the operation position)". After performing the display effect, move the sword decoration 5001 to the operation position, and generate an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 to prompt the operation. display, or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect receiving period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a "mode moved to the operation position", whereas the sword decoration image SYG at the time of display is displayed. The decoration image SYG is in a mode different from the "mode moved to the operation position". In this way, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of executing a specific operation-related effect is displayed in a manner different from the manner of the sword decoration 5001 at that time. It becomes possible to pre-suggest that it will soon be buried (here, the sword ornament 5001 moves to the operating position).

Then, as a result of the performance shown in FIG. 174(h), when the performance shown in FIG. 174(i) is performed, the performance display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174(i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. and the sword ornament 5001 is returned from the operating position to the initial position (non-driving position).

After such an effect at the time of operation (Fig. 174(i)) is performed, as shown in Fig. 174(j), a ready-to-win state is formed and a ready-to-win effect can be performed. is as described with reference to FIG. 169(f).

On the other hand, as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172(d) being performed, the effect shown in FIG. Except for the display corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time, the contents of the presentation are as described with reference to FIG. 171(j).

However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175(k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171(j) and the effect shown in FIG. The operating position is different from the non-driving position) and the operating position. Even with such an operating situation, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 will occur. be able to

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 175(k), when the effect shown in FIG. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. Both are operating in different positions.

Then, as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 175(l), the effect shown in FIG. 175(m) is performed. The contents of the street performance will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175(l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. Both are operating in different positions. In the rendering shown in FIG. 175(m), it is more desirable to make the outer shape of Haze MY closer to the sword decoration 5001 at the operating position than to the sword decoration 5001 at the initial position.

Incidentally, when the effect shown in FIG. 175(m) is further developed, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 174(h) always occurs. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 175(k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and causes the button image BTG to be displayed. It can also be said that this is an effect suggesting that the effect accepting period for the body 5001 will occur.

However, instead of this, when the rendering shown in FIG. ), and when the effect pattern appears, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 173(e) may be performed. In the case where such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 175(k) and (l) are also made confidential as to which one of the plurality of operating means is allowed to receive the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

Further, in the above-described example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated and the effect is accepted during the valid period generated after the execution of the specific operation-related effect, the effect is accepted. 167(d), 169(e), etc.). However, it is sufficient that the sword ornament 5001 on the side not being operated is put into an operating state, and the operating state may be, for example, a mode in which it moves to another location and stays there, or a mode in which it vibrates. It is possible to adopt. Also, in the valid period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect is executed, if the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 of the sword decoration 5001 are operated and the effect is accepted, the effect will be accepted. , it is desirable to put the operation button 410 on the side where the operation is not being performed into an operating state (vibration or the like).

In addition, with regard to the effect that puts such "an operation unit on the side not being operated" into the operating state, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is "expectation level (proportion of the appearance of the jackpot pattern, "0", Appears when executed in a high mode", and the post-operation production according to the operation is "expectation degree (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern, including "0" and "100") It may not appear when executed in "low mode".

In addition, when one of the two operating sections (the operating button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) is operated to perform the post-operation effect, the ``other operating section that is not being operated'' is also activated. Alternatively, when a post-operation effect is performed by an operation on the other side, the "operation unit on the one side that is not being operated" may not be put into an operating state.

In this production example (third production mode), the driving source that applies the driving force to the operation button 410 and the driving source that applies the driving force to the sword ornament 5001 are different driving sources. may be the same drive source.

In each of the production modes described above and their other examples, when a "button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)" appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related production, basically , only the operation button 410 out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity, and when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, the operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when a "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration Of the body 5001, only the sword decoration 5001 is provided with an operation opportunity, and when the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received, the sword role side is operated. In this regard, in the button-side operation effect, a success effect (the specific decorative member SDY is activated) and a failure effect (the specific decorative member SDY is not activated) are selected based on the result of the effect lottery corresponding to the big hit determination. On the other hand, in the production at the time of operation on the side of the sword role, the production at the time of success (activating the specific decorative member SDY) and the production at the time of failure are based on the result of the lottery according to the judgment of the big hit. (the specific decorative member SDY is not activated), and the contents of their effects are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player, out of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 .

It should be noted that the effect at the time of operation on the button side and the effect at the time of operation on the sword role side are the same as each other in terms of the effect of whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates or not, as well as the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600. You may make it the content.

In addition, in each of the examples of effects described above with respect to specific operation-related effects, effects are performed as to which one of the plurality of operation means is given the opportunity to operate, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the result of the effect is performed. Opportunity to operate is given. However, there are cases where a specific operation-related production is performed with the production content that gives an operation opportunity to a specific operation method regardless of which production result appears, such as pushing each other between specific operation methods. You can let it be.

For example, one operation means can be operated in any manner (for example, an operation in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sheathed state is in the sword drawn state, or an operation in which the sword decoration 5001 in the sword drawn state is in the sword sheathed state. (operation)) may be performed, and an operation opportunity may be provided to the operation means in a mode corresponding to the result. In this case, the sword decoration body 5001 is moved to a state different from the sheathed state and the drawn sword state while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, and the operation is performed in either mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to move the sword ornament 5001 to the sheathed state or the sword unsheathed state when the effect result of whether the sword is to be drawn is displayed.

In addition, when the pattern variation in the pending state is digested, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the pattern variation. You may make it perform the production|presentation suggested from (within the execution period of pattern variation). According to such a configuration, although only one of the plurality of operation means is given an operation opportunity, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given and the operation means to which the operation opportunity is not given. It becomes possible to sustain the game interest related to the operation for both of them for a longer period of time. In addition, as such an effect, when the pattern variation for which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a pending state (within the execution period of the pattern variation digested before this), the specific operation-related effect It is desirable to operate each of the plurality of operating means provided.

In the above-described second and third production modes and their other examples, as a specific operation-related production, a plurality of images (button images BTG, Although the sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when a specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect reception period for the operation button 410 or the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 should be generated after that. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the effect reception period occurs for either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, those operations are not allowed until the effect reception period occurs. It becomes possible to keep secret which of the means the performance reception period occurs for. Therefore, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) respectively corresponding to different types of operation means do not necessarily have to be displayed simultaneously, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed simultaneously. None of the images SYG may appear, and an effect image different from any of them may appear as a specific operation-related effect.

However, even in the case of adopting an effect mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while a specific operation-related effect is being executed, the button image is displayed when the specific operation-related effect ends. Either the BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operation means the effect acceptance period will occur. It will happen. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) thus displayed is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. By executing the specific operation-related effect as the effect content related to the specific image (for example, the lightning image IZ, etc.), it is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect reception period occurs for. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive production. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of shooting lightning at one of two rocks, and when lightning strikes one rock, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other rock is struck by lightning. By making the sword-decorated image SYG appear from within the rock when lightning strikes the rock on the side, it is possible to proceed to the rendering shown in FIG. 169(d) and FIG. 170(g). . Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as a effect of shooting lightning at one rock, and when the lightning strikes the rock, either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears from within the rock. 169(d) or 170(g). In short, it is desirable to develop the effect such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

In addition, in the above-described second and third effect modes and their other examples, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs and when the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, a specific It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effect (start of the effect) to the occurrence of the effect reception period. In addition, it is desirable to set the effect receiving period to occur for the same amount of time even when an operation opportunity is given to any operating means after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In addition, a plurality of performance modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and depending on which of these performance modes the performance is performed, a performance reception period during which a specific performance (operation-time performance) can be generated is set. The ratio set for the specific operation means among the plurality of operation means may be different. The percentage may be 100% or 0%.

In addition, in the above-described second and third production modes and their other examples, based on the fact that the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related production has been operated, the operation is not performed. When operating the operating means on the side (e.g., FIG. 169(e)), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a predetermined period of time based on when the operation was performed. can be However, not based on the time when the operation is performed, but depending on the timing of the operation during the effect reception period, from the operation of the operation means on the side that did not perform the operation to the end of the operation. are of different lengths.

That is, when the operation means indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the shorter the remaining time of the effect reception period, the more the operation means indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has conflicted whether to operate the operation means on the side that was not shown in the specific operation-related effect. Therefore, depending on the timing of the operation during the performance reception period (depending on the high possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side that did not operate is operated and then the operation is terminated. length of time up to (Possibility such as ``Even if the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect was operated, the effect reception occurred and the effect at the time of operation was executed.'' (length of time for appealing to the player) is made different, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained.

Further, if none of the plurality of operating means provided for the performance is operated after a specific operation-related performance is performed, the plurality of operating means provided for the performance when the performance reception period ends. may be operated.

Also, during the period from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.), the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected. It is also possible to perform a predetermined effect suggesting a rate at which the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) is displayed. A movable body effect may be performed as a predetermined effect, but in this case, a specific movable body (here , the specific decorative member (SDY), the specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the performance acceptance within the performance reception period after the specific operation-related performance is performed. It is desirable when possible.

In addition, during the period from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of the effect result (the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, etc.), any one of the images that can appear in the effect result is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate the effect acceptance period related to the specific effect (effect such as operating the specific decorative member SDY) is generated. While the related effects are being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410). As a result, it is possible to create a special effect mode as if the effect was completed by showing the result of the effect even though the effect was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect, and the effect was performed. It is possible to suitably maintain the amusement of the game while playing. Note that, while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, if an effect is received for an operation on one side of the operation means (for example, the operation button 410), a predetermined effect is performed based on the received effect. Therefore, it is desirable to indicate the ratio of displaying the highly expected effect image (sword decoration image SYG) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during execution of a specific operation-related effect, the degree of expectation is relatively high among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is desirable to use the lower side operating means (for example, the operating button 410) in order to improve the amusement of the game when the player side grasps that a specific operation-related effect is in the middle. .

In addition, in the midst of performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effects related to a plurality of operation means, if the effect reception period is generated only for the operation buttons 410 of those operation means, the effect reception period When the operation button 410 is operated, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, The degree of expectation for awarding the privilege may be the same regardless of which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) appears as the effect result. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it is possible to lose the effect of the specific operation-related effect during the period from the start of the effect of the specific operation-related effect until the result of the effect is shown. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means with a relatively low degree of expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means with the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to raise such expectations.

In addition, during each effect reception period described above, when an operation is performed by a player, an effect is normally generated based on the operation, but the effect reception period elapses even if such an operation is not performed. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state described later in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed before. According to such an automatic button effect state, every time the effect reception period occurs, the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the user does not operate the button. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set, the effect reception period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of the effect. Even if there is, even if the operation means on the corresponding side is not operated within the effect acceptance period, the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation means is operated will be executed.

However, even if the automatic button effect state described later is set, the effect reception period is limited to the operation buttons 410 of the operation means while the specific operation-related effect is being performed. is generated, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed (the automatic button function is disabled) unless the operation button 410 is operated within the effect accepting period. After that, even if an effect acceptance period occurs for any of the plurality of operation means as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the operation means on the corresponding side is operated during the effect acceptance period. It is desirable to execute the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation means is operated even if the operation is not performed (to enable the automatic button function to function). According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the player is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect depending on whether or not the automatic button function functions. It is expected that the decrease in

In addition, regarding the setting change related to ON/OFF of the automatic button effect state, for example, by operating the operation button 410, it is possible not only during the period when the symbol variation is not executed, but also during the period when the symbol variation is executed. It is desirable that For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the automatic button effect state is off and the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 has not occurred, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect state is ON, an effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period, an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed, and the automatic button effect state is activated. It is possible to change the setting from the ON state to the OFF state. However, since it is conceivable that there may be cases where the player wants to generate an operation-time effect by an operation while maintaining the ON state of the automatic button effect state, for example, the automatic button effect state is set to the ON state. During the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 at the time, not only the operation button 410 but also the operation for the operation means other than the operation button 410 are enabled, and when the other operation means is operated, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable to change the effect being executed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation button 410 is operated.

The operation mode may differ between when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when it is changed from the on state to the off state.

In addition, in the above-described second and third production modes and their other examples, the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is modeled as the production result of a specific operation-related production. While the sword decoration images SYG are displayed, the operation opportunities corresponding to them are given, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (a first display mode and a second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode is displayed among the display modes, an operation opportunity (reception of effect) is given to the operation button 410. period), and when the second display mode is displayed, the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity (drawing acceptance period), the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted as the

For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, the effect image CG (first effect image) shown in FIG. 176(b) instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 170(g) and 174(h). good too. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect part and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started). Both are suddenly replaced with the effect image CG (first display mode) or the effect image TG (second display mode) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 169(d), 170(g), 173(e), and 174(h), partial display modes (button image BTG, sword Unlike the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to giving the operation opportunity is performed using substantially the entire display area (even by hiding other effect images such as the background part that can suggest the degree of expectation). By doing so, it is expected that the game interest in the operation will be improved.

Note that in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 176(a), the first shield holding the operation button 410 (the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410) is incorporated into the design. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. A second character is displayed to suggest which operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) should be operated. In this way, it is not necessary to prepare the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) as effect images imitating the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 themselves. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates aspects such as at least part of the shape and part of the design of these operating means.

Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area, the effect image CG (first display mode) and effect image TG Depending on which one of the (second display mode) is displayed, it may also be performed as an effect suggesting a different degree of expectation. For example, when the performance image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for giving the privilege is higher than when the performance image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), a plurality of effect modes (such as different colors) are prepared, and depending on which of these effect modes is displayed, may indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the degree of expectation is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. can be

Regarding the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as a result of that effect (it is desirable that the effect is relatively high in expectations) When the operation-related effect is not executed (for example, after the precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect, is executed) (it is desirable that the effect is relatively low in expectations). You can let it be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as a result of the effect, the effect is produced only for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means. While the acceptance period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed). When it is displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, the effect acceptance period is also applied to other operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) that does not correspond to the button image BTG. may be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the operation with a different interest from the case where the button image BTG appears in the production situation where the degree of expectation is relatively high, so that the amusement of the game can be improved. Another operating means may be an operating means different from the sword ornament 5001 .

In addition, when the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expected effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is not executed, another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is operated within the effect acceptance period. is received, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, "a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively It is desirable to suggest that the player is in a production situation with a high degree of expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high degree of expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Here, if the button image BTG appears in a situation where a specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, an operation means (an operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect reception period 410) is operated, the effect receiving period for another operation means occurring at the same time is also terminated so that the special operation effect is not executed, and in response to the operation of the operation means (operation button 410) It is desirable that the effect at the time of operation is executed.

On the other hand, when the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expectation situation where no specific operation-related effect is executed, what operation means corresponds to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the period for accepting the effect for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended, and when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is executed. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed. An effect at the time of operation may be executed when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated even though the operation means other than the means is being operated.

When a specific operation-related effect is executed while the above-mentioned automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG will be displayed as a result of the effect. Even if an effect reception period occurs for one operation means, during the effect reception period, the same effect at the time of operation as when the corresponding operation means is operated is executed without operating the operation means on the corresponding side. (so that the automatic button function works). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG and , even in the case where the effect acceptance period is generated for both the operation means and the other operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed even if no operation is performed. It is desirable to execute only the same operation performance as when the button image BTG is operated, and not to execute the special operation performance that can appear only when another operation means not corresponding to the button image BTG is operated.

However, within the effect reception period, before the specific timing at which the operation effect (effect when the button image BTG and the corresponding operation means are operated) will appear by the above-mentioned automatic button function, another When an operation is performed on the operation means and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, a special operation effect is performed in response to the reception of the effect, and it is assumed that a specific timing has arrived. Also, it is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (the effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the effect reception period, but the automatic button effect state is continued in the ON state even after the effect reception period ends. is desirable.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, the button image BTG and the sword-decorated image SYG may be reversed, and then each of the effects described above (operation-time effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing a specific operation-related effect (for example, after a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect is executed) If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without execution of a specific operation-related effect (for example, after execution of a precursor effect described later that is not a specific operation-related effect), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, another operation means (for example, the operation button 410, etc.) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG is also caused to generate an effect reception period. becomes.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described rendering modes and their other examples, the effect result of performing a specific operation-related rendering is a "button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 (first display mode)", or When any of the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration body 5001" is displayed, and the effect reception is performed by the operation means on the displayed side, relative The first operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY operates), which is assumed to be the effect content that suggests that the degree of expectation is high, and the effect content that suggests that the degree of expectation is relatively low. It is possible to make any one of the second operation-time effect (for example, the effect mode in which the specific decorative member SDY does not operate) appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the degree of expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation-time effect having the effect contents suggesting is executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect within the effect reception period that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (the first display mode) is displayed, and when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 is performed. It is desirable to suggest the same expectations when executed based on The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, even when the effect image (button image BTG (first display mode)) with relatively low expectations is displayed as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. However, as long as the first operation-time effect is executed based on the reception of the effect, the effect image (sword decoration Compared to the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is caused in terms of the performance result, so that the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above-described timer effect (Fig. 118), it is possible to set "giving an operation opportunity to the operating means" as the object of the effect (one of the plurality of effect modes to be timer-targeted). In other words, in the timer effect for which the object of effect is "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means", when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is given to the operation means soon. It becomes possible to enjoy the production at the time of operation by this. In this case, in the "opportunity to operate the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect object of the timer effect, when the operation means is operated, the result of the effect is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. It should be made possible for either of the unfavorable performance results to appear. However, when the "opportunity to operate the operation means" is given as the object of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect effect that is advantageous to the player appears is high compared to the case where the timer effect is not targeted. It is more desirable to The percentage may be 100%.

In this regard, when a production pattern appears in which a timer production is executed with the production target of "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)", the production target "gives an operation opportunity to the operation means" A specific operation-related effect using "applying" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the sword decoration image SYG appears and the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 is given. , a specific operation-related effect as to whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears before the sword decoration image SYG appears.

According to such a configuration, since the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is given an opportunity to operate. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game when it is played.

However, at this time, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect object (providing an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) until immediately before. , there is a concern that the player will not be able to understand which performance to pay attention to, and the attention will be distracted, which will conversely reduce the interest in the game.

Therefore, when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect target (providing an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. , until the count display of a specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the "specific operation-related effect" is not executed, and the count value is reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), it is desirable to start the "specific operation-related presentation".

FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining an example of an effect when executing a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect for one effect object (providing an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001). Note that the following timer effect corresponds to the above-described advance notice-side timer effect, and is executed as a result of various processes corresponding thereto.

In FIG. 177(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 177(b) is an effect in which the timer effect is started (here countdown display) with a specific numerical value (here "3") during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 177(a). showing the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 177(b), the "specific operation-related effect" has not yet been executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. there is

That is, in the timer effect according to this example of effect, the count value is set to a predetermined value ( Here, the count "0") is reached so that it is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed as the count value, as shown in FIG. 177(d), the "particular operation-related effect" is started. It should be noted that the count value is not even "0" and is hidden when the "specific operation-related effect" is started.

According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect will be executed as to which of the and is displayed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect object (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), those effects are timed. Since overlapping in series is avoided, each different production can be enjoyed.

However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") while a specific operation-related effect is not yet executed, the timer effect is applied to any effect. There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it was performed as a game, and the interest in the game will decrease. Therefore, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 177(c), after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0") and before a specific operation-related effect is started, An effect suggesting a type of effect (giving an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001) to be produced by the timer effect is performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the effect display device 1600 first displays "sheath sword". This suggests that the timer effect was directed to "providing an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 (opportunity to operate by 'sheathing the sword')".

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 177(d), an effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("sword sheathed image SYG (second display mode))". ”), and the ``specific operation-related effect'' is started in the effect situation where the player recognizes that the operation opportunity is given. become. When the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the count display (count "0") is displayed when the effect display device 1600 displays "sheaths sword". may also be displayed continuously.

Also, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the sword ornament 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, It can be seen that "giving an opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 (opportunity to operate by 'sheathing the sword')" is the subject of the timer presentation. I am trying to suggest.

It should be noted that the predetermined action by the sword decoration 5001 is counted and displayed not only when the timer effect is directed to "give an opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001" but also when other effects are targeted. becomes 0. That is, in this case, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect suggesting the type of effect targeted by the timer effect, but as an effect suggesting that the count display has reached 0. becomes. In this sense, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 is after the count display becomes 0 and before the start of the effect to be performed, and the timer effect is to be performed. The timing is the same as or earlier than the timing at which the effect suggesting the type of effect is started, and during the execution state, the effect suggesting the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also being executed. It can be said that it is important to ensure that

FIG. 177(d) shows an effect situation in which a "specific operation-related effect" is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only is the count value already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to execute the effect suggesting the type of effect targeted by the timer effect and the predetermined action by the sword ornament 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started. The execution state may be continued even after the operation-related presentation of is started.

After the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the effects progress in the order shown in FIGS. 177(e) to (h). ), FIGS. 170(g) to (i), or FIGS. 172(d) and 174(h) to (j), the details are omitted here.

As a timer effect performed in relation to a specific operation-related effect, either the timer effect shown in FIG. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started, which is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. The count value does not reach a predetermined value (here, "0") in accordance with the start timing (strictly speaking, a little earlier than this), and the specific operation-related effect continues even after the effect is started. It has become. In this case, even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the bonus ( The degree of expectation for the jackpot) is the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

According to such a separate timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are developed at the same time. Even if either the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result, their effect value is the same the same). That is, in this case, since it is possible to substantially lose the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously developed, any effect can be produced. You will not be able to understand what you should pay attention to, and you will be able to avoid the occurrence of situations where your attention is distracted. However, in order to improve the amusement of the game, if there is a production pattern in which a specific operation-related production and a timer production are simultaneously produced, the benefits are given more than when the production pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears. It is desirable to raise such expectations.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 177(c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is "0"), the effect display device 1600 first displays a display suggesting the type of effect object ( "sheaths sword") is performed, but the display suggesting such an effect target may also be performed when another effect mode is set as the effect target as the timer effect. However, when a specific performance among a plurality of performances that can be targeted by the timer is targeted by the timer, the display suggesting which performance is targeted for the timer performance may not be displayed.

Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, prior to giving an operation opportunity to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, an operation opportunity is given to any of these operation means. We decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether it is granted. However, prior to granting the operation opportunity to the operation button 410 (prior to the occurrence of the rendering reception period), the first omen performance that does not appear when the sword ornament 5001 is granted the operation opportunity , prior to giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 (prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period), it does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 An effect pattern such as performing a second omen effect may appear. When performing these sign effects (first sign effect, second sign effect), the time required for the effect (prediction effect) is set shorter than when a specific operation-related effect is performed, and the It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege when the effect appears, in order to increase the interest in the game when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

Here, as an indication effect, for example, fog appears before an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears. A specific image is displayed, such as one that expresses a state of being overwhelmed. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position (a position behind the specific image on the layer) that is difficult to see due to overlapping with the specific image. After that, by gradually hiding the specific image (increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.), the button image BTG gradually becomes It is possible to execute it as a production etc. to be exposed to. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode for such an omen effect will be described later.

At this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations for awarding a privilege (big hit), It is possible to make it interesting as to which display mode the button image BTG will appear while the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually revealed is developed.

A first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 is not given an operation opportunity, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration is given. The second omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001. It is important that each of them is executed as different presentation contents. Moreover, it is desirable that not only the content of the presentation but also the time required for the presentation be different.

In the sense that such a premonitory effect is "performed as an effect related to the provision of an operation opportunity when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means", the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" is used. It can be said that it is a high-level concept that includes As for the indication effect including the "specific operation-related effect", a plurality of effect modes are prepared as described below with reference to FIG. Suggesting how long the performance acceptance period generated corresponding to the sign performance is, depending on whether the game is played, improves the interest in the game when the sign performance is performed. It is more desirable in terms of trying to

FIG. 178 is a time chart for explaining an example of effect contents for each type of effect when a plurality of types (predictive effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the predictive effect.

First, in the example (predictive effect A) shown in FIG. 178(a), the predictive effect A is started when the first predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This portent effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given the operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect receiving period (effective period) T1 occurs for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the effect. That is, in the example (predictive effect A) shown in FIG. An effect accepting period (effective period) T1 is generated.

During the effect reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A. ) is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by operating the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-described effect at the time of operation (for example, FIG. 167 (d), (f), or , FIG. 169(e), FIG. 170(h), FIG. 173(f), FIG. 174(i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T1 at that time is executed. It is supposed to be done.

On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect B1) shown in FIG. An indication effect B1 is to be started. This premonition effect B1 is not a "specific operation-related effect", but something that is executed prior to when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (a specific operation is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, a effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is supposed to occur.

During the effect reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1. be done. Then, when an effect reception is performed by operating a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation-time effect different from the above-described operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 at that point is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the precursor production B1 is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having a time length (here, a short time length) different from T1. Thus, it is suggested how long the performance receiving period generated corresponding to the portent performance is, depending on in which mode (the portent performance A, the portent performance B1) the portent performance is performed. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game when the omen performance is performed.

On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect B2) shown in FIG. 178(c), the predictive effect B2 is started when the second predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. Like the portent effect B1, this portent effect B2 is also executed prior to when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) instead of the "specific operation-related effect". (things that are not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the portent effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (with respect to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) having a different time length from the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the portent effect B1 Production reception period) T3 is generated.

It should be noted that even during this effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display (character display such as "Press" or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) prompting the operation of the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 is displayed. display) is displayed. Further, when a performance reception is performed by operating a specific operation means within the performance reception period (effective period) T3, based on the performance reception, the performance at the time of operation is different from the case where the portent performances A and B1 are executed. is executed, and a process for ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

In this regard, in this production example, the production reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the portent production B2 is the production reception period corresponding to the portent production A, as shown in FIGS. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same length of time as T1. That is, in this case, even though the premonitory effect B2 with relatively low expectations for granting a privilege (jackpot) is executed, the time is the same as when a specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectations is executed. Since it is suggested that a lengthy effect reception period (effective period) T3 occurs, an effect situation is created as if a specific operation-related effect was performed, and the precursor effect B2 is performed. It becomes possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game when it is played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is different between when the performance reception period (valid period) T2 occurs and when the performance reception period (valid period) T3 occurs.

It should be noted that the portent effects B1 and B2 are set so that the same effect mode appears from the start of the effect until a timing in the middle of the effect, and a different effect mode appears after the timing has passed. The operating means may be provided with an effect as to which of the effect reception period (effective period) T2 and the effect reception period (effective period) T3 is to be generated. However, it is not always necessary to have such effects, and the timing of the start of the indication effects B1 and B2 may be set to start when different times have passed since the pattern fluctuation started. Alternatively, the portent effects B1 and B2 may have different lengths of time.

On the other hand, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. 178(d), the predictive effect C is started when the third predetermined time elapses after the symbol variation is started. This portent effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. When C is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T4 occurs for the specific operation means indicated as the result of the effect. That is, in the example (predictive effect C) shown in FIG. A performance receiving period (effective period) T4 is generated.

Even during the effect reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display (character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect C. ) is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by operating the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, the above-described effect at the time of operation (for example, FIG. 167 (d), (f), or , FIG. 169(e), FIG. 170(h), FIG. 173(f), FIG. 174(i), etc.) are executed, and the process of ending the period T4 at that time is executed. It is supposed to be done.

In this respect, in this production example, the production acceptance period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the precursor production C is the production reception period corresponding to the precursor production A, as shown in FIGS. 178(a) and (d). (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same length of time as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the precursory effect C itself is shorter than the precursory effect A, as long as the precursory effect is executed as the aforementioned "specific operation-related effect". Since it is suggested that a performance receiving period (effective period) T4 having the same length of time as the portent performance A occurs, the game interest when the portent performance C is performed is favorably maintained. be able to

In the production example shown in FIG. 178, by associating the length of the production acceptance period (effective period) with the types of the precursor productions A, B1, B2, and C in a one-to-one relationship, the production reception period It was made to suggest the length of (effective period). However, by setting the rate of occurrence of a specific effect reception period (for example, effect reception period T2) having a predetermined length for each type of omen effect, the effect reception period (effective period ) may be suggested.

In addition, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, a When the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs, a effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to imitate the same state as the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173(e), the operation button 410 is in the operating position and the button image BTG is also displayed in the operating position. In the example shown in (h), the sword ornament 5001 is in the operating position (sword unsheathed state), and the sword decoration image SYG is accordingly displayed in the operating position (sword unsheathed state). It is

However, a specific operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to which an operation opportunity is given after a specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) that imitates the appearance of the specific operation means. If this happens, even though a specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectations is being performed, when displaying the result of the effect, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed, and the interest in the game will decrease. Concerned.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180, a effect image (for example, button image BTG), the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily represented as it is, and it is desirable to display it as a state different from the specific operating means at that time.

FIG. 179 is a diagram showing examples of performance contents when a precursor performance that is not a specific operation-related performance is performed and performance contents when a precursor performance as a specific operation-related performance is performed.

First, FIGS. 179(a) to 179(c) show the effect contents when a premonitory effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Suppose you are in a situation Then, in the production situation, as shown in FIG. 179(a), only the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 correspond to the sword decoration 5001 instead of the "specific operation-related production". Assuming that the omen effect is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 will be given soon. In addition, in the portent effect (similar to the portent effect in other examples), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity will be given soon is performed, the effect image imitating the operation means does not necessarily have to be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the opportunity to operate the sword decoration 5001 will soon be given from the time when the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed during the effect acceptance period is not yet displayed. It will be said.

It should be noted that in the portent effect shown in FIG. 179(a), a sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation and a sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation. are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect content as to which of them is finally left in the display area appears. Therefore, in this production situation, although it is possible to recognize that the opportunity to operate the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given, the sword decoration image SYG is either the sword decoration image SYGa with a low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGa with a high expectation. Which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed is kept secret.

FIG. 179(b) shows the rendering result in which the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura is finally left. It is suggested that there will be a production reception period for. In the display shown in FIG. 179(b), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura will not change to another effect image (such as the sword decoration image SYGa). .

FIG. 179(c) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production acceptance period) are displayed. Further, when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state. I am trying to change the state to the state. It should be noted that when an effect is accepted within the effect acceptance period, a predetermined effect at the time of operation is performed based on the effect acceptance, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the sheathed state. maintained. Further, a process for ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, in the case where an indication effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, , sword decoration 5001) is displayed in the same state (sword drawn state) as the operating means (here, sword decoration 5001) on the operation target side at that time. Become so. In particular, during the effect reception period according to this example of effect, a effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side and the operation means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration body 5001) are stopped at predetermined positions.

On the other hand, FIGS. 179(d) to (g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Suppose you are in a situation 179(d), a premonition effect as a ``specific operation-related effect'' is started in this effect state. It becomes recognizable that an opportunity to operate will soon be given to someone.

FIG. 179(e) shows an effect situation in which the premonitory effect as the "particular operation-related effect" progresses and the result of the effect appears. In this production situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the "specific operation-related production" to suggest that the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It is In the display shown in FIG. 179(e), a final effect is displayed that suggests that the sword decoration image SYG will not change to another effect image (button image BTG, etc.).

FIG. 179(f) shows an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs. ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production acceptance period) are displayed. Further, when the effect accepting period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword drawn state.

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 179(f) and (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the unsheathed state (sword decoration image SYG is stopped), while the sword ornament 5001 continues to slowly move upward until the end of the rendering reception period. I'm trying to

In addition, during the effect acceptance period, regardless of the position of the sword ornament 5001, the effect is accepted when an operation is performed on the operation target accessory 141 to bring the sword into a sheathed state, and the effect is accepted. Based on the reception, a predetermined effect at the time of operation is performed, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. In addition, a process for ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when the effect acceptance period occurs after the specific operation-related effect has passed, one side of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to operate and is used for the effect. In contrast, the other side does not operate and can be made to play the role of accurately communicating the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 179(f) and 179(g), the sword decoration image SYG is set to a stopped state and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the effect acceptance period. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated, and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a stopped state.

Thus, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 179, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the effect reception period (FIG. 179(c)) that occurs without a specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stopped state, during the effect receiving period (FIG. 179(f)) that occurs through a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. , and on the other side, this is continued as a dynamic state so that it can be used for production. Therefore, when the performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the range of the performance can be widened, and the game interest can be preferably maintained.

In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not an operating means to which a driving force is imparted under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs through a specific operation-related effect, the operation While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 is set to be in a dynamic state and continues to be depicted, a specific operation-related presentation is performed. It is expected that the width of the effect when the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs will be greatly improved.

Either the sword decoration image SYGa with a blue aura with a relatively low degree of expectation or the sword decoration image SYGb with a red aura with a relatively high degree of expectation is displayed as the sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a precursor effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, in addition to the effect of whether the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 or the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 appears, When an effect image (for example, a button image BTG) appears, whether the effect image (button image BTG) is displayed in a display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation or in a display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation. It becomes possible to further provide the performance of. This method may be appropriately employed in the above-described respective rendering modes and their other examples in addition to the rendering example of FIG. 179 .

Then, in the case of giving such two effects to a specific operation-related effect, first, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is selected as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. It is in a state where it is possible to recognize whether it appears or not, and it is unclear whether the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined in white and only the outline is displayed). recognizable display state, etc.) will appear according to the development of the production. Then, after that, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly expected (for example, a white effect image that imitates the operation means can be recognized). It is desirable that the state is canceled and the color can be confirmed, etc.) are made to appear sequentially by further production progress. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed after such development progresses, under predetermined conditions, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode is highly expected (for example, the operating means is operated). After that, the button image BTG is hidden, and the appearance of the sword decoration image SYG as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect can be recognized. In addition, it is unclear whether the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG is highly expected (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in white so that only the outline can be recognized). It is also possible to generate an effect pattern that further progresses the effect. It should be noted that after this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that has appeared as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is highly anticipated (for example, a white-out state of the sword decoration image SYG to make it possible to check the color, etc.). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode of the high expectation side (for example, red), it is more likely than the display mode of the low expectation side (for example, blue). Also, it is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of such further performance progress.

FIGS. 180(a)-(e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 179(d)-(g) as the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 180(a), an indication effect as a “specific operation-related effect” is started. A first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) holding a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration 5001. are depicted facing each other, suggesting which of the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will be given an opportunity to operate depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I'm trying

FIG. 180(b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as "specific operation-related effect" appears. In this production situation, the first character (the production image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed, and the second character (the sword decoration) is not displayed in order to suggest that the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001) is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 180(b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. While an operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect part (characters confronting each other) and the other background image (the part that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect started) The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 180(b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

Figures 180 (c) to (e) show examples of effects when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. , an instruction display (character display such as "push in" and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) is displayed to prompt the operation of the sword ornament 5001. FIG.

Here, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 180(c), when the production acceptance period occurs, the sword ornament 5001 starts moving from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state. As shown in FIG. 180(d), the sword ornament 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword sheathed state to the sword drawn state after a relatively short period of time has passed since the effect receiving period started. It is designed to Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180(e), unless the player operates, the sword ornament 5001 is maintained in the unsheathed state at least until the effect receiving period ends. It will wait for the operation (operation from the sword drawn state to the sword sheathed state) by.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. lowering motion), the second character swings down the sword decoration image SYG. It is designed to work. The sword decoration image SYG according to this production example loops a series of displays from the start of the swinging action (FIG. 180(c)) to the end (FIG. 180(e)) within the production reception period. Processing is repeated.

However, even if this loop processing is performed, the display change of the bar indicating the remaining time of the effect receiving period will progress by the amount corresponding to the passage of time without being affected by it. Also, regarding the sword ornament 5001, the sword is pulled out while a series of displays from the start of the swing-down action (FIG. 180(c)) to the end (FIG. 180(e)) are being performed. However, even if the loop process is performed, it will be maintained in the unsheathed state without being affected by it. In addition, when an operation to put the sword in the sword-sheathed state is performed on the operation target accessory 141 within the effect reception period, the effect reception is performed, and a predetermined effect at the time of operation is performed based on the effect reception, and the above-mentioned effect is performed. The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sheathed state. Further, a process for ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

According to such a configuration, when an omen effect as a specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG operate within the effect acceptance period. The operation modes (operations that play a role in accurately conveying the current situation (operations until moving to the operation position), loop operations that are provided for production) are different from each other, and the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is completed. After that, the sword-decorated image SYG does not end its operation and continues it. As a result, when an effect reception period (Fig. 180 (c) to (e)) occurs after a specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect contents of the specific operation-related effect are continued until after the effect reception period occurs ( It is possible to expand the range of effects, such as making it possible to execute the game by continuing the background as well, so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

Also, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. The effects (FIGS. 180(c) to (e)) are executed when the effect acceptance period occurs by changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production acceptance period according to this production example, a production image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and a character (sword decoration image SYG different from the specified Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance reception period. In this sense, even in the sign effect, the effect is performed using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) that simulates the operation means and the character. It can be said that it is more desirable in terms of further improving the performance by providing a dramatic connection between them. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) has a plurality of display modes with different degrees of expectation for granting the privilege, and may be displayed in any one of these display modes.

It should be noted that, in the indication effect as a specific operation-related effect and the effect within the effect reception period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect reception is performed according to which of these effect modes appears. A suggestion may be made as to whether a highly expected mode will appear as an effect at the time of operation when the effect reception is made in the period. A background image that appears when the premonition effect is performed may be used to suggest the degree of expectation for the provision of the privilege.

In addition, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 180, when the precursor effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed in such a manner that both the content of the effect appearing in the precursor effect and the background image are changed. Although it was decided to execute the effect within the period, it is not a specific operation-related effect. ) is being performed, and the effect acceptance period occurs in such a way that both the content of the effect and the background image that appeared in the precursor effect are changed. You may make it perform production|presentation. In short, it is possible to generate an operation-related effect (premonitory effect) regarding the operation of the operating means, and as the operation-related effect (premonitory effect), the first effect is accepted by the player's operation. At least a first operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect regarding a second effect different from the first effect is accepted by an operation by the player can occur, and the first operation-related effect is displayed. The first operation-promoting image is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation-promoting image was not yet displayed is continuously displayed. The second operation-promoting image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with the change of the background image in the state where the second operation-promoting image is not yet displayed to a different background image." I wish I had. Here, the first operation prompting image and the second operation prompting image do not have to be the same image. ” can be used as appropriate. Also, the "first effect" and the "second effect" may be different post-operation effects. can be exemplified as an effect as to which mode will appear as a conversation notice when is performed, and as a "second operation-related effect in which the effect reception regarding the second effect is performed", the effect reception is performed. It can be exemplified as an effect as to whether or not the specific decorative member SDY operates when At this time, regardless of which mode appears as the conversation notice, the performance design is such that there is a relationship in which the percentage (including 100%) of the jackpot pattern appears is higher when the specific decorative member SDY operates. It is desirable to Also, for the "second operation-related effect in which the effect reception for the second effect is performed", see FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, FIGS. may be executed as one of the later-described operation reception effects (operation reception effects with BGM suppressed). On the other hand, regarding the "first operation-related effect in which the effect reception for the first effect is performed", the operation reception effect (with BGM not suppressed) will be described later with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, FIG. It may be executed as one of the operation acceptance effects in . In addition, each of these different examples of the operation reception effect, which will be described later, may also be adopted as appropriate. In addition, the background image "continuously displayed" does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a flowing river or a duel between characters. A display in which a still image or moving image is displayed in a sliding manner (a display in which coordinates are moved) is also included. In other words, it can be said that the background image is "continuously displayed" if it is displayed in chronological order or coordinate-wise connection with the projected depiction content. On the other hand, ``changing the background image to another background image'' does not necessarily mean that the background image is displayed using different image data or another layer. It also includes things that suddenly change or are replaced (switched) to "images with different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the production reception period)" that are not physically connected. It also includes an image that changes to a "black image" or is replaced (switched). In other words, it can be said that "a background image is changed to another background image" if there is no connection in terms of depiction contents in terms of time series and coordinates before and after the change. In order to make it easier to recognize that the background image has changed in this way, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, etc.) that hides the background image that has been displayed until then is displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is more desirable to display over at least half the area (more preferably substantially the entire area) of the display area, and after the display, the second operation prompting image is displayed together with the new background image. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be displayed sequentially within one variation pattern. Regarding the timing of changing the background image to another background image, as described above, it may be before the effect reception period occurs, or the effect reception period may occur, including the timing when the effect reception period occurs. It may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 180(b) may be omitted and the rendering may progress from FIG. 180(a) to FIG. 180(c)).

In the production example shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started after the production reception period occurs, but the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. Alternatively, the action of the sword ornament 5001 that started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (the role of accurately communicating the current situation is It is also possible to complete the performed action before the production acceptance period occurs, and then maintain the stopped state.

In addition, even when giving an operation opportunity to a specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001), when the background image is changed when the effect reception period occurs, and when the background image is changed There may be cases where the display to cause is not performed. In this case, if the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the expectation for granting the privilege will be higher than when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, after a specific operation-related production is performed, by operating a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) indicated as a result of the production When an effect is accepted, a specific decoration member SDY (a movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an effect at the time of operation based on the effect acceptance. 167(d), 169(e), and 170(h), for example, sword decorative body 5001 (or operation button 410) is also operated to improve the effect of the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. In this way, in order to improve the effect related to the operation-time effect when a specific operation-related effect has been passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect has been passed As a result, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the side of the door frame 3 (the side of the game machine main body) are both activated, or the effect state at the time of success appears, or the movable body provided on the game board 5 side appears. In contrast to the production situation where both the body and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate, the production situation at the time of failure appears. In the operation stage effect after the premonition effect which is not the operation-related effect is performed, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side is selected according to the result of the effect. It is possible to make a performance situation appear at the time of success in which only one operates, or to appear in a failure performance situation in which both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side do not operate. desirable.

In addition, in each of the production modes described above and in specific operation-related effects related to other examples thereof, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as a result of the effect, when the button image BTG is displayed as a result of the effect We are trying to raise the expectations for the granting of benefits. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of a specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. The image BTG is displayed in some cases, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation for awarding a privilege is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the performance result of a specific operation-related performance. is increased, it is possible to favorably maintain the interest in the game when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

Also, the manner in which the princess character is displayed (specific presentation manner) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG, as shown in FIG. 181(b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific presentation mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is higher than when it is displayed in the normal mode.

In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, a first effect pattern (Fig. 181(a)), and a second effect pattern (FIG. 181(b )) may be prepared respectively. In this case, it is set so that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is the same between when the first effect pattern appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide interest in which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect. Regardless of whether the decoration image SYG or the decoration image SYG appears, it is possible to provide a completely different interest, such as whether or not a specific presentation mode (a mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, in the case where such a specific effect mode (a mode in which a princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 181(c), when the specific effect mode is at a stage where the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) has not yet appeared. This may be displayed first (for example, when a specific operation-related effect is being produced). According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect is being performed as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will appear, a specific effect mode (a princess character is displayed) is performed. The button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG will have the same performance value (the same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, the performance of the specific operation-related production itself is lost, so even though the specific operation-related production is being performed, it is possible to say "predictive production by the princess character". It becomes possible to provide performance with a completely different purpose.

In addition, the sword decoration 5001 according to each of the above-described production modes and their other examples is a second type in which the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to have a mode (second operation mode). Therefore, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit? The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect for . The sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are both operably (operably) supported by a main body support portion (not shown) provided on the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) is in a state of being operated (operated), the other side can be operated (operated). formed.

However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a manner, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and it is impossible to operate the sword ornament 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that the possibility of an operation error occurring on the player side increases. In particular, even if the operation opportunity is given to any of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, for example, an effect image imitating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 (and its If an instruction display prompting an operation is displayed, there is an increasing concern that the player may make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, as the remaining time of the performance reception period is getting shorter, the player should first perform an operation to correct the operation error, and then perform the operation in the original correct mode. It is difficult to do so, and even if a specific operation-related effect with relatively high expectations is performed, if the effect acceptance period ends before the effect is accepted , there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decrease.

Also, in the sword ornament 5001, there is a mode of "vertical movement" depending on the sword part and a mode of "horizontal movement" depending on the scabbard part. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the wrong side operation is performed when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the correct side operation, and the effect reception period ends. It can be said that the risk of losing the opportunity to operate is increased.

Therefore, when performing the specific operation-related effect as a effect regarding which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit. 182 and 183, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the original correct operation is performed as it is, it is desirable to properly accept the performance and to execute the performance at the time of operation according to the reception of the performance.

FIGS. 182 and 183 show examples of effects when an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a diagram.

In FIG. 182(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 182(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 182(a).

Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182(b), a first effect imitating the first operation mode of operating the sword part of the sword ornament 5001 from the drawn state to the sheathed state. The image OX and the second effect image TX imitating the second operation mode of moving the sheath part of the sword ornament 5001 in the lateral direction are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Simultaneously displayed, it is suggested that an operation opportunity by one of these operation modes will soon be available for presentation. In this respect, in the first effect image OX, although the image portion of the sword decoration 5001 imitating the sword part is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are displayed in a larger size than the second effect image TX. 2, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

In FIG. 182(c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. The effect image TX pushes each other within the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect is performed in which the opponent is pushed out of the display area. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, the effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result (second effect) in which the second effect image TX is left appears. result) appears, an effect acceptance period for the second operation mode occurs.

It should be noted that, in the specific operation-related effect according to this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 182(c), when the first effect image OX is left in a dominant situation, a display such as "squeeze" becomes visible. When the second effect image TX is left in a dominant situation, a display such as "slide" is made visible. The details of the operation contents are made easy to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, since there is a concern that these displays are erroneously recognized as prompting the operation at the timing when the effect receiving period has not yet occurred, they may not necessarily be displayed.

FIG. 182(d) shows that as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 182(c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is displayed within the display area. A production depicting the situation left behind is being performed (first production result). When progressing to this production content, even if an operation is performed in the second operation mode, a specific operation-time production (movable production by the specific decorative member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the first operation mode does not occur. When an operation is performed, an effect reception is made, and a specific operation-time effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decorative member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 182(d), the effect acceptance period related to the specific operation-time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Therefore, during the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display prompting the operation (character display such as "push", and the remaining time of the effect reception period are displayed. bar display) will be displayed. At this time, the sword ornament 5001 moves from the sheathed state to the unsheathed state so that the operation in the first operation mode can be performed.

In FIG. 183(e), although the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) is performed in the second operation mode instead of the first operation mode. It shows the production situation when performed by the player.

That is, in this example of the effect, even if the effect reception period related to the specific effect at the time of operation occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, the Operation detection of operation mode 2 itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected during the performance acceptance period, it is assumed that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is accepted for the performance. (here, "as is").

Also, as shown in FIG. 183(f), such a specific notification changes the content of the notification according to the passage of time (here, "calm down") so that the player can regain his composure. It's like According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it can be notified sequentially with short words, so even if the player side is in a panic state, this can be preferably done. suppression is expected. As a result, even if the sword decorative body 5001 in the state of the second operation mode is operated in the first operation mode in the state as it is, the player side is informed that the effect is properly accepted. be able to recognize.

FIG. 183(g) shows that the proper side operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production situation (production reception period when in the erroneous operation state) of FIG. 183(e) or FIG. 183(f). As a result of the operation, an effect reception is made, and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is removed from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is completed), the sword decoration 5001 changes from the state of the second operation mode to the non-operated state (normal state). ).

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs on the player side between the first operation mode and the second operation mode, and the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the original correct operation remains as it is. Even if the game is performed from the state (state of operation error), the reception of the performance is properly performed, so that the decline in the game interest when the operation error occurs is suppressed.

In the above example of effect, when the player performs an erroneous operation, the player is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. It is not necessary to give detailed notification for the purpose of That is, as described above, since the player may panic in a situation where an erroneous operation has been performed, it may be counterproductive to issue a notification of complicated content. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player during the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the proper mode is received, the effect or sound alone is used instead of the display by the message. It is desirable to make a simple notification such as In this case, there is a possibility that the player side does not recognize that an operation error has been performed, but it is possible to confirm a special situation such as a specific notification being performed based on the operation being performed and an effect at the time of operation being not performed. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to fully expect to switch the operation to the operation on the proper side.

On the other hand, it is conceivable that some players (particularly elderly players) may mistakenly operate a specific operation-related effect before the effect acceptance period occurs. For example, when an operation (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed on the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) even though no operation instruction regarding the second operation portion (for example, the sheath portion) is given, the first It is conceivable that a situation may occur in which an effect acceptance period related to a specific operation effect only occurs on the operation part (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case also, how the player side operates There is a concern that it will not be possible to recognize whether it is good or not.

Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is being performed as to which of the first operation portion (sword portion) and the second operation portion (sheath portion) the operation opportunity is given, the second 182 (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 182(b) and 182(c)), the second operation unit Even when an operation is performed, it is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in a proper mode is received. This specific notification may be ``display of a message to the effect that the operator should operate the proper operation unit, which will soon be given an opportunity to operate, while maintaining the operation state'', or a message display may be used. Instead, it may be an effect or a simple notification such as notification using only sound. In any case, by confirming a special situation in which a specific notification is performed based on the operation and the effect at the time of operation is not performed despite the operation being performed, the appropriate side can then perform the operation. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be an opportunity to go.

In this case, for example, the first operation part (for example, , sword part), even if the effect acceptance period for a specific operation effect occurs only on the side, the second operation part (for example, the scabbard part) is operated (sword ornament 5001 moved to the left), when the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated, an effect reception is made, and the above-mentioned effect at the time of operation is performed according to the operation. becomes.

According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the state of the operation error is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed as it is, the performance reception will be properly performed, so the operation error can be made before the performance reception period occurs. Also when is generated, the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed.

However, within the period during which a specific operation-related effect is performed as to which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is indicated and the effect acceptance period If the above-mentioned specific notification is performed in the period immediately before the occurrence of the effect, the information will be mixed with the content notified (instruction display, etc.) during the effect acceptance period, and the player will be further confused. There is a concern that Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect in which the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit is finally displayed, the period until the effect result is displayed , the above-mentioned specific notification is executed when the second operation mode is operated in spite of the fact that the operation instruction regarding the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is not displayed. A period and a second period during which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if an operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period have sequentially passed, the above-mentioned second period It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for one operation unit.

In the example of the effect described above, when the specific notification is performed, the degree of expectation for awarding of the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in each of the above-described rendering modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to another example thereof, the rendering mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the above-described multiple modes (for example, FIG. 161 from the stage 0 form shown in ) to any of the stage 1 to stage 3 forms). In this regard, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword ornament 5001 is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above, and an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in the changed state. You can let it run. Alternatively, the sword ornament 5001 may be changed to one of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect is performed.

In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect reception period, an instruction display prompting the operation of the sword decoration 5001 (character display such as "push" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period), and the sword decoration 5001 The sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001 at that time (stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161). It will happen.

However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to add some interest to checking the sword decoration image SYG. Therefore, the performance during the performance acceptance period is poor. Therefore, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG can be displayed in a manner different from that of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. This is desirable in terms of securing performance during the performance acceptance period.

At this time, by setting the mode represented by the sword decoration image SYG to have a higher degree of expectation than the mode of the sword decoration 5001, the performance during the performance reception period can be improved. It is desirable in order to secure it properly. For example, when the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form and a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. make it visible. According to such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to grasp that the degree of expectation is higher by checking the form of the sword decoration image SYG. As a result, the amusement in the game during the performance acceptance period is favorably maintained.

In order to obtain such effects, the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration image SYG side should be larger than the number of presentation modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the sword decoration 5001 side may be one. Further, when a plurality of presentation modes are prepared as the sword ornament 5001, the plurality of presentation modes do not necessarily have to change the form.

However, if the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 and the mode of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this manner, some players may feel uncomfortable because of false display. This is a concern, and this may reduce the interest in gaming. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as aspects of the sword decoration 5001 (here, stage 0 to stage 3 shown in FIG. 161). is prepared, and when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration 5001 at that time, so that the mode of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword It is desirable to make the mode of the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the outer shape of the sword decoration image SYG is changed by further transforming or combining the sword decoration image SYG, an operation in a mode that does not appear in the sword decoration 5001, or a mode in which the sword decoration 5001 It may be one that emits light in a manner that does not appear.

According to such a configuration, since the rendering expression that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration body 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, it is possible to suppress the concern that the user will feel uncomfortable because of the false display. In addition to the fact that the sword ornament 5001 can be used, it is expected to improve the amusement of the game by providing performance beyond the player's imagination when looking at the structure of the sword ornament 5001.例文帳に追加

Even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG is provided with a special mode in this way, the sword decoration image SYG has each mode (here, shown in FIG. 161) prepared as a mode of the sword decoration body 5001. It is desirable to be able to display in stage 0 form to stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined rendering condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special mode. In addition, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode, it is desirable to suggest that the degree of expectation for awarding the privilege is higher than when it is displayed in other modes. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

Further, the technique of enabling the sword decoration image SYG to be displayed in a special mode may be applied to other effects other than the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed.

Further, in each of the above-described production modes and their other examples, for example, when the pattern variation is performed in the first production pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, within the pattern variation, the operation button 410 It is possible to execute the first omen performance that appears when the opportunity to operate is given and the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is not given. Further, when the symbol variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the operation button 410 is not given the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the symbol variation. A second omen effect that appears when an opportunity is granted is made executable. Further, when the pattern variation is performed in the third production pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third omen that appears when the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. Production (specific operation-related production) can be executed.

In this regard, these portent effects are executed as different effect contents, and the effect contents include, for example,
Displaying the specific image so as to cover at least the area where the effect image appears before the effect image imitating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is granted appears in the display area,
・After that, at a position that is difficult to see due to the specific image, an effect image that imitates the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
・After that, the specific image is gradually changed from the display area to non-display (increase the transparency of the specific image itself, reduce the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.) You may make it change. For example, in the first omen effect, a display effect using a “cloud effect” is performed as the specific image (a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see the effect image imitating the operation means), and in the second omen effect, the specific image is a “flame effect”. Effect” display effect (a display effect that mimics the operation means is displayed to gradually make it easier to see). If the type of the specific image is made different, for example, by performing a display effect that gradually makes it easier to see, it is possible to make the portent effects different from each other. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first sign effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed. , it is possible to recognize that the second omen effect is being performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and when the display effect by the "water effect" is performed, the operation is performed. It becomes possible to recognize that a third omen effect (a specific operation-related effect) is being performed as to which of the button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be given an operation opportunity.

Then, in the case where an omen effect (at least one of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect) is to be performed with such effect contents, the effect image imitating the operating means by the specific image is It is desirable to generate an effect reception period for the operating means during the period when the visual recognition is made difficult. When such a configuration is applied to either the first omen effect or the second omen effect, the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed in a highly expected display mode (for example, red) and a low expected display mode. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage where it is not certain whether it will be displayed in any of the display mode (for example, blue), the effect during the effect acceptance period sexuality can be improved. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the third omen effect (specific operation-related effect), there is no certainty as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 will be given the operation opportunity. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from the stage when the player cannot have the command, the performance during the performance reception period can be improved.

FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 186 is an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart showing. 185 and 186, an example of the effect when the first omen effect is performed will be described below. It is also possible to apply to an omen effect.

In FIG. 185(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed by the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the production situation.

FIG. 185(b) shows an effect situation in which the first omen effect is started during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 185(a).

Here, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 185(b), the display rendering by the “cloud effect” is performed in a large range within the display area of the rendering display device 1600. FIG. 186. After the display effect by such a "cloud effect" is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. or decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed).

Then, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 186, at timing t2, which is the middle stage in which the display effect by the "cloud effect" is gradually changed to non-display, the effect accepting period for the operation button 410 is At the same time, a button image BTG that simulates the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) prompting the operation of the operation button 410 are displayed ( FIG. 185(c)).

In this production example, the button image BTG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. , blue), the ratio of the operation-time effects to be performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher than when the button image BTG is displayed. In this regard, in the production situation shown in FIG. 185(c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the “cloud effect”. When the operation button 410 is operated in spite of the fact that the operation button 410 is operated, an effect reception is made, and an operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, even in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the content of the effect is switched from the precursor effect. It is possible to progress the performance without being sure of which of the two display modes will be displayed.

In addition, in the production situation shown in FIG. 185(c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG will be displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". In spite of this, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is gradually decreasing.

On the other hand, at timing t3 when a predetermined period of time has passed since the production situation shown in FIG. is completely hidden (FIG. 185(d)). In such a situation, while it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, it is possible to operate the operation button 410. become able to. That is, in this case, the presentation at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the content of presentation is switched from the presentation shown in FIG. 185(d).

According to such a configuration, the period from when the button image BTG is displayed to when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t2 to t3) in the effect receiving period (timings t2 to t4) ), it is possible to provide an effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to see.

In addition, in order to enhance the performance during the performance acceptance period (timings t2 to t4), the "cloud effect" is completely hidden during the period (timings t3 to t4) , it is desirable to perform an effect display that is not performed during the period from timing t2 to t3. In this production example, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timings t3 to t4), a message such as "press" is displayed. To more favorably enhance the performance during the period (timings t3 to t4) by dynamically displaying the button image BTG, which was displayed in a stopped mode during the period, during the period from timings t3 to t4. will be able to

Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 185, the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 may be displayed before the effect reception period occurs. In other words, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, an effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to see appears first. Until then, an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 appears.

At this time, when the button image BTG is in an effect situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the effect acceptance period occurs, the effect pattern (third omen) is changed to a more expected mode. In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, when the button image BTG is in a production situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG, it is possible to provide an amusement in which the value of gazing at the button image BTG becomes higher, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It can be maintained well.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to see by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that its visibility is maintained without being affected. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the change in the visibility of the button image BTG while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 may also be affected by the "cloud effect" and may be made difficult to see until timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible for the player to have a conflict as to whether or not to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode while the remaining time of the effect receiving period cannot be grasped well. It becomes possible to provide unprecedented novel performance.

Also, in the operation reception rendering shown in FIG. 185, the above-described or later-described "acceptance acceptance sound" may be output. In this case, the "acceptance permission sound" is output when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to see due to the "cloud effect".

In addition, when such "acceptable reception sound" is output in any of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern, including "0" and "100"), the button image BTG It will be possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the appearance of the whole, and it will be expected that the game interest will be improved.

When the presentation (operation) is performed while the "acceptable sound" is output, it is desirable to stop outputting the "acceptable sound" in the output state at that time. In addition, for the "acceptable sound", each configuration described above or described later may be appropriately employed.

The "cloud effect" may be transparent, in which case the button image will be faintly visible behind it, but visibility is maintained even with such a configuration. .

The "cloud effect" itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation (percentage of appearance of big winning symbols, including "0" and "100"). In this case, even though the operation button 410 functions to make the operation button 410 difficult to visually recognize, the amusement of the game can be improved when a high degree of expectation is suggested.

Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, a specific production sound (BGM) is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state. You may adopt it. The specific effect sound (BGM) that is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state or in a non-output state is output in a non-suppressed state even when an operation is performed by the player. will not be returned.

In addition, in any of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, if such effect is applied, the effect image imitating the operation means after the start of the omen effect is clear. Even if the length of time until it becomes visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, after the effect image imitating the operation means is displayed, the effect image is clear. It is desirable that the time until the specific image is made visible to the user (the time until the specific image is hidden) are set to the same time. In addition, when applying such a performance to any one of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, the operation means is simulated after the omen effect is started. For the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare multiple times to create multiple effects with different expectations. However, the time from when the effect image imitating the operating means is displayed until the effect image becomes clearly visible (time until the specific image is hidden) is the same It is desirable to set the time.

Further, as a method of making the effect image imitating the operating means difficult to visually recognize, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, by changing the setting of the transmissivity of the effect image imitating the operating means itself, the effect image imitating the operating means is made to appear in a display mode (timing t2) that makes it relatively difficult to see, and then the relative It may be gradually changed toward a display mode (timing t3) that is visually easily visible. However, the timing at which the effect image imitating the operating means appears in a display mode that makes it relatively difficult to see may be a timing before timing t2. may be performed as an omen effect, or while another display is performed as an omen effect, an effect image imitating the operating means may be made to appear in a display mode that makes it relatively difficult to see. good too.

Also, when a specific effect pattern corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. ) is occurring. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect starts to be produced, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect, and as a result of the progress of the production, a plurality of Since an effect acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operation means occurs, if there is a delay in determining which one of the plurality of operation means should be operated, it will be more difficult for the player to operate it. There is a possibility that the performance acceptance period will end before the end of the remaining time. In this regard, if a specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later is occurring, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed During the acceptance period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as the effect result of a specific operation-related effect, the operation by the player on the operation means on the side of the operation target and the automatic effect function. Since the performance reception is performed by any of the above and the performance after the operation is surely executed, the game interest when the specific operation-related performance is performed can be preferably maintained.

[Auto button effect status]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the big hit determination, the effect reception period Even if the player's operation is not accepted for the performance in the performance acceptance period, it is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change to the performance as when the player's operation is accepted for the performance within the performance acceptance period. there is According to such an automatic button effect state, even if the user does not operate the button each time the effect reception period occurs, the post-operation effect is generated when the button is operated, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate the button. be able to As for the automatic effect function, the same effect reception as when the operation is actually performed may be generated when the automatic effect function functions, so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed, or the effect reception may be generated. Alternatively, the same processing as when the performance reception is received may be performed.

In the embodiments relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-described operation-related techniques, effects, settings, etc. may be appropriately combined and used, or may be used in place of each other.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times. Setting to the performance state can be made. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of operation button 410 (or an operation means different from operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operating means different from the operation button 410). When the "automatic button effect state setting" displayed in the window is selected, the automatic button effect state is set. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated multiple times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on a different operation means may be operated multiple times.

On the other hand, during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 is operated only once to set the automatic button effect state. It is possible to set an automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the progress of performance during pattern variation. However, there are some players who want to actively operate the operation buttons 410 regardless of whether or not the valid period has expired. If the automatic button effect state is set just by operating the button, the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed, the operation state of the operation button 410 must be maintained for a predetermined time ( Here, it is required to operate this once in a mode (so-called "long-press mode") that is maintained for 2 seconds). As a result, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated irrespective of whether or not the effective period has occurred during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state, the automatic button presentation state is entered. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause erroneous setting. It should be noted that it is desirable to prevent the automatic button effect state from being set even if the operation is performed in the long-press mode when at least the effect reception period is occurring during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. .

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as a method of canceling the automatic button effect state in the state in which it is set, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not yet executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period in which the symbol variation is being executed.

That is, during the period in which the demo screen is displayed in the state where the pattern variation is not executed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operating means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation of the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation of the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The "Various Settings" screen is displayed by selecting the "Various Settings" screen, and the "Various Settings" screen is displayed by the third operation of the operation button 410 (or by an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is cancelled.

On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation button 410 only once. It is possible to cancel the setting of the automatic button performance state while keeping an eye on the development of the performance during the pattern variation. However, unlike the case of setting the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 can be positioned to the operation state without maintaining the operation state for the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even if the operation mode is not long press). The setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled only by detecting that the button has been pressed (only by operating in a single-shot operation mode). That is, it can be said that the fact that an operation button 410 has been operated in some way indicates that there is a desire to operate the operation button 410. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal presentation state early, it is expected that the game interest is favorably maintained.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is configured with a plurality of operation means including the operation button 410 . In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is in the automatic button effect state set by the operation, the operation button 410 differs from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination. An effect reception period during which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001, etc.) (more precisely, a predetermined effect pattern in which an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001, etc. is set) occurs, and even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received within the effect reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not performed within the effect reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect as when the effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, whether there is a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) can receive the effect, or whether another operation means (for example, , sword decoration 5001), the above-mentioned effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) regarding whether the period during which the operation to the sword decoration can be accepted occurs, the effect result Even if either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration body 5001 can receive the effect, there is no need to worry about forgetting to operate it, so you can enjoy such a specific operation-related effect without worry. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) among the plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). , when the first operation means is not operated within the first side effect acceptance period, automatic processing can be executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
・The second side effect receiving period set as the operation target for the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) When it occurs, when the second operation means is not operated within the second side effect acceptance period, automatic processing is executed to cause the same change in the effect as when the second operation means is operated. Possible (second automatic production means)
With such a configuration, regardless of whether the first-side effect reception period or the second-side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time has passed since the period occurred, the second Automatic processing by the first automatic effect means or automatic processing by the second automatic effect means can be executed.

According to such a configuration, when the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is controlled, the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means is the operation target. Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as occurs within the execution period of the pattern fluctuation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has passed since the occurrence of those periods As a result, you will be able to enjoy the production with peace of mind.

However, in the event that a first-side effect reception period occurs in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target, when a specific time has passed after the occurrence of the first-side effect reception period The automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect acceptance period has occurred. It is also possible to make the performance progress within the pattern variation as there is a case. According to such a configuration, it was assumed that the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means would be executed when the specific time passed after the occurrence of the first side effect acceptance period, but the timing is different from this. Since the production reception is made and the production after the operation is automatically generated, it can be made to function as a surprise production.

In addition, when it is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), the operating means is given more opportunities to operate within the pattern fluctuation period than when it is not controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state). You may make it so that the ratio which the production|presentation acceptance period which is carried out generate|occur|produces becomes high. That is, in this case, as the frequency of occurrence of the production reception period increases, it can be assumed that the frequency of forgetting to operate within the production reception period also increases, but even if the operation is forgotten, automatic production Since the performance after the operation is executed by the functioning of the function, the performance receiving period can be generated with a higher frequency while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest due to frequent forgetting to operate. Incidentally, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of both the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable to make the degree of increase in the rate of occurrence different between the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment,
When the condition for receiving the effect is satisfied within the effect receiving period, the post-operation effect can be executed (post-operation effect executing means),
・It is possible to execute a process for establishing a performance reception condition based on the fact that the player has performed an operation within the performance reception period (player operation reception means),
・When the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period, it is possible to execute a process to establish the effect acceptance condition without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the effect acceptance period (automatic effect acceptance means )
However, the specific timing within the effect reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the effect reception period has passed since the effect reception period started. I am planning to As a result, it is possible to give the player a sufficient margin to operate the player himself until the automatic effect function functions, and it is possible to leave the option of causing the effect acceptance by the player's operation. , the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a specific time has passed since the first side effect reception period occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has elapsed, when the effect progresses within the pattern variation, the above "specific time" or the above "specific time Any of the "time different from" is set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first-side effect reception period.

Here, if an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, and the effect is accepted for the operation of the operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period. , the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect in response to the acceptance of the effect, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may also be performed.

Also, in this case, during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is controlled, an effect acceptance period occurs for an operating means (sword ornament 5001, etc.) different from the operation button 410, and the effect acceptance occurs. Even when the operation to the sword decoration body 5001 is received during the period, the processing for generating the post-operation performance corresponding to the acceptance of the performance and the processing for canceling the setting of the automatic button performance state are executed respectively. is desirable. Also in this case, regarding the "post-operation effect in response to the effect reception", the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the period when the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed during the effect reception period. It will be executed as an effect having the same content as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation to the body 5001 is accepted.

That is, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the production state (normal production mode) in which the production can progress depending on the player's own operation (specific production state) a desire to terminate the state) may arise. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both an operation to end a specific production state and an operation to accept an operation within the system, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline. In this regard, in the above configuration, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation buttons to which the operation opportunity is given during the effect reception period 410 or sword ornament 5001 is operated only once (by being operated in a single-shot operation mode), the process of ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing a change in the effect. (processing to execute the effect after the operation) and are performed respectively, so that the desire to end the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and progress the effect depending on the player's own operation is received. Even if it occurs within the period, it is possible to smoothly switch the presentation state.

However, regarding the setting change (setting change to automatic button effect state, setting cancellation of automatic button effect state) related to automatic button effect state during the period when the demo screen is displayed (symbol change is not executed) , the settings can be changed without requiring any operation on the sword ornament 5001 . In other words, the sword ornament 5001 has a lower frequency of being given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the execution period of the pattern variation, and when the operation opportunity is given by that much, the expectation of a big hit is higher than that of the operation button 410. It is made high. Therefore, the sword ornament 5001 is not allowed to be operated only for the purpose of changing the setting of the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and thus the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the amusement of the game by enhancing the sense of premium when playing the game. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the pattern variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means (operation buttons) other than the sword ornament 5001 among the plurality of operation means 410 or another operation means) can be set to or canceled from the automatic button effect state by operating the button a plurality of times.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the automatic button effect state can be entered without requiring the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 even during the execution period of the pattern variation when the automatic button effect state is not controlled. Settings can be changed. That is, as described above, if the operation button 410 is operated once in the "long-press mode", it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. For the purpose of this, operations on the sword ornament 5001 are not permitted.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the setting related to the automatic button effect state can be changed by operating the sword ornament 5001 means that the pattern when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. It is limited to a case where an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the execution period of the variation, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted for an effect during the effect acceptance period, and a corresponding post-operation effect appears. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to change the setting to the automatic button presentation state by operating the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. become.

In addition, as a plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when in the automatic button effect state, "auto In addition to operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be subject to the "effect function", special operation means that are not subject to the "automatic effect function that generates the effect at the time of operation without being operated within the effect reception period" may further include. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect accepting period occurs during which an opportunity to operate the special operating means is given, and if the effect is accepted during the effect accepting period, the operation for the special operating means is accepted. The degree of expectation for a big hit is suggested by the post-operation production in response to the reception of the production. However, even if the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same effect after the operation as when the above effect is accepted will appear. no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted does not appear, but if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted, it may be made to appear.

In addition, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the mode of long pressing), the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the pattern variation is in the execution state. In addition to the time, the effect reception period for the operation means other than the operation button 410 (the effect reception period in which the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the sword ornament 5001, or the degree of expectation is suggested by operating the special operation means It is desirable that this is not permitted even if a performance reception period, etc.) is occurring. That is, if the automatic button effect state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operating in the form of a long press) during the effect reception period for an operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the performance reception period, the original performance reception (operating means different from the operation button 410) is activated by activating the "automatic performance function that generates the performance at the time of operation without operating within the performance reception period". If the player is unfamiliar with the automatic button effect state, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 may occur without any operation. This is because the user may be puzzled as to whether there is an effect reception period for an operation means different from the one used, and there is concern that this will reduce the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the sign effect prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is not, and a sign effect that appears prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). You may enable it to be performed as a display mode different from. That is, in this case, it is possible to preliminarily recognize whether or not there is a performance state in which the automatic performance function can function within the specific performance acceptance period, and the performance can be enjoyed without anxiety.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific image suggesting the remaining time (for example, "bar display" suggesting the remaining time) is displayed during the effect acceptance period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, at least until the specific image (for example, "bar display" indicating the remaining time) is displayed, the specific image is displayed so that the specific area is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning strikes the specific region) may be displayed outside the area (forecast effect). That is, in this case, when the effect reception period occurs, by confirming the movement of the effect image different from the specific image, the user can pay attention to the part where the hidden "specific image indicating the remaining time" will appear. can be urged, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's operation is not completed in time and the specific effect acceptance period ends, and furthermore, Even if the operation by the player is not in time, the automatic effect function functions to execute the effect after the operation, so that it is expected that the interest in the game is preferably maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player. Based on this, the state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting of the automatic button effect state may be canceled according to the progress of the game or effect. As an example of the state setting and setting cancellation according to the progress of the game or effect, for example, "While it is controlled in the normal game state, it is controlled as an automatic button effect state, but the jackpot game state Or, when the state is shifted to a high-probability time-saving state, the automatic button production state is canceled."Or,"generate an automatic button production state within the execution period of the pattern variation, and the pattern variation in the execution state ends. A control mode such as "generate an effect pattern that cancels the setting when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence" or "generate an automatic button effect state over a period in which multiple symbol variations are executed" It is possible to employ a control mode such as . Alternatively, the pachinko machine 1 may be always controlled to the automatic button presentation state, and in this case, the automatic button presentation state is not set and released, and the "automatic button presentation state" is set and released. This process itself will disappear.

In addition, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted, or at a predetermined timing after that, or when the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is consumed, or when the above-mentioned automatic production function functions at a predetermined timing after that, the production after the operation will be performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. will be executed. On the other hand, if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at the middle timing (specific timing) when the remaining time of the effect acceptance period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function in the same way as when there is an actual operation. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect acceptance period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

However, in order to ensure a sense of security that a post-operation effect will occur even if the button is not operated when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is necessary to wait until the effect reception period ends (effect reception It is important to make the above-described automatic effect function function at a specific timing within the period, and to start the post-operation effect corresponding to this. That is, in this case, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even though the specific timing within the effect reception period has arrived, the player himself/herself operates after the specific timing arrives to generate the post-operation effect. This makes it possible to reduce the feeling of uneasiness when being controlled to the automatic button effect state It is possible that the effect after the operation is recognized, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, “The automatic effect function may not function due to some trouble, and the effect after the operation may not be confirmed”, etc.) be able to

The pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be described in order below. You may make it use combining suitably.

It should be noted that, in explaining each of the characteristic techniques below, as a premise, in a specific production state (automatic button production state), when it is not controlled to the specific production state (automatic button production state) When a performance reception period occurs, the same post-operation performance as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the big hit determination) that can be executed only when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to the specific display effect occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the specific effective period. can be According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance (improvement of the performance by permitting the occurrence of a specific display performance) when being controlled to a specific rendering state (automatic button rendering state). Of course, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is occurring, the automatic effect function may not function during a different effect acceptance period set when the specific display effect is not being performed. On the other hand, during a specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function works to save the trouble of operating, so that the VIP feeling can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be suitably enhanced. It should be noted that it is not necessary to prevent the automatic effect function from functioning during all of the different effect reception periods set when a specific display effect is not being performed, and at least part of the effect reception period is an automatic effect. If the function cannot function, the above-mentioned effects will occur when a specific effective period occurs while a specific display effect is being performed (when an effect acceptance period occurs during which the automatic effect function always functions). can be expected. Further, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player until the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the above-described automatic effect function is activated at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation production corresponding to this.

Further, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the big hit determination,
・When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the automatic effect described above occurs at the timing when the first predetermined time has passed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function functions to terminate the first specific validity period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
- If the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined period longer than the first predetermined period after the occurrence of the second specific effective period. At the timing of the elapse of, the above-described automatic effect function functions to end the second specific valid period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding to this, and further,
・If the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is reached despite being controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Each processing may be performed in a specific state of performance such that if there is no operation until the end of the operation, the same post-operation performance as when the operation was performed cannot appear. According to such a configuration, even if an effect reception period (specific valid period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the effect reception period starts from the time when the effect reception period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function functions when the predetermined time elapses, or the above-described automatic effect function does not function until a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the performance acceptance period ends, the above-described automatic performance function may be disabled in the first place. Therefore, even if it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is confirmed which type of specific display effect was performed when the effect acceptance period (specific valid period) occurred. For example, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function even after the first predetermined time has passed, the above-mentioned It is possible to develop the performance with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic performance function of the above functions or whether the above-mentioned automatic performance function does not function in the first place. Note that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all set when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (so-called When the one-shot operation is performed), the effect is accepted and the effect after the operation is generated.

It should be noted that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can only be executed when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). There may be. In this way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) can be displayed. In this case, it is possible to favorably maintain the amusement of the game in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, a first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and a second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and a third specific display effect (third specific effective period) is prepared. does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that occur when the effects are accepted in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

In addition, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated to generate the effect after operation, the timing within the effect acceptance period when the automatic effect function functioned (when the effect is accepted, what is the effect acceptance period The automatic effect function functioned for the bar display (display that changes the image (here, the area changes) with the passage of time) to indicate the remaining time of the effect acceptable period so that it can be recognized whether there was enough time left. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the display is not hidden at this time. According to such a configuration, for example, by checking the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function functions, the effect reception period is the first specified effective period ( A period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time, which is a relatively early stage after the effect reception period occurs, and a second specific effective period (relatively after the effect reception period occurs) It becomes possible to recognize whether it was a period in which the automatic effect function functions when the second predetermined time, which is a late stage, has passed.

In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period in which the automatic effect function functions when the first predetermined time has passed since the effect acceptance period occurred) occurs, and the second specific effective period ( A period in which an automatic performance function functions when a second predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the performance acceptance period) is different in the degree of expectation for a big hit (for example, the second specific valid period is more advantageous). It is desirable to Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. different degrees (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). In addition, when the post-operation effect is generated by the player's operation within the effect acceptance period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the automatic effect function described above may be used. function, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the "bar display" is displayed instead of being hidden. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. good too.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, an operation target suggesting image (for example, an operation target operation In addition to displaying an image display imitating means, even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the operation target suggestive image is not hidden, but is displayed, and the post-operation effect is generated. It is desirable to In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden. When the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the above-mentioned first specific effective period or when the automatic effect function functions within the above-described second specific effective period, always The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden.

Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation object suggesting image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for the big win, both the mode of the operation object suggesting image and the mode of the post-operation effect can be generated. can be confirmed at the same time, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change on the effect display device 1600, but may be executed as light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an action by a movable decorative body, for example. There may be.

For example, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the above-described automatic effect function, the degree of expectation of a big win (for example, it appears only when a big win is obtained) as an image suggesting an operation object (such as a simulated image imitating an operation means). A plurality of modes are prepared with different ratios of execution of post-operation effects in non-existent mode), and when an operation is accepted by an operation by a player, an operation target is started at the time when the post-operation effects are started to be executed based on the operation acceptance. If the suggestive image (such as a simulated image imitating an operation means) is displayed in one of the plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation, the mode of the suggestive image to be operated and the mode of the post-operation effect can be changed. Both can be confirmed at the same time, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, when generating an effective period (effect reception period) during which the model image is displayed, the type of the effective period (effect reception period) type, etc.), the display area is reduced as time passes (the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition), and the display area is reduced as time passes It is desirable that there is a case where no display is performed (a second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, during the valid period during which the display area is reduced as time passes and no display is performed, it becomes difficult to recognize how much time is left to accept the operation. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension inside. It should be noted that "do not display the specific image in a manner that the display area of the specific image decreases with the passage of time" means, for example, that normally (the first effective period), the gauge is displayed in a manner that the display area decreases with the passage of time. Where the image is displayed, the gauge image itself is not displayed during the second valid period, or the gauge image is displayed but its display area is not reduced over time. be.

In this regard, when the operation is accepted during the second valid period (when the display area is not reduced as time passes), changes (display change, lamp emission, etc.) It is desirable that the model image is displayed instead of being hidden when the execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects is started. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp that the operation was accepted while the model image was displayed (before the expiration of the valid period). can be removed.

In this case, the display mode of the simulated image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image, and the operation reception will be able to tell which operation means was the operation target. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. However, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started. It is desirable that the display state of the model image is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the operation was accepted, and that the model image is not obscured by other images. Therefore, if the simulated image is displayed dynamically during the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation acceptance ) is started, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display. On the other hand, within the first effective period, if a change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a change in the display or the lighting of the lamp) occurs due to the operation by the player, the change The model image may be hidden when an event (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs. A change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) may be generated in response to operation reception in the state.

However, even during the valid period in which the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time, a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. For images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a particular speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not indicated by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted depending on how much the moving image based on the model image has progressed. It is expected that it will be possible and that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) as the operation means. There are cases where a valid period (effect acceptance period) is generated during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means, and there are cases where a validity period (effect reception period) is generated during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means. Of these, during the valid period during which acceptance of operations on the first operating means is permitted, the first simulated image simulating the first operating means is displayed, and during the valid period during which acceptance of operations on the second operating means is permitted, the second operating means is displayed. The second simulated image is displayed. In addition, between the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the first operating means and the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the second operating means, the degree of expectation for a big win suggested when the operation is accepted (post-operation effect As a result, the ratio of execution of the mode that appears only at the time of the big hit) is different. In addition to the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the first operation means (effect reception period) and the effective period during which operation reception is permitted for the second operation means (effect reception period), effective periods different from these are defined. It may be possible to generate more. In this regard, when the operation is accepted in the valid period in which the expectation of the big hit is high (for example, the valid period in which the acceptance of operation on the second operation means is allowed), the change according to the operation acceptance (display change, , lamp lighting, etc.), the model image (second model image) is not hidden but displayed.

As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. In spite of this, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) remains in the operated state (the operation is performed). Even if the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is operated and the operation is accepted, the player side is made to recognize that the effect is accepted properly. be able to

In this case, the display mode of the simulated image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image, and the operation reception will be able to tell which operation means was the operation target. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started, the operation It is desirable to maintain the display state of the model image in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and to prevent the gauge image from becoming difficult to see due to other images. Therefore, if the simulated image is displayed dynamically during the valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted, at least one of the changes (display change, lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) corresponding to the operation acceptance ) is started, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display. In addition, in order to make the player side recognize that the effect has been properly accepted, changes (display changes, lamp emission, etc.) according to the operation acceptance by the operation by the player are made within the first effective period. Even if it occurs, the model image (first model image) is not hidden in the state where the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) , lamp emission, etc.).

According to such a configuration, "determination means for making a determination, production means for performing an effect based on the result of determination by the determination means, and based on the fact that a predetermined result is obtained in the determination by the determination means and a specific operation receiving portion provided displaceably between a first position and a second position (an operation button 410 displaceable between a normal position and a pressed position). ), a first detection unit capable of detecting a specific action (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation receiving unit to the second position, and a special operation receiving unit different from the specific operation receiving unit (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) is provided with a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action (for example, sword sheathing operation) by the player, A plurality of effect reception periods including a first effect reception period and a second effect reception period are prepared as the effect reception period (different types), and the first effect reception period is specified by imitating the specific operation receiving unit. A model image is displayed, and an effect reception is performed by detection by the first detection unit. During the second effect reception period, a special model image simulating the special operation receiving unit is displayed, 2. The performance reception is performed by the detection by the detection unit 2, and the specific action by the player despite the fact that the special model image imitating the special operation reception unit is displayed during the second performance reception period. When the specific operation receiving portion is displaced from the first position to the second position by the second detection, even if the special action is performed by the player while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the second position, the second detection Effect reception is performed by detection by the unit, and the post-operation effect can be executed based on the reception of the effect.

In such a configuration, "Even if the special action is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving section is maintained at the second position, the effect reception is performed by the detection by the second detection section, and the effect is received. At the time when the post-operation production is started to be executed based on the reception of the production, the special model image imitating the special operation receiving part is not hidden and is kept displayed, so that the side who made the operation by mistake can The player side can be made to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an operation on the proper side.

When the special model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for big hits, the post-operation effect is started in the displayed mode. If the effect is accepted without such an erroneous operation being performed, the model image may be left displayed instead of being hidden at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed. The model image may be hidden at the time when the performance is started.

By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect receiving period during which the special operation receiving part is provided with the opportunity to operate is lower than that of the first effect receiving period during which the opportunity to operate is provided to the specific operation receiving part. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of operational errors. Therefore, at the occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the special operation receiving part is given an operation opportunity, it is suggested that the reception of the effect is permitted or that the reception of the effect is permitted. It is desirable to output the acceptable reception sound. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect acceptance period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is less likely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable acceptability state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). It is a sound whose allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output is started within the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted and the state is reached in which reception of the performance is permitted, or before the start of the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted. It is something that suggests that the output is started at this time and that the reception of the effect will be permitted.

However, even at the occurrence of the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving part, it is suggested that the reception of the effect is permitted or that the reception of the effect is permitted. An acceptable acceptance sound may be output. However, in this case, it is desirable to change the form (timbre, etc.) of the allowable acceptance sound between when the first effect accepting period occurs and when the second effect accepting period occurs. Alternatively, during the first effect reception period, even if the effect reception is made while the reception permission sound is being output, the reception permission sound in the output state is continued without being ended, but in the second effect reception period. In (3), if the performance is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, it is desirable to terminate the acceptance acceptable sound in the output state in the middle. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to grasp which of the first effect receiving period and the second effect receiving period will occur, and the operation to the specific operation receiving part and the special operation receiving part are performed. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation on the part and the operation on the part has been accepted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) is reduced as time elapses. (For example, the display area is finally set to "0") to generate a small gauge effective period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is permitted. After displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image), the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) is reduced over time (for example, the display area is finally set to "0"). There is a case where a large gauge effective period (effect reception period) is generated that suggests the remaining time for which operation reception is permitted by performing a display to accept the operation. The effective period of the small gauge in which the image of the small gauge is displayed and the effective period of the large gauge in which the image of the large gauge is displayed are different from each other. The rate at which a mode that does not appear is executed) is different (for example, the large gauge valid period has a higher jackpot expectation). In addition to the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period, a valid period different from these may be generated. The small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period may provide an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may provide an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

In this regard, when an operation is accepted during the effective period of the large gauge, the change corresponding to the operation acceptance (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a display change or lamp emission) is started at the time when the execution is started. It is desirable to keep the large gauge image visible rather than hidden. In addition, even at the time when a change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp emission) in response to operation reception starts to be executed, the large gauge image becomes smaller as time elapses. It is desirable to ensure that the display is not terminated and continues. As a result, while the large gauge image was displayed, there was a sense of security that it seemed that there was a lot of remaining time left, but after the operation was accepted, there was a question as to whether the operation was properly accepted. This makes it possible to make the user feel a sense of uneasiness, and to appropriately maintain the sense of tension.

In this case, the display mode of the gauge image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the gauge image may be in a state where it is difficult to see the gauge image with another image. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, at least at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is started, the operation It is desirable to maintain the display state of the gauge image in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made, and to prevent the gauge image from becoming difficult to see due to other images. On the other hand, if the player's operation causes a change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as a change in the display or the light emission of the lamp) in response to the reception of the operation by the player during the effective period of the small gauge, the change occurs. The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when something (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs. ) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) may be generated according to the reception of the operation.

In addition, when the large gauge effective period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception acceptance sound that suggests that the reception of the performance is permitted, or that the reception of the performance is permitted. . As a result, the player can recognize that the large gauge effective period has occurred, and the sense of security until the operation is accepted can be emphasized. The "acceptable sound" means that when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable acceptability state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). It is a sound whose allowable state (effective period) has already occurred. In other words, it indicates that the output is started within the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted and the state is reached in which reception of the performance is permitted, or before the start of the set time during which reception of the performance is permitted. It is something that suggests that the output is started at this time and that the reception of the effect will be permitted.

However, even when the small gauge effective period occurs, a reception acceptance sound may be output to suggest that the performance reception is permitted or that the performance reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable to change the form (tone color, etc.) of the acceptability sound between when the small gauge valid period occurs and when the large gauge valid period occurs. Alternatively, during the effective period of the small gauge, even if the effect is received while the permitted reception sound is being output, the permitted reception sound that is in the output state is continued without being terminated, but during the effective period of the large gauge. It is desirable to end the acceptable acceptance sound in the output state when the effect acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is being output. Both of these configurations may be adopted. According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp which of the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period will occur, and operation reception during the small gauge valid period and the large gauge valid period can be performed. It becomes possible to properly grasp which of the operation acceptance and the operation reception in the period is performed.

The large-gauge image and the small-gauge image may be images that differ not only in size but also in form itself (such as images that are not similar).

Note that, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which operation reception is permitted, the simulated image is displayed dynamically so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced. It is what is displayed. In this regard, the model image is not hidden and remains displayed at the time when the change (at least one of the changes caused by the effect after the operation, such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp) corresponding to the operation reception starts to be executed. In this case, the dynamic display of the model image may be continued without being terminated.

Further, the model image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated model image, which will be described later, in which they are integrated.

In each example of effect described above and each example of effect described later, "operation reception" means detection by mechanical operation means such as buttons, as well as by detecting contact with a specific operation receiving part with a touch sensor. It may be one in which the operation is accepted, or one in which the operation is accepted by detecting the movement of the player in the specific area without contact.

In addition, when the effect that generates the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as "operation-related effect", the operation-related effect is not related to this. It may be executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, movable body effect, count effect, etc.) without. However, in this case, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another unrelated effect" It is desirable that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a higher rate than in the effect situation in which the "specific effect" is paralleled. In other words, when there is a production situation in which "operation-related production" and "another specific production unrelated to this" are performed in parallel, it is assumed that the production reception is not performed in the "operation-related production" and the post-operation production is not executed. Also, since ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is in the execution state, the decline in gaming interest can be suppressed, whereas the ``operation-type effect'' is executed but ``another specific effect unrelated to this'' is being executed. When there is a production situation in which the "specific production" is not executed, if the production reception is not performed in the "operation system production" and the production after the operation is not executed, it will be in a situation where no production is executed. Therefore, a decline in interest in gaming is inevitable. Therefore, when the "operational effect" is executed but "another specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" By making the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions higher than in the effect situation in which "effect" is paralleled, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest when the operation system effect occurs. become. The percentage may be 100%. By the way, the premonition effect that is performed before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect that the operation means to be operated operates are executed as "operation system effect" or related effects. It can be said that it is a thing. In addition, as the ``other specific effect'', for example, if it is generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the premonitory effect), it is suggested in advance that the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function more often. be able to In this case, it is desirable that the effect be executed as an effect that ends after the effect reception period (preferably, the post-operation effect) ends. On the other hand, as "another specific effect", for example, if it is executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a sign effect) and ends before the end of the effect reception period, It becomes possible to recognize only immediately before whether the situation is such that the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a high rate, so that the effect can be provided in a tense atmosphere. In this regard, as "another specific effect", if it is to be generated before the start of the effect acceptance period (preferably, the sign effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated multiple times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production acceptance period does not occur, so the ratio of the automatic production function to function when "another specific production" is executed is high. It will be possible to create a sense of tension about whether the production acceptance period will occur.

In addition, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). Until reaching the 1000th losing variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) based on the result of the big hit determination can be generated with a predetermined probability. In addition, even if the performance acceptance period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, the above automatic performance function may or may not function. On the other hand, when it is in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 times). , and when reaching the 1000th loss variation), in the pattern variation (production pattern) that reaches the specific value, regardless of the result of the big hit determination, an operation opportunity for the operation means (any of a plurality of operation means) is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioned, and there is an operation by the player within the effect reception period. A process for always generating the same post-operation effect as the time may be executed. According to such a configuration, when the number of times of continuous execution of the losing variation reaches a specific value, "The player should be operated every time the effect reception period occurs while the losing variation is being continuously performed. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, the pachinko machine 1 itself always functioned automatically even if there was no operation by the player. Since it is realized as an effect to make the game play, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained. It should be noted that at this time, in the effect acceptance period that occurs when the losing variation is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th losing variation), the losing variation is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, It is desirable to make a message such as "If it is troublesome, I will operate it for you"). Further, even after the symbol variation (production pattern) reaching a specific value is digested, the symbol variation is repeated every time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, the occurrence of a jackpot game state) is satisfied. Within (production pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the production acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated, and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate it on your behalf." It is desirable to execute a process that always generates the post-operation effect.

In addition, when in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation corresponding to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested, and the number of times of execution is a specific value (for example, 999 consecutive times). The number of remaining variations until reaching the 1000th lost variation) may be displayed.

In addition, while in a specific production state (automatic button production state), the loss variation according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and until the number of executions reaches a specific value, during the pattern variation, the first operation Both the effect receiving period for the means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means can occur. , the effect progress may be made so that only one of the effect receiving period for the first operating means and the effect receiving period for the second operating means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of the effect reception period itself, which causes expectations. become nauseous. However, in this production example, ``Even though the player was urged to operate each time the production acceptance period occurred while the losing variation was being continuously executed, no results were obtained. As if he felt responsible for what he had done so far, even if there was no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always functions the automatic effect function. In order not to have such expectations any longer, the effect reception period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) with a relatively low degree of expectation at the time of occurrence, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate an effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

Further, for the first effect acceptance period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means is given the opportunity to operate, it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Although it can occur both when it is not activated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) among the plurality of operation means Regarding the second effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to, it cannot occur when it is not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be possible to generate it when it is being done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) game interest can be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when generating the effect reception period based on the result of the big hit determination,
Displaying a simulated image (simulated image display means) that simulates the operation means (an operation target suggestive image that suggests the operation means to be operated),
When the player performs an operation while the model image is being displayed after the effect reception period has occurred, the post-operation effect can be executed based on the operation (player operation reception means),
・After the production acceptance period has occurred, if a specific timing arrives while the model image is being displayed and the player has not performed any operation, the post-operation production can be executed without receiving any operation by the player ( automatic production reception means)
However, the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different ratios (expectations) at which the post-operation effect is executed in a "mode advantageous to the player" when the effect is accepted. It is desirable to be able to According to such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized in both the case where the player's operation receiving means generates the post-operation effect and the case where the automatic effect receiving means generates the post-operation effect. It will be possible to generate a post-operation production while it is being done.

Further, when the post-operation effect is generated by the functioning of the above-described automatic effect function, the player does not get involved in the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) that is the object of operation. Since the effect is automatically generated, there is a concern that the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated post-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-described automatic effect function is activated to generate the post-operation effect, first, a model image (an operation target suggestive image that suggests the operation means to be operated) is displayed within the effect reception period, Even when the automatic effect function described above functions, it is desirable to generate a post-operation effect while the model image is displayed instead of being hidden. In this case, the display mode (for example, color or transmittance) of the operation target suggestion image before and after the post-operation effect is generated may not necessarily be the same. It suffices if it can be recognized even in the state where the post-operation effect has occurred. On the other hand, if a post-operation effect occurs due to an operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation object suggesting image may be hidden in the state where the post-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic display may be performed. As in the case where the effect function functions, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggesting image is displayed instead of being hidden. The effect after the operation may be executed using an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from at least the area where the simulated image is displayed, or may be performed by light emitted by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or by a movable decoration. may be executed as an operation by

At this time, if the model image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, the level of expectation (model image display mode) can be confirmed.

The model image that continues to be displayed in this manner is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has passed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred When the automatic processing is executed by the first automatic performance means when different time passes, the time from the execution of the post-operation performance to the non-display of the model image is also different from each other. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when the specific time has passed, or whether the post-operation effect has been generated by automatic processing when a time different from the specific time has passed. Even if there is no post-operation effect, by checking the time from when the post-operation effect is executed until the model image is hidden, it becomes possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect occurred. .

In addition, when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a specific time has passed, and when a post-operation effect occurs by automatic processing when a time different from the specified time has passed, a big hit is determined by the jackpot judgment. may be different.

In addition, when an effect reception period is generated in which an operation opportunity is given to the player while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), two displays are displayed during the effect reception period. Any one of the modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation for a big win, or a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation for a big win) can appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image ) appears, even if no operation is performed within the effect acceptance period, the effect is always accepted (the automatic effect function always functions), and the effect after the operation corresponding to the effect acceptance is executed, but the low expectation is displayed. When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, an effect reception (automatic effect function functions) is performed when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. The effect may be developed in such a manner that there are cases where the effect is not received (the automatic effect function is functioned) and the effect after the operation is not executed. That is, if you forget to operate when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is inevitable that the effect after the operation will not be confirmed, which will inevitably reduce the interest in the game. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if an operation is forgotten, the interest in the game will not decrease so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. Sometimes, if you forget to operate it, the automatic production function will always function within the production acceptance period to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to forgetting to operate it. If you forget to operate when the image) appears, the automatic effect function will not necessarily function within the effect reception period so that you do not forget to operate. It is expected that the player's sense of participation will be enhanced. Note that when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the low-expectation display mode (for example, blue operation image) appears, but the high-expectation display mode (for example, red operation image) appears. You may make it so that it cannot appear. In addition, any one of three or more display modes may appear during the performance acceptance period.

Further, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, other examples related to these automatic button rendering states may also be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Suggestion of expectations by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above example), A process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change to the effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button effect state, when the player's operation is not received within the effect acceptance period, the same change as when the effect is accepted to the effect (automatic effect function) is not executed. At this time, in the automatic button effect state, when the automatic effect function does not function when the operation by the player is not received within the effect reception period, the pattern variation is higher than when the automatic effect function functions. It is possible to execute a process in which the performance within the symbol variation is developed so that the degree of expectation (proportion) of the appearance of the big hit symbol is lowered. At this time, the degree of expectation (percentage) of the appearance of the big hit pattern may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, when an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is activated when the operation of the operation button 410 is intentionally not performed within the effect acceptance period. By confirming whether or not it functions, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit pattern will appear in the pattern variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, ``the post-operation effect itself, which could have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) had been received within the effect reception period, could not be confirmed.'' In the midst of the risk of possible production demerits, novel performance characteristics such as making the player exercise a performance selection such as ``do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period''. It is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation of the operation button 410 out of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can receive an effect. The above-described effects (specific operation-related effects (Figs. 166 to 186 )) is executable. In this regard, in the automatic button effect state, in the effect reception period that occurs in response to such a specific operation-related effect, these effects It is possible to execute the process of developing the production within the pattern variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic production function to function when there is no operation (reception of production) within the acceptance period is increased. At this time, the ratio of the functioning of the automatic effect function may be 100%.

According to such a configuration, the fact that a specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as a effect that suggests that the above-described automatic effect function functions at a high rate. As a result, it is possible to more preferably improve the amusement of the game when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

Also, as described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 is given more than when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity as a result of the effect. It is set so that the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit symbol in the symbol variation in the running state is higher when it is indicated that it will be granted. However, in the automatic button effect state, when there is no operation (reception of effect) within the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, the above-mentioned automatic effect function will function. It is more desirable to set the same ratio between the case where it is indicated that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given and the case where it is indicated that the opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001 is given.

According to such a configuration, even if an effect situation with a relatively low degree of expectation (suggesting that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, However, since the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions does not change due to this (the result of a specific operation-related production), the expectation for the above-mentioned automatic production function to function It becomes possible to maintain it in a favorable manner. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and expectation level suggestion by the automatic effect function) that are not affected by each other's effects are performed in parallel, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

A specific example of an effect suggesting the degree of expectation by such an automatic effect function will be described below with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189. FIG.

FIG. 187(a) shows that in the automatic button production state, the number of reservations is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is displayed on the production display device 1600 in a specific production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the state of the production being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, the display area of the effect display device 1600 indicates that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (here, "auto button Setting”) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 187(b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 187(a). As shown in the drawing, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "Press ” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific effect acceptance period). At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a luminous state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 .

Here, assuming that the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect acceptance period shown in FIG. etc.), and multiple modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" with relatively low expectations, "great heat!" with relatively high expectations, etc.) Either one will be displayed. At this time, the setting of the automatic button performance state is canceled to return to the normal performance state, and the specific performance acceptance period is also terminated when the performance is accepted without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 187(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specified effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the ratio is 60%. , the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 40%.

In other words, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. As such, the post-operation effect that would have occurred if only the effect reception had been performed is not executed. After that, after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect receiving period, the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed.

On the other hand, when the automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. , the post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted within the specific effect acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is received within a specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain, etc.) is effected, and the degree of expectation differs within the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!", "hot heat!", etc.) is displayed, but a post-operation production occurs according to the operation within a specific production reception period In both the case where the automatic effect function is activated and the post-operation effect is generated, the mode of display in the display area is the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 187(e), the effect progresses in such a manner that a ready-to-win state is formed after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific effect receiving period is generated as "a effect receiving period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions", or "the above-described automatic effect function As for whether or not to generate the "effect reception period in which the function does not function", when executing the pattern variation, it is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination, and as a result, 60% during the specific effect reception period , the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a ratio of 40%. For example, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning time is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Period for acceptance of effect in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the big win is lost as a result of the judgment of the big win, the selection table for the time of losing is referred to, and the selection table for the time of losing is referred to. Based on the allocation ratio in the selection table, "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function works" or "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, 60% of the time, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function, and 40% of the time, the above-described automatic effect function functions during the specific effect receiving period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific effect reception period is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions", the "above-mentioned Which of these periods should be generated so that the ratio of the appearance of the jackpot pattern will be higher when the pattern fluctuation is stopped than in the case of "the effect acceptance period in which the automatic effect function does not function" is determined (selected) based on the result of the big hit determination.

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function functions when the effect reception period occurs during which it is determined that a highly anticipated mode ("Super heat!" etc.) will appear as a post-operation effect when the effect is received. However, when the performance reception period occurs, it is determined that a low-expectation mode (“Chance!” etc.) will appear as a post-operation performance when the performance is accepted. The rate at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, it is determined whether or not the automatic effect function functions when the operation of the operation button 410 is intentionally prevented during the effect acceptance period. By confirming it, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big winning pattern will appear in the pattern variation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button effect state, ``the post-operation effect itself, which could have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) had been received within the effect reception period, could not be confirmed.'' In the midst of the risk of possible production demerits, novel performance characteristics such as making the player exercise a performance selection such as ``do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period''. It is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

However, as shown in FIG. 187(d), even if the automatic effect function functions when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as a post-operation effect. Since low-level aspects (such as “Chance!”) can also appear, even if the function of the automatic production function suggests a relatively high level of expectation, this Such a continuous suggestion of expectations (suggestion due to the functioning of the automatic presentation function, suggestion due to the mode of presentation after operation) realizes a production performance that does not let you down, and it is possible to maintain the game interest in a suitable manner. come to be expected.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 187(c), even if the automatic effect function does not function when the operation of the operation button 410 is intentionally prevented during the effect reception period, the effect is not even received. Since there is still a possibility that a high-expectation aspect appeared in the post-operation effect that would have appeared if the game had been set, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. However, when the production situation shown in FIG. 187(c) (situation where the automatic production function does not function and the production does not appear after the operation) appears, the production situation shown in FIG. 187(d) (automatic production function functioned, but it is desirable that the degree of expectation is lower than when the state of low expectation appeared as a post-operation effect.

Figures 188 and 189 show that when an effect acceptance period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see Figures 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function suggests the degree of expectation. A specific example is shown.

FIG. 188(a) shows that in the automatic button production state, the number of reservations is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ (special pattern) is displayed on the production display device 1600 in a specific production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance being performed. In this example as well, as shown in the drawing, during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, the display area of the effect display device 1600 indicates that the automatic button effect state is being controlled (in this case, , “Auto button setting”) is continuously displayed.

FIG. 188(b) shows, during execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It may be a production) shows the production situation in which the production is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. , and while the common display effect is being performed, which one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given the opportunity to operate is kept secret. . However, when a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of a specific operation-related effect, does an effect situation appear indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of the first effect with a relatively low degree of expectation? As a result of the second effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, a state of effect indicating that the sword ornament 5001 should be operated appears. Which of the sword ornaments 5001 with a high value is given an operation opportunity is shown.

FIG. 188(c) shows that the operation button 410 should be operated as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. appears, indicating that an effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the drawing, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, "press" is displayed). A character display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of a specific effect acceptance period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a luminous state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 .

Here, assuming that the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. In addition to performing the performance operation, one of a plurality of modes with different expectations within the display area (for example, "chance!" with relatively low expectations, "great heat!" with relatively high expectations, etc.) will be displayed. At this time, the setting of the automatic button performance state is canceled to return to the normal performance state, and the specific performance acceptance period is also terminated when the performance is accepted without consuming the remaining time.

On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-mentioned The automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%.

That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated, and as a result, an appropriate operation is performed within the effect acceptance period. A situation may occur in which the operation cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, if the effect acceptance period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 188 (c)), the effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 187(b)), the production within the symbol variation so that the rate at which the above-described automatic production function functions when there is no operation (reception of production) within the production reception period is increased. is capable of executing a process that is advanced. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration can be suppressed while suppressing the anxiety that "a proper operation may not be performed within the effect reception period and the effect corresponding to the operation may not appear." It becomes possible to provide the interest of which of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related presentation. In order to obtain such a function and effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic presentation function has functioned.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display (here, "auto button high probability") indicating that the automatic effect function is functioning at a high rate will continue. It is designed to appear

It should be noted that, if the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect that would have occurred if only the effect reception had been performed is not executed. After that, after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect receiving period, the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function does not function. 187(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. Expectations should be set higher than they would otherwise have been.

Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%, even though the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 188(e), the effect The post-operation performance having the same contents as when the performance is accepted by performing the operation within the acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is received within a specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtains, etc.) is effected, and the degree of expectation differs within the display area. One of multiple modes (for example, "chance!", "hot heat!", etc.) is displayed, but a post-operation production occurs according to the operation within a specific production reception period In both the case where the automatic effect function is activated and the post-operation effect is generated, the manner of display in the display area is the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 188(f), the effect progresses in such a manner that a ready-to-win state is formed after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect acceptance period.

On the other hand, FIG. 189(g) shows a state in which sword ornament 5001 should be operated as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. It shows that an effect situation indicating that the sword decoration 5001 is in effect has occurred, and the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 has occurred. In this rendering situation, as shown in the drawing, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display (here, " Put away your sword" and a bar display that shows the remaining time for a specific production acceptance period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, and this prompts the user to operate the operating button 410, and the sword ornament 5001 is moved from the operating state to the original position. operation is allowed.

Here, assuming that the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect acceptance period shown in FIG. The same post-operation effect as when the button is pressed will be executed. However, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188(g), the operation of the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. Among the multiple aspects with different expectations (for example, “chance!” with relatively low expectations and “hot heat!” with relatively high expectations) The appearance rate in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. Further, when the operation to the sword decorative body 5001 is received during the performance reception period, the automatic button performance state is canceled and returned to the normal performance state, and the remaining time of the specific performance reception period is consumed. It is the same as the case of the effect acceptance period shown in FIG.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188(c), even though the production situation is expected to be higher than when the production situation shown in FIG. 188(c) occurs, production acceptance occurs in the production situation shown in FIG. As in the case of not doing so, 20% of the time the automatic effect function does not work, and 80% of the time the automatic effect function works.

According to such a configuration, as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the effect situation (FIG. 188) indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation. (c)) appears, the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions does not change due to this (the production result of a specific operation-related production), so the above-mentioned automatic production It becomes possible to preferably maintain the expectation that the function will work. In this way, two different effects that are not affected by each other's effects (specific operation-related effects, and expectations suggested by the automatic effect function) are performed in parallel, resulting in a disadvantageous effect on one side. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the game interest at times. However, in this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188(c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. 189(g), in the production situation shown in FIG. Expectations are lower than if it worked.

It should be noted that if the automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. , the post-operation effect, which should have occurred if the effect reception had been performed, is not executed. After that, after a predetermined period of time from the occurrence of the specific effect receiving period, the effect progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed. However, in the production situation shown in FIG. 189(g), when the sword decorative body 5001 is not operated within the production reception period (when the production reception does not occur), the automatic production function described above functions. 187(b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above is activated. Expectations should be higher than if it didn't work.

Also, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. The post-operation performance having the same contents as when the performance is accepted by performing the operation within the performance acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that occurs when the effect is received within a specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtains, etc.) is effected, and the degree of expectation differs within the display area. If one of multiple modes (for example, "chance!", "hot heat!", etc.) is displayed, but a post-operation effect occurs in response to the operation within the effect reception period In both the cases where the post-operation effect occurs due to the functioning of the automatic effect function, the manner of display within the display area is the same. After that, as shown in FIG. 189(j), the presentation progresses in such a manner that the ready-to-win state is formed after a predetermined time from the generation of the presentation acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related presentation.

It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188(c) and 189(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect is generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions" or "the above-mentioned As for whether to generate the "effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function", similar to the case of the effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 187 (b)). At the time of execution, determination (selection) is made based on the result of judging the big hit, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 20% during the effect acceptance period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. However, 80% of the time, the automatic effect function described above functions. For example, when the jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot determination, the selection table for the winning time is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding selection, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions. "Period" or "Period for acceptance of effect in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the big win is lost as a result of the judgment of the big win, the selection table for the time of losing is referred to, and the selection table for the time of losing is referred to. Based on the allocation ratio in the selection table, "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function works" or "the effect acceptance period in which the above-described automatic effect function does not function" is generated. As a result, during the effect acceptance period (see FIGS. 188(c) and 189(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect, the automatic effect function does not function 20% of the time, and 80% of the time. The above-mentioned automatic production function is designed to function at a ratio of .

Similarly, the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 188(c) and 189(g)) is also generated as "the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions". In this case, the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern is higher when the pattern fluctuation is stopped than in the case of "the production acceptance period in which the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function". , which of these periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the jackpot determination.

Note that the post-operation effect occurs during the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188(c) and 189(g)) corresponding to a specific operation-related effect and when the specific operation-related effect is not executed. A different effect may be executed during the effect receiving period (see FIG. 187(b)). However, even if different effects are executed, it is desirable that any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

Further, the sword decoration body 5001 used in the production examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be the sword decoration body 5001 of the type shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 188 and 189, an example in which the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. Effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect shown in FIGS.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related production is executed in a state not controlled to the automatic button production state, the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production In addition, the "setting operation to the automatic button effect state is not accepted" state is performed before the effect reception period occurs. 188(b) (the effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started), and is preferably continued until the effect acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if an attempt is made to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that a specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted. It is now possible to provide ``effects using the automatic effect function'' only for those who continue to play while maintaining the automatic button effect state. You will be able to provide dramatic value to what you do.

In addition, a production reception period (see FIG. 187(b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related production, and a production reception period (FIG. 188(c), FIG. 189(g) corresponding to a specific operation-related production )), the first display mode (for example, the blue button image BTG and the blue sword decoration image SYG) and the second display mode (for example, the green button image BTG and the green sword decoration SYG) can appear, and when the second display mode appears, compared to when the first display mode appears, ``the effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function functions'' is occurring. It is desirable to have a high percentage of

In addition, a production reception period (see FIG. 187(b)) that occurs without executing a specific operation-related production, and a production reception period (FIG. 188(c), FIG. 189(g) corresponding to a specific operation-related production. )), a third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) can appear, and when the third display mode appears, the "automatic effect described above A state in which the "performance acceptance period in which the function functions" is always occurring may be set.

According to these configurations, in the automatic button effect state, it is no longer possible to confirm the post-operation effect itself that could have been confirmed if only the effect reception (operation on the operation button 410) had been performed within the effect reception period. To provide materials for judgment as to whether or not to exercise a performance selection such as ``Do not dare to operate the operation button 410 within the performance acceptance period'' in the midst of the risk that a performance demerit may occur. can be done, and it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" exemplified in FIGS. is preferably generated as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (FIG. 187(b), etc.) that occurs without execution of a specific operation-related effect. That is, in a specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player side is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is to be activated, and as a result, an appropriate operation is performed within the effect acceptance period. Although a situation in which the operation cannot be performed may occur, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed by setting a long time for the presentation acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related presentation". is expected.

In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 188 and 189, in the effect acceptance period corresponding to the “specific operation-related effect”, the automatic effect function is set to function at a relatively high rate. For example, whether or not the automatic effect function functions by setting the effect reception period to have a longer time than the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" It can be said that it is desirable in order to improve the amusement of the game by sustaining the performance of the game for a longer time. In this case, regarding the timing at which the automatic effect function functions, in the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect", it will come when the first time has passed since the period occurred. On the other hand, in the effect acceptance period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the automatic effect function is to arrive when the second time longer than the first time has passed since the period occurred. It is important to maintain the effect of whether or not the function works for a long time.

In addition, between the effect reception period that occurs without executing the "specific operation-related effect" and the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect", the time from the start to the end of these periods are made different, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only have different speeds. That is, in this case, even if an effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, the period continues for the same amount of time as the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed. Since it can make you think that the automatic production function works or not, coupled with the “irritation” caused by continuing for a longer period of time than expected, the production performance as to whether the automatic production function works or not can be maintained appropriately. You will be able to

According to the example shown in FIGS. 187 to 189, the first production reception period (specific operation means (operation button 410) production reception period) when it is controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state) occurs, and even if the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated within the first effect acceptance period, the processing by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not necessarily Although it is not always executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time has passed since the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect is not executed. When the operation for the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not performed within the first effect reception period than the 1 production reception period (the production reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)), the first The rate at which the process by the automatic effect means (the automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is executed is increased.

In this regard, as for such an automatic button effect state, the rate at which the automatic effect function functions ("60%-40%", "20%-80%") differs depending on the type of effect acceptance period as described above. When the automatic button effect state to be set is the "first automatic button effect state", the ratio at which the automatic effect function functions differs depending on the type of the effect acceptance period ("50%-50%", "10 %-90%”), and set the automatic effect function to always function when the effect acceptance period occurs regardless of the type of the period. A third automatic button presentation state may be further prepared, and any one of these presentation states including a normal presentation state in which the automatic presentation function does not function may be set. In addition, the game is always played in the automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state) without preparing a normal production state in which the automatic production function does not function. or an effect may be executed.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned "type of effect reception period" may mean that the type of post-operation effect that occurs when an operation is received is different. For example, in the first automatic button effect state, the ``first effect reception period for generating the effect after the conversation advance notice operation'' and the ``second effect reception period for generating the effect after the cut-in operation'' When the operation to the operation means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated (although automatic acceptance is not made), but "After the operation to operate the movable body A In the third performance acceptance period for generating the performance, when the operation to the operating means is not accepted within the performance acceptance period, the same post-operation performance as when the acceptance is made is generated (automatic acceptance is made). It will happen. On the other hand, in the "second automatic button effect state (second effect state)" in which automatic acceptance is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button effect state (first effect state)", the "conversation notice In the first effect reception period for generating the post-operation effect of ", when the operation of the operating means is not accepted within the effect reception period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated (automatic reception is not performed), the "second effect reception period for generating the effect after the operation of cut-in" and the "third effect reception period for generating the effect after the operation of moving the movable body A". When the operation to the operating means is not accepted within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is made is generated (automatic acceptance is made). However, any of the multiple effect reception periods including the first effect reception period (conversation notice type), the second effect reception period (cut-in type), and the third effect reception period (movable body A type) will occur. Even in such a case, when the operation to the operating means is not accepted, the ``normal presentation state'' which does not generate the same post-operation presentation as when the acceptance is made is not prepared and set to this. will not be possible.

That is, in this case, "an operation means that can be operated by a player, a determination means that makes a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined starting condition, and a game based on the determination by the determination means that a predetermined result is obtained. and an effect state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of effect states. A plurality of performance reception periods with different types of post-operation performance generated when an operation is accepted are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of performance reception periods occurs in the plurality of performance states, the corresponding performance reception period occurs. Depending on the type of the production reception period that has occurred, when the operation to the operating means is not accepted within the production reception period, the same post-operation production as when the reception is made, and when the reception is made. When any one of the plurality of performance reception periods occurs, according to the type of the production reception period that has occurred, When the operation to the operating means is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is made is generated, and the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is made is not generated. However, the likelihood of occurrence of the same post-operation effect includes at least a second effect state different from the first effect state, and which of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs. A gaming machine characterized in that even in such a case, when an operation to the operating means is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated." It will be established as

Also, the distribution rate may be set to either 0% or 100% according to the type of effect reception period and the type of effect state.

Also, the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function functions in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187(b), the timing (the first ), the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to terminate the first effect receiving period and generate a corresponding post-operation effect. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187(b), the timing (the first 1 timing within the production reception period), the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function, and after that, the first production reception period is ended without the post-operation production being executed (the post-operation production is not executed after that). ). On the other hand, if the automatic effect function functions in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect reception period or At the timing when a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses after the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, and the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period is performed. To end a performance acceptance period and to generate a post-operation performance corresponding thereto. However, if the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect reception period or At the timing when the second predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function does not function, and after that, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period is continued without the post-operation effect being executed. (After that, the post-operation effect is not executed).

According to such a configuration, the automatic effect function can function at a relatively early stage in the first effect acceptance period in which the ratio of the functioning of the automatic effect function is low, and the automatic effect function is activated. Even if it does not function, the player will be given enough time to receive the effect by his/her own operation until the end of the first effect reception period. You will be able to play games with your heart. On the other hand, in the second effect receiving period or the third effect receiving period, in which the ratio of the functioning of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic effect function is not effective. To provide a game with a sense of tension even though the functioning ratio of the automatic performance function is high because the player does not have much time to operate the function when the function does not work. will be able to

In addition, regarding the above modification, in the first effect reception period, at the timing when the first predetermined time has passed (timing within the first effect reception period), the above-mentioned automatic effect function may or may not function. However, in the second production reception period and the third production reception period, the above-mentioned automatic production function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has passed (timing within the second production reception period). You may do so. Even with such a configuration, the automatic effect function can only function at a relatively late stage, and if the automatic effect function does not function (due to some trouble), it takes time for the player to operate. Since it is thought that the player fantasizes that there is not much room left, it can be expected that the same effect will be achieved.

In addition to the example effects described above with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, in other example effects as well, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by the player's operation. For example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or it may be always controlled as an automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Alternatively, the game machine may be provided as a game machine in which the setting itself to the automatic button presentation state is not performed and the automatic presentation function can always function at a predetermined rate.

[Operation unification control when in the automatic button effect state]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can progress depending on the player's own operation (want to end the automatic button effect state) desire) may occur. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period related to the specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception A process for terminating the automatic button effect state by performing only one operation on the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is granted within the period, and after the operation in response to the effect acceptance. Effect (processing that can change the effect) and (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state) are performed. Thus, even when the desire to end the automatic button performance state and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation occurs within the performance reception period, the loss of the operation opportunity is avoided and the performance mode is switched. can be performed smoothly.

As described above, when setting the automatic button effect state when the pattern variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 among the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001. .

On the other hand, as described above, in the case of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state when the pattern variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are operated in the state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. Only the button 410 is allowed to be operated for canceling the setting. On the other hand, in a state in which an effect reception period is occurring, if an operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to be given an operation opportunity is operated within the effect reception period. , a process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (process that can cause a change in the effect) in response to the acceptance of the effect are performed respectively (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated while the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 is occurring, the operation is not accepted and the process for ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

However, some players use a selfish game method such as ``while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), you can operate yourself only when you want to advance the production.'' It can be assumed that some wish to Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect reception period for the specific effect when it is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect A process to end the state (specific effect state) and a process to cause a change in the effect are performed respectively (operation unification control in the automatic button effect state), but control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) If the above special operation means is operated within the effect acceptance period for the specific effect when it is being done, the process for ending the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not performed and the effect changes according to the operation. It is designed to perform processing that can cause

According to such a configuration, when it is desired to end the automatic button effect state and actively play the operation game thereafter, the user operates the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) within the effect acceptance period. If you only want to rarely operate while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), you can operate the special operation means within the production acceptance period. The game desired by the player can be realized only by selectively using the operating means as described above.

Operation unification control in such an automatic button presentation state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192. FIG.

FIG. 190(a) shows that in the automatic button production state, the number of reservations is in the state of 1, and the variable display of the decorative design SZ (special design) is displayed on the production display device 1600 in a specific production pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows how an effect receiving period for receiving a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred in a ready-to-win state in the effect situation being performed. As shown in the figure, during the period when the automatic button effect state is being controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is being controlled within the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button Setting in progress”) appears continuously.

Further, as shown in the drawing, even during this effect reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, the lower An arrow display in the direction and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in a light-emitting state, and this also prompts the user to operate the operation button 410 . However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the luminous state, but also the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 that has not undergone any change is allowed to be operated.

190(b) to (d) show that although the operation button 410 was not operated within the production acceptance period that occurred in FIG. It shows that the post-operation effect having the same contents as when the operation is performed inside and the effect is accepted is being executed. 190(a) ends when the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions, the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (described as "PUSH" in the figure) are terminated. Any opportunity to operate the pressed button 1410 is lost.

That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, a stepwise progress of production appears, and any of the production results of a plurality of modes with different expectations (Fig. 190(c), Fig. 190(d)) can be displayed. Even if it has been determined (determined based on the result of the big hit determination) that it will finally appear at the start of the symbol variation, first, as shown in FIG. smoke image) is displayed. 190(c), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 190(b) (here, explosion While the smoke image by smoke) gradually disappears, it is decided to display a production image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests that the result is a production with relatively low expectations. 190(d), the specific effect image (here, smoke image due to explosion) shown in FIG. 190(b) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (in this case, an omikuji of “Nakayoshi”) is displayed, which suggests that the performance results are relatively highly expected.

190(a) to 190(d) appears as a basic presentation progress when the presentation acceptance period occurs in the automatic button presentation state, and the automatic presentation function described above. Even after the post-operation effect (FIGS. 190(b) to 190(d)) is executed by , the automatic button effect state is maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode that allows the effect to progress depending on the player's own operation (automatic button effect state desire to terminate) may arise. Such a desire often arises when an effect reception period occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the player, but there is a limited time from the start of the effect reception period to the end of the effect reception period. It is difficult to perform both the operation to end the automatic button effect state and the operation to accept the operation, and as a result, the opportunity to operate may be lost. If so, the interest in gaming may decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190(a), the operation is detected. (Detection that the operation button 410 is positioned at the operation position), the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect are performed (automatically operation unification control in the button production state). 190(a) ends when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, the automatic effect function described above is disabled, and the special operation means ( The opportunity to operate the button 1410 described as "PUSH" in the figure is also lost.

Even if the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a), the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period and the effect is accepted as shown in FIG. 191(e). As a post-operation effect corresponding to the event, first, a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke caused by an explosion) is displayed. After that, if the effect progresses to a effect result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. While the smoke image by smoke) gradually disappears, it is decided to display a production image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests that the result is a production with relatively low expectations. 191(g), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) shown in FIG. 191(e) gradually disappears. In the process, a performance image (in this case, an omikuji of “Nakayoshi”) is displayed, which suggests that the performance results are relatively highly expected.

However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect accepting period generated in FIG. 190(a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191(e) to (g), after the operation of the operation button 410 has been received, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state. The display shown (here, "auto button setting in progress") is hidden. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. A suggestive display (here, "auto button release") appears (see FIG. 191(e)).

Also, as described above, during the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. button) 1410 is allowed. And this special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is "operating by itself only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without switching the effect mode). As mentioned above, it is prepared in order to make selfish gaming methods such as "advance the performance by using

Therefore, even if the special operation means (the button marked as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190(a), as shown in FIG. First, a specific performance image (here, an image of smoke caused by explosion) is displayed as a post-operation performance in response to the reception of performance by performing an operation within the performance reception period. 192(i), the specific effect image shown in FIG. 192(h) (here, explosion While the smoke image by smoke) gradually disappears, it is decided to display a production image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests that the result is a production with relatively low expectations. 192(h), the specific effect image (here, the smoke image due to the explosion) gradually disappears, as shown in FIG. 192(j). In the process, a performance image (in this case, an omikuji of “Nakayoshi”) is displayed, which suggests that the performance results are relatively highly expected. It should be noted that when the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is received for the effect, the effect reception period generated in FIG. The function is disabled and the opportunity to operate the operation button 410 is also lost.

However, if a special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. 190(a), the automatic button effect state is not performed at the same time. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192(h) to (j), even after the operation of the operation button 410 has been received, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is controlled to the automatic button effect state. The display shown (here, "auto button setting in progress") is continuously displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is When an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic effect function functions (FIG. 190(b)), or when an operation on the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 191(e)), special effects that cannot appear It allows the performance to appear. Such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like, but in the example of effect shown in FIG. 190(b)), or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191(e)). I'm trying to Instead of the glittering effect display, an effect using a movable body, a lamp, or the like may be additionally implemented.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period regarding the omikuji effect when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is controlled, the change contents of the effect are generated. Then, when the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is being controlled, the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period for the Omikuji effect. The content of the change in the effect produced in the case is made different from each other. In this case, when the above-mentioned special effect (in this case, a glittering effect display) appears, it is possible to say, "The operation means has been operated and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception has appeared, but the automatic button effect state is While enjoying the post-operation production, it becomes possible to recognize that the setting is not canceled and this is continued. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192(i), even in the case of displaying an effect image (here, a “lucky” omikuji) that suggests a result of a relatively low expectation, the special An effect (here, a glittering effect display) can appear.

In addition, such a special effect (here, a glittering effect display) is made to appear additionally to the above-described post-operation effect at a predetermined rate based on the result of the big hit determination, and the special effect is displayed. When the performance additionally appears, it is desirable to make the ratio of the appearance of the big win pattern due to the pattern variation higher than when the special performance does not appear. However, in this case, it would be beneficial for the player to operate the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410. There is concern that operations on Therefore, when the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated during the effect acceptance period that occurred in FIG. If the effect display) does not appear, any effect will appear by operating the operation button 410 within the effect reception period generated in FIG. It is desirable to make the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern lower than in the case of the pattern variation.

According to such a configuration, by operating the "special operation means (the button labeled 'PUSH' in the figure)" 1410, "an operation was performed on the operation means and a post-operation effect appeared in response to the reception of the effect. In order to create a state where the automatic button production state is not canceled and this is continued, there is a production disadvantage such as 'it can be suggested that the ratio of the appearance of the jackpot pattern due to the pattern fluctuation is extremely low'. Since the player is exposed to possible risks, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained by having the player exercise such a choice of presentation.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 192(i), although the same production mode as the example shown in FIG. 190(c) and 191(f), it is possible to recognize that the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern due to the pattern variation is lower than in the examples shown in FIGS. However, in the example shown in FIG. 192(i), while making it possible to recognize that the expectation level is low, the effects are shown in FIGS. 190(c) and 191(f). By making it the same as the case, a third person who does not operate the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 will be in a production situation in which the production selection has failed. is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will suppress the decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if any of the effect selections are made within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. e), as shown in FIG. 192(h), etc., a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke caused by an explosion) is displayed. It may be displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the rate at which the highly anticipated performance mode (here, the omikuji of "Nakayoshi") appears or the rate at which the special effect appears differs.

In addition, even if any of the performance selections are made within the performance acceptance period that occurred in FIG. (here, either "good luck" or "medium good luck") may be made to appear directly as a post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to grasp that the production situation (Fig. 192 (i)) in which the production selection failed (Fig. 192(i)) appears, the production mode with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, an image of smoke caused by an explosion) when one of the fortune slips of "Good luck" or "Nakayoshi") appears as a post-operation effect.

In addition, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation even within the effect reception period that occurred in FIG. may

Also, the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, another operation means that has already been prepared may be used.

190(a), is there a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 out of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) can receive the effect? Alternatively, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186)) regarding whether there is a period in which the operation to another operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) can receive the effect is executed. may occur as a result of

In addition, during the effect acceptance period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, a first effect is also given to the special operation means (the button labeled as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 190(a)) and the second effect reception period during which the operation opportunity for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is not given are included. good. In this case, when the first effect receiving period (see FIG. 190(a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. ) is desirably made to appear at a higher rate until the symbol variation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the rate at which the above-described specific operation-related effects (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appear depends on whether the first effect receiving period or the second effect receiving period occurs. It comes to function as a suggested production.

[Stable side automatic effect processing]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the operation by the player within the effect acceptance period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when applying the above-mentioned another example) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change in effect as when the operation is performed can be executed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means are operated" are performed. It is possible to generate the production acceptance period. Therefore, such a special effect receiving period occurs when the state is controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and during the special effect receiving period, for any operation means If there is no operation, for which of the multiple operation means will the automatic effect function be activated? becomes a problem.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, special effects such as "a plurality of operation means can receive effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operation means is operated" are provided. If the production reception period occurs, it is not ``whether or not there is a possibility that a more expected production result will appear'', but rather ``whether there is a possibility that a lower expected production result will appear''. Based on the standard, the process of activating the automatic production function for the operation means different from "the operation means on the side that can generate the production that has the possibility of producing a production result with a lower degree of expectation" (stable side automatic production processing) can be executed.

According to such a configuration, the effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the effect reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special effect reception period is Since it will not appear when the automatic effect function is activated, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation such as "when you forget to operate, the automatic effect function will cause the least expected effect mode to appear." It will be possible to avoid it.

Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect processing in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195. FIG.

First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs while the game is not controlled to the automatic button effect state and is in the normal effect state. In FIG. 193(a), in the normal effect state, the number of reservations is in the state of 3, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. In the effect situation being performed, the player side can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001 under the condition that the ready-to-win state is formed. It shows a production situation in which a production display suggesting the start of a special production reception period is shown. In this production situation, neither the reception of the production for the operation button 410 nor the reception of the production for the sword ornament 5001 has been activated yet. The operation button 410 is illuminated and the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the unsheathed position in order to prompt the user to decide which of the decoration 5001 should be operated. Further, the effect display device 1600 displays a button image BTG and a sword decoration image SYG.

FIG. 193(b) shows a special effect acceptance period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. It shows the production situation in which the production reception period that can be selected by the side) has occurred. In this production situation, at least a part of the production display on the production display device 1600 that has appeared since the production situation shown in FIG. 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are kept as they are, an instruction display prompting the operation of either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG A downward arrow that is displayed correspondingly, a bar display that indicates the remaining time of the special effect acceptance period, etc.) appears.

Here, in the rendering situation shown in FIG. 193(b), a character image such as "stable" is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as "random" is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. It is However, instead of this, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operation means are capable of accepting effects. Also, the dedicated mark may not be displayed when both of the two operating means are capable of receiving the effect. For example, even though both the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, the user may say, "Do not display a model image imitating the operation button 410, and display the sword decoration 5001." The simulated image may be displayed", or the simulated image of the operation button 410 may be displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 may not be displayed".

That is, in this example of effect, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is made within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. After what has been done is displayed (Fig. 193(c)), the effect result is "destroy 50 bodies", suggesting that the smaller the number of defeated creatures, the lower the level of expectation, and the larger the number of defeated bodies, the higher the level of expectation. and "destroy 100" based on the result of the big hit determination (Fig. 193(d), Fig. 193(e)). For example, in the effect after the button side operation when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193(d) appears at the rate of "40%", 193(d) appears at a rate of ``60%'', and at a rate of ``40%'', the presentation mode shown in FIG. 193(e) can be made to appear.

On the other hand, if the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 is made within the special effect acceptance period, the effect after the sword side operation is first displayed after the effect reception for the sword decoration 5001 has been made ( FIG. 194(f)) shows that the lower the number of defeats, the lower the expectation, and the greater the number of defeats, the higher the expectation. An effect (FIGS. 194(g) to 194(i)) for making one of "Defeat 777 Bodies" appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the effect after the sword side operation when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194(i) appears at a rate of "40%", and the rate of "40%" is set for the effect after the sword side operation when the big hit is lost. 194(g) appears, the effect shown in FIG. 194(h) appears at the rate of "50%", and the effect shown in FIG. 194(i) appears at the rate of "0%". Aspects can be made to appear.

193 to 195, regardless of which of the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation was performed, the effect mode in which the number of defeats is small is shown. has a lower expectation level than the production mode with a large number of defeats. Also, when the number of defeats is the same production mode (for example, the production mode shown in FIG. 193(e), the production mode shown in FIG. 194(h), the production mode shown in FIG. 195(e) described later) , the degree of expectation may be different, but it is desirable to make it the same.

In such a configuration, a special effect acceptance period is generated for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), and the special effect acceptance period is allowed to accept the effect. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (effect after button side operation, effect after sword side operation) according to the type of operation means on the operated side within the effect acceptance period, one operation means is operated. The monotonous performance of just playing the game is improved, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In particular, instead of showing the same degree of expectation by operating either the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means) 2 operation means) is operated, a specific effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 194 (g) " I want to see the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side effect (sword side operation after effect) at the risk of taking such a risk. It is expected to maintain the interest in games by giving conflicts and stimuli about whether.

In this case, the effect after the button side operation is "the specific effect mode with the lowest expectation" among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period. (Here, the effect mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 194(g))" is eliminated. In addition, the after-sword-side-operation effect is defined as "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, Then, in the sense that there is a risk of the appearance of the "destroy one body" production mode)" shown in FIG.

Furthermore, in this production example, from the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 193(a) to the appearance of the production situation shown in FIG. 193(a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the big hit determination, and when the effect mode appears, it is more likely than when the effect mode does not appear. , when an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001, the appearance rate of "a specific mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 194(g))" appears is low. It is possible to implement the production progress in various ways. This percentage may be 0%.

According to such a configuration, even if there is a risk that "a specific presentation mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the presentation mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 194(g))" may appear, 193(a-b) can be used as a basis for determining whether or not to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. , it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably improved when the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 193(b) occurs.

It should be noted that, in the normal effect state, even though the special effect reception period shown in FIG. The function does not work, and the effect progresses without executing any of the effect after the button side operation and the effect after the sword side operation.

On the other hand, FIGS. 195(a) to 195(e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs while the automatic button effect state is being controlled.

As shown in FIGS. 195(a), 195(a-b), and 195(b), even if it is controlled to the automatic button effect state, it is controlled to the automatic button effect state. Except for the fact that the display indicating that (here, "Auto button is being set") is continuously appearing on the effect display device 1600, the effect display suggesting that the special effect acceptance period will start appears. 193(a), 193(a-b), and 193(b)), the contents are the same as those in the normal effect state described above until the special effect reception period ends. progressed.

However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. Activate the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 that is different from the sword ornament 5001 on the side that can generate the effect that may appear in the effect mode of "destroy one body" shown in 194 (g). It is possible to execute a process (stable side automatic effect process) to cause it.

That is, in this case, the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect acceptance period shown in FIG. 195(b). By doing so, the same change as in the case where the operation of the operation button 410 is received during the special effect acceptance period is caused in the effect. Therefore, as the effect after the button side operation, first, after the fact that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been received is displayed (Fig. 195(c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the expectation and the larger the number of defeats. 195 (d), 195 (e). ) will be executed.

According to such a configuration, the expectation is the lowest among a plurality of possible effects modes that can occur when the effect reception is performed for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within the special effect reception period. Since the production mode (here, the production mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 194(g)) cannot appear when the automatic production function functions, It is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of such a situation that the lowest expected performance mode appears due to the automatic performance function.

Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, there is a concern that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, within the special effect acceptance period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 195 (ab) can appear based on the result of the big hit determination, , ``the lowest expected specific effect mode (here, the effect mode of ``destroy one body'' shown in FIG. Since the opportunity to have fun is given, it is expected that the sword ornament 5001 will be favorably urged to operate.

193 to 195, the period during which the operation of the operation button 410 is received and the period during which the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received are generated simultaneously and ended at the same time. Although it has been decided to control it as the production acceptance period, it is not necessary to make these periods occur at the same time. For example, if the period during which the operation of the operation button 410 is received and the period during which the operation of the sword decoration 5001 is received partially overlap, these periods are separated. You may make it generate|occur|produce with timing.

In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the big hit determination, "a plurality of operation means can receive the effect, and different effects are performed depending on which operation means is operated. The above-mentioned special effect acceptance period such as "is executed" may be always generated. That is, in this case, at a relatively early stage from the time when the pattern variation starts with a specific effect pattern, "Which of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period, and furthermore, the special effect reception period occurs. You will be able to think about the production strategy on the premise that a special production acceptance period will occur, such as whether you should perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state before doing . For example, since it is possible to confirm "how much advance notice performance was performed in what kind of performance mode (expectation)" before the special performance acceptance period occurs, these confirmations It became possible to use the result as a judgment material for ``which one of the plurality of operation means should be operated within the special effect reception period,'' and the game was played until the special effect reception period occurred. Interest can also be favorably maintained.

However, even if a specific effect pattern is selected, when the operation button 410 is operated within the special effect reception period, when the sword decoration body 5001 is operated, furthermore, the automatic effect function As for which production mode to appear when functioning, it is decided by lottery (judgment) based on the result of the big hit judgment at the start of the pattern fluctuation or when the production reception occurs (or when the automatic production function functions). It is desirable to

In addition, even if there is an effect situation in which the special effect acceptance period has not yet occurred, it is possible to allow the player to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. 193(a), 195(a)” suggesting the start of a special effect accepting period, setting to the automatic button effect state is permitted. It is desirable to control this as a prohibition period so as not to According to such a configuration, it is suggested that a special effect acceptance period is started in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sheathing operation of the sword ornament 5001. Even if you try to set the automatic button effect state after confirming that the "effect display" has started, this will not be accepted, so the game can be continued while maintaining the automatic button effect state. It is now possible to provide ``stable side automatic effect processing when in the automatic button effect state'' only for those who are playing, and it is possible to continue playing the game while maintaining the automatic button effect state. be able to provide significant value.

193 to 195, the "specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" (Fig. 194(g)) that can appear when the effect is performed after the sword-side operation is performed. Although it was decided to execute it as a unique effect mode different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the post-effect is performed, the "specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" will be executed after the button side operation. It may be executed in the same mode as the presentation mode that can appear when it is performed (for example, ("defeat 50 bodies" shown in FIG. 193(d)). That is, in this case, the presentation after the sword side operation Even if the ``lowest expected specific effect mode'' appears as a result of performing Therefore, it is difficult for a third party who does not know whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 is operated to recognize that the expectation level is extremely low. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, it is expected that a specific effect mode is displayed based on the reception of the effect. Although the effect situation is only appearing, the pattern changes depending on whether the effect situation is generated by operating the operation button 410 or by operating the sword ornament 5001. Since the degree of expectation for the appearance of the big winning pattern is different depending on (variation of the pattern in the execution state), it is possible to make the performance using a plurality of operating means more interesting.

However, this is the case where the "specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" in the post-sword side operation effect is executed as the same effect mode that can appear even when the button-side post-operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the "most highly anticipated special effect mode" in the post-sword side operation effect, it is a unique effect mode that is different from any of the effect modes that can appear when the button-side post-operation effect is performed (e.g., ("Defeat 777 bodies" shown in Fig. 194(i)).According to such a configuration, in the production after the sword side operation, "the specific production mode with the lowest expectation" appears, it is difficult to perceive that the third party, who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 has been operated, has a remarkably low level of expectation. On the other hand, when "the most expected special effect mode" appears in the effect after the operation on the sword side, even a third person who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 has been operated. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the player is in a production situation in which the degree of expectation is remarkably high. You will be able to enjoy the effect (effect after operating the sword side) on the side of the sword ornament 5001 (the second operating means). Anything that is recognizable may be used. For example, uniqueness with other effects may be ensured by executing movable body motions or lamp lighting.

193 to 195, the effect after the sword-side operation (Fig. 194(f) to Fig. 194(i)) is performed as a result of the effect "Defeat 777 bodies" (Fig. 194 ( i)) can appear, and when the production mode of "defeat 777 bodies" (Fig. 194(i)) appears, any other production mode (Fig. 193(d), Fig. 193(e)) , FIG. 194(g), FIG. 194(h)), the ratio of the appearance of the big-hit symbols in the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state) is higher than when the figure 194(g), FIG. 194(h)) appears. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not necessary to make the effect mode of "defeat 777 bodies" (Fig. 194(i)) necessarily appear. The appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. 194(h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the production mode shown in FIG. becomes.

193 to 195, the effect after the button side operation (Fig. 193(c) to Fig. 193(e)) and the effect after the sword side operation (Fig. 194(f) to Fig. 194(i) ), the common production mode (here, the production mode of "defeat 100 bodies") can appear, but the common production mode is prevented from appearing. good too. Also, while only the display change appears in the button-side post-operation effect, in the sword-side post-operation effect, in addition to the display change, it may also be possible to perform movable body movements, lamp lighting, and the like. Also, the effects after the button side operation and the effects after the sword side operation do not have commonality as the effect contents related to the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as mutually different effects.

193 to 195, when the production is accepted, including when the production is accepted due to the functioning of the automatic production function, first, either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 A display (Fig. 193(c), Fig. 194(f), Fig. 195(c)) suggesting whether or not the performance has been accepted was made to appear, but the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. You may make it perform the production|presentation which makes the production|presentation result appear.

193 to 195, the effect after the sword-side operation (Fig. 194(f) to Fig. 194(i)) is performed as a result of the effect "Defeat 777 bodies" (Fig. 194 ( When i)) appears, the specific operation-related operations described above are more important than when any of the other presentation modes (Fig. 193(d), Fig. 193(e), Fig. 194(g), Fig. 194(h)) appear. The rate of appearance of the effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) until the pattern fluctuation is stopped, and when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means (sword ornament 5001), it is desirable to increase the ratio of giving the operation opportunity. 193 to 195, it is possible to favorably prompt the player to operate the sword ornament 5001 on the side with the higher risk of rendering.

[Restoration processing for movement abnormality with reduced influence on movement effect]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a), when a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state (more precisely, in a state where the specific state does not occur), it is possible to cope with pattern variations. When the restoration operation timing (for example, the timing of starting or stopping the pattern variation) arrives, it is possible to perform a process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration. However, if such restoration processing is executed regardless of the state of the presentation, there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered.

For example, it is assumed that the above-described "symbol variation start timing" is set as the "restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation". Now, as shown in FIG. 196, when timing tm1 at which a new pattern variation is started in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs at least the following processes. will be executed.
・On the basis of acquisition of a command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the pattern variation is started, a production pattern corresponding to the pattern variation is set, and the set production pattern is used for the pattern variation. Among them, based on the acquisition of the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the pattern variation is started (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation), specified Processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable decoration of

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that "a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to move at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" is set as the effect pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the effect progresses according to the "specific effect pattern that allows the specific movable decoration to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation", and the predetermined restoration action is performed for the specific movable decoration. A situation will arise in which the processes to be executed are executed in parallel.

In general, in the pachinko machine 1 that can execute such a specific effect pattern, the effect pattern (relatively expected A low production pattern) is prepared. Then, in the production pattern having a pair relationship (the production pattern with a relatively low degree of expectation), although the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, the movement toward the specific timing tm2 The same mode of production as in the case of "a specific production pattern (a production pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" is performed. be. In this way, by preparing two production patterns (a production pattern in which a specific movable decorative body is operated and a production pattern in which a specific movable decorative body is not operated) that are in a paired relationship in terms of production, at the specific timing tm2 is (for example, a predetermined time until the arrival of the specific timing tm2), a predetermined effect (for example, a display of whether or not a specific movable ornament will operate) with a effect of whether or not the specific movable ornament will operate. can be executed, and the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained by such effects.

However, after the pattern variation is started, even when the specific timing tm2 arrives, if the process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform the predetermined restoration operation is still being executed, the specific timing Even though tm2 has arrived, it becomes clear that the specific movable decoration is in a situation where it cannot perform the performance operation. That is, in this case, even if the predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, the function of the predetermined effect with the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 196, among the production patterns, the production progress related to "a specific production pattern that can cause a specific movable decoration to operate at a specific timing tm2", and a predetermined When a situation appears in which the processing for performing the restoration operation (the restoration processing based on the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol fluctuation) is performed in parallel, the "specific "The process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament" is terminated. Various methods can be adopted as the ``processing for causing a specific movable decoration to perform a predetermined restoration operation''. It is assumed that the process of repeatedly performing restoration operations on a specific movable decoration until reaching a predetermined upper limit number is executed.

More specifically, with respect to the ``processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration'', restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decoration is abnormal. The time required to complete the process will be different. For example, when a specific movable decoration is restored (restored) to its original position after the abnormal state is resolved only by executing the first restoration operation, the "predetermined restoration for the specific movable decoration" is performed. The timing tx at which the "processing to perform the action" is completed also arrives relatively early, but the number of times the restoring action for a particular movable decoration fails and is restored (restored) is limited. As the number increases, the timing tx at which the ``processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament'' is completed is postponed to a later time. Then, at the latest, when the restoration operation for a specific movable decoration has failed and has not yet been restored (restored), but if the restoration operation is performed again, the timing tx will be exceeded, the specific movable decoration will be restored. By terminating the process of performing the predetermined restoration action while the body is in an abnormal state, the process of performing the predetermined restoration action is terminated before the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the state of restoration. become.

In addition, when it takes x time to restore a specific movable decoration once, the pattern is set once so that the relationship of "x time x n times<time of timing tm1 to tm2" is established. An upper limit number n for repeating a predetermined restoration operation within a fluctuation is set, and even if the restoration (restoration) has not been performed when the upper limit number n is reached, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated. By doing so, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation may be terminated until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation.

According to such a configuration, the development of the specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, and the predetermined restoration action for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When such a situation appears, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is terminated until the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, even if the specific movable decoration is not restored until the specific timing tm2 arrives, the specific movable decoration is restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body is brought to a stopped state, it is possible to preferably maintain the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if a specific movable decoration is in a stopped state at a position different from the original position, when the specific timing tm2 arrives, this may trigger some behavior, or the movable decoration may not move. However, it is possible to give hope that the lamp of the movable decoration may emit light (assuming that the lamp of the movable decoration emits light when the performance action by the movable decoration is performed). .

However, in reality, if a specific movable decoration is performing a restoration operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, the specific movable decoration has the effect of whether or not to operate. The function as the predetermined effect may be lost. Therefore, regarding the timing tx at which the "process for performing a predetermined restoration action on a specific movable ornament" is completed, regardless of the state of restoration, it should be completed before the predetermined effect is started. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the amusement of the game.

As a predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable ornament operates when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and operates when the specific display result does not appear. When it is provided as a "thing that does not", it is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a way that arouses whether or not a specific display result will appear", and a specific movable decoration " When it is provided as a thing that operates based on the fact that the performance is accepted by the player's operation (or does not operate even if the performance is accepted), ``a performance that causes a specific display to prompt the player to operate.'' can be exemplified.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, at the timing tx at which the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration" is completed, the specific movable decoration recovers (restores) from the abnormal state. It is assumed that the In this way, even if the abnormal state occurs at the start of the fluctuation (or the "restoration operation timing" such as the previous stop of the pattern), the specific timing tm2 within the pattern fluctuation arrives after the normal state is restored. Then, at the specific timing tm2, it becomes possible to perform the performance operation of the specific movable ornament.

On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decoration" is completed, the specific movable decoration cannot be recovered (restored) from the abnormal state, and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation comes, at least from the specific timing tm2 (more precisely, the timing tx) the symbol variation is terminated and the stop state is maintained until the next restoration operation time arrives. becomes. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decoration cannot be operated at the specific timing tm2, the effect of whether or not the specific movable decoration is operated can be preferably maintained. When the specific performance pattern is based on the big win variation, a surprise performance is provided by stopping the big win pattern even though the specified movable decorative body did not perform the performance operation at the specific timing tm2. be able to

However, in recent years, pachinko machines have been equipped with movable ornaments that have a more complicated structure and move in multiple stages, and in such movable ornaments, it takes longer to complete the restoration process. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in a specific production pattern that can operate a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, or in a production pattern that is in a pair relationship with this, when those production patterns are started Even if the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, within a time shorter than the time required from the start of pattern variation until the arrival of the specific timing tm2 (more preferably, the time until the predetermined effect is performed) As described above, it is required to end the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration. That is, in this case, every time a particular movable decoration becomes abnormal, it can only be restored in a simple manner as an emergency measure, which accelerates the deterioration of the particular movable decoration. It can also be

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a special effect pattern (reconstruction/diagnosis effect pattern) is prepared, and when the pattern variation is started, the main control MPU 1310a side When the special effect pattern is selected based on the sent command, while the special effect pattern is being developed (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), a specific movable Control is performed so that the ornaments are not operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display as to whether or not they are to be operated) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), as a result of the timing tm11 at which the pattern variation is started in the situation where the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the effect progresses according to the special effect pattern. and a process of performing a predetermined restoration action on a specific movable ornament are performed in parallel, at least while the special effect pattern is being performed (period until the pattern is stopped). causes the restore process to continue without terminating.

More specifically, in the restoration process started at timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the movable decoration returns (restores) to the original position only by executing the first restoration operation. Even in such a case, the restoration process is not terminated at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is executed over the entire period.

According to such a configuration, when the specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing in a more full-fledged mode (for example, normal diagnosis even after restoration) is performed aiming at the time when the above-mentioned special effect pattern is performed. Since it is possible to perform additional execution, etc.), the special effect pattern will function as a restoration/diagnostic effect pattern, and the player will also carefully restore it in this way. You will be able to enjoy the performance after that without worrying about the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare a special effect pattern that can be selected only when the player loses the big hit determination. Moreover, it is desirable to display a unique display mode such as "This is an effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis. Please wait for a while" as the display content on the effect display device 1600.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the above special effect pattern is performed, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is continued without ending even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends. According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the constraint that "although a specific movable decoration has an abnormality, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the pattern is changed." Therefore, it becomes possible to perform restoration processing in a more full-fledged manner.

However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern ends, if the pending digestion is not interrupted and the effect pattern corresponding to the new pattern fluctuation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, the next Design fluctuation start time) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decoration is still in an abnormal state (not at the original position, etc.). It will be done. If the restoration process for a specific movable decoration is newly started based on the determination, it can be completed substantially within the time when one pattern change is performed. Since only the restoration process can be performed, the contents of the process are naturally limited, and the inability to adequately deal with the abnormality may accelerate the deterioration of the particular movable decoration. .

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a state of executing restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, as shown in FIGS. 197A (b) and (d). When the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) arrives, the restoration processing in the execution state is not terminated, and this is continued across the next restoration operation timing. . According to such a configuration, regardless of the state of suspension during execution of restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, "Even though an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable decoration, Since the constraint such as "the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed" is eliminated, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more authentic manner.

However, as shown in FIGS. 197A (c) and (d), when a new pattern variation is started while the restoration process is being executed for a specific movable decoration, the new pattern variation As such, there may be a case where "a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decoration to operate at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" appears. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) to (c), regardless of the state of the game or the effect after the special effect pattern is terminated (furthermore, the state of restoration, etc.), it starts at timing tm11. Regarding the timing tx at which the "process for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament" is completed, the time required until the next specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation (more preferably, It is desirable to finish within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time from timing tm11 to tm12 (the time required for digestion of the special production pattern), the time from timing tm12 to tx is completed for a relatively long time. It becomes possible to continue the restoration process for the decoration.

It should be noted that, after the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is terminated, if a situation appears in which the special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is continuously executed, Do not end the restoration process in a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis), straddle three or more pattern variations (production patterns) (after one restoration process is started, the one One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process spans two or more restoration operation periods.

In the example shown in FIG. 197A, at the timing tx when the ``processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decoration'' is completed, the specific movable decoration is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and returns to normal state. I'm assuming the situation. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing), a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past can be prevented. However, this can be restored, and at a specific timing tm2, it is possible to perform the performance operation of the specific movable ornament.

On the other hand, although one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation timing (here, the next pattern fluctuation start timing), at the timing tx, the specific movable decoration is abnormal. When it is not possible to return (restore) from the state, the stop state is maintained until the timing of the next restoration operation comes after the symbol variation is finished from the timing tx. That is, in this case, although the specific movable decoration cannot be operated at the specific timing tm2, the effect of whether or not the specific movable decoration operates can be preferably maintained. When the specific performance pattern is based on the big win variation, a surprise performance is provided by stopping the big win pattern even though the specified movable decorative body does not perform the performance operation at the specific timing tm2. be able to

In addition, in a situation where a specific movable decoration is in an abnormal state and restoration processing for the specific movable decoration is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (here, the pattern fluctuation start time) arrives, the specific If the restoration process for the movable decoration is started many times, if the specific movable decoration is broken to the extent that it cannot be restored, the specific movable decoration cannot be restored. There is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease due to the repeated repetition of the restoration process for the body. Therefore, even though the restoration operation timing has reached the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decoration has been put into an abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decoration) has reached the predetermined upper limit number). When the abnormal state has not been restored, it is desirable not to start the restoration process for the specific movable decoration anew even if a new restoration operation time comes.

However, on the other hand, after the specific movable decoration is put in an abnormal state, only the special production pattern (the production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is continuously executed (started) for the predetermined upper limit number. , When a situation arises in which a production pattern (for example, a specific production pattern) different from the special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears, a predetermined upper limit number of special production patterns and their One restoration process may be continued across the next production pattern. In other words, in this case, after the specific movable ornament is placed in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has not reached the predetermined upper limit number, but the abnormal state has not been restored. +1"-th restoration operation time has arrived, the restoration process for the specific movable decoration is not terminated and is continued. As described above, in the mode in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation timings, no matter how many times the restoration operation timings come during the continuation of the one restoration operation, the predetermined upper limit number It is desirable to handle the count for one time of restoration processing so as not to end the restoration processing so as not to hinder the execution of restoration processing in a more full-scale mode.

By the way, regarding such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on restoration operation timing corresponding to pattern fluctuation), board-side movable decorations provided on the game board 5 side (for example, back front decoration unit 3100, back front decoration unit 3100, back In addition to the middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain), etc.), the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the manner described above. be. However, among the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side, the frame-side movable decorations that are also used as operation means (for example, the operation button 410 provided operably, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) , it may be restored (restored) in a manner different from that of the above-described specific movable decoration (board-side movable decoration).

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the symbol variation is performed, a movable operation in which an operation opportunity giving effect is executed to give an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 System production patterns (for example, the production pattern shown in FIG. 177) are prepared. Also, as described above, in such an operation opportunity granting effect, "the process of moving the sword ornament 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177(f))", "Processing to generate effect acceptance period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))", furthermore, "display prompting operation (character display such as "push" and bar display indicating remaining time of effect acceptance period ) (see FIG. 177(f))” are performed respectively. As a result, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the state of being moved to the operating position is operated (in this case, an operation of pushing) and the production is accepted, based on the production reception, "specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) ) and the like (see FIG. 177(g))” and “the process of changing the display content (see FIG. 177(g))” are performed respectively. Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorations to be effected in this process may be the specific movable decorations described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A.

However, among such operation opportunity imparting effects, the ``process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force'' is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state. ``Processing to generate an effect acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001'' and ``Process to display a display prompting an operation'' can be executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state. It can be executed both when there is an error and when there is an abnormality. Therefore, in the effect pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state, when the player who sees the "display prompting the operation" operates the sword ornament 5001 and accepts the effect, "Processing for effecting a board-side movable decorative body such as a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain)" and "Processing for causing a change in display content on the effect display device 1600" are performed respectively. In addition, in the production pattern of the movable operation system, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration 5001 receives an external force due to such operation by the player, and the operation part moves, and the abnormal state is generated. may be resolved by itself.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decorations (for example, the operation buttons 410 provided operably, the sword decorations 5001, etc.) that are also used as operation means are In the event of an abnormal state, return processing for applying a driving force to the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to return it to the original position (in the manner described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A). Restoration processing) is performed at the respective timings of "the above-described restoration operation timing (here, the start timing of symbol variation)" and "after the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the effect pattern of the movable operation system". It is executable.

According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decorative body can be moved at a timing such as the start or stop of the pattern variation (more strictly, after the start or after the stop). In contrast to the process of restoring the decoration, when the frame-side movable decoration is in an abnormal state, not only the timing of the start and stop of the pattern variation, but also a unique timing different from this (during the variation period) Of these, the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) is controlled by aiming at the timing at which an external force (operation by the player) may be applied to the frame-side movable decoration (operation means) and the abnormal state may be resolved. means) will be restored (returned), it is expected that the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) in an abnormal state can be returned to its original position at an early stage. .

FIG. 198 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operating means). be.

As shown in 198 of the same figure, the production pattern of the movable operation system (the production pattern in which the operation opportunity giving production for giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during the period in which the pattern variation is performed) is executed. , and at timing tm21, "the process of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position" is executed. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is in the operation position, "processing for generating the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001", "display prompting the operation (character display such as "push", display of the effect reception period While the bar display indicating the remaining time of ) is being executed, if the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and receives the effect (timing tm22), "Specific decoration member SDY (blind role) etc. A process for making the board-side movable decorative body perform an effect operation" and a process for causing a change in the display contents of the effect display device 1600 are performed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 198, the specific movable decoration described in FIGS. 196 and 197A is made to act as the board-side movable decoration based on the acceptance of the effect.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198, at the timing tm22 at which the effect is accepted, an abnormality occurs in the sword decorative body 5001, and it is not returned to its original position, and the specific movable decoration that performs the effect operation based on the effect reception. It is assumed that another abnormality occurs in the body (board-side movable decorative body) and it cannot be returned to its original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 and that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decoration. With regard to the determination to that effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the determination that an abnormality has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 is accompanied by a specific notification sound and display. It is desirable to perform at least one of the notifications. This is because the sword decoration 5001 is "placed within the reach of the player (door frame 3)", and if it is made to notify that an abnormal state has occurred, repair work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable decoration is "placed out of the reach of the player (game board 5)", and this has become an abnormal state. This is because the player cannot help in any way, and merely emphasizing that the movable effect is not being executed may encourage a decrease in interest in the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be terminated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality occurs in the specific movable decoration during the “process for causing the specific movable decoration to perform the effect operation” based on the reception of the effect at timing tm22. However, by executing the "processing to change the display contents of the effect display device 1600" as usual, it is possible to recognize that a specific movable decoration has abnormally occurred. It is desirable to make it difficult. After that, the effect pattern of the movable operation system is developed while the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in the abnormal state, and the pattern variation is stopped at timing tm23. .

In the example shown in FIG. 198, at timing tm23, the pattern variation already in the pending state is digested (started) immediately (for example, after 0.6 seconds), and the new pattern It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 196 is executed as the effect pattern corresponding to the variation. That is, in the specific production pattern, the specific movable decorative body is produced at timing tm2 when a predetermined time has passed since the pattern variation started. ) is completed within a time period shorter than timing tm2 (more preferably, It is as described above that the process is terminated until the predetermined effect is started).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the restoration operation time (here, at the start of pattern variation) has arrived for the sword decoration body 5001, the "specific movable decoration It is possible to perform a process of causing the body to perform a predetermined restoring action and a process of causing the body to return to its original position (applying driving force) in parallel with at least a part of the action. Moreover, the timing at which such "processing for performing a predetermined restoration action on the sword decoration 5001" is completed is also within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, a predetermined effect is performed) regardless of the restoration situation. is started).

According to such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decoration is resolved and the movement effect by the specific movable decoration is performed at timing tm2, the restoration operation by the sword decoration 5001 is performed. Since there is no such thing as being continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of disappointment when the restoration action and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which restoration processing for a specific movable decoration is started/finished is the same as the timing at which restoration processing for sword decoration 5001 is started/finished. However, only one of those timings may be the same, or both of those timings may be different.

In addition, regarding the "process for performing a predetermined restoration action on a specific movable ornament", as described with reference to FIG. It is possible to continue even after the special effect pattern is finished, and the pattern fluctuations in the pending state are digested (started) immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds later) after the special effect pattern is finished. In a situation where the next restoration operation timing (here, the next symbol fluctuation start timing) is straddled, the processing (one restoration processing) is not finished and can be executed in the form of continuing this. It is desirable that the processing for causing the ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation can also be executed in the same mode (the mode described with reference to FIG. 197A). That is, in this case, the ``process for performing a predetermined restoring action on the sword ornament 5001'' also extends over the next restoring action timing (here, the next pattern fluctuation start timing) when a special effect pattern appears. However, it should be terminated regardless of the restoration status until the time required from the start of the next symbol variation to the arrival of the timing tm2. Become.

In addition, after the sword ornament 5001 is brought into an abnormal state, only the special effect pattern (reconstruction/diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for a predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( When a situation arises in which a performance pattern (for example, a specific performance pattern) different from the performance pattern for restoration/diagnosis) appears, a predetermined upper limit number of special performance patterns and the next performance pattern are straddled. One restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 may be continued.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that at timing tx, restoration processing for a specific movable decoration and restoration processing for sword decoration 5001 are terminated, but restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at the timing tm2, the movement effect by the specific movable decoration is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is developed while both the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in the abnormal state. As a result, the symbol variation is stopped at timing tm24.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, within the period of timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern, the specific movable decoration is externally applied (no driving force is applied by a motor or the like). Even if it is returned to the original position (brought to a normal state) by the specified movable decorative body, at the timing tm2, the performance action by the specific movable decorative body is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the fact that an external force (driving force is not applied by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decoration during the period from timing tx to tm2 itself is an abnormal situation. In such a situation of low reliability, even if a performance action by a specific movable ornament is performed, there is a high possibility that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable in terms of

Further, when restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 fails and an abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification associated therewith is performed. In other words, if the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and notification is given each time an abnormal state occurs again, the player may be misunderstood as if the player is responsible for the abnormal state not being resolved. Therefore, the above notification (at least one of a specific notification sound and display notification) is performed only when an abnormality occurs for the first time when the normal state changes to an abnormal state, so as to encourage the player to perform repair work. is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are restored by restoration processing triggered by any restoration operation timing (here, design fluctuation start timing) arriving after timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable decoration recovers from an abnormal state. Now, while only the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the production pattern of the movable operation system is performed again, and as shown in FIG. If the effect is accepted by the player's operation, it can be expected that such an operation will eliminate the abnormality that has occurred in the sword decoration 5001 .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state receives the effect by the player's operation at timing tm25, the sword decorative body 5001 is returned to the original state. A driving force can be applied so as to return it to the position (stay at the original position). At this time, in view of the fact that the movement effect is performed by the specific movable decoration based on the reception of the effect, the period (once The period when the return action is successful) is generated after the start of the movable effect by the specific movable decoration, and the end of the movable effect by the specific movable decoration (the specific movable decoration returns to the original position It is desirable to end the process before the process is executed so as to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the fact that there is a rare chance that the possibility of returning the sword decoration 5001, which could not be returned until now, due to such an external force (operation by the player) is increasing, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the original position. If the process of applying a driving force to return to the sword decoration (returning action to the sword decoration 5001) fails, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the original state until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration ends. By continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (executing the return operation to the sword ornament 5001 again), the player can easily recognize the abnormal situation. It is desirable to encourage assistance. However, even if this recovery process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this failure be performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the return processing (return to the original position) of the sword ornament 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) is successful. , the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration remain in the normal state, the production pattern of the movable operation system is developed, and the pattern variation is stopped at timing tm26.

Thus, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as an operation means, is set with respect to the board-side movable decoration (specific movable decoration). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of pattern variation), the restoration operation timing (timing after receiving the effect) using an external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decoration (sword decoration 5001), which is also used as an operation means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it is directly touched by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since the opportunity for position return is provided more often and various modes are used as the return method (a mode of returning only by applying a driving force, and a mode of using at least an external force to return), an abnormal state can be eliminated. As a result, the decline in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

Note that the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 to the original position after the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state receives the effect by the player's operation is the symbol fluctuation start. A driving force may be applied to the sword ornament 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration process performed when the timing (for example, timing tm23) arrives. That is, since this processing is to restore the sword ornament 5001 by using an external force (operation by the player), it is possible to perform the processing with a different content from the processing when the external force is not used. It can be said that it is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing is executed in a simple manner such that the recovery processing is completed within the pattern variation regardless of the recovery situation, and if the recovery fails, the next recovery operation time will be more serious. It is desirable to ensure that proper recovery processing is performed.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 198, even if the restoration operation timing (here, the design fluctuation start timing) arrives by a predetermined upper limit number and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 is executed for that number of times. However, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, design fluctuation start time) arrives, the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 is not newly started. Even if the effect pattern of the operation system is started and the sword decorative body 5001 in the abnormal state is received by the player's operation at the timing tm25, the sword decorative body 5001 is removed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the return processing after reception of the effect is performed when there is an increased possibility of returning the sword ornament 5001 that has been unable to return due to an external force (operation by the player). Therefore, it is desirable to perform the processing without giving up even in the situation described above in which recovery without an external force is given up. Therefore, "process for generating effect reception period for sword decoration 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))" and "display prompting operation (character display such as "push" and bar indicating remaining time of effect reception period It is important that the process of displaying (see FIG. 177(f))" is performed as usual even in the above-described situation in which recovery without external force is given up.

In addition, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword ornament 5001 is pushed in the operation position (moved to a specific detection position), and when it is in the original position, it is pushed (to a specific detection position). When the operation means is provided so as to provide a second operation opportunity to operate the sword ornament 5001, even if the reception of the effect occurs at the second operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not applied, and the driving force for returning to the original position is applied only when the production acceptance occurs at the first operation opportunity for the sword ornament 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to That is, even if the performance is accepted when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, so the possibility that the abnormal state has been resolved is naturally expected to be low.

In addition, after the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state receives the effect by the player's operation, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 to the original position does not necessarily require the effect reception. It does not have to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, for example, it may be executed after the effect acceptance period has ended.

It should be noted that the restoration operation timing may be a predetermined timing that arrives on the condition that the symbol variation is executed at least, for example, it may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. . If the symbol variation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a when the symbol variation is stopped. The restorative process is terminated before timing tm2 in the reserved specific performance pattern arrives, or is executed so as to straddle until after the end of the reserved special performance pattern. Each of the above-described processing is performed.

In addition, the frequency of appearance of the special effect pattern (restore/diagnosis effect pattern) may vary according to the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state occurs in which the frequency of operation of the movable decorative body increases, abnormal states are likely to occur as much as the frequency of operation is increased. It is desirable to make the game possible so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (the effect pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is higher than when it is in .

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the frame-side movable decoration (for example, the sword decoration 5001, etc.) and the specific movable decoration, which are also used as operating means, are in an abnormal state. When the special production pattern (production pattern for restoration/diagnosis) is performed, as shown in FIG. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decoration in the state. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation timing (for example, pattern fluctuation start timing) arrives while one restoration processing is being continuously executed, the restoration processing for the movable decoration in the abnormal state is performed again. Since it does not start one restoration process that is already in the execution state and continues it without ending it, it is possible to separate the movable decoration from the movable decoration that is the target of the restoration process. The problem is at what timing the restoration process for the other movable decoration should be started when the decoration is newly in an abnormal state.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for the specific movable decoration started at timing tm11 is executed at a new restoration operation timing (next The start time of the pattern fluctuation) is designed to be continued without ending even when it straddles. In this regard, a new abnormality occurs in a movable decoration different from the specific movable decoration during the period from the passage of timing tm11 to the arrival of a new restoration operation timing (starting timing of the next pattern variation). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3, or "both methods 1 and 2", or "both methods 1 and 3" is used to restore the other movable decoration. It is desirable to execute

Method 1: At least if there is a relationship such as ``a specific movable decoration is provided as a board-side movable decoration, and the above-mentioned another movable decoration is provided as a frame-side movable decoration'', specify When a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives while one restoration process for the movable decoration is continuously executed, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) ) has arrived, the restoration process for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) is newly started.

According to Method 1, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. Another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) for which restoration processing has not yet been executed is treated as being valid, and the timing (new restoration operation timing) is used as a trigger to restore the movable decoration. It becomes possible to newly start the restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decorative body). That is, in this case, a situation arises in which restoration processing for a specific movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) and restoration processing for another movable decoration (frame-side movable decoration) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early recovery of the movable decorations can be expected.

Method 2: At least when there is a relationship such as ``both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations'', one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern change) arrives during execution, the restoration processing for another movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) is not started at that time, and the specific restoration operation is performed. After waiting for the completion of one restoration process for the movable decoration, another movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) is displayed based on the arrival of the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern change). to restart the restoration process for the body).

According to Method 2, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next pattern variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state. Other movable decorations (board-side movable decorations) for which restoration processing has not yet been executed are treated as being effective. In this respect, before starting the restoration process for another movable decoration (board-side movable decoration), it is arranged to wait for the completion of one restoration process for a specific movable decoration. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early recovery of the movable decorations can be expected.

Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such as ``both a specific movable decoration and another movable decoration are provided as board-side movable decorations'', one restoration process for the specific movable decoration continues. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern variation) arrives during execution, another movable decoration is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern variation). without executing restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, and after waiting for the completion of one restoration processing for a specific movable decoration, another movable decoration (board-side movable decoration) is newly started.

According to method 3, the new restoration operation timing (starting timing of the next pattern variation) is the restoration processing for the specific movable decoration that is already in the execution state and the restoration processing for another movable decoration that is not in the execution state yet. is treated as invalid for both the restoration process for the movable decoration, and unless one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is completed, even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decoration No processing for the abnormal state will be executed. That is, in this case, even if another movable decoration becomes abnormal while one restoration process for a specific movable decoration is being executed, these movable decorations can be carefully restored one by one. By making it possible to sufficiently deal with the abnormality, it is expected that the speed of deterioration of the movable decoration can be suppressed.

197B and FIG. 197C for the mode (method 1 to method 3, etc.) when a new restoration operation time (such as the start timing and end timing of symbol variation) arrives during the execution of the restoration operation. I will explain in detail.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of explanation, the first movable decoration (the above-described "specific movable decoration"), the second movable decoration, the second It has at least three movable decorations, a fourth movable decoration, and a fifth movable decoration. If only one of the movable decorations is not in the normal state, the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are the "first movable decoration", the "second movable decoration", and the "third movable decoration". In any of the movable decorations, the fourth movable decorations, and the fifth movable decorations, the movable decorations that are not in the normal state have a restoration operation timing (pattern The restoration operation (restoration processing) is started when the fluctuation start timing, end timing, etc., arrives.

However, if there are a plurality of movable decorations that are not in a normal state when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation arrives, all of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state are restored together at the timing of the restoration operation. If the (restoration process) is started, there is a concern that the player will not be able to concentrate on the performance corresponding to the pattern variation and will lose interest.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this illustrative example, if there are a plurality of movable decorations that are not in a normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation arrives, some of the movable decorations that are not in a normal state Only one can start the restoration operation when the time for the restoration operation arrives, thereby avoiding that all the movable decorations that are not in a normal state start the restoration operation all at once. , the restoration operation is realized in a mode according to the situation.

For example, now, as shown in FIG. 197B, timing tm32 has arrived (reconstruction When the operation timing has arrived, an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration. Suppose that Here, "abnormality" means a state in which an "abnormality" is detected by the detection means, but it does not necessarily have to be a state in which an "abnormality" is detected. may simply mean that an "abnormality" is occurring (undetected state).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this illustrative example, restoration processing for the abnormal movable decoration is executed based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32). However, here, the restoration operations of the first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, and the fourth movable decoration are started in parallel, but the restoration operations of the third movable decoration and the fifth movable decoration are started in parallel. , the movable decoration is kept in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation. As a result, it is possible to prevent all of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state from simultaneously starting the restoration operation, and the restoration operation can be realized in a mode that corresponds to the situation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decoration, which was left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at timing tm32, waits until the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35). First, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration ends. As a result, all the movable decorations that are not in the normal state can be returned to the normal state relatively early while avoiding all the movable decorations that are not in the normal state from starting the restoration operation all at once. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth movable decorative body, which was left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, will be restored when the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) arrives. The restoration operation is not started either, and the restoration operation is started when the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament ends has arrived. As a result, it is possible to preferably avoid that a plurality of movable ornaments perform restoration operations in parallel in a combination that hinders concentration on the presentation.

In the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoring process for the second movable decoration ends before the timing tm34 when the restoring process for the first movable decoration ends. When restoration processing for the decoration ends, the restoration operation of the "third movable decoration" and the "fifth movable decoration" does not start. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoring process for the fourth movable decoration ends after the timing tm34 when the restoring process for the first movable decoration ends. The third movable decoration does not start the restoration operation and maintain the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed, and when the restoration processing for the fourth movable decoration is completed, the "fifth The "movable decorative body" does not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decoration starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when timing tm32 arrives unless a specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state. If a specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. 1 movable ornament) is completed, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started.

Also, the fifth movable decoration starts restoration processing (restoration operation) at timing tm32 unless the first movable decoration and the third movable decoration are in an abnormal state. If the movable decoration and the third movable decoration are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration processing of the first movable decoration and the third movable decoration is performed. (restoration operation) is completed, and then restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

In this way, restoration processing is not performed in parallel for a specific combination of movable decorations (for example, a combination that disturbs concentration on the performance) among a plurality of movable decorations, so that the restoration process can be performed in accordance with pattern fluctuations. Restoration processing can be performed while favorably maintaining an environment in which the user can concentrate on the presentation.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, even though the "fifth movable decoration" is in an abnormal state earlier than the "third movable decoration", the "first movable decoration , the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is first started. In this way, by preventing the restoration processing from being performed in the order in which the abnormal state occurred, it becomes possible to restore the movable ornaments to the normal condition preferentially from the movable ornaments having the highest importance of rendering, thereby making the game interesting. be expected to maintain.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in the situation where the third movable decoration is in the middle of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the pattern variation (second time) ends (loss stop) and the next pattern It is assumed that the timing tm35 (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) is started arrives. Such a restoration operation timing originally functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decoration that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable ornament, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously executed across the restoration operation timing (timing tm35). ing. This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, if the pattern variation (third time) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decoration, "Movable effect using the third movable decoration within the pattern variation (third time) This increases the probability that the third movable decoration can be restored to the normal state before the timing of starting. That is, in this example, even if the movable decoration is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, the movable decoration returns to the normal state at the start of the movable effect using the movable decoration. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the pattern variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the third movable decorative body is set at the timing tm32 (the second time) when the pattern variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next pattern variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm31 before the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. As a result of arrival of timing tm32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) in the abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed from timing tm32 (timing tm34).

However, regarding the third movable decoration, it is later than the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation) and within the period during which the restoration processing (restoration operation) of the first movable decoration is being performed. Even if the normal state is maintained until “timing tm33”, which is the timing of “timing tm33”, and an abnormality occurs at timing tm33, restoration processing (restoration operation ) is terminated, it is desirable to start the restoration processing (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm34. That is, in this case, even though the third movable decoration has not yet reached the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the pattern variation since it became abnormal at the timing tm33, the other movable decoration (the third The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 that arrives before timing tm33) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decoration of No. 1). As a result, it becomes possible to return to a normal state at an early stage. Details of the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32” will be described later.

At this time, if the restoration process for the first movable decoration is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable to continue executing the restoration process across the timing tm35. Also, at timing tm35, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is not started, and at the timing when the restoration processing for the first movable decoration executed across timing tm35 ends, It is desirable to start restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration.

In this case, even though the fifth movable decoration was in an abnormal state at the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing), it is in an abnormal state at the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing). Since the restoring process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decoration" which has not been set can be started earlier than the "fifth movable decoration", the movable decoration has a high effect importance. You will be able to preferentially return to normal from your body. The ``fifth movable decoration'' is based on the fact that the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the ``third movable decoration'', which was in a normal state at the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing), has ended. Then, restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32 is started. “Restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32” means that restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is included in the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32. , a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration, and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration, and these restoration processes are executed in sequence. It means that For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decoration" is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decoration" is in an abnormal state. 5 movable decoration” is started. If the ``third movable decoration'' is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the ``first movable decoration'' is completed, the restoration processing for the ``third movable decoration'' is not performed, and the restoration processing for the ``fifth movable decoration'' is not performed. It is determined whether the "movable ornamental body" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, the restoring process for the "fifth movable decoration" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration" is in a normal state at the timing tm34, the restoring process for the "fifth movable decoration" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. becomes.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the ``restoration process for the first movable decoration'' started at the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the pattern variation (first time) is changed to ``symbol variation (1 time) is finished (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) is started (timing tm42). and when the timing tm42 arrives, "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration" are all in an abnormal state.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoring process for the "first movable decoration" is not restarted from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, and the timing tm42 ( Restoration operation timing) is continuously executed. This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, if the pattern variation (second time) is to execute a movable effect using the first movable decoration, "Movable effect using the first movable decoration in the pattern change (second time) The probability that the first movable decoration can be returned to the normal state before the timing of the start of is increased. That is, in this example, even if the movable decoration is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, the movable decoration returns to the normal state at the start of the movable effect using the movable decoration. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the pattern variation.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, restoration processing is executed for the movable ornament in an abnormal state based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42). However, in this case, the fourth movable decoration is started in parallel with the restoration operation of the first movable decoration, which is in the middle of execution. As for the movable decoration and the fifth movable decoration, the restoring operation is not started and the abnormal state is kept on standby. As a result, it is possible to prevent all of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state from simultaneously starting the restoration operation, and the restoration operation can be realized in a mode that corresponds to the situation.

In particular, as for the second movable decoration, as shown in FIG. Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), restoration processing (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decoration. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, when the first movable decoration is in a state of "not in a normal state and performing restoration processing (restoration operation)", the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) ) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is not started at the time when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives.

That is, the state in which the first movable decoration is executing the restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation time (timing tm42) means that the first movable decoration returns to normal (returns to the original position). It can be said that the player side is becoming preoccupied with the "first movable ornament" in such a state. In such a situation, if many movable ornaments start a new restoration process (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the effect corresponding to the pattern variation and loses interest. There is concern that

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, among the movable decorations (see FIG. 197B) capable of executing the restoration process (restoration operation) in parallel with the first movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration 197C, restoration processing is started in parallel with the first movable decoration that is in progress. On the other hand, for the second movable decoration, in the situation shown in FIG. A standby state is maintained until restoration processing for the decoration is completed. Then, after the restoration process for the first movable decoration is completed, the restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 197C) is waited for, and based on the arrival of the timing tm45, the second restoration operation is performed. Restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable ornament is started. As a result, when the first movable decoration takes time to return to normal, many movable decorations are prevented from newly starting restoration processing (restoration operation). will be resolved.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third movable decoration, which was left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, is set at the next restoration operation timing, as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. Without waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm44 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament ends. As a result, all the movable decorations that are not in the normal state can be returned to the normal state relatively early while avoiding all the movable decorations that are not in the normal state from starting the restoration operation all at once. become.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth movable decoration, which was left in an abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, is set at the next restoration operation timing, as in the example shown in FIG. 197B. The restoration operation is not started even when (timing tm45) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of timing tm46 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration ends. I'm trying As a result, it is possible to preferably avoid that a plurality of movable decorations perform restoration operations in parallel in such a manner as to hinder the player's concentration on the presentation.

In the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration processing for the fourth movable decoration ends before the timing tm44 when the restoration processing for the first movable decoration ends. When restoration processing for the decoration ends, the "second movable decoration", the "third movable decoration", and the "fifth movable decoration" do not start the restoration operation.

That is, the third movable decoration starts restoration processing (restoration operation) when timing tm42 arrives unless a specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state. If a specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is in an abnormal state, restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable decoration (here, the first movable decoration) is not started. 1 movable ornament) is completed, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started.

Also, the fifth movable decoration starts restoration processing (restoration operation) at timing tm42 unless the first movable decoration and the third movable decoration are in an abnormal state. If the movable decoration and the third movable decoration are in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration processing of the first movable decoration and the third movable decoration is performed. (restoration operation) is completed, and then restoration processing (restoration operation) is started.

In this way, restoration processing is not performed in parallel for a specific combination of movable decorations (for example, a combination that disturbs concentration on the production) among a plurality of movable decorations, so that the restoration process can be performed in accordance with the pattern change. Restoration processing can be performed while favorably maintaining an environment in which the player can concentrate on the presentation.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, in the situation where the third movable decoration is in the middle of executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the pattern variation (second time) ends (loss stop) and the next pattern It is assumed that the timing tm45 (the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) at which the variation (third time) is started arrives. Such a restoration operation timing originally functions to newly start the restoration operation for the third movable decoration that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable ornament, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously executed across the restoration operation timing (timing tm45). ing. As a result, it is possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is restarted based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, if the pattern variation (third time) is to execute a movable effect using the third movable decoration, "Movable effect using the third movable decoration within the pattern variation (third time) The probability of being able to "restore the third movable decoration to the normal state before the timing of starting" increases. That is, in this example, even if the movable decoration is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, the movable decoration returns to the normal state at the start of the movable effect using the movable decoration. By doing so, it is possible to perform an effect operation as a movable effect using the movable decorative body within the pattern variation.

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the third movable decorative body is set at the timing tm42 (the second time) when the pattern variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation. Then, as a result of timing tm42 (restoration operation timing corresponding to symbol variation) arriving in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed from timing tm42 (timing tm44).

However, for the third movable decoration, it is later than the timing tm42 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation) and within the period during which the first movable decoration is performing restoration processing (restoration operation). Even if the normal state is maintained until “timing tm43”, which is the timing of “timing tm43”, and an abnormality occurs at timing tm43, restoration processing (restoration operation ) is terminated, it is desirable to start the restoration processing (restoration operation) based on the arrival of the timing tm44. That is, in this case, the third movable decoration is in a state where the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern fluctuation has not yet arrived after becoming abnormal at timing tm43, but the other movable decoration (the third The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrives before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament 1). As a result, it becomes possible to return to a normal state at an early stage. The details of the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42" are as described in the "restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm32".

In this case, even though the fifth movable decoration was in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) came, it was in an abnormal state when the timing tm42 (restoration operation time) arrived. Since the restoring process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decoration" which has not been set can be started earlier than the "fifth movable decoration", the movable decoration has a high effect importance. You will be able to preferentially return to normal from your body. Note that the "fifth movable decoration" is based on the completion of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the "third movable decoration" which was in a normal state at the timing tm42 (restoration operation timing). Then, restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42 is started. “Restoration processing (restoration operation) using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42” means that restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is included in the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm42. , a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration, and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration, and these restoration processes are executed in sequence. It means that For example, when the restoration process for the "first movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "third movable decoration" is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is started. When the restoration process for the "third movable decoration" is completed, it is determined whether the "fifth movable decoration" is in an abnormal state. 5 movable decoration” is started. If the ``third movable decoration'' is not in an abnormal state when the restoration processing for the ``first movable decoration'' is completed, the restoration processing for the ``third movable decoration'' is not performed, and the restoration processing for the ``fifth movable decoration'' is not performed. It is determined whether the "movable ornamental body" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state has occurred, the restoring process for the "fifth movable decoration" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decoration" is in a normal state at the timing tm44, the restoring process for the "fifth movable decoration" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. becomes.

According to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the movable ornament (the first Among the movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration), the restoration operation timing (symbol change ( For the movable decoration (first movable decoration) whose restoration operation is being performed with the start timing of the first time) as a trigger, the restoration operation is not redone, and the restoration operation is ignored and the restoration operation is continued. However, for the movable decoration (fourth movable decoration) that is not executing the restoration operation, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) can be used as a trigger to start the restoration operation without ignoring it. That is, in this case, the plurality of movable decorations in the abnormal state may or may not ignore the function of the restoration operation timing depending on the situation in which they are placed. In the midst of this process, it becomes possible to realize restoration processing that is suitable for the situation.

Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation (starting timing of pattern variation (first time)) arrives, the "first movable decoration" performs the restoration operation. When the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern fluctuation (the start timing of the pattern fluctuation (second time)) arrives again during the execution, the first movable decoration that is executing the restoration operation will come again. Triggered by the restored operation timing (starting timing of symbol variation (second time)), the restoration operation can be continuously executed without redoing. That is, in this case, it takes time to return to normal operation, and as a result, even if the time for the restoration operation comes again while the restoration operation is being performed, it will be ignored. It is possible to continue the restoration operation without interruption, thereby facilitating early restoration of the abnormal movable decorative body.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is being executed across multiple fluctuations, another movable decoration (third movable decoration) When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decoration does not start the restoration operation at the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern variation, and the first movable decoration which is in the middle of execution does not start. The restoration processing (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration processing (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is not redone at the time of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration is not performed again. After not starting at the arrival of the timing (timing tm42), the restoration process for the third movable decoration ( Restoration action) will start, so restoration processing will not be performed in parallel for movable decorations in a specific combination (for example, a combination that disturbs concentration on the performance) among multiple movable decorations. However, it is possible to restore the plurality of movable decorations to normal relatively early.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the third movable decoration becomes abnormal at timing tm43, the third movable decoration has not yet reached the restoration operation timing after becoming abnormal. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of timing tm44 (end timing of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration executed straddling the restoration operation period). ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decoration is in a state where the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern fluctuation has not yet arrived after becoming abnormal at timing tm43, but the other movable decoration (the third The restoration process (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation time (timing tm42 that arrives before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament 1). As a result, it becomes possible to return to a normal state at an early stage.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable decoration returns to normal within the pattern fluctuation, and the movable decoration can be moved using the movable decoration. When the performance execution timing comes, the movable performance can be executed using the movable decoration that has just returned to normal. With such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), the movable decoration can be returned to normal at an early stage by the timing when the movable effect is started.

In addition, even if the restoration operation timings corresponding to the pattern fluctuations come several times during execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration, all of them are ignored and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to continue.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decoration and the second movable decoration are in a relationship of parallel restoration processing (restoration operation) as shown in FIG. 197B. be. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable decoration is executing the restoration operation, the second movable ornament is moved at the timing tm42. Restoration processing (restoration operation) for decorations is not started, and each restoration operation is not performed in parallel. As a result, many movable decorations are prevented from newly starting restoration processing (restoration operation) when the first movable decoration is taking time to return to normal.

Then, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decoration ends and returns to normal, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is performed at the timing tm45. I am trying to get it started. According to such a configuration, restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is not started immediately after the situation in which the first movable decoration takes time to return to normal is resolved. Since the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the effect. It becomes possible to arrange the environment appropriately.

At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration ends in failure, a new restoration operation timing ( When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decoration is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it becomes impossible to provide a movable effect using the first movable decoration, only the second movable decoration is restored to normal, and the movable effect using the second movable decoration is performed. It is desirable to make it executable.

In the example shown in FIG. 197(C), after the restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decoration is completed and normal return is made, the time period until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives. When the first movable decoration is in an abnormal state again, the first movable decoration and the second movable decoration are restored when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives. It is desirable to initiate processing (restoration operations) in parallel.

In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration ends in failure (does not return to the original position), the first movable decoration It is desirable to start the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration based on the completion of the restoration processing (restoration operation). In addition, even if the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration ends in failure (does not return to the original position), the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration It is desirable to start restoration processing (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration based on the completion of the operation).

In the above example, when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration is completed (timings tm34 and tm44) and the third movable decoration is not in an abnormal state, the first movable decoration It is desirable to start the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration based on the completion of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decoration is newly in an abnormal state within the execution period of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" thus started, the fifth movable decoration is restored. When the timing of a new restoration operation corresponding to the pattern variation is reached without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) on the third movable decoration based on the completion of the restoration processing (restoration operation). It is desirable that the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed on the third movable decoration immediately after. However, when the restoration operation (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration has not been completed and is in the execution state at the time when the new restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation has arrived, the restoration operation timing has arrived. ``restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration'' is not started when the restoration operation is completed, and the time for the restoration operation after the completion of the ``restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration'' has arrived. It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration".

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorations that are not in the normal state, the previous pattern variation (1 For the first movable decoration that is executing the restoration processing (restoration operation) with the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time) as a trigger, the restoration operation (timing tm42) is performed without redoing the restoration processing (restoration operation). is ignored and this is continued, but for the fourth movable decoration that has not been subjected to the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoration operation is performed using this as a trigger. I am trying to start. In this regard, even if the fourth movable ornament starts restoration processing (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation timing (timing tm42), a new When the restoration operation timing (timing tm43) arrives, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation timing (timing tm43) and continue the restoration operation across the restoration operation timing.

When there is a movable decoration that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoration action) and a movable decoration that is in the state of waiting for the execution of the restoration process (restoration action), the effect display related to the pattern change is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that cannot be visually recognized (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above-mentioned notification is being performed in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state, Restoration processing (restoration operation) that is already in progress is not interrupted and continues to be executed, and restoration processing (restoration operation) is performed when the restoration operation time arrives for the movable ornaments that are waiting for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation). It is desirable to start the (restoration operation) anew.

When there is a movable decoration that is in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation) or a movable decoration that is in the state of waiting for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), those movable decorations are used within the pattern variation. When the execution timing of the movable effect arrives, the driving force for executing the effect is applied to the movable decorative bodies even though the driving force for the restoration process (restoring operation) is applied. It is desirable to prevent the movement from occurring (no effect operation) in order to realize an early return to the normal state. However, although no driving force is given to these movable decorations for execution of the effect, the light emission provided in each movable decoration is such that the light emission mode according to the movable effect appears. It is desirable to allow the part to illuminate normally. That is, in this case, it is not that the movable effect itself is not executed, but part of the effect (light emitting effect) that constitutes the movable effect is properly executed. , "0" and "100"), a different light emitting mode also appears in the "movable decorative body that is not in a normal state", so that the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

In addition, even if the time for the restoration operation comes again, the restoration processing (restoration operation) will not be performed for the movable decoration for which the restoration processing (restoration operation) has ended in failure. It can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated in a movable effect as long as the movable decoration is present. However, even if the movable decoration is in such a state, when the timing for executing the movable performance using the movable decoration comes, the movable performance itself is not executed, but the movable performance is configured. It is desirable that part of the effect (light emitting effect) is properly executed. That is, in this case, depending on the degree of expectation (the ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern, including "0" and "100"), the light emission mode that differs is "the movable decoration in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure. ”, and it becomes possible to maintain the game interest.

Movable decorations that are in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation), movable decorations that are waiting for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), and states in which restoration processing (restoration operation) has ended in failure The movable decorative body in (1) may allow the light-emitting part to emit light as usual even when other effects are executed.

The restoration operation timing may include not only the timing corresponding to the symbol variation, but also timing due to other conditions. Then, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is started at a specific time that arrives under different conditions from the pattern fluctuation, while performing the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation), To start (execute) the restoration processing (restoration operation) in a non-notification state without performing the specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) when performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation. is desirable.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorations that are not in the normal state, the previous pattern variation (1 For the first movable decoration that is executing the restoration processing (restoration operation) with the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time) as a trigger, the restoration operation (timing tm42) is performed without redoing the restoration processing (restoration operation). is ignored and this is continued, but for the fourth movable decoration that has not been subjected to the restoration process (restoration operation), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoration operation is performed using this as a trigger. I am trying to start. In this way, even when the first movable decoration is taking time to return to normal, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern variation arrives, restoration processing (restoration operation) is performed without ignoring this. The "fourth movable decorative body" to be started is used for important effects, such as when the winning result is derived by pattern variation, or when the big winning game is started or executed. It is desirable to have

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, regarding the third movable decoration, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" has succeeded in returning to normal (detection of the reference position) and failed (detection of the reference position). The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration", regardless of whether the restoration process (restoration operation) ends (completes) in either case of non-detection). It is desirable to

Also, based on the fact that the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" has failed to return to normal and the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" has ended. When the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" that has been performed ends with success in returning to normal, and the third movable decoration returns to abnormal state within the pattern variation that has succeeded in returning to normal. When the state is reached, when the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the next pattern change arrives, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is not performed, and the "restoration process for the third movable decoration (restoration operation)" is not performed. It is desirable to perform "restoration operation)".

However, at this time, at the time when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the next pattern change has arrived, the "fifth movable decoration" started based on the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration". When "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the decoration" is in the execution state, "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" and "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" are executed. None of the above is performed, and the "restoration process for the first movable decoration" is triggered by the "restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern change" that arrives after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decoration" is completed. (Restoring operation)” is not performed, and “restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decoration” is preferably performed.

After the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" has been successfully completed and returned to normal, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" is being executed. Even if an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decoration, the ``restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration'' is executed so as to straddle the timing of the restoration operation corresponding to the next pattern change. In this case, it is desirable not to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" at the time of the restoration operation. That is, in this case, after the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" ends with success or failure in returning to normal, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" occurs at the restoration operation time. ” will be started.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the pattern variation (second time) arrives, among the movable decorations that are not in the normal state, the previous pattern variation (1 For the first movable decoration that is executing the restoration processing (restoration operation) with the restoration operation timing corresponding to the second time) as a trigger, the restoration operation (timing tm42) is performed without redoing the restoration processing (restoration operation). Ignore and let it continue. As for the third movable decoration, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is ignored, and the end of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is completed. Based on this, restoration processing (restoration operation) is started. In this regard, when the first movable decoration becomes abnormal again while the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" thus started is being executed, the "third movable decoration Instead of starting the "restoration process (restoration action) for the first movable ornament" based on the end of the "restoration process (restoration action) for the body", the restoration action timing corresponding to the pattern variation is changed. It is desirable to start the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" based on the new arrival.

However, at this time, when the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern fluctuation newly arrives, the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration" has not been completed and is in the middle of execution is being executed), it is desirable to ignore the restoration operation timing and wait until the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is completed. Then, after the completion of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decoration", the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decoration" is started at the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation that has arrived. It is desirable to let

That is, in this case, when both the "first movable decoration" and the "third movable decoration" are in an abnormal state, the "first movable decoration" is restored to normal first. When the restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation arrives when the third movable decoration is not in a normal state even though it has a relationship to be processed, the first movable decoration performs the restoration operation. When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decoration is in a state where restoration processing is not being performed) and when the restoration operation is not started (when the third movable decoration is If there is a situation where restoration processing is being executed), it becomes possible to realize restoration processing according to the situation.

The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting change means capable of changing the winning probability related to the hit determination and the selection probability related to the performance pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable to use the same restoration operation timing corresponding to the pattern variation (for example, the start of pattern variation).

The first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration are movable decorations provided at positions that the player can touch. The body may be included. In this case, since it is considered that the movable decoration provided at a position where the player can touch is most likely to be in an abnormal state, the restoration operation timing has arrived regardless of the state of the other movable decorations. Then, it is desirable to be provided as a "fourth movable decoration" for starting restoration processing (restoration operation).

To provide a light guide plate on which a light guide pattern is displayed in front of a movable decoration, and without restricting the presentation of the light guide pattern even during restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable decoration. Making it executable is desirable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoring process (restoring action) for the movable decoration.

The "first movable decoration" and the "second movable decoration" shown in Figs. 197B and 197C should be prepared as having an effect relationship in which both of them are in an action state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to For example, the ``first movable decoration'' and the ``second movable decoration'' may be decorated with mutually related decorations, or they may operate at the same time as a movable effect based on pattern variation (production pattern). decorations (characters, character string completion, etc.) should be provided as shaping. The third movable decoration is prepared so as not to be used when forming a specific movable performance or one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is avoided that one decoration is formed in the same manner (operation at the same time) as the movable production based on the pattern variation (production pattern). As a result, the decrease in interest in gaming can be suppressed.

For the "first movable decoration", "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fifth movable decoration", the game board 5 side and the door frame 3 side may be arranged separately.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, "first movable decoration", "second movable decoration", "third movable decoration", "fourth movable decoration", and "fourth movable decoration" 5 movable decorations”, but regarding the “second movable decoration”, “third movable decoration”, “fourth movable decoration”, and “fifth movable decoration” does not necessarily include all of these movable decorations, and may include "one", or appropriate "two" or "three" of these movable decorations. Even with such a configuration, it should have the technical features (in what manner restoration processing is performed in relation to the "first movable decoration") described with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C. becomes.

[Penalty when operating on operation parts that can emit light effects]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player's setting value (volume setting value) is changed by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Processing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 has the Brightness adjustment buttons are provided for various production lamps provided (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). A process for changing the set value (brightness set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes processing for adjusting emission brightness (processing for reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light) based on the changed brightness setting value. It will happen. Also, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value (brightness setting value) relating to brightness is decreased or increased.

It should be noted that acceptance of changes to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values are performed in a state in which the pattern does not change and a state in which the pattern changes. It is possible to execute each of the states by the player's operation.

By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, there has been a trend toward an increase in the number of operation units to be operated by a player. Any failure will inevitably reduce the enjoyment of the game, since the operability and performance will be remarkably deteriorated.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, apart from the operation buttons 410,
- A sword decoration in which the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) is movable (variably) between the sheathed position and the sheathed position by a predetermined operation (sword drawing operation, sword sheathing operation). 5001 (see Figures 146, 161, etc.)
, and even though the opportunity to operate is not given, "operation (sword extraction operation) to draw the sword part 5010 (blade part 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (sword drawing operation)" or "sheathing the sword If the operation is repeated, it may cause a failure.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the flange portion 5013 are provided with effect light-emitting portions (not shown), and the sword portion 5010 (blade portion) is provided. 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) are provided with a special detection portion (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the sheath portion 5020 is at a specific position (original position) where the sword is sheathed. Then, at least during the period when the demo screen is displayed (non-game state in which the game effect and pattern variation according to the big hit determination are not executed), the sword part 5010 is specified as a result of detection by the special detection part. When it is determined that it is not at the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an effect restricted period as a penalty.

According to such a configuration, at least when in the non-playing state in which the pattern variation is not performed, the sword portion 5010 is illuminated by the predetermined operation together with the effect light emitting portion (blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013). As a result of being displaced to , if it is detected that it is not positioned at a specific position, a performance restriction period can occur, so that rough handling of the operation unit can be preferably suppressed.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound" and the above-mentioned "change of the set value (brightness set value) related to the emission brightness""change" is kept in a state in which it can be accepted by the player's operation, and the effect restriction period is generated. However, as will be described later, during this limited production period,
・Regarding the production sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume is changed, the production sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume adjustment While the confirmation sound will not be output,
As for the effect lamp, when the set value (brightness set value) related to the light emission luminance is changed, the effect light emitting part provided in the sword part 5010 that is the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps provided in the pachinko machine 1 Although the (blade portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) do not emit light with a brightness corresponding to the brightness setting value, they are provided in a different portion from the blade portion 5010, which is the detection target. The effect lamps (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5) are put into a state in which effect light emission can be executed with a luminance corresponding to the set value, and so on. It can be done.

According to such a configuration, when the effect restriction period occurs, both the change in the set value for the volume and the change in the set value for the brightness can be accepted. The degree of restriction differs between processing and processing related to brightness setting.

In other words, with regard to the effect sound, although the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, the effect sound is not output in a manner that reflects the changed volume setting value, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. is not output, the player is given a sense of tension (maybe he has done something that he should not have done).

On the other hand, regarding the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light-emitting portion (sword portion 5011, handle portion 5012, and collar portion 5013) of the “sword portion 5010” operated by the player, Although the effect light is not emitted in a manner that reflects the changed brightness setting value, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword part 5010" operated by the player is the changed brightness setting value. By making it possible to perform light emission that reflects the brightness setting value (for example, light emission that matches the timing of a specific advance notice effect), While recognizing that the performance restriction is imposed and warning it, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole can favorably appeal that the player intends to continue the game and performance. In this sense, the effect lamps on the game board 5 where the game balls flow down or win a prize should normally emit effect light in such a way that the changed brightness setting value is reflected. is desirable. As a result, it is possible to warn against rough handling of the operation unit while preferably avoiding "the player's desire to start the game is diminished or the game is urged to end". become.

Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the restriction on the processing related to the volume setting and the restriction on the processing related to the brightness setting are different in release conditions for each restriction. . In particular, the "processing related to volume setting", which was initially subject to relatively strict restrictions, will be greatly improved to normal status relatively early, so as to strongly encourage the continuation of the game. On the other hand, although the "processing related to brightness setting" on the side that initially imposed relatively sweet restrictions showed an improvement trend, the overall improvement speed was slowed down, and some It is expected that this will maintain a moderate sense of tension over a long period of time and prevent rough handling from occurring again.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination as to whether to selectively appear the expected effect (a plurality of expected effects). Depending on the result of this announcement effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preview effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. None of a plurality of expected effects (forecast effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such performance pattern determination and advance notice performance determination are performed, by performing control to display the performance contents according to the result of the determination on the performance display device 1600, the variation by the decorative pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is performed. The production is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the movement of the movable body (character production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance with "a function to definitely indicate whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit". The expectation effect related to the body motion etc. will be provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) for the fact that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

However, when realizing such an expected effect as a background depiction (background notice), basically, it is necessary to have a degree of effect such as ``what numerical value should be set for the ratio of the appearance of the image with high expectation?'' The only thing that can be done is to let Therefore, the fundamental problem of "it is difficult to have a feeling of anticipation for a big win unless an image (anticipated effect) with a high degree of expectation appears" has not yet been solved.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that a special effect is to be performed as a result of the advance notice effect determination (when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least background depiction It is possible to execute processing to display the background image used in the original image data in a special mode different from the original image data, and when displayed in the special mode, the degree of expectation ( It is possible to suggest that the ratio of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is high.

Here, as the "processing to display in a special mode", for example,
A process of displaying the original image data as rotation processed data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation about any one of the x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area),
- It is possible to exemplify a process such as a process of displaying the original image data as mosaic processed data with a predetermined degree of "blurring".

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the original image data is slightly processed (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) A special effect of displaying this (displaying in a special mode) is intentionally performed. According to such a configuration, even if the original image data is slightly processed to perform a special effect, it becomes difficult for the player to perceive and recognize the fact with certainty. However, in exchange for this, even if the special effect is not being performed, it is possible to remember the feeling and illusion that ``maybe the special effect is being performed''. Therefore, it is expected that the expectation for the big win is preferably maintained even if the state in which the highly anticipated image (special effect) does not appear continues.

However, if there is no clue for the player side to recognize the implementation status of such "processing to display in a special mode", it will be difficult to recognize even the possibility of being in a highly anticipated situation. , Ultimately, performing a special production may lose its own meaning.

In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment displays a help image as to whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed according to the operation by the player. It is possible to execute a process that causes According to such a configuration, since the help image can be displayed according to the player's operation, the game interest caused by not being able to recognize whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It will be expected that the decline in the number of employees will be suppressed, and that expectations will be favorably maintained.

However, the "help image" according to this example of explanation does not explicitly indicate whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, and intentionally includes difficulty in recognition. ing. Precisely because it is intended to have such recognition difficulty, even if it does not appear that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, we cannot be certain that it is. can be left behind and expectations can be maintained.

FIG. 199 shows an example of display on the effect display device 1600 when the state transitions between a non-game state (demonstration screen, etc.) in which a game is not being executed and a game execution state in which a game is being executed. .

FIG. 199(a) shows a display example of the effect display device 1600 in a non-game state (demonstration screen, etc.) in which no game is being played. As shown in FIG. 199(a), in the effect display device 1600 in the non-game state, the character image PG (here, A guide image AG is displayed, suggesting that the character imitating a penguin can be made to appear by operating predetermined operation means (operation button 410, etc.). In this explanatory example, an explanation and a character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

When the start winning occurs and the game (variation of the special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started in the situation shown in FIG. , the guide image AG is hidden. At the same time, the variable production by the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected production (advance production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and the action of the movable body (character production). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the performance during the game execution state. The presence of the character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) can be appealed favorably.

FIG. 199(c) shows a display example of the effect display device 1600 when the variable effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199(b) is finished (stopped display).

If the suspension information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the suspension information is digested and the variable production by the decorative pattern SZ is newly started, so that the guide image AG is hidden. The rendering situation shown in FIG. 199(b) reappears in the same state as it was. On the other hand, if no hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199(c), the game is shifted again to the non-game state (demonstration screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guidance image AG is displayed based on the state in which the game is not newly started for a predetermined period of time after the variable effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 199(a)) will reappear. In addition, in the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative pattern SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative pattern SZ itself may be hidden.

Then, the "processing to display in a special mode" according to this production example is a state in which the variable production by the decorative pattern SZ is executed in a "specific production pattern" (when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the production judgment). and within a period in which a specific effect image appears (predetermined timing within a specific effect pattern).

Fig. 200 shows a state in which the variable effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed in a "specific effect pattern", and an expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image is performed. It shows an example of display on the effect display device 1600 in the state where the character is in.

That is, in this production example, on the condition that a predetermined production condition is satisfied when at least "an expected production in which a princess character (specific production image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed. The original image data of the ornamental pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are slightly rotated and then displayed (displayed in a special mode). there is When the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is not performed The probability that the jackpot pattern appears is higher than when it is displayed.

More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200(a), the "processing to display in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) are different from each original image data. displayed as is. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 200(b), the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated 3 degrees to the left and then displayed. Processing (processing for displaying in a special mode) is being executed, and in the situation shown in FIG. , and then processing to display them (processing to display them in a special mode) is being executed.

As is clear from FIGS. 200(a) to (c), even when the "processing to display in a special mode" is performed, each original image data of the decorative design SZ and its background image (princess character) is displayed. Only a slight turning process is applied to the . In particular, in FIG. 200(a) to (c), it is possible to compare and see. ) to (c) are displayed, and they cannot be compared. Therefore, even when FIGS. 200(b) and (c) appear, it is difficult to be certain that they are in the state of being displayed in the special mode. It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. It is difficult to be sure of this, and it is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as "it may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode".

The original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displayed (displayed in a special mode). ) may be executed as a process of separately applying rotational processing to each original image data and then displaying it, or may be executed as a process of displaying each original image data after combining them into one image. may be executed as a process of rotating and displaying the image of .

200(b) and (c), when the image shown in FIG. 200(c) is displayed, the ratio of the appearance of the jackpot patterns is higher than when the image shown in FIG. 200(b) is displayed. may be made to have a relationship in which . Alternatively, when the "process for displaying in a special mode" is executed, after temporarily displaying FIG. You can let it run. Alternatively, both of FIGS. 200(b) and (c) may not necessarily be prepared, and only one of FIGS. 200(b) and (c) may be displayed.

However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player side to judge the implementation status of such "processing to be displayed in a special mode", performing such a special effect itself loses its meaning. I can't help it. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least when the "expected effect in which a princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed, the operation button 410 It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed by operating a predetermined operation means such as.

FIG. 201 shows that the help image is displayed based on the acceptance of the operation by the player in the state where the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as the background image" is being performed. It shows an example of display on the effect display device 1600 at time.

That is, in this example of the effect, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed (see FIG. 200), the player operates (the operation button 410, etc.) is performed, a character image PG (here, a character imitating a penguin) useful for checking "whether a special effect (in this case, a tilt effect) is being executed" is displayed as a help image. It is now displayed.

More specifically, when the player operates (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 200(a), the situation shown in FIG. 201(a) appears. When the player operates (operation button 410, etc.) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 201(b) appears, and when the situation shown in FIG. 201(c), the situation shown in FIG. 201(c) appears.

However, as is clear from FIGS. 201(a) to 201(c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it can be used to check whether the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. , and whether or not the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed is not explicitly stated. Precisely because it is intentionally made to have such recognition difficulty, it becomes possible to be strongly aware of the possibility that "processing to display in a special mode" appears to be being executed. Even if it seems that the "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed, it cannot be convinced, and hope for the feasibility of the processing can be left and the expectation can be maintained. become possible.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 201(a) to 201(c), the character image PG (help image) according to this production example is in a state where the "process for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. Regardless of whether or not it is executed, it can be displayed only in one manner, which is a predetermined position and is held horizontally as if holding a ruler. In this way, an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the "process of displaying in a special mode" and that is displayed extending in the horizontal direction is made to appear by the player's operation. (Here, a ruler) can be made to function as a reference image (help image) for determining whether or not a "state in which a special effect (here, a tilt effect) is being executed".

In particular, in this production example, the image (princess character) to be executed in the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" is not affected by the "processing to be displayed in a special mode" and is horizontally oriented. A reference image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend in the direction of the arrow appears. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) to be subjected to special processing, it is possible to further assist in determining whether special processing is being performed. become.

That is, in such a production example, the special production to which the "process of displaying in a special mode" is a subtly tilting production. Expectations are higher than if it weren't done. Therefore, the player operates a predetermined operation means (such as the operation button 410) in order to determine whether the tilt effect is being performed. It is intentionally made to have recognition difficulty that does not deterministically notify whether "the process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations when it appears that the tilting effect is being executed, and even if the tilting effect does not seem to be being executed, It is expected to leave hope (maintain a sense of expectation) such as ``there may be a state where the tilting effect is being performed''.

Furthermore, the reference image (here, the ruler) indicating whether or not it is in the "state in which the special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed" is subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode". Up to the point where at least a part of the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) is overlapped is one effect, and the reference image (here, the ruler) alone is the effect (expectation level ), and it is possible to provide an interesting effect such that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing with the effect image (here, the princess character) already in the display state.

In addition, according to such a configuration, it is possible to progress the performance without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) depending on the player's selection (depending on the operation). When the player is not confident that the effect (in this case, the tilt effect is being executed), the player will not perform the operation, so that the player can enjoy various ways of playing. Become.

In this production example, the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed as the "processing of displaying after rotating the original image data", but this is not necessarily the case. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be rotated and then displayed. Alternatively, the image data may be subjected to other processing or conversion instead of the rotation processing. In short, it is possible to execute special processing for converting and displaying an image having a mode different from the normal mode, and when it is in a situation where the special processing can be executed, the special processing is performed by the player's operation. Any device that can display a reference image that does not cause the above-described effects can be obtained.

By the way, in the example of the effect described above, the "processing to display in a special mode" can be executed when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed. However, depending on the result of the performance determination, it may be possible to execute the process a plurality of times within the period from when the decorative symbol SZ starts to change until it stops changing. At this time, when the number of times the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed is large, it is desirable to make the ratio of appearance of the big winning symbols higher than when the number of times is small.

In addition, regarding the character image PG (especially the ruler here), not only when the "expected effect that the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is performed, but also when the decorative pattern SZ is displayed. The display may be made possible by the player's operation over the entire period from the start of the fluctuation until the stop of the fluctuation. Further, it may be possible to display the decorative symbols SZ by the player's operation even when the decorative symbols SZ are in the stopped state.

That is, in this case, even if any background image is being displayed on the effect display device 1600, if there is an operation by the player, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) will appear. becomes. However, considering that the character image PG (especially the ruler here) is a "reference image for comparison with the background image (reference image)", the preferred display position for displaying the character image PG is the background image each time. It is clear that it differs depending on the type of On the other hand, if the display position and display form of the character image PG (especially the ruler here) are changed in accordance with the type of the background image each time, the character image PG becomes the comparison reference. There is a possibility that the essential function as an image (reference image) will be lost, and there is a concern that the game interest will be reduced due to suspicion of lack of reliability. In other words, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an unchanging and absolute image regardless of the rendering situation.

Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed between a plurality of predetermined display positions according to the player's operation (operation button 410, etc.). . However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

FIG. 202 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by the player's operation.

FIG. 202(a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player has a suspicion that "a process to display in a special mode may have been executed", and performs an operation to display a comparison reference image (reference image). Then, the character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at one of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 202(b) to (d)) predetermined according to the mode of operation. processing is performed.

For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, a character image PG as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed on the left side of the display area (FIG. 202(b)). is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, a character image as a comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the central position (FIG. 202(c)) in the display area. When the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time after the process of displaying the PG is performed, a comparison reference image (reference image ) to display the character image PG.

As is clear from FIGS. 202(b) to (d), the form of the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) is the same regardless of the display position. , since the positional relationship between the background image (or decorative pattern) and the character image PG (especially the ruler here), which can be the object of the "processing to be displayed in a special mode", is different, the "display in a special mode" The easiness of determination as to whether or not the "processing to cause" is being executed will naturally differ.

For example, when a character image PG (particularly a ruler here) is displayed at the position (central position in the display area) shown in FIG. 202(d) (the right side position in the display area). , the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) overlaps the background image to be compared, but is displayed so as to hide almost the entire background image (ticket). It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether or not the "processing to cause" is being executed.

According to such a configuration, the character image PG (in particular, the ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is placed in the "display position suitable for comparison" that differs depending on the type of the background image each time. Since it can be displayed by a user's operation, it is possible to suitably provide information for determining whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed.

In this production example, the display position of the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of times the operation button 410 is operated within a predetermined period of time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be changed according to the length of time the operation button 410 is long pressed, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any one of these operation means may be operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operating means depending on the amount. When the character image PG is displayed by operating an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG can be displayed even in a situation (acceptance period) when the operation button 410 is given an opportunity to operate. can be made possible.

In addition, the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) as a comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation) by itself. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed to complete the process, the expected effect (background image) becomes a worthless image that only makes it difficult to see. Therefore, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed since the display was made by the player's operation, it is desirable that the display be automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (especially the ruler in this case) is displayed as the comparison reference image (reference image) and the type of the background image, etc., the "processing to display in a special mode" may be executed. In some cases, the predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) may not be enough to compare and determine whether or not the device is in the state of being in a state where the device is in the state of being in a state of being in the state of being in a state of comparison and determination. Therefore, in the above effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is being displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to make the character image PG appear is re-operated. If so, the time during which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, every time a predetermined operation means is operated again, if the display is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) based on the timing of the operation, intermittent operation is performed until the player is satisfied. By performing such operations, it becomes possible to maintain the display state of the character image PG, and it becomes possible to carefully compare and judge.

However, if such endless continuous display as a comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply permitted, it may become extremely easy to determine whether special processing is being executed. . In other words, the player may always come to a convincing conclusion that "there is a state in which special processing is being executed" or "there is no state in which special processing is being executed." It does not explicitly indicate whether or not the process to be displayed by is being executed, but intentionally makes it difficult to recognize".

Therefore, when the predetermined operating means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler held by the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). It is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image by doing so. That is, in this case, every time the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is extended in exchange for , the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole gradually decreases (here, the ruler gradually shortens), so the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is can be extended, it is possible to preferably maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether the process of displaying in a special mode is being executed.

However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), it will not be useful for comparison with the background image, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. It could be connected. Therefore, for the overall size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG), a minimum size (here, the minimum ruler length) is set in advance. When it is reduced to the size, even if the predetermined operation means is operated again in this state, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is not extended, It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

Moreover, it is desirable that the overall size (display area) of such a comparison reference image (character image PG) is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. . That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear (or extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is changed. is gradually getting smaller (here, the ruler is getting shorter), and finally it doesn't even appear anymore. It will be possible to prompt the user to operate only, and other than that, it will be expected that the user will concentrate on the original production content.

Note that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over even after the change effect is finished and the next change effect is started. According to such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be given as a very valuable performance opportunity, and basically, just by looking at the background image or the decorative pattern SZ, the "special mode" can be provided. It is possible to provide an effect (see FIG. 200) that predicts whether the "processing to be displayed by" is being executed.

Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is in a state when it is displayed for the first time by operating a predetermined operation means after power-on (or RAM clear). After that, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (in this case, the ruler gradually becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear. . However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is met, the comparison reference image (if it appears in multiple positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to one of those positions) A process of increasing the display area as a whole (here, lengthening the ruler) for display may be prepared. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear by operating the predetermined operation means.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of operation means are prepared so that the display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is set differently, the operation is performed depending on which one of the operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the selected operation means. In this case, the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) for which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be displayed is set separately for each operation means (display position), and the specific operation means is displayed. is operated, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

For example, in the case of the production example described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operation means is operated in the production situation shown in FIG. 202(a), the production situation shown in FIG. 202(b) appears. becomes. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 202(b), when the first operation means is operated again, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended in exchange for this. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shortened). However, even if the second operation means is operated after this, only the rendering situation shown in FIG. The reduced display as an image (character image PG) is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the center position by the operation on the second operating means. Likewise, when the third operation means is operated, only the rendering situation shown in FIG. The reduced display as is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed on the right side by the operation on the third operation means.

In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed at a specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 202(c)) (within three seconds), When another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (central position) is maintained in the display state. Then, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is caused to appear at a position that is difficult to compare with the background image by operating the predetermined operation means, it is possible to perform the operation separately from the predetermined operation means. By operating the operation means of , it is possible to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at a different display position. As a result, it is possible to add the interest of searching at which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to improve the ease of comparison.

Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at a different display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that has already been displayed is displayed as a non-display. The displayed state is maintained without any display. According to such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed simultaneously, and the number of comparison materials with the background image is increased accordingly (here, two rulers are arranged side by side). and the horizontal length becomes substantially longer). It will be possible to give an opportunity to significantly improve the comparability at the timing when you really want to know if there is. However, this consumes two of the "remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached)" that is set for each of the multiple operation means to make the comparison reference image (character image PG) appear. Since it can be generated in exchange for things, it can be said that the cost of greatly improving comparability is also large.

Further, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (three seconds) after it is displayed by the player's operation. PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operating means as soon as possible after operating the first operating means. That is, in this case, whether or not it is determined whether or not the "state in which the special processing is being executed" is determined only by the comparison reference image (character image PG) that appears by operating the first operation means, or the cost is increased. Therefore, it is necessary to make a quick judgment as to whether or not to greatly improve the ease of comparison by further operating the second operation means, and the delay in the judgment is disadvantageous to the player. Since it will be expanded, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension.

Further, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed at the same time, the comparison reference images (character images PG) are hidden at different timings. In addition, the size (the length of the ruler) of each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) of each operation means, "the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if a specific operation means is operated, but if another operation means is operated, the comparison reference image is displayed. (character image PG) is displayed”. It is possible to make the judgment even more interesting by adding judgment elements other than the type of the background image to be compared.

As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (three seconds) after it is displayed by the player's operation. When the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is stopped due to a loss before, it is desirable to hide it with this as a trigger. That is, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, when the reference image for comparison (character image PG) is displayed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effects in the display area. It becomes difficult to concentrate on the content of the production. As a result, if the user does not notice that the character image PG has failed and is in a stopped state, the purpose of the character image PG to be useful for the production will be lost. When this happens, it is desirable to hide the character image PG using this as an opportunity.

However, the character image PG may be kept displayed until a predetermined time elapses without hiding the character image PG when the game is stopped due to a big hit. That is, when the game is stopped due to a big win, the big win game will be started even if the user does not notice it. It will be expected to function as a production.

Further, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable to output a specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG). Even in a situation where the user is gazing, the user can easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) has been displayed.However, when outputting such a specific sound, the following It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the amusement of the game.

That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until the minimum unit is reached) for which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can appear is set separately for each operation means (display position), the remaining number of times is set. If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, the performance content in the display area becomes difficult to see, and the user is forced to concentrate on the original performance. becomes difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) can be output, and this specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is displayed in a special manner. so that its sound output is permissible only when it is in a non-executing state. In this way, regarding the execution of the "processing to display in a special mode", instead of using a specific sound (for example, a penguin bark) as a definite suggestion on the affirmative side, only a specific sound (for example, , penguin's bark), players who dislike such specific sounds concentrate on the original performance, and the possibility of executing "processing to display in a special mode" is high. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at certain times.

However, for a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry), the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed by the player's operation when the "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed. Even if it becomes, it is desirable that the sound output is not necessarily permitted. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image that was already displayed is reduced (the length of the ruler is shortened) by the player's operation). Sometimes when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's bark) is output, it is definitely recognized that the "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed. For example, when a penguin's bark) is not output, there may be a state in which "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed or a state in which "processing to display in a special mode" is not being executed. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the fun when the specific sound (for example, penguin bark) is not output.

It should be noted that the specific sound (for example, penguin bark) may be output under the above-described predetermined conditions regardless of which one of the plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means is operated, there is a possibility that the specific sound will be output. Appear a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for determining whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. The player side can select whether or not to display a comparison reference image (character image PG) useful for judging whether or not the "process to be displayed by" is being executed.

Further, in the above example of effect, the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is displayed in a special mode by displaying it in a smaller size (with a shorter ruler) in exchange for extending the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG). It preferably maintains the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the process is being executed. In this regard, when a specific sound (for example, a penguin's cry) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound ( For example, if the sound volume of a penguin's cry) is set to be lower than when the sound is output, the difficulty in recognition when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended can be reduced to some extent. be expected to maintain.

In addition, the size and display position of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are adjusted so that the comparison reference images (character images PG) do not overlap each other when the comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 202). and should be set respectively. It is possible to increase the amount of material for comparison with the background image by the amount that each comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed without overlapping.

Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. According to such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, the comparison with the background image that can be seen through the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not possible. You will be able to do it well.

Further, in the above example of effect, each time the predetermined operation means is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed smaller (the ruler is shortened). Any mode may be used as long as it increases the difficulty of recognizing whether the process to be displayed in the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same, but the portion whose transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. can be That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is displayed with a specific transparency is made smaller (the specified transparency of the ruler). It is important to shorten the part that is displayed with transparency) and display it. You may make it display and make it difficult to recognize visually.

Further, as described above, the “process for displaying in a special mode” means, for example, the display state shown in FIG. 200(a), the display state shown in FIG. It may be a dynamic rendering process that changes the display state to another. When the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is implemented as such dynamic drawing processing, when the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is terminated, for example, the display state shown in FIG. After passing through the display state shown in 200(b), it is returned to the display state shown in FIG. 200(a).

In this respect, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (three seconds) after it is displayed. It is desirable to perform the "process of displaying in a special mode" in a time shorter than the predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be caused to appear by the player's operation while the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, the While the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains its display state (within 3 seconds), "the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) is returned to the display state shown in 200(a). become able to.

However, the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process may be performed for a time longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be caused to appear by the player's operation when the "processing to display in a special mode" as the dynamic rendering process is being executed. Also, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) maintains the display state (within 3 seconds), "the display state shown in FIG. 200(a) and returns to the display state shown in FIG. It will be possible to make it. In addition, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended, which adds a sense of strategy.

In addition, regarding the "processing to display in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction processing, depending on the result of the effect determination, it may be performed in a time shorter than the predetermined time (3 seconds), or it may be performed in a time shorter than the predetermined time (3 seconds). It may take a long time to complete. Also, within the period from when the decorative pattern SZ starts to fluctuate until it stops fluctuating, a "processing to display in a special mode" as a dynamic depiction process performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds); The "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic rendering process that is performed for a time longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at different predetermined timings.

Also, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (three seconds) after it is displayed, but when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed For a specific sound that can be output (e.g., a penguin's cry), the sound output should be interrupted in a time significantly shorter than a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds, which is less than half of the time). is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the "process of displaying in a special mode" is executed, the specific sound will not be played until after the "processing of displaying in a special mode" is executed. (For example, penguin bark) output is suppressed, so even though the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, a specific sound (for example, , penguin's cry) can make it difficult to create a production situation as if it were denied.

In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (for 3 seconds) from before the execution of the "processing to display in a special mode" to after the execution. Become. Therefore, when the "process of displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction process is executed, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed, for example, the display shown in FIG. 200(b) to the display state shown in FIG. 200(c).

Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of the penguin-like character and the ruler, it is also possible to display only either the penguin-like character or the ruler. The point is that the comparison reference image (character image PG), which is not subject to the "process of displaying in a special mode", can be made to appear by the player's operation. However, if a reference image (ruler) indicating the unit of length in the horizontal direction is displayed, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. It is possible.

The guide image AG in the demonstration screen shown in FIG. 199 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment confirmation sound It is also possible to assign a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel and set the volume value to "0".

In addition, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" is output, it is in a state where some "confirmation sound" is output. should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the player will be conscious of the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. It is for

[Mischief prevention for multiple operation methods]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination as to whether to selectively appear the expected effect (a plurality of expected effects). Depending on the result of this announcement effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preview effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. None of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice production judgment) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance with "a function to definitely indicate whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit". The expectation effect related to the body motion etc. will be provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) for the fact that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) set by the player regarding the volume is adjusted by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing for changing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 has the Brightness adjustment buttons are provided for various production lamps provided (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). A process for changing the set value (brightness set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes processing for adjusting emission brightness (processing for reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light) based on the changed brightness setting value. It will happen. Also, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value (brightness setting value) relating to brightness is decreased or increased.

It should be noted that acceptance of changes to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values are performed in a state in which the pattern does not change, and a state in which the pattern fluctuates. It is possible to execute each of these states by the player's operation.

Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, many operating means (the operation button 410, the sword section 5010, the effect selection left button 331 , effect selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button (not shown), and the like. Then, when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, the player is given an operation opportunity while the variable performance by the decorative pattern is being performed, and the game interest is enhanced through such operation performance. We are trying to maintain

However, if such a large number of operation means are provided, the existence of these operation means will become conspicuous, and thus the player will easily become the target of mischief. As a result of rough handling, if even one of the operating means develops an abnormality or failure, the operability and performance will be remarkably lowered, and the enjoyment of the game will inevitably decline.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, even though it is in a non-game state (a state in which the above-described operation effect cannot occur) in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is not executed, First of all, when there is a high possibility of mischief due to the detection of operations with multiple operation means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, thereby suppressing the operation means from being handled roughly. I am making it possible.

More specifically, in a state where a game is not started (non-game state), out of the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means ( Here, when the operation on the operation button 410 and the blade portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is triggered,
・In the effect display device 1600, in a state in which a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear while the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed (reproduced),
・Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value related to the output volume of the sound effects will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed.
・ Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, changes to the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp will not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. period) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes). When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the volume control operation is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal state as the non-game state is restored, in which the reception of the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is permitted and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound is also output.

It should be noted that during the performance restriction period (function restriction period) according to this embodiment, "Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, changes to the volume setting value related to the output volume of the performance sound are not accepted, and the current volume The setting value will not be displayed”, and “Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp will not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed”. However, only one of the processing related to volume adjustment and the processing related to brightness adjustment may be restricted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) are prepared as a trigger for generating such effect restriction period (function restriction period). As a result, it is expected to complicate the conditions under which the production restriction period occurs, and to create a sense of tension such as ``Isn't the hall actually monitoring mischievous behavior?''.

FIG. 203 is a time chart for explaining an example of processing for generating an effect limit period based on the establishment of a predetermined effect limit condition in a non-game state (demonstration screen, etc.). be.

Now, it is controlled to a state where the game is not started (non-game state), and the situation where the standby display is performed in the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative pattern is displayed in the stopped state, the demonstration screen is displayed). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output at the time of the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the luminance adjustment button is operated, the luminance setting value is changed. process to reflect) will be executed. Also, at this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

In this way, in the non-game state, when the player starts a game, the operation of the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button is performed so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his or her taste. Acceptance is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, the sound volume setting value and the brightness setting value are changed accordingly, so that the player is expected to be prompted to start the game.

However, as described above, in the non-gaming state, mischievous operations may be performed on a plurality of operation means including the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button. As a result, if even one of these operating means malfunctions or breaks down, the operability and performance are significantly reduced, which inevitably reduces the enjoyment of the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, several operation patterns (detection patterns) to be recognized as mischievous detection are prepared. Based on the fact that an operation has been detected, it is possible to execute a process of generating an effect restricted period (function restricted period) in which a penalty is imposed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-game state, it is recognized that the conditions for restricting the performance are satisfied. and
a. A first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started when an operation is detected on the sword portion 5010, and an operation on the operation button 410 is newly detected until the first timer time is finished. In addition, when the operation of the operation button 410 is newly detected, the second timer period (for example, 3 seconds) is started. An operation pattern (detection pattern) for which a detection condition such as reoccurrence is set
b. A third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started when an operation of the operation button 410 is detected, and a new operation detection of the blade portion 5010 occurs until the third timer time is finished. In addition, the operation detection of the operation button 410 is detected until the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started with the detection of the newly generated operation on the blade portion 5010, and the measurement of the fourth timer time is finished. An operation pattern (detection pattern) for which a detection condition such as reoccurrence is set

It should be noted that these operation patterns a and b are only examples, and when the detection conditions related to other operation patterns are satisfied, the performance restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated, or the detection It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. Also, the first to fourth timer times may all be the same time or different times. Also, the same timer may be used for time measurement, or different timers may be used for time measurement.

Here, the "long press on the operation button 410" and the "continuous hitting operation (multiple operations) on the operation button 410" are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-game state). I can say. However, since these modes are modes that can be operated and instructed in the operation presentation in the game execution state, even in the non-game state, the player has some purpose (for example, making a wish or rehearsal) when starting the game. It is assumed that these operations can be performed in , and it has been relatively well confirmed that such situations actually occur. Therefore, for "operation combinations for a plurality of operation means (for example, operations in the order of 'sword section 5010 → operation button 410 → sword section 5010')" to be detected for the purpose of mischief, It can be said that it is important in order to avoid erroneous detection to set the operation effect as one that is not instructed to operate at certain times. As a result, it is possible to avoid the fact that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 greatly decreases due to relatively frequent production restricted periods.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before and after operating the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) is operated. As a condition, only when a plurality of operation means are operated in a jumbled manner within a relatively short time, the detection condition for the above operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated. I have to. Therefore, a player or the like who touches the ball only once for curiosity, not for mischief, can be excluded from penalties, and the performance restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more preferably avoid a large decrease in the operating rate as.

The reason why the detection conditions are tightened in this way is to avoid a large decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 due to relatively frequent production restriction periods, and to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being messed up due to mischief. This is because it is assumed that various combinations of operations will be performed when an operation is performed, and there is a high possibility that even if the detection conditions are tightened, the detection conditions will eventually be met.

In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, at timing tq1 in the non-playing state, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and determines whether the second-stage detection condition is satisfied until the first timer time expires. It will be in a state (first stage state) for judging whether or not.

That is, as described above, "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" imposes three conditions (sword portion 5010→operation button 410→sword portion 5010) as conditions for generating a restricted effect period. Each time is fulfilled one by one, the staircase for generating the production restriction period is raised one step at a time.

At the timing tq1, the player goes up the first stairway among the three stairways until the performance restriction period is generated. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) has expired. When the first timer time expires, the game returns to the original state in which none of the above three conditions are met (step 0 after going down one flight of stairs).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, an operation on the operation button 410 is detected at timing tq2 when the first timer time has not yet expired (first stage state), and the operation pattern Of the three conditions of (detection pattern) a, the "second stage detection condition" is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates a second timer period (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and until the second timer period expires, the third stage detection condition (here, the last detection condition) is satisfied (second stage state).

In other words, at the timing tq2, the player climbs the second stairway among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) has expired. When the second timer time expires, the game returns to the original state where none of the above three conditions are met (down two stairs to the 0th stage state).

In the example shown in FIG. 203, at timing tq3 when the second timer has not finished expiring (the state of the second stage), the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again, and the operation pattern (detection Among the three conditions of the pattern) a, the "third stage detection condition (final detection condition)" is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, the effect display device 1600 displays (reproduces) a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear while the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed. let it start. Along with this, even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. Furthermore, even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is of course not output. , to generate production restrictions. Then, the effect restricted period (function restricted period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) from timing tq3.

According to such a configuration, when a plurality of operations are performed in a jumbled manner, the performance restriction period occurs, so mischievous operations can be suppressed.

In addition, in order to generate a limited production period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (climb the stairs), but if the time runs out halfway through, the I'm trying to return to the original state by canceling all the state levels. As a result, even if the game ends with the state level raised, it is preferable to unintentionally cause the performance restriction period to occur when a new player attempts to start the game. can be avoided.

In the process of increasing the state level (climbing up the stairs) in this way, when the performance restriction period occurs, the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness It is also conceivable that the "adjustment button" is operated. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to suit his/her taste when starting the game. is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how many times these operating means (volume control button, brightness control button) are operated in the process of increasing the state level (climbing the stairs), the state will be triggered by this. It is desirable not to change the level or affect the first timer time or the second timer time.

In other words, in this case, no matter how many times the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are targeted for mischievous operations, the effect restriction period cannot be generated with this as a trigger. However, at least the state level that has already risen will not decrease due to these operations, and once the effect limit period occurs, the object of effect limit will be the "volume adjustment button" and the "brightness adjustment button". Therefore, it is preferable to suppress mischief to the "volume adjustment button" and "brightness adjustment button", which are not subject to detection of mischievous operations. be expected to do so.

In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used for mischief detection, it is sandwiched between "two operations (timings tq1 and tq3 in FIG. 203) for another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010)". As for the "operation (timing tq2 in FIG. 203) for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)" that takes the form, it is assumed that it is operated not once but a predetermined number of times. is more desirable.

That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-described "operation pattern (detection pattern) a", the operation on the blade portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. An operation on the button 410 is detected, and an operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within a sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and a seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection is detected. When the operation to the sword portion 5010 is detected again within this period, the detection condition for the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" is satisfied, and the effect restricted period is generated. Also, the fifth to seventh timer times may all be the same time or different times. Also, the same timer may be used for time measurement, or different timers may be used for time measurement.

When the operation of the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation of the blade portion 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset and , it is more desirable not to generate the effect restricted period due to the detection condition relating to the operation pattern (detection pattern) being not satisfied. In addition, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), the operation on the operation button 410, not the operation on the blade portion 5010, is again detected (the number of times to be detected (two times here)). Then, even when the 3rd time) is detected, reset the 7th timer time (for example, 3 seconds) so that the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the effect limit period is not generated. is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the operation button 410 is continuously operated n times (here, twice) at the timing during which the blade portion 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is applied. When the detection condition is satisfied, the effect restricted period is generated. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the production restriction period is set. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the conditions for occurrence of the production restriction period will be complicated to create a sense of tension, such as ``Isn't the mischief actually being monitored by the hall side?'' Become.

In addition, in order to achieve such complication, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the blade portion 5010 is operated again within the timer time, or when the operation button 410 is pressed l When operated within each timer time for a number of times (>n times), it is desirable to be controlled to a state different from the original state (a state may be different between m times and l times). . Therefore, even if an operation is performed in accordance with the above-described "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" while being controlled in these different states, the effect restricted period will not occur.

Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (>n times) during the two operations on the sword portion 5010, the production restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (>l times). If it is possible to generate a limited production period (similar to when the operation is performed n times), the conditions for generating the limited production period are made more complicated, and the hall side does not actually monitor mischievous acts. It will be expected that a more suitable sense of tension such as "Is it?" In this case as well, every time the operation button 410 is operated, it goes without saying that the timer time is generated and the detection of the next operation is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that are used as triggers for generating the effect restricted period are prepared.

However, such mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnets, and taking too strict measures may lead to disadvantages for the hall side. Therefore, as for the specific moving image appearing during the performance restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning, the content is limited to explaining a proper handling method for the game and performance so as to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. is desirable.

As described above, after a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has passed since the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurred, the specific video will be hidden, and "operations related to volume are allowed. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation reception regarding brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output."

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the player starts the game at timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the occurrence of the performance restriction period (function restriction period). It is conceivable that a transition to a game execution state in which variable display of decorative symbols is performed is performed by generating a start winning. In such a case, since the above-mentioned desired purpose of stopping the mischievous behavior and starting the game is achieved, the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet passed. Terminate the performance restriction period (function restriction period) of a certain thing.

However, if the game is started without waiting for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) to pass, there is a possibility that reflection is insufficient, so at least the variation of the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the performance restriction period Until the display ends, each reception of volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is allowed, but "Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, and the brightness It is desirable to control the period as a partial restriction period, such as "Even if it is adjusted, the current brightness setting value is displayed, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output."

As shown in FIG. 204, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection of the above-described "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated regardless of whether or not the control is performed during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the sword portion 5010 is operated or the operation button 410 is operated, the first timer time and the second timer time will not be clocked, and the effect restricted period will not occur. do not have.

According to such a configuration, when the state is shifted to the game execution state without waiting for the original duration time as the performance restriction period, the game is played in such a manner that a part of the restricted contents during the performance restriction period remains. Since the transition to the execution state is made, it is possible to prompt reflection on the mischievous behavior without hindering the progress of the game presentation.

Regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the variable display of the decorative symbols, which triggered the termination of the performance restriction period, is completed, but also the decorative symbols are stopped with the pending number being 0. It may be continued at least until (until the non-gaming state is reached).

In addition, at the timing (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204) when the game execution state is terminated and the state is shifted to the non-game state, a predetermined safe time is set, and until the predetermined safe time elapses, , it is desirable to continue the state in which the detection of the above-described "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is invalidated despite the non-gaming state. That is, in a situation where the game execution state has just ended, the excitement of the player has not cooled down, and it is assumed that the player will perform operations on a plurality of operation means in a rush. This is because imposing a penalty may lead to an immediate stop of the game. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game is shifted to the non-game state.

In addition, when it is shifted to a non-gaming state while being controlled as the above partial restriction period, there is a possibility that the remorse for mischievous behavior is still insufficient, so partial restriction until the safe time elapses You may make it continue a period. At this time, the detection of the above-described "operation pattern (detection pattern)" is allowed again after the safe time has elapsed.

In addition, the safe time is set as a longer time value than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol variation time from when the variable display of decorative symbols is started to when it is stopped. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, even if the variable display of the decorative symbols ends immediately, the above-described "operation pattern (detection pattern)" cannot be detected at least until the safe time ends. It will be possible to continue the disabled state and continue the partial restriction period.

In addition, when the variable display of the decorative pattern is started in the form that the performance restriction period (function restriction period) ends, the symbol variation time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variation time is selected. It is desirable that the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner. With such a configuration, the partial restriction period described above can be continued for a relatively long period of time.

Further, in the above-described example, even if it is detected that the production limit period is approaching within the detection period (in FIG. 203, the part where fine dots are applied) for the operation pattern (detection pattern) described above, nothing will happen. behavior is also hidden. However, instead of this, every time the timer time is set by the operation pattern (detection pattern) described above (every time the penalty occurrence staircase is climbed), a specific sound is output to prompt the cancellation of the operation due to mischief. You may do so. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operation tool that is the detection target. Similarly, each time the timer time is set by the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the penalty occurrence stairs are climbed), the display contents of the effect display device 1600 are changed. good too.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment confirmation sound It is also possible to assign a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel and set the volume value to "0".

In addition, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" is output, it is in a state where some "confirmation sound" is output. should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the player will be conscious of the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. It is for

[Prevention of noise due to adjustment confirmation sound when the store is opened]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination as to whether to selectively appear the expected effect (a plurality of expected effects). Depending on the result of this announcement effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preview effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. None of a plurality of expected effects (forecast effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice production judgment) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance with "a function to definitely indicate whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit". The expectation effect related to the body motion etc. will be provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) for the fact that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) set by the player regarding the volume is adjusted by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing for changing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 has the Brightness adjustment buttons are provided for various production lamps provided (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). A process for changing the set value (brightness set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes processing for adjusting emission brightness (processing for reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light) based on the changed brightness setting value. It will happen. Also, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value (brightness setting value) relating to brightness is decreased or increased.

It should be noted that acceptance of changes to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values are performed in a state in which the pattern does not change, and a state in which the pattern fluctuates. It is possible to execute each of these states by the player's operation.

By the way, since there are only new customers who want to start playing games for a while after the hall opens, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently performed in order to start games with set values that suit their tastes. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume or brightness is adjusted, the adjustment confirmation sound reverberates in the hall, ruining the atmosphere. It's disgusting.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow a player to accept an operation related to volume adjustment or brightness adjustment until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. However, when a predetermined condition is established, the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value can be accepted under the condition that the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to respective "predetermined specific values". I am planning to

According to such a configuration, when the predetermined condition is established after the power is turned on, the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound and the brightness set value are set to respective "predetermined specific values". It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by adopting the automatically set "specific value" as the setting value of the volume that many players tend to prefer, many games can be played during the time period shortly after the hall opens. Therefore, it can be expected that a situation in which a user adjusts the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to suit his or her taste is less likely to occur. The establishment of a predetermined condition may be the elapse of a predetermined time after the power is turned on, the reception of a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a, or the It may be that the specific process ends.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the volume setting value and the A special period (opening-only period) that allows acceptance of changes in brightness setting values, but does not output volume adjustment confirmation sounds or brightness adjustment confirmation sounds even if changes in those setting values are accepted, is set for a predetermined time (for example, one hour). generate it first. After the special period (period dedicated to store opening) ends, a period (regular business period) is generated during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when changes in the setting values are accepted. there is As a result, for a while after the hall opens (until the time required for the new customer to complete various adjustments), the various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output. , it is possible to give the player an opportunity to adjust the volume and brightness so as to start the game with the set values that suit his/her taste.

FIG. 205 is a time chart showing an example of processing during a special period (period dedicated to store opening).

Now, assuming that the power is turned on at timing tr0, as shown in FIG. Control is performed so that the reception of operations related to adjustment and brightness adjustment is not permitted. In such a situation, the detection (main control side) related to the game such as starting winning is not permitted, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power restoration appears, or no display output is performed, and the standby screen (symbol stop display, demonstration screen, etc.) is still displayed. Do not show.

After that, when the timing tr1 at which a predetermined condition (for example, the transmission of a predetermined command from the main control MPU 1310a) is established, the detection related to the game such as starting winning is allowed, and the game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state waiting for the start winning. Also in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (waiting screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that it is waiting for the variation of the symbol.

Also, at this time, under the condition that the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to respective "predetermined specific values", "acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is allowed, but they Even if the change of the set value is accepted, a special period (period dedicated to store opening) is generated during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output. Such a store-opening-only period can be continued until timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has passed since the occurrence of the period. When the period ends at timing tr2, the volume A period (ordinary business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted is generated. In addition, in the effect display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped pattern is displayed (waiting for the change of the pattern) is maintained, and the decorative pattern in the stopped state and the background thereof are maintained. Various background images (images with lower priority in layers than decorative patterns) displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) are displayed when the store opening period is shifted to the normal business period. Nothing will change.

According to such a configuration, even after the state where the stop symbol is displayed (waiting screen) appears and the game start waiting state is reached, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the exclusive opening period ends) Since the state in which the adjustment confirmation sound is not output is maintained during this period, it is possible to preferably avoid the adjustment sound from being echoed immediately after the store opens. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by the new customer has passed), the state is automatically shifted to a state where the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments can be allowed while confirming the adjustment sound corresponding to the volume setting value. In addition, while maintaining the state where the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period when the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, so a predetermined time has passed since the store opened. It is possible to make it difficult for the player side to notice that the control is performed during the store-opening exclusive period in which the adjustment sound is not output until the game is played.

In addition, after the predetermined condition is established and the game start waiting state (after timing tr1), when the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted, the setting value changed in the effect display device 1600 Parameter display (volume-side parameter display, luminance-side parameter display) is performed. Therefore, by checking such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the set value according to one's preference.

However, during the period immediately after the store opens (only for opening the store), even if the output related to the adjustment confirmation sound is not performed in this way, the changes in the volume setting value and brightness setting value will be reflected in the volume and light amount. As a result, there is a concern that the atmosphere in the hall will end up being dyed in the color of adjustment, and that the atmosphere will be ruined and interest will be lost. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if the change of the volume setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable to avoid Similarly, with respect to brightness, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the brightness setting value is accepted before timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value is used as the light amount. It is desirable to prevent it from being reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after the opening of the store (the period dedicated to the opening of the store), each player checks the parameter display on the effect display device 1600 and adjusts the set values according to his/her preference. That is, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust the setting value according to one's preference, since the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound and light, the atmosphere in the hall can be improved. It can be maintained well.

Of the volume and brightness, only the brightness may maintain a state in which the changed brightness setting value is not reflected as the amount of light even after the timing tr2 arrives. In other words, before the game starts, it should be avoided to reflect the adjustment to the side that consumes more power due to mischievous operations. It is desirable to prevent the adjustment from being reflected. In addition, unlike the volume adjustment sound, the brightness adjustment sound cannot be confirmed as to the degree of adjustment, so it may not necessarily be output.

However, even when the timing tr2 has not yet arrived (state in which the time dedicated to the opening of the store has not finished), the pattern fluctuation (variation display by the decorative pattern) starts based on the starting prize. After that, the volume adjustment and brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is assumed that the frequency of these adjustments will greatly decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, after the timing tr1, when the start winning is detected before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is terminated early based on the detection. It is possible to execute processing to shift to the normal business period.

However, during the variable display period of the decorative pattern caused by the start winning that ended the exclusive opening period early, the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value was accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change was output. If such a thing happens, it is assumed that many players will adjust the volume and brightness after ending the exclusive opening period early, which may end up putting the cart before the horse.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, after the timing tr1, when the start winning is detected before the arrival of the timing tr2, the exclusive opening period is ended early and the normal business period is ended. However, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed at least until the fluctuation state of the decorative pattern generated by this is terminated (suppressing process during fluctuation).

FIG. 206 is a time chart showing an example of processing when a game is started during a store opening exclusive period (special period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 206, it is assumed that a starting prize is detected at timing tr3, in which the special period has not yet expired. Then, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment terminates the processing related to the dedicated opening period, shifts to the normal business period, and starts fluctuation suppression processing during the normal business period. This suppression process during variation allows acceptance of changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value while the variation display related to the decorative pattern is being performed, and allows the change in these setting values to be applied to the effect sound in the output state. However, even if the volume setting value or brightness setting value is changed, the volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output.” The difference from the "processing for the exclusive opening period" is whether or not the variable display related to the decorative pattern is being performed, and the change in the setting value is reflected in the volume and light amount. The content of suppression for the various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, such fluctuation suppression processing is changed to a non-game state (a state in which the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed). It will continue to run unless it is migrated.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, the game execution state is controlled only for the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time (symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and the non-game state is reached at timing tr4. (The number of reservations is 0 and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed) If it is immediately returned to Even in the state immediately after the opening of the store), the special period (the exclusive period of opening the store) will not occur again.

That is, in this case, in the non-game state after the timing tr4, the period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted to be controlled. During the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected at least as a volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also the amount of light of the production lamp that is in the light emitting state. is reflected as Also, in the effect display device 1600, a stop symbol (waiting screen) is displayed, and the player can recognize that the symbol is waiting for a change.

Players who create situations such as ``end the opening period (special period) early and then immediately end the game execution state'' were not satisfied with the adjustment details made without the adjustment sound being output, so they started once. Since it is assumed that the player has a desire to suspend the game and make more detailed adjustments, even if it is in the state immediately after opening, even if one hour has not passed since the power was turned on, the special period (opening period) ) is not generated again, and it is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound.

In the above explanation example, the time (timings tr1 to tr2) during which the store-opening period (special period) continues may be a certain period of time after the store-opening period (special period) occurs. , or the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to the respective "predetermined specific values" may be the timing tr1 or a predetermined timing prior to the timing tr1. .

In addition, in the above explanation example, there is a technical feature in the configuration related to the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after timing tr1, and the processing in the period before timing tr1 is different from the above-mentioned contents. You may make it implement|achieve as a different process.

In the above explanation example, at the timing tr2, the decorative pattern and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed. If so, you can do it.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment confirmation sound It is also possible to assign a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel and set the volume value to "0".

In addition, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" is output, it is in a state where some "confirmation sound" is output. should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the player will be conscious of the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. It is for

Further, in the example described above, only one of the set values of volume and brightness may be changed.

[Control for volume adjustment confirmation sound according to production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment executes effect pattern determination as to which of a plurality of effect patterns is to be executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. Then, when one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern is selected. It is possible to execute the advance notice effect determination as to whether to selectively appear the expected effect (a plurality of expected effects). Depending on the result of this announcement effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preview effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed. None of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice production judgment) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance with "a function that definitely indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and movable The expectation effect related to the body motion etc. will be provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) about the fact that a big win is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) set by the player regarding the volume is adjusted by operating the volume adjustment buttons (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). The processing for changing can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume of the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing to reflect the volume setting value as the volume). will be executed. Also, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, although illustration is omitted, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the Brightness adjustment buttons are provided for various production lamps provided (lamps to be controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a). A process for changing the set value (brightness set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes processing for adjusting emission brightness (processing for reflecting the brightness setting value as the amount of light) based on the changed brightness setting value. It will happen. Also, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the "volume corresponding to the volume setting value" at the time when the player's setting value (brightness setting value) relating to brightness is decreased or increased.

It should be noted that acceptance of changes to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and adjustment processing according to the changed setting values are performed in a state in which the pattern does not change, and a state in which the pattern fluctuates. It is possible to execute each of these states by the player's operation.

Also as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first hit determination is performed in response to the game ball being received in the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004 Even if the second hit determination is performed in response to the acceptance of the game ball, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) according to the hit determination is performed. After that, a privilege (jackpot game) advantageous to the player can be awarded. However, the expected value for these benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol variation) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol variation).

In the above example, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out about 2000 game balls by repeating the opening and closing pattern of opening the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times at maximum. ing.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception of the change of the volume setting value is "a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed", " The first side execution state in which the first symbol variation is being performed and the second symbol variation is not being performed, and "the first symbol variation is not being performed and the second symbol variation is being performed. In addition, the numerical range in which the volume setting value is allowed to be changed is the same in any of these states.

According to such a configuration, the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like, regardless of the state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state). As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game by adjusting the sound according to each state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when it is in the above-described "game start waiting state" and "first side execution state", the set value (volume set value) related to the output sound volume of the effect sound is changed. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-described "second side execution state", control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

That is, in the "game start waiting state", since the game is not being executed, the effect sound is not output. The loudness of the later volume cannot be identified as an audible sound. Therefore, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the set value (volume set value) related to the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

In addition, in the "first side execution state", although there is a situation in which the effect sound corresponding to the first hit determination is output, the situation is a low-probability game in which the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. It is often controlled in a state (low-probability short-time gaming state), and I can't expect much from the production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that when players are in such a low-expectation gaming state, they play the game while watching a mobile device such as a smart phone. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the "first side execution state", in order to reliably inform the player of the change and the changed volume level, a volume adjustment confirmation sound is generated. It is desirable to output

On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", there is a situation in which the effect sound corresponding to the second hit determination is output, and the probability of getting a big hit is relatively high. ) is often controlled by In such a situation, since the expectations for the performance are high, there is a tendency for the volume to be adjusted in order to enjoy the performance. Amusement in the game may be lowered by making it difficult to hear the performance sound and BGM corresponding to the determination of two wins. Therefore, in the "second side execution state", even if the volume setting value is changed, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable to favorably maintain amusement in the game by providing an opportunity to adjust the volume in an audible environment.

However, in the "second side execution state", the degree of expectation for the performance is high, and even after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in the losing mode, the player is expected to change again and change to the big hit mode. It can be said that it is important to secure the time (reverberation) for making the player aware of the game in order to maintain the amusement of the game. In this regard, if the normal processing in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the transition to the "game start waiting state", the processing related to the "second side execution state" The player side can easily perceive that the game has ended in a losing mode and has been shifted to a "game start waiting state", and there is a concern that the game will lose interest in the game.

Therefore, when the processing related to the "second side execution state" is completed and the state is shifted to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the shift to the "game start waiting state" control so that normal processing (processing for allowing changes in the volume setting value and for outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) during the “game start waiting state” is not performed It is desirable to For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second-side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "although the change of the volume setting value is permitted, However, it is desirable to perform a process of not outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound or a process of not allowing the change of the volume setting value itself. However, the possibility that the "second side execution state" is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state" is more positively considered. In order to make you aware of ``second side execution state'', ``process that allows changes in the volume setting value, but does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed'' It can be said that it is more desirable to do so.

On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stop-displayed in a losing mode. Therefore, when the processing related to the "first side execution state" is completed and the state is shifted to the "game start waiting state", unlike the case of the above-described "second side execution state", the "first side execution state” (allowing changes in the volume setting value and outputting a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) to continue. It is desirable to

By the way, under the condition of being controlled in the "first-side execution state", mischievous operations are performed in which operations on a plurality of operating means are mixed and performed within a relatively short period of time due to the stress of not being able to easily win the jackpot. There is concern that That is, as a result of rough handling, if even one of the operation means develops an abnormality or failure, the operability and performance will be remarkably deteriorated, and a further decline in the enjoyment of the game is unavoidable.

Therefore, not only when it is controlled in the "game start waiting state", but also in the situation when it is controlled in the "first side execution state", there is a possibility that operation detection occurs with multiple operation means and mischief is made. is high, an effect restriction period (function restriction period) in the example described above for "preventing pranks on a plurality of operating means (see FIGS. 203 and 204)" may be generated.

That is, in this case, in either the "game start waiting state (non-game state)" or the "first side execution state", among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operations When an operation on the means (here, the operation button 410 and the blade portion 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection triggers the
・In the effect display device 1600, in a state in which a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear while the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed (reproduced),
・Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value related to the output volume of the sound effects will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed.
・ Even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, changes to the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp will not be accepted, and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. period) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image on the effect display device 1600 will be displayed even if an image related to the "first side execution state" has appeared before that. When a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses after the production restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and the volume control operation is permitted. A normal state as a "play start waiting state" or "first side execution state" such that adjustment confirmation sound is also output, operation acceptance related to brightness is permitted, and brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. will be returned to

It should be noted that, as for the detailed content and other examples regarding such effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each content in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief for multiple operation means". However, in this case, even if the transition from the "game start waiting state" to the "first side execution state" is made during the performance restriction period (function restriction period), the performance restriction period (function restriction period) is not terminated early, Various processes relating to the performance restriction period are continued under the same conditions as in the "game start waiting state". As a result, it is expected to suppress mischievous operations during control in the "first-side execution state" with a low degree of expectation.

On the other hand, if the "play start waiting state" is shifted to the "second side execution state" during the performance restriction period (function restriction period), the "performance restriction period ( "Processing for early termination of function restriction period" and its modifications will be adopted and executed as appropriate. As a result, the atmosphere when the "second-side execution state" with a high degree of expectation is finally executed is maintained, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the above explanation example, regarding the method for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, the volume adjustment confirmation sound It is also possible to assign a confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound to a channel and set the volume value to "0".

In addition, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and although it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" is output, it is in a state where some "confirmation sound" is output. should be recognizable. In other words, if various sounds are used as the confirmation sound, there is a possibility that the player will be conscious of the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. It is for

Further, in the example described above, only the set value of either the volume or the brightness may be changed.

[Duration during which operation acceptance is permitted (validity period) performance itself]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (announcement effects) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern etc.), it is possible to execute a production judgment (announcement judgment, etc.) as to which expected production (a plurality of possible) is to be selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of this effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed. None of a plurality of expected effects (forecast effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the corresponding decorative pattern is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is selected regardless of the result of the advance notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation reception effect ("intrinsic reception effect" described later) that allows reception of the effect when the pattern effect based on progresses to a specific timing. Further, even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when a special result is obtained in the announcement effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is determined. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance effect (an "additional reception effect" to be described later) in which acceptance of the effect is permitted when the pattern effect based on the variation pattern of No. 2 progresses to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the advance notice effect determination, the operation reception effect (effective period) does not occur. A plurality of first variation patterns for generating the "implicit reception effect" and second variation patterns for generating the "additional reception effect" may be prepared. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared so that the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" can be generated in sequence.

However, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. is a predetermined change (effect At least one of a change in the display on the display device 1600, a change in the effect sound in the speaker, a change in the light emission by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, so the operation reception effect (effective Period) This itself is poor in performance, and there is concern that the interest in the game will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
A first operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in which, when an operation by a player is detected, the execution state continues until a predetermined timing within the pattern effect based on the variation pattern arrives;
A second operation effect means capable of executing a post-operation effect in a manner that, when an operation by a player is detected, continues until the elapsed time from the timing of the detection reaches a predetermined time value. I am preparing.

According to such a configuration, the operation reception effect (valid period) itself is generated when the operation reception effect is executed by the first operation effect means and when the operation reception effect is executed by the second operation effect means. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be improved until the performance after the operation is executed.

That is, the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means is performed until a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed early or late within the valid period. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous in terms of enjoying the effect that the execution state as the post-operation effect is maintained for a long time if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs.

On the other hand, in the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the effective period, the operation continues until the elapsed time from the operation timing reaches a predetermined time value. A post-operation production is executed. Therefore, if the operation is not performed for a while after the effective period occurs and the operation is performed at a later time, the effect time as a whole from the start of the effective period to the end of the effect after operation can be maintained long. It can be said that it is advantageous in terms of enjoying the performance.

In this case, the condition for generating the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means and the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses until a specific timing. The operation reception effect by the second operation effect means is the result that the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the advance notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. , and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means is generated when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, and the pattern effect based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the pattern effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. It may be realized as something that occurs when the timing is reached.

FIG. 207 shows the first effect in which the post-operation effect is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to the detection. It is a time chart which shows the example about the operation reception production|presentation.

Now, assuming that the first effect condition required for the generation of the "first operation reception effect in which reception of effect is permitted" is satisfied, the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to timing tr1. A first operation acceptance effect (effective period) is generated based on progress to the timing tr1. This first operation reception effect (effective period) is terminated without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 comes when a predetermined set time has passed without receiving the effect. During the execution period of the first operation reception performance in which reception of performance is permitted, an image simulating the operation means to be operated and a gauge indicating how much effective time remains are displayed to urge the player to operate. An operation promotion effect is performed.

When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound is output to suggest that the reception of the effect has been permitted (or that the reception of the effect has been permitted). . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment does not continue the output state of the acceptable acceptance sound for the predetermined set time. At a certain timing tr2, it is set to a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

It should be noted that "acceptable sound is output" here means newly allocating "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound" to a channel at timing tr1, and also assigning to a channel already in an allocation state. The concept also includes making the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound" in the sound data to come in time with the timing tr1. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output from before to after the timing tr1 so as to straddle the timing tr1. In addition, "putting in a non-output state" here means canceling the allocation state of the "sound data including acceptable sound" to the channel, and furthermore, the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. However, the concept also includes the transition to a period in which the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data ends and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

As described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the "operation-caused process using the first effect member" as the post-operation effect is performed based on the detection of the operation by the player and the reception of the effect. However, the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) thus started is based on the variation pattern regardless of the timing within the effective period when the effect is accepted. The game is terminated when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol performance (performance pattern) arrives. It should be noted that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process of performing the effect operation of the first decorative movable body on the basis of the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 207, if the effect is accepted at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) is It is executed over a relatively long time from timing tr1a to timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, if the effect is received at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) is executed only for a relatively short time from timing tr2a to timing tr4.

According to such a first operation reception effect, the execution state as the post-operation effect (execution state of the operation-induced process using the first effect member) is to operate immediately after the valid period occurs. is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous for enjoying the performance.

As will be described later, in the first operation acceptance effect, the effect is accepted when the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, and the post-operation effect (processing caused by the operation using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect acceptance. Even if it is, the output state of the reception permission sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until the predetermined timing tr2.

FIG. 208 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation acceptance effect that continues to execute the post-operation effect until the elapsed time from the detection timing reaches a predetermined time value.

Now, assuming that the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern has progressed to timing tr11 while the second effect condition required for the generation of the "second operation reception effect in which acceptance of effect is permitted" is satisfied, A second operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on progress to the timing tr11. As in the case of the first operation reception effect, this second operation reception effect (effective period) does not execute the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 is reached after a predetermined set time has passed without receiving the effect. It is supposed to end. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception performance in which reception of performance is permitted, an image simulating the operation means to be operated and a gauge indicating how much effective time remains are displayed to urge the player to operate. An operation promotion effect is performed.

Also when the second operation acceptance effect (effective period) is started, a reception permission sound is output to indicate that the effect reception is permitted (or that the effect reception is permitted). be. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment also does not continue to output the acceptable acceptance sound for the above-mentioned predetermined set time. At timing tr12, it is set to a non-output state so as not to be audible.

Note that "acceptable sound is output" here means that "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr11, and that the channel has already been assigned. The concept also includes making the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound" in the sound data that is stored coincide with the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptable sound" may be output from before to after timing tr11 so as to straddle timing tr11. Also, "put into a non-output state" here means canceling the channel allocation state of the "sound data including acceptable sound", and the channel allocation state of the sound data is maintained. The concept also includes the transition to a period in which the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

As described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the "operation-caused process using the second effect member" as the post-operation effect is performed based on the detection of the operation by the player and the reception of the effect. However, regarding the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the second effect member) thus started, even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, the effect reception will be performed. It is made to continue until the elapsed time from when it is performed reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the effective period). It should be noted that the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" can be executed as, for example, a process of performing the effect operation of the second decorative movable body on the basis of the reception of the effect.

For example, as shown in FIG. 208, if the effect is accepted at relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the second effect member) is It is executed from timing tr11a to timing tr14 after a predetermined time value has elapsed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the second effect member) is executed from timing tr12a to timing tr15 (timing that comes after timing tr14) after a predetermined time value has passed.

According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to operate at a later time without operating for a while after the effective period occurs, from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect. It is possible to provide a performance that is advantageous in enjoying the performance by maintaining the performance time as a whole for a long time.

As will be described later, even in the second operation reception effect, the effect is accepted when the reception permission sound is being output, and the post-operation effect (operation-caused processing using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even if it is executed, the output state of the acceptance permission sound is not canceled and is maintained until the predetermined timing tr12.

As described with reference to FIGS. 207 and 208, the first and second operation reception effects (effective periods) are given different effects, and the operation reception effects (valid periods) are set to have different effects. Since the game is generated based on the establishment of the conditions, it is expected that the game interest is preferably maintained from the generation of the operation reception performance (effective period) to the performance of the post-operation performance.

However, the following problem remains if only the configuration related to the first and second operation acceptance effects (effective period) is adopted. In other words, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to operate early in the effective period in order to enjoy the effects, and it is advantageous to operate late in the effective period to enjoy the effects. Since the operation timing that is preferable for enjoying the effect is determined, the effect is still lacking within the valid period, and there is a concern that the game will lose interest in the game. Therefore, it is more desirable to execute the operation reception effect as a special operation reception effect having a mode described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the pattern production (production pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to timing tr21 while the special production conditions required for generating the special operation reception production are satisfied, a special Generates an operation reception effect (effective period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (effective period) is different from the first and second operation reception effects, and timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time has elapsed without effect reception. Even if there is no operation, the reception of the production will always occur within the effective period, and the production after the operation described later will be executed. As will also be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to a longer time value than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

Also, when the special operation reception effect (effective period) starts, a reception permission sound is output that suggests that the reception of the effect is permitted (or that the reception of the effect is permitted). be done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment controls the reception permission sound (FIG. 209) as the reception permission sounds (FIGS. 207 and 208) generated corresponding to the first and second operation reception effects. The output state is maintained for a longer period of time. In this example of explanation, the acceptable acceptance sound shown in FIG. 209 is also put into a non-output state at timing tr22, which is an intermediate stage before the predetermined set time has elapsed, so that it cannot be heard. However, the acceptability sound shown in FIG. 209 may be one that can continue to be output until timing tr23 arrives.

Note that "acceptable sound is output" here means that "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound" is newly assigned to the channel at timing tr21, and that the channel has already been assigned. The concept also includes making the "reproduction period of the acceptable sound" in the sound data that is stored coincide with the timing tr21. Alternatively, the "acceptable sound" may be output from before to after timing tr21 so as to straddle timing tr21. Also, "put into a non-output state" here means canceling the allocation state of the "sound data including acceptable sound" to the channel, and the allocation state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept also includes the transition to the period in which the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data is terminated and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

In this regard, in the special operation acceptance effect, if an operation by the player is detected within the valid period and the effect is accepted, the "first movable effect" shown in FIG. Operation-induced processing using the ornament (first effect member)" and "operation-induced process using the second movable ornament (second effect member)" shown in Fig. 208 are started in parallel. It is supposed to Therefore, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is started. Even if the production is accepted, it will be terminated when the predetermined timing tr24 in the pattern production (production pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and the "operation using the second production member However, regarding the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" thus started, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within its effective period, the effect acceptance will start. is continued until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the effective period).

For example, as shown in FIG. 209, if the effect reception is performed at relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timings tr21 to tr23), "operation-induced processing using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24. It ends at the elapsed timing tr25. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209, if the effect is accepted at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timings tr21 to tr23), then the post-operation effect of "operation caused by using the first effect member" "processing" is executed only for a relatively short period of time from timing tr22a to timing tr24. It will be executed until the timing tr26 (the timing that comes after the timing tr25) after the elapsed time value.

In this way, the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment is generated when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the big hit determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect (effective period), "the first effect member that continues the execution state until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives operation-induced processing” and “operation-induced processing using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value” are executed respectively.

According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the valid period occurs, the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. At the cost of this, the end timing of the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate it for a while after the valid period occurs and operate it at a later time, the end timing of the "operation-induced processing using the second effect member" in the after-operation effect will be different. Although it can be made to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a demerit that the execution state of ``operation-induced processing using the first effect member'' in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation acceptance effect, since there is no optimal operation timing to liven up the effect,
・In exchange for shortening the time until the end of the "operation-induced process using the second effect member", the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is lengthened and enjoyed. (whether to operate at an early stage within the validity period)
・Do you enjoy extending the time until the end of the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” in exchange for shortening the execution state of the “operation-induced process using the first effect member”? (Will it be operated at a late stage within the validity period?), or
・The time during which the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” is maintained as an execution state and the time until the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” is completed are sacrificed little by little. (whether to operate at a timing that is neither early nor late within the effective period)
The special operation reception performance itself can be provided with such strategic operation performance as described above, thereby providing the operation reception performance which makes the player select the operation timing according to his/her mood and is less likely to get bored. be able to

As will be described later, in the special operation acceptance effect, if the effect is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is being output, the effect after the operation (operation-caused processing using the first effect member, The operation-induced process using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptable acceptance sound is canceled at this point.

Here, in the above-described example, when the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect (Fig. 209), "the first effect member whose execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. and "the operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed respectively. . However, even if the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the big hit judgment is lost, or when the predetermined effect judgment is lost) 209, even if the effect is accepted within the special operation acceptance effect, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed, and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied (Fig. 209). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is relatively short is performed in a different effect mode.

According to such a configuration, even if the special operation reception effect occurs, if the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. and "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value". Since the performance content will be the same as the operation reception effect (first and second operation reception effects) in which only one of It becomes possible to maintain the feeling appropriately. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member in which the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "from the timing when the effect is received continues until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value. When the post-operation effect is executed in parallel with the operation-induced process using the second effect member, the first operation reception effect or the second operation It is desirable to make the ratio of appearance of the big win pattern higher than that when the performance after the operation appears in the reception performance.

However, even though the operation is performed within the special operation acceptance effect, it may not be detected properly (detection error), and the effect may not be accepted, and as a result, the effective period will end without the effect being accepted. If such a thing occurs, the player who sees that the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed even though the operation is performed may mistakenly think that the operation acceptance effect has been reduced to one that is executed. As a result, there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline. Therefore, with regard to the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatically accepted) within the effective period, and "predetermined in the effect pattern "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state continues until the received timing arrives"; 2 operation-induced processing using effect members" are preferably executed respectively. As a method for automatically generating operation reception (automatic reception) and a production mode related to this, it is possible to use any of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination, and furthermore, the contents of the written description. .

In the above explanation example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect are generated, a reception permitting sound indicating that the reception of the effect is permitted is output. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. It is used as a performance sound that can continue to be reproduced for a longer time than the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the performance is generated.

According to such a configuration, when the performance reception is permitted (when an image display imitating the operation means to be operated and a gauge display showing how much effective time remains) are displayed. By confirming how long the acceptance acceptable sound that is output from 1 is continued, the operation reception effect is "first "operation-induced processing using a performance member" and "operation-induced processing using a second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the performance is received reaches a predetermined time value" are executed respectively. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a special operation reception presentation. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time in which the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is performed). By the time it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is the "special operation reception effect", there arises a demerit that the effect strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

However, even if it is recognized whether or not it is a special operation acceptance effect, it is important to leave some degree of strategy in the effect. Therefore, the output time (timings tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the acceptable reception sound that is output when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are generated is defined as a "predetermined time as a special operation reception effect (effective period). It is desirable to execute it assuming that it is set to a non-output state when a specific time that is less than half of the set time (timings tr21 to tr23) of " has passed. According to such a configuration, when the specified time less than half of the "predetermined set time (timings tr21 to tr23) as the special operation reception effect (effective period)" has passed, the reception permission sound is put into the non-output state. If the output state is maintained first, it will be possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed, so the "predetermined set time as the special operation reception effect (effective period) ( Timing tr21 to tr23)” can be provided with directing strategy in a state where more than half of the time remains.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the acceptance acceptance sound output when the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance effect is generated is performed when the effect is being output. In contrast to the fact that the output state is maintained even if a special operation acceptance effect is generated, the acceptance allowable sound that is output when a special operation acceptance effect is generated is forced to end its output state if the effect is accepted while in that output state. I have to. That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception effect (a situation in which the specific time has not passed since the reception permission sound was output), the operation reception effect Was the "special operation reception effect", and whether the post-operation effect showed a higher degree of expectation. ) can be easily recognized simply by confirming whether or not the output state of the acceptable reception sound has been terminated with the reception of the performance as a trigger. For example, even if you recognize that the output state of the acceptable reception sound has not ended and that the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect is occurring as a result, you can change your mind and say, It will be expected to focus on whether a high degree of aspect has emerged. In this case, the effect is designed so that when a more expected mode appears as a post-operation effect, the proportion of new occurrences of the special operation reception effect increases before the pattern is stopped. is desirable.

In addition, as described above, in the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect, an image that simulates the operation means used as the operation target in each operation reception effect and how long the effective time is A gauge display indicating whether or not there are any left is displayed, and an operation prompting presentation is performed to prompt the player to perform an operation. In this respect, at least in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect is accepted, the gauge display is left (displayed), and the "first execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. "operation-induced processing using a performance member" and "operation-induced processing using a second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the performance is accepted reaches a predetermined time value" are started respectively. is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the timing within the effective period when the performance reception is performed based on the gauge remaining amount left as a display after the reception of the performance. Thus, it becomes possible to predict whether the execution state related to the operation-induced process using the first effect member will end soon. As a method for starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, it is possible to use any one of the examples described above or below, or an appropriate combination thereof.

In the special operation reception effect, by executing the operation-related display (premonition effect) that suggests the occurrence before the effect reception is permitted, it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception effect occurs. It is desirable to make it tight. According to such a configuration, the player is expected to enjoy the strategic effect of the effect over the entire period within the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, it is desirable to execute an operation-related display (forecast effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect reception before the effect reception is permitted. As for the operation-related display, if it is executed as "a short-time sign effect inferior to the timing suggestive function", the expectation will be excessive compared to the case where the special operation acceptance effect with high expectations is generated. It is desirable in order not to have it.

Here, as the operation-related display (short-time portent effect with poor timing suggestion function) performed by the effect display device 1600 prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, For example, it can be realized as an image displayed in a fade-in state (such as a blank image) when the "image display imitating the operation means" appears in a fade-in mode.

FIG. 210 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to operation-related display when the first operation acceptance effect and second operation acceptance effect are performed, and processing related to channel assignment of sound data including acceptable acceptance sound. be.

That is, from an ergonomic point of view, the suggestive image (operation-related display) is displayed several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the validity period occurs, and the validity period does not occur until the validity period occurs. It is known that it is possible to perform an operation so that the performance reception is performed at an unexpected timing. However, even if it is for several frames, if the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the effective period has not occurred, the "operation means There is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the reception of the performance is not accepted even though the operation is performed in a state in which the "image display imitating" is displayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in 210 in FIG. The operation-related display is started based on the operation, but in a situation where the valid period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operation means" is not displayed in the normal mode.

More specifically, at the timing trA, a fade-in image in which the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in a fade-in manner, or an "acceptable image" that can be realized as a predetermined effect image. "Previous operation related display" is started. Then, when the timing tr1 (or timing tr11) arrives while the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is being displayed, the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed and the "image imitating the operation means" is displayed. Display" is shifted to a state in which it is displayed in a normal manner.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when the valid period occurs, a reception permission sound is output to indicate that the performance reception is permitted. As shown in FIG. 210, the acceptance acceptance sound does not start outputting at timing trA, but starts outputting at timing tr1 (or timing tr11).

That is, in order to make it possible to perform an operation so that the performance can be accepted at the timing immediately after the valid period occurs, the acceptable acceptance sound is also output several frames before the valid period occurs. It seems to me that it would be desirable to allow However, if the acceptable acceptance sound is output several frames before the valid period occurs, the output timing will be shifted from the appearance timing of the "image display imitating the operation means". As a result, there is a possibility that a sense of incongruity may be given as if a sound lag has occurred, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered. On the other hand, during the period from timing trA to tr1 (timing trA to tr11), it is possible to output a permissible pre-operation-related sound different from the reception permissible sound. However, if the pre-allowable operation-related sound is output in such a short period of time, the pre-allowable operation-related sound may not be an independent effect sound, but may be heard integrated with the acceptance acceptable sound. As a result, there is a concern that a sense of incongruity may be caused as if a sound lag has occurred.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, before the valid period of the first operation reception effect or the second operation reception effect occurs, the operation-related display (pre-allowable operation-related display) is displayed for several frames. On the other hand, the operation-related sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) is not executed on purpose, and only the reception allowable sound is output when the effective period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in 210 in the same figure, the reception acceptance sound is output by allocating the "sound data including the acceptance acceptance sound" to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of assigning the "sound data including the acceptable acceptable sound" to the channel is ended, so that the acceptable acceptable sound is put into a non-output state. there is However, the "sound data including acceptable sound" itself may continue to be allocated to the channel after timing tr2. For example, the allocation to the channel may continue until timing tr3. can be That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data ends at timing tr2.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 210, when the effect is accepted between timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 and tr12), the state in which the effect acceptance is permitted is terminated, and an image display imitating the operation means is executed. ” is hidden. On the other hand, the "sound data including acceptable acceptable sound" is kept assigned to the channel, and as described above, the acceptable acceptable sound is not forcibly terminated in the middle.

FIG. 211 is a time chart showing an example of processing related to operation-related display when the special operation reception effect is performed and processing related to channel allocation of sound data including acceptance acceptable sound.

As shown in FIG. 211, even in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowable operation-related display) is performed when the timing trB, which is earlier than the timing tr21 at which the valid period occurs, arrives. However, the “period from timing trB to tr21” has a length exceeding twice (more preferably ten times) the “period from timing trA to tr1” shown in FIG. In the permissible pre-operation related display displayed within, "Expectation degree as to whether the post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed in a manner with high expectation" or "Expectation degree for the appearance of a big hit pattern" As suggested, any one of a plurality of presentation modes can be selectively displayed. As in the case of the example shown in FIG. 210, the “image display imitating the operating means” is not displayed in the normal mode when the validity period has not expired.

For example, the "pre-allowable operation-related display" started at timing trB differs in content from the "pre-allowable operation-related display" shown in FIG. A foreshadowing production with a slight story, such as repeatedly moving and displaying a plurality of effect images toward a location displayed at timing tr21) and hiding them at that location (explained with reference to FIGS. 166 to 184) Any aspect of the "specific operation-related effect" may be applied). At this time, any one of a plurality of aspects can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the aspects is displayed. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives while the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is being displayed, the "image display imitating the operation means" is changed from the state in which the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed to the normal mode. It will be shifted to the displayed state.

In this regard, even in the special operation reception effect, as described above, when the validity period occurs, a reception permission sound is output to indicate that the reception of the effect is permitted. As for the sound, as shown in FIG. 211, the sound is output from timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a partial section in the sound data assigned to the channel at timing trB.

In other words, as described above, in the special operation reception effect, before the effective period occurs, it is significantly longer than the "minimum amount of time ergonomically required to enable the operation immediately after the effective period occurs". A long period of time (timings trB to tr21) is used to perform the "pre-allowable operation display" with high performance. Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance in such a performance period (timings trB to tr21), it is necessary to output a performance sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) that matches the "pre-allowable operation-related display" displayed during the same period. It is desirable to let In addition, since the performance period (timings trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performance, even if the performance sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound) is output within this period, the reception is permitted. Inconvenience such as being heard as a sound integrated with the sound cannot occur.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays the pre-allowable operation-related display and outputs the pre-allowable operation-related sound. I'm trying to keep it going. Then, when the timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed is shifted to the state in which the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "pre-allowable operation-related display" is displayed in the normal mode. The state in which "sound" is output is shifted to the state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 211, one sound data containing the reproduction period of the "pre-allowable operation-related sound" and the reproduction period of the "acceptable operation-related sound" is transmitted to the channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. By allocating to trB, the effect sound output described above is realized in the period from timing trB to tr22.

According to this configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the acceptable reception sound output when the valid period occurs is part of the sound data assigned to the channel in a form spanning from the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect. It will be output as a dramatic sound played during the period. That is, in this case, just by assigning one sound data to a channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (at the time of occurrence of the precursor effect, etc.), the first half part is the effect corresponding to the precursor effect (display related to the operation before the allowable operation). By playing sound (pre-allowable operation-related sound), it is possible to suggest the timing of the occurrence of special operation reception effects, and after the valid period occurs, the channel assignment will be based on the effect reception. Since it can be canceled as appropriate, the player can be made to recognize that the special operation acceptance effect was executed even after the effect was accepted. In addition, as an output method for "single sound data" that includes the playback interval of the "permissible pre-operation-related sound" and the playback interval of the "allowable reception sound", After preparing a plurality of sound data (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern), one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of the jackpot judgment (or production judgment (advance judgment, etc.)) It is desirable to realize the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to channels based on the above. In this case, for the plurality of sound data, the same effect sound is output in the playback section of the "permissible operation-related sound (premonition effect)", but different in the playback period of the "acceptance acceptance sound (operation reception effect)". More preferably, the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output a dramatic sound are included.

That is, in the special operation reception effect, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and the "image display imitating the operation means" is hidden. In addition to this, "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound" is also terminated for the channel assignment state, and the fact that the output related to the acceptable acceptance sound is forcibly terminated in the middle As described above. Therefore, the player can confirm that the special operation reception effect has been executed even after the effect reception by confirming whether or not the reception permission sound is forcibly set to a non-output state when the effect reception is performed. will be able to recognize

Note that even with one sound data (timings trB to tr22), the section (first half) of the effect sound (allowable pre-operation-related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-allowable operation-related display) is in the playback state. In the situation (timings trB to tr21), even if the player performs an operation, it will not be forcibly terminated. Only in a situation (timings tr21 to tr22) in which the section (latter half) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the effective period is in the reproduction state, the allocation state to the channel is canceled based on the player's operation. becomes.

The one sound data (sound data including the pre-acceptable operation-related sound and the acceptance-acceptable sound) is allocated before the timing trB and is already allocated at the timing trB. good too. Further, as described above, the channel allocation state may be continued after the timing tr22, for example, the channel allocation state may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data ends at timing tr22.

In the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the state of assigning the "sound data including the acceptable acceptable sound" to the channel is ended, so that the acceptable acceptable sound is put into a non-output state. there is However, the "sound data including acceptable sound" itself may continue to be allocated to the channel after timing tr2. For example, the allocation to the channel may continue until timing tr3. can be That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of acceptable sound" in the sound data ends at timing tr2.

In the configuration shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, "a plurality of acceptable acceptance sounds with different lengths for which the output state is maintained" are prepared as acceptance acceptable sounds accompanying the generation of the operation acceptance effect, and the effect acceptance is performed. Different reception acceptance sounds are generated for the special operation reception performance and the first operation reception performance (or the second operation reception performance) in which the performance after operation is different. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the reception allowable sound continues, there is a demerit of narrowing the above-mentioned effect strategy, but the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the first operation reception effect) 2 operation acceptance presentation) is occurring.

In addition, the plurality of acceptance acceptable sounds include a first acceptance acceptable sound (special operation acceptance effect) whose output state is terminated when an operation by the player is accepted, and the output state continues. and a second acceptance acceptance sound (first and second operation acceptance effects). Therefore, when an operation is performed to accept the effect while the reception allowable sound is being output, it is possible to accept the special operation by confirming whether the output state of the reception allowable sound is terminated when the effect is accepted. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect) has occurred.

However, the allowable acceptance sound is originally supposed to be in a non-output state when the effective period ends, and it is possible that the output state is maintained when the post-operation effect is started. If there is, it can get in the way of the performance. In this respect, in the above explanation example, the reception effect sound whose output state is terminated when the effect reception is made is the first reception allowable sound ( It is used as a special operation reception performance).

That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted in the output state of the ``second acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the set value of the time for which the output state is maintained is relatively short'', that output state is maintained. However, since the time set value for maintaining the output state of the second acceptance acceptable sound is originally short, it will soon be put into a non-output state, and it can be said that it is unlikely to interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the effect is accepted in the output state of "the first acceptance acceptable sound on the side where the set value of the time for which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting for which the output state is maintained Even if the value remains, the output state is ended, so it will not interfere with the performance.

Moreover, by confirming how long the output state of the allowable reception sound continues, it is possible to recognize which of the special operation reception rendering and the first operation reception rendering (or the second operation reception rendering) is occurring. Even if there is a player who wants to use it, if the output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is maintained at the stage when the time set value for the second acceptance acceptance sound has passed, the first acceptance acceptance sound is played instead of the second acceptance acceptance sound. is output. In this regard, even if it is not confirmed that the output state of the first acceptable reception sound is terminated, by confirming how the first acceptable reception sound is put into a non-output state when the performance acceptance is generated, It becomes possible to quickly confirm whether or not the prediction that the special operation acceptance performance is occurring is correct.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, when the effective period of the operation acceptance effect occurs, a pre-allowable operation-related display is performed to suggest that the effective period is about to occur. The operation-related displays include a first permissible pre-operation-related display with a short display time (see FIG. 210) and a second permissible pre-operation-related display with a long display time (see FIG. 211). In this regard, when the first permissible pre-operation-related display with a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptable acceptance sound" is not assigned to the channel, and the " By allocating "sound data including the acceptable acceptable sound" to the channel, the acceptable acceptable sound is put into an output state. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first pre-allowed operation-related display is not output, but it is possible to prompt the operation from the occurrence of the valid period without causing a sense of incongruity as if the sound were out of sync. become able to.

On the other hand, when the second pre-allowable operation-related display having a long display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptable acceptance sound" is sent to the channel from the time the second pre-allowable operation-related display is performed. In this allocation state, the reception permission sound is put into an output state by making the reproduction interval of the reception permission sound come in accordance with the timing when the effective period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to a channel before the special operation reception effect occurs (at the time of occurrence of the precursor effect, etc.), and the first half part is the precursor effect (display related to the operation before the allowable operation). In addition to being able to suggest the timing of the special operation acceptance effect by playing the effect sound (pre-allowable operation related sound) according to the Since the channel allocation can be released as appropriate, the player can be made to recognize that the special operation reception performance has been executed even after the reception of the performance has been made.

That is, in the pre-allowable operation-related display shown in FIG. 211, a corresponding pre-allowable operation-related sound is output, and when the effective period occurs, an acceptable acceptance sound is further output. In the display, the pre-allowable operation-related sound is not output, and the acceptable acceptance sound is output when the effective period occurs.

207 to 211, the effect display device 1600, speakers, effect lamps, movable decorations, etc. can be used as the "effect member". Also, as the "first effect member", it is possible to adopt any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decoration, and as the "second effect member", Any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decoration other than the "first effect member" can be adopted.

Further, in the above explanation example, the operation means to be operated may not necessarily be the same between the special operation reception effect and the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect), and may be different. When the operating means to be operated are different, the simulated images displayed within each effective period are different.

In the first operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member whose execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" is executed as a post-operation effect. "Operation-induced processing using the first effect member in which the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "Execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" "Operation-caused processing using the second effect member to be executed" may be executed as a post-operation effect. Further, an operation-induced process using a rendering member different from the first rendering member and the second rendering member may be further executed. The cause processing is also executed assuming that the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing within the effect pattern arrives.

In the second operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" is executed as a post-operation effect. However, there are ``operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value'' and ``the predetermined timing within the effect pattern has arrived. The operation-induced process using the second effect member whose execution state is continued until the operation is performed may be executed as the post-operation effect. Furthermore, an operation-induced process using a rendering member different from the first rendering member and the second rendering member may be further executed. The attribute process is also executed as if it is continued until the elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is accepted reaches a predetermined time value.

In the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member in which the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "elapsed time from the timing at which the effect is received The operation-induced processing using the second effect member that continues until a predetermined time value is reached” is executed as the post-operation effect, but a effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. The used operation-induced process may be further executed. In the special operation acceptance effect, an operation-induced process that is executed assuming that the execution state continues until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, and a predetermined time that has elapsed since the timing at which the effect was accepted. It is acceptable if it is mixed with the operation-induced process that is executed as if it continues until the value is reached.

207 to 211, the effective period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the effective period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I'm trying to By setting such a long period of time, it becomes possible to enjoy the effective period with the above-described performance strategy.

In the first permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 210) whose display time is short, "expectation level as to whether or not the post-operation effect performed when the effect reception is performed will be performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation" or "big hit However, in the second permissible pre-operation-related display (see FIG. 211) with a long display time, the expectation level of the post-operation effect to be performed when the effect reception is performed is not suggested. It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether the game will be played in a high-quality manner" or "the degree of expectation that a jackpot pattern will appear".

In the "effective period of special operation reception effect" set as a relatively long time value, by making one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations appear, "after the operation performed when the effect reception is made It is desirable to be able to suggest the "expectation level as to whether the performance will be performed in a high-expectation mode" or the "expectation level for the appearance of the jackpot pattern".

In addition, in the special operation reception effect, even if the effect reception is made at any timing within the effective period, the "effect by the first effect component that occurs due to the reception of the effect" In order to make the player recognize that the performance contents are the same as the post-operation performance, the relationship is set so that the execution state is ended earlier than the performance by the second performance member that occurs. desirable.

207 to 211, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not installed and is not generated, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation reception effect may not be installed and may not occur, and the first operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect may not be installed, and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. .

207 to 211, the special operation reception effect shown in the above explanation example outputs specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to a channel in a suppressed mode or silently. Among them, it may be one that generates a state in which reception of the performance is permitted.

[Detailed presentation of acceptable reception sounds]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which reception of the effect is permitted. However, as will be described later, the form of the allowable reception sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a highly anticipated manner. It is designed to suggest the ratio of winning and the ratio of stopping the jackpot pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (advance judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is established), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (effective period) in which reception of performance is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, unless a special result is obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, no operation reception performance (effective period) occurs. . In addition, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, the operation reception effect (effective period) will be generated. may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation acceptance effect (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a effect operation by a movable decorative body) is performed. The reception effect (effective period) itself is poor in effect, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
・During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) is in an unsuppressed mode. During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation unsuppressed reception production and high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that gives the opportunity to operate while being output, the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) Whether the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which the audible sound is is terminated, etc.), at least a high-expectation-suppressed-reception effect that gives an operation opportunity can be generated.

In such a configuration, when giving an operation opportunity, when the output of "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is maintained in an unsuppressed mode (low expectation unsuppressed acceptance effect), and when "BGM playback (Specific type of sound effect)” is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or in a non-output state (suppressed operation reception effect). Since the ratio (expectation) of winning the jackpot differs depending on the performance, high expectation suppression reception performance), the performance when the operation opportunity is granted (when the operation opportunity is granted, " The effect of whether or not BGM reproduction (a specific type of effect sound) is suppressed can improve the amusement of the game.

However, in the high-expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, so compared to the low-expectation unsuppressed reception effect There is a concern that the performance will be poor.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the high-expectation suppressed reception effect is generated, the specific sound that is not output when the low-expectation unsuppressed reception effect is generated It is designed to be output as As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the performance from becoming poor when the high-expectation suppression acceptance performance is generated.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, the acceptable reception sound output when the high-expectation suppressed reception effect is generated is higher than the acceptable reception sound output when the low-expectation unsuppressed reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained over a long period of time, and this also suitably suppresses poor performance when the high-expectation suppression acceptance performance occurs.

On the other hand, in the high-expectation suppression acceptance effect, when the operation opportunity is given, the “BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)” is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or is put in a non-output state. There is also the aspect that when the post-effect occurs, it becomes possible to make the corresponding effect sound stand out. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, regarding the acceptance acceptable sound output when the high-expectation suppressed acceptance effect is generated, the effect is accepted when the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state. Then, the output state is terminated based on the performance acceptance. As a result, the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable acceptance sound.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation reception effect is defined as "if no operation is detected within the set time during which reception of the effect is allowed, the set time ends without generating the post-operation effect. Not only can it be generated by the "non-automatic reception mode", but also "the automatic reception mode that can generate the effect after the operation even if the operation is not detected within the set time that allows the reception of the effect". can also occur.

That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, even if the operation is not detected within the set time that allows the reception of the effect, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot perform an operation and, as a result, cannot confirm the effect after the operation. However, as will be described later, more strictly speaking, the output time for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time for the liquid crystal display in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected. It is designed to be shorter than when it was made.

In addition, in the automatic reception mode (operation reception effect) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if the operation is not detected, the effect reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (automatic button function is activated). Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect acceptance. In other words, in this case, since the effect reception will always occur before the arrival of the specific timing within the set time at the latest, it is possible that the performance reception will be performed within the time after the specific timing within the set time. As a result, the length of the effective period during which reception of performance is permitted is substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the post-operation effect is started after the set time has expired, not only does it not cause a delay in the effect, but on the contrary, the automatic button function can be activated in a way that speeds up the effect tempo. can be realized.

In addition, if the automatic button function is activated within the set time in this way, the opportunity to operate will be substantially lost even though the set time has not passed. Also, the players are expected to be afraid of this and to actively perform operations at an earlier stage within the set time, or to play games with a sense of tension with respect to the performance.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects, the "gauge display of how much effective time remains" displayed on the effect display device 1600 is displayed until a specific timing when the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable that the display not suggest the remaining time, but merely suggest the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. When such a display method is employed, in the operation acceptance effect executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the effect acceptance is always made before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes "0".

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, when it occurs, It is possible to output a reception acceptance sound suggesting that the performance reception is allowed or that the performance reception is allowed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress a situation in which an effect reception is automatically generated due to forgetting to operate and the effect reception cannot be generated by one's own operation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation acceptance effect executed in the automatic acceptance mode is generated, the specified Since the sound can be output as the acceptable acceptance sound, by confirming the type of the acceptable acceptance sound, the operation acceptance effect executed in the automatic acceptance mode instead of the non-automatic acceptance mode is generated. be able to recognize that

On the other hand, since there is usually a risk that the post-operation effect will be executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, it is not necessarily good to perform the operation so that the post-operation effect is performed in order to improve the game interest. There is also the aspect of not being limited to Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the reception permission sound is output for a time sufficient to suggest that the performance reception is permitted, the reception permission sound in the output state is output. By ending the process relatively early, it is possible to create ``time for considering whether or not to generate the effect reception'' while the reception permission sound is not output.

However, even in the operation acceptance effect that is executed in the automatic acceptance mode, if the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated early, there is a concern that it will lead to misunderstanding that "the effect acceptance is no longer allowed due to the functioning of the automatic button". occur. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to this embodiment, the output state of the acceptance permission sound is maintained for a relatively long period of time. In this way, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation with a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently as an operation reception effect, or is not output. Giving an opportunity to operate while the player is in a controlled reception effect (here, a high-expectation suppressed reception effect), or giving an opportunity to operate while "BGM playback (a specific type of effect sound)" is being output in an unrestrained mode While the unsuppressed reception performance (here, low-expectation unrestrained reception performance) can occur in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the performance reception is allowed, or the performance reception It is technically characterized in that acceptance acceptance sounds suggesting that the will be in an acceptable state are generated in such a way as to further enhance their own performance.

In the following, such technical features will be explained, but in explaining the technical features, let me explain again about the "acceptable sound". The output is started within the set time, suggesting that the reception of the effect is permitted, or the output is started before the set time when the reception of the effect is permitted, and the reception of the effect is permitted. For example, it is output as a dramatic sound such as "Pickin". However, if the output state is set before the set time for accepting the effect occurs, the output state of the "acceptable sound" must be maintained across the timing of the occurrence of the set time ( It is required to be in an output state within the set time (within the period when the performance reception is permitted)), and rather than the time from when the "acceptance permission sound" is in the output state until the set time occurs, It is desirable to set so that the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the "acceptable sound" is longer. In this sense, the "acceptable sound" can be output only when a set time (effective period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, it can also be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) according to an operation by the player or due to the lapse of output time.

Also, the "acceptable sound" may be assigned to a channel and output as a single effect sound data (see FIG. 210), or other effect sound (for example, a set time (effective period ), and the sound effects that are output in conjunction with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effects", etc.) are assigned to a channel and output as one sound effect data. (see FIG. 211), and its implementation method may be adopted as appropriate.

FIG. 212 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the low-expectation unsuppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode.

Now, in the normal game state (non-probability variable / non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, among the "low expected fluctuation pattern that does not even form a reach state", "predetermined fluctuation If "pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes an effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. Then, after that, a variable production of the decorative pattern (a production drawing according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a predetermined fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice production is performed within the execution period of the variable production. An effect (announcement effect) according to the determination result is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected "predetermined variation pattern". In addition, including each effect example described below, effect pattern determination (sub control side) is performed based on the result of variation pattern determination (main control side), and advance notice determination (sub control side), regarding the processing related to the notice effect, the "variation pattern determination" may be replaced with the "effect pattern determination", and the "variation pattern" may be replaced with the "effect pattern".

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the variation performance of the decorative symbols as shown in FIG. 212(b). When a timing tr32 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start, an operation reception performance (effective period) is generated in which reception of performance is permitted. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation acceptance effect (valid period) generated during the execution period of the effect related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern),
・"Unsuppressed reception effect (figure 212 (a) and (b))”, and if the operation is not detected within the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) during which reception of the effect is permitted, the effect is not generated after the operation "Non-automatic acceptance mode (see Fig. 212(j))" where the set time is terminated
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low-expectation variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed, thereby suppressing the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect. Since the set time (effective period) that allows acceptance of the performance is suddenly set without any performance such as suggesting (unsuppressed reception performance), the player will be surprised. It becomes a drooping shape, and a delay is likely to occur at the start of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time ends without the post-operation effect (non-automatic acceptance Mode), by making the player aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate the post-operation production, the tension during the execution period of the production (production pattern) according to the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) can be appropriately adjusted. be able to maintain.

However, although it is executed as such a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) ends without the post-operation effect occurring against the player's will. If such incidents occur frequently, there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tr31, which is a little earlier than the timing tr31, is reached, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the effect acceptance is permitted at timing tr31, which is slightly before the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) occurs, and "contrary to the player's will, It is expected that "the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) will end without any effect" occurring frequently. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tr32 to tr33) occurs. may be generated by

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptance acceptable sound", the first acceptable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikin!" and a second allowable sound output as a message sound such as . However, as shown in FIGS. 212(d) and (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), The second allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output. This makes it easier for a delay to occur at the start of movement when a person tries to operate.

By the way, during the execution period of the production (production pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time (effective period) or the execution in a non-automatic reception mode, It is conceivable that some players may make an effort not to miss the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect by repeatedly hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) from the time when the effect reception is not permitted. be done. However, in this case, since the effect reception is permitted and the effect after the operation is started immediately, the effect that has been started is "what is being performed in response to the effect reception (effect after the operation)". It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect unrelated to the reception of the effect", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (particularly, FIG. 212(c)), in the low-expectation unsuppressed reception effect, the "reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)" starts after the set time (effective period) occurs. When the effect is accepted at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (effective period) itself is terminated, while the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated halfway. The output state is maintained until the timing when outputting as one allowable sound ends (the same timing as when there is no operation (Fig. 212(g)). As a result, the started effect is changed to "According to the reception of the effect It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is what is being done (post-operation effect) or ``what is automatically generated as a mere advance notice effect that is not related to the reception of the effect''. become able to.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, when the production is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the drawing), the production display device 1600 (first At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output from the speaker (effect sound) are maintained for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tr33, regardless of whether the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted, if the timing tr33 has not passed, neither the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) nor the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

In the production example shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, in the production display device 1600, the operation means to be operated in the low-expectation unsuppressed reception production Along with the simulated image being displayed, a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed. As a display method for the model image and gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. (Both are hidden at the same timing).

However, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with a "special effect mode (automatic button effect state)" that activates the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. Alternatively, the setting and cancellation of the "special presentation mode" may be performed by the player's operation. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception effect occurs during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected variation pattern (predetermined variation pattern), in the state set to the "special effect mode" , "unsuppressed reception effect" and will be executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and only when the "special effect mode" is not set, "unsuppressed/non-automatic reception effect" will occur as However, in the specification (especially, "more detailed performance of acceptance acceptable sound" and related descriptions), unless otherwise noted, it is in a state where it is not set to "special production mode" Sometimes, the pachinko machine 1 is described as an example of the effect when the "special effect mode" is not installed.

FIG. 213 and FIG. 214 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when the high-expectation restrained acceptance effect is executed in the automatic acceptance mode.

Now, in the normal game state (non-variable, non-time-saving), the starting condition is satisfied (reserved digestion), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) High expectations to develop. Assuming that the "specific variation pattern" is selected from among the "variation patterns", the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after that, a variable performance of decorative patterns (a performance drawing according to a specific variation pattern, a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and the performance is determined within the execution period of the variable performance. The effect (announcement effect) according to the result of (1) is additionally executed with respect to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected "specific variation pattern".

However, as described above, in the production (production pattern) related to the "specific variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (advance judgment), as shown in FIG. 213 (b) Then, when timing tr42 (timing within the SP ready-to-win state) at which a specific time elapses after the start of the variable performance of the decorative pattern arrives, an operation reception performance (effective period) is generated for which reception of performance is permitted.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr42 within the specific variation pattern is
・"Suppression reception effect (Fig. 213 (a) , (b))”, and ・Even if no operation is detected on the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timings tr42 to tr43) during which reception of the effect is allowed, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, an effect reception is automatically generated internally (automatic button function is activated), and the effect after the operation is started based on the reception of the effect. Aspect (see FIG. 213(j))”
It is generated as a "suppression/automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a suppressed mode or silently, a method of presetting a silent interval (suppressed interval) in the data of the "BGM playback sound" itself, or a method of setting the "BGM playback sound" itself in advance It is possible to adopt a method of changing the setting of the volume value for the channel to which "BGM reproduction sound" is assigned to a suppression value (for example, "0"), or a combination thereof. As will be described later, this "restraint/automatic acceptance effect" is also called a "second suppression operation acceptance effect", and the suppression mode here is also called a "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the production (production pattern) related to the high-expectation variation pattern (SP reach state in the production (production pattern) related to the specific variation pattern), the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed. Since a set time (effective period) is set during which performance reception is permitted with performance such as suggesting the occurrence of operation reception performance by outputting in a form or without sound (suppressed reception Effect), from the player's side, it becomes easier to operate immediately after the operation reception effect occurs. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect will automatically occur when timing tr42A within the set time arrives at the latest. (automatic acceptance mode), the user can enjoy the operation with a sense of security that will not miss the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation acceptance effect at high expectations.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect", as in the above-described "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect", , when the timing tr41 slightly before the set time (timings tr42 to tr43) at which the performance reception is permitted occurs, the "acceptance acceptance sound" is started to be output, and the timing tr42 is crossed. is used to maintain the output state. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM playback sound" is output in a suppressed mode or in silence, a state in which reception of the effect is permitted will soon occur at timing tr41. It is expected that it will be possible to recognize that ``against the player's will, the performance reception is performed by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation''. Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tr42 to tr43) occurs. You may do so.

However, the timing tr40 at which the "BGM playback sound" transitions from being output in a non-suppressed mode to being output in a suppressed mode or without sound (or in a non-output state) is subject to the above action. 213(a) to (c), in order to obtain the effect (restraint reception effect) preferably, there is a relationship such as "the length of timings tr40 to tr41>the length of timings tr41 to tr42". It can be said that it is important to set the timing to arrive considerably earlier than the "output start timing tr41 of the above-described acceptance acceptable sound occurring prior to the set time" so as to have a certain property.

In addition, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , the "reception acceptable sound" includes not only the first acceptable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "Pikin!", but also the second acceptable sound that is output as a message sound such as "Press!" is also started to be output when the timing tr41 arrives, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, which operation means should be operated among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Since there is a possibility that it can be recognized from the time when the model image of the operation means to be operated is not yet displayed (timings tr41 to tr42), immediately after the operation acceptance effect occurs. It becomes easier to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is operated, a message sound such as "Press!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is operated. In this case, a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

In the production example shown in FIG. 213, the output of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are started at the same time. It is also possible to sequentially bring them into the output state. In this case, only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started to be output from a state in which the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

Also, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 213(g) and (h), the "first allowable sound" is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short period of time, and the "second allowable sound" is used. is employed as the dramatic sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, as for the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound", as shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the timings for ending the state (timings for making the state inaudible) are different from each other before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, it is possible to estimate how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound" is in. As a result, it is expected that ``against the player's will, the performance reception is performed by activating the automatic button function instead of by the player's own operation'' will be less likely to occur.
・The first situation in which both the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” maintain their output state. ・The output state of one of the “first allowable sound” and “second allowable sound” is maintained. but the other has finished the output state (made inaudible) Second situation ・Both the "first permissible sound" and the "second permissible sound" have finished the output state Third Situation (Made Inaudible)

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. 212 and the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. As the "first allowable sound", the same production sound (for example, "Pikin!") is output. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as a production sound that is not output in the "unsuppressed/non-automatic reception production", but the effect sound ( Regarding the first allowable sound), since it can be output as an effect sound that is output even in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", it can be used when the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed It is possible to more easily recognize that the reception of the performance is permitted (the first allowable sound) while maintaining the performance in a suitable manner (the second allowable sound).

Timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) in the case of outputting the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) prior to the set time (effective period) or the display of the model image The time of may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the control (processing) unit, or may be the time of two or more frames. That is, if it is possible to output even a little earlier than the set time (effective period) and the display of the model image, the player is in a state where the reception of the effect is permitted, and the operation means to be operated Since there is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which one is earlier by the amount of time preceding it, the period until the end of the set time or the timing at which the automatic button function is activated It will be expected to suppress forgetting to perform an operation within the period until arrival.

By the way, in the operation acceptance performance executed in the automatic button mode, even within the set time (effective period), the automatic button function is activated (timing tr42A), and as described above, the opportunity to operate can be lost. is. Therefore, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213(c) and (d), unlike the production example shown in FIG. ) is in an output state, the output state is terminated based on the reception of the effect. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound) is interrupted at that point, and thereby the state in which the performance acceptance is allowed ( Since it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period) has ended, it is possible to recognize that the reception of the production has not yet occurred and the automatic button function can be activated (a state in which the opportunity to operate can be lost). It becomes possible to avoid misunderstanding that it is in In addition, within the set time (effective period), if the operation is performed at a timing before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated and the effect is accepted, the effect will be produced at the time the effect is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if the timing tr42A arrives, since the state in which acceptance is permitted is ended.

Also, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 213, when the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tr42a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 ( At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), it will be displayed at a specific timing after timing tr43. While it will be hidden (invisible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) will be maintained for a predetermined amount of time from the timing when the effect reception is made. ing.

However, as shown in FIG. 213, even if the effect is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is set to "BGM playback sound." ” is returned from the suppressed state (silent state) to the non-suppressed mode output, the output state is maintained at the timing tr44. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "BGM playback sound" is returned to the output in the non-suppressed mode and the content of the display effect is switched. It will be expected that the game will be greatly changed and the amusement will be improved. It should be noted that the "BGM playback sound" may be gradually restored by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppression mode. Further, with respect to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended at a specific timing after timing tr44 instead of timing tr44.

Also, in the production example shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, the operation means that is the object of operation in the high-expectation suppression reception production is displayed on the production display device 1600. Along with the simulated image being displayed, a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed. In this regard, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, a message sound (for example, "press!") is output as the second allowable sound. A message display (for example, "Press!") that does not appear in the operation reception effect executed by is displayed. As a display method for the model image, gauge display, and message display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted. is hidden at the stage when the set time has not yet passed (both are hidden at the same timing) based on the occurrence of reception of the effect. The message display does not necessarily have to completely match the content of the message sound, as long as it prompts the operation.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. While the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), the message display maintains the display state even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, and furthermore After the automatic button function is activated, it is not hidden (invisible) until at least the timing tr43 at which the set time ends. After that, the display state may be maintained. Incidentally, the set time (effective period) is terminated at the time when the effect is accepted, so in fact, it will be terminated at the latest when the timing tr42A at which the automatic button is activated arrives. Therefore, the "timing tr43 at which the set time ends" strictly means the timing at which the set time ends when the set time continues, and the time set at the timing tr42 It is the timing that arrives after the timing tr42.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made by activating the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). , Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the effect will be received by detecting the operation target prompted by the message sound (second allowable sound) or the message display. It becomes possible to suggest to the player that there is no such situation. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that the reception of the effect caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, both the operation reception effect (Fig. 212) which is not executed in the automatic button mode and the operation reception effect (Fig. 213) which is executed in the automatic button mode Remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the end of the state in which performance reception is permitted can be performed within the set time (effective period). In the operation acceptance effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed. That is, in this case, the shorter the time until the set time ends, the smaller the gauge amount becomes, and when this time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

On the other hand, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (Fig. 213), when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without the operation being detected, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatic. As described above, after the specific timing tr42A arrives, even if the set time has not yet passed, reception of the effect is not permitted. Therefore, if the "remaining time display (gauge display) indicating the remaining time until the end of the state in which reception of the effect is permitted" is performed within the set time of such an operation reception effect (Fig. 213), normally may dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the operation acceptance effect (Fig. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect acceptance is permitted after the specific timing tr42A arrives. The remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the set time has elapsed, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses becomes shorter, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed to be "0". However, in this case, before the set time becomes "0", the state is always shifted to a state in which reception of the effect is not permitted, so reception of the effect is not permitted while the gauge amount remains. state will be transferred.

According to such a configuration, when the effect is accepted by activating the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left. On the other hand, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'', and this allows you to operate at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount in the set time (effective period) after the next time You will be able to encourage them to do

Moreover, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment (Fig. 213), when the effect reception occurs due to operation detection, the remaining time is displayed ( Gauge display) can be hidden (invisible). On the other hand, when the reception of the effect occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in the state where the set time has not passed, and at least the set time is displayed. Until the time elapses, the "form of dynamic display in which the suggested remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

According to such a configuration, when the performance reception is performed by activating the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues dynamic display until at least the set time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the effect is not accepted by the detection of the operation on the operation target whose operation is prompted by the message sound or message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that the reception of the effect caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

As described above, in the operation acceptance effect that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. There is "case". In other words, in this case, since there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the object of operation after the set time (effective period) that allows reception of the effect occurs, the set time is set to 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time for On the other hand, in the operation reception presentation that occurs at timing tr32 in FIG. , it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, regarding the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, setting it after 3 seconds have elapsed since the set time (effective period) occurred is an operation against the player's will. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the opportunity is lost.

In addition, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tr42 in FIG. Even when the operation means of (1) is operated, it is desirable that the performance is accepted and the performance is executed after the operation. That is, if a situation arises in which the performance is not accepted despite the operation of the operating means, there is a possibility that the player will be confused. Since it is cruel to ask for further operation on the side operation means, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated, the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the items described in the above-described "suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 142)" and other examples thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, and tr44 in the production example shown in FIG. 213 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, and ts16 in the production example shown in FIG. Become.

However, as described above, in the suppressed operation reception effect, when an operation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silently, so the performance is poor compared to the unsuppressed operation reception effect. is concerned. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptable acceptance sound output when the suppressed operation acceptance effect is generated is higher than the acceptable acceptance sound output when the non-suppressed operation acceptance effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound that maintains the output state for a long time.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the output state is maintained are different. One of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the announcement effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 212(c), (g) and FIGS. ” is set as the shortest aspect among the above multiple aspects. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big winning pattern when the pattern variation is stopped differs depending on which one of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "Which of the plurality of modes should be output as the first allowable sound?" and "Which of the plurality of operation means should be used as the operation target?" Alternatively, one judgment result may be obtained in the above-described advance notice effect judgment. However, for at least the first mode among the multiple modes, the first allowable state is established in either case where the "operation button 410" is the object of operation or the case where the "sword ornament 5001" is the object of operation. It is desirable to make it selectable as sound. Also, in the second mode and the third mode, it is possible to select whether the "operation button 410" is to be operated or the "sword ornament 5001" is to be operated. You may do so.

FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second mode is used as the first reception allowable sound when the high expectation restrained reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

As shown in FIG. 214, this example of effect is basically similar to the example of effect described with reference to FIG. is the same as However, in this production example, as a result of the advance notice production determination, at timing tr41, the first allowable sound is output not in the first mode but in the second mode, which is longer than the first mode. In this case, the output state of the first permissible sound is maintained for a longer period of time than the second permissible sound.

According to such a configuration, the acceptable reception sound output when the suppressed operation reception effect is generated is output for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound (first mode) output when the non-suppressed operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a sound that is maintained, the performance is preferably maintained even in a situation where "BGM playback (a specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given. be able to

In addition, in order to improve the performance of the suppression operation acceptance effect, the first allowable sound output in the second mode should be a sound that is not output as the acceptance allowable sound in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. It is desirable to

On the other hand, in FIGS. 213 and 214, based on the result of the notice effect determination, there are cases of "selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target" and "selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target". Among them, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target. Therefore, also in this example of effect, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner as in the case of the example of effect shown in FIG. 213 (for example, "press!"). In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in 214(c) and (g) of FIG. Also, by ending the output state of the first permissible sound (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function can be activated in this production example as well. How much time is left until the timing tr42A to be activated can be estimated from the output state of the acceptable reception sound.

In particular, in this example of effect, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the "second allowable sound", which is also output in the example of effect shown in FIG. 213, is terminated. 213, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. become. In addition, by outputting only the first allowable sound out of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound in a longer alternative mode (second mode), the player can Based on the timing at which the output state of the second allowable sound is terminated, the ``remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives'' is estimated. Since it becomes possible to make a more detailed guess in a challenging manner using the game, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

214, other matters are the same as those of the example of effect shown in FIG. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG.

In addition, in the state set to the above-mentioned "special production mode", if the high expectation suppression reception production (Fig. 213, Fig. 214) occurs, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated will be set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A of . However, in this case, since the automatic button function can be activated by the player's will, even if the effect is accepted by activating the automatic button function, the message display will not be displayed. The output state is not maintained until timing tr43, and it is desirable to be hidden before timing tr43 (timing at which performance is accepted or timing delayed by the above-described time). At this time, regarding the timing at which the automatic button function is activated, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, the first permissible sound does not arrive in the output state, but the first permissible sound is output in the second mode. It is desirable that the first allowable sound arrives in the output state and functions to prematurely terminate the first allowable sound being output in the second manner when it is output.

Also, the case where the first acceptable sound (sound effect as the acceptance acceptable sound) is output in the first mode and the case where the first acceptable sound (sound effect as the acceptance acceptable sound) is output in the second mode are different. , not only are the output states maintained for different times, but different effect sounds may be used. For example, when the first acceptable sound (sound effect as the acceptance acceptable sound) is to be output in the first mode, a dramatic sound such as "picking" is output, and the first acceptable sound (sound effect as the acceptable acceptance sound) is output in the second mode. When outputting in the mode, it is possible to output a dramatic sound such as "Gao Gao".

In the above explanation example, the low expectation variation pattern is defined as "a variation pattern that does not even form a reach state", but is defined as a "variation pattern in which the symbol is stopped without becoming an SP reach state", and the low expectation 212 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the variation patterns.

In addition, it is desirable that the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" exemplified in the above explanation example cannot appear in the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) when in the normal game state, but the above Regarding the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the explanation example, it can also appear in the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (the corresponding production pattern) including the above "specific fluctuation pattern" when in the normal game state . That is, even if it is a high-expectation fluctuation pattern (a production pattern corresponding to), basically, within the period before the production progresses to the SP reach state, such as a non-reach state, a low-expectation fluctuation pattern (corresponding to 212, the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" shown in FIG. 212 can also appear. Even with such a configuration, when a “suppressed/automatic acceptance effect” appears (high expected fluctuation pattern), when an “unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect” appears (low expected fluctuation pattern or high expected fluctuation It can be said that the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit pattern when the pattern fluctuation is stopped is higher than the pattern).

In addition, in the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (the production pattern corresponding to) that occurs during the normal game state, when giving the operation opportunity, "BGM playback (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. It is desirable that the low-expectation unsuppressed acceptance effect is not executed in an automatic acceptance mode. It should be noted that this is a state in which the "special performance mode" is not set or the pachinko machine 1 is not equipped with the "special performance mode".

In addition, the length of time from "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated" to "timing tr43 at which the set time has passed since acceptance of the effect is permitted" is determined by the minimum time ( For example, it may be one frame), or it may be two or more frames. For example, the message display is visible at "timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated", and such a visible state is at least "timing tr43 when the set time has passed after acceptance of the effect is permitted". If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length of the set time (effective period), and it will be possible to recognize that the player has not performed an operation. You will be able to In the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, in any operation reception effect, a message sound (second allowable sound) and message display are displayed at the "timing when the automatic button function is activated" within the set time. It is desirable to output according to the relationships described above (see FIGS. 213(h) and (i) and FIGS. 214(h) and (i)).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in FIG. 213(i) and FIG. 212(e), 213(e), etc.), by standardization of the program, it appears when the performance acceptance occurs at other timings (Fig. 212(e), Fig. 213(e), etc.), but may occur only when the automatic button function is activated by using the program of That is, in this case, the operation-related display is hidden at timing tr32a in the example shown in FIG. 212(e), and the operation-related display is hidden at timing tr42a in the example shown in FIG. 213(e). Become.

In addition, in the above explanation example (FIGS. 212 to 214), the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect However, the post-operation effect may be performed so that the start timings of these effects are staggered. For example, in a situation where the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is started at timing tr42, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) produces a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display). The post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed in accordance with the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. If it is made to start, it becomes possible to switch the display effect smoothly.

As described in the above "suppressed operation sound output process (Fig. 142)", even in the production example shown in Figs. An effect (for example, the above-described “specific operation-related effect”, etc.) may be performed. In this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes with different degrees of expectation for the appearance of the big win symbols as the portent effect, and to perform the portent effect in one of these modes. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared for the portent effect sound to be output during the period in which the portent effect is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the portent effect sound depends on the execution mode of the portent effect. It is desirable to select On the other hand, with respect to the first allowable sound, while the model image to be operated, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display of "Press!" It is to be output in one of a plurality of modes including modes.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the operation reception production shown in FIGS. Since the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound of the mode) can be output as the reception allowable sound, it is possible to suitably suppress the lack of performance when the suppression operation reception performance is generated. will be able to In addition, by confirming the type of acceptable reception sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is being generated in the automatic reception mode instead of the non-automatic reception mode.

As for the acceptance acceptable sound of the non-suppressed operation acceptance effect (Fig. 212), the first acceptable sound is output as an effect sound, and the second acceptable sound is output as a message sound. Of these, the second allowable sound is not prepared and only the first allowable sound is output. Both of the two permissible sounds are output. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is being performed.

Further, in the above effect example, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppressed operation acceptance effect (FIG. 212) and the suppressed operation acceptance effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) (FIGS. 212 and 213). ) and a case where a different effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 212 and 214).

In other words, if a reception permitting sound different from normal is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the performance reception is permitted, and the chance of operation may be lost. Therefore, the second allowable sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first allowable sound (effect sound) is output as a sound that is normally output. is desirable. Then, while the acceptable reception sound is output in this mode, the first acceptable sound (sound effect) is also output with a predetermined probability as a production sound (second mode) that is not normally output. By making the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit pattern higher than when outputting in the first mode, it is possible to recognize that the reception of the effect is permitted, and the "BGM reproduction (specified)" is made. It is possible to preferably maintain the performance in a situation where the type of performance sound) is output in a suppressed mode or in silence. In order to obtain such a function and effect, when the suppression operation acceptance effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first form is output as the first reception allowable sound in the effect determination such as the advance notice effect determination. It is desirable that the percentage of determinations to that effect be higher than the percentage of determinations to output the second mode.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, not only the operation reception production executed in the non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 212) but also the operation reception production executed in the automatic reception mode (FIGS. 213 and 214) , At the time of occurrence, it is possible to output a reception acceptance sound that suggests that the production reception is permitted, or that the production reception will be permitted. It is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user loses the opportunity to operate the user as a result.

213 and 214, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when timing tr41 arrives, and specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (effective period). It is determined whether or not, and when the specific timing tr42A arrives without the reception of the performance corresponding to the detection of the operation, the reception of the performance is automatically generated. According to such a configuration, regardless of whether or not there is an operation, it is possible to start the post-operation production within a preset period (set time). It will be possible to automatically button without making the flow of the subsequent production different from the case without it, and without causing the production delay.

Further, in the above example of effect, a "message sound (second allowable sound) prompting an operation to be performed" may be output as the acceptance allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) must be operated. It is not output in the ``operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode'' that does not accept the performance, and can be output only in the ``operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode'' in which the performance is received without any operation. there is

In other words, it is precisely in the operation acceptance performance executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode that a message sound (second allowable sound) that directly expresses that an operation should be performed is output, and many types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound, Although it is conceivable that a second allowable sound should be output, there is usually a risk that the post-operation effect will be executed in a manner with a low degree of expectation. Operation is not necessarily good for improving the game interest. In this regard, the ``operation acceptance effect executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode'' is an effect that allows the user to make a selection such as ``do not intentionally generate the effect after the operation''. Avoid directly expressing this as a message (second allowable sound), do not output the message sound (second allowable sound), and do not have the option of whether or not to generate the effect after the operation "automatic reception It is desirable to output the message sound (second acceptable sound) only in the "operation acceptance effect executed in the mode" or to output more types of acceptance acceptable sounds. In addition, in the "operation acceptance effect executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode", if the set time ends without the effect being accepted, the post-operation effect and related effects will not be performed. The performance progresses without any suggestion of degree. In the non-moving reception effect, no message sound is output for any of the operation reception effects, but in the "operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode", a type of message sound is not output. An operation acceptance presentation may be included.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of modes (“Push!” and “Sheath your sword!”) as the message sound (second allowable sound), and the effects shown in FIGS. In the example, depending on which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is the object to which the operation opportunity is granted (based on the result of the advance notice effect determination), any one of these multiple modes is selectively selected. I am trying to output. In this case, when the operation button 410 is given the opportunity to operate and the corresponding message sound ("Push!") is output, the object to be given the opportunity to operate is the sword ornament 5001. Compared to when the message sound ("Sheath your sword!") is output in response to the reception, it suggests that ``a big hit pattern will appear when the pattern change is stopped'' in the post-operation production in response to the reception of the production. The ratio (expectation) of appearance of the presentation mode is made low. The ratio (expectation level) of appearance of the effect mode may be 0% or 100%.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second acceptable sound) is not output, the operation target is not the sword ornament 5001, the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and an operation reception effect executed in a non-automatic reception mode is generated. In addition, at least in the normal game state, the post-operation performance executed when the performance is accepted in the operation reception performance in which the message sound is not output suggests that ``a big win pattern appears when the pattern variation is stopped''. The ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the effect mode is the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect is accepted in the operation reception effect in which the message sound is output, "When the pattern fluctuation is stopped, the jackpot pattern appears. is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) of appearance of the presentation mode suggesting "". It should be noted that the ratio (expectation level) of appearance of the effect mode may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, "whether the message sound (second allowable sound) will be output" becomes a turning point in knowing the degree of expectation, and the message sound ( When the second allowable sound) is output, it is possible to know the degree of expectation based on the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as an operation target, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output, the degree of expectation is relatively high, and the post-operation effect can be enjoyed. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in an automatic acceptance mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the degree of expectation is relatively low, and the "sword ornament 5001", which is used only when the degree of expectation is high, becomes the operation target. disappear. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the option of whether or not to generate the post-operation effect by executing the post-operation effect in a non-automatic acceptance mode.

In addition, in the operation reception performance executed in FIGS. 213 and 214, when the set time (effective period) occurs, a message sound is output and a message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 213(g) to (i) and FIGS. While the output state is terminated (inaudible state) before tr42A, the message display is maintained even at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, it is prevented from being hidden (invisible) until at least the timing tr43 at which the set time ends. That is, in this case, when the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display can be hidden in response to the effect acceptance before the set time has elapsed. If the automatic button function is activated, the message display ("Push!" or "Sheath your sword!") will continue to be displayed at least until the set time has expired.

According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is performed by activating the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). , Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the effect is received by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target prompted by the message display. It becomes possible to suggest to the player that there is no such situation. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that the reception of the effect caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is activated, the remaining time is displayed (gauge display) when the effect is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function at timing tr42A. Since the gauge amount will be left on purpose, it can be suggested that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'' against the player's will. With the set time (effective period), it is possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is activated, when the effect is accepted by the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. The dynamic display continues until the time has passed. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the effect is not accepted by the operation detection for the operation target prompted by the message sound or message display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted to operate by a message sound or message display is operated by mistake, it can be suggested that the reception of the effect caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

212 and the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 213, the same effect sound (first allowable sound in the first mode) is output as the acceptability sound. Even when the operation reception performance of (1) is generated, it is possible to appropriately inform the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. 213, the second allowable sound, which is not output in the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. 212, is also output. It will also be possible to recognize Furthermore, in the operation reception effect that is executed in the automatic reception mode in a specific variation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to), the ratio of execution in the mode shown in FIG. 213 is relatively high. The ratio of execution in the manner shown in FIG. 214 is relatively low, and the ratio of stopping at the jackpot pattern is relatively high when the manner shown in FIG. 214 is executed. That is, in this case, while avoiding overlooking the post-operation effect, the first permissible sound is not the "first mode", but the "second mode" that is not used in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. , it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

213 and 214, compared to the production example shown in FIG. 212, the production sound ( 214), it is possible to preferably maintain the effect when "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. become able to.

213 and 214 (restraint operation acceptance effect), the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not necessarily used as the effect sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time. , the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound of the first mode) that is the same as when the non-suppressed operation reception performance (FIG. 212) is generated. On top of this, when the first permissible sound is output with the effect sound whose output state is maintained for a long time (second mode) (Fig. 214), the effect sound whose output state is maintained only for a short time (first A new performance is added by making the percentage of the symbols stopped by the big hit symbols higher than when the first allowable sound is output in the mode) (FIG. 213). As a result, while making it possible to recognize that it is in a state in which reception of the effect is permitted, the effect when "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state is improved. It can be maintained well.

212 to 214, when the first allowable sound is output with the effect sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the first allowable If the presentation is accepted during the period when the sound is being output, it is set to the non-output (non-audible) state even in the middle of the output (see Fig. 214(c)). . On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output with the effect sound (first mode) whose output state is maintained for a short period of time (Figs. 212 and 213), the first allowable sound will ' or 'operation reception effect executed in automatic reception mode' (Fig. 213), if the effect reception is made during the output, it will be in a non-output (non-audible) state at that time. (see FIGS. 212(c) and 213(c)). That is, in this case, in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 212, even if the effect is accepted while the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. It should be noted that the first allowable sound is in an output state during the period from timing tr41 to tr42, but during this period, even if an operation is detected, the effect reception is not performed. It goes without saying that the output state is never interrupted.

That is, as described above, in the non-suppressed operation reception effect, unlike the suppressed operation reception effect, the operation reception effect is generated without suppressing the “BGM playback (a specific type of effect sound)”, so the post-operation effect is missed. The possibility is relatively high, and if the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode, there is a possibility that the post-operation effect cannot be generated. Therefore, when these operation acceptance effects occur, it is assumed that some players will hit repeatedly before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if the operation is detected by repeated hits, there is a concern that it will be difficult to understand whether it is an effect that occurred after the operation or an advance notice effect that is not related to the operation. It is desirable to resolve this concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduced data (FIG. 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, since there is no need for repeated hits, in order to suppress the game by such repeated hits, if the repeated hits are performed, the first allowable sound is the first mode and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize whether the output has been made (stop the output in the middle).

Even if the effect is accepted by the player's operation within the set time, the message display will not be displayed within the set time only when the detection of the operation is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. may be displayed continuously until the end of the timing, or the remaining time display (gauge display) may be continued until the timing when the remaining time display (gauge display) ends within the set time (described above such as standardization of the programs that

In addition, as described above, since there is usually a risk that the post-operation effect will be executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, performing an operation so that the post-operation effect is performed is an effective way to improve the enjoyment of the game. Not necessarily good. In this regard, in the production example (non-automatic reception production) shown in FIG. By using the mode (first mode) that ends at 10:00, ``time for determining whether or not to generate the performance reception'' is created while the reception permission sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), since there is no need to create such time, the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) is output in the same mode (first mode). In addition to the case, there are also cases where the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output in a longer mode (second mode), suggesting that the degree of expectation differs depending on these modes. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptable reception sound for a relatively long time, it is possible to suggest that the automatic button function has not been activated yet, which in turn gives a sense of security. In particular, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation.

Also, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), even if the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output in a long mode (second mode) (FIG. 214), the automatic button function is activated. Before the arrival of the timing tr42A to be received, the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is made inaudible, and the two acceptable acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are made at different timings. I am trying to terminate it.

This makes it possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated will not come until the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) becomes inaudible. , being inaudible, it becomes possible to suggest that a situation has arisen in which the automatic button function could soon be activated without prompt action. At this time, at least in the long side mode (second mode) and in the second allowable sound whose output state is maintained for a longer time than the first allowable sound in the first mode, the loudness and pitch of the sound change over time. It is desirable to change at least one of , from the viewpoint of facilitating recognition of how much time has elapsed.

213 and 214, when an operation opportunity is provided, "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently, thereby generating a post-operation effect. When this is done, a production device is applied so that the production sound corresponding to this can be heard prominently. In this regard, regarding the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when such a suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, if the effect is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is in the output state, the effect is accepted. Since the output state is terminated, the production sound corresponding to the post-operation production can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptable acceptance sound.

In the above production example, when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance production" occurs, even if the production acceptance is made while the reception acceptance sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained. and However, instead of this, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is relatively high in expectations, such as when it occurs in the SP reach state within (the effect pattern corresponding to) the high expectation fluctuation pattern. Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the production, the production is performed when the acceptance acceptable sound (even if the same production sound (first mode) as the first acceptable sound is output) is in the output state. This may be interrupted when the acceptance is made.

213 and 214, the case where the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" occurs has been explained, but the "non-suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" or "suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" also occurs. It is also possible to make the performance progress in the same manner when the "non-suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" or the "suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" occurs.

In addition, when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is generated, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained for a longer time than the first mode (Fig. 213) and the second mode (Fig. 214) as the first allowable sound. When the third mode is output, it is desirable to make the ratio of appearance of the big winning pattern higher when the pattern variation is stopped than when the first mode or the second mode is output. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, and the set time (effective It becomes possible to more preferably maintain the amusement within the period).

In this case, as for the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated arrives. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first allowable sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that it is being output in the third mode, not in the first mode or the second mode. The longer the required time, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated, so it is possible to preferably maintain the tension within the set time (effective period) during which reception of the performance is allowed. become. Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. be.

It should be noted that the automatic button function may be enabled without fail when timing tr42A within a specific variation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to) arrives, or when a big hit is obtained, a specific variation It is activated when the timing tr42A within (the performance pattern corresponding to) the pattern arrives, but when the big hit is not obtained, when the timing tr42A within the specific variation pattern (the performance pattern corresponding to) arrives. It may not be activated.

A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (effective period), and some of these effects include an acceptance acceptable sound (first Allowable sound, second allowable sound) may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (effective period) during which reception of the effect is permitted occurs, the number of reception acceptable sounds is "0" and the number of reception acceptable sounds is "1" (the first allowable sound ) and the case where there are "2" acceptance acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound), suggesting how much the pachinko machine 1 "prompts for operation". be able to

As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the timing of hiding has arrived may be adopted.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, during the period from timing tr40 to tr44, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silently. It may be set to an output state (eg, the reproduction period in which audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, channel allocation has ended, etc.). That is, in this case, at timing tr44, "BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel and put into an output state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above production example, as described above, as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination, there is a highly expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) that develops into SP reach (ready reach production with background change, etc.). If a specific variation pattern is selected among them, even if any result is obtained as a production judgment (announcement judgment, etc.), when the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, production acceptance , the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is allowed,
・"Suppressed reception effect (Fig. 213 (a), (b)" that sets the set time during which reception of effect is permitted while "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the variation pattern is output in a suppressed mode or silently and (see FIGS. 214(a) and (b))”, and ・The operation for the operation means that is the operation target is not detected within the set time (timings tr42 to tr43) during which reception of the effect is permitted. Even in this case, when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect acceptance is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the effect after the operation is performed based on the effect acceptance. is started "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 213 (j) and FIG. 214 (j))"
It is generated as a "suppression/automatic reception effect" executed by.

Also, at this time, based on the result of the performance determination (advance performance determination), it is possible to determine which of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode to output the effect sound (first allowable sound) among the reception allowable sounds. , determines whether the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptable acceptance sounds should be output by “press!” or “sheath the sword!” 213 and 214). Also, as described above, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and the second allowable sound is "Sheath your sword!" is output, the expectations are higher than when "press!" is output. At this time, the order of expectations is as follows: "Second mode & sheathe!", "Second mode & press!", "First mode & sheathe!", "First mode & press!" ' is desirable in order to maintain the interest in the game when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

Also, as described above, in the "suppression/automatic reception effect" according to the above effect example, the first allowable sound is in the output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound. When the effect is accepted, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 213 and 214). Also, with respect to the second allowable sound, regardless of whether it is to be output as "press!" or "sheath the sword!" decided to discontinue

However, instead of this, if the effect is accepted while the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the fact that the effect is accepted. However, when the effect is accepted while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without being terminated. That is, in this case, even if the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" and the level of expectation cannot be recognized, the first mode with the lowest level of expectation among the multiple modes Since it is possible to recognize that it is not, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest. Further, even if a mode with a low degree of expectation appears in the post-operation production, if the output state of the first allowable sound with the lowest level of expectation among the plurality of modes is maintained, the post-operation production can be performed. By re-recognizing that the performance state was difficult to expect in the first place, it becomes easier to accept the result that appears as the performance after the operation, and it is expected that the game interest will be suppressed from significantly decreasing.

Even in the case of adopting such a modified example, when the above-mentioned "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" occurs within the above-mentioned predetermined variation pattern, it is as explained with reference to FIG. The case where the first allowable sound is output in the second mode in the “suppressed/automatic acceptance effect” within the specific variation pattern is as described with reference to FIG. 214 . 213 when outputting the first allowable sound in the first mode in the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" that appears within a specific variation pattern, among the above-described effect examples, 215" will be executed instead.

As shown in FIG. 215, in the ``production mode shown in FIG. be. However, in the "effect mode shown in FIG. 215", even if the effect reception is made at the timing tr42a when the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted triggered by the effect reception. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. On the other hand, even if the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode with the lowest expectation among the multiple modes (e.g. , second aspect) (for example, FIG. 214(c)), the output state is interrupted based on the reception of the effect when the effect is received at the timing tr42a, as described above.

According to such a configuration, when the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode is the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is ended even if it is done, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation. In particular, in this production example (FIGS. 213, 215, etc.), the first allowable sound is output from timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (effective period) to timing tr42 at which the set time is set. , and the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from when the output state is reached at the timing tr41 until the arrival of the timing tr42. It becomes possible to function as a time for "distinguishing" which mode is which.

In this regard, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared so that the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. and As a result, even if the post-operation effect is started in a situation where the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first allowable sound can be combined. It is possible to shorten the time during which each output state overlaps, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game.

In addition, in the modified example shown in FIG. 215, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can also be output in the production example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212(c)). In this production example, the reception of the production is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if there is a situation in which the reception of the performance is not interrupted, it is possible to provide the performance without a sense of incongruity.

However, if an effect is accepted while the second allowable sound is in its output state, regardless of which mode is output as the first allowable sound, the effect is accepted. 214(d) and 215(d)). In other words, in this case, the first allowable sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the reception of the production is made early, while the second allowable sound is in a situation where the production is accepted by detecting the operation ( By giving these different functions to the acceptance acceptance sound, when the operation acceptance effect occurs game interest can be maintained favorably.

On the other hand, the acceptable acceptance sound output when the operation acceptance presentation shown in FIG. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without terminating the output state even if the reception of the effect is made while the output is being performed in the special mode. In the case of outputting in the special mode, it is desirable to make the ratio of the appearance of the big winning symbols higher when the symbols are stopped than in the case of outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. It may be output in a mode different from the first mode and the special mode.

That is, in the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 212, the output state of "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is maintained in an unsuppressed mode, and the problem of lack of effect is eliminated. Therefore, it is more desirable to be able to confirm the mode of the first allowable sound even in the situation where the post-operation effect is started, and to recognize the degree of expectation.

In addition, in the ``suppressed operation acceptance effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of production sound is being output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state,'' a specific type of production sound is suppressed or Needless to say, other sounds can be output in a non-suppressed manner even in the inaudible state.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, "the suppression of giving an operation opportunity while a specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state, or in a non-output state. 213 to 215)", the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the set time (effective period) occurs is set to one of "a plurality of modes with different lengths of time to be maintained as an output state". , and the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the big hit pattern) is made different depending on the output mode. In this regard, even in the ``non-suppressed operation reception effect that gives an operation opportunity while a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM playback) is being output in an unsuppressed mode'', the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is In addition to the case of outputting in the non-suppression mode in the first mode (Fig. 212), in a mode different from the first mode (the length is different, the effect sound itself is different, etc.), the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) ) may be output in a non-restricted mode, and the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the big hit pattern) may differ depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the reception allowable sound output when the "non-suppressed operation reception effect" is generated and the reception allowable sound output when the "suppressed operation reception effect" is generated are "output state It can be output in any one of a plurality of modes with different lengths of time maintained, and furthermore, the degree of expectation varies depending on the output mode. , and the ``restraint operation reception performance'', the game interest can be preferably maintained until the performance reception is performed.

FIG. 216 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner when the "unsuppressed operation acceptance effect (here, unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect)" is generated.

As shown in FIG. 216, even in this example of presentation, the portions not particularly noted are basically the same as the example of presentation shown in FIG. However, in the non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (timings tr31 to tr33) according to this example of effect, the effect determination (for example, at the start of pattern fluctuation 216 (c) and (g), as shown in FIGS. It is assumed that the game is output in the "first mode", and the performance situation is such that the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern is higher when the pattern variation is stopped than in the case of output in the "first mode". The specific aspect is output over a longer period of time than the first aspect.

Here, in both the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the first allowable sound can be output in the first mode when the operation reception effect is generated. It has been described above (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). That is, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time when the operation reception effect is generated. The Rukoto.

On the other hand, the case where the first allowable sound is output in a specific manner when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" occurs (Fig. 216) and the case where the first allowable sound is output when the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" occurs In the case of outputting in two modes (FIG. 214), different production sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times. In this production example, when the first allowable sound is output according to the second mode, it is output for a longer period of time than when the first allowable sound is output according to the specific mode.

However, on the other hand, when the same production sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time (see the first mode (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)), the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the big hit pattern) is the "first mode" output when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" occurs, or the "suppressed/automatic reception effect (Fig. 213 (or Fig. 215)"" It is different depending on whether it is output at the time of occurrence.In addition, here, when the "first mode" appears at the time of occurrence of "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" effect reception The degree of expectation (percentage) that suggests that the jackpot pattern will appear in the post-operation production according to is lower than the expectation level (percentage) that suggests that the jackpot pattern will appear in the post-operation performance corresponding to the reception of the performance, and the expectation level (percentage) may be 0% or 100%. .

On the other hand, the degree of expectation ( The ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern) is set to be the same as a predetermined value regardless of whether it is output at the occurrence of "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" or "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect". The degree of expectation (ratio) may also be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound for the same time, either the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" or the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" occurs. Expectations will not necessarily be the same depending on whether there is. Also, even when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" is generated, when the specific mode is output as the first allowable sound, the "suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" is generated when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound. The same level of expectation as "automatic reception performance" will be suggested.

That is, in this case, even if the first allowable sound is output in the same mode (first mode) for the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the expectations are set to be different from each other. Furthermore, since the first permissible sounds may be output in mutually different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make it appear that there is no direct relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectations are made to be the same in spite of the different effects and different output times. You will be able to have a secret relationship. For example, at the occurrence of the set time (effective period) during which reception of effects is permitted, the case where "BGM playback" is suppressed and the case where "BGM playback" is not suppressed are normal (acceptance acceptance sound first mode ), by starting different post-operation effects (different expectations) when the effect is accepted, it appears that the effects are not related to each other. However, when the acceptable reception sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, it is possible to perform the operation when the performance reception is performed while making it appear as if different effects were performed depending on whether or not the "reproduction of BGM" was suppressed. As a post-production, it is expected to provide a surprise production by secretly having a production relationship, such as being able to make the same content (same expectation) appear.

In this case, in both the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", multiple modes are prepared as the first allowable sound, but the commonly used "first mode , it is desirable to set the mode with the shortest output time among the plurality of modes for any of the operation acceptance effects. Further, the "second mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode with the longest output time among multiple modes that can be output when the "suppression/automatic reception effect" is generated, and Regarding the "specific mode" as the first allowable sound, it is set as the mode with the longest output time among multiple modes that can be output when the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" occurs. are different (for example, "output time of specific mode"<"output time of second mode") to make it appear that there is no direct relationship between them.

In addition, in the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect", even if the first allowable sound is output in either the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not terminated in the middle stage regardless of whether the effect reception has been made. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first allowable sound can be left even after the post-operation effect is started, the “unsuppressed/non-automatic reception effect” with relatively low expectations is executed. In this situation, despite the fact that the first allowable sound is output in a "specific mode" that raises the same expected level as the "suppressed/automatic reception effect", which has relatively high expectations, but this is overlooked You will be able to eliminate the possibility of slipping. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted when the effect reception is performed with the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215.

In the production example described above, when the second mode is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" (Fig. 214), The expectations are set to be the same between when the specific mode is output (Fig. 216). However, in the "suppression/automatic acceptance effect", as the first allowable sound, the output time is maintained for a longer time than the "first mode (Fig. 213)" and "second mode (Fig. 214)". In the case where it is possible to output the "third mode" of "suppression/automatic reception effect", the "third mode" is output instead of the above "second mode" as the first allowable sound, and " The degree of expectation is set to be the same in the case where the "specific mode" is output as the first allowable sound in the non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance presentation. The “third aspect” is as described above.

Further, in the production example shown in FIG. 216, when the production is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the drawing), the production display device 1600 (first At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output from the speaker (effect sound) are maintained for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tr33, regardless of which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted, if the timing tr33 has not passed, neither the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) nor the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to maintain the output state.

Also, in the production example above, the length of the ``time during which the acceptance acceptance sound is output'' does not mean the length of the ``time during which the sound data of the acceptance acceptance sound is assigned to the channel'', but rather It means the length of the "time to be output as audible sound".

In addition, in the above production example, in order to make it appear that there is no production relationship between the “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception production” and the “suppression/automatic reception production”, the “second mode” and the “third mode” are used. In terms of "mode", only "suppressed / automatic reception effect" out of "restrained / automatic reception effect" and "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" can be output.・It is desirable that only the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" out of the "automatic reception effect" and the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" can be output. In addition, if you prepare "second mode" and "third mode" as output candidates in "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" mode, third mode) is output, the level of expectation will not always be the same as when the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" is output. It is possible to more preferably improve the performance of the reception acceptance sound that is output when the "suppressed/automatic reception performance" is generated.

In addition, non-suppressed / non-automatic acceptance production (timing tr31 to tr33) may not be generated as a production according to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern), for example, high that develops into SP reach state As described above, among the effects related to the expected variation pattern (for example, a specific variation pattern), the effect may occur within the effect period before developing into the SP reach state.

By the way, in the above effect example, regarding the "suppressed operation reception effect" in which a specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) can be suppressed, the "weak suppression mode (first A plurality of modes including at least a "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or a non-output state is provided. good too. Note that when a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

According to such a configuration, when the set time (effective period) during which reception of the effect is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the effect of how much the specific type of effect sound is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above effects, the degree of expectation depends on whether the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" or the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It is desirable to make the ratio of appearance of the jackpot patterns different. It should be noted that here, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs, the degree of expectation (ratio) that suggests that the jackpot pattern will appear in the "post-operation effect according to the effect reception" is This is lower than the degree of expectation (proportion) suggesting that a big win pattern appears in the ``post-operation performance corresponding to the reception of performance'' when the strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance) is generated. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)", the effect according to the high-expectation fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.) and even the reach state are not formed (or A reach state can be formed, but it does not develop into an SP reach). )” may not occur in the low-expectation pattern, but may occur as an effect in accordance with the high-expectation variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the same as the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs. It can be said that it is lower than

In addition, in order to obtain the above effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" to which a transition can be made based on the satisfaction of a special effect condition, and in the "special effect state", the player can A specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM playback effect sound ) is suppressed, it is desirable to execute (start) the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect. According to such a "special effect state", each time a set time (effective period) during which reception of the effect is permitted occurs, how much the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed. In addition to the level of expectation suggested by the post-operation performance, the level of expectation is also implied by such performance (how much it is suppressed). As a result, it is expected that the interest in the game will be further improved when the reception of the performance is permitted.

In addition, within the symbol variation, a production pattern (for example, high expectation fluctuation An effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern among the patterns may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" with relatively low expectations occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation)" with relatively high expectations To suppress the decrease in game interest when a player recognizes that the degree of suppression of a specific type of performance sound is small (weak suppression mode) because the possibility of occurrence of "reception performance" remains. will be able to

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)"
・ If a specific variation pattern is selected from among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination Even if any result is obtained as (announcement determination, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern will occur when it progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression Operation reception performance)”,
・Even if the above specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.), it will not occur even if the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.), it occurs when the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" occurs in the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" is produced in accordance with the specific variation pattern. ” does not occur, when the production reception is made in the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception performance)”, the post-operation production is executed in a highly expected mode. It is desirable to

In such a configuration, in the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception presentation)" will not necessarily occur, and when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" will be used to create a post-operation presentation with a high degree of expectation. is executed at a higher rate, it becomes possible to attract attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" will occur, and the "weak suppression mode ( It is possible to improve the interest in the game when the "first suppression operation reception presentation" is generated.

Figures 217 to 219 show "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception )” is a time chart showing an example of an effect in a case where “. FIG. 217 shows an example of an effect when an operation is detected at a relatively early stage after the set time (effective period) has occurred, and FIG. FIG. 219 shows an example of an effect when an operation is detected at a late stage, and FIG. 219 shows an example of an effect when an operation is not detected within the set time (effective period).

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion), and as a result of the fluctuation pattern judgment, "specific fluctuation pattern" among "highly expected fluctuation patterns that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after that, a variable production of the decorative pattern (a production drawing according to a specific fluctuation pattern, a sound output of BGM reproduction according to a specific fluctuation pattern, etc.) is started, and the production is judged within the execution period of the variable production. An effect (announcement effect, etc.) according to the result of (announcement determination, etc.) is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) of the selected "specific variation pattern" itself.

However, in the "specific variation pattern", regarding the effect content that appears after the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern is the same as the case of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. That is, first, when timing tr40 arrives, regardless of which result is obtained as the announcement effect determination, "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode or silently" (or a non-output state) Here, the state of the suppression is referred to as a "strong suppression mode", and while the "strong suppression mode" appears, timing tr42 (decorative pattern When the timing within the SP reach state when a specific time has passed since the start of the variable production is reached, the reception of the production is permitted regardless of which result is obtained as the judgment of the advance notice production. A rendition (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation acceptance effect that occurs while the "strong suppression mode" is appearing is referred to as a "second suppressed operation acceptance effect".

On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (the timing before the SP reach state develops) comes after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern, it is determined as an advance notice effect. On the condition that a special result is obtained, an operation reception performance (effective period) in which reception of performance is permitted is generated additionally to the pattern performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr51 differs from the case of the operation acceptance effect (non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of "effect (strong suppression mode)", the volume of the "specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound)" can be suppressed under predetermined conditions.

According to such a configuration, even if there is a situation in which the production corresponding to the "specific variation pattern" is being executed, when a special result is not obtained as the production determination (advance notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIG. The production example shown in FIG. 214 appears, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception Operation acceptance effect)” will only occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as a performance determination (notice determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is generated.

In the examples of effects shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the contents of the effects after the timing tr40 has arrived are as described with reference to FIG. 213, so the description is omitted here. In this case, regarding the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first allowable sound may not be the first mode shown in FIGS. 217 to FIG. 219 show related effects of the effect contents shown in FIG. Needless to say, it is appropriately applied to the effect content (strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect)) after the timing tr40 among the effect examples.

And as described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the timing tr51 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variation production of the decorative symbols (the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern) (develops into the SP reach state) When the timing before the start of operation arrives, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which reception of the effect is permitted is generated as a "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)".

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance presentation)" generated at the timing tr51 within the variation presentation corresponding to the specific variation pattern,
・Set a set time (effective period) during which the performance reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the variation pattern is output in an unsuppressed mode, but within the set time (effective period) When the effect reception is made, the "conditional suppression reception effect (Fig. 217 (see (a) and (b))”, and if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timings tr51 to tr52) during which reception of the effect is allowed, As a result, each processing triggered by the reception of the effect (the process of changing the "BGM playback sound" from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode, the after-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect "Non-automatic acceptance mode (see FIGS. 219(a), (b), and (f))" in which the set time (effective period) elapses without any sound, etc.) being executed
It is generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method for outputting the "sound of BGM playback" in a weakly suppressed mode, the volume value for the channel to which the "sound of BGM playback" is assigned is set to a strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume ) is changed to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”), which is lower than “0”).

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (first suppression operation acceptance effect)", unless the effect is accepted by the player's operation, "a specific type of effect sound ( 212 and 216, it is possible to make it appear as if the "unsuppressed reception effect" shown in FIG. 212 and FIG. 216 is occurring. become. That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player first recognizes that it is not a "suppressed reception effect" by changing to "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode". Since it becomes possible to enjoy the game, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by surprise production.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, it is possible to generate "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 217 to 219)" depending on the result of the effect judgment (advance judgment etc.) The variation pattern is set to be selectable only when it is in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone, etc.), and when it is in the special effect state, a "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect ( 212, 216)" can be generated depending on the result of performance judgment (advance judgment, etc.). It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when the "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" appears, the expectation level is higher than when the "non-suppression/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212, Fig. 216)" appears. Combined with the above-described surprise effect elements, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably obtain the above effects, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance presentation)" can occur in both the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state." In the "normal production state", the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 212, Figure 216)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic reception effect (Figure 213, Figure 214)" can occur in sequence, and in the "special effect state", one variation pattern (hitting/losing One variation pattern that is paired with ) in the production corresponding to “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 217 to 219)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception It is desirable that the effects (Figs. 213 and 214)" can occur sequentially.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect", when the set time (effective period) elapses without the effect being accepted, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound ) is output in a weakly restrained manner”, and the subsequent presentation proceeds (Fig. 219). In other words, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" or "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" occurred? Since it is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, the production after that will progress, so it is said that expectations are relatively low. Even when the "operation reception presentation (effective period)" occurs, it is possible to more positively prompt the player to perform an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a case where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 217 to 219)" occurs 212)” is generated, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) for the same period of time. 217 to 219)" or "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" is made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 217 to 219)", as in the case where "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" occurs,
・When the timing tr50, which is slightly before the set time occurs, the output of the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
・The second allowable sound (e.g., message sound) is not output, and only the first allowable sound (e.g., effect sound) is output ・The set time (effective period) is set When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated in the operation acceptance effect, and suggests the remaining time until the set time elapses. Each configuration is also adopted, such as the point that the gauge display is performed respectively, and this also allows for "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 217 to 219)" and "non-suppression / It is made difficult to recognize which of the non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212) is occurring. Therefore, as a display method for the model image and gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. It is desirable that the display images (simulated image, gauge display) be hidden based on the occurrence of reception of the effect. desirable.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 217 to 219)" according to this embodiment, the set time (effective period) has occurred, and the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is output at timings tr51a and tr52a (FIGS. 217(c) and 218(c)). Time (effective period) While this itself is terminated, the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing at which it is output as the first acceptable sound (same as when there is no operation The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 219(c)).

According to such a configuration, even after the performance has been accepted by the player's operation, the conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception 217 to 219” and “non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” can be made difficult to recognize. In other words, while the output state (unsuppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, the state changes to "a state in which the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode". Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made by listening, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained each time the presentation reception is performed.

In addition, even in "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 217 to Figure 219)", if the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timing tr51a, tr51b ), as a post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect, a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) and at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output from the speaker (effect sound) are maintained for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tr52, regardless of which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. On the other hand, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect is received. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted, if the timing tr52 has not passed, neither the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) nor the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) It is required to be set to maintain the output state.

In addition, regarding the acceptable reception sounds and operation-related displays that appear in the "Conditional Suppression/Non-Automatic Reception Effect (Figs. 217 to 219)," alternative examples and modifications to the production example shown in Fig. 212 may be appropriately adopted. is possible, and it is desirable to use the same method for each other.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "first suppression operation reception effect (conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect)" generated at timing tr51 in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern is performed. A process of outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a weakly suppressed mode (a mode with a relatively low degree of suppression) is performed for a predetermined period of time from the reception timing.

According to such a configuration, when the performance reception is made at the timing tr51a relatively early after the set time (effective period) occurs (Fig. 217), the "BGM playback sound" is weakly suppressed (the degree of suppression is low). The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode) to the non-suppression mode also comes relatively early, and as a result, the period during which the "BGM playback sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the "BGM playback sound" A relatively long interval (timings tr53a to tr40) is provided between the period in which is strongly suppressed. On the other hand, when the presentation is accepted at the relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (effective period) has occurred (Fig. 218), the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, there is a comparison between the period during which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is weakly suppressed and the period during which the "sound of BGM playback" is strongly suppressed. Only a relatively short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) is provided.

That is, in this case, the later the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect (the closer it is to timing tr52), the later the “BGM playback sound” is set to the weak suppression mode. The time until the period in which the "BGM reproduction sound" is set to the strong suppression mode starts is shortened. As a result, depending on whether the timing at which the player performs the operation in the first suppression operation reception effect is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode is terminated relatively quickly and continuously. It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or when the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode ends relatively late, the "strong suppression mode" It is possible to make the player feel uneasiness such as "may not appear", so that it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In this production example, the length of time (predetermined constant time) during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is set to the post-operation production (liquid crystal display, production sound). Although it is set to be the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode is set to be equal to or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). It is desirable to make the post-operation effect stand out when the effect reception is made. Furthermore, even if the effect is accepted at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (effective period) of the "first suppression operation acceptance effect (conditional suppression/non-automatic acceptance effect)", the weak suppression mode It is desirable to set the length of time during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in the weakly suppressed mode so that the timing for ending the mode comes before the timing tr40 for starting the strongly suppressed mode. Incidentally, in this production example, the time of the timings tr51a to tr53a and the time of the timings tr51b to tr53b are the same.

As shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern,
・The first suppression operation reception effect (period from timing tr50 to the end of the post-operation effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM playback) with a relatively low degree of suppression (weak suppression mode) ), and a second suppression operation reception effect (the post-operation effect ends at timing tr40) in which a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) period until)
can occur sequentially. As described above, the second restrained operation reception effect is defined as a "variation pattern that is not executed even if the effect mode (type of acceptable reception sound, operation target, etc.) changes depending on the result of the effect determination. In contrast, the first suppression operation reception effect can occur on the condition that a special result has been obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.). ing.

Also, as described above, the first restrained operation reception effect is determined by the effect judgment (advance judgment, etc.) even in the effect according to the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) that does not generate the second restrained operation acceptance effect. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during the symbol fluctuation, only one of the first restrained operation reception effect and the second restrained operation reception effect occurs, and the first restrained operation reception effect and the second restrained operation reception effect 2 In some cases, the suppression operation acceptance effects are generated in sequence.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed by the first restraint operation reception effect during the period from "the timing at which the weak restraint mode is terminated" to "the timing at which the strong restraint mode is started." Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the timing, after the first restraint operation reception effect (weak restraint mode) is completed, the second restraint operation reception effect (strong restraint mode) is further performed. It is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not it occurs, thereby improving the interest in the game. Note that when the first restrained operation reception effect (weak restraint mode) and the second restrained operation reception effect (strong restraint mode) occur in sequence, the second restrained operation reception effect (strong restraint mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (proportion of stopping with a big hit pattern) is higher than when only the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is generated. Further, in the variation pattern for generating the second restrained operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first restrained operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is generated before the second restrained operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, the second restrained operation reception effect is expected in a higher mode than when the first restrained operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode). ) will be executed more frequently.

By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is generated, the degree of suppression is high (second suppressed operation reception effect in strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode). As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the mode is the first suppression operation reception effect. However, even if an attempt is made to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode) when a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed, Actually, it is difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison object. This is particularly the case when the volume value when suppressed does not have a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode. is preferably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the presentation.

In this regard, in the example effects shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first restrained operation reception effect and the second restrained operation reception effect are output when the set time (effective period) during which the reception of these effects is permitted occurs. The first permissible sounds are output (output in the "first mode" in the figure) as the same effect sound for the same time. That is, in this case, even if the first allowable sound is confirmed, it becomes difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode). As a result, it is possible to more preferably maintain the tension in the performance, and to further attract the player to the performance.

However, in reality, if it is impossible to guess whether the player is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect element useful for guessing whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. We are planning to prepare the following in a chronological order.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, when the above-described situation occurs in which the first allowable sounds are output as the same effect sound for the same time (output in the "first mode" in the drawing). Even if there is, based on the first allowable sound, it is possible to guess whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is output for a predetermined time without terminating the output midway even if the effect is accepted while in the output state. On the other hand, the first allowable sound that is output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated is based on the effect reception when the effect is received in the output state. Output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 217 and 218). With such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first allowable sound in both the first restrained operation acceptance effect and the second restrained operation acceptance effect, and the mode is either the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. While increasing the sense of tension in the production by making it difficult to guess, the first permissible sound itself also has a function that helps in guessing whether it is in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Since it is possible to make the guess, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the inability to make the guess.

In addition, the first allowable sound that is output when the second restrained operation reception effect is generated has the first mode and a mode that cannot be output when the first restrained operation reception effect is generated (second mode, third mode, etc.). ) is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first allowable sound is output, the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode may be used even if the presentation reception is not performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state. It becomes possible to easily guess whether or not it is, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained. However, in order to maintain the sense of tension in the production, the output in a mode (second mode, third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first restrained operation acceptance presentation is generated is more important than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to keep the execution rate low.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, the second allowable sound is also output in addition to the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the allowable sound is output, it is also possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first restrained operation acceptance effect and the second restrained operation acceptance effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (the display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) during which reception of the effect is permitted is also limited to the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression. Since a difference is provided between the operation acceptance rendering and the operation-related display, it is possible to guess whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to the fact that it appears with a delay with respect to the acceptable reception sound, there is only a partial difference between the first restrained operation reception effect and the second restrained operation reception effect. Therefore, it is left somewhat difficult to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode, so that the sense of tension in the production is maintained.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the output of the acceptable reception sound and the operation-related display is finished, it is assumed that it is not possible to guess whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is also possible to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the first suppression operation acceptance effect, both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are "executed for a certain period of time from the time the effect is accepted." On the other hand, in the post-operation production corresponding to the second suppression operation reception production, the "production with sound effects" is "performed for a certain period of time from the reception of the production reception", but the "liquid crystal display Effect by” is set to “end when predetermined timing tr44 arrives”. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the second restrained operation reception effect, the time from the end of the effect by the liquid crystal display to the end of the effect by the effect sound depends on the timing when the effect is accepted. becomes variable, and a large deviation occurs, so by confirming such a deviation, it becomes possible to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode .

However, even if the production elements useful for guessing are scattered in chronological order in this way, some players may not notice them, and as a result, they may be in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, the interest in the game will eventually decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound for BGM reproduction is generated based on the reception of the effect within the set time (effective period). is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is activated. A set time (effective period) occurs during this period, and the performance can be accepted. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed by the first suppression operation acceptance effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timings of the activation are different, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the timings.

Moreover, in the first restrained operation reception effect (weak restraint mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the second restrained operation reception effect (strong restraint mode), no operation is detected within the set time (effective period). When the time is reached, the set time has passed without automatic reception of the effect (see FIG. 219). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (effective period), the suppression processing (weak suppression mode) itself is also performed with the acceptance of the presentation for the specific type of presentation sound (for example, the presentation sound for BGM reproduction). Therefore, although there is a cost of not being able to confirm the effect after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that it was in the weak suppression mode instead of the strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of changing the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" to the strong suppression mode ends is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. or earlier than that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" to the weak suppression mode is terminated should be set later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect according to the above effect example, regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) The length of the period in which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 217 and 218). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation acceptance effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect is accepted. , and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

According to such a configuration, the effect is generated in "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", and the game interest can be preferably maintained until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

Further, in the above-described configuration, the first allowable effect is set so that it is difficult to distinguish between the first suppressed operation acceptance effect and the second suppressed operation acceptance effect, which have different execution modes of the post-operation effect. Sounds are output as the same production sound over the same time, and production elements that help distinguish between them are prepared so as to be scattered in chronological order. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed while maintaining the tension in the presentation.

In addition, in the above configuration, the first restrained operation reception effect and the second restrained operation reception effect, which are different in execution mode of the post-operation effect, can be intentionally mixed within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern. Therefore, every time an operation acceptance effect is generated, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension about "when to accept the effect (operation)". In addition, in order to obtain such a function and effect, in addition to a mode in which the first restrained operation reception effect and the second restrained operation reception effect are mixed in the effect according to one variation pattern, the effect according to the one variation pattern It is desirable to make it possible to execute a mode in which only the second restrained operation reception effect (or the first restrained operation reception effect) appears a plurality of times.

In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the effect of the performance of "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", a specific type of performance will be used in the first restrained operation reception performance and the second restrained operation reception performance. The output in the non-suppression mode may be maintained without suppressing the sound (effect sound for BGM reproduction).

In addition, regardless of the timing within the set time (effective period), the effect reception is performed, the display effect (liquid crystal display) after operation in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member ), the length of the period in which the post-operation sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel is unchanged. It is desirable to make it possible to occur at the same time, and not to appear as a symbol production (production pattern) based on the variation pattern.

That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the effect after the operation, it can be estimated that the special result is obtained in the determination of the effect (the degree of expectation is relatively high). Therefore, unlike the production of the variation pattern itself (symbol production) that always occurs regardless of the result of the notice production judgment, it is expected that the game interest will be improved when it is recognized that it has been additionally performed. become. Depending on the timing within the set time (valid period), the effect reception is performed, the display effect (liquid crystal display) after operation on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) Regarding the second suppression operation acceptance effect in which the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is performed in parallel, it may be generated only as the effect (symbol effect) of the variation pattern itself. Alternatively, there may be both a case where the variation pattern itself is produced (symbol production) and a case where a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.).

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode, in which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is output at a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode, is designed so that it can appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first suppression operation reception effect does not occur). can be That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is in the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, the mode is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode without being given an opportunity to operate. Then, within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, the greater the number of times the weak suppression mode appears, including the first suppression operation acceptance effect, the higher the degree of suppression until the symbol variation is stopped ( If the rate at which the second suppression operation reception effect is further executed) is increased, it is possible to further improve the performance through the suppression state of the "effect sound for reproduction of BGM." In addition, when the production is accepted within the set time (effective period) that occurred while the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" was not in the suppression mode, "whether or not the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (Fig. 212 or the mode shown in FIG. 217)" can be further interesting.

Also, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may appear even when an operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation reception effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is strongly suppressed for a predetermined period of time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an opportunity to operate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

217 to 219, when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, the "BGM playback effect sound" is played based on the fact that the effect is accepted within the set time (effective period). It was set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the first restrained operation reception effect is generated, the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is started before the set time occurs, as in the case where the second restrained operation reception effect is generated. may be set to a suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and a set time (effective period) may be generated during which the performance reception is allowed while in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.), the "BGM playback production sound" will be played when the predetermined timing arrives. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) or the non-suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set, the range of performance can be expanded. In the first suppression operation reception effect, the timing at which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect is terminated. It is desirable that they arrive.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and FIGS. The processing to output silently or turn off the output) was made to end at the same time as the end timing of the after-operation effect or at a timing earlier than that, but the end timing of the after-operation effect has arrived. You may make it finish later. Further, in this case, at least as long as the special pattern (decorative pattern) is changing (unless the pattern fluctuation is stopped), even if the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is not returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode. good.

As described above, the acceptable acceptance sound does not have to be generated slightly before the set time (effective period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (effective period).

213 to 215 and FIGS. 217 to 219, the operation reception effect (second restrained operation reception effect) in the strongly suppressed mode shown in FIGS. ) is terminated at a predetermined timing tr44 in the production according to the variation pattern, while the production sound output (production sound) after the operation by the speaker (second production member) is performed when the production is accepted. It was supposed to end when a certain amount of time had passed. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. It may be finished at a predetermined timing in the effect corresponding to the pattern, or the display effect after operation (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) It is also possible to terminate both the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by , respectively, when a certain period of time elapses from the time the effect is received.

In addition, the specific type of production sound (BGM playback production sound) to be suppressed is the timing at which the pattern fluctuation starts or the production is switched within the production according to the fluctuation pattern (for example, the SP reach production is started) timing, etc.) has arrived. On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started at an undefined timing (when the player wants to be operated) within the set time.

The specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 and the specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. It may be a variation pattern. Also, the above-mentioned special effect state may not be the look-ahead effect zone, but may be a effect state when the big hit probability for the big win determination is relatively high.

Also, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of effect sound" in an inaudible state (output with no sound (audible volume is 0) or no output (end of channel assignment)) good.

217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first restrained operation reception effect", the operation button 410 is used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second restrained operation reception effect", see FIGS. 213 and 214. However, as described above, based on the result of the announcement effect determination, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)" )”. Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that the weak suppression mode is not the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the effects have been received in the case of "selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The production after the corresponding operation has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
・A first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and ・When the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving part is moved by the driving force. An operation opportunity can be provided in any one of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes that the operation button 410 is given an opportunity to operate, and the "second operation mode" assumes that the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. The sword ornament 5001 is "a thing that can give the player an opportunity to operate while moving to a specific position". However, one operation means (one operation receiving portion) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", and an operation opportunity may be provided by either of these modes.

And, as also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
・An unsuppressed operation reception effect in which a set time (valid period) occurs to the execution of a post-operation effect while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is output in an unsuppressed manner, and・We have prepared a suppression operation reception effect that outputs a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state.
・The first suppression operation acceptance effect (for example, the above-mentioned “conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect ”), and a second suppression operation reception effect (for example, the above-mentioned “suppression/automatic reception performance”)
are prepared.

However, here, further, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
While the production sound of the specific type is being suppressed in the strong suppression mode (while being output in the suppression mode, being silent, or being in a non-output state), the first operation mode for the operation means (Here, the operation button 410) is provided with a suppressed non-moving acceptance effect, and while the specific type of effect sound is suppressed in a strong suppression mode (output in a suppression mode or silent or in a state of non-output), a controlled movement reception effect is provided in which an operation opportunity in the second operation mode (here, the sword ornament 5001 is drawn) is given to the operation means. By preparing it, the performance when the operation opportunity is given is further improved.

Fig. 220 shows an example of a presentation (restricted movement reception presentation) that appears when "sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target (second operation mode)" in the second suppression operation reception presentation (suppression/automatic reception presentation). It is a time chart showing. Note that an example of the effect (restrained non-moving reception effect) that appears when "the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" in the second suppressed operation reception effect (suppressed/automatic reception effect) is as follows: This is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 217 (the period from timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

As shown in FIG. 220, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect), the second suppression operation reception is also performed when "the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". 213, 214, 214, 213, 213, 213, 213, 214, 214, 213, 213 and 214. 217 to 219), the above-described related effects, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately employed.

However, when the second inhibited operation reception effect (restraint/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, the operation receiving part is moved to a specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs. However, there is a problem as to when the process should be performed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific game state (normal game state or probability variable time-saving game state), as shown in Fig. 220 (c) and (h), Unless the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is strongly suppressed arrives, the process of moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position is not performed. Therefore, for example, when the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is in the non-suppressed mode or the weakly suppressed mode, even if the set time for accepting the effect occurs, there is no opportunity to operate in the second operation mode. is not given, and the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is only given. That is, in this case, as long as the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is not in the strong suppression mode, even if an operation opportunity is given, it will not be in the second operation mode. It is possible to prevent the operator from performing an operation in an operation mode on the wrong side.

On the other hand, when the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), an operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility that the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, when the effect sound of the specific type (the effect sound for BGM reproduction) has changed to the strong suppression mode, the player asks, "Which of the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given the operation opportunity?" , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of operation errors between them.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, by keeping secret whether the first operation mode or the second operation mode is given until just before the operation opportunity is given, To suitably maintain a sense of tension and amusement in a game from reception of performance until the start of performance after operation. More specifically, as shown in 220(c) and 220(h) of the figure, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) occurs arrives, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. We are planning to let Here, when the operation opportunity is provided in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (proportion of the appearance of the jackpot pattern when the pattern fluctuation is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is provided in the first operation mode. The advance notice effect determination is performed so as to become.

However, in this case, for a short time after the set time (effective period) occurs (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed), the reception of the effect itself is permitted. Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length of the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the interest in the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. The time is set to be shorter than the time until the output of the first mode, which has the shortest output time among the (first allowable sounds), is completed. As a result, even if any mode (in addition to the first mode, the above-described second mode, third mode, etc.) is output as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound), the effect reception is performed in the middle of the output state. is made possible (the output can be terminated in the middle), and even if the second operation mode appears, it becomes difficult for the production inconvenience to occur.

Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force is determined as follows: 220(h)). According to such a movement mode, it becomes possible to appeal that efforts are being made to reduce the time substantially reduced as the set time (effective period), and the game by reducing the time. It will be expected that the dissatisfaction of people will be suppressed.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress such dissatisfaction, when the second suppressed operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is generated, the set time (effective period) is set to the unsuppressed Mode operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect) and weak suppression mode operation reception effect (from timing tr50 to post-operation effect) shown in FIG. It is desirable to set a time value longer than the sum of "the time required to move the part from the original position to the specific position". According to such a configuration, when the second restrained operation reception effect (restraint/automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that more than compensates for the substantially reduced time is set. Since a long set time (effective period) is generated, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game. In this case, in order to standardize the program, it is possible to set a set time with the same length even when the second suppressed operation acceptance effect (suppressed/automatic acceptance effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

However, as described above, during the time from timing tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated, the effect is not actually received, and the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced. In view of this, when the second suppressed operation reception effect (suppressed/automatic reception effect) is generated, the set time (effective period) is set to the non-suppressed operation reception effect (from timing tr31 to the post-operation effect shown in FIG. ), and the set time (effective period) of the weakly suppressed mode operation acceptance effect (from timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) shown in FIG. It is more desirable to set a time value longer than the sum of "time" and "time of timings tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated". Also in this case, in order to standardize the program, the set time with the same length should be set even when the second restrained operation reception effect (restraint/automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. is desirable.

Further, as described above, in the situation where the second inhibited operation acceptance effect (suppressed/automatic acceptance effect) is being executed in the second operation mode, if there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, As shown in 220(a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at timing tr42A, and based on the effect reception, the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) (liquid crystal display) and post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are at least executed as the post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from a comparison of FIG. Therefore, there is concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, "the speed at which the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is changed to "moving from the original position to the specific position It is intentionally made slower than the "speed of time", so that it can be maintained as a moving state for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, in exchange for the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) being shortened, the operation receiving section is provided with a movable effect (post-operation effect (Part of)), the game interest can be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 220(h), the "movement production from a specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is performed after the operation in response to the production reception being automatically generated (automatic button function). Although it is designed to start when a predetermined timing arrives during execution of the effect, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the reception of the effect is automatically generated, similar to the post-operation effect.

However, no matter how slow the speed of "moving from the specific position to the original position" is, there is a concern that this alone will not be enough time for the movement effect, and it will be difficult to maintain the game interest. Therefore, in the production example shown in FIG. 220(h), after moving the operation receiving part from a specific position to the original position (or a position in the vicinity thereof), a vibration production of vibrating the operation receiving part is performed. The period from the start of movement from a specific position to the original position (or a position near it) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving part is defined by the "operation receiving part that has not been operated by the player". It is made to function as a movable performance period. As a result, it is possible to suitably realize a movable effect using the "operation receiving part that has not been operated by the player", and as a result of the automatic reception of the effect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) When the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is shortened, it is expected that the effect is preferably maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable presentation by lighting the operation receiving portion while the operation receiving portion is being moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to

Here, regarding the movable presentation period (movement time from the specific position to the original position, vibration time) by the "operation receiving unit not operated by the player", the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. , is preferably terminated before the timing tr44. As a result, the effect sound of the specific type is returned from the strongly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode, and progress (switching of the effect) in the corresponding effect content can be smoothly promoted.

In addition, as a difference from the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression/automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode, the second allowable sound (message sound) is a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" In addition, a message display such as "push" and a simulated image of "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as operation-related displays, respectively. become.

Also, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type of effect sound" is in the weak suppression mode. If the opportunity to operate is given in the first place, it may encourage an operation error when the player misunderstands which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode is present. In this respect, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation acceptance presentation (weak suppression mode) occurs, the operation opportunity is given under the weak suppression mode of the "specific type of presentation sound". Since the weak restraint mode appears based on the fact that the performance reception is performed without giving it, there is a useless sense of tension and expectation that "the opportunity to operate in the second operation mode may be given". It will be possible to provide performance without having to hold it.

It should be noted that, in the above effect example (second operation mode), even if there is an operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, the operation shown in FIG. 220 ( As shown in c), when a predetermined timing (the same timing) within the period during which the post-operation effect is being executed, a vibration effect is performed to vibrate the operation receiving section. According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which the post-operation effect occurs, the vibration effect is performed when the predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode is terminated arrives. , it can be suggested that the strong suppression mode will be terminated soon and a new production progress will appear.

However, if there is an operation to the operation receiving part within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect is received by the operation, so that the effect after the operation is performed. You may make it aim at the further improvement of game interest. That is, in this case, if the operation receiving portion is operated within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer period of time than if the operation receiving portion is not operated within the set time.

Further, in the above example of effect, unless the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is strongly suppressed, the process of moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position is not performed. However, instead of this, if the effect acceptance is permitted when the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is in the non-suppression mode. , or when the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback effect sound) is in the weak suppression mode, the rate at which the operation opportunity in the second operation mode is given (0 or 100) may be increased.

In each of the above-described effects examples (FIGS. 146 to 220), in the operation acceptance effects in which the automatic button function can be activated, the set time (effective period) is the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated. It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the set time (effective period) plus the "time from when the automatic button function is activated until the set time has elapsed". . According to such a configuration, a set time (effective period) having a longer time value, which is more than enough to compensate for the time substantially reduced as the period during which reception of the performance is permitted, is generated. , the amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur during the normal game state,
・ Operation reception effect (implicit reception effect) that is executed as the effect of the variation pattern itself (symbol effect) based on the result of the variation pattern judgment, and ・ A special result has been obtained in the effect judgment (notice judgment, etc.) As a condition, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) that is executed as an effect that is additionally performed to the effect of the variation pattern itself (effect pattern)
is to be prepared at least.

That is, "intrinsic reception effect" is, when a special result is obtained in the variation pattern determination (determination of which variation pattern to execute the symbol effect) based on the result of the big hit determination (a special variation pattern is selected ), it is determined that the performance will be executed in accordance with the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, for the "additional reception effect", even if a "predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect" is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected), the corresponding It is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that the "additional reception effect" is to be generated is obtained in the effect determination (announcement determination, etc.) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, after the production corresponding to the variation pattern is once started, the production is determined rather than the occurrence of the "intrinsic reception production" that is linked to the variation pattern (production pattern) and whose occurrence is confirmed. It is more beneficial for the player to generate an "additional reception effect" that is allowed to occur depending on the result of (announcement determination, etc.), and it can be said to be more important in increasing the interest in the game. Even if the same production content (production pattern) appears as production according to the variation pattern, if "additional reception production" occurs within the production, "additional reception production ” does not occur, the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big hit pattern is higher when the pattern variation is stopped.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the inherent reception effect that can occur in the normal game state, a specific type of effect sound (“BGM playback” effect sound) is suppressed or suppressed. In the case where the production reception is permitted while being output silently or in the non-output state, and in the case where the production sound of a specific type (the production sound of "BGM playback") is output in an unsuppressed mode. There are cases where performance reception is permitted. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur in the normal game state, the reception of the effect is not permitted while it is output in a suppressed mode or in silence, or in a non-output state. Effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is being output in a non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, when the reception of the effect is permitted, by paying attention to whether the effect sound of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state, additional It becomes possible to recognize the possibility of occurrence of the reception performance, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the inherent reception effect that can occur when in the normal game state is such that even if the operation is not detected within the set time during which the reception of the effect is permitted, the operation is performed. When it is executed in an automatic reception mode that can generate a post-effect, and when the operation is not detected within the set time that allows the reception of the effect, the set time is terminated without generating the post-operation effect. There are cases where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effects that can occur in the normal game state are not executed in the automatic reception mode, but are executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the additional reception effect is occurring by paying attention to whether the effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained until the presentation is received.

FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when variation pattern 1 is selected in variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 221, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the production determination performed at the start of the pattern variation (announcement determination according to the variation pattern 1, etc.), the announcement production At least a determination is made whether or not to execute A. As a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A is applied to the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 within the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. It is additionally executed (timings tr61 to tr62), and when it is not determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 within the pattern effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. Only the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is executed.

Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is to be executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect are changed to the effect of the variation pattern 1 itself (symbol production) is additionally executed. Note that "additionally executing" can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer with a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. be. At this time, the advance notice effect A may be displayed in such a manner that all the pattern effects based on the variation pattern 1 are covered so that it is invisible, or only part of the pattern effects based on the variation pattern 1 are covered. The advance notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the ramp effect, the mode of "ramp effect corresponding to the occurrence of the advance notice effect A" is preferentially output over the "ramp effect based on the variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)". In addition, in the case of the effect sound, by assigning the "effect sound according to the notice effect A" to a channel different from the "effect sound based on the variation pattern 1", "Effective sound corresponding to the announcement effect A" is additionally output to the "effect sound".

FIG. 222 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when variation pattern 2 is selected in variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 222, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the production determination (announcement determination according to the variation pattern 2, etc.) performed at the start of the pattern variation, "additional At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the target reception effect. Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this production example is the same as the "predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212". Therefore, as a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the "additional reception effect" is to be executed, the "additional reception effect" is changed to the pattern effect based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212). When the timing tr31 within comes, the symbol effect (effect pattern) will be additionally executed (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect ends), and the effect of executing the "additional reception effect". When it is not determined, even if the timing tr31 in the symbol performance based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, the ``additional reception performance'' does not appear and the symbol performance (performance pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 remains to be executed. Become.

Here, regarding the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. During this, the first allowable sound is output at timing tr31, the set time (effective period) occurs at timing tr32, and the set time ends without the automatic button function being activated at timing tr33. , are as described above with reference to FIG. In other words, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222 does not have a particular disclaimer, "Production content when the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode" shown in FIG. The parts are basically the same, and it is possible to appropriately adopt the above-described related effects, different examples, and modified examples.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this example of effect, as shown in FIG. It is described as Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. ``Post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)'' and ``Post-operation effect sound output by the speaker (second effect member) (effect sound)'' are used as post-operation effects. At least it will occur, but for the post-operation production,
・"Post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" ends at a predetermined timing that comes after timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
・The “post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)” is executed in such a manner that it ends when a predetermined period of time elapses from the timing at which the effect is received. It will happen.

FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the contents of effects that appear when variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

As shown in FIG. 223, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, which result is obtained in the production determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the pattern variation. irrespective of whether or not it is changed, at the timing tr40 in the pattern effect based on the variation pattern 3, the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is changed to the above-described "strong suppression mode", and the "strong suppression mode" is performed. is appearing at timing tr41, the "implicit reception effect" is generated as the pattern effect based on the variation pattern 3 (from timing tr41 until the post-operation effect ends).

Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this production example is the same as "specific variation patterns shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 or FIGS. 217 to 220, etc.". Therefore, for the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) shown in FIG. output state or non-audible state such as non-output state), when the timing tr41 arrives, the first allowable sound is output, the set time (effective period) occurs at the timing tr42, and the set time When the "timing tr42A" before the timing tr43, which has elapsed, arrives without reception of the effect, the above-described automatic button function is activated. 217 to 220”, etc., so the explanation is omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (implicit reception effect) shown in FIG. 215, 217 to 220, etc.) can also be adopted as appropriate.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in the normal game state, during the period in which the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is strongly suppressed, the pattern effect based on the variation pattern is "implicit acceptance". Although "effect" may occur, "additional reception effect" that is additionally executed to the pattern effect based on the variation pattern does not occur. ” is in the non-suppressed mode, there are cases where “intrinsic reception effect”, which is a pattern effect based on the variation pattern, may occur, and additionally to the pattern effect based on the variation pattern In some cases, an "additional reception effect" to be executed may occur.

That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern is strongly suppressed, the possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" is eliminated. As a result, it is possible to generate a set time (effective period) during which performance reception is permitted while an environment is formed in which the operation reception performance is executed in which mode the performance is concentrated. . On the other hand, when the operation acceptance effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to recognize that the additional reception effect may occur. As a result, it is expected that the interest in gaming will be maintained.

In addition, in order to preferably obtain such effects, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" appear in separate variation patterns 2 and 3, etc., one variation pattern (for example, It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" can appear in sequence even within the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3)). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" occurs before the "intrinsic reception effect".

More preferably, in the production corresponding to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern), the production sound of "BGM playback" is in a non-suppressed mode, and the "additional reception production" and the "implicit reception production ' can appear successively, and while the effect sound of 'BGM reproduction' is strongly suppressed, the 'intrinsic reception effect' can further appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp which of the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , a case where it is difficult to grasp which of the "additional reception effect" and the "intrinsic reception effect" is occurring (non-suppression mode) appears, and the suppression mode for the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" appears. Through this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, when an operation reception effect (implicit reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is strongly suppressed in the pattern effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the inherent reception effect It is desirable that the "additional reception performance" does not occur during the period from the end of the reception performance to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is strongly suppressed, there is a possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect". Not only is it eliminated, but even the possibility of an "additional reception effect" appearing until the pattern change is stopped is eliminated, so that an "additional reception effect" will occur. By not giving any sense of expectation to the player, it is necessary to decide in which mode (acceptance acceptable sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation presentation, etc.) the generated "intrinsic reception effect" will be executed. be able to concentrate.

Further, when the "additional reception effect" occurs, the "implicit reception effect (both non-suppressed mode and strongly suppressed mode)" occurs after the "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the rate at which is executed with a high degree of expectation (acceptance allowable sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation presentation, etc.).

Also, as described above, when the "BGM playback" effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is always generated during the period of the strong suppression mode. may In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, "the strong suppression mode is set, but the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. "Variation patterns that do not occur" are not included, and "variation patterns that generate an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when it is in the strong suppression mode" are included. . Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is strongly suppressed, the period in which the effect is strongly suppressed may end without the operation reception effect (implicit reception effect) occurring. can be In this case, among the plurality of variation patterns that are candidates for selection in the variation pattern determination, "the strong suppression mode is set, but the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. "Variation patterns that do not occur" and "Variation patterns that generate an operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set" are included respectively. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (implicit reception effect) is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the "strong suppression effect" is generated. Even if the player does not notice that it is in the suppression mode, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of occurrence of the "additional reception performance" is eliminated based on the following performance elements.

That is, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is in the "additional reception effect" Even if the effect sound that can be output is output for the same time (output in the "first mode" in the figure), based on the first allowable sound, instead of the "additional reception effect", " It is made possible to recognize that "inherent reception performance" is occurring. More specifically, the first allowable sound (see FIG. 222) that is output when the "additional reception effect" is generated is such that even if the effect is received while in the output state, the output is terminated halfway through. While the production sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", it is output when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs. The first allowable sound (see FIG. 223) to be produced is such that, if an effect is accepted while in the output state, the output is terminated halfway based on the effect acceptance.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "intrinsic reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second allowable sound is also output, checking whether or not the second allowable sound is output eliminates the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be prepared.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. , When the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" (with a message display), and when the "additional reception effect" occurs It is made different depending on the case (no message display), and it is possible to recognize that the possibility of occurrence of "additional reception effect" is also eliminated by this.

In addition, in the "implicit reception effect" that occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", the above-mentioned automatic button function can be activated, In the "additional reception effect", the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also eliminates the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect element related to the "suppression mode" Since a different aspect than when the "additional reception effect" is occurring in the element appears, it is relatively clear that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring is eliminated It is possible to easily recognize it, and it becomes possible to encourage concentration on the "implicit reception effect".

On the other hand, when the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode”, there are common points with the “additional reception effect” and various effect elements. By making it difficult to recognize which situation is occurring, "intrinsic reception effect" or "additional reception effect", "additional reception effect" occurs. We are trying to provide performance that makes you aware of the possibility of being there.

FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the content of the effect that appears when the "intrinsic reception effect" as the pattern effect based on the variation pattern occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is set to the "unsuppressed mode". is. It should be noted that the "implicit reception effect" shown in FIG. 224 corresponds to the variation pattern when a variation pattern different from the "variation pattern that can generate the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223" is selected. It may be generated as a pattern effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception presentation shown in FIGS. .

As shown in FIG. 224, the "intrinsic reception effect" that occurs in the "non-suppressed mode" is also the "intrinsic reception performance" that occurs in the "strongly suppressed mode" shown in FIG. Similar to "reception effect", even if any result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination), it always occurs when the predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the pattern effect arrives. It is a thing.

However, the first allowable sound (first mode) output when the "implicit reception effect" shown in FIG. As with the sound (first mode), even if an effect is accepted while in the output state, the output is not terminated halfway and is output over a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish between the "intrinsic reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" based on this. .

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the second allowable sound is not output together with the output of the first allowable sound (first mode). It is the same as "additional reception performance".

In addition, in the "implicit reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, even as an operation-related display (display prompting an operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) during which reception of the effect is permitted, the operation means to be operated is Only a simulated image and a gauge indication suggesting the remaining time are displayed, and no message display is displayed. It's becoming

In addition, in the "intrinsic reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the object to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the "operation button 410", and the "sword ornament 5001" is not the object to be operated. This point is also the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG.

In addition, in the "implicit reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, if the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period), the automatic button function described above is not activated, and the effect after the operation is performed. A timing tr73 is reached at which the set time (effective period) has elapsed without occurrence, and in this respect as well, it is the same as the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG.

In this way, when the "intrinsic reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "unsuppressed mode", the effect sound of "BGM playback" is switched to the "strongly suppressed mode". Unlike the case where the “intrinsic reception effect” occurs during You will be able to make yourself aware of your sexuality.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "unsuppressed mode", "inherent reception effect (inherent reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated) is generated, there are cases where the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and cases where the set time occurs without outputting the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself. . On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "unsuppressed mode", the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set time is not generated, and the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is always output.

According to such a configuration, when the performance reception is permitted while the performance sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "unsuppressed mode", when the reception permission sound is output, the "implicit reception performance" is generated. and "additional reception effect", it is difficult to recognize which is occurring, but when the acceptable reception sound is not output, the "intrinsic reception effect" is played instead of the "additional reception effect". Be able to recognize what is happening. It should be noted that whether or not the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output when the “inherent reception effect” is generated while the effect sound of “BGM playback” is in the “unsuppressed mode” is determined. , It is desirable that it is determined according to the type of variation pattern instead of the performance determination. An "implicit reception effect" in an unsuppressed mode in which a reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and an "implicit reception effect" in an unsuppressed mode in which the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. may be executed sequentially within the same symbol effect (for example, symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern).

Further, according to the above configuration, when an operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, and when the reception permission sound (first permission sound) is output, the "implicit reception effect" and the "additional reception effect" are output. On the other hand, when the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is not output, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is the "implicit reception effect". become.

As described above, in the "additional reception effect", the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the effect determination (advance determination). It may be configured such that when the "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "unsuppressed mode" (for example, the "specified mode"). However, with regard to the different mode, it is desirable that the rate of occurrence of the first permissible sound is lower than that of the output in the first mode.

Regarding the "implicit reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, another example or modified example of the operation reception effect shown in FIG.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated as if the production determination is performed while the pattern production is being performed. is performed at the start of symbol variation.

212 to 224, regarding the mode of the post-operation effect in response to the reception of the effect, the case where the big win is obtained in the big win judgment and the case where the big win is lost in the big win judgment. and may be different. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, the production examples shown in FIGS. A post-operation effect may be performed in a manner different from the effect example shown in 224 .

As described above, the performance control in the peripheral control board 1510 has conventionally been realized by executing a combination of a program for individually controlling various performance devices, a program for linking a plurality of performance devices, and the like. These programs were created by highly skilled programmers, and were written in program code representing the operation details and control procedures of the production device for each notice content in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern. In the liquid crystal drawing, individual effect drawing data is called in the frame in which the effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, pattern, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

However, recent game machines are required to execute a wide variety of effects in order to improve the performance of the hardware and enhance the interest of the game machines, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, individual programmers are required to have advanced skills, and development man-hours have increased, making it difficult to secure the necessary number of personnel (programmers) both qualitatively and quantitatively. Furthermore, the increase in the total amount of program code of the effect control program increases the number of man-hours required for testing for the purpose of checking the operation of the game machine and improving the quality.

Therefore, as described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) may be realized by program code. Instead, the program data for the game machine is output by a tool that creates liquid crystal drawing effects, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, thereby shortening the development period and improving quality. I am trying to

More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks, each of which indicates the content of the effect. Each block is attached with a flag (availability information) indicating whether or not an effect based on the block is executable. This flag (usability information) is, for example, stored as rewritable information on the RAM.

In the scenario data, for example, blocks corresponding to the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are combined in time series. That is, when the starting condition for starting the pattern variation is established, first, the effect determination is performed as to which type of effect is to be generated among those effects, and when the result is obtained, the result is obtained. Based on the obtained result, the flag (usability information) of the block corresponding to the effect type for which the judgment result indicating that it should be executed is obtained is set to the ON state, and the judgment result that it should be executed is obtained. The flags (usability information) of the blocks corresponding to the performance types that were not displayed are maintained in the OFF state. As a result, after the pattern variation (variation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (per unit time (1 frame)) to correspond to the blocks set to the ON state. Only the type of production is selectively executed.

Here, as for the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of variation pattern, or may be prepared independently of the variation pattern. When different data are prepared for each type of variation pattern, only blocks corresponding to the types of effects that may occur separately for each variation pattern are configured as scenario data combined in chronological order. Of these blocks, only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target is turned on. On the other hand, when prepared as data commonly prepared for each variation pattern, blocks corresponding to all effect types (numbers corresponding to blocks) are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure etc. Then, it may be realized by operating only the flag (usability information) of the block determined to be the object of execution among those blocks to the ON state. In addition, the scenario data prepared independently of the variation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing that is read while processing (analyzing) the block (see " Scenario data related to post-operation production, etc.), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of variation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of variation pattern will be prepared respectively, and corresponding to the type of variation pattern Scenario data that is not used can be used in common for a plurality of types of variation patterns, so that the processing load and storage capacity can be favorably suppressed.

However, due to the configuration of the game machine, it is necessary to display or hide effects related to the lottery, replace effects and patterns, and interactive effects in response to external input by the player. It is impossible to realize all productions alone.

Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, processing identification information (effect SW) for calling a program that executes a performance at a predetermined timing or executes a predetermined control is stored in a block or in a block can be set (incorporated) in the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data associated with. Here, the process identification information (effect SW) is prepared for the number of types of programs to be called, and each type is set to an ON state or an OFF state. Alternatively, process identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an ON state may be prepared. As a result, when processing identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc., Then, the process having the content of the call is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or the number in the table storing the number of the program function to be called. may be

Peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) embedded process identification information while executing and analyzing scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc. dynamically call (call back). Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than liquid crystal effects (e.g. sound output, lighting of lamps, movement of characters, etc.), and flags. It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting and updating data in a predetermined area. In this way, by calling a program function according to the process identification information, it is possible to display or hide drawings by a plurality of blocks, replace effects and patterns, and implement interactive effects in response to external input by the player.

The program function called by the callback is pre-installed in the peripheral control unit 1530, and does not need to be newly created for each game machine model. Therefore, even designers and project creators who do not have advanced knowledge of programs can simply design various presentation contents, and otherwise set process identification information that calls predefined program functions. By doing so, it is possible to easily realize this even with complicated presentation specifications. In addition, by using the production creation tool to create production blocks (liquid crystal production scheduler data) for each production component, it is possible to significantly shorten the development period. It is possible to simplify the test process and greatly reduce the time required for the test by performing the test using the flag (usability information) and process identification information without performing the test.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a game control means (main control means) that can determine a big win and provide a privilege based on the predetermined determination result (winning the big win) is obtained. Substrate 1310), production control means (peripheral control unit 1511) capable of executing processing related to various effects based on the variation pattern according to the determination, and image data in the display area based on the processing performed by the production control means Equipped with image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) for output, the effect control means reads time-series image information (the above-mentioned scenario data and blocks, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.), and the time-series image information image information processing means capable of executing processing for displaying an image based on the above.

Further, in the time-series image information according to this embodiment (the above-mentioned scenario data, blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.), at least part of it may include process identification information. The information processing means can acquire process identification information from time-series image information and call a process corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while image processing is performed for each unit of time (for example, one frame), processing related to effects other than images (lamps, sounds, movable bodies, etc.) can be performed based on the schedule for image display. Since it is possible to start the performance with different performance elements, it is possible to prevent the start timing from being shifted between the performance elements when realizing one performance by cooperating with different performance elements. Become.

In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern. Allows intervals to be included. In such a configuration, when the time-series image information itself, which is data specifying the "processing for displaying an image" in time series, includes the process identification information, which is data specifying to read out the process. , and the time-series image information read when a specific variation pattern is executed as a variation pattern can include a section in which process identification information is acquired for each unit time, so fine timing Even when it is necessary to perform the effect processing in , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation from the effect by the display image.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect reception is performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or silently, or in a non-output state. A permissible special operation reception effect is made executable. In this respect, as will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-allowable operation-related display that is performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs, and the effect reception is permitted with the special operation reception effect. The permitted operation-related display performed when the player is in the state of being displayed is based on mutually different time-series image information (the above-described scenario data and blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state. will be expected to concentrate on However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance will be poor due to the suppression of the specific type of performance sound. In this regard, in the above configuration, the pre-allowed operation-related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the during-allowed operation-related display that is performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect Since the images are displayed on the basis of time-series image information different from each other, it is possible to realize a variety of performances in terms of the display performance, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the operation is not detected within the period during which the reception of the effect is allowed, the special operation reception effect that can generate the effect after the operation is executed. It is possible. In this respect, as will also be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-allowable operation-related display that is performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs, and the effect reception is permitted with the special operation reception effect. The permitted operation-related display performed when the player is in the state of being displayed is based on mutually different time-series image information (the above-described scenario data and blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc.). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, even if the operation is not detected within the period during which reception of the effect is permitted, the post-operation effect can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player cannot perform an operation and, as a result, cannot confirm the effect after the operation. Moreover, in the above configuration, the before-allowable operation-related display that is performed when the special operation reception effect is generated, and the during-allowable operation-related display that is performed when the effect reception is permitted in the special operation reception effect, Since the images are displayed based on the time-series image information different from each other, it is possible to realize a variety of performances in terms of the display performance, thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment reads information corresponding to the image data to be displayed from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the block, and controls the read information for the liquid crystal display control. It is possible to output to the unit 1512 . Regarding this point, as will be described later, as blocks, there are type 1 blocks that are read after a wait time (wait processing period) required until the arrival of a predetermined timing, and type 1 blocks that are read without a wait time (wait processing period). A second type block is prepared.

More specifically, the type 1 block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the timing at which the availability information is set to ON at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes. It is possible to configure it so that it is read out later. For the type 2 block, for example, within the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the type 1 block, the usability information corresponding to the type 2 block is set to the ON state, it is possible to read out without waiting time (wait processing period).

That is, in this case, the type 2 block is no longer dependent on the setting value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data shared between multiple timings and multiple variation patterns. Therefore, it is expected that the reduction of the processing load and the memory capacity will be promoted, and it will be possible to facilitate designing and changing the performance.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect scheduler data) out of the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) The second time-series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read while the process based on the scheduler data) is being executed, and the second time-series image information is read. Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is put into an execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information, which is in the middle of execution. That is, in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of halfway ending the processing based on the first time-series image information, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity will be reduced.

Such technical features will be described below. Before describing the technical features, the "blocks" according to this embodiment will be described again. When the image displayed in is composed of "multiple image elements (multiple layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (layers), and in order to display the image elements 1512) for reading information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving or still image) to be output by the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

Here, the processing for reading out the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (the processing in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the "peripheral control unit regular processing (FIG. 95)" started for each frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the "block", and if there is such information, it is read out, and each Based on the information read for each frame, a drawing list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512). As a result, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads the image data based on the drawing list, creates a display image, and then outputs it to the display area. performance will be realized.

Here, the "block" itself may be configured as a data structure that designates "information (image number) corresponding to image data" for each unit time. Since it has the function of "effect scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" separately from the "block", and it is possible to omit this.

However, the "block" according to this explanatory example identifies the type of the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", and is currently displayed based on the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" associated with the "block". It is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and if there is such information, it is read and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512). A plurality of "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" may be associated with one "block". In this case, the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" are executed in a predetermined order, Alternatively, one of the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is selectively executed.

In addition, in the "block" according to this explanatory example, the "liquid crystal effect In addition to "scheduler data", information about which to execute as "processing related to lamp emission", information about which to execute as "processing related to movable body operation", and information regarding which to execute as "processing related to sound output" It also includes information on whether to execute. That is, in this case, if a "block" for realizing a specific advance notice effect is read out, "image processing in the effect display device 1600" related to the specific notice effect, and " Since the "process related to lamp emission", "process related to movable body operation", and "process related to sound output" are read out and executed respectively, different production elements (images, lamps, movable bodies, sound ) in cooperation with each other to realize one performance (specific advance notice performance), it is possible to suppress the shift of the start time between the performance elements.

As described above, a "block" constitutes one piece of scenario data together with other blocks or by itself. Only is selectively executed (analyzed), so that the production is executed in a mode according to the result of the production determination.

However, with regard to scenario data and blocks, it is sufficient if they have a relationship such as ``scenario data can be configured as a combination of multiple blocks that each indicate the content of the effect''. The detailed realization method, including the provision of "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", is not limited.

FIG. 225 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects using "scenario data" and "blocks" when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the big hit determination. It is a time chart. In addition, in FIG. 225, "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is described as "animation list", but these have the same meaning.

As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this illustrative example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. Blocks (design block A, design block B, design block C, design block D) are combined in time series. However, in this embodiment, scenario data, such as layer 1 and layer 5 scenario data, is also included, which is prepared as a block showing the details of the effect.

In addition, as will be described later, the scenario data related to this explanatory example also includes "what is configured so that any one of a plurality of associated blocks can be selectively executed". , in this case, only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected block out of the multiple blocks is turned on, and the unavailability information corresponding to the other blocks remains off, thereby enabling the use of multiple blocks. Any one of them can be selectively executed. Alternatively, the block according to this example of explanation also includes "configured to be able to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data", In this case, only the unavailability information corresponding to the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data selected from among the plurality of liquid crystal presentation scheduler data is operated to the ON state, and the unavailability information corresponding to the other liquid crystal presentation scheduler data remains in the OFF state. By doing so, any one of a plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executable.

Now, assuming that the starting condition for symbol variation (holding digestion) is met, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information on the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310 . The information acquired in this way also includes information about variation patterns, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads out scenario data corresponding to the information (variation patterns) and associates them with the scenario data as execution target candidates. Effect determination is performed as to which block (effect) is to be executed among a plurality of blocks (blocks corresponding to advance notice effect, etc.). Then, among a plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for blocks (effects) that have been determined to be executed, the usability information thereof is operated (set) to an ON state and executed. For blocks (effects) for which the effect determination to the effect is not made, the availability information thereof remains in the OFF state.

In addition, regarding the availability information associated with each block (effect), it should be operated (set) to the off state when starting the pattern effect (variable effect by decorative pattern), such as when reading the scenario data. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read out in this way, the above-described processing is performed as to which block's usability information is to be operated (set) to the ON state.

Here, regarding the "blocks" for which the availability information is operated (set) to be ON when starting the pattern presentation, whether the pattern presentation is started and immediately executed (analyzed) based on the scenario data, or whether the scenario It is executed (analyzed) following another block (effect) started based on the data, or executed (analyzed) after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) for scenario data and blocks ( analysis). However, the blocks (effects) include "things that may be executed at multiple timings within one variation pattern" and "things that may be executed with multiple variation patterns". That is, when starting the symbol effect, if the use availability information of all blocks to be executed within the variation is operated (set) to the ON state, "Even if the effect mode in which the same content appears , prepare scenario data (or blocks) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set just because the execution timing is different." That is, in this case, different data is prepared in spite of the same effect content, and the effect is executed based on the data, which may adversely affect the processing load and memory capacity.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always executed, but when the symbol effect is executed, the specific block (specific effect ) is not operated (set) to ON state, and it is possible to start the pattern production while it is OFF state. As such a specific block (specific effect), in FIG. will be described later. Of these, the "post-operation block E" is executed as an effect (a effect in which the effect content dedicated to the big win is prepared) that indicates whether the player has won or lost the big win.

In addition, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, even if a block (effect) for which a result of execution is obtained as a result of the effect determination, this is executed in another variation pattern or at another timing. If there is a possibility that the symbol performance is executed, the usage propriety information is not operated (set) to the ON state, and the symbol performance can be started in the OFF state. Such blocks include "operation waiting block A" and "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" in FIG. 225, but these blocks will also be described later.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that the starting condition is met at timing ts1. Therefore, at the timing ts1, scenario data predetermined for each layer are read in correspondence with the type of variation pattern. Next, a rendering decision is made as to which of the blocks associated with the scenario data read out in this way and the usability information attached to the liquid crystal rendering scheduler data should be operated (set) to the ON state. Then, an operation (setting) is performed on the usability information based on the result of the effect determination. The scenario data are executed (analyzed) for each layer under the operation (setting) for the usability information in this way, so that the performance progresses in a mode according to the result of the performance determination.

However, instead of this, before the scenario data predetermined for each layer corresponding to the type of the variation pattern is read out, the effect determination corresponding to the type of the variation pattern may be performed. good. That is, in this case, the blocks associated with the read scenario data and the usability information attached to the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data are checked as a result of the presentation determination executed before reading the scenario data. Each will be operated based on

Here, in the "layer 1" among the plurality of layers, the "background image" displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not being executed (the symbol is displayed in a stopped state and the game is not being executed) scenario data block (normal background block). Therefore, in "Layer 1", the timing ts1 does not trigger the reading of a new block, and the block (normal background block) already in the execution state continues to be executed ( analysis).

More specifically, in the normal background block, "at what timing" "which image data" should be output as "background image data" stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512? is associated with "normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" which is information (time-series image information). That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" for each unit time (one frame), and as a result, "image data for the background image (animation or Each time information corresponding to "still image" is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 . At this time, information obtained from other frames may be combined into one piece of information (drawing list) and transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 as the drawing list. As a result, the effect display device 1600 displays the background depiction (normal background) according to the schedule defined in the "normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". Regarding the blocks and scenario data associated with this "normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data", the timing at which the power-on processing is completed and the corresponding effect state (normal effect state, high probability effect state, special effect mode, etc.) ), and set as time-series image information in which background images (background moving images) of the same content are loop-displayed at predetermined time intervals. In addition, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 does not create one piece of information (drawing list) together with information obtained from other frames, and displays information corresponding to "image data for background image (moving image or still image)". You may make it transmit to. In short, information corresponding to "image data for background image (moving image or still image)" may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any form.

In addition, the normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is displayed on "Layer 3" based on the "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" described later. When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on "Layer 3" is preferentially displayed so that it is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. However, as internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on "Layer 3", "Scheduler data for liquid crystal effect for normal background" on "Layer 1" The processing related to the normal background image based on is continuously executed, and it will not be put into a non-execution state according to the processing status of the SP background image on "Layer 3" It's becoming Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, the normal background is displayed again in the period X after the end of the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the time of SP reach, and thus the normal background is displayed. A "symbol block D" for displaying a stop symbol is executed. As a result, it becomes possible to easily recognize in which performance state the winning is made when the big winning pattern appears, and it is possible to favorably promote the understanding of the game.

On the other hand, "Layer 2" corresponds to a block of scenario data (symbol block) regarding "effect pattern (symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600)". In the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 225, since it develops to the SP ready-to-win effect, the "layer 2" scenario data is associated with the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for pre-reach change". "Symbol block B" that associates "symbol block A" with "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal reach fluctuation" and "symbol block B" that associates "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach change" Block C" and "symbol block D" associated with "stop symbol liquid crystal effect scheduler data" are determined to be sequentially executed (analyzed).

However, in recent years, during the period when the SP reach background is displayed, the "effect pattern" is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600, and furthermore, "after the SP reach background is displayed, the normal background It is returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again." That is, in this case, it is feared that a gap may occur when some kind of abnormality occurs, simply by executing (analyzing) the display schedule for the "effect pattern" and the display schedule for the "SP reach background" for each layer. Therefore, the "symbol block C" associated with the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation" may be executed based on the display schedule for the "SP reach background". In this case, the processing relating to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the performance symbols.

For example, at a predetermined timing in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" corresponding to the "block for SP reach background" to be described later, to call the "process for turning on the availability information of the symbol block C". By attaching the process identification information, it is possible to execute the "symbol block C" and the "symbol block D" based on the display schedule related to the "SP reach background". In this case, as for "symbol block C" and "symbol block D", the availability information of "symbol block C" and "symbol block D" is kept off when the symbol effect is started. ” and “symbol block B”, and are configured as separate scenario data.

Also, in the "layer 3", it corresponds to the scenario data blocks (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) regarding the "background image after the start of the SP reach effect". In this respect, the ``background image after the start of the SP ready-to-win effect'' should not be displayed at the time when the pattern effect is started, but should be started from the middle timing of the pattern effect. Therefore, in the "Layer 3" scenario data, a wait time (wait processing period) that functions to prevent the execution of the block of "the background image after the start of the SP reach effect" is set until the corresponding timing arrives. there is As a result, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" are sequentially executed (analyzed) after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has elapsed since the start of the pattern production. Since the information can be read for each frame, the background image of the SP ready-to-win effect appears on the effect display device 1600 .

In other words, in this case, the blocks are type 1 blocks (such as blocks corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225) that are read after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, Type 2 blocks (such as blocks corresponding to layers 1, 2, and 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225) that are read without a wait time (wait processing period) are included. Type 2 blocks are no longer dependent on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as common data for all performance timings, thus promoting reduction of processing load and memory capacity. In addition to being expected, it will be possible to facilitate the production design and production change.

In this regard, in the SP reach effect, after starting the display effect of the same content regardless of whether the big win is successful or not, the effect content for the big win (for example, the effect content for the character to win) and the effect for losing (for example, the character is defeated, etc.), it is often configured to suggest the judgment result of the big hit. At this time, although the same display effect is executed until the middle stage of the SP reach effect regardless of whether the big win is successful or not, they are different blocks (blocks for big wins, blocks for losing). ) or image data may adversely affect the processing load and memory capacity.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between the time of the big win and the time of the loss, and the Blocks corresponding to different image data (blocks for the background of the ending of the SP) are executed sequentially. This makes it possible to execute the SP ready-to-win effect while suppressing the processing load and memory capacity.

By the way, in the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, the "SP reach background block" is read out after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Then, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is read. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data", there is a section where the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (1 frame). It is set, so that the effect reception period (effective period) is generated by each frame management of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data instead of time management by a timer or the like.

For example, in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" shown in FIG. ), the processing identification information of “X1” is attached so as to line up for each frame from the timing ts31 immediately after the processing. Each time the process identification information of "X1" is read out, the following "process X1" is read out and executed.
Processing X1. Processing for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block C" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such process identification information (here, "X1") is attached for each unit time is the "effect reception period during which the effect can be received by operation ( In the "process X1", when the rendering is determined, the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on. to be operated (set). As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read for each unit time for the corresponding time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal display scheduler" associated with the "post-operation block C" is read out. "data C" is executed (analyzed) every unit time, and "processing related to lamp emission" and "processing related to movable body operation" associated with the "post-operation block C" , and the “processing relating to sound output” are started, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” can be generated.

It should be noted that even in the next frame after each process associated with the "post-operation block C" is started to be executed, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" corresponding to the above "SP reach background block" Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when processing identification information (here, "X1") is attached to each unit time, when the effect reception is made in the middle of the section (effect reception period), even in the next frame, "SP reach background The process identification information (here, "X1") is read out from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", and the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "process X1" also includes a determination process as to whether each process associated with the "post-operation block C" has started to be executed. When it is determined that the execution is started, the "processing X1" is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, "X1") are lined up from timing ts31, but the second process identification information (here, "X1") is read out. In the "process X1", an effect is received, and accordingly, the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data C" associated with the "post-operation block C" in the "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). Assuming the case. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third and fourth processing identification information (here, "X1") filled in in the figure, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is read every unit time. However, each time it is read in this way, in the above "processing X1" corresponding to the processing identification information (here, "X1"), a processing such as "Since the post-operation effect has been executed, the processing X1 is terminated" is executed. By doing so, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the "process X1" (it is determined not to execute the post-operation effect), the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is used. The process X1 is terminated while the availability information remains in the OFF state. Then, for each unit time (1 frame), "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler The process identification information (here, "X1") is read out from the "data", and the corresponding "process X1" is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the section ends with the fourth process identification information (here, "X1"), so the fourth process identification information is read out and When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the effect after that is progressed without executing the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

According to such a configuration, even after executing the post-operation effect (even after the effect determination is made within the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), the "SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading out the "process X1 that can generate the post-operation effect" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is obtained. However, by analyzing such information, it is possible to effectively function as a performance reception period (effective period), so that it is possible to facilitate the design of the performance and standardize it. Become.

It should be noted that FIG. 225 only shows such processing as a concept, and in reality, the processing identification information is not acquired over only four frames. If it is to function as an effect reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the effect reception period that occurs at other timings. Further, as described above, such process identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data, or the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data and the block may be provided as one piece of data. good.

Moreover, in the "SP ready-to-win background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information (here, "1") related to the operation effect is attached even at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of "1" does not read "the process for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect", but the following "process 1" is read and executed. It's becoming
Processing 1. A premonitory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the ``effect reception period (effective period) during which the effect can be received by operation'' will soon occur, and a state in which the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the usability information attached to the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D" for performing the operation waiting effect (the above-mentioned model image, gauge display, etc.) that prompts the operation.

According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data D)" separately from "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data for SP reach background". However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". become. That is, in this case, the execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started at any timing in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" or at a plurality of timings, or the "liquid crystal for SP reach background Since it is easy to start executing the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" in the variation pattern different from the effect scheduler data", the effect design is simplified and shared. can be preferably achieved.

Here, when the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D" corresponding to the "appearing EF & operation waiting block D" is read out. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to an indication effect (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that the effect receiving period (effective period) in which the effect can be made will soon occur is obtained.

However, in the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data", the effect acceptance period is occurring from the middle of it, and the operation waiting effect (the above-mentioned model image and gauge display, etc.) is acquired, and the same process identification information is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) in this interval. It's becoming

That is, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for waiting for operation" executed (analyzed) from timing ts41, "Y3" is displayed every frame from timing ts42 separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. are attached so as to line up. Each time the process identification information of "Y3" is read out, the following "process Y3" is read out and executed.
Process Y3. Processing for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block D" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such process identification information (here, "Y3") is attached for each unit time is defined as the "effect reception period during which the effect can be received by operation (effective period )”. Moreover, in the "process Y3", when the effect is determined, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" that is the basis for reading out the "process Y3" is displayed. The availability information of the "post-operation block D" associated with the same "layer 6" is operated (set) to the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "post-operation block D" is read out, various processes including the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" are executed. As a result, the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block D" is generated. Of course, the newly read "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" that was in the middle of execution. In place of the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)", it will be in the execution state at "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal)" which is no longer necessary to be read by simply reading the "post-operation block D" is eliminated due to the effect determination. Effect scheduler data D)” and further process identification information of 'Y3' for reading 'process Y3' can be substantially invalidated (made to be in a state where effect reception is not permitted). , it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for terminating these, so that it is possible to favorably achieve simplification and commonality of performance design. In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is read from the second process identification information (here, "Y3") in "appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)". An effect is received in the "process Y3", and thereby the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" associated with the "post-operation block D" on the same "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). It is assumed that Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "line part" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" is a section erased by overwriting (substantially invalidated section).

That is, it is also possible to attach the processing identification information of "Y3" to the side of the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)" in the same way as the effect acceptance period generated from timing ts31. However, "appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D )” side, it can be said that it is possible to achieve such excellent effects.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, during the effect acceptance period that occurs from timing ts42, the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect is "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for waiting for operation ( In addition to the process identification information of the above "Y3" included in "appearance EF & operation waiting block D)",
・The processing identification information of "Y2" included in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)" is to be prepared.

That is, as described above, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is the same as the "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)". , so if the process identification information of "Y3" is added to this, when "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal presentation scheduler data)" is executed It is useful in that it will be erased (invalidated) automatically. However, "appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearing EF & operation waiting block D)" is "1 is executed (analyzed) by turning on the availability information based on the process identification information. Therefore, if the frame processing with the processing identification information of "1" is skipped when the processing load is high, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation Waiting block D)" itself will not be executed, and the effect receiving period (effective period) based on the process identification information of "Y3" may not occur.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as processing identification information for reading processing related to operation effects (processing for determining whether to generate post-operation effects based on operation detection information), "Y2" process identification information and "Y3" process identification information are prepared, and for the "Y2" process identification information, on the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data (SP reach background block)" side In addition, the process identification information of "Y3" is attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" side. In this way, as the process identification information for reading out the process related to the operation effect, a predetermined wait time (wait process period), and the wait time (wait processing To reduce the above-mentioned risk that the production acceptance period (effective period) will not occur by preparing both the one associated with the type 2 block that is read out without passing the period). will be able to

Here, in "process Y3" which is executed based on the process identification information of "Y3", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned "post-operation block D" is turned on. , a display effect after an operation on the effect display device 1600 (post-operation effect) is executed. On the other hand, in "process Y2" which is executed based on the process identification information of "Y2", when the effect determination is made, "process related to lamp emission", "process related to movable body operation", "process related to sound output" process" is started. Therefore, even if the process identification information of "Y3" is not read out, it is possible to realize the effect after the operation by the light emission of the lamp, the movement of the movable body, and the output of sound according to the process identification information of "Y2". It is "Processing Y2" and "Processing Y3" may be performed as long as they can generate post-operation effects different from each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, three pieces of the same process identification information (here, "Y2") are lined up from timing ts42, but the second process identification information (here, "Y2") is read out. It is assumed that an effect is received in the "process Y2", and a post-operation effect is executed by light emission of the lamp, movement of the movable body, and sound output. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third process identification information (here, "Y2") that is filled in in the same figure, "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is automatically read out during the execution of each unit time. However, each time it is read in this way, in the above "processing Y2" corresponding to the processing identification information (here, "Y2"), a processing such as "Since the post-operation effect has been executed, the processing Y2 is terminated" is executed. By doing so, the processing related to the effect determination is substantially invalidated (the effect reception is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
・The “first special operation that permits reception of the effect based on the operation detection information” that occurs while the specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or silent, or is in a non-output state Reception performance (performance reception period)”,
・Second special operation reception effect (effect reception period) that can generate a post-operation effect even if the operation is not detected regardless of the effect state (effect mode)
etc. can be executed as described above (see, for example, FIG. 142 and FIGS. 212 to 224).

In the first special operation reception performance, performance reception is permitted while the performance sound of the specific type is output in a suppressed mode or silence, or in a non-output state, so that the user can concentrate on the operation performance. is expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance will be poor due to the suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-allowable operation-related display (forecast effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated, and the state in which the effect reception is permitted in the first special operation reception effect The permitted operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that is performed during (during the effective period) is displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in terms of the display effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pre-allowable operation-related display (foreshadowing effect) that is performed when the second special operation reception effect is generated, and the state in which the effect reception is permitted in the second special operation reception effect. The permitted operation-related display (such as the above-described model image and gauge display) that is performed during (during the effective period) is also displayed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in terms of the display effects, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

More specifically, in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" shown in FIG. In addition, even if no operation is detected, a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) for generating a post-operation effect can be generated. The process identification information of "2" is read to start the process related to the special operation acceptance effect. However, the process identification information of "2" does not read "the process for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect", but reads and executes the following "process 2". .
Processing 2. Availability attached to "appearance EF block E" for performing an indication effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the "effect reception period (effective period) during which the effect reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon The process of manipulating (setting) information to the ON state

According to such a configuration, apart from the "SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data)", display related to allowable pre-operation (prediction effect) dedicated block (appearance EF block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data (emergence EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E) corresponding to the block. Execution can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) determined by the scheduler data. That is, in this case, the execution of the "appearance EF block E" may be started at any timing in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" or at a plurality of times, or the "liquid crystal effect scheduler for SP reach background" may be executed. It is possible to easily start the execution of the ``appearing EF block E'' from the ``liquid crystal presentation scheduler data'' in the variation pattern different from the ``data'', so that the presentation design can be facilitated and shared. be able to

Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes with different expectations (degrees of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern) are separately prepared for the pre-allowable operation-related display (prediction effect) and the allowed operation-related display, respectively, Since it is possible to appropriately combine them in any combination, it becomes possible to make variations as productions diverse, so that the decline in game interest can be suppressed. Become. Also, when it is adopted in other variation patterns, it is possible to realize an effect such as performing a unique mode in which the pre-allowable operation-related display (prediction effect) is common, but the allowable operation-related display is not shared. It will also be possible.

Here, when the "appearance EF block E" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" corresponding to the "appearance EF block E" is read out and executed (analyzed). be done. When this "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearing EF" is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-allowable operation-related display) by a predetermined effect display is changed from the "section where effect reception is not permitted" to the "effect reception is obtained.

However, in the "appearance EF block E" and the "appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E", the "processing that can determine the effect to generate the post-operation effect based on the operation detection information" is executed. Since the process identification information is not attached, the effect reception period will not occur based on the block or scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, at timing ts52 in the "SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data)", "3" to generate the effect acceptance period. process identification information is read out. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "a process in which an effect determination can be made to generate a post-operation effect based on the operation detection information", but is data associated with the following "process 3". .
Processing 3. "In the state where the effect acceptance period is occurring, information on the availability of the 'operation waiting block E' for performing the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate Processing to operate (set) to ON state

According to such a configuration, apart from "block for SP reach background (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)" and "block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)", Allowed operation related display (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) dedicated block (operation waiting block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to this block (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E) Although it is necessary to prepare, the "operation waiting block E" can be started at an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) determined by the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". become able to. That is, in this case, the execution of the "operation waiting block E" may be started at any timing in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" or at a plurality of times, or the "liquid crystal effect scheduler for SP reach background" may be executed. It is possible to easily start execution of the ``operation waiting block E'' from the ``liquid crystal presentation scheduler data'' in the variation pattern different from the data, so that the presentation design can be easily simplified and shared. be able to

Here, in the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts52, the same process identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is attached to each frame as in the effect reception periods in which reception of effects is permitted at timings ts31 and ts42. It may be configured as a production section to be performed. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized by a method different from the effect receiving periods generated at timings ts31 and ts42, and the other effect receiving periods are also configured by the method described below. can be

That is, for the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts52, the state operation (OFF state, ON state) of the operation state flag changes the state in which reception of the effect is not permitted (OFF state) and the state in which reception of the effect is permitted (ON state). ) and the method of creating When this method is adopted, the effect based on the operation detection information is generated every unit time (every frame) within the "peripheral control unit steady process" shown in FIG. 95, not within the process called based on the process identification information. It is desirable to allow a decision to be made.

For example, every time the "peripheral control unit steady process" is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and on the condition that the operation state flag is ON (on the condition that it is in the effect reception period), the operation detection information To make it possible to make a performance determination to the effect that a post-operation performance is to be generated based on. When the effect determination is made, the availability information of the block (here, "post-operation block E") corresponding to the type of post-operation effect corresponding to the operation state flag that is on is turned on ( setting).

That is, in this case, as for the operation state flags, only the types of post-operation effects are prepared. The usability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) to the ON state. The processing for turning off the operation state flag may be executed within the processing of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect to the ON state, or when the usage availability information is turned on. It may be executed in the process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) manipulated to the state.

Regarding the processing procedure when such a method is adopted, the processing identification information of the above "3" is read out at the timing ts52 and the above "processing 3" is executed. Block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting) is read out and executed (analyzed).

The process for turning on the operation status flag may be performed in the above "process 3", but in the example shown in FIG. At the first frame (processing timing) when "data E)" is executed (analyzed), the process identification information of "Z1" associated with "process Z1" below is read.
Process Z1. Processing to turn on the operation state flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" among the operation state flags

As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the "post-operation block E" is turned on (set) at timing ts52, and determination based on the operation detection information is performed in the above-described "peripheral control unit steady-state processing". By performing the processing, the period during which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the "effect reception period". In addition, while the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state in this way, the permitted operation-related display (the above-described model image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the permissible pre-operation-related display (appearing EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearing EF)) associated with layer 7 and the permissible The middle operation-related display (operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed so that the display periods thereof partially overlap each other.

Here, the before-permissible-operation-related display associated with layer 7 is displayed in front of the permissible-in-operation-related display associated with layer 6, and is preferentially displayed. It has become so. Therefore, when at least a portion of the currently permitted operation-related display is made difficult to see by the pre-allowed operation-related display, the reception of the effect is permitted, and thus any expectation level as the pre-allowed operation-related display. The effect is provided such that the effect reception is possible under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether the mode with the appearance appears.

In this regard, when the effect reception is performed at the timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which the effect reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" 6 is executed in the above-described "peripheral control unit steady process". As a result, each processing (lamp, movable object, sound, etc.) including the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is executed. . At this time, in the layer 6, the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" associated with the "post-operation block E" is replaced with the "operation waiting block E" associated with the "operation waiting block E". Since it is executed in place of the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for use", there is no need to perform special processing for halfway ending the "block for waiting for operation E". At this time, it is also possible to automatically erase (invalidate) the processing identification information of "Z3", which will be described later, contained in the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)". Become.

As for the processing for turning off the operation state flag, when performing the processing for operating (setting) the availability information of the "post-operation block E" to the on state in the above-mentioned "peripheral control unit regular processing" However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the first frame ( At the processing timing), by reading the processing identification information of "Z2" and executing the following "processing Z2" corresponding to this, the processing based on the "post-operation block E" is executed after the effect reception period ends. I am trying to
Process Z2. A process of turning off the operation state flags of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" among the operation state flags.

However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the display related to the operation before the allowable (appearing EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearing EF)) remains (displayed) in the screen. As described above, there may be cases where performance reception is performed. Therefore, in the "process Z2", it is determined whether or not the block E for appearing EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearing EF) is in the execution state, and if it is in the execution state, the process of ending this halfway is also performed. It is desirable to However, after the "appearing EF block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearing EF)" is continued without being terminated halfway, image display based on "post-operation block E" is changed to "appearing EF Priority execution (display on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E) in a range (for example, the entire screen) that includes at least the entire "range where the image display based on the block E is performed" Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

In addition, in the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)", when the process at timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), it corresponds to "process Z3" in order to end the effect reception period. The attached process identification information of "Z3" is read out. Here, when the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" is executed (analyzed) at timing ts54, the "post-operation block E (post-operation This means that the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E)" has not been overwritten by the "liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E for operation waiting", that is, the timing ts54 arrives. It means that the production reception has not been done until now. However, even if the effect acceptance period that occurs from timing ts52 is not received during the period from timing ts52 to timing ts54, the "post-operation block E" is the same as when the effect is accepted. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation acceptance effect" for operating (setting) the availability information to the ON state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)", the following processing is executed in "processing Z3" which is executed based on the processing identification information of "Z3" read out at timing ts54. It is designed to be
Process Z3. Of the operation status flags, the operation status flag of the type associated with the "post-operation block E" is turned off, and the usability information of the "post-operation block E" is turned on. The process to operate (set) is performed

According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, even if the effect is not received within that period, the same block as when the effect is received is read out and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is executed, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the player forgets to operate. In addition, instead of executing the post-operation effect after the effect reception period (timings ts51 to ts52) ends, the "effect Since the processing to read the same block as when the reception was made is performed, it is possible to realize a smooth progress of the production without causing a gap between when there is an operation and when there is no operation. become able to.

Further, according to such a configuration, the display image (simulated image or gauge display) based on the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data E)" can be operated by the player to accept the presentation. In both the case where the effect is accepted and the case where the effect is accepted by activating the automatic button function, processing for hiding this based on the effect being accepted (here, "operation Since the post-use block E") is executed, even if the player forgets to operate, the performance can be progressed in the same manner, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. come to be expected.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, during the effect receiving period that occurs from timing ts52, the above-described "first period" is executed while the specified type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode. It also functions as a special operation reception performance. Even in the "first special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 225, when the effect is received, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppressed mode and continues to be output in the suppressed mode. Then, during the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is set to be returned to the non-suppressed output.

It should be noted that the "specific type of effect sound" means the sound of "BGM playback" (BGM playback for normal backgrounds or SP backgrounds), but here in particular it corresponds to "SP reach background blocks". It corresponds to the sound (BGM reproduction sound for SP reach) output by executing the attached "processing related to sound output". As for the suppression mode and method, the above-described mode and method can be appropriately adopted.

In the above configuration, when the operation reception effect (timings ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed (or even if the effect reception is not performed, the effect reception is performed). is generated), the display related to the operation before allowed (block E for appearing EF) and the display related to operation during allowed (block for waiting for operation) performed at the time of occurrence E) is executed based on mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it is possible to realize a variety of effects in terms of the display effects, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Also, in the operation reception effects (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images (pre-allowable operation-related displays) displayed by mutually different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) , allowed operation-related display) are now displayed so that there are overlapping periods. Therefore, it is possible to realize the effect (such as the above-mentioned difficulty of visibility) related to the "pre-allowable operation-related display" and the "allowable operation-related display", so that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. become.

On the other hand, an operation reception effect that occurs when the "specific type of effect sound" is not suppressed, such as an operation reception effect that occurs at timing ts41 (or a post-operation effect occurs when the effect reception is not performed) In the non-allowable operation acceptance effect), the pre-allowable operation-related display and the allowable operation-related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation reception effect is generated according to the result of the effect determination (notice determination), unlike the operation reception effect at timings ts52 to ts54 (operation reception effect suggesting a big hit by the post-operation effect). Therefore, the display related to the operation before permission and the display related to the operation during permission are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and the handling according to the judgment result is facilitated. It can be said that it is more beneficial to make

However, even if the pre-allowed operation-related display and the allowed operation-related display are displayed by the same block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data), the pre-allowed operation-related display is on one layer. So that the display and the display related to the permitted operation overlap in time (there is a time when both the display related to the operation before permitted and the display related to the permitted operation are displayed. For example, one of the displays related to the permitted operation It is desirable to execute those effects so that the part is made difficult to see).

Processing identification information read out based on a block for displaying operations related to operations during permitted (block E for operation waiting), based on a block for displaying operations related to before permitted (block E for appearing EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearing EF)) The availability information may be turned on in the process corresponding to the request.

The operation acceptance effect that is allowed to be accepted at timings ts52 to ts54 may be executed as at least one of the above-described first special operation reception effect and the above-described second special operation reception effect. , FIG. 142, FIGS. 212 to 215, FIGS. good too. In this case, other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. Production) may be executed as either. In addition, each of these different examples of the operation reception effect, which will be described later, may also be adopted as appropriate.

For example, different blocks are used for the operation acceptance effect (operation waiting block E) that occurs at timing ts52 and the operation acceptance effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) that occurs at timing ts42. In the reception performance, the same reception permission sound may be output when the performance reception is performed (the first permission sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224).

In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (operation waiting block E) that occurs at timing ts52, if the effect is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being output, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation acceptance effect ( In the block for waiting for operation E), various configurations are appropriately configured, such as maintaining the output state even if the effect is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output (the first acceptable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224). can be adopted for

By the way, regarding the scenario data related to the SP reach effect, there are blocks corresponding to image data that can be shared between the time of the big hit and the time of the loss (SP reach background block), and blocks corresponding to different image data between the time of the big win and the time of the loss. (SP ending background block) and these are sequentially executed as described above. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the "SP reach background block" is shifted to the "SP ending background block" is within the period during which the post-operation effect is being executed. It is set so that it will always arrive at .

That is, in the operation reception effect that allows reception of effect at timing ts52, the effect reception (including the automatic button function described above) is performed at any timing within the effect reception period (timings ts52 to ts54). However, a predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period during which the post-operation effect is always executed (time required for execution of the post-operation effect is set). During the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the "post-operation block E" (post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (post-operation Effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is given priority over the display based on the SP ending liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the "SP ending background block". (Displayed on the front side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). Further, in this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set to be longer than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E, and the longer time is set. The minute functions as "a period during which the post-operation effect is always executed".

During the period in which the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such "post-operation block E" is being executed, the "SP reach background block" is shifted to the "SP ending background block". By doing so, "Display of SP Reach background block (block shared in win-loss)" and "Display of SP ending background block (block used only in either win-lose)" have a completely different atmosphere. Even if the performance is designed so as to make the player feel uncomfortable, the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, in the scenario data of "Layer 4" and "Layer 5", blocks that are not related to any image and simply function as time-series data for calling processing at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) It corresponds to That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and is not involved in any image display. A data structure (empty time-series image information) that can be said to be "data" is adopted. Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed in layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

There are two methods for such a data call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). A wait time (wait processing period) is set so as not to execute the data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data) until the arrival of . Then, when timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, "data call block B" corresponding to "data call block B" is executed. Liquid crystal presentation scheduler data B for data calling is executed (analyzed).

Here, the "data calling block B" or the "data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" corresponding to the "data calling block B" is attached with the process identification information "X2" every unit time. The following "process X2" is executed each time the process identification information of "X2" is read.
Processing X2. Processing for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block B" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

In this "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)", the section to which the process identification information of "X2" is attached for each unit time is defined as "effect reception that can be performed by operation period (effective period)", and in the above "processing X2", when the effect determination is made, the availability information of "post-operation block B" associated with "layer 6" is turned on. An operation (setting) to a state is performed. As a result, the "post-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" associated with the "post-operation block B" is executed ( analysis), "processing related to lamp emission", "processing related to movable body operation", "processing related to sound output", etc., which are associated with the "post-operation block B". By starting the execution, it becomes possible to generate the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

It should be noted that, in the next frame after each process associated with the "post-operation block B" is started to be executed, the "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" is Executed (parsed). Therefore, when the effect reception is performed in the middle of the section (effect reception period) to which the process identification information (here, "X2") is attached for each unit time, the "data call block B The process identification information (here, "X2") is read out from (data call liquid crystal presentation scheduler data B)", and the above "process X2" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the "process X2" also includes a determination process as to whether each process associated with the "post-operation block B" has started to be executed. When it is determined that the execution has started, the "processing X2" is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information, which will be described in the above "processing X1". As I said.

On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the "process X2" (it is determined not to execute the post-operation effect), the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is used. The process X2 is terminated while the availability information remains in the OFF state. Then, for each unit time (one frame), "data call block B (data call The process identification information (here, "X2") is read out from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data B) for use, and the corresponding "process X2" is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the section ends with the sixth process identification information (here, "X2"). When the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the effect thereafter progresses without the post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block B" being executed.

According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the "data call block B The same process identification information (X2) for reading out the "process X2 that can generate the post-operation effect" from the "data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" is obtained. However, by analyzing such information, it is possible to effectively function as a performance reception period (effective period), so that it is possible to facilitate the design of the performance and standardize it. Become.

Here, the block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) corresponding to "layer 4" does not contain information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and "processing X2" read from the processing identification information of "X2". The "block for waiting for operation" is not read even by Therefore, in the operation acceptance effect that occurs at the timing ts21, the effect acceptance is permitted in a state in which no model image or gauge display is performed. ” is realized by

According to such a configuration, it is possible to share the "data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" even when another variation pattern is selected, By preparing scenario data with different set values for the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make it appear at a different timing.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 5", the data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) is executed without the wait time (wait processing period). Substantial wait function works in call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call). That is, in the data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data A), neither image information nor process identification information is read until timing ts11 arrives, and when timing ts11 arrives, "4" is read. process identification information is read out. However, the process identification information of "4" does not read out the "process for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect", but the following "process 4" is read out and executed. It's becoming
Processing 4. A premonitory effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that the ``effect reception period (effective period) during which the effect can be received by operation'' will soon occur, and a state in which the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" for performing the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) to prompt the operation.

According to such a configuration, although it is necessary to prepare a data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) separately from the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A", the "appearance EF & operation wait block A" is required. For "waiting block A", the process identification information "4" is attached from a block (liquid crystal presentation scheduler data) different from "data calling block A (data calling liquid crystal presentation scheduler data A)". Since it becomes possible to call it appropriately with only one, it is possible to preferably achieve simplification and commonality of performance design.

Here, when the "appearing EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "appearing EF & operation waiting block A" corresponding to the "appearing EF & operation waiting block A" is read out. . These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time. A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a premonitory performance (appearance effect display, etc.) suggesting that the performance reception period (effective period) during which reception can be made will soon occur is acquired.

However, in the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A", the effect acceptance period is occurring from the middle of it, and the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image or Gauge display, etc.) corresponding to the image information (moving image or still image) is acquired, and the same process identification information is acquired for each unit time (one frame) in this interval. It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" executed (analyzed) from timing ts11, "Y1 ” are attached so as to line up. The following "process Y1" is read and executed each time the process identification information of "Y1" is read.
Processing Y1. Processing for determining whether or not to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block A" based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the section to which such process identification information (here, "Y1") is attached for each unit time is defined as the "effect reception period during which the effect can be received by operation (effective period )”. Moreover, in the "process Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" which is the basis for reading out the "process Y1". The usability information of the "post-operation block A" associated with the same "layer 6" is operated (set) to the ON state.

That is, in this case, when the "post-operation block A" is read out, various processes including the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" associated with the "post-operation block A" are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to "post-operation block A" is generated. As a matter of course, the newly read "post-operation block A (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting block A)" that was in the middle of execution. In place of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A) for use, it will be in the execution state at "Layer 6".

According to such a configuration, only by reading "block A for after operation", it is no longer necessary to read "block A for appearance EF & operation waiting (appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal Effect scheduler data A)” and further, the process identification information of 'Y1' for reading out 'process Y1' can be substantially invalidated (made to be in a state where effect reception is not permitted). , it is not necessary to separately perform determination and processing for terminating these, so that it is possible to favorably achieve simplification and commonality of performance design. In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is read from the second process identification information (here, "Y1") in "appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". Effect reception is performed in the "process Y1" that has been executed, and thereby the ``post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A'' associated with the ``post-operation block A'' in the same ``layer 6'' is executed (analyzed). It is assumed that Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the "line part" in the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" is a section erased by overwriting (substantially invalidated section).

In "Layer 4", an effect section is set in which process identification information is attached to each frame on the "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" side. However, the rendering section may be set in a block read from the "data calling block" such as "layer 5". Also, in "Layer 4", as shown in "Layer 5", this is realized by using a substantial wait function within the data call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). good too.

In addition, in the "layer 5", an effect interval is set in which process identification information is attached to each frame on the side of the block read from the "data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". did. However, the effect section may be set in the "data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" like "layer 4". Also in "Layer 5", as shown in "Layer 4", this is realized by setting a wait for the data calling block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data calling) itself to wait. good too.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when the process identification information of "1" or "4" is acquired, it is suggested that the "effect receiving period (effective period) during which the effect can be received by operation" will soon occur. to perform an indication effect (appearance effect display, etc.), and an operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned model image and gauge display) that prompts the player to operate while the effect acceptance period is occurring. A process of operating (setting) the usability information attached to the "appearance EF & block for waiting for operation" is executed. However, it is not always necessary to execute the sign effect (appearance effect display, etc.). A process of operating (setting) the usability information attached to the "operation waiting block" for performing display, etc., to the ON state may be executed. That is, in this case, as soon as the "block for waiting for operation" is read, the process identification information associated with the "process for which the effect determination can be made" is acquired.

Further, as described above, the effect receiving periods generated at timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flags, similarly to the effect receiving period generated at timing ts51.

In the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information of "Y2" and the process identification information of "Y3" are set to be read out at the same timing. It may be set.

Also, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the blocks and the corresponding liquid crystal effect scheduler data are provided separately, but these may be configured as one piece of data.

In addition, regarding the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) from which information corresponding to the image data is obtained for each unit time (each frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) is processed at the first processing timing (frame). It may be configured such that information corresponding to video data over a period can be obtained. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is obtained only at the first processing timing (frame). It will not be acquired, and the corresponding process will be executed only when the process identification information is attached.

Blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for which availability information is set to ON state may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing for which availability information is set to ON state. may be executed (analyzed) at a processing timing one after the processing timing set to .

Also, regarding "appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data A)" and "appearing EF & operation waiting block D (appearing EF & operation waiting liquid crystal presentation scheduler data D)" , different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, but the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data". Also, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same model image and gauge display are displayed for the same time.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific variation pattern is selected and background display effect for specific reach (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result ) is obtained and not obtained, the effect section (SP reach background block) in which the display data is shared, and when the jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and not obtained It is executed in a form divided into a production section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used depending on the case. In such a configuration, when performing the background display effect for the specific reach, instead of using different display data over the entire period depending on whether the predetermined determination result is obtained or not, The display data is shared until the section (timing ts55), and different display data is used only in the remaining period to indicate the win or loss (judgment result), so that the processing load and memory capacity can be expected to be reduced. Become.

Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 225, in the "layer 6" different from the "layer 3" in which the background display effect for the specific reach is executed, the post-operation effect ( A post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is given priority over the background display effect (layer 3) for the specific reach (SP By making it so that it is displayed on the nearer side than the image display based on the reach background block and the SP ending background block), it is possible to obtain a "jackpot (predetermined judgment result) in Layer 3. Switching from the production section in which the display data is shared between when there is no hit to the production section where different display data is used when the jackpot (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" is not displayed. (or make it difficult to see). As a result, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and display data that is different depending on whether it is obtained or not.” Even if there is a case where the directing connection cannot be well designed, it can be hidden (concealed) by the post-operation effect. As a result, it becomes possible to facilitate the production design. In this sense, it is desirable that in the post-operation effect, a process of moving the movable body forward on the display screen is also executed.

In addition, regarding the post-operation effect (block E for post-operation) that is executed across (including) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, regardless of the effect mode, Since it is configured to be executed automatically, ``a performance section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained'' and ``a big hit (predetermined It is possible to reliably hide the connection with the performance section in which different display data are used depending on whether the determination result) is obtained or not.

In order to obtain such effects, the timing ts55 at which the switching of the effect section occurs is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. (If the end time of the post-operation effect is delayed depending on the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) will be displayed when the effect is accepted at the earliest timing in the operation acceptance effect that occurs at timing ts52. It is required to be set within a period before the timing to hide. In such a configuration, display processing (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed in "Layer 3", but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

However, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and Regarding the configuration of hiding the background display effect (layer 3) at the timing of switching to "the effect section in which different display data is used when it is not obtained", it shall be executable when the big win is won. and may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for losing) is executed even when the jackpot is not won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and a partial effect display is performed. , it is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3).

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 225, as one of the plurality of blocks corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "post-operation block E ” will be prepared. As for the "post-operation block E", even if no operation is detected within the period of timing ts52 to ts54, the reception of the effect is automatically performed (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). By executing it), it is possible to provide an interesting performance that has not existed in the past.

In this regard, although illustration is omitted, even if a first variation pattern or a second variation pattern different from a specific variation pattern is executed, the "post-operation block E" can be executed. good too.

For example, in the first variation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the effect content corresponding to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed, as shown in FIG. Similarly to the specific variation pattern, "2" process identification information and "3" process identification information are read based on the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)". That is, in the first variation pattern, although the effect content of the SP reach background ("information about image data" acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is different, the same allowable pre-operation related display (prediction effect) as the specific variation pattern ) and displays related to operations during permitted operations (simulated images, gauge displays, etc.) are executed, and in the operation reception effects generated in this way, the same "post-operation Block E" is to be executed.

In addition, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation acceptance effect, the effect reception is automatically performed, and the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block ” is similar to the specific variation pattern in that the post-operation effect is executed so as to straddle (include) the switching timing of “ ” to hide the switching of the background effect.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and Regarding the configuration of hiding the background display effect (Layer 3) at the switching timing of the effect section in which different display data is used when it is not obtained, the first variation pattern is the same as the specific variation pattern. , may be made executable when a big win is won, and may not be executed when a big win is not won. According to such a configuration, although different background effects (SP ready-to-win effects) are executed for the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern, the different background effects are not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same performance (post-operation performance) always appears in the form of a square, and this makes it possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot. On the other hand, when the big win is not won, the fact that the big win is lost is recognized at the timing when the background performance (SP ending background block) having different contents between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. will be able to That is, in this case, when a big win is won, the ``background effect'' with different effect contents according to the variation pattern is hidden, and one effect content always appears, so that it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big win has been won. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost, the ``background effect'' with different effects depending on the variation pattern is displayed instead of hidden, making it difficult to intuitively recognize that the big win has been lost. You will be able to maintain your expectations.

On the other hand, in the second variation pattern as well, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" of the effect contents corresponding to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have "1" process identification information, but "2" process identification information and "3" No process identification information is included, and immediately before the transition to the "SP ending background block", an operation reception effect capable of generating a post-operation effect across the transition timing is not generated. .

In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" related to the second variation pattern, the processing identification information of "5" (not shown) is obtained at a predetermined timing while the reception of effects is not permitted. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", the "process of turning on the post-operation block E usability information (process 5) is executed. It's like

By turning on the availability information of the "post-operation block E" in this way, even in the second variation pattern, as in the above-described "specific variation pattern" and "first variation pattern", The same post-operation effect based on "post-operation block E (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" straddles (includes) switching timing between "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block". will be executed on a separate layer.

In such a configuration, when a second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, originally, the effect should be designed as a display related to the background effect, but the period during which the effect reception is allowed is Since the "post-operation block E" is deliberately executed as a block different from the background image block at a predetermined timing in the production section where it is not occurring, there is no model image or gauge display, and the operation In spite of the fact that the reception of the performance is not allowed and the reception of the performance is not permitted, the post-operation performance (block E for post-operation) suddenly appears when the reception of the performance is made with another variation pattern. , it is expected to improve the interest in gaming.

According to such a configuration, even in the second variation pattern, the "production section in which the display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained", and the "big hit Even if it is not possible to design the directing connection well in the staging section in which different display data is used depending on whether a (predetermined judgment result) is obtained or not. can be hidden (cheat), and the production design can be facilitated.

In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and Regarding the configuration for hiding the background display effect (Layer 3) at the switching timing with the effect section in which different display data is used when it is not obtained, even in the second variation pattern, a specific variation pattern or the second As in the case of the 1 variation pattern, it may be made executable when the big win is won, and may not be executed when the big win is not won. According to such a configuration, in spite of executing a background effect (SP ready-to-win effect) different from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern, the different background effect is not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same performance (post-operation performance) always appears in the form of a square, and this makes it possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot. On the other hand, when the big win is not won, the fact that the big win is lost is recognized at the timing when the background performance (SP ending background block) having different contents from the specific variation pattern or the first variation pattern appears. will be able to That is, in this case, when a big win is won, the ``background effect'' with different effect contents according to the variation pattern is hidden, and one effect content always appears, so that it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big win has been won. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost, the ``background effect'' with different effects depending on the variation pattern is displayed instead of hidden, making it difficult to intuitively recognize that the big win has been lost. You will be able to maintain your expectations.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example, the operation reception effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data). , These process identification information may not be attached to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data), for example, the symbol block (symbol liquid crystal effect scheduler data ), a call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for calling), and other blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and its other examples, a process read out based on process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" In the effect determination to be performed, the effect determination based on the operation detection information for a specific operation means (operation button 410) is exemplified. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410, and other operation means may be used. In addition, all or part of the production determination based on the process identification information such as "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" can be operated by a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.), and determines whether the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given has been operated (effect determination is performed) may be determined. According to such a configuration, it is determined which one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) to be given an operation opportunity, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect that gives the operation opportunity only through the operation method, the processing identification information, liquid crystal effect scheduler, blocks, etc. are shared regardless of which operation means the operation opportunity is given. You will be able to Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both different operation means, and a post-operation effect based on the process identification information may be executed based on the fact that one of the operation means operated first receives the effect. .

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, a plurality of permissible pre-operation-related displays may be provided in the block E for appearing EF. For example, a normal appearing EF block E1 that does not involve movement (vibration, projection, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special emergence EF block E2 that involves movement (vibration, projection, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410. , and executing (analyzing) one of them according to the variation pattern can be exemplified. In this case, blocks can be saved by commonly using the blocks following the appearing EF block E1 and the appearing EF block E2 (both or one of the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E). become.

In the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, based on the processing identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the blocks and liquid crystal effect scheduler data By executing the read processing, it is possible to accept an operation for a specific operation means. However, in addition to this, with respect to a predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, in the process (for example, the peripheral control unit regular process) that is completely unrelated to the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data , an operation may be accepted, and a change corresponding to the acceptance may be caused to the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the progress of effects due to blocks, liquid crystal effect scheduler data, etc., the operation of the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted, so that the game interest can be enhanced. It can be maintained well.

In addition, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player's operation different from the process of determining the effect based on the process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3". to disable all effect elements (display, sound, movement) related to the target block. In such a configuration it is possible to save layers.

In addition, the effect determination period is changed so that part of each process identification information of "X1", "X2", "Y1", "Y2", and "Y3" is converted into other process identification information by the player's operation. or the opportunity may be changed.

A specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the start of the target variation, and may be used across multiple variations.

Blocks may be used not only during variation but also during a winning game or the like. In addition, a block that spans from the fluctuation to the winning game and a block that spans from the winning game to the probability variation may be provided, and the liquid crystal presentation scheduler data corresponding to these blocks and the blocks also have process identification information. may be attached.

Also, "Y3" may be added only to blocks (or liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the variable probability state, and the type of process identification information read out according to the game state may be changed.

Also, while an error is being reported (anomaly is being reported), it is desirable not to erase any of the blocks being executed and the process identification information, even though an error image is displayed and an error sound is output. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately restore the effect after the error is cleared.

In addition, among the inventions inherent in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, the described effects can be obtained without necessarily using the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or the technology such as process identification information. Those that can be realized may be realized by other methods.

[Effect determination based on operation detection information before the valid period occurs]
In general, when an effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs during which an effect can be accepted, the above-described "simulated image" and "gauge display (bar display)" are displayed in accordance with the timing of the occurrence. In this regard, if the game is played for a long time or many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing within the variation pattern the "simulated image" or the "gauge display" will be displayed. As a result, some players cannot wait for the operation, and operate at the timing in anticipation of the "simulated image" or "gauge display" being displayed. And at this time, if it is operated just before the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the effect acceptance period occurs), the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. (a state in which the effect acceptance period is occurring). There was a case where the performance reception period (valid period) ended without any delay.

In this regard, in the special operation reception effect according to this embodiment (for example, the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225), the effect reception period (valid period ) occurs, even if the operation is not performed within the effect receiving period, the automatic button function determines the effect and the effect after the operation can be generated as described above. According to such a configuration, even if the redoing of the operation is delayed within the effect acceptance period (effective period) in the above-described situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the effect after the operation cannot be confirmed. become able to.

However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, the player cannot feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation by the player, so there is a concern that the game interest will decrease. Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the effect determination to the effect that the post-operation effect is to be generated is permitted only within the effect acceptance period (effective period), but the detection of the operation state is permitted. , Even if it is done within a period (immediately before) before the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs, it is intentionally used as an object (judgment material) for the production judgment. According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed immediately before the effect reception period (effective period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period). It is assumed that the operation is performed, and the post-operation production is executed. That is, in this case, since the player side also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game.

On the other hand, although this will also be described later, even if the operation state is detected within a period (immediately before) before the production reception period (effective period) occurs, the operation state will be changed beyond the specific time. is maintained, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, it is not determined that the effect reception is performed within the m-th frame. According to such a configuration, it is possible to fairly impart the conditions for receiving the effect to the player, and it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, as will be described later, at least in a predetermined operation reception effect, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation, at the time when the m-th frame starts In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "simulated image imitating the operation means (or the gauge display indicating the remaining time)" is not yet displayed. In other words, in this case, since a period in which reception of the effect is permitted internally occurs from the time when the model image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player may get ahead of the game, As a result, even if the operation is performed just before the model image (or gauge display) is displayed, the effect reception will be performed, and the situation that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation will occur. be able to suppress it.

Hereinafter, such technical features will be described, but in describing the technical features, the "effect reception period (effective period)" according to this embodiment will be explained again. (Valid period)" means "a period from the start of the process of generating a state in which reception of the effect is permitted until the end of the process". Here, the ``process for generating a state in which reception of the effect is permitted'' is different depending on the implementation method of the ``effect reception period (valid period)''. "turning on", "processing for setting a timer", "processing for calling the processing for judging whether or not to accept the effect based on the processing identification information (see FIG. 225)", and the like. In other words, the "effect reception period (effective period)" corresponds to "the effect interval (period) from when the processing for generating a state in which the effect reception is permitted is executed until a predetermined time elapses", This predetermined time is defined as "the time until the operation state flag is turned off" or "the time until the timer times out", or "the effect section to which the same process identification information is attached in each frame ends. It corresponds to "the time until the Then, during the "effect acceptance period (effective period)", a determination process as to whether or not the effect is accepted is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, each frame) based on the detection of the operation state. However, in the "determining process as to whether the effect is accepted" according to this embodiment, not only the "detection of the operation state" performed within the "effect accepting period (effective period)", but also the It is characterized in that it also targets the "detection of operation state" performed before the occurrence of the "effect reception period (effective period)". Such a "drawing acceptance period (effective period)" is generally created as a period of about 100 frames, for example.

FIGS. 226 to 231 are flow charts showing an example of the procedure for the processing performed before and after the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs. In each example described below, the case of performing image display using the "blocks" and "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" described with reference to FIG. 225 is shown, but the display method is not limited to this. , and any general technique for image control in units of frames. Also, the "process for generating a state in which reception of effects is permitted" is exemplified as the "process for turning on the operation state flag", but it is not limited to this, and the "processing for setting a timer", " Other methods such as "a process of calling the process of judging whether or not to accept the effect based on the process identification information" may be used.

FIG. 226 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when no operation is detected before or after the performance accepting period (effective period).

Now, when a special operation reception effect (for example, the effect reception period that occurs at timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) occurs in a specific variation pattern, "effect It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state as "processing for generating a state in which acceptance is permitted". The reason why the operation status flag is turned on (set) at the halfway "timing t1 (m)" in the "m"th frame is because "the operation status flag is set to the on state. Even if this process itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m"th frame, more strictly speaking, the start timing of the "m"th frame is determined in relation to the execution of other processes. It is impossible to execute all of the various processes including this process in , and while various processes are executed in a predetermined order, they are executed later than the "frame start timing". because it always happens.

When the operation state flag is turned on in this way, an effect section (effect reception period) is generated in which reception of effects is permitted. A “determination process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect” is performed.

The effect reception period according to this example is described as "special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. Therefore, as described above, regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (whether the operation state flag is on), the "peripheral control unit steady state processing”, it is executed as “effect determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (each frame). By continuing this even after the effect reception period, the "determination process as to whether or not to generate the effect after the operation" is performed based on the operation detection information at predetermined time intervals even during the effect reception period. (in the figure, they are executed at "timing t2(m)", "timing t2(m+1)", "timing t2(m+2)", and "timing t2(m+3)"). That is, in this case, the "determining process as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect" is executed also in the frame before the "m"th frame, but the operation state flag is turned off. As described above, this is practically invalidated under certain circumstances, so it is omitted in the figure.

Further, in this example, the order of the various processes to be performed when a new frame arrives is "after operation" rather than the order of "operating (setting) the operation status flag to the ON state". The order in which the "determining process for generating an effect" is executed is set later, whereby the effect is generated within the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation status flag is operated (set) to the ON state. Acceptance (determination to generate post-operation effect) is made possible. However, regarding this order, it is not necessarily the case that the "process for operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state" is executed first. The order in which the "determining process" is executed may be set first. In this case, within the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state, the "determining process as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect" itself will not be performed. Acceptance (determination to the effect that the post-operation effect is to be generated) is no longer performed.

Conventionally, at timing t1(m) in the "m"-th frame, "processing for generating a state in which reception of effects is permitted (here, "processing for turning on the operation state flag")" is executed. Then, based on the operation detection information acquired within the period after the execution of the process (here, "the period during which the operation state flag is in the ON state"), "whether to generate the post-operation effect Judgment process" was to be executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, at timing t2(m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there is an operation within the period of timings t1(m) to t2(m). If it is determined that there was an operation, the post-operation effect is executed, and if it is not determined that the operation has occurred (or the operation state was detected, but the length of time that the operation state was maintained When it is determined that it is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at timing t2 (m+1) in the next frame, it is operated whether or not there is an operation within the period of timing t2 (m) to t2 (m+1). A process of re-determining based on the detected information is executed for each frame.

However, with this, if someone who cannot wait to operate and operates aiming at the timing in anticipation of the occurrence of the production acceptance period, the production acceptance period will not be accepted. As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (effective period) will end. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, the "effect determination to generate the effect after the operation" is allowed only within the effect reception period (effective period). "Detection of state" itself, even if it was done within the period (immediately before) before the occurrence of the effect acceptance period (effective period), this is used as the object (judgment material) for the operation detection judgment. I dare to use it.

For example, in such operation detection determination, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering, etc., it is usually possible to use "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 ms)" as a determination condition. done. In this regard, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment also uses the operation detection information before the timing t1(m) arrives, and within the period of the timing t1(m) to t2(m) "Even if the operation means (eg, the operation button 410) has not been maintained in an operating state for a predetermined time (eg, 3 ms) or more, a predetermined time (eg, 3 ms) or more has occurred before the timing t1 (m). If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time of , it is determined that there has been an operation, and the post-operation effect is executed.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation is performed immediately before the effect reception period (effective period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period). It is assumed that the operation is performed, and the post-operation production is executed. That is, in this case, since the player side also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game.

Which one is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information is not particularly limited. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the operation state has been maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more in units of frames. Frames in which the operation state is maintained (continued) for a period of time (for example, 3 ms) are left as "ON frames", and frames without history as "ON frames" are treated as "OFF frames". I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or at the start of the next frame, or at the time when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the history as "ON frame" may be left. can be

As will be described later, in the "determining process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect" according to this embodiment, three frames having histories of "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are displayed. When the operation detection information is obtained in a state in which the are lined up, an effect reception (determining that there has been an operation) is made, and the effect after the operation can be executed.

Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment determines whether the frame is an "ON frame" or an "OFF frame" at the end of the frame, and stores the history. In the "determining process as to whether or not to generate a post-operation effect" performed at the timing t2(m) shown in , the "m"-th frame including the timing t2(m) is not used as a criterion for determination. That is, in this case, the “m−3”th frame, the “m−2”th frame, and the “m−1”th frame are used as judgment materials, and they are the “OFF frame”, the “ON frame”, and the “ON frame”. It is determined whether or not the history is left as "frame". On the other hand, if the history of "ON frame" is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the "operation In the “determining process for generating post-effect”, the “m”-th frame including the timing t2(m) is also used as determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2"-th frame, the "m-1"-th frame, and the "m"-th frame are used as judgment materials, and they are "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". It is determined whether or not the history is left as

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 226 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the performance acceptance period (effective period). Therefore, at the determination timings (timings t2(m), t2(m+1), t2(m+2), and t2(m+3) in the figure) in each frame after the production receiving period (effective period) occurs, Since it is determined that the history of "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "OFF frame" is left, the effect reception (determination that there was an operation) is not performed, and the effect after the operation is performed. Not executed.

By the way, with regard to the image displayed by the effect display device 1600, there is a delay of two frames (or one frame) from the start of the display processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 until the image appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for determining which image to use as an image according to various determinations and creating a drawing list in response to the determination). Processing in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that receives the processing result (image-related information such as a drawing list) on the side of the peripheral control unit 1511 (preparation buffer (non-display buffer in the so-called double buffering) This occurs because the drawing process on the ) side also requires one frame.

Therefore, conventionally, with respect to the processing related to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)" by the peripheral control unit 1511, the effect receiving period (effective period) occurs in the frame two frames before the "m"th frame. ("m-2"-th frame), whereby the effect during the valid period appears on the effect display device 1600 from the "m"-th frame.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at the time when the m-th frame is started, the "effective period effect (operation waiting block)" is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. One of the features is that it is set to be in a state where there is no effect, and the period up to the "m-1"th frame immediately before the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs "Processing period for ``Appearance EF block E'')", and the period from the "m"th frame in which the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs is defined as ``effect during the effective period (such as model images and gauge displays" The processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 225, the processing period for pre-effective period effect (“appearance EF block E” such as effect effect) is continued after the “m”th frame, and the “effective During the period, it may be overlapped with the processing period for effect ("operation waiting block E" such as a model image or gauge display).

More specifically, during the predetermined period until the arrival of the "m"th frame (or the period after that), the drawing list is generated based on the information corresponding to the "performance before the valid period (effect rendering, etc.)". It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512). On the other hand, during the predetermined period after the arrival of the "m"th frame (the period during which the effect is performed during the effective period), drawing is performed based on the information corresponding to the "effect during the effective period (simulated image, gauge display, etc.)" A list is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control section 1512).

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs the “effective period pre-effect (appearing EF block E)” up to the “m−1”th frame (or even after that). is executed, and from the "m"th frame onwards, the processing related to "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)" is executed. The "pre-effective period effect (display based on block E for appearing EF)" is still being executed, and the "during effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" finally starts in the "m+2"th frame. It will be done. That is, in this case, from the time when the "effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" is not yet displayed ("m"-th frame, "m+1"-th frame), the effect is internally accepted. As a result, the player gets ahead of the game, and as a result, the player operates just before the "effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the performance reception is performed, and the occurrence of a situation in which the performance cannot be confirmed after the operation can be suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 226, the processing related to "pre-effective period effect (display based on appearing EF block E)" and the process related to "during effective period effect (display based on appearing EF block E)" For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit 1511 executes each frame. However, when these effects are displayed using moving image data, it is only necessary for the peripheral control unit 1511 to create a drawing list based on the "information corresponding to moving images" at the start frame of the processing. That is, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) automatically reads and displays the image data. The processing may not necessarily be performed for each frame within the unit 1511 .

FIG. 227 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m+1”-th frame in the effect accepting period (effective period) shown in FIG.

As described above, in the "determining process for generating post-operation effects" according to this embodiment, there are three frames with histories of "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". When the operation detection information in the form of lining up is obtained, an effect reception (determining that there is an operation) is made so that the effect after the operation can be executed.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 227, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m+1) in the “m+1”th frame (timing before the judgment timing of acceptance of the effect). The "m+1"th frame itself also leaves a history as an "ON frame" at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2(m+1) in the frame, any of the three frames (“m−2”th frame, “m−1”th frame, and “m”th frame) to be judged is Since it is an "OFF frame", there is no effect reception (determination that an operation has been performed).

At timing t2 (m+2) in the next frame, the “m+2”th frame, the three frames (“m−1”th frame, “m”th frame, and “m+1”th frame) to be judged are , "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "ON frame", respectively, are left in the history, so there is no effect acceptance (determination that there has been an operation).

Furthermore, at timing t2 (m+3) in the next frame, the "m+3"th frame, the three frames ("m"th frame, "m+1"th frame, and "m+2"th frame) to be determined are: Records of "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are left, respectively.

According to such a configuration, since the "m+1"th frame and the "m+2"th frame are set to be "ON frames", the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer over two frames within the effect acceptance period (effective period). (eg, 3 ms) it can be determined that there is a sustained condition. In addition, it is possible to determine that the operation is started within the rendering reception period (effective period) by the fact that the "m"th frame is the "OFF frame". In other words, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period during which reception of the effect is permitted. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. ) (here, timing t2(m+3)), the post-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) is executed (started). In this example, the processing for turning off the operation state flag is executed at the time the effect is accepted, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of the frame. It is sufficient if the operation determination process is (substantially) not performed in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the reception of the effect.

In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when an effect is accepted at timing t2 (m+3), the effect "after operation (operation It is assumed that processing relating to the post-use block E)" is to be performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the "m+5"-th frame (not shown) after two frames.

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when an operation is started in the “m−2”-th frame in the effect accepting period (effective period) shown in FIG.

As described above, in the "determining process for generating post-operation effects" according to this embodiment, there are three frames with histories of "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". When the operation detection information in the form of lining up is obtained, an effect reception (determining that there is an operation) is made so that the effect after the operation can be executed.

Also, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the "effect determination to generate the effect after the operation" is allowed only within the effect reception period (effective period). As for this itself, even if it was done within the period (several frames immediately before) before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), this is the object of the operation detection judgment (judgment I dare to use it as a material).

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation is started within the "m-2"-th frame two frames before the "m"-th frame in which the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such timing is not used in the determination regarding reception of the effect. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) within the "m"th frame, the timing t2 within the "m"th frame In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the previous three frames (“m−3”th frame, “m−2”th frame, and “m−1”th frame) is sent to the effect reception. It will be used in such judgment. In this example, these frames (“m−3”th frame, “m−2”th frame, and “m−1”th frame) are respectively “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame”. , and the effect reception (determination that there was an operation) is made.

According to such a configuration, the "m-3"th frame is the "OFF frame", and the "m-2"th frame and the "m-1"th frame are the "ON frames". It is possible to determine that the operation state has been maintained for a predetermined time or longer (for example, 3 ms) over the two frames immediately before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the "m-2"th frame two frames before the "m"th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. In the example shown in FIG. 228, the effect reception is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation effect (here, "post-operation block E") is generated. ) will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 228, the effect acceptance period (effective period) itself ends in an extremely short period of time that does not continue even for one frame. Even if the operation is started immediately before the occurrence of the period) in anticipation of the occurrence of the operation, it is assumed that the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (effective period) and the post-operation effect is generated. You will be able to That is, in this case, the player can feel that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation, so that the game interest can be preferably maintained.

However, if the effect acceptance in such a manner is frequently issued, the meaning of the effect acceptance period (effective period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, at timing t2 (m) in the “m”-th frame, based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), effect reception is performed. is performed, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the model image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, since it is possible to have a considerable amount of suspicion as to whether or not the "post-operation effect" is caused by being given the opportunity to operate, the effect acceptance period (valid period) can be expected to suppress the start of the operation before it occurs.

It should be noted that there is no particular limitation on the implementation method for "executing the post-operation effect without displaying a model image or gauge display". In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, the processing relating to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)" is performed from the "m"th frame without considering the delay of two frames. After that, when the effect is accepted at timing t2 (m), the processing related to the “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is performed from the frame (“m”th frame) in which the effect is accepted. I'm trying As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the processing related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is executed without executing the process related to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)". As a result, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the model image or the gauge display.

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the "m-2"th frame is maintained across timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame. We have decided to explain what kind of determination is made under this assumption, and how the effect according to this determination is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 229, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2”-th frame is not maintained across the timing t2(m) in the “m”-th frame. -1”th frame, if the “m−2”th frame and the “m−1”th frame each leave a history as an “ON frame” (each If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing as described with reference to FIG. 228, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

In other words, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, the player's operation is not detected at all after the effect reception period occurs, and is performed only during the period before the effect reception period occurs. However, the judgment condition for receiving the effect at timing t2 (m) (the 'm-3'th frame, the 'm-2'th frame, and the 'm-1'th frame are all 'OFF frames') , "ON frame", and "ON frame" are recorded) are satisfied, the effect reception is performed even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2(m), and the operation is performed. A post-effect will be executed.

The same thing can be said about such a configuration when the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, in the example shown in FIG. 227, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2(m+3), and the timing before the timing t2(m+3) in the "m+3"th frame, or at the timing "m+2". Even if the operation state ends within the th frame, the judgment conditions for acceptance of the effect at the timing t2 (m+3) (“m” th frame, “m+1” th frame, and “m+2” th frame are “ 227 even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2(m+3) as long as the conditions are satisfied. Effect reception is performed as shown, and the post-operation effect is executed.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing when the "determination regarding reception of the effect" is performed, but the timing when the "determination regarding reception of the effect" is performed. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in the period before (in this embodiment, when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of the two frames), the operation that is the operation target An effect reception is made under the condition that the operation is properly performed on the means, and the effect after the operation is executed.

Here, the operation detection information obtained before the production reception period (valid period) occurs is used in the "determination process for production reception" that is performed after the production reception period (valid period) occurs. If you simply use it as a judgment material, for example, even the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed, and there is no sign that the effect acceptance period (effective period) will occur. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that someone will appear who will accept the production. In other words, if such an operation is permitted, the significance of the effect acceptance period (valid period) itself may be lost, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease.

Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, not only the "ON frame" is targeted for determination, but the presence of each of the "OFF frame" and the "ON frame" is detected. It is designed to solve the above concerns. In this embodiment, ON/OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to adopt a technique such as "the effect is accepted on the condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or longer from the timing". Even in such a case, it is possible to determine how long before the timing of the rise or fall of the sensor signal occurred before the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurred, It is possible to solve the above problem by judging how long it continues.

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when an operation is started from the “m−3”th frame during the effect accepting period (effective period) shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 230, in this example, an operation started in the "m-3"th frame three frames before the "m"th frame in which the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs It is assumed that the processing continues up to the “m+2”-th frame within the acceptance period (effective period). In this example as well, when the effect reception period occurs, first, at timing t2(m) in the "m"th frame, "judgment regarding effect reception" is made. The operation detection information acquired earlier (here, the operation detection information acquired in the “m−3”th frame, the “m−2”th frame, and the “m−1”th frame) is used as a basis for the determination. It is designed to be

However, in this example, the "m-3"th frame, the "m-2"th frame, and the "m-1"th frame are recorded as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. Therefore, as a result of the "determination regarding acceptance of effect" at timing t2(m), effect acceptance (determination that there has been an operation) is not made. Not only that, even in the "judgment regarding acceptance of effect" that is performed in the next frame or later such as timing t2 (m+1), the three frames that are the object of the judgment are "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". Therefore, as long as the operation state from the "m-3"th frame is maintained, the result of the "judgment regarding reception of the effect" performed in each frame will be the effect. No acceptance (determination that there has been an operation) is performed.

That is, in this case, once the operation state maintained from the "m-3"th frame is ended, and after creating a frame in which the history as the "OFF frame" is left, the operation must be performed again. It is possible to prevent (determination that an operation has been performed) from being made. As a result, even if the operation state is maintained from the time when the premonition effect (appearance effect) is not even executed and there is no sign that the effect reception period (effective period) will occur, It is possible to preferably avoid receiving performance reception.

As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 227 to 230, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m) in the “m”th frame, the post-operation effect is performed without displaying the model image or the gauge display. (See in particular FIG. 228). However, in this case, it is not possible to feel that the effect has occurred after the operation due to the operation, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. However, the presentation progress may be made so that the model image or the gauge display is always displayed. In this case, regarding the feature that "at the time the m-th frame is started, the 'effect during valid period (operation waiting block)' is not yet displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600", It is not always necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave this.

The method of realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited, either. This can be realized by setting the timing at which "processing" is performed to be opposite to that in the example shown in FIG.

FIG. 231 shows the effect receiving period (valid It is a flow chart showing an example of period).

As shown in FIG. 231, assuming that the "m"-th frame has arrived, first, at timing t12 (m) in the frame, the operation state flag is turned on (set). done. As a result, an effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs, but in the "m"th frame, after the effect acceptance period (valid period) occurs, the "determination process for effect acceptance" is performed. never.

That is, although illustration is omitted, in the "m"-th frame, the timing for performing the "determination process for acceptance of effect" comes before timing t12(m). At this time, the "determining process for receiving the effect" itself is not performed, or the "determining process for receiving the effect" has been performed, but the effect receiving period (valid period) has not occurred. Assuming that there is, a determination is made that the performance reception is not performed.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect reception from being performed in a frame (here, the “m”-th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. Therefore, in a frame (here, the “m”th frame) in which an effect accepting period (effective period) occurs, “effect during effective period (operation waiting block E )” is always performed, and the display image (rendering during the effective period) corresponding to the processing can be made to appear on the rendering display device 1600 in the “m+2”-th frame after two frames. become.

That is, in this case, after the effect reception period has occurred, the effect reception is performed at the shortest, the "m-2"th frame, the "m-1"th frame, and the "m"th frame, respectively, as "OFF frames". , "ON frame", and "ON frame" are left, and timing t11(m+1) within the "m+1"th frame arrives. At this time, in the peripheral control unit 1511, processing relating to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is performed based on the reception of the effect. At this time, in the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512), the preparation buffer ( Rendering processing is already being performed on the non-display buffer side (see "processing in image control means" in FIG. 231).

Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even if the effect reception is received in the shortest time after the effect reception period has occurred, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect during the effective period at the "m+2"th frame. ” will be displayed, and in the “m+3”th frame, the “post-operation effect” will be displayed. become.

However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the model image or the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 226, even in a frame (here, the “m”-th frame) in which an effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs, the effect can be accepted at timing t2(m). Then, even if the effect is accepted at the timing t2(m), at the timing t2(m), the peripheral control unit 1511 performs the processing related to the "effective period effect (operation waiting block E)". may be performed.

That is, in this case, the frame for performing the processing related to the "post-operation effect (post-operation block E)" in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the effect acceptance is set to one frame for the frame for which the effect is accepted. will be delayed by Therefore, even if the effect is accepted at the timing t2(m) in the “m”th frame, the peripheral control unit 1511 will generate “effect during the valid period (for waiting for operation)” in the “m”th frame. Block E)” will be performed, and in the next frame, the “m+1”-th frame, the processing regarding “post-operation effect (post-operation block E)” will be performed in the peripheral control unit 1511. . Such a "delay" is not limited to the frame (here, the "m"-th frame) in which the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs, but occurs in any frame when the effect is accepted. . Even with such a method, even if the reception of the production is made in the shortest time after the production acceptance period has occurred, the post-operation production can be started after the model image or gauge display is displayed. Become.

In this way, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and their other examples, in the "determination process for reception of effect" performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, before the m-th frame starts, The ``detection information from the operation detection means'' acquired in the previous ``m-1''th frame is also used as a criterion for the reception of the effect. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples thereof, the “receipt from the operation detection means” acquired in the “m−1”-th frame before the “m-th” frame starts Both the "detected information" and the "detected information from the operation detection means" acquired in the "m-2"th frame are used as criteria for acceptance of the effect. That is, in this case, in anticipation of the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period), even if the operation is performed immediately before that period (within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the effective period occurs), this effect is not performed. Since the post-operation effect will be executed assuming that the operation is performed within the acceptance period (valid period), the player will also feel that the operation has caused the post-operation effect to occur. come to remember.

Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "determining process for acceptance of effect" in the m-th frame is performed, the "operation detecting means" acquired in the frame before the m-th frame Based on "detected information from". In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only in anticipation of the production acceptance period (effective period) occurring immediately before that period (within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the effective period occurs). , Since the post-operation effect is executed assuming that the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (effective period), the player side also has the post-operation effect caused by the operation. You will be able to remember what happened.

However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to be the "ON frame" at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the "ON frame" when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed within the frame. You may make it operate (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection means) acquired during the period from the start of the m-th frame to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period (effective period) is also used as a determination material for the effect acceptance. will be used. That is, in this case, an operation (for example, maintaining an operation state for 3 ms or more) is performed in the "m-1"-th frame and the "m"-th frame, and an operation is performed in the "m-2"-th frame. When it is determined that the operation has not been performed (for example, the operating state is less than 3 ms), the effect is accepted. According to such a configuration, since the time until the player's operation is used as a judgment material is shortened, it is possible to provide a highly responsive post-operation effect.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 230 and other examples thereof, the model image and the gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area at the time when the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs. ing. When the effect is received in the m-th frame, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. In other words, in this case, even if the operation state is maintained only in anticipation of the production acceptance period (effective period) occurring immediately before that period (within a very short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the effective period occurs). , while considering that the operation is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) and executing the post-operation effect, It will be possible to add a demerit to the effect, such as the button image or gauge display will not be displayed, and it will be possible to encourage proper operation within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, when a button image or gauge display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of the modes is displayed, and it is suggested by the mode. This results in a directing demerit, such as the inability to grasp the degree of expectation of the audience.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and other examples, when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the effect is not received. It becomes possible to prompt the user to operate in an appropriate mode for the performance acceptance period.

However, on the other hand, when the effect acceptance period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than the specific time, rather than for a long time, the effect is accepted. Even if the operation is performed immediately before the occurrence of the period (effective period), it is assumed that the operation is performed within the effect acceptance period (effective period), and the post-operation effect is performed. is executed, the player also feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

Moreover, in order to receive the presentation, it is not enough to maintain the operation state for a time shorter than the specific time, and it is required to maintain the operation state for a time longer than the predetermined time. Therefore, erroneous detection due to chattering or the like can be suitably avoided.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 231 and its other examples, in the processing in the “mth” frame when the effect reception period starts, even if any operation detection information is obtained, the processing related to the post-operation effect ( display processing, lamp light emission processing, sound output processing, and movable body operation processing in the effect display device 1600), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is “information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect. , processing to read out in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and the process when the effect is not accepted (processing to read out the information corresponding to the image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) decided to carry out. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained within the m-th frame in which the effect reception period starts, processing (effects At least a part (display processing in the effect display device 1600) of display processing in the display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation is always performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, the processing corresponding to the acceptance of the effect (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511) is started with a delay. Before that, the processing (processing for reading information corresponding to the image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the effect is not accepted is always executed. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is the effect started due to the operation by the player.

As described above as another example of the example shown in FIG. In the frame for which the determination has been made, the "processing for reading out the information corresponding to the image data of the after-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not executed, and in the next frame, "the information corresponding to the image data of the after-operation effect is read" is not executed. , reading processing in the peripheral control unit 1511” may be executed. That is, in this case, among the processing related to the post-operation effects (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp light emission, processing related to sound output, and processing related to movable body operation), at least the display processing in the effect display device 1600 is determined. In the frame in which the is performed, the processing (processing for reading out information corresponding to the image data for waiting for operation in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the effect is not accepted is executed. However, at this time, among the processing related to the post-operation effect (display processing in the effect display device 1600, processing related to lamp emission, processing related to sound output, processing related to movable body operation), for example, “processing related to lamp emission” and “processing related to sound output With respect to the processing", a process of reading out the "information on the light emission mode after the operation" and the "information on the sound output after the operation" may be performed in the frame in which the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, output of lamps and sounds is started in the form after the operation based on the read information within the frame in which the effect determination is made or within the next frame.

Further, as shown in FIG. 225, in the case of adopting the method of displaying the effect image by blocks, when the effect reception by the operation is performed, the "post-operation block" for executing the post-operation effect is displayed. In addition, the "Disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)" to display the disappearing effect image until the operation promoting image such as the model image and gauge display that was displayed until then is hidden. It may be executed. According to such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)", for example, an image in which a model image or gauge display fades out (an image that gradually disappears) when the effect is received. becomes displayable. Further, such a "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)" may be executed when the effect reception period ends without performing the post-operation effect. Regarding "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)", it is attached to the background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for background) and the operation waiting block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting). It is possible to configure such that the read out process is executed by turning on the availability information in the process read based on the process identification information.

226 to 231, the processing for generating a state in which the reception of effects is permitted (processing for operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state) is performed after the symbol variation is started. It may be executed based on (elapsed time), etc., and may not necessarily be executed with a frame as a trigger.

Further, the "simulated image" and "gauge display" may be displayed as a pre-effective period effect (display based on the appearing EF block E). However, regarding the display mode when the effect before the effective period (display based on block E for appearing EF) is being performed, it will be displayed semi-transparently, or will be displayed dimly due to other effect displays. It is required to display a "simulated image" or a "gauge display" in a manner different from that during the "effective period effect (display based on the operation waiting block E)". Also, at this time, in the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearing EF block E), one of the "simulated image" and the "gauge display" may be displayed, and the effect may proceed without displaying the other. .

[Additional performance of simulated image display]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of the production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, when such production judgment (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, according to the result of the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern will be executed along with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background notice) and movable body operation (role production). As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which the reception of the effect is permitted. However, as will be described later, the form of the allowable reception sound that is output when the operation acceptance effect is generated is changed according to the result of the effect determination, so that the post-operation effect is executed in a highly anticipated manner. It is designed to suggest the ratio of winning and the ratio of stopping the jackpot pattern.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the variation pattern determination, Even if there is, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (advance judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (when a predetermined condition is established), It is possible to generate an operation reception effect (effective period) in which reception of effect is permitted. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, unless a special result is obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, no operation reception performance (effective period) occurs. . In addition, the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation reception effect (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, the operation reception effect (effective period) will be generated. may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that generates the operation acceptance effect (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions is a predetermined effect for the effect member that is the object of the effect, as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in a speaker, a light emission change by a lamp, and a effect operation by a movable decorative body) is performed. The reception effect (effective period) itself is poor in effect, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease until the effect is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect,
・During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), the “BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)” corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) is in an unsuppressed mode. During the execution period of the pattern production (production pattern) based on the low-expectation unsuppressed reception production and high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) that gives an operation opportunity while being output, the fluctuation pattern (production pattern) Whether the corresponding "BGM playback (specific type of effect sound)" is output in a suppressed mode or silent, or in a non-output state (whether the playback period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has been terminated, etc.), various measures have been taken, such as enabling at least the generation of the high-expectation-suppressed-reception effect that gives an operation opportunity (Fig. 144). 195, 207 to 231).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image displayed in the operation acceptance effect is further displayed as an integrated model image that is integrated with the periphery decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image. By doing so, it is intended to improve the amusement of the game when the operation acceptance effect (effective period) occurs. For such an integrated model image, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to display it both in the reception performance (effective period) and in both the low-expectation non-suppressed reception performance and the high-expectation suppressed reception performance. Also, each of the production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231) described above can be realized by replacing the display mode of the exemplified model images with one of the integrated model images described below. This is desirable in terms of improving the amusement of the game.

A case where the model image is displayed as the "integrated model image" will be described below.
First, to explain the "simulation image" again, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception presentation includes the "operation receiving part" that receives the operation by the player, and the peripheral edge of the operation receiving part. A "peripheral decorative portion" for decoration is provided. In this regard, the "simulated image" means an image that imitates the "operation receiving section" of such operation means. The "operation receiving part" is usually provided so as to be displaced by the player's operation, and the "peripheral decorative part" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. will be equivalent to 146 and 161 (sword ornament 5001), the "operation receiving portion" corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the "peripheral decorative portion" corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

FIG. 232 shows an "integrated model image" displayed when an operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for an operation means provided with an "operation receiving portion" that receives a "pressing operation" by a player. It is a figure which shows the example.

In this example of explanation, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an "operation receiving section" on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 . That is, when the handle button 5014 is "pressed" by the player, it is pushed into the handle portion 5012 and detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detected information is used as an effect (e.g., a trigger for execution of effect after operation). ). According to such a configuration, the sword ornament 5001 as an operation unit includes a "handle button 5014" that can operate (vertically move) with respect to the handle 5012, and a "handle button 5014" that can operate (vertically move) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving portions are provided with the possible “handle portion 5012”.

FIG. 232 explains the "integrated model image" when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) occurs, in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. I decided to. However, in the examples described below, including FIG. It may be applied as an "integrated model image" when an operation reception effect (effective period) in which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, the "simulated image imitating the operation button 410" illustrated in each of the above-described production examples (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. It is possible to replace it, and in this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and is omitted as a member.

As shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is provided with an opportunity to operate. When an effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button model image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge. The integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are not separately prepared as image data, but are integrated into one image data (integrated image data). It is designed to be displayed only as simulated images (IGa to IGd). Further, when the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompting displays such as "press" and "down arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation effects to be executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) are "relatively low expectation first effect mode" and "relative A plurality of production modes are prepared, including the second production mode, which is highly expected, and one of these production modes is executed based on the result of the big hit judgment (production judgment). . In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d),
232(b) (integrated model image IGb) than when the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
232(c) (integrated model image IGc) than when the state (integrated model image IGB) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
232(d) (integrated model image IGd) than when the mode (integrated model image IGc) shown in FIG. When appears, as a post-operation production, the appearance ratio of "relatively high expectations for the second production mode" is higher. Any one of the simulated images IGa to IGd is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as integrated model images IGa to IGd. Even if at least two aspects are prepared, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period. Moreover, it is also possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd) and display any one of the prepared modes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
・Operating means (sword ornaments 5001, 5001, production operation unit 400),
integrated model image display means for displaying a model image imitating the operation receiving part as integrated model images IGa to IGd integrated with peripheral edge decoration images decorating the peripheral edge of the model image;
and an operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated model image is displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion, The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

Details of the “integrated model images” shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) will be described separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGa to IGd).

First, the “integrated model image IGa” shown in FIG. 232(a) is composed of a normal button model image BMGa and a normal border decoration image SSGa that decorates the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa. However, in the "integrated simulated image IGa", the normal button simulated image BMGa is displayed as "an image imitating the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the opportunity to operate is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa is "a peripheral edge decoration portion (handle portion 5012 or frame Unit 415) is not simulated, and as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the periphery of the normal button model image BMGa is decorated.

According to such a configuration, even if a plurality of operation means are provided, it is possible to determine to which one of the operation means the operation opportunity is given. ) can be easily recognized by visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa that imitates the button model image BMGa. Moreover, the normal button model image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral edge decoration portion, but a gorgeous and large image (integrated model image IGa) integrated with a preferable peripheral edge decoration image for improving decorativeness and performance. ), the performance impact when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the amusement of the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost or installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a highly flexible performance that is not bound by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration. become.

In the “integrated model image IGa” shown in FIG. 232(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is represented as a base for installing a button (normal button model image BMGa). It has a predetermined decoration that warns that it is a button with a high degree of danger. As described above, the "pedestal" and the "predetermined decoration" have different shapes and are represented as different decorations from the actual peripheral edge decoration.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGa" according to this embodiment, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal edge decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases with the lapse of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced to a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the valid period. is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area of . That is, in this case, the normal border decoration image SSGa not only has the function of suggesting the operation means to be operated, but also suggests the remaining time until the state (effective period) in which operation reception is permitted ends. It also has a remaining time suggesting function.

In the normal edge decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232(a), a division image KG is provided to divide the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by the division image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal edge decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG".

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232(a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. , a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed so as to be superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. According to such a configuration, even in a portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized. It is possible to preferably maintain amusement in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

When realizing such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superimposed on the display target area to which the predetermined decoration is applied. In addition to the method of displaying the area with a predetermined decoration, it is also possible to employ a method of displaying the area itself to be displayed with a predetermined decoration by changing the color of the area with the gauge and the area without the gauge. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as a single image data, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232(a), the predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") applied within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is replaced by the normal peripheral edge decoration. Since the image SSGa is applied so as to extend over other areas, the display target area itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be more highly integrated and decorative. Therefore, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 232(a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern button to be operated is displayed. 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared for the button model image BMG, and as one of these modes, the normal button model image BMGa is displayed. , it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated without visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa.

The "button model image BMGa (FIG. 232(a))" does not necessarily have to be an exact model of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. What is necessary is just to be displayed with a copy level (deformation, etc.) to the extent that it is possible to recognize which operation means it is.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. , and a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. However, in the "integrated model image IGb", the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGa", but the button model image BMG is displayed as the above-mentioned "button model image BMGa", but a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape.

More specifically, in the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. 232(b), the special button model image BMGb simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. 232(a)) which simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, if such a display method is simply adopted, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize which one of the plurality of operation means is the operation target when the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed.

However, as described above, in the "integrated model image IGa", the "button model image BMGa" imitating the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" and displayed. Therefore, the "normal border decoration image SSGa" itself naturally has a function of suggesting that the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGb", the "special button model image BMGb" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" for display. BMGb" does not properly simulate the operation target, the "integrated model image IGb" as a whole may suggest that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), an operation means different from the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is used for the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". It can be said that it is important not to display when (handle 5012, etc.) is the object of operation.

According to such a configuration, the button model image BMG that simulates the operation receiving portion and the periphery decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG are displayed as an integrated model image. The button model image BMG, which is only a part of the simulated image, can be displayed in a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily bound by the shape of the operation means to be operated, resulting in a more conspicuous effect. It came to be expected to improve the amusement and enjoyment of games through their sexiness and decorativeness.

In the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 232(b), a button with a streamlined shape is depicted with a more stylish design than the "button model image BMGa". Words such as "DANGER" are applied. The appearance of the non-existent ``special button image BMGb'' as a component of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible for the player to easily feel a sense of premium, and the ``button image BMGa'' appears. You will be expected to instinctively sense that expectations are higher than usual.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be the object of operation. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGb". That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) as the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGc” shown in FIG. It is configured as an image integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated model image IGc", the button model image BMG is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa", but the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image". "Image SSGa" is displayed as "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special border decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal border decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decorative part (handle part 5012 or frame unit 415) actually provided around the peripheral edge of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not modeled, and the production display As a virtual decoration on the display effect of the device 1600, the periphery of the button model image BMG is decorated.
A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

According to such "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232(c))", when the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 232(a))" is used as a reference, any operation means can be operated. It is possible to greatly change the overall shape of the “integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))” without causing a change in shape of the “button model image BMG” that suggests whether the opportunity is granted. become able to. As a result, it is possible to achieve highly flexible decorativeness and performance by causing shape changes without sacrificing the function of suggesting the operation target.

In addition, in the "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 232(c)) according to this embodiment, at least part of it is an image having the same decoration as the "normal border decoration image SSGa" (Fig. 232(a)). It is displayed as Therefore, the same post-operation effect is applied when the “integrated model image IGa (FIG. 232(a))” appears and when the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232(c))” appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a specific operation reception effect (effective period).

In particular, in the "special border decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 232(c)) according to this embodiment, a separate member having a special decoration is added to the "normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232(a))". It is displayed as an enlarged image in its entirety in an expanded form. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize that the "special border decoration image SSGb" is displayed as an advanced version of the "normal border decoration image SSGa", and the degree of expectation is higher than when the "button model image BMGa" appears. People are expected to instinctively perceive high things.

In addition, the "special edge decoration image SSGb" (Fig. 232(c)) has a different shape and decoration from the "normal edge decoration image SSGa" (Fig. 232(a)), but the gauge image (predetermined image) The GG display target area itself is not changed at all.

That is, when a part of the integrated model image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, is the display target area or the gauge image merely "a mere part of the decoration" or "the rest of the image?" It is difficult for the player side to distinguish whether it is a portion having a function of suggesting time. In this regard, the ``normal border decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232(a))'' and the ``special border decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232(c))'' are gauges that have an important function of ``indicating the remaining time''. The shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed, and the shape of the other portions is changed. It is possible to realize decorativeness and performance with a high degree of freedom by creating it.

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGc” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, it is also made to be the object of operation. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button model image BMGa in the "integrated model image IGc". That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) as the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target. However, the normal button model image BMGa when the "integrated model image IGc" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") than when the "integrated model image IGa" is displayed. can be In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGd” shown in FIG. It is configured as an image integrated with a peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge. However, in the "integrated model image IGd", the button model image BMG is displayed not as the above-mentioned "normal button model image BMGa" but as a "special button model image BMGb" having a different shape. The border decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special border decoration image SSGb" having a shape different from the "normal border decoration image SSGa" described above.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGd (FIG. 232(d))", the "special button model image BMGb" used in the "integrated model image IGB (FIG. 232(b))" and the "integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))" is displayed as an image integrated with the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". According to such a configuration, the operational effects of the “special button model image BMGb” described above with respect to the “integrated model image IGb (FIG. 232(b))” and the “integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232 ( c))” can be obtained by the above-mentioned “special border decoration image SSGb”. Since the modes of both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that people will instinctively feel that the expectations are high.

On the other hand, while the modes of both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are changed, the same decoration and shape appear in a part of the border decoration image SSG. 232(a) and IGd (FIG. 232(d)). It becomes possible to suggest that it is the operation acceptance effect (effective period).

Also, as shown in FIG. 232(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the “integrated model image IGd” is displayed on the effect display device 1600 is generated, it is also made to be an operation target. The handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "red") as the special button model image BMGb in the "integrated model image IGd". That is, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated can emit light in a mode corresponding to the type of the button model image BMG in the "integrated model image IG". Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation) of the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 to be operated. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated model image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") from when the "integrated model image IGB" is displayed. You may do so. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits light in rainbow colors.

As shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the pattern effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing, and the predetermined operation acceptance effect (effective period) is reached. occurs, the integrated model image IG in which the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are integrated is displayed. Sometimes the other side can be displayed in one of multiple ways. For example, when the button model image BMG is displayed as a "normal button model image BMGa", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either a "normal border decoration image SSGa" or a "special border decoration image SSGb" ( Figure 232 (a), (c)). Further, when the button model image BMG is displayed as the "special button model image BMGb", the border decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the "normal border decoration image SSGa" or the "special border decoration image SSGb" ( Figure 232 (b), (d)). Further, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "normal border decoration image SSGa", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" ( Figure 232 (a), (b)). Further, when the border decoration image SSG is displayed as the "special border decoration image SSGb", the button model image BMG can be displayed as either the "normal button model image BMGa" or the "special button model image BMGb" ( Figure 232 (a), (b)).

According to such a configuration, although the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner, only one side thereof is displayed when the mode changes. Therefore, by looking at the one side whose aspect is not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) is being generated regardless of the aspect displayed on the other side. In addition, by looking at the other side whose aspect is changing, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize the degree of expectation. It should be noted that one side of the modeled button image BMG and the border decoration image SSG may not be changed in mode, and only the other side may be changed in mode.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Then, when the integrated model image IG is displayed during the operation acceptance effect (effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases as time elapses. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "periphery decoration image SSG" has a remaining time suggesting function of suggesting the remaining time until the end of the state in which operation reception is permitted, and indicates which operation means the operation target is. By being displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the "button model image BMG" responsible for the suggestive function, it is possible to grasp the remaining time and the operation target and recognize which of the multiple modes has appeared. It is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained while the operation acceptance effect (effective period) is occurring.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. (there are both parts that have the remaining time suggesting function and parts that do not have the remaining time suggesting function). In other words, the margin decoration image SSG is not intended only to indicate the remaining time of the operation acceptance effect (effective period), and in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed, the "button model image BMG decoration Since it is possible to actively adopt a display mode for the purpose of "improving the performance", it is possible to suggest the remaining time, but at the same time, the performance when the operation acceptance performance, which is an important performance, occurs. can be improved significantly. In order to obtain such effects, it is more desirable to display the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. I can say.

232(a) to 232(d), the button model image BMG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes when the border decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, when the “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decorative portion, is one aspect, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), which is the operation receiving portion, has multiple aspects (multiple luminescent colors). ). Therefore, when the button model image BMG changes, it can be confirmed only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be copied.

Further, in the integrated model images IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), when the button model image BMG is displayed in one mode, the border decoration image SSG can be displayed in one of a plurality of modes. However, as a matter of fact, the “handle portion 5012”, which is the peripheral decoration portion, is designed not to change into any one of the multiple modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral decoration image SSG decorates the peripheral edge of the model button image BMG as a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 . Therefore, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not need to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012" which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions that are preferable for enlivening the presentation. Note that the "handle 5012", which is the peripheral decorative part, may be provided so as not to be changed in a plurality of modes, such as being non-luminous.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), both the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG may change (FIG. 232(d)). However, as a matter of fact, it is desirable to change the mode of both the button model image BMG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG when the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, is one aspect.

Different aspects appear in the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral edge decoration portion, depending on whether the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". You may do so. However, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG changes at least in shape depending on whether the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral edge decoration image SSGa" or the "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". It is desirable that the “handle portion 5012” is allowed to cause only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) that does not involve a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral edge decoration part as one whose shape cannot be changed in the first place, in order to emphasize the virtual rendering function of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model images include a button model image BMG that simulates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), and a pattern image that simulates the handle portion 5012. TMG is prepared, and the form of the margin decoration image SSG is changed according to which of these model images is displayed. That is, in this case, the peripheral edge decoration image SSGa,b that decorates the peripheral edge of the button model image BMG cannot be displayed when a model image different from the button model image BMG is displayed. The decorative images SSGa,b themselves can also be expected to have a function of suggesting which operation means the operation target is.

If the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG differs according to the form of the model image (button model image BMG, pattern image TMG), the form (thickness , length) should also be different. The operation reception effect in which the button model image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing within the same variation pattern (which one occurs is selected according to the effect determination). may be performed), or may be an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or different timings. The border decoration image SSG that appears when the button pattern image BMG is a model image BMG does not imitate the border decoration part, and the border decoration image SSG that appears when the pattern image TMG is a model image TMG imitates the border decoration part. may However, even if the form (thickness, length) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception rendering (effective period) may be the same.

Further, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG have A predetermined decoration (“striped pattern” in this case) is applied to the display area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration increases, so that the interest in the game can be improved. become able to.

In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in such a manner as to be superimposed on a display target area to which a predetermined decoration is applied. ing. According to such a configuration, even in a portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and can be visually recognized. It is possible to preferably maintain amusement in the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Alternatively, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration. In this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration decreases as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. is reduced, the player who dislikes the reduction of the predetermined decoration is encouraged to perform the operation early.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral edge decorative portion (handle portion 5012 or frame unit 415) provided in the frame is not simulated, and the image represents an insubstantial object as a game machine component. Therefore, it is possible to achieve a higher degree of freedom in decorativeness and presentation without being bound by the substance of a game machine component.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), among the button model image BMG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, at least the peripheral edge decoration image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the border decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button model image BMG. It is possible to appropriately suggest whether or not it is, and to change the shape of the integrated model image IG to realize a display with higher performance and decorativeness.

As for the border decoration image SSG, when the button model image BMG is in one mode, the shape may not necessarily be changed, and only the color may be changed. However, the reason why the shape change is allowed is that the border decoration image SSG expresses an insubstantial object and that the border decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the model button image BMG. That is why, in this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the margin decoration image SSG has great technical value.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed so as to increase its size. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, there is a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (the number of decorations, etc.), or a plurality of modes with different outline shapes (rectangular parallelepiped, sphere, etc.). It is possible to employ a method such as one that is displayed by , or a method that widens the target range of a predetermined object that is represented as an image. Also, as will be described later, regarding the change in the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as an indication effect, an effect is executed in which the expectation level is changed stepwise from the form with the low expectation to the form with the high expectation. It is also possible to allow operation reception in the operation reception presentation while the changed form is maintained.

In addition, in the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG is displayed in the same form without being changed (at least in shape). Therefore, even if the form of the peripheral edge decoration image SSG changes, it is possible to preferably maintain the function of suggesting how much time remains, and thus the important function can be maintained. , the degree of expectation can also be suggested by a shape change in an area different from the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

Depending on which of the effects described above is intended to be achieved, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG may not necessarily represent an insubstantial object. It may be displayed as an image imitating the part.

The integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d) can be displayed dynamically during the "effective period during which operation reception is permitted" such as a predetermined operation reception presentation. This prompts the player to perform an operation.

However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, the button model image BMG and the border decoration image SSG are displayed in an integrated manner. Only one side is displayed dynamically, and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, one side contributes to improving the performance when the button performance, which is an important performance, is generated by the dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed so as to remain in place. By doing so, when the integrated model image IG is viewed as a whole, it does not move and is displayed, so visibility can be preferably ensured.

In the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d), the button model image BMG is dynamically changed so as to depict how the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. However, dynamic display of the border decoration image SSG is prohibited. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the non-dynamically displayed side (peripheral decoration image SSG), and when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. can be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases with the lapse of time.

In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the side of the integrated model image IG that ensures suitable visibility (peripheral decoration image SSG that is not dynamically displayed). As a result, the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs is improved by dynamic display by the button model image BMG, but how much time is left to allow the reception of the performance? can be easily recognized.

In addition, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG is also included in the area where it is not displayed. That is, in this case, when performing an effect suggesting the degree of expectation on the side of the integrated model image IG that has secured suitable visibility, the effect is performed in an area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from being adversely affected.

A region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the margin decoration image SSG, the shape of the margin decoration image SSG itself, and the button model image BMG are provided with a plurality of aspects with different expectations. Although one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (performance determination), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself have different expectations. A plurality of modes may be provided, and one of the modes may be displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

By the way, as shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d), when the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG, In addition, when the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included in the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or pattern in the peripheral edge decoration image SSG? , or has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, there is a concern that it will become difficult to grasp the position to which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture of the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral decoration image SSG, which may reduce the interest in the game. .

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( An image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image obtained by partially changing the form of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed in the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

More specifically, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is added to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed at or near the end of the display target area. Then, according to the displacement of the terminal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image" in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed is also displaced in the same manner.

According to such a configuration, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image obtained by partially changing the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the validity period ends, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely a decoration or suggests the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking , the remaining time can be recognized. In this sense, when displaying such a "specific image", it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a display example of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the effective period during which operation reception is permitted.

As shown in FIG. 233, if the timing A0 for starting the effective period (predetermined operation reception effect) within the predetermined variation pattern has arrived, the effect display device 1600 , an integrated model image IG, and an operation prompting image such as "press!", "downward arrow", etc. are displayed.

In this example, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 232(a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG. ) may be displayed in any of the modes shown in FIG. Even if the integrated model image IG is displayed in any manner, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the effective period, the display of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes changes in the mode described below with the lapse of time.

As shown in FIG. 233(a), first, in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire display target area. It will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the valid period has just started.

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233(a), at timing A0, which is the start timing of the valid period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG "Specific image whose mode is partially changed" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not a "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is being displayed. Only by confirming, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether or not the predetermined time has already passed since the acceptance of the operation (the remaining crotch area is reduced).

However, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed," A gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in such a manner that "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until a predetermined time (the time required for the entire appearance of the specific image to finish appearing) elapses. is displayed in the display target area of .

For example, in the integrated model image IG at timing A1, which is a short time after timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), as shown in FIG. A ``specific image TG'' as a specific image different from the ``specified image'', or a ``specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has been partially changed'' appears until about half of the image is visible. It can be seen that the display area is in the stage of increasing with the lapse of time.

In the integrated model image IG at timings A2 and A3 after a large amount of time has elapsed, as shown in FIGS. A ``specific image TG'' as a ``specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG'' has already finished appearing in its entirety. It can be seen that the (predetermined image) is in a situation of being displaced within the display target area of GG.

That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is a gauge image (predetermined image) that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced. Image) Displayed at or near the end of GG, and displayed such that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end of gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become.

The "specific image TG" according to this embodiment is displayed at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as an image with a star-shaped mark in a blank square space. It is a thing. However, the "specific image TG" may not be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in such a manner that the distal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the same image gradually fades over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image that appears at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time has run out when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). Therefore, even when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period expires), at least a part (or all of them) will not be hidden and the display state will be maintained.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and about half of the display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is hidden.

However, as described above, the "specific image TG" originally does not function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is most desirable to display the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period, so that the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. You may make it

However, it is difficult to achieve a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG becomes exactly "0" at the end of the effective period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed in accordance with the displacement of the terminal portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG (in a continuous manner). is displayed so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, to what extent of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image ( Predetermined image) GG can be ambiguous.

That is, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period expires and most of its display area (more than half or all) remains, the player cannot When viewed, it appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (here, non-display) when the effective period expires. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game while the operation acceptance effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation acceptance effect expires, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed because at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and is terminated. Even if the period does not end immediately, it is possible to display so that the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a lag between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 233, at the timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specified image" is not displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" It may be displayed within the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG.

According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or a specific image obtained by partially changing the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it can be shown positively as if it were a It is hoped that improvements will be made.

FIG. 234 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated model image IG from the start to the end of the validity period during which operation reception is permitted.

Now, assuming that the timing A0 at which the effective period (predetermined operation reception effect) starts within the predetermined variation pattern has arrived, even in the example shown in FIG. , an integrated model image IG, and an operation prompting image such as "press!", "downward arrow", etc. are displayed.

In this example as well, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 232(a) is displayed as the integrated model image IG. You may make it display by any of the aspects shown to d). Even if the integrated model image IG is displayed in any manner, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the effective period, the display of the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes changes in the modes shown in FIGS. .

In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 234(a), in the integrated model image IG at the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire area of the display target area. They are not displayed, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed. At the timing A0 (the start timing of the effective period), the "specific image TG" may be displayed in its entirety, although only a portion thereof may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it look as if the "specific image TG" functions as a part of the "gauge image GG", so it seems that a longer time remains than it appears. It is possible to

The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image that expresses an “eraser”, and cannot fit within the area surrounded by the division image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG), and is , an area whose mode can change according to the degree of expectation, etc.). With such a configuration, the "specific image TG" can be made more conspicuous than the "gauge image GG", and the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left can be suppressed. Be expected.

Further, in this example, when time passes from timing A0 to timings A2 and A3, and the "specific image TG" is displaced, the "specific image TG" is displaced as shown in FIGS. ” changes to a ”blank area” as if it had been erased with an eraser. According to such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" expressed in multiple colors (including similar colors and gloss expression) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the amount of displacement of the "specific image TG". Sometimes, the reduced area is expressed in only one color, so the contrast with the "specific image TG" as a boundary becomes prominent, suggesting how much time is left. It is possible to make it easier for the player side to recognize that it is a depiction to do. It is desirable that the color that appears in the reduced area be a color that is not used in the "gauge image GG".

In the example shown in FIG. 234 as well, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined images) GG that suggests that the remaining time has run out due to the minimum display area (here, “0”). Since it does not originally function as a part, even when the remaining time runs out (when the valid period expires), at least part (or all) must not be hidden and the display state must be maintained. Become.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 234(d), the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is "0" in the integrated model image IG at timing A4, which is the expiration timing of the effective period. , and the entire display area of the "specific image TG" is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, the period during which operation acceptance is permitted ends in this state, and the integrated model image IG is hidden.

However, even in this example, part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden and part of the display area of the "specific image TG" is hidden in the integrated model image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the valid period. may be displayed as follows.

Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (continuously) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When viewed from the player's side, it is possible to make ambiguous how far the image is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG among the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. become.

That is, even though the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period expires and most of its display area (more than half or all) remains, the player cannot When viewed, it appears to be part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG whose display area is set to the minimum value (here, non-display) when the effective period expires. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the validity period remains longer than it actually is. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the interest in the game while the operation acceptance effect is being performed.

On the other hand, when the effective period of the operation acceptance effect expires, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed because at least a part of the "specific image TG" remains and is terminated. Even if the period does not end immediately, it is possible to display so that the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a sense of incongruity due to a lag between the display timing and the end timing of the valid period. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer that can absorb such a time lag.

In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of "gauge image GG" and "specific image TG" are different from those in the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same images may be used. Conversely, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same image as in the example shown in FIG. 234 may be used. 233, and the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. may occur under different conditions. In this case, the shapes of the integrated model image IG itself and at least the display target area of the gauge image GG are different between the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 233 appears and the valid period in which the mode shown in FIG. 234 appears. It is desirable to be different.

As described above, the integrated model image IG is dynamic during the validity period of the predetermined operation acceptance effect, as shown in FIGS. It can be displayed to prompt the player to perform an operation. However, as described above, the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced within its movable range. prevents this from being displayed dynamically. Then, a display target area for the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the margin decoration image SSG, which is the side on which such dynamic display is not performed, and the specific image TG and the gauge image ( (predetermined image) GG is changed, so that it is possible to easily recognize how much time remains until the effective period ends even in the dynamically displayed integrated model image IG. be able to

The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one piece of image data, or may be displayed as separate image data.

According to the configurations shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the “specific image TG” is such that the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target region of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is Displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" displaced when reduced, and displacing its display position in accordance with the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" to be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, it is unclear how much of the image displayed within the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. will be able to

233, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is at its maximum value. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is reduced to compensate for the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". is increasing. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time indicated by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" does not decrease during the first period from the start of the valid period to the elapse of the predetermined time. Since it is possible to give the player a good image, the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the integrated model image IG is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (e)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). However, in any of these modes, the display shapes of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” should be the same. It is desirable to Each aspect (pattern, color, etc.) of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but the function of suggesting the remaining time may be changed. In order to maintain the image in a favorable manner, even if one aspect of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” changes, it is desirable that the other aspect does not change. For example, if the mark attached to the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. Since the degree of expectation (double circle) gradually becomes visible as the image )GG' is reduced, it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, at least a part (or all of them) of the “specific image TG” is non-existent even when the valid period expires without being operated by the player. Changed to maintain the display state without being displayed. 233 and 234, however, when timing A4 arrives without an operation by the player, the operation is accepted internally and the post-operation display or post-operation sound output (for example, operation It is desirable to function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only sound is output in response to reception. In this case, the timing A4 may be the timing at which the effective period ends, or may be set as the timing before or after this timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” is hidden (timing at which it is hidden or later), and the “specific image TG” is It is desirable to set the arrival timing when at least a portion of the image is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the player performs an operation immediately after the operation reception is no longer permitted, even immediately before the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, " Since the specific image TG" is displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started in response to the fact that the operation by the player has been completed in time and the operation has been accepted. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started, the “specific image TG” may be faded out). gradually disappearing, etc.).

Assuming that the valid period during which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second valid period different from the first condition It is possible to generate a second validity period in which automatic reception is not performed when the conditions are met. Even in the second effective period, the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG. ) contains the display target area of GG. However, within the second valid period generated by the establishment of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is displayed. is no longer displayed. The integrated model image IG displayed within the first valid period and the integrated model image IG displayed within the second valid period are displayed as the same image, except that the "specific image TG" is not displayed. can be

That is, in the second effective period generated by the establishment of the second condition, unlike the first effective period generated by the establishment of the first condition, if the set time elapses without the player's operation being performed, The second valid period expires without the automatic reception functioning, and without generating a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output (or both). Therefore, if the display of the "specific image TG" is left at the point when it is no longer permitted to accept the operation by the player, the effective period ends even though the remaining time has not expired. This can lead to misunderstandings as if the game was played, and eventually the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, it is desirable to prevent the "specific image TG" from being displayed during the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period.

In this case, it is desirable that the length of the set time (the length of time from the acceptance of the operation to the end of the acceptance) be different between the first valid period and the second valid period. Further, it is desirable that the display change (post-operation display) and the sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted have mutually different contents.

In addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is met, a third valid period during which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, generated when the third condition is met), In addition to the second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth effective period during which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, generated when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, at least the first effective period during which the display and sound processes are performed in the manner described above is included in the valid period during which automatic reception is performed (valid periods with different occurrence conditions). It is only necessary that at least the second effective period during which the display and sound processes are performed in the manner described above is included in the effective period during which the sound is not performed (the effective period with different generation conditions).

In addition, the "first effective period" here is
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when it is set to a special effect state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period.
- Regardless of the effect state, it means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of presentation states" as the presentation state. It should be noted that if the ``second effective period'' occurs while the ``special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, either can be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, it may be stated that "automatic reception is not always enabled regardless of the rendering state"), which has nothing to do with the configuration according to the technical features described here.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a specific non-linear shape. More specifically, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the areas forming the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed. In the non-linear region of the part, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced as time passes. According to such a configuration, the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG as time elapses becomes decorative, so that the remaining time as the effective period is consumed. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the amusement in the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, a specific pattern is applied to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance is displayed. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed in a manner superimposed thereon, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is given a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) changes over time. It becomes possible to improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, the specific pattern is applied so as to extend beyond the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to further improve the decorativeness of the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the GG.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. Then, a second display target region having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the non-linear specific shape and having a different distance from when the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts reducing the display area to when it ends. The operation reception effect (effective period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed may end when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, or While there is at least a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without any operation being performed, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed may end when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without any operation by the player I'm trying not to be terminated.

In this regard, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed are the operation objects to which the operation opportunity is given. If the (operation receiving units) are different, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different. Coupled with the presence of the user, it is possible to encourage the user to enjoy the operation reception performance with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed simulate different operation receiving parts. The model image is displayed in such a way that it is integrated with the peripheral decoration image. As for the peripheral decoration image, an image depicting different decorations for the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. However, in either case, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part thereof. The gauge images (predetermined images) GG may be displayed as having different display shapes.

In addition, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of "non-linear specific shape" and the case where "different shape (non-similar shape) from this" is displayed. In the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (the first set time) is set, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output will be "a big hit." It is desirable that the proportions of appearances of "a mode suggesting that" are different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

The same set time (first set time) is set for the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. Sometimes, it is desirable to give an opportunity to accept an operation regarding the same post-operation display or post-operation sound output. It is desirable to provide an opportunity to receive an operation with respect to a different post-operation display or post-operation sound output at different set times.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, by superimposing an operation-related display such as “press!” or “down arrow” on the integrated model image IG, When you see these with a button, it is more strongly expressed that you are in a situation that you should operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as "press!" In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating the remaining time and the specific image TG are not displayed overlapping each other.

In such a configuration, an operation such as "press!" Since the related display is superimposed on the integrated model image IG, it is possible to appropriately convey important information to the player and strongly urge the player to perform the operation. Needless to say, this is because the button model image BMG is displayed as an integrated model image IG integrated with the periphery decoration image SSG.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the valid period during which operation reception is permitted is the post-operation display performed when the operation is accepted within the valid period. There are multiple (types) of effective periods with different post-operation sound output contents. Conditions for generating these effective periods are different, and when any of the conditions for generating is satisfied, a corresponding type of effective period is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed within the plurality of valid periods (the first valid period). and a period during which the "specific image TG" is not displayed (second effective period). Hereinafter, in this example, these "first effective period" and "second effective period" will be referred to as the above-described "first effective period" during which automatic reception is performed and the above-described "second effective period" during which automatic reception is not performed. are the same as the valid period of ", but it may be applied as a valid period different from these.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, when performing a precursor effect (specific display) suggesting that operation acceptance is permitted, the precursor effect (specific display) is may be executed in a form straddling before and after the occurrence timing of the valid period allowed. According to such an indication effect (specific display), since the effective period occurs while the flashy effect is being performed, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the effective period occurs. become able to.

However, when the predictive effect (specific display) is executed in such a manner, the predictive effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated model image IG. Even if the simulated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), the part overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (not made visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the portent effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated model image IG that overlaps the portent effect (specific display) is made difficult to see. In any case, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to decrease under such a situation where visibility is difficult.

That is, in this case, the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the portion overlapping the precursor effect (specific display) is removed and the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG) is displayed. By the time the visibility of the entire area) is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, so from the player's point of view, the effective period (set time) may give the impression that the is substantially shortened.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "specific image TG" can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that looks like a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player's side. . Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, among the plurality of types of valid periods, "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed In the "second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not decreased at the time the portent effect (specific display) is terminated," the period from the occurrence of the second effective period to the end The "specific image TG" is not displayed at all during the period. On the other hand, among the plurality (types) of effective periods, the gauge image is generated during the execution of the omen effect (specific display) and the entire integrated model image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). In the first effective period in which the display area of the (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the specific image TG is displayed within the first effective period.

According to such a configuration, in the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden, the gauge image (predetermined image) Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed at the time when the entire integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes visible. It becomes possible to make it appear that the display area of the GG has not decreased so much, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, if the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second effective period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed 233, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and the valid period occurs. When seeing how the "specific image TG" gradually appears with the lapse of time, it may be found that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. That is, in this case, since there is concern that exaggerating the length of the remaining time may reduce the interest in the game, the "specific image TG" is displayed during the second effective period. It is desirable to prevent this from occurring in order to prevent a decline in the interest in the game.

In addition to the second valid period, the plurality (types) of valid periods include "the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but the precursor effect (specific display) is executed." ) is completed, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced (fifth effective period)" may be prepared under different conditions, or the first effective period In addition, "the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced by the time it occurs during execution of the omen effect (specific display) and the entire integrated model image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). The valid period (sixth valid period)" may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned "specific image TG" is displayed at this time may be set as appropriate. good. In short, the plurality (types) of effective periods include at least the second effective period during which the "specific image TG" is not displayed and the first effective period during which the "specific image TG" is displayed. If so, at least when the effective period is generated, the above-described action and effect are exhibited in relation to the premonitory effect (specific display).

In each example below, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the manner shown in FIG. may be executed.

FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of development of presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period.

FIG. 235(a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of reservations is 0 is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, and the effect display device 1600 It shows the production situation being performed at.

FIG. 235(b) shows an effect situation in which an indication effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 235(a).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235(b), it can be seen that at least in the effect display device 1600, the integrated model image IG has not yet appeared. However, since the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated model image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, thereby the integration. The whole of the model image IG may be made invisible (or made invisible by a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, operation reception is permitted (effective period is started) from the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

In FIG. 235(c), the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. A portion that does not overlap with the portent effect (specific display) appears, and the portion is displayed in a state of good visibility.

That is, the integrated model image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 235(b)) that comes after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (the timing at which the valid period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the appearance of the situation where the It has become. Therefore, at the point in time shown in FIG. 235(c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be visually recognized (or visually difficult), but the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH).

According to such a configuration, the predictive effect (specific display TH) is performed across the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predictive effect is performed for a predetermined time after the effective period occurs. At least part of the integrated model image IG is rendered invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the (specific display TH). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image ) or the operation target (aspect of the button model image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the start of the validity period.

In the example shown in FIG. 235(c), the button model image that simulates the operation target is in a state that is difficult to visually recognize, but the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the button image is "special peripheral edge decoration image SSGb". It is in a state in which it is possible to recognize that it is a "normal border decoration image SSGa". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 235(c), since the "specific image TG" is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it, the type ( 234) or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see FIG. 233). there is That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so the type shown in FIG. It can be said that executing the precursor effect in the manner described above when employed is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game.

In FIG. 235(d), as a result of further development of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. (Here, the precursor effect is hidden).

As shown in FIG. 235(d), when the whole of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) becomes well visible, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it can be expected that the decrease in interest in the game due to the reduction in the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the omen effect (specific display TH) ends will be suppressed.

FIG. 235(e) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). 16 shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before (immediately before).

As shown in FIG. 235(e), the "specific image TG" is displayed at least partially (or entirely) even when the effective period expires. In this regard, in the first effective period, as described above, even if the player does not perform any operation during the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed (see FIG. 235). (f)).

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the post-operation display Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation can be performed in response to the operation acceptance that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It becomes possible to make it look as if the post-sound output has started. In particular, when the omen effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, since it is likely that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that it is particularly effective to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game by outputting the sound after the operation.

235, the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, and the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. may be applied to any of

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 235, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed in separate layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, thereby appearing in FIG. We decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to store the presentation progress in the aspect shown in 235 in FIG. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 235, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 232(a) is made to appear as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated model image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). . When adopting such a technique, it is more desirable to execute the portent effect in the manner shown in FIGS.

FIGS. 236 to 238 are diagrams showing modified examples of the progress of presentation when the first valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

FIG. 236(a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is the first effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of reservations is 0, and the effect display device. 1600 shows the production situation being performed.

FIG. 236(b) is an effect in which the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is started in the effect display device 1600 during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 236(a). showing the situation.

This first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that an operation-related effect will be performed. It functions as a production to do.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first indication effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), " Either the image shown in FIG. 237(c) or the image shown in FIG. 238(j) is displayed. It suggests which of the button model images BMGb' is likely to appear.

Here, if the "image shown in FIG. 237(c)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "normal button image BMGa" will be displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). It is suggested that

The “image shown in FIG. 237(c)” according to this example is different from the “integrated model image IGa” in the normal state (the aspect shown in FIG. 232(a)) (here, translucent). It is displayed as an expressed image IGa'. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, for the "image shown in FIG. Alternatively, the "normal button model image BMGa" may not be integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa", but may be displayed as a single image. When the “normal button model image BMGa” is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(a)) or in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(a) ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237(c), the "normal button model image BMGa" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGa' with the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the valid period during which the "normal button model image BMGa" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" as the "integrated model image IGa (FIG. 232(a))" or the "special border decoration image" is displayed. 232(a)) integrated with the image SSGb".

After the image IGa' (image BMGa') shown in Fig. 237(c) is displayed, the image IGa' (image BMGa') is not the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. , ``integrated model image IGc (Fig. 232(c))''.

In the example shown in FIG. 237(d), "the image IGa' expressing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' expressing the normal button model image BMGa)" expresses the "special border decoration image SSGb". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb′” that has been drawn is gradually brought closer. As a result of such effects, "the image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" is represented by the "special border decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated with the image SSGb' added, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGc (FIG. 232(c))" appears. On the other hand, an "image SSGb' expressing a special border decoration image SSGb" is added to an "image IGa' expressing an integrated model image IGa (or an image BMGa' expressing a normal button model image BMGa)". When the images are not integrated and not integrated, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGa (Fig. 232(a))" appears.

FIG. 237(e) shows an effect situation in which a second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 237(d) is performed. there is

This second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that the operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a performance. The second foreshadow effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGa' representing integrated model image IGa (or image BMGa' representing normal button model image BMGa)". ``Image SSGb' expressing the special border decoration image SSGb'' is gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa)" and the 'image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb'" are integrated.

When the production shown in FIG. 237(e) progresses, either "the image shown in FIG. 237(f)" or "the image shown in FIG. is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 237(f) and 237(h) are basically the same as "the situations and image contents shown in FIG. 235(c)" described above. progresses and the area where the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, resulting in an integrated model image IG. , a portion that does not overlap with the foreshadowing effect (specific display) appears, and the portion is displayed in a highly visible state and the content of the image.

That is, the integrated model image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 237(e)) that comes after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 237(h) appears, at least display by internal processing (display on layer processing ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time points shown in FIGS. 237(f) and 237(h), at least part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are preferentially displayed as the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to be visually recognized) due to the overlap, the reduction of the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period occurs. For a predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated model image IG is not visible or is made difficult to be recognized by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image ) or the operation target (aspect of the button model image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the start of the validity period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 237(f) appears, the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is not the "special edge decoration image SSGb" but the "normal edge decoration image SSGa". 237(d) and (e), the effect shown in FIGS. 237(d) and 237(e) results in "an image IGa' representing the integrated model image IGa' (or an image representing the normal button model image BMGa It can be recognized that the image BMGa')" failed to connect with the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232(a)) is displayed as shown in FIG. The whole picture will appear. Since the progress of the performance after that is as described above with reference to FIGS.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 237(h) appears, it is possible to recognize that the border decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is the "special border decoration image SSGb". 237(d), as a result of the rendering shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the image SSGb' representing the . That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated model image IGc (see FIG. 232(c)) is displayed as shown in FIG. 237(i). The whole picture will appear. 235(d) to 235(d). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)" is displayed, there is a high possibility that the "special button image BMGb" will be displayed as the button image BMG (here, "100%"). is suggested.

The “image shown in FIG. 238(j)” according to this example is different from the “integrated model image IGb” in the normal state (the aspect shown in FIG. 232(b)) (here, translucent). It is displayed as an expressed image IGb'. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, for the "image shown in FIG. 238(j)", the "integrated model image IGb" may be displayed as shown in FIG. Alternatively, the "special button model image BMGb" may not be integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" and may be displayed as a single image. When the "special button model image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(b)) or in the normal mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(b) ) may be displayed as an image expressed in a different manner (here, semi-transparent).

In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238(j), the "special button image BMGb" shown in FIG. At least the image BMGb' with the (simulated) outline will be displayed. As a result, the valid period during which the "special button model image BMGb" is integrated with the "normal border decoration image SSGa" as the "integrated model image IGb (Fig. 232(b))" or the "special border decoration image" is displayed. 232(d)) integrated with the image SSGb".

After the image IGb' (image BMGb') shown in FIG. , ``integrated model image IGd (Fig. 232(d))''.

In the example shown in FIG. 237(k), the "image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)" represents the "special border decoration image SSGb". It is depicted as an effect in which the image SSGb′” that has been drawn is gradually brought closer. As a result of such effects, "the image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)" is represented by the "special border decoration image SSGb". When the images are integrated with the image SSGb'" added, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGd (Fig. 232(d))" appears. On the other hand, an "image SSGb' expressing the special border decoration image SSGb" is added to the "image IGb' expressing the integrated model image IGb (or the image BMGb' expressing the special button model image BMGb)". When the images are not integrated and not integrated, an effective period occurs during which the "integrated model image IGb (Fig. 232(b))" appears.

FIG. 238(l) shows an effect situation in which a second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 238(k) is performed. there is Instead of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), a different third precursor effect (third specific display) may be executed.

As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production that suggests. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for "image IGb' representing integrated model image IGb (or image BMGb' representing special button model image BMGb)". ``Image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb'' is gradually approaching. Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the image BMGb' representing the special button model image BMGb)" and the 'image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb'" are integrated.

When the production shown in FIG. 238(l) progresses, based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination), either "the image shown in FIG. 238(m)" or "the image shown in FIG. 238(o)" is displayed.

The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 238(m) and 238(o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned "situation and image contents shown in FIG. 235(c)". progresses and the area where the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed is reduced, resulting in an integrated model image IG. , a portion that does not overlap with the foreshadowing effect (specific display) appears, and the portion is displayed in a highly visible state and the content of the image.

That is, the integrated model image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 238(l)) that comes after the situation shown in FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the valid period starts)", which is the timing that arrives before the situation shown in 238(o) appears, at least display by internal processing (display on layer processing ) is to be executed. Therefore, at the time points shown in FIGS. 238(m) and 238(o), at least part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are preferentially displayed as the second precursor effect (specific display TH2). Although it cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to be visually recognized) due to the overlap, the reduction in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started ( progress). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed across the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and after the valid period occurs. For a predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated model image IG is not visible or is made difficult to be recognized by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole picture of the integrated model image IG is gradually revealed within the valid period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated model image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image ) or the operation target (aspect of the button model image) can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the start of the validity period.

In this regard, when the situation shown in FIG. 238(m) appears, the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is not the "special edge decoration image SSGb" but the "normal edge decoration image SSGa". 238(k) and (l), the effect shown in FIGS. 238(k) and 238(l) results in an ``image IGb' representing the integrated model image IGb' (or a special button model image BMGb representing It can be recognized that the image BMGb')" failed to connect with the "image SSGb' representing the special border decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238(n), the integrated model image IGb (see FIG. 232(b)) The whole picture will appear. 235(d) to 235(d). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 238(o) appears, it is possible to recognize that the edge decoration image SSG included in the integrated model image IG is the "special edge decoration image SSGb". 238(k), as a result of the rendering shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the image SSGb' representing the . That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, the integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 232(d)) is displayed as shown in FIG. The whole picture will appear. 235(d) to 235(d). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

In the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, when the image shown in FIG. The probability that the "special button model image BMGb" will appear may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 237(e) is performed, FIG. There is also the possibility that the performance progress will be executed in the form of o)→(p).

237(f), (h) or FIGS. 238(m), (o), it is not possible to determine in which mode the border decoration image SSG is displayed. Although it is recognizable, it becomes impossible to recognize in which mode the button model image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested step by step according to the progress of the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2), and the amusement of the game can be improved. . In particular, if the button model image BMG, depending on its display mode, can suggest one of a plurality of operation means with different operation targets, the effective period has started and the degree of expectation related to operation is also suggested. In spite of being in a situation where the operation target is not recognizable, the degree of attention to the performance can be remarkably improved.

However, even in situations where FIGS. 237(f) and (h) and FIGS. 238(m) and (o) appear, the button It is desirable to emit light (for example, to emit light from the occurrence of the effective period) in a manner corresponding to the type displayed as the model image BMG. According to such a configuration, a highly motivated person who tends to directly look at the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the "type displayed as the button model image BMG". Therefore, it is possible to encourage the player to want to operate.

Incidentally, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 236(a) may be changed to the situation shown in FIG. 237(c) or FIG. 238(j).

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situations shown in FIGS. 237(d) and 238(k) are shifted to the situations shown in FIGS. 237(g) and (i) and FIGS. 238(n) and (p), good. That is, in this case, the effects shown in FIG. 237(d) and FIG. 238(k) function as precursor effects. At the time of transition, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may already be reduced, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not be reduced. If the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the shift, the gauge image is displayed when the situation shown in FIG. 237(d) or FIG. (Predetermined image) GG will start reducing its display area.

236 to 238 may be partially omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated model image IG. For example, if the forms shown in FIGS. 232(b) and 232(d) are not prepared as the integrated model image IG, all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 238 can be omitted. At this time, the description of FIG. 237(c) may also be omitted.

236 to 238, the image BMG' representing the button model image BMG (or the button model image BMG itself) is displayed before the acceptance of the operation is allowed (before the valid period occurs). Good) is displayed (Fig. 237(d), Fig. 238(k)), but in this situation (before the validity period occurs), the image BMG' representing the button image BMG (or the button image BMG) is not dynamically displayed so as to depict how the is displaced within the movable range of the operation receiving portion. According to such a configuration, even if the model button image BMG or the image BMG' representing it is displayed prior to the occurrence of the valid period, the valid period has not yet occurred. can be implicitly suggested, the player can concentrate on the performance without worrying about the remaining time of the effective period. In addition, since the reception of the effect is permitted when the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) is being performed, the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) makes it impossible or difficult to see. Dynamic display of the button model image BMG will be performed in the midst of this.

FIGS. 239 to 243 are diagrams showing an example of how the presentation progresses when the second valid period occurs, out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

That is, in FIGS. 235 to 238, an effective period (first effective period) is generated in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. For the case, an example related to the development of the production has been explained. On the other hand, in FIGS. 239 to 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. An example of how the effect progresses when the valid period (second valid period) occurs without being released will be described.

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, a predetermined premonitory effect (premonitor display) is performed at the occurrence of the validity period during which operation acceptance is permitted. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute "a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" within the effective period, and such In order to make the feature stand out when the performance is performed, a predetermined sign performance (prediction display) itself is not performed when the effective period occurs, or a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided even if the predetermined sign performance (prediction display) is performed. The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and has reached its maximum value at the time when the entire display target area of (1) has been made visible.

Here, as the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the valid period. When the effective period ends when the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "no operation is performed within the effective period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, when the valid period expires, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. It is possible to mention "the first display mode". According to such a configuration, even in a situation where it seems that there is a lot of time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can becomes aware of the possibility that the effective period may be suddenly terminated, so that the tension during the effective period can be preferably maintained.

In addition, as for the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG", normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced every unit time within the valid period. By the way, it is possible to mention "a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the effective period". According to such a configuration, even when it seems that there is only a short time left until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches the predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), the player can still use the gauge. The player becomes conscious of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and the decline in the interest in the game is suppressed.

That is, in the example described below, by using at least one of the "first display mode" and "second display mode", the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" will be described. It shows an example of display when executing

First, in FIG. 239 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced in the second production pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the performance situation being performed on the display device 1600 .

FIG. 239(b) shows that during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. 2 shows a production situation in which the integrated model image IG is displayed. As shown in FIG. 239(b), when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and has not yet been reduced. .

Further, when executing the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is It is longer than the time (set time) set for the effective period (first effective period) during which the display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG is not executed. This means that it takes time to execute a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG within the effective period. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the first valid period during which the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" is not executed, and the "movement of the gauge image GG Is the integrated model image IG itself the same, despite the fact that the set time until the expiration of the valid period is different from the second valid period in which the "display mode characterized by" is executed, They are displayed in a similar manner (in this example, the integrated model image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized by Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period during which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time required for the situation in which the display area is not reduced is set. is added, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

It should be noted that, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 239(b) occurs, an indication effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, at the point in time when the entire integrated model image IG (at least the “display target area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image IG”) is displayed without overlapping the portent effect, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached its maximum value and is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the effective period) in which operation reception regarding the predetermined post-operation display and predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted. 239(c) after a predetermined time has passed from the stage shown in FIG. 239(b), the gauge image GG changes from the The display area is maintained after being reduced by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time), and the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is started.

Such a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is, as shown in FIGS. It's becoming However, even during the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the acceptance of operations is maintained, and when an operation is performed on an operation means that is given an opportunity to operate, the valid period 239 is ended, and along with this, the integrated model image IG is hidden, and the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the reception of the operation are executed (see FIG. 239(g)).

According to such a configuration, since "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the valid period, compared to the case where the display area of the gauge image GG continues to decrease at a constant speed. to indicate that there is still time left before the validity period expires.

In addition, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the acceptance of the operation itself is maintained in a permissible state, so it is possible to give an image as if the validity period has been extended. , it is expected that the game interest will be improved when the valid period is in effect.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 239(c) and (d), during the ``period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced'', the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is in a non-display state or is difficult to see. This prompts attention to the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG".

However, when a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that a so-called "freeze effect" has occurred in which the image in the display screen suddenly becomes stationary. In other words, the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined period of time and the state cannot be canceled, so it is erroneously recognized that the operation reception is no longer permitted. There is a concern that the player will lose the desire to operate the game, and the interest in the game will decrease. In particular, in this example, since the decorative pattern SZ is in a non-displayed state or in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize, this may also encourage misrecognition that the operation acceptance is no longer permitted.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated model image IG itself is not brought to a stationary state in a state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but the integrated model image While the gauge image GG included in the IG is set to a static state, the button model image BMG included in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed (a state of displacement within the movable range of the operation receiving portion is depicted. display) to continue.

According to such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button model image BMG is continued, a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, and thus operation reception is no longer permitted ( It is possible to suppress the possibility of erroneously recognizing that a freeze effect has occurred, and it is expected that the player's desire to operate will be favorably maintained.

Here, the dynamic display by the button model image BMG is executed as a display that repeats a predetermined action (eg, a reciprocating action within the movable range of the operation receiving portion). In this regard, during the valid period (the first valid period shown in FIGS. While the predetermined action by the button model image BMG is repeated n times until the time expires, the precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or the precursor effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. 239 to 243) during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of setting "the display area of the gauge image GG is decreased It is desirable that the predetermined operation by the button model image BMG can be executed as a display that repeats m (>n) times even during the "non-execution period".

According to such a configuration, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a period of time longer than the first valid period shown in FIGS. Since the state of not being activated will continue, even if you are surprised by the occurrence of the state and take time to grasp the situation, you will have enough time to operate. , it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. Note that the valid period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the omen effect (specific display) is hidden is different from the first valid period shown in FIGS. If a period (that generates a separate post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is provided, than the longest of the times (set time) set for those validity periods, 239 to 243, etc., it is desirable that the number of times of the predetermined action by the button model image BMG is increased during the "period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". .

As described above, when the second valid period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and its display area is set to the predetermined maximum value. It is designed to be displayed (Fig. 239(b)). However, at this time, as illustrated in FIG. 234, if the specific image TG is displayed in a well-visible state within the display target area of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. It may appear that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced by only 10%, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may be lowered. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 233, when the specific image TG appears in a highly visible state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG is It becomes obvious that the game does not function as part of the gauge image GG, and there is concern that the length of the remaining time as the valid period may be exaggerated, thereby reducing the interest in the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the reduction of the display area of the gauge image GG is started from the situation shown in FIG. is decreased to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased" occurs for a predetermined period of time (FIGS. 239(c) and (d)).

In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made visible. After that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 239(e)), the time (set time) set for the second effective period expires. 239(f), the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. Note that here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is "0", that is, when it is hidden (FIG. 239(e)), the time (set time) set for the second effective period expires. Then, the second effective period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden (Fig. 239(f)).

In this way, in the second effective period, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIG. 239(f)), the same operation as when the operation is accepted within the second valid period is performed. Post-display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned), and this point is also different from the first effective period. However, instead, in the second effective period, the gauge image GG is displayed in a stopped state for a period of time longer than the time set for the first effective period, and operation reception is permitted even during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, it can be said that the situation in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) is not completed in time is less likely to occur. .

In the example shown in FIG. 239, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238, etc.), the gauge image GG is displayed in advance within the validity period as the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”. The case where the display area is decreased at a constant speed, and the application of the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased even though it is within the effective period" has been described. However, as described above, as a “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG”, normally (see FIGS. When the effective period ends when the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, "0"), "No operation is performed within the effective period and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. However, when the effective period expires, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, "0") and has a predetermined display area. You may make it apply further the 1st display mode. 240 and 241, or the modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, in order to improve the amusement of the game. is more desirable.

FIGS. 240 and 241 are diagrams showing an example of how the presentation progresses when the second valid period occurs, out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situations shown in FIGS. 240(a)-(d) are the same as described above with reference to FIGS. 239(a)-(d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, in this example as well, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second effective period. When the operation is accepted at , the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241(g)).

However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not decreased" ends without any operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG will continue to decrease its display area. It is never displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" continues until the time set for the second valid period (set time) elapses. Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value), as shown in FIGS. In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made visible.

In this way, even in the second effective period according to this example, if the set time elapses without an operation being accepted (Fig. 241(e)), the operation is accepted within the second effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned). However, instead, in the second effective period according to this example as well, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer period of time than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state as well. As described above, reception is permitted.

However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the second valid period is terminated while the display area of the predetermined value remains. Since the game is terminated, there is a possibility that the second effective period ends due to the player not being able to operate the game despite his intention to operate it, which reduces the interest in the game. I have concerns. Therefore, in this example, after the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, the specific condition (for example, symbol stop or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. During the period when the operation opportunity is not given, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second effective period, and the operation opportunity is given to the operation means When the operation is accepted, the second validity period can be generated again based on this operation. In this sense, when the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period is generated from the point of time when the second valid period expires. It can be said that

According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period expires as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without any operation by the player, the ), it is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. The validity period is started from the initial state (FIG. 241(f)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 240(b) to (d) and FIGS. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the regenerated second effective period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241(g)). ).

When the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 241(e), the image shown in FIG. 241(f) (same as the image shown in FIG. 240(b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will happen. Such an image is different from the post-operation display that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation during the second valid period (FIGS. 240(b) to (d), FIG. 241(f), etc.). They are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 241(f), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

FIGS. 242 and 243 are diagrams showing a modification of the progress of presentation when the second valid period occurs out of the first valid period and the second valid period described above.

The situation shown in FIG. 242(a) is the same as the contents and other examples described above with reference to FIGS. 239(a) and 240(a). However, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. A "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs for a predetermined period of time from the time when the integrated model image IG is displayed (FIGS. 242(b) and (c)). In this example, when the integrated model image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG is at the predetermined maximum value. will be maintained as is.

Note that even when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG or the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the acceptance of the operation is permitted. The configuration and progress within the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", such as the execution of the post-sound output, are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. .

Also in this example, similarly to the example shown in FIGS. 240 and 241, until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses, "the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced." The period during which the Therefore, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends, the display area of the gauge image GG remains unchanged (maximum value), as shown in FIGS. In this state, the operation-related images including the integrated model image IG are hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or made visible.

In this way, even in the second effective period according to this example, if the set time elapses without an operation being accepted (FIG. 243(d)), the operation is accepted within the second effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned). However, instead, in the second effective period according to this example as well, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a longer period of time than the set time for the first effective period, and the operation is performed during the display period in the stopped state as well. As described above, reception is permitted.

However, even in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced to a predetermined value (here, "0"), and the display area of the maximum value remains for the second valid period. Therefore, the player may be unable to perform the operation even though he or she intended to operate it, and the second effective period may end, resulting in a decrease in interest in the game. There is concern that Therefore, in this example as well, after the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, the specific condition (for example, the pattern is stopped, or 10 seconds before the pattern is stopped, etc.) is satisfied. While it is not performed, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the second effective period, and the operation means When an operation for is accepted, the second effective period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period expires without any operation by the player, a special valid period is generated for regenerating the second valid period.

According to such a configuration, even if the second valid period expires as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without any operation by the player, the operation by the player can be performed as shown in FIG. ), it is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, when the player operates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. The validity period is started from the initial state (Fig. 243(e)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 242(b), (c), and FIGS. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the regenerated second valid period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 243(f)). ).

However, in this example, even if the second valid period reoccurs in this way, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" will occur from the point of reoccurrence, so FIG. 2, the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or made difficult to see.

That is, the "image shown in FIG. 243(e)" that appears as the post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 243(d) is replaced by the "image shown in FIG. 242(b)". is the same as Such an image is a post-operation display (FIG. 243 (f )) has a different image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the fact that the operation is accepted during the special valid period shown in FIG. 243(d), etc.), which is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243(f)) that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

Thus, in the examples shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period functions as "the period during which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced". In either situation, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced.

Note that in the situations (special effective period) shown in FIG. 241(e) and FIG. 243(d), the integrated model image IG may be displayed as in the second effective period. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation are different from each other (second valid period, special valid period), the second valid period and the special valid period It is desirable that at least one of the display position and size of the integrated model image IG is different from the effective period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second valid period, the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the second valid period is hidden, and the integrated model image IG in the form corresponding to the special valid period is newly displayed. will be displayed in When the integrated model image IG is displayed during the special effective period, a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced'' may be generated within the effective period, or a ``period in which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced. ” may be prevented from occurring.

239 to 243, the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" can be executed when the integrated model image IGa out of the integrated model images IGa to IGd is displayed. Therefore, it is desirable not to execute this when the integrated model images IGb to IGd out of the integrated model images IGa to IGd are displayed. In other words, the integrated simulated image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation, but when the integrated simulated image IGa is displayed, the "movement of the gauge image GG" shown in Figs. Since there is a possibility that a "display mode having a characteristic" appears, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

According to the example shown in FIGS. 240 to 243, when an operation-related image (integrated model image IG, etc.) is displayed in a “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG,” Even if a situation arises in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the lapse of a predetermined set period (second effective period) without any operation being performed, the operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , post-operation sound output). More specifically, even if the predetermined set period (second valid period) has expired, if the operation receiving section (operation means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated model image IG until then is operated, It is possible to regenerate a predetermined set period (second effective period), and operation reception is permitted during the regenerated predetermined set period (second effective period) (Fig. 241(e), (f) and FIGS. 243(d), (e)). According to such a configuration, even if the predetermined set period (second valid period) ends without understanding the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG", , the predetermined set period (second valid period) can be regenerated, so that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

On the other hand, during a predetermined set period (first effective period) during which the operation-related images (integrated model image IG, etc.) are not displayed in a “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG,” operation reception is not possible. After the predetermined set period (first effective period) expires without the operation being performed, even if the user operates the operation receiving unit (operation means) whose operation has been prompted by the integrated model image IG until then, the predetermined set period (second validity period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 235-238).

Note that the predetermined set period (second valid period) during which the operation-related image (integrated model image IG, etc.) is displayed in the "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" does not necessarily mean that the symbol changes. does not have to occur during the execution of For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation, or during the execution period of the jackpot game or the period before the start of the jackpot game. ” may occur.

Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243) is set longer than the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238). In spite of this, the integrated model image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar manner in the first valid period and the second valid period (in the above example, the integrated model image IG itself is displayed in a similar manner). The simulated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). When the integrated model image IG is displayed in a similar manner, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button model image is the same. are expected to appear to be the same length. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period during which the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is not executed, and the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized by Although it is difficult to recognize that the set time is different from the second effective period during which the "display mode" is executed, when a situation arises in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the time required for the situation in which the display area is not reduced is set. is added, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

When the integrated model image IG is to be displayed in a similar relationship between the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238) and the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the "gauge image It is desirable to display an integrated model image IG that is smaller than the first valid period during the second valid period in which the "display mode characterized by the movement of the GG" appears.

Further, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, during the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238), if no operation is received, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is reduced to a specific value (here, " 0”), but during the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), if no operation is accepted, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value. is terminated. That is, if the time set for the valid period (set time) is long, the tension during the valid period tends to decrease, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is a specific value (here, " 0”)), it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by providing the possibility that the validity period will end.

Further, according to the above-described example, the case where the integrated model image IG is displayed so as to reduce the display area of the gauge image GG while the omen effect is being performed (the first effective period) and the case where the omen When the effect is not performed, or the predictive effect is performed, but the integrated model image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the predictive effect is being performed (the second effective period), the images displayed within the display target area of the gauge image GG are different. In this case, the aspect of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. 242 and 243, "the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the portent effect is being performed, although the portent effect is performed" means that the gauge image This includes the case where the display area of GG is not reduced.

In this respect, according to the above-described example, the specific image TG is displayed during the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238), and the specific image TG is displayed after the set time has elapsed without any operation being performed. However, in the second effective period (FIGS. 240 to 243), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first valid period, it is possible to make the valid period appear longer by the amount that the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the valid period, and in the second valid period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the valid period, it is possible to maintain the sense of tension by making it appear that the valid period ends earlier than expected by the player. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, in the second valid period, at the end of the valid period, most of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left (at least an area larger than half of the maximum value). It is desirable to

Further, according to the example described above, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area is reduced every unit time throughout the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the mode in which the display area is not reduced is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained.

Further, according to the above-described example, the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced during both the first effective period and the second effective period. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (a mode in which the display area is reduced) during the first valid period, while the first mode is displayed during the second valid period. They are displayed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, in the above example, the button model image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated model image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (surrounding decoration image SSG). , when the button model image BMG of the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is decreasing and when the gauge image GG is not decreasing. There is Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, the integrated model image IG preferably indicates that the button model image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation can be accepted. be able to suggest.

Further, according to the above-described example, only when the normal button model image BMGa of the normal button model image BMGa and the special button model image BMGb is displayed, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG is characterized by its movement." It is possible to display the "display mode that is held". In addition, when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed, "a display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG" may be displayed. ) GG movement is not displayed, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the mode (normal mode) that appears even when the special button model image BMGb is displayed. I made it so. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game when the normal button image BMGa, which is less expected than the special button image BMGb, is displayed is suppressed.

In particular, in the second effective period shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the display mode (color, etc.) of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced. However, only one mode is displayed. That is, in this case, the remaining time suggesting function and the expected degree suggesting function by the gauge image GG itself are lost, and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG. is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is displayed statically (with its area unchanged) in the integrated simulated image IG. According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second valid period functions only as a decorative image in the integrated model image IG, not as an image suggesting the remaining time or degree of expectation. As a result, the function can be greatly different from the gauge image GG displayed within the first valid period, and the diversity of expression as the gauge image GG improves the interest in the game. will be expected.

It should be noted that the first valid period and the second valid period may be generated under different conditions. For example, they may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. In addition, the first effective period means a period during which operation acceptance regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is allowed, and the second effective period means a period during which the operation is permitted. It means a period in which an operation reception is permitted with respect to a second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and a second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output. The reaction (display change, sound output) that appears when an operation is accepted in , is different from each other.

Also, regarding the integrated model image IG,
The display area of the gauge image GG increases every unit time from the time the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started to be displayed and the "integrated model image IG" overlaps with the precursor effect in the display state. reduced aspects (FIGS. 235-238); and
The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the omen effect is not displayed, or even if the omen effect is started to be displayed, at least when the omen effect in the display state and the "integrated model image IG" overlap each other. Aspects (Figs. 239-243)
and According to such a configuration, as a result of performing the portent effect, the display area has already been reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured, and regardless of whether or not the portent effect has been performed. When the entire gauge image GG becomes visible, the display area of the gauge image GG may not be reduced, and entertainment is provided by performance using the visibility of the gauge image GG. be able to

In particular, when adopting a mode (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG becomes visible regardless of whether or not the omen effect is performed. As long as there is a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is still within the effective period, it is possible to increase the attention to the gauge image GG.

Note that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the portent effect is not displayed, or even if the portent effect is started to be displayed, at least when the portent effect in the display state and the "integrated model image IG" overlap each other. 239 to 243), when a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears within the valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243). A display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the condition for generating the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is set as the second condition, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The occurrence condition of the specific validity period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

In the above example, while the button model image BMG is being displayed, there are cases where the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced as time passes, and there are cases where this display is not carried out. did. If the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed within the effective period and may be hidden. Nevertheless, regarding the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first effective period during which the display area is reduced with the passage of time, but also the second effective period during which the display area is not reduced with the passage of time. Since it is displayed even during the effective period, it is expected that the effect reception is permitted.

In the above example, the gauge image GG is not displayed to reduce the display area as time elapses, and the time (set time) set with respect to the valid period (second valid period) has passed. When the valid period expires, the automatic reception function is not activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is activated, the sense of tension due to the gauge image GG not indicating the remaining time may be completely lost, so the valid period (second valid period ), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not activated (in any rendering mode). On the other hand, it is desirable to enable the automatic reception function (regardless of the presentation mode) with respect to the first effective period described above.

In addition, when the button model image BMG and the gauge GG are separately displayed and a display method that pursues only the gauge function (remaining time suggesting function) is adopted, a method is adopted that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG. As a result, the player feels a great sense of incongruity that the remaining time suggesting function is not exhibited despite the gauge image GG. In this regard, in the above configuration, the modeled button image BMG is displayed as an image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that includes the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, the pattern is made visible behind the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself has a plurality of colors. Since this itself has a decorativeness in the integrated model image IG, it is expected to suppress a sense of incongruity when a situation arises in which the function of suggesting the remaining time by the gauge image GG is not exhibited. become.

By the way, in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, prior to the occurrence of the first effective period, the "button model image BMG" is set to a mode with a low expectation (normal button model image BMGa) and a mode with a high expectation. (special button model image BMGb), and as the "peripheral decoration image SSG", a low-expected mode (normal peripheral-decorative image SSGa) and a high-expected mode (special peripheral-decorative image SSGb) and the performance of which one appears in stages. However, such effects can also be made to appear by the method described below.

244A and 244B are diagrams for explaining a modification of the presentation that indicates the degree of expectation for the integrated model image IG in stages.

First, in FIG. 244 (a), in the normal game state, when the number of reservations is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is produced in the first production pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows the performance situation being performed on the display device 1600 .

In FIG. 244(b), during the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern SZ shown in FIG. It shows the effect situation in which the button model image BMG is displayed.

However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b), the button model image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "periphery decoration image SGG", but is displayed alone. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(b), the button model image BMG is displayed in either a mode with a low degree of expectation (normal button model image BMGa) or a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button model image BMGb). In the drawing, a case where a highly expected mode (special button model image BMGb) appears is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

FIG. 244(c) shows an effect situation in which the special button model image BMGb shown in FIG. 244(b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

However, it may be arranged that the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) is not necessarily performed. For example, the button model image BMG (normal button model image BMGa, special button model image BMGb) shown in FIG. ) is generated, the effect progresses from the situation shown in FIG. 244(b) to the situation shown in FIG. Either a period (first effective period) occurs, or an effective period (first effective period) occurs without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. It will be possible to provide fun about what to do. If the valid period (first valid period) occurs without becoming the integrated model image IG, the gauge image GG will be displayed as a separate image from the button model image BMG. ) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

If the effective period occurs after the button model image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected that the button image BMG will be stopped with a big hit pattern more than the case where the effective period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable that the degree (percentage) is high. Also, when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(b), the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. ) and is integrated with the border decoration image SSG. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(c), the button model image BMG is a marginal decoration image with a low degree of expectation (normal marginal decoration image BMGa) and a marginal decoration image with a high degree of expectation (special marginal decoration). BMGb) and the image BMGb), and in the figure, a case where a highly anticipated aspect (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. . Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination).

For convenience of explanation, the peripheral decoration image BMG (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa, special peripheral decoration image BMGb) according to this example has an image type different from that shown in each of the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244). Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The border decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for accommodating the button model image BMG. On the other hand, the special border decoration image BMGb has a checkered pattern. Among the patterned areas, "the area from the upper right to the lower left" is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

The image shown in FIG. 244(c) functions as an image (integrated model image) IGd in which the special button model image BMGb and the special border decoration image BMGb are integrated. 232(d).

FIG. 244(d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244(c).

However, it may be arranged that the effect progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) is not necessarily performed. For example, the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244(c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d). Either a period (first effective period) occurs, or an effective period (first effective period) without the first additional decoration HS1 being added without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(d). It will be possible to provide fun about what happens.

Note that if the valid period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable to make the degree of expectation (proportion) of stopping with a big hit pattern higher than in the case. When the special button model image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) than when the normal button model image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of adding the first additional decoration HS1 is increased. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(d), the first additional decoration HS1 is to provide a performance as to whether it is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or in a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may make it

FIG. 244(e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244(d).

However, it may be arranged that the effect development from the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) is not necessarily performed. For example, the integrated model image IG (integrated model images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244(d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the effect. Either a period (first valid period) occurs, or a valid period (first valid period) without the second additional decoration HS2 being added without progressing to the situation shown in FIG. 244(e). It will be possible to provide fun about what happens.

Note that if the valid period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated model image IG, the valid period occurs without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated model image IG. It is desirable to make the degree of expectation (proportion) of stopping with a big hit pattern higher than in the case. When the special button model image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) than the case where the normal button model image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It is desirable that the ratio of addition of the second additional decoration HS2 is increased. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(e), the second additional decoration HS2 is to provide a performance as to whether the second addition decoration HS2 is added in a mode with a low degree of expectation or in a mode with a high degree of expectation. You may make it

FIG. 244(f) shows an effect situation in which the valid period (first valid period) occurs while the integrated model image IGd shown in FIG. 244(e) is being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 244(f), when the valid period (first valid period) occurs, an operation instruction image such as "press" or "down arrow" is displayed. In addition, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG, and it is possible to accept the operation by confirming the specific image TG. be able to recognize that Note that the specific image TG according to this example differs in image type from those shown in the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) for convenience of explanation, but basically the same Displayed as having functionality. The specific image TG according to this example depicts a frog character, and the character is displaced according to the "end of the gauge image GG" that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. It will be done.

Note that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 234, or may be displayed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 244(f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation aspect (snail character) or a high-expectation aspect (frog character), which is omitted from the illustration. In the figure, a highly anticipated mode is shown as an example. The specific image TG is displayed in a manner with a higher expectation when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d) than in the case where the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244(c). 244(e) in the situation shown in FIG. 244(e) than in the situation shown in FIG. 244(d). It is desirable to increase the ratio of displaying the specific image TG. These percentages may include "100%" and "0%".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance that indicates how much the operation-related image can progress to a highly anticipated mode before the expiration of the effective period. As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game with respect to the operation in a state where the validity period has not yet occurred. In addition, while the operation-related images (button model image BMG, border decoration image SGG, additional decoration HS1, 2) suggest the degree of expectation before the validity period occurs, after the validity period occurs , a different image (specific image TG) is used to further suggest the degree of expectation, so that it is possible to preferably increase interest over the period from before the validity period to after the occurrence. Become.

In the example shown in FIG. 244, the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 244(b) to FIG. 244(d) to FIG. 244(e). You may make it invisible once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button model image, peripheral decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is to be interesting to know whether the performance has progressed or the valid period has expired. will be able to

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 244, the button model image, border decoration image, additional decoration, etc. are displayed in the same manner as during the effective period before the effective period occurs. You may make it display by (blinking, translucent, etc.).

Also, in the example shown in FIG. 244, it is desirable that the time required for gradually suggesting the degree of expectation by the operation-related image before the valid period occurs is longer than the set time for the valid period. .

By the way, the sword ornament 5001 according to this embodiment includes a "handle 5012" that can move (vertically move) with respect to the sheath 5020, and a "handle" that can move (vertically move) with respect to the handle 5012. As described above, two operation receiving portions, ie, button 5014', are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, when generating an effective period (operation reception effect) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the effective period (operation In the reception effect), both a "pattern image TMG" imitating the pattern portion 5012 and a "button imitating image BMG" imitating the pattern button 5014 are displayed. During the valid period during which the handle portion 5012 is provided with the opportunity to operate (operation acceptance presentation), acceptance of the operation for the pattern button 5014 is not permitted, and the valid period during which the handle button 5014 is provided with the opportunity to operate (operation acceptance presentation). ) does not allow acceptance of an operation on the handle 5012 .

In such a configuration, when an effective period (operation acceptance effect) occurs during which an operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, it is determined whether the operation acceptance of the handle portion 5012 is allowed or whether the operation acceptance of the handle button 5014 is allowed. It becomes difficult to recognize whether is allowed. That is, if the operation is accepted during the effective period during which the opportunity to operate the handle portion 5012 is granted, the number of operations after the operation is longer than when the operation is accepted during the effective period during which the opportunity to operate the handle button 5014 is granted. There is a high percentage of appearances of a mode suggesting that the big-hit symbols are stopped as a display (or a mode that suggests that the big-hit symbols are stopped as a post-operation sound output). The percentage may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation reception of the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the operation reception of the handle button 5014 is permitted. When the player comes to recognize this, he/she will operate the handle portion 5012 in a sense of exhilaration, thereby significantly improving the amusement of the game.

In order to obtain such a function and effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the reception of operation on the handle portion 5012 is permitted or the reception of operation on the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the handle 5012 (the light-emitting portion of the handle 5012) is made to emit light during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given. , the pattern button 5014 (the light-emitting part of it) on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. In other words, in this case, during the valid period (operation acceptance effect) in which both the “pattern image TMG” imitating the handle 5012 and the “button image BMG” imitating the handle button 5014 are displayed, the handle 5012 Even if the handle button 5014 is directly viewed, it remains difficult to recognize which of the handle part 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the acceptance of the operation on the handle 5012 is allowed, so that the player operates the handle 5012 in a sense of exhilaration, and the game interest increases. can be significantly improved.

In other words, during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the handle 5012 is given an opportunity to operate, it is difficult to directly see the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 or to look at the effect display device 1600 for a while. It is difficult to recognize whether the opportunity to operate the button 5012 or the opportunity to operate the pattern button 5014 is given. At least for those who have played the pachinko 1 for the first time (beginners) and those who are unfamiliar with complicated performance specifications (elderly people, etc.), the opportunity to operate either the handle portion 5012 or the handle button 5014 is provided. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in this way, after generating "a valid period in which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate", It is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 has been given an opportunity to operate within the validity period, but it can be recognized after a certain amount of time. , the button model image BMG and the pattern model image TMG are displayed respectively.

More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given, the "pattern image TMG" imitating the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 are displayed. , and the "button model image BMG" that simulates the "button model image BMG" are respectively displayed. The dynamic display of the "button model image BMG" on the side for which is not permitted is prohibited. The “dynamic display” here means, for example, a display depicting how the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle portion 5012, the state of movement (vertical movement) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). In the case of the pattern button 5014, it corresponds to the display depicting how the handle 5012 moves (vertically moves).

Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 has been given an opportunity to operate within the effective period. However, when a predetermined amount of time has passed so that it can be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image), the behavior during operation appears as dynamic display in the pattern image TMG, but the behavior during operation appears in the button model image BMG. does not appear as a dynamic display, it becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 is given the opportunity to operate. Then, when the player comes to recognize that the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) on the side with a high degree of expectation is permitted to receive an operation, he or she performs an operation on the handle portion 5012 in a sense of exhilaration. As a result, it becomes possible to remarkably improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "pattern image TMG" and the "button model image BMG" are displayed during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is given, Also, by displaying the simulated images as an "integrated simulated image" integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edges of the simulated images, the interest in the game is improved when the operation reception performance (effective period) occurs. We are trying to The functions and modifications of such an integrated model image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 to 244 is displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern model image TMG” in addition to the “button model image BMG”, good.

However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as a "composite model image HMG" that simulates at least part of the sword ornament 5001. The "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the "composite image HMG".

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing an example of the “integrated model image IG” displayed when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the handle portion 5012 .

As shown in 245(a) to (d) of FIG. 245, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment generates a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. In this case, the effect display device 1600 integrates the “pattern image TMG” that simulates the pattern portion 5012 with the “button model image BMG” to form a “composite model image HMG”, and then displays the “composite model image HMG”. "Image HMG" is displayed as integrated simulated images IGe to IGh that are integrated with the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge. In the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), the "pattern image TMG", the "button model image BMG", and the "periphery decoration image SSG" are not individually prepared as image data. They are displayed as one integrated image data (integrated model images IGe to IGh). In addition, when the integrated model images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompting displays such as "push" and "lower left arrow" are also displayed, but are omitted here for convenience of explanation.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-operation effect to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is "relatively A plurality of performance modes including a first performance mode with a low degree of expectation" and a "second performance mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" are prepared, and these performances are based on the result of the big hit determination (performance determination). It is intended to carry out any of the aspects. In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d),
245(b) than when the mode (integrated model image IGe) shown in FIG. 245(a) appears in a specific operation reception effect (effective period) When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
245(c) (integrated model image IGg) than when the mode (integrated model image IGf) shown in FIG. When appears, the appearance ratio of the "relatively high expectation second effect mode" as a post-operation effect is higher,
245(d) than when the mode (integrated model image IGg) shown in FIG. When appears, as a post-operation production, the appearance ratio of "relatively high expectations for the second production mode" is higher. Any one of the simulated images IGe to IGf is displayed.

It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as integrated model images IGe to IGh. Even if at least two aspects are prepared, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation as a post-operation effect within the validity period. Moreover, it is also possible to further prepare modes different from the above four modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh) and display any one of the prepared modes.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Operation means (sword decoration body 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by operation by the player, and a peripheral edge decoration portion (such as a sheath portion 5020) provided on the periphery of the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012);
Integration that displays a model image (pattern image TMG) obtained by simulating the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) as integrated model images IGe to IGh that are integrated with peripheral edge decoration images that decorate the peripheral edge of the model image. a simulated image display means;
An operation reception executing means capable of causing a display change (post-operation effect) when an operation is performed by the player while the integrated model image is being displayed and a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012); , and the integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

Details of the “integrated model images” shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d) will be described separately for each aspect (integrated model images IGe to IGh).

First, the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 245(a) has a pattern model image TMGe, a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal border decoration image SSGe that decorates the periphery. configured as follows. However, in the "integrated model image IGe", the pattern model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe) are "an image imitating the handle 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given" and " In contrast to the image imitating the pattern button 5014, which is not the object to which the opportunity to operate is provided, is displayed as an integrated image, the normal edge decoration image SSGe is displayed as the image in which the "image to which the opportunity to operate is provided." The peripheral decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) that is actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 is not simulated, and part of the peripheral decorative portion (such as the sheath portion 5020) is simulated in the normal peripheral decorative image SSGe according to this example. Most of the image SSGe serves as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the effect display device 1600 to decorate the periphery of the pattern image TMGe (composite pattern image HMGe). there is

In the "integrated model image IGe" shown in FIG. 245(a), the normal border decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure chest containing several treasures including the pattern image TMGe (composite model image HMGe). As described above, these "treasures" and "treasure chests" have different shapes and different decorations from the actual peripheral edge decorations.

In this regard, in the "integrated model image IGe" according to this embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal edge decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so that the display area within the display target area decreases with the lapse of time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced to a predetermined minimum value (including "0") from a predetermined maximum display area when no operation is accepted within the valid period. is displayed so as to decrease with the passage of time until the display area of .

In the normal edge decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245(a), a partition image KG is provided to partition the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal edge decoration image SSGe. . The area surrounded by the division image KG functions as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG". In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the section image KG, and a "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the necklace. However, the partition image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range in the normal edge decoration image SSGa may be set as the "display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG".

Further, as shown in FIG. 245(a), when a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGe" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the handle to be operated 5012 is made to emit light in the first mode (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245(a))). Also, the handle button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGe in the "integrated model image IGe" (for example, "blue" in FIG. 245(a)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, different colors may be used in the first mode and the fifth mode.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGf” shown in FIG. The composite model image HMGf) and the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the image are formed as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGf", there is no shape change in the pattern model image TMGf and button model image BMGf (composite model image HMGf). However, regarding the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure box itself is displayed as being the same as the above-described "normal border decoration image SSGe", the amount and type of treasures contained therein are increased in the "first special border image". It is displayed as "decorative image SSGf". The amount and types of treasures are increasing, and necklaces, treasure swords, and cups are also displayed in the case of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" and are common.

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGf" shown in FIG. 245(b), as the amount and type of treasure increases, the "necklace (section image KG)", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, The shape is changed, which makes the display mode of the gauge image GG different. According to such a configuration, the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG differs (not even similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes with different expectations is displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left as it decreases, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245(b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGf" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 is made to emit light in the second mode (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the “integrated model image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 245(b))). Also, the pattern button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGf in the “integrated model image IGf” (for example, “green” in FIG. 245(b)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, the second mode and the sixth mode may have different colors.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGg” shown in FIG. The image HMGg) and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image are formed as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGg", there is no shape change in the pattern model image TMGg and button model image BMGg (composite model image HMGg). However, regarding the border decoration image SSG, although the treasure itself is displayed as being the same as the above-mentioned "normal border decoration image SSGe", the (shape) of the treasure box containing them is different from the "second special border decoration image". Image SSGg".

However, the "second special edge decoration image SSGg" is similar to the "normal edge decoration image SSGe" and the "first special edge decoration image SSGf" in the following points.
- "It does not imitate the peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given, and the virtual display effect on the effect display device 1600 As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern image TMGg (composite pattern image HMGg) is decorated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245(c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGg" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 is made to emit light in the third mode (in FIG. 245(c), for example, emits light in the same color (eg, “red”) as the pattern image TMGg in the “integrated model image IGg”). Also, the pattern button 5014 which is not the operation target emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGg in the “integrated model image IGg” (for example, “red” in FIG. 245(c)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, different colors may be used in the third mode and the seventh mode.

On the other hand, the “integrated model image IGh” shown in FIG. The image HMGh) and the edge decoration image SSG that decorates the edge of the image are formed as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGh", there is no shape change in the pattern model image TMGh and the button model image BMGh (composite model image HMGh). However, as for the border decoration image SSG, compared to the above-described "normal border decoration image SSGe", the amount and types of treasures are increased, and the treasure chest (shape) containing them is also different from the "third It is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

In addition, in the "integrated model image IGh" according to this example, the shape of the "necklace (section image KG)", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, changes as the amount and type of treasure increases. , which makes the display mode of the gauge image GG different.

However, the "third special edge decoration image SSGh" is similar to the "normal edge decoration image SSGe" in the following points.
- "The peripheral decorative part (such as the sheath part 5020) that is actually provided on the peripheral edge of the handle part 5012 to which the operation opportunity is given is not simulated, and the virtual display effect on the effect display device 1600 is As a decoration, the periphery of the pattern image TMGh (composite pattern image HMGh) is decorated.

That is, in the "integrated model image IGh (Fig. 245(d))", a part (treasure ) and a portion (treasure chest) of the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated model image IGg (FIG. 245(c))” are displayed as a combined image. there is

On the other hand, since the same decorations and shapes appear in some areas of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the appearance of the "integrated model image IGe (FIG. 245(a))" and the appearance of the "integrated It is possible to suggest a specific operation reception effect (effective period) for the same post-operation effect as in the case where the model image IGh (Fig. 245(d)) appears.

Further, as shown in FIG. 245(d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated model image IGh" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the pattern to be operated The portion 5012 is made to emit light in the fourth mode (for example, it emits light in the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the “integrated model image IGh” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 245(d))). . Also, the pattern button 5014, which is not to be operated, emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGh in the “integrated model image IGh” (for example, “rainbow color” in FIG. 245(d)). ) to emit light). Although the same color is used here, different colors may be used in the fourth aspect and the eighth aspect.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), the pattern image TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any mode. 245(b), (d)) or according to changes in treasure chests (FIGS. 245(c), (d)). The shapes of the TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) may be made different.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), the pattern image TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) are displayed in different colors in each mode. may be displayed as

When displaying a button model image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014, in the examples shown in FIGS. I made it In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d) as well, the model button image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but the border decoration images SSGa,b are not displayed. . 232(a) to 232(d) and FIG. 245 ( It is possible to display an image completely different from the examples shown in a) to (d), thereby providing various effects.

245(a) to (d), the parts having the same functions as the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) are Needless to say, the same effects as those described above with reference to d) are achieved. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d), the above-described modified examples and production examples for the examples shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) can be appropriately adopted.

245, the effective period during which the integrated simulated image IG is displayed is similar to the effective period during which the integrated simulated image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. The "specific image TG" is displayed.

However, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. type, etc.), there are cases where the "specific image TG" is displayed and cases where the "specific image TG" is not displayed. In the effective period (multiple effective periods) in which IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is displayed regardless of the type of the effective period (type as post-operation display, post-operation sound output, type of precursor effect, etc.) It is always displayed.

That is, during the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. It does not include the effective period generated as a production. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much time is left. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

The “specific image TG” when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 245 may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233 or in the manner shown in FIG. You may make it

In the example shown in FIG. 245, the handle 5012 is given an opportunity to operate while being moved from the original position to the specific position. Operation (sword sheathing operation) is permitted. However, when giving an opportunity to operate the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, while the handle 5012 is at the original position, the handle 5012 may be given an opportunity to operate, thereby permitting a moving operation (sword drawing operation) from the original position to a specific position.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of an effect (operation reception effect) when the integrated model image IG is displayed in the manner shown in FIG.

FIG. 246(a) shows that in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, and the effect display device 1600 In the production situation being performed in , the production situation in which the display related to the precursor production (specific display TH3) is started on the production display device 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238, or may be different. 235 to 238 and the effective period shown in FIG. 246 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern. Alternatively, only one of the valid periods (operation reception effect) may be generated at a predetermined timing within the effect pattern based on the result of the effect determination.

The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed in a manner straddling before and after the occurrence timing of the effective period in which operation reception is permitted. Receipt of production) is not allowed and the effective period has not occurred.

In this respect, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by displaying the integrated model image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure chest). At the time point shown in FIG. 236(a), the treasure chest represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is displayed in a "closed mode", whereby the pattern image TMGe (composite model image HMGe) is displayed. is not displayed as an image (by the specific display TH3, which is the lid of the treasure chest), and cannot be visually recognized (or is difficult to be visually recognized).

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 246(a), the treasure chest represented by the margin decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is in the state of relatively low expectation shown in FIGS. 245(a) and (b). 245(c) and (d), which are shown in FIGS. 245(c) and 245(d). A case of displaying in a low mode (FIGS. 245(a) and (b)) is exemplified. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). In the case where the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, the explanation is omitted, but the presentation progresses after this in the same manner as "when the treasure chest is displayed in a manner with a low degree of expectation" described below. will be performed.

FIG. 246(b) shows that while the omen effect shown in FIG. (While shrinking over time), in "Treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid of the treasure box (specific display TH3) gradually expands, and this part is displayed in a good visibility. is shown.

That is, when the portent effect shown in FIG. 246(a) progresses, the specific timing arrives and the valid period for the handle portion 5012 is generated. When the effective period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the handle 5012 to be operated starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the "handle portion 5012" to be operated and the "handle button 5014" not to be operated start to emit light in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

However, at the time when such light emission is started, the portent effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246(a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246(b), the integrated model image IG changes the lid portion (specific display TH3) of the treasure chest from the "closed mode (fully closed)" to the "opened mode". It is in a state that depicts the state of being changed to (fully open). Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 246(b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG are "predictive effects (specific display TH3) depicted (expressed) in front of them." ”, but the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progressed). ). In this example, the specific image TG is entirely overlapped with the precursor effect (specific display TH) and is not displayed as an image.

According to such a configuration, the foreshadow effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed in a form that straddles the generation timing (specific timing) of the valid period, and the predetermined time after the valid period occurs , at least a portion of the integrated model image IG is rendered invisible or difficult to be visually recognized by the foreshadow effect (specific display TH3). That is, in this case, the whole picture of the integrated model image IG (pattern model image TMG and button model image BMG (composite model image HMG), border decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the valid period. Therefore, the degree of expectation (mode of peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (mode of pattern image) suggested by the mode of the integrated simulated image IG are interesting. It can be maintained for a predetermined period of time after the validity period starts.

That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 246(b), the contents of the treasure box, ie, "treasures", are displayed in a mode with a small amount and type (a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation shown in FIG. 245(a)). There are at least cases where it is displayed and cases where it is displayed in a mode with a large amount and type (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation shown in FIG. 245(b)), and in any of these modes It is intended to provide the performance of whether it is displayed or not. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), it is possible to recognize that the "treasures" that are the contents of the treasure chest are displayed in a mode with a large amount and type (a mode with a high degree of expectation). ing. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 246(b), since the "specific image TG" is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it, the type ( 234) or a type in which the "specific image TG" is not displayed at the start of the validity period and appears gradually thereafter (see FIG. 233). there is That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the "specific image TG" cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, so the type shown in FIG. It can be said that executing the precursor effect in the manner described above when employed is particularly effective in suppressing a decline in interest in the game. In addition, the case where "treasure" is displayed in a mode with low expectations will be omitted, but this is the same as "when "treasure" is displayed in a mode with high expectations" described below. Subsequent production progress will be performed.

FIG. 246(c) overlaps with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further development of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246(b). It shows a situation where the part (the part where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure") has disappeared. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated model image IG is displayed. It is possible to provide one performance from the time of the game to the end of the game, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), when the entire treasure of the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a good visibility state, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started (here, the entire "specific image TG" has finished appearing). That is, in this case, since the "specific image TG" also appears to be a part of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG", the display area is larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It is possible to make it seem that the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the omen effect (the effect of opening the lid portion, which is the specific display TH) is finished. can be expected. The "specific image TG" according to this example is displayed as an image expressing "light" displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 246(c), the pattern image TMG in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed (display depicting how the handle portion 5012 is displaced within its movable range). However, as described above, the button model image BMG is not dynamically displayed (a display depicting how the pattern button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

FIG. 246(d) shows that the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, "0"), and the effective period (set time) ends (or 16 shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before the valid period expires. At the time when the image shown in 246(d) of FIG. It may be made unacceptable. However, in this case, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 have already finished emitting light at this time. Also, in this case, images such as "push!" and "lower left arrow" may be hidden. In any case, the "specific image TG" is displayed at least partially (or entirely) even when the effective period expires.

When the valid period expires, both the light emission of the handle 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are terminated. In this regard, during the valid period in which the opportunity to operate the handle 5012 is provided, even if the player does not perform any operation during the period, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are displayed. (See FIG. 246(e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIGS. 235(e), (f), etc.) that functions within the first valid period described above.

According to such a configuration (automatic reception effect), even if a situation occurs in which the player performs an operation immediately after the valid period ends (operation reception is no longer permitted), the post-operation display Since the "specific image TG" is displayed even immediately before the post-operation sound output is performed, the post-operation display and operation can be performed in response to the operation acceptance that accompanies the operation by the player in time. It becomes possible to make it look as if the post-sound output has started. In particular, when the omen effect (pre-display) is performed in such a manner, the gauge image (predetermined The display area of the image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of the "specific image TG" has already started. That is, in this case, since it is likely that the player will not be able to perform the operation in time, even if there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the "specific image TG" will be displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting a sound after operation or after operation is effective in suppressing a decline in amusement in the game. Also, in this example, the handle button 5014 on the side to which the opportunity to operate is not provided is made to emit light in accordance with the occurrence of the valid period, and either the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014 is provided with the opportunity to operate. We are trying to make it difficult to recognize whether. That is, in this case, since there is a high possibility that the operation will not be completed in time within the valid period, it can be said to be effective in suppressing the decrease in the interest in the game when the operation is not completed in time.

246, the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 233, and the "specific image TG" is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. may be applied to any of

In the example shown in FIG. 246, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated model image IG are displayed in separate layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, thereby appearing in FIG. We decided to realize the production progress in the mode. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is also possible to store the performance development in the aspect shown in FIG.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, the mode (integrated model image IGa) shown in FIG. 245(b) is made to appear as the integrated model image IG. However, as described above, the integrated model image IG may appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 245(a) to (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). .

According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, prior to the expiration of the validity period, when the treasure chest that is part of the integrated model image IG is displayed, the treasure chest is displayed in the "highly expected mode" and " A first performance is provided as to whether the display is to be performed in a mode with a low degree of expectation. In addition, after the validity period has occurred, the treasure box of the integrated model image IG is depicted as being gradually opened, and the "treasure" is either a "high expectation state" or a "low expectation state". A second effect will be provided as to whether or not to be displayed. In other words, in this case, since the degree of expectation is suggested by the step-by-step effects (first effect, second effect) performed over the occurrence of the effective period, the effective period occurs. It will be expected that the amusement of the game in the period from before to after occurrence will be favorably improved.

In addition, since such a step-by-step effect is realized by the depiction of the integrated model image IG itself (the depiction of the lid of the treasure chest), other images (the specific display TH shown in FIG. 235) etc.), the player feels less stress than in the case where the visibility of the integrated model image IG is deprived, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. However, even in the example shown in FIG. 246, the portent effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 237, the portent effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG.

In FIG. 246, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the model image imitating the operation target is integrated with the "peripheral decoration image (first decoration image)" including the display target area of the gauge image. In the case of displaying as a model image, an example (the first operation acceptance acceptance period) of the development of the effect has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 247 and 248, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the simulated image that imitates the operation target is displayed as a "rim decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image (first decoration image)." An example (the second operation reception acceptance period) of the development of the effect will be described in the case of displaying as "an image that is not integrated with the image". The example shown in FIG. 246 and the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 do not necessarily give the same operation opportunity to the same operation object, but the same operation object is given the operation opportunity. If so, it is desirable that the model image itself that imitates the operation target is displayed as the same image (including similar shapes).

Here, as a mode in which the model image that simulates the operation target is displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image that includes the display target area of the gauge image", for example, the model image that simulates the operation target is displayed as a "periphery Displayed as a single image that is not integrated with the decoration image in the first place, or displayed as an image that simulates the operation target and is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image. It is possible to adopt an aspect such as According to such a configuration, when the effective period occurs, the gauge image is displayed in the model image that imitates the operation target is displayed as one image, and the gauge image is displayed in the image. Since the gauge image may not be displayed in the image when the model image is displayed as one image, the sense of tension during the effective period can be preferably maintained.

In the example described below, a display example is shown in which a simulated image that imitates an operation target is displayed as "an image that is integrated with a periphery decoration image that does not include a display target area of a gauge image".

First, in FIG. 247(a), in the normal game state, when the reserved number is 0, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is effected in a specific effect pattern (variation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. In the effect situation performed by the device 1600, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect condition in which the display of the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and FIG. 246, or may be different. When the effect pattern is the same, it may be generated at the first timing and the second timing in one effect pattern, or any of the valid periods (operation reception effect) may be generated based on the result of the effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing within the production pattern.

In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 247(a) and (b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 246(a) and (b), and the description of the same configurations is omitted. However, the "treasure (second decoration image)", which is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 247(b), is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. It has a different content from the existing “treasure (first decorative image)”. That is, as described above, the "simulated image that simulates the operation target" according to this example is displayed as "an image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image". Regarding the "periphery decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image", the part displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "periphery decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image" and the part displayed as a different image. It has become something.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247(c), the “treasure (second decoration image)” of the edge decoration image SSG according to this example includes the “holy grail” as shown in FIG. This is the same as the shown "treasure (first decorative image)". However, in the "treasure" of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the "gold bar" and the "necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)" shown in FIG. 246 are not displayed. An image filled with gold coins is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 247(c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 246(c), and it is also the same in that the treasure box is displayed in one of the multiple modes shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, even if there is no part of the specific display TH3 that is depicted to be on the front side of the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" (FIG. 247(c)), The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the "treasure (surrounding decoration image SSG)". In other words, in this case, while the specific display TH3 gradually makes the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)" more visible, even if an attempt is made to find the gauge image GG, it cannot be found. It will be possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension as to whether there is enough time left.

In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the display target area of the gauge image GG, the "necklace", is not displayed, the display target area of the gauge image GG, the "necklace", is displayed. The same image (such as the Holy Grail) as in the case (FIG. 245(c)) is intentionally included and displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to make it appear that the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, is also displayed somewhere. After searching for it, when you realize that this is not displayed anywhere, it will be in a situation where a certain amount of time has already passed since the validity period occurred, so the tension during the validity period will be reduced. It can be maintained well.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 247(b) to (d), the integrated model image IG in which the pattern image TMG that simulates the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG is itself a gauge image. In addition, the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG. That is, in this case, since the gauge image is not displayed and it becomes difficult to recognize how much time remains in the valid period, the tension during the valid period can be preferably maintained. Note that the display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image IG, and its display area is reduced over time. You may do so.

FIG. 247(d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set time for the valid period has passed and the valid period is about to end. As noted above, no gauge image is displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247(d), there is no indication that the valid period is about to expire, and the player cannot see the image even if he/she sees the image. unable to recognize something.

However, even during the valid period according to this example, the pattern image TMG that is the object of operation is a display that depicts how the handle portion 5012 reciprocates within its movable range (reciprocating motion from the original position to a specific position). (dynamic display) is performed. In this regard, since the effective period of this example is terminated when the reciprocating movement is repeated N times (N may not be an integer) after the occurrence of the period, By continuing to watch the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much time (how many reciprocating motions) is left as the valid period.

It should be noted that even during the effective period of this example, as shown in FIGS. display) is not performed. In this regard, when the operation receiving portion (here, the pattern button 5014) corresponding to the model image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated during the valid period in which the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed. However, a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output may be performed in response to the reception of the operation.

That is, during the valid period of this example, the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, so that the player hurriedly operates the operation receiving portion on the side that is not dynamically displayed. 246. Therefore, unlike the case shown in FIG. 246, the post-operation display and operation It is desirable to output the after sound in order to suppress the decline in the interest in the game. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as "press the handle, not the handle button!". Therefore, even if the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated and the corresponding post-operation display or post-operation sound output is performed, the effective period may be terminated or the set time period may be changed. It is desirable that the dynamic display of the pattern image TMG is continued without stopping without being reset. When the handle portion 5012 is operated within the valid period thus continued, the corresponding post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed (see FIG. 248(h)). In this case, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving portion on the non-dynamic display side is operated. It goes without saying that the content is different from the content of However, "within the validity period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the dynamically displayed button image BMG is not operated, and the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is not operated. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output when the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) is operated (for example, “Congratulations!” After the operation receiving portion (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated. It is desirable in order to improve the enjoyment of the game that the post-operation sound output (for example, "Congratulations on being on time!") is executed with different contents.

FIG. 248(e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when no operation is accepted within the time (set time) set for the effective period of this example.

That is, in the effective period of this example, if the set time elapses without any operation being accepted (FIGS. 247(d) and (e)), the handle 5012 is operated within the effective period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when it was performed are not executed (automatic reception effect is functioned).

However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed within the integrated model image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as a separate image. There is a possibility that the effective period may end due to the inability to perform the operation despite the intention to perform the operation, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may decrease. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period expires without any operation by the player, while the specific condition (for example, pattern stop, 10 seconds before the pattern stop is not reached, etc.) is not satisfied , an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (handle 5012 in this case) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity was given within the valid period, and when an operation to the operation means is accepted, this is done. Based on the above valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period expires without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period is generated from the point of time when the valid period expires.

According to such a configuration, even if the valid period expires as a result of the lapse of the predetermined set time without any operation by the player, the operation shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation reception for outputting a post-operation display or a post-operation sound output. More specifically, in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. (Fig. 248(f), (g)). After that, the contents as described above are repeated again with reference to FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIGS. Therefore, even if an operation is accepted within the valid period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance will be executed in the manner described above (see FIG. 248(h)). reference).

It should be noted that when the operation is accepted in the situation (special validity period) shown in FIG. 248(e), the images shown in FIGS. (same as the image shown in c)) will appear in sequence. Such an image is a post-operation display executed based on acceptance of an operation during the effective period (FIGS. 247(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(f), (g), etc.). are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 248(f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the acceptance of the operation.

247 and 248, the specific image TG is not displayed during the effective period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. good too. For example, when a predetermined condition for accepting an operation regarding a predetermined post-operation display (predetermined post-operation sound output) is satisfied (when a predetermined timing arrives), the situation shown in FIG. 247(c) appears. , and thereafter, the display may progress in the same manner as in the above example.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the pattern image TMG and the button model image BMG are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG), but these model images are displayed as separate images. You may make it display. In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the "button model image BMG" and the "pattern model image TMG" are displayed as one image (composite model image HMG) containing both of these model images. The "composite model image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated model image IG" that is integrated with the periphery decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. However, the “button model image BMG” and the “pattern model image TMG” are displayed as separate images, respectively, and at least one of these model images is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge. You may make it display as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image, and the "button model image BMG" is displayed as a separate separate image, the "pattern image TMG" and "button model image BMG" are displayed at the same time. It becomes possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving part (handle part 5012) should be operated. In this case, the "pattern image TMG" in the integrated model image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the "button model image BMG" displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. Configurations and other examples are similarly applicable.

In addition, in the valid period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIG. Only the model image TMG) may be displayed.

247 and 248 should preferably be generated with a longer set time than the valid period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIG. 246. FIG. In this case, the pattern image (here, the pattern image TMG) is dynamically displayed (reciprocating speed, etc.) within the effective period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIG. It is preferable that the dynamic display mode (reciprocation speed, etc.) of the pattern image (here, the pattern image TMG) be the same within the indicated effective period (operation acceptance effect). According to such a configuration, even when the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to check the "dynamic display of the simulated image" based on the case where the gauge image GG is displayed. You will be encouraged to operate.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the border decoration image SSG may be the image of "treasure" and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving portion corresponding to the model image that is not dynamically displayed is the “first operation receiving portion”, in the examples shown in FIGS. The operation receiving portion corresponding to the image may be the "first operation receiving portion". However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving portion to be dynamically displayed is the "second operation receiving portion", in the examples shown in FIGS. It is desirable that the operation receiving portion corresponding to is a "third operation receiving portion" different from the "second operation receiving portion". According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate two types of operation acceptance effects in which the display relationship between the three operation targets (operation receiving units) slides. , it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Also, the valid period (operation acceptance effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not necessarily have to occur during the execution period of the symbol variation. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of the presence or absence of symbol variation, or during the execution period of the jackpot game or the period before the start of the jackpot game. ” may occur.

247 and 248, during the effective period (operation acceptance effect), the decoration pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is hidden, as in the effective period shown in FIGS. 240-243. Alternatively, it may be made difficult to visually recognize, thereby making it easier to notice that the gauge image is in a special effect state in which it is not displayed.

As the effective period during which the image shown in FIG. 246(c) is displayed, a plurality of effective periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 246 does not have to be made in all of these valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may be made in at least one valid period.

A plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared as the valid period during which the image shown in FIG. 247(c) is displayed. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not have to be made in all of these valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 may be made in at least one valid period.

247 and 248, unlike the valid period shown in FIG. You may make it displayable only in the aspect.

The effective period during which the gauge image is not displayed (operation reception effect) can occur only when an operation opportunity is given to one of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is given to the other. An effective period (operation acceptance effect) in which the gauge image is displayed without fail may be generated when the token is granted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effective period (effective period shown in FIGS. The effective period during which the integrated model image is displayed in which the GG display target area is not provided in the first place (the effective period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) can be generated as one of multiple types of effective periods. there is In this regard, in these effective periods (FIGS. 239 to 241, 247, and 248), in order to preferably maintain the sense of tension, when the operation by the player is not accepted, when the operation is accepted (no automatic button function), and during the effective period (Figs. In order to maintain the game in a favorable manner, it is desirable that when the player's operation is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is performed (with an automatic button function).

In this respect, the effective period during which the integrated model image is displayed in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced (the effective period shown in FIGS. When an operation is accepted for an operating means to which an opportunity to operate is given during the valid period during which the model image is displayed (the valid period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248), a change (display It is desirable that the integrated model image is displayed instead of being hidden at the time when at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as light emission of lamps) is started. Also, it is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the integrated model image. As a result, the gauge image does not indicate the remaining time, and it is expected that it will be possible to make the player feel uneasy about whether the production reception was properly performed, and to maintain the tension more appropriately. Become so.

In this case, the display mode of the simulated image (for example, color and transmittance, etc.) may not necessarily be the same, and the simulated image may be in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it with another image, and the operation reception will be able to tell which operation means was the operation target. It is sufficient if the corresponding change (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as display change and lamp emission) is recognizable. On the other hand, within the effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246) during which the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced in size as time elapses, changes (display changes, , at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect such as lamp emission) occurs, the integrated model image (both the model image and the gauge image) in the state where the change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) occurs ) may be hidden, or, as in the case described above, changes (display changes, lamp emission, etc.) in response to operation reception may be performed while the integrated model image is displayed instead of being hidden. may be generated.

However, even during the valid period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced over time", a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated is displayed. For images, it is desirable to display them as moving images that progress at a particular speed. With such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time during which operation reception is permitted depending on how much the moving image based on the model image has progressed. It is expected that it will be possible and that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

[Integrated model image, effect before valid period, effect of disappearing model image]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variation pattern determination as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

Then, as described above, when such production determination (production pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, it is possible to judge the big hit. The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect of the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed as a privilege for the player. become possible.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of the big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the reception acceptance state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions is a pre-determined state for the production member to be produced as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and a effect operation by the movable decorative body) is performed. The permissive state (effective period) itself has poor performance, and there is concern that the game interest will decrease until the performance is executed after the operation.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, first, when the acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the opportunity to operate is granted occurs, the operation receiving part to which the opportunity to operate is granted is selected. By displaying the simulated model image as an integrated model image (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image, it is possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game until the performance after the operation is executed. We are trying to curb the decline. For such an integrated model image, the operation reception effect (effective period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach, and the operation that occurs in the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to display it both in the reception performance (effective period) and in both the low-expectation non-suppressed reception performance and the high-expectation suppressed reception performance. In addition, each of the production examples described above (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231) can also be realized by replacing the display mode of the exemplified model images with one of the integrated model images described below. This is desirable in terms of improving the amusement of the game.

Note that the "integrated model image" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the "integrated model image", and it is also the same in that it is displayed in any one of these modes.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance allowable state occurs, an acceptance allowable sound indicating that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance will be allowed is played. It is designed to output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not an acceptable acceptance state (effective period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which the acceptability state (effective period) has already occurred.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of reception permission states including a first reception permission state and a second reception permission state are prepared as the reception permission state (effective period). there is Here, the first acceptance allowable state can occur when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern), but the low-expectation fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) Among them, a valid period that cannot occur in a predetermined variation pattern (or in any variation pattern of low expected variation patterns) validity period generated). In addition, the second acceptance acceptable state is when a specific variation pattern is selected from among the high-expectation variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns), and when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns). In either case (or at least one of these variation patterns), the valid period that can occur (the second condition different from the first condition in the production judgment based on the result of the big hit judgment validity period generated based on the fact that it is established).

The "integrated model image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state. Here, since it is assumed that the first acceptance acceptance state and the second acceptance acceptance state both occur as acceptance acceptance states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410), The "integrated model image" displayed in the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state is an image imitating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as the "integrated model image", the special mode with high expectations (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state. Of these, it can only be displayed in the first acceptance state, and in the second acceptance state, it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (c)). ing. In the first acceptability state, it is determined in which of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the "integrated model image" is displayed based on the result of the jackpot determination. The "integrated model image" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second acceptance allowable state, it is determined whether the "integrated model image" is displayed in any of the multiple modes that do not include the special mode (for example, Figure 232 (a) ~ (c)) based on the result of the big hit determination A determination may be made, and the "integrated model image" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

In such a configuration, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output in the first acceptance acceptable state, and in the second acceptance acceptable state, One type of acceptance acceptable sound (third acceptance acceptable sound) is output. Here, the first acceptable sound and the third acceptable acceptable sound are, for example, output as sound effects such as "Pickin!" It may be output as sound. On the other hand, the second allowable sound is, for example, output as a message sound such as "press!". However, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound. It is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the sound (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is being output.

Here, as described above, in the first acceptance acceptance state, the "integrated model image" can be displayed even in a mode different from the special mode (a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation). Even in this case, two types of acceptance acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output. That is, in this case, if only one type of reception acceptable sound is output when the acceptance acceptable state occurs (the integrated simulated image is displayed), the special mode will not be displayed as the "integrated simulated image", and the special mode will not be displayed. However, when two types of acceptable acceptance sounds are output, a special mode is displayed as an "integrated model image", and a mode different from the special mode is displayed. There will be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated model image" will be displayed in a special mode based on the mode in which the acceptable reception sound is output. It becomes possible to improve the game interest when the state occurs.

Further, when the "integrated model image" is displayed in the first reception permitted state or the second reception permitted state, prior to this, a preliminary effect (predictive effect) is executed, and the integrated model image is displayed. is displayed (displayed in a difficult-to-see state) in such a state that such a pre-rendering is being executed so that at least a part thereof overlaps with the "image associated with the pre-rendering". Then, in the integrated model image, the portion overlapping with the "image for the pre-effect" is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the "image for the pre-effect" is gradually reduced. , and finally disappears, so that the mode (whole) is exposed (displayed in a state that is easy to see) after the occurrence of the reception allowable state. Such a preliminary effect (premonitory effect) is, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 235(b), (c) and FIGS. You may make it

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the output of the second permissible sound does not start at the timing when the first permissible sound is output, but it starts outputting with a delay. ing. However, at the time when the output of the first allowable sound is started in advance, the fact that "the integrated model image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is in a state where it is difficult to recognize the mode" Of course, even when the output of the second allowable sound is started with a delay, at least a part of the integrated model image is in a state in which the image for the preliminary effect (premonition effect) is superimposed from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. Note that the acceptance allowable state (effective period) occurs when the pre-performance (premonition effect) is started or during its execution period, and at least when the output of the second allowable sound is started. Either it has already occurred, or it will occur in conjunction with the start of output.

According to such a configuration, at least when the situation is such that "the first allowable sound is being output and the second allowable sound is not being output", two types of acceptable acceptable sounds (the first allowable sound and the Either the first acceptance acceptable state in which the second acceptable sound is output (or is occurring), or the second acceptable acceptance state in which only one type of acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is output occurs ( or is occurring) is difficult to recognize. However, when a situation such as ``output of the second allowable sound starts after the first allowable sound is output'' appears, two types of acceptable allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first reception acceptance state that is set is occurring, and that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, under the condition that it is difficult to recognize in which mode the integrated model image is displayed (or whether it is displayed),
・When transitioning from "a state in which only the first allowable sound out of the first and second allowable sounds is output" to "a state in which at least the second allowable sound is output" (first acceptance allowable state) When,
・When "only the first allowable sound out of the first and second allowable sounds is output" does not transition to "at least the second allowable sound is output" (second acceptance allowable state) can occur, and it is possible to suggest "the possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode" by such a mode of "transition of the output of the acceptable acceptance sound". Therefore, during the "state in which only the first allowable sound out of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output", before the image related to the preliminary effect (predictive effect) is hidden, It is possible to make the player interested in whether or not the output of the second allowable sound is started, thereby improving the amusement of the game. As a result, if the second allowable sound is output while the image relating to the preliminary effect (premonition effect) is displayed, the integrated image having the special mode is displayed (displayed). In the midst of such expectation, it is possible to provide performance such that the integrated model image is gradually revealed.

As described above, even when the second allowable sound starts to be output, at least a part of the integrated model image is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "pre-production image". Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated model image may be displayed in a special mode, at least it is not possible to easily recognize in which mode the integrated model image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, at the time when the output of the second allowable sound is started, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained, or the output state of the first allowable sound may be ended. .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any reception allowable sound (the first allowable sound or the second allowable sound), and while the integrated model image is displayed, the operating means (here, , operation buttons 410), a change in the display or a post-operation output sound may be generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance state or the second acceptance state. good. In this case, the change in display and the content of the post-operation output sound may differ according to the type of acceptance acceptance state (first acceptance acceptance state, second acceptance acceptance state, third acceptance acceptance state).

In other words, by displaying the integrated model image without outputting any acceptable acceptance sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to grasp when the acceptance of the operation became acceptable. It becomes possible to improve the game interest. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated model image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image should be displayed in one of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, a "gauge stop period" occurs during which the gauge image GG is not reduced, or the area of the gauge image GG is not set to a predetermined value (0) and is left untouched to be integrated. Since the image is hidden, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the reception acceptance state is occurring, and it is possible to more preferably improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. You will be able to plan.

Alternatively, when the integrated model image is displayed without outputting any acceptable acceptance sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated model image, and the display target area is not even provided. good too. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. The display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image separate from the integrated model image, and the same image (periphery decoration image) is intentionally included when the target area is displayed. The technical idea, such as "to make it so," can be applied in the same way. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more preferably improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. become able to.

Further, even in the acceptance acceptance state according to this example, there are cases where operation reception is allowed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, ) is output in a suppressed mode, or operation reception is permitted while it is in a non-output state. In this example, "outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppressed mode" includes the case where the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output at a volume of "0" (silent output). be. "Non-output state" includes, for example, a case where no channel is even assigned.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, and a specific type of effect A plurality of reception permission states are prepared in which operation reception is permitted while sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. Acceptance state" and "third acceptance acceptance state" are acceptance acceptance states in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is being output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The above-mentioned "second acceptance acceptable state" is one in which an operation is accepted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in an unsuppressed mode. It is included as one of the acceptable acceptance states.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to be conscious of the possibility that the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode when the BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound) is suppressed or is not output. Since it is possible to do so, it is possible to avoid a situation where the performance is poor, and at the same time, while the sound of the BGM playback is suppressed or in a non-output state, the performance can be enjoyed by giving more concentration. You will be able to

It should be noted that the ``acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state'' means that it is output in a non-suppressed mode. The specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) that has been set may be output in a suppression mode, or may be set to a non-output state before the reception allowable state is generated, or the specific type of effect sound ( While BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressed mode, an acceptance acceptable state is generated, and while the reception acceptable state is occurring (or at the same time), a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback) is suppressed. , or in a non-output state. The point is that the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state.

Further, even in the acceptance allowable state according to this example, when an operation is not detected within the set time in which operation acceptance is allowed, the same display change as when the operation is detected is executed in an automatic acceptance mode. In other cases, the operation is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, of the reception-allowed states, the reception-allowed state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed is as described above.
・It does not mean that the post-operation display or post-operation sound output is output only when it is set to a special effect state (automatic reception mode), regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period.
- Regardless of the effect state (state of effect setting), regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the valid period, the post-operation display and post-operation sound output are output. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare a "special presentation state (automatic reception mode)" or a "plurality of presentation states" as the presentation state. In addition, if the acceptance acceptance state in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed among the acceptance acceptance states occurs when it is set to a special effect state (automatic acceptance mode), whether the automatic acceptance is enabled. Either may be adopted as to whether or not (for example, it may be "automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the production state", or "when a special production state (automatic reception mode) is set auto-attendant is enabled only when the device is enabled"), which is irrelevant to the configuration according to the technical features described here.

More specifically, during the demo screen (the period in which the symbol variation is not executed), if settings related to the game are possible, even if any of these settings are selected, " Automatic reception is always enabled in the reception-permitting state in which the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Among these settings, when at least specific setting conditions are met, conditions for occurrence of different occurrence conditions for the acceptance allowable state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed and the acceptance allowable state in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed are different. It can occur in the base. Game-related settings include settings such as volume, brightness, probability of appearance of effects, etc. in addition to the special effect state (automatic reception mode), and settings related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) are always installed. It doesn't have to be something. If the setting for the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set in the "specific setting conditions".

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, at least when certain setting conditions are met, the "automatic reception mode" is executed, and the "non-automatic reception mode" is executed. A plurality of reception acceptance states are prepared, and the above-mentioned "first acceptance acceptance state" is included as one of the acceptance acceptance states in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed. , and the above-described "second acceptance acceptable state" and "third acceptance acceptable state" are included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed.

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the operation is forgotten). In the state, the "automatic reception mode" will be executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated model image is displayed in a highly anticipated special mode (a mode in which the rate of stopping with a jackpot pattern is higher than in other modes), the post-operation production (At least one of display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and the decline in the game interest can be suppressed. will be able to On the other hand, there is no possibility that the integrated simulated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if you forget to operate), and the third Since the ``non-automatic reception mode'' is executed in the reception permission state, it is preferable for the tension when the operation reception is permitted while suppressing the deterioration of the game interest when the operation is forgotten. can be maintained at

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptance acceptance sound is output overlaps with the acceptance acceptance state, and when the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state, the operation is accepted. Then, based on the fact that the operation has been accepted, the output state of the acceptance acceptance sound can be terminated in the middle (can be made inaudible).

According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance allowable sound is terminated in the middle is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation is accepted). Is it in a state where acceptance has been made or is it in a state where operation acceptance has not yet been made?"

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period during which the acceptance acceptance sound is output overlaps with the acceptance acceptance state, but when the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state Even if the operation is accepted at the time, the output state of the acceptance acceptance sound cannot be terminated halfway (it can be made inaudible) based on the operation acceptance, and this may be maintained. I have to. As will be described later, a plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway and a plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated midway are prepared. is included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated in the middle. is included as one of

According to such a configuration, there is a possibility that the integrated model image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game will be significantly reduced if the operation is forgotten). In the state, if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, this will be terminated in the middle. Therefore, when the integrated model image is displayed in a highly anticipated special mode (a mode in which the rate of stopping with a big hit pattern is higher than in other modes), it is possible to say, "Is the operation accepted? It is possible to concentrate on post-operation effects such as post-operation displays, post-operation output sounds, light emission changes by lamps, and production actions by movable decorations. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in game interest. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state in which there is no possibility that the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) (possibility that the interest in the game is significantly reduced when the operation is forgotten), the reception Even if the operation is accepted while the allowable sound is being output, the operation is not terminated in the middle. It can be maintained well.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, if operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) I try to make it happen from time to time.

More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output. In addition to the first reception acceptance state that occurs when the When the model image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)) and when the integrated model image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232(a) to (c)) However, in the fourth reception acceptance state, the integrated model image is not displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232(d)), and in a mode different from the special mode (FIGS. 232(a) to ( c)). In the first reception permission state, when an operation is received while the reception permission sound is being output, the output state of the reception permission sound is terminated halfway based on the fact that the operation is accepted (inaudible). state), on the other hand, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state, if an operation is accepted while an acceptance acceptance sound is in an output state, the acceptance acceptance sound output state is interrupted based on the fact that the operation is accepted. I try not to terminate it (not to make it inaudible).

According to such a configuration, an acceptance acceptance state is generated in which operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not being output. When the integrated model image is displayed in a special mode in the allowable state, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway based on the operation acceptance. On the other hand, an acceptance acceptance state is generated in which operation acceptance is allowed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. When the simulated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases where the acceptable acceptance sound is terminated in the middle based on the operation acceptance, and there are cases where the acceptable acceptance sound is maintained without being terminated in the middle. become.

In other words, in this case, in the reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the suppression mode or is not output, the integrated model image is in the special mode. is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which there is a low possibility that the interest in the game will be remarkably lowered when the operation is forgotten), even if the operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated in the middle based on the operation acceptance. Since there are cases where the allowable sound is not ended in the middle and is maintained, I wonder if the reason is that the operation is not accepted when the acceptable sound is not ended in the middle. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether the reason is the occurrence of the fourth reception permission state even though it is released, and to suitably maintain a sense of tension while suppressing the deterioration of amusement in a game. be able to

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the above-mentioned first reception acceptable state occurs, prior to this, a wide area using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600 etc.) When the second reception acceptance state occurs, the narrow-area type pre-rendering that uses less than half of the predetermined display region starts to be executed. It is designed to be Then, the model image (here, the integrated model image) that imitates the operation receiving part is displayed both during the period during which the wide-area type preliminary effect is being executed and during the period during which the first reception permitting state is occurring. are displayed in different manners in the period during which the wide-area type preliminary effect is being executed and in the period during which the first reception permitting state is occurring.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, an integrated model image (model image) displayed during the period in which the wide-area type pre-effect is being executed and displayed in the period during which the first reception permission state is occurring. Although the integrated model image (model image) simulates the same operation receiving part (operation button 410), it is displayed based on different image data, As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed as being different.

According to such a configuration, when performing the wide-area type pre-effect, there is a greater degree of freedom without being bound by the form (image data) of the integrated model image (model image) displayed in the first reception allowable state. Since it is possible to display the integrated model image (simulated image) with highly independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing the pre-production in a wider area (wide-area type pre-production). become. It is clear that such effects cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on single image data.

In addition, in the acceptability state in which the wide-area type pre-performance is executed, as compared to the acceptance-allowed state in which the narrow-area type pre-performance is executed, the effect at the time of the big hit that appears only when the big win is obtained as the post-operation effect. It is designed so that the appearance rate of the mode is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

Incidentally, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptable acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptable states corresponding to the wide area type preliminary effect (in which the wide area type preliminary effect is executed). A first reception acceptance state and a third reception acceptance state are prepared as one. In addition, a plurality of reception acceptance states are prepared as reception acceptance states corresponding to the narrow-range type pre-production (in which the narrow-range type pre-production is executed). A state and a fourth reception acceptance state are prepared respectively.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, the operation performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. As described above, the operation can be accepted, and the second acceptance-allowed state allows the operation to be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode. As I said. That is, when the narrow-range type pre-production, which is relatively inferior in performance, is performed, the operation reception is performed while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is not suppressed but is not suppressed. Since the game can be played (second acceptance permitted state), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the fact that the wide-area type pre-effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, if the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the wide area type that is relatively superior in effect Since the pre-effect is to be performed (first reception permitted state), the game is played by not accepting the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the non-suppressed mode. A decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least when the specific setting conditions (one effect state) exist, in the first reception permission state, the operation is not detected within the set time during which operation reception is permitted. When the operation is detected, it is executed in an automatic acceptance mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. As described above, when the operation is not detected, it is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception acceptance state in which the wide-area type pre-effect is performed, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will be reduced when the user forgets to operate the game due to its high performance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the operator forgets to operate. On the other hand, in the second reception acceptance state in which the narrow-range type pre-rendering is performed, it is suggested in a relatively inconspicuous manner that the operation acceptance will be permitted. Only the person who is paying attention and realizes that the operation acceptance will be permitted can be made to enjoy the post-operation presentation such as the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound, so that the tension can be appropriately made. be able to maintain.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the performance sound (BGM reproduction) of a specific type is output in a suppressed mode, or is in a reception permission state in which operation reception is permitted while it is in a non-output state. includes at least the first reception acceptance state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth reception acceptance state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As described above. In this regard, in the fourth acceptance permitted state, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In this state, an operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode, which has a higher degree of suppression than the fourth suppression mode, or is in a non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs, prior to this, the execution of the narrow-area type preliminary effect using only less than half of the predetermined display area is started. In other words, when the narrow-range pre-production, which is relatively inferior in performance, is performed, even if the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed, the degree of suppression is reduced. (Fourth Acceptable State), it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the wide-area pre-rendering, which is relatively superior in performance, has not been performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or being in a non-output state. In the case (first reception acceptance state), since the wide-area type pre-production that is relatively superior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decrease in amusement interest can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is accepted by the player while the first acceptance allowable state is occurring and the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed, the operation is accepted. Execution of the corresponding post-operation production (at least one of display change in the production display device 1600, production sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and production operation by the movable decorative body) is started, and a model image (integrated model image) is hidden, a wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect) using at least half or more of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed. When the operation is accepted by the player while the second acceptance allowable state occurs and the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed, a post-operation effect (effect display device) corresponding to the operation acceptance At least one of the display change in 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect action by the movable decorative body) is started, and the model image (integrated model image) is hidden. A narrow-range extinction effect (narrow-range extinction effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display region (for example, the performance display device 1600) is executed.

Here, the annihilation effect (wide-area annihilation effect, narrow-area annihilation effect) is a form that makes part or all of the model image (integrated model image) in the display state difficult to see or invisible. It means "an image different from the model image" or "display effect on the model image" to be displayed. Such a disappearance effect (disappearance effect) may be executed as an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the model image (integrated model image) is displayed, for example. , the model image (integrated model image) and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the video (disappearance effect). Effect) may be used to express how it becomes difficult to see, or it may be executed by changing the display mode of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) itself (display effect). may be However, as such a disappearance effect, when hiding the model image (integrated model image), in order to suggest the degree of expectation or improve the interest in the game, Needless to say, it is more desirable to display them as separate images.

Also, "when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden...the disappearance effect is executed" means "when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden, . . , the disappearance effect is executed", or "while the model image (integrated model image) is hidden (the model image (integrated model image) itself has a high transmittance , etc.) . , is meant to include any of these aspects. In addition, in the process of hiding the model image (integrated model image), the fact that the transmittance of this itself increases is called "when the model image (integrated model image) is hidden. . . , the annihilation effect is executed."

According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation by the player starts to be executed and the model image is hidden, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there are cases where the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed and cases where the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to enhance performance until the time when the model image (integrated model image) disappears.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when executing such a disappearance effect (image at the time of disappearance), in the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance), the narrow-area disappearance effect (narrow The background image that was displayed before the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is displayed, until the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is hidden, or after the operation (Post-operation display and post-operation output sound) are displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is displayed before the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is displayed based on the reception of the operation by the player. The background image is changed to a different background until the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is hidden, or while the post-operation production (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed. We are going to transform it into an image.

That is, when the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is executed, not only the model image (integrated model image) but also at least part of the background image image) makes it difficult to see, so the background image is changed (replaced) with a different background image aiming at the timing when such a wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is executed. By doing so, it becomes possible to realize a smooth effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) using the button effect. For example, the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is an image that is displayed in a separate layer that precedes the layer in which the model image (integrated model image) is displayed and the layer in which the background image is displayed. Alternatively, the model image (integrated model image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one video prepared in advance, and one of the model images (integrated model image) is displayed in the video. A part or the whole, or a part or the whole of the background image may be expressed to become difficult to be visually recognized by the image (disappearance effect).

On the other hand, when the narrow-type disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is executed, while the narrow-area disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-area disappearance) is hidden, or after the operation Since the background image is not changed while the effect (post-operation display and post-operation output sound) is being executed, the effect transition (transition to a new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, the player is interested in which of the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) and the narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing image) is displayed in addition to the post-operation effect. Thus, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest related to the model image from the time the model image (integrated model image) is displayed until it is hidden.

Also, when the wide-area disappearing effect (wide-area disappearing image) is displayed, a big hit is obtained as a post-operation production than when the narrow-area disappearing effect (narrow-area disappearing image) is displayed. The ratio of appearance of the performance mode at the time of the big hit, which appears only when the game is on, is high. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptance states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states (in which the wide-area disappearance effect is executed) corresponding to the wide-area disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance image). As one of these reception permission states, a first reception permission state and a third reception permission state are prepared. In addition, multiple acceptability states are prepared as acceptability states (in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed) corresponding to the narrow-range disappearance effect (image at the time of narrow-range disappearance). A second reception acceptance state and a fourth reception acceptance state are prepared as one of the .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first reception acceptance state, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state. In the second reception acceptance state, the operation by the player can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode. What is happening is as described above. That is, when a narrow-range disappearing effect, which is relatively inferior in performance, is performed, a specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not suppressed, but is not suppressed. Since the operation can be accepted (second acceptance allowed state), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest due to the fact that the wide-area disappearing effect with relatively excellent performance is not performed. On the other hand, if the operation can be accepted by the player while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the effect is relatively high. Since an excellent wide-area disappearing effect is performed (first acceptance permitted state), it is possible to accept an operation by a player while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in an unsuppressed mode. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that it was not done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least a specific set condition (one effect state) exists, in the first reception permission state, the operation is detected within the set time during which the player's operation reception is permitted. When the operation is not detected, it is executed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. As described above, when an operation is not detected in , execution is performed in a non-automatic acceptance mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first reception acceptance state in which the wide-area disappearing effect is performed, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will be lowered when the user forgets to operate the game due to the high level of performance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the user forgets to operate. In other words, in this case, even if the player's operation is not accepted and the automatic reception functions, the wide-area disappearing effect is executed in the same manner as when the player's operation is accepted. On the other hand, in the second acceptability state in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed, the execution is performed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, so the set time elapses without the player performing any operation (the second acceptability state). When the state ends), the model image is displayed without any post-operation effects (at least one of a display change on the effect display device 1600, a sound effect change on the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body). It will be hidden. In this regard, in the second acceptability state, even when the model image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not being executed, the narrow-range disappearing effect is executed, which causes the user to forget to operate. As a result, the decline in the interest in the game when the post-operation effect is no longer executed is suppressed. At this time, the narrow-area disappearing effect may be executed in the same mode (same image) as when the operation is accepted and the post-operation rendering is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second reception acceptance state according to this example, the narrow-range type disappearance effect that appears when the operation is accepted and the post-operation production is executed, and the case where the operation is not accepted and the post-operation production is not executed A different aspect (image) appears in the narrow-range type disappearance effect that appears in .

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the operation reception by the player is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. The allowable states include at least the first acceptance allowable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptability state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. As mentioned above. In the fourth acceptability state, the operation by the player can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the acceptability state, the performance sound (BGM reproduction) of the specific type is output in a first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or an operation by the player while it is in a non-output state. It has also been mentioned above that acceptance can be made. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when an operation is accepted by the player in the fourth acceptability state, the narrow-area disappearing effect is executed instead of the wide-area disappearing effect. . That is, when a narrow-range disappearing effect with relatively inferior performance is performed, prior to that, the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed, but the degree of suppression is reduced. Therefore, (fourth reception acceptance state), it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the fact that the wide-area disappearing effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation can be accepted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or being in a non-output state. In the case (first reception acceptance state), a wide-area disappearing effect that is relatively superior in performance is performed, so the degree of suppression of the specific type of production sound (BGM playback) was not low. A decrease in amusement interest can be suppressed.

FIG. 249 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect setting). FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the second acceptability state occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 251 (a) ), and the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination of the notice effect is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "second variation pattern" itself within the execution period of the variable effect. It will happen.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained (when the second condition is satisfied) in the production determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the control as shown in FIG. The second reception acceptance state (effective period) in which operation reception regarding the second post-operation production is permitted when timing tB3 has passed after the second predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable production of the decorative symbol SZ. is generated (corresponding to “situation shown in FIG. 251(d)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the second acceptance allowable state (effective period),
- "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" according to the second variation pattern, for example, operation acceptance while maintaining the output state in the unsuppressed mode of the BGM playback sound during normal fluctuation It is in the allowable “non-suppressed acceptance allowable state (see FIGS. 249(a) and (b))”, and ・the operation was not detected within the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) in which operation acceptance is allowed case, the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 249(h))" that does not generate the post-operation effect (post-second operation effect) corresponding to the second acceptance allowable state.
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

According to such a configuration, the set time (valid period ) is suddenly set (unsuppressed reception effect), the player is taken by surprise, and the start of movement is likely to be delayed when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time ends without the post-operation effect (non-automatic acceptance aspect) and the risk of missing an opportunity to generate the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect), so that the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

However, such a "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" is a post-operation effect (here, a second operation-post effect) that appears only at the time of a big hit than the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" described later. Although the ratio (may be 0% or 100%) is low, if the post-operation effect does not occur frequently against the player's will, the interest in the game may decrease. Concerned. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tB2, which is a little earlier than the timing tB2, starts outputting the "acceptance acceptable sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"), the timing within the set time Even if the operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained across this period. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permitted state is set. It is possible to make it difficult to frequently occur that the player is late in noticing that the reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. come to be expected. However, the "reception allowable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) occurs. It may be generated in accordance with the generation timing of tB3.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptance allowable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Pikin!" and a second allowable sound output as a message sound such as . However, as shown in FIGS. 249(f) and (j), in the second reception permission state, the second permission sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permission sound (effect sound) is output. is output, and even with such an output restriction on the "acceptable sound", a delay is likely to occur in the start of movement when the player tries to operate.

By the way, in the second reception permission state, as a countermeasure against the sudden setting of the set time or the execution in the non-automatic reception mode, the operation means (here, the operation By repeatedly hitting the button 410), it is conceivable that some players may try not to miss the opportunity to generate the post-operation effect. However, in this case, since the post-operation effect is started immediately after the operation is accepted, the started effect is "performed in response to the operation acceptance (post-operation effect)." It becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "automatically generated as a mere notice effect unrelated to operation reception", and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (particularly, FIG. 249(e)), in the second acceptance allowable state, the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is emitted after the set time (effective period) occurs. When the effect is accepted at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is ended, but the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated halfway and is treated as the first acceptable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing when the output ends (timing tB3c (Fig. 249(e), (i)), which is the same as when there is no operation). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to recognize whether it is what is being done (post-operation effect) or what is automatically generated as a effect unrelated to the operation reception. become.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 249, when the production reception is performed within the set time of the second reception permission state (timing tB3a in the figure), the production display device At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated (Fig. 249(d) ). In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tB4, regardless of the timing within the set time (effective period) when the effect is accepted. On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is performed. However, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, if the timing tB4 has not passed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. You are required to maintain the status quo.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB2, which is earlier than the timing tB3 at which the set time for the second acceptance allowable state is set, arrives, the operation means to be operated on the effect display device 1600 is displayed. is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timings tB3 to tB4) of the second reception permitted state is set. It is possible to make it difficult to frequently occur that the player is late in noticing that the reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) ends without occurring. come to be expected. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) starts to be output. can be Alternatively, only one of the model image and the acceptable reception sound (for example, only the model image) may be started before timing tB3.

Further, as described above, the model image displayed when the second acceptability state occurs (the image that imitates the operation receiving part to which the opportunity to operate is given) has a peripheral edge that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image. It is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated model image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area (partition image KG) of the image GG is provided. In addition, as the “integrated model image IG”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared, and the same applies to selectively displaying one of the modes. However, in the second reception acceptance state, a special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. ) and different from the special mode (for example, the normal mode shown in FIG. 232(a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the integrated model image IGa with the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated model image IG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 249(c) to (f), it is assumed that timing tB3a arrives while such an integrated model image is being displayed and an operation is accepted. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and by the movable decorative body). As at least one of the effect actions), the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are respectively started (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 251(f)").

However, as shown in FIGS. 249(c), (d) and 251(f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated model image IG is not displayed when the post-operation effect is started. remain visible. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), the integrated model image IG (specific layer) is not caused to change due to it, and after a short time ( Until the timing tB3b when the predetermined time has passed, the "display on the integrated model image IG" is continued in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 251, a conversation notice (maybe a chance) by the princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or all of the integrated model image in the display state difficult to see or makes it invisible appears (see FIG. 251 (g) corresponds to "situation shown in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer preceding the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or an image displayed in a separate layer that precedes the layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed. ) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated model image IG in the moving image is expressed as becoming difficult to see due to the image KSE (annihilation effect). as described above.

As shown in FIG. 249(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. remain visible. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, the integrated model image IG is not caused to change due to it. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the annihilation effect on the layer above it, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult or invisible.

That is, in this case, for the purpose of making the model image (integrated model image IG) difficult to see or making it invisible, the disappearance effect image KSE (the same applies to the wide area disappearance effect image HSE described later) is added. A model image (integrated model image IG) that is displayed on a specific layer (behind the specified layer (lower priority side) than the specified layer) in spite of being in a situation to be displayed on the specified layer. The display is maintained as it was when the operation acceptance was permitted, and no change occurs. In addition, the display of the gauge image GG that continues to decrease in display area is continued across the acceptance of the operation. As a result, even in the process of making the model image (integrated model image IG) difficult to see or in the process of making it invisible, the mode (at least part of) when the operation acceptance was permitted is visible. As a result, it becomes possible to reduce the time required to maintain the state shown in FIG. 251(f).

Then, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG ends during the period (timings tB3b to tB3d) during which the disappearing effect image KSE is displayed ("shown in FIG. 251(i). After this, the disappearance effect (here, a narrow-area disappearance that uses less than half of the predetermined display area Effect) image KSE is displayed. Such disappearing effect image KSE is hidden after a predetermined period of time (timing tB3d) has elapsed since its display was started (timing tB3b) (see FIG. 251 ( j)). In this regard, regarding the timing tB3d at which the display is hidden, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the effects after the operation will be changed. It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearing effect image KSE and the integrated model image IG are displayed in a layer in front of the image (preview of the conversation by the princess character) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 251(g) to (i), while the disappearing effect image KSE is being displayed, the image (preview of the conversation by the princess character) associated with the display change on the effect display device 1600 cannot be visually recognized. It's getting harder. The same applies to the wide-area extinction effect.

According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first of all, the post-operation effect is started. 232 (a) to (d), how much time is left indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.) can be grasped ("Figure 251(f)”). Then, after that, the display of the disappearing effect image KSE in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change in the effect display device 1600" and the integrated model image IG in the post-operation effect is started. (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 251(g)"). As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-area annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance. Here, the narrow-area annihilation effect is executed. While the disappearance effect image KSE is being displayed, the integrated model image IG is hidden (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 251(i)”). When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (preview of the conversation by the princess character)" in the post-operation effect is finally made visible in a clear state (" 251(j)”).

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect the integrated model image IG was, and then it is possible to enjoy what kind of aspect appears as the disappearance effect, and then, Since it is possible to enjoy what aspect (here, which of a plurality of conversation announcement aspects with different expectations) will appear as the post-operation effect, when the operation is accepted by such a variety of effects. It becomes possible to improve the game interest of the player.

It should be noted that, in order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, the timing to start displaying an image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tB3a, but the timing tB3b, or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the execution period (timings tB3b to tB3d). However, in this case as well, the post-operation effect using the effect sound and the lamp is started at the timing tB3a, so the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tB3a.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 249(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, since the second acceptance allowable state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, if the set time elapses without the player performing an operation, the post-operation effect is not being performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. The model image on the specific layer (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not hidden, and maintains the display state that appeared when it was in the acceptability state. More specifically, even if the acceptance of the operation is no longer permitted, at that time (timing tB4), the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not caused to change due to it. Until timing tB4a arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has passed since then, the "display on the model image" is continued in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. there is Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even after the end of the state in which operation reception is permitted (the second reception permission state), and the display area is reduced after timing tB4. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even if the validity period (second reception acceptance state) ends without any operation, the model image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes with different expectations). It will be possible to check whether the In addition, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the valid period ends, it is possible to encourage people to think "it was a shame" when the operation reception was not done in time at the last minute. As a result, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

Note that in this example, the effective period (second reception acceptance state) is terminated without the operation acceptance from the time tB3a at which the operation is accepted until the model image is hidden (invisible). The time from the timing tB4 until the model image is hidden (invisible) is made shorter.

In addition, as described above, in the second acceptability state, if the set time elapses without the player's operation being detected, the post-operation effect is not executed. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden while the narrow-area disappearing effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the narrow-range disappearance effect (Fig. 249(g)) when the post-operation production is not executed is It is executed in a mode (image) different from (FIG. 249(c)).

According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether it was in time), it can be properly understood by confirming the mode of the narrow-range disappearance effect. can be performed, it is possible to avoid a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to grasp whether the post-operation production is being performed. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, when the post-operation production is executed (Fig. 249(c)), the mode of the narrow-range disappearance effect (Fig. 249(c)) is changed when the post-operation production is not executed (Fig. )) should not appear. However, for example, the narrow-area disappearance effect (Fig. 249(c)) when the post-operation production is executed is defined as "A (for example, the change in the model image itself)" and "B (for example, the model image Another image display)", when the post-operation production is not executed, the narrow-range disappearance effect (Fig. 249(g)) is executed with "A". may Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted at the time when the "B" mode does not appear in the narrow-range disappearance effect, and the situation where the post-operation production is being performed. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the interest in the game due to the inability to grasp whether the game is in the state.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance allowable state occurs, a narrow-area pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. (corresponding to "situation shown in Fig. 251(b)"). Then, during the period in which the image KTH related to the narrow-area type pre-rendering is displayed, first, a simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IGa) that simulates the operation receiving portion is displayed, and the first permitted image is displayed. Sound output is started (timing tB2, corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 251(c)"). At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is started, part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH related to the narrow-area type pre-effect. it's getting harder. That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "simulated image (integrated simulated image) 251(b)-(d)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, while the narrow-range pre-production is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is being displayed, the second Timing tB3 at which an acceptance-allowed state occurs arrives, and operation acceptance is allowed (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 251(d)"). That is, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed in the middle of the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG), the model image (integrated model image IG) Confirm the mode (expectation) as the model image (integrated model image IG), whether to make the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation) and hide this After that, it is possible to provide a strategic effect such as whether the operation reception (post-operation effect) is performed and this is hidden.

Here, the image KTH used for such a narrow-area type pre-rendering is, for example, an image displayed in a separate layer that precedes the layer in which the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed. Alternatively, the model image (integrated model image) and the image (narrow-area type pre-effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG) in the moving image is improved. It is also possible to express a state in which .

In addition, in the narrow-range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the related effect sound may be output. However, considering that the second reception acceptance state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to operations, the narrow-range type pre-production It can be said that it is preferable to perform image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

Further, as the narrow-range type pre-effect, a plurality of modes with different expectations may be prepared, and one of these modes may be selectively displayed based on the result of the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination. . However, in view of the fact that the second reception-allowed state is executed in a non-automatic reception mode, and that the post-operation effect will not be executed if an operation is forgotten, the narrow-range type pre-production is: It is preferable to prepare only one mode and display only by the one mode, in order to prevent the loss of interest in the game when an operation is forgotten.

FIG. 250 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect settings). FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of effect in a variation pattern in which the first acceptability state occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a First, the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the first variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the first variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 252 (a) ), the performance (notice performance) according to the result of the determination of the notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "first variation pattern" itself within the execution period of the variable performance. It will happen.

And as described above, in the production of the "first variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the production determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. When timing tC4 (e.g., timing within the SP ready-to-reach state) arrives after the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the SZ variable effect, the first reception is allowed to accept an operation related to the effect after the first operation. Generates an allowable state (effective period) (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 252(g)"). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the first acceptance allowable state (effective period),
- "Suppressed Acceptance Allowed State" (Fig. 250(a), (b))”, and ・Even if no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) during which operation reception is permitted, When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the "automatic reception mode (see FIG. 250(h))" in which the post-operation effect is started.
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also called a "strong suppression mode".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to accept an operation while the "BGM playback sound" is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state (suppressed reception effect). From the user's side, it becomes easy to operate immediately after the set time (effective period) occurs. In addition to this, even if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is generated at timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation production. . That is, in such a "suppressed/automatic reception effect", the ratio (0% or 100%) in which the post-operation effect is performed in a manner that appears only at the time of the big hit is more than the above-described "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect". as mentioned above.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, even in the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect", as in the above-described "non-suppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect", , when the timing tC3 slightly before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) at which the performance reception is permitted occurs, the "acceptance permitted sound (here, the first permitted sound)" is played. The output is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tC4 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" is being output in a suppressed mode or is in a non-output state, the operation is performed at timing tC3. It becomes possible to recognize that a state in which reception is permitted will soon occur, and ``against the player's will, the performance reception is performed by activating the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation.'' It is expected that it will be difficult to make frequent occurrences of However, as described above, the "acceptable sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) occurs. You may do so.

It should be noted that, in order to more preferably obtain the above-described operational effects (suppressed reception effects), the "sound of BGM playback" should be changed from "output in a non-suppressed mode" to "output in a suppressed mode or in a non-suppressed mode." Timing tC2a transitioning to the state of output is different from that shown in the figure, but the relationship of "length of timings tC2a to tC3>length of timings tC3 to tC4" It can be said that it is desirable to set the output start timing tC4 of the above-described acceptable acceptance sound, which occurs prior to the set time, considerably earlier. For example, the timing tC2a may come before the start of the wide-area pre-effect.

In addition, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. As the acceptance acceptable sound, not only the first acceptable sound output as an effect sound such as ``Pikin!'', but also the second acceptable sound, which is a message sound such as ``Press!'', is output. Moreover, in this example, the second allowable sound is delayed by a predetermined time with respect to the timing tC3 at which the output of the first allowable sound is started, and the acceptance of the operation is already permitted (effective period). At the timing tC4a arriving at , the output is started.

That is, in this case, in the second reception acceptable state (effective period) in which the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) cannot be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permitted sound is set for the set time (effective period). is started without delaying the generation of the second permissible sound, and the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first reception acceptable state (effective period) in which the integrated model image IG (simulated image) can be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first acceptable sound is set for the set time (valid period). The output of the second permissible sound is started without delaying the generation, and the output of the second permissible sound is started after the generation of the set time (effective period).

According to such a configuration, the output of the first allowable sound (sound effect) is started when the state of the integrated model image IG (model image) is in a situation where it is difficult or not to be visually recognized due to the pre-staging. After that, when the first acceptance allowable state (effective period) is occurring, the state can shift to a state in which both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated model image IG (model image) is displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second acceptable sound (message sound) is further output. be able to That is, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is in an output state, an integrated model image having a specific high-expectation mode (special mode) It is possible to have a sense of expectation for the IG (simulated image) to be displayed, and in such a way the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) is gradually revealed (clear). sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250(c) and 250(f), while the "second wide-area type pre-effect" of the wide-area type pre-effect is being executed (pre-effect image is displayed), the output of the second allowable sound is started.

As will be described later, in the "suppressed/automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target" are based on the result of the advance notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is operated, a message sound such as "Push!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is operated. In this case, a message sound such as "Sheath your sword!" is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

Also, in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 250(e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second allowable sound" is adopted as a production sound that is output for a relatively short period of time. However, the "first allowable sound" is adopted as a dramatic sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, for the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound", as shown in FIGS. In addition, the times when the output states are ended (the times when the inaudible state is made) are all set to arrive at mutually different timings prior to the timing tc4f when the automatic button function is activated. It is desirable to According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound" is in. As a result, it is expected that ``against the player's will, the performance reception is performed by activating the automatic button function instead of by the player's own operation'' will be less likely to occur.
・The first situation where only the “first allowable sound” of the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” maintains the output state ・Both the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound” 2nd Situation in which the output state is maintained ・The output state of the "first allowable sound" is maintained, but the output state of the "second allowable sound" is terminated (becomes inaudible). 3rd situation ・Both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" have ended the output state (becomes inaudible state) 4th situation

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. As the "first allowable sound", the same production sound (for example, "Pikin!") is output. That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) among the acceptable reception sounds is output as a production sound that is not output in the "unsuppressed/non-automatic reception production", but the effect sound ( Regarding the first allowable sound), since it can be output as a sound effect that is output even in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", the "sound of BGM playback (specific type of sound effect)" is suppressed. (second allowable sound), it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect reception is allowed (first permissible sound). However, for the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppressed/automatic acceptance effect" in the example effect shown in FIG. You may make it output.

It should be noted that the length of time between arbitrary timings shown in each of the figures described above and each figure to be described later may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in the unit of control (processing), or two frames. It may be longer than this. For example, if the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) can be output even a little earlier than the set time (effective period), the player will be in a state where operation acceptance is allowed (or (What has happened) can be recognized earlier by the preceding time, so the period until the end of the set time or the time until the timing when the automatic button function is activated It will be expected to suppress forgetting to operate inside.

Further, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 250, unlike the example of effect shown in FIG. When the acceptance is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance acceptance sound (the first acceptance sound, the second acceptance sound) is interrupted at that point, and the state in which the operation acceptance is allowed ( valid period) has expired. As a result, it becomes difficult to misrecognize that the operation has been accepted even though the operation has not been accepted, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the automatic acceptance function is activated against the player's intention. become able to. If an operation is performed and the operation is accepted at a timing before the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period), the operation is performed at the time when the operation is accepted. It goes without saying that the automatic button function will not be activated even if the timing tC4f arrives, since the state in which acceptance is permitted is terminated.

Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250(e) and (f), the output of the first allowable sound is started without delaying the generation of the set time (effective period), and the output of the second allowable sound is started during the set time (effective period). period) is delayed from the start of output. According to such a configuration, the output of the first allowable sound is started no matter how quickly the player's operation is accepted. (When the operation is accepted between timings tC3 to tC4a) The state in which the operation acceptance is permitted ends without the output being started, and the effect after the operation (here, the effect after the first operation ) will be executed. Note that if the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not terminated with this as a trigger. Also, if the operation is accepted before the timing tC4a arrives, the output of the second allowable sound is not started.

According to such a configuration, after confirming that the second allowable sound is output (after confirming that the first reception allowable state), or after confirming that the post-operation effect is started. 2. The game determines whether to start the effect after the operation without confirming that the allowable sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first reception allowable state or the second reception allowable state). Since it becomes possible to entrust the player's choice, the range of games will be expanded, and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 250(c) and 250(f), within the period of timings tC3 to tC4a, an image (at least of) the pre-effect (here, the wide-area type pre-effect) is displayed. part) is not hidden and is kept displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the second allowable sound has not yet been output (timings tC3 to tC4a), even the integrated simulated image (simulated image) is made so that its mode (expectation) cannot be clearly visually recognized due to the pre-rendering. Therefore, it is possible to make the above-mentioned game characteristics such as "entrusting the selection to the player's side" more interesting.

Also, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 250(d), if the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance is displayed. (Here, the first post-operation effect) includes a post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member). is generated at least (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 252(i)"). Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 249, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the timing In contrast to the non-display (invisible) at a specific timing (same timing) that arrives after tC5, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is determined in advance from the timing at which the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain time (fixed time). In the example shown in FIG. 252, a background announcement by a princess character is displayed as a post-operation effect (output on the liquid crystal display).

However, as shown in FIG. 250, even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is the "BGM playback sound ( It is desirable to set such that the output state is maintained at the timing tC6 when the specific type of effect sound) changes from the suppressed state (non-output state) to the non-suppressed state.

On the other hand, as for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is terminated at timing tC6 when the "BGM playback sound" is output in the non-suppressed mode. That is, in this case, at timing tC6, both the "sound of BGM reproduction" being output in a non-suppressed mode and the content of the display effect being switched occur, so the effect is greatly improved. It is expected that changes will be made to improve the amusement of the game. However, instead of this, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may also be maintained in an output state when timing tC6 arrives. Also, the "BGM playback sound" may be gradually restored by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppression mode.

Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3, which is earlier than the timing tC4 at which the set time of the first reception permission state is set, the operation to be operated on the effect display device 1600 is performed. A simulated image simulating the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the set time has elapsed is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation reception is permitted at the timing tC3 slightly before the timing tC4 at which the set time (timings tC4 to tC5) of the first reception permitted state is set. It is difficult for the player to notice that the reception is permitted, and the operation by the player is not in time, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends without occurring. come to be expected. In this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) starts to be output. can be Alternatively, only one of the model image and the acceptable acceptance sound (for example, only the model image) may be started before timing tC4.

Further, as described above, the model image displayed when the first acceptability state occurs (the image simulating the operation receiving part to which the opportunity to operate is provided) also has a peripheral edge that decorates the peripheral edge of the model image. It is displayed as an integrated model image IG that is integrated with the decoration image. This "integrated model image IG" is as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area (partitioned area KG) for the predetermined image GG is provided. In addition, as the “integrated model image IG”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared, and any one of these modes is selectively displayed. However, unlike the second reception acceptable state, in the first reception acceptable state, a special aspect with a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 232 As described above, the aspect shown in (d) (integrated model image IGd)) is included as a lottery (selection) target and can be displayed.

By the way, in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the remaining time display ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this regard, in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 250) according to this embodiment, the remaining time display ( The gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses becomes shorter, and when the set time reaches "0", the gauge amount is dynamically displayed to be "0".

According to such a configuration, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left when the execution of the post-operation effect is started by activating the automatic button function. It is possible to suggest that there is a risk of ``losing the opportunity to operate'' against the player's will. It becomes possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage.

However, regarding the first reception permission state (Fig. 250) executed in the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is received does not necessarily have to be started within the set time. may be started when or after is finished.

In addition, the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 may not necessarily be the same as the integrated simulated image IG (simulated image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. may be realistically depicted.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) modeled on this. In the example shown in FIG. 250, the handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) to be operated, and is displayed as an integrated model image IG (model image) that imitates this. 245(a)-(d)). The "integrated model images IGe to IGh" are as described with reference to FIGS. A display target area (partition image KG) of (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, as the “integrated model image IG”, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared, and any one of these modes is selectively displayed.

As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. ”. In other words, in this case, there is a possibility of confusion as to which operation means is the object of operation after the set time (effective period) that is allowed to receive the effect occurs, so the set time is set to 5 seconds, etc. It is desirable to set a relatively long time for On the other hand, in the operation acceptance presentation that occurs at timing tB3 in FIG. , it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds as the set time. At this time, it is against the player's will to set the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated after three seconds have passed since the set time (effective period) occurred. It is desirable to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the opportunity is lost.

In addition, in the operation accepting effect that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. Even when the operation means of (1) is operated, it is desirable that the performance is accepted and the performance is executed after the operation. That is, if a situation arises in which the performance is not accepted despite the operation of the operating means, there is a possibility that the player will be confused. Since it is cruel to ask for further operation on the side operation means, even if the erroneous operation state is maintained, when the operation means on the side to be operated is operated, the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to

As described above, in the suppressed operation reception effect, the specific type of effect sound is output or not output in a suppressed mode before the operation opportunity is given, so compared to the non-suppressed operation reception effect There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the acceptance acceptance sound (first acceptance sound) that is output when the suppressed operation acceptance effect is generated is output when the non-suppressed operation acceptance effect is generated. It is possible to output a sound whose output state is maintained for a longer time than the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the first allowable sound, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including a first mode, a second mode, and a third mode) in which the output state is maintained are different. One of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first allowable sound based on the result of the announcement effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first allowable sound is the mode shown in FIG. There is. Further, it is desirable that the ratio (expectation) of the appearance of the big winning pattern when the pattern variation is stopped differs depending on which one of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

It should be noted that "Which of the plurality of modes should be output as the first allowable sound?" and "Which of the plurality of operation means should be used as the operation target?" Alternatively, one judgment result may be obtained in the above-described advance notice effect judgment. However, for at least the first aspect of the plurality of aspects, the first allowable state is set in either case where the "operation button 410" is the object of operation or the case where the "sword decoration 5001" is the object of operation. It is desirable to make it selectable as sound. Also, regarding the second mode and the third mode, it is possible to select whether the "operation button 410" is to be operated or the "sword ornament 5001" is to be operated. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which output is possible only when "sword ornament 5001" is to be operated. Then, even if the first permissible sound is output in any of these modes, the output state is maintained for a length of time equal to or greater than the time value required for the modes shown in FIG.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 250(c) to (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives while the integrated model image IG (here, the integrated image IGd) is being displayed and the operation is accepted. is doing. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs post-operation effects (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and by the movable decorative body). As at least one of the effect operations, an output for the liquid crystal display and an output for the effect sound are started.

However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 250(c) and (d), even in this example, the integrated model image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation effect is started. , maintains the display state from when it was in the acceptance allowable state. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tC4b, corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(i)"), the integrated model image IG No change is caused, and until the timing tC4c after a short time (predetermined time) has passed, the "integrated model image IG" is displayed in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. "Display" is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearance effect) that is displayed in a form that makes part or all of the integrated model image IG in the display state difficult to see or makes it invisible appears ("Fig. 252(j)”). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer (predetermined layer) before a specific layer in which the integrated model image IG is displayed, or An image (disappearance effect) is displayed as one video prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated model image in the video is expressed as becoming difficult to see due to the image (disappearance effect). as described above.

As shown in FIG. 250(c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image IG is displayed on a specific layer, and the image HSE ( Even when the disappearance effect) is started to be displayed, it is not hidden, and the display state is maintained as it was when it was in the reception allowable state. More specifically, even when the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), in the specific layer where the integrated model image IG is displayed, the integrated model image IG changes due to it. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the annihilation effect on the predetermined layer on the front side, the model image and the gauge image GG become difficult to see or gradually become invisible.

Then, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated model image IG is completed during the period (timings tC4c to tC4g) during which the disappearing effect image HSE is displayed. The image HSE of the annihilation effect (here, wide-area annihilation effect using half or more of the predetermined display area) is displayed under the condition that the IG is not displayed on the specific layer either. The disappearing effect image HSE is hidden after a predetermined period of time (timing tC4g) has elapsed since its display was started (timing tC4c). In this regard, regarding the timing tC4g at which the display is hidden, regardless of the timing at which the operation is accepted, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 among the post-operation effects It is desirable to set it so that it arrives within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the image HSE of the annihilation effect and the model image (integrated model image) are displayed in a predetermined layer on the front side of the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600. It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, while the disappearing effect image HSE is being displayed (FIGS. 252(j) and (k)), the image (post-operation effect) associated with the display change on the effect display device 1600 is made difficult to see. there is

According to such a configuration, when the operation is accepted, first of all, the post-operation effect is started. 232(a) to (d), how much time is left indicated by the gauge image GG, etc.) can be grasped. Then, after that, in the post-operation effect, an image HSE of the disappearance effect in a form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" and the integrated model image IG. will start to display. As described above, the annihilation effect includes a narrow-area annihilation effect with low performance and a wide-area annihilation effect with low performance, and here, the wide-area annihilation effect is executed. While the disappearance effect image HSE is displayed, the integrated model image IG is hidden. After that, when the disappearance effect image HSE is hidden, The ``image associated with the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)'' is finally visible in a clear state (corresponding to the ``situation shown in FIG. 252(l)'').

That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated model image IG was, and then it is possible to enjoy what aspect appears as the disappearance effect, and then, Since it is possible to enjoy what kind of mode will appear as the performance after the operation, it is possible to improve the game interest when the operation is accepted by such various performances.

It should be noted that, in order to preferably obtain such effects, the timing for starting to display an image (post-operation effect) associated with a display change in the effect display device 1600 is not timing tC4b, but timing tC4c, or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the period of execution (timings tC4c to tC4g). However, in this case as well, the post-operation effect by the effect sound and the lamp is started at the timing tC4b, so the start timing of the post-operation effect itself remains at the timing tC4b.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250(g) to (j), it is assumed that the set time elapses (the first reception permission state ends) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, since the first reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode, even if the set time elapses without the player performing an operation, the post-operation effect is performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is hidden during the process.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 250(b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is activated, the operation by the player is the same as when the operation is accepted. , the model image (here, the integrated model image) is not hidden and remains displayed. More specifically, even if the automatic button function is activated, at that time (timing tC4f), the model image (here, the integrated model image) does not change due to it. Until timing tC4fa arrives after a short period of time (predetermined time) has passed since then, the "display on the model image" is continued in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted. there is Further, in this example, the gauge image GG has a small display area even after the end of the state in which operation reception is permitted (second reception permission state), and the display area is reduced after timing tC4f. The display area is reduced in the form of "0".

According to such a configuration, even when the post-operation effect is started by activating the automatic button function, the model image is displayed in any manner (any of a plurality of manners with different expectations). It will be possible to check whether the

In this example, the time from the timing tC4c when the operation is accepted until the model image is hidden (not visible), and the time from the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated, the model image is hidden (not visible) ) to be the same as the time it takes.

Also, in this example, even if the automatic button function is activated (timing tC4f), the model image (here, integrated model image IG) is not displayed as shown in FIG. 250(g). When the wide area type disappearance effect is executed, the model image (here, the integrated model image) is hidden while the wide area type disappearance effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the image applied by the wide-area disappearing effect (FIG. 250(c)) when the operation by the player is accepted, and the image when the automatic button function is activated. It is executed in the same manner as the image applied to the wide-area erasure effect (Fig. 250(g)) (all images are "image HSE"). This is different from the case of the example shown in FIG. 249 (the narrow-area disappearing effect when the model image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode differs from that during operation).

According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not made in time at the last minute, the same mode as when the operation reception is made in time appears. has been started," and it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game will be suppressed.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC1 comes before the timing tC3 at which the first acceptance allowable state occurs, the wide-area type pre-effect using more than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 252(b)"). Then, during the period in which the wide-area type pre-effect is being executed, the display of a simulated image (here, the integrated simulated image IG) simulating the operation receiving part and the output of the first allowable sound are started ( It is timing tC3 and corresponds to "situation shown in FIG. 252(f)"). At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is started, part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image IG) becomes difficult to see due to the wide-area pre-effect image. ing. That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the wide-area pre-rendering is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "simulated image (integrated simulated image) ) gradually increases its visibility” (Fig. 252 (f) to (h)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the wide-area type pre-production is being executed, and while the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) is being displayed, the first reception When the timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs, operation reception is allowed. That is, in this case, since the acceptance of the operation is allowed in the middle of the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG), the model image (integrated model image IG) Confirm the mode (expectation) as the model image (integrated model image IG), whether to hide it without confirming the mode (expectation) Then, it is possible to provide a strategic presentation such as whether the operation reception (post-operation presentation) is performed and this is hidden.

Here, the image used for such a wide-area pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed. , the simulated image (integrated simulated image) and the image (wide-area pre-effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the simulated image (integrated simulated image) in the moving image is gradually increased. It may be one that expresses the state of going.

Considering that the wide-area type pre-effect suggests the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptable state with a relatively high degree of expectation, unlike the case of the second acceptance acceptable state, the effect display device 1600 It is desirable that not only the image display but also the related sound effects be output. Then, part of the effect sound related to such a wide area type pre-effect may be executed so as to function as the first allowable sound.

In addition, as a wide area type pre-effect, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared, and one of these modes is selectively displayed based on the result of the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination. This is desirable in terms of improving amusement.

Also, as shown in FIG. 250(c), the wide-area type pre-effect according to this example is started when the timing tC1 within the "first variation pattern" arrives, and the first acceptance allowable state occurs. It is executed across the timing tC4, and is completed within the set time of the first acceptance allowable state. However, during the period from the start to the end of such a wide-area type pre-effect, the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect are sequentially executed as the wide-area type pre-effect. It's like These two wide-area pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data, or may be displayed as different moving image data.

Here, the display of the first wide-area type pre-effect is started when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252(b)"), and the second wide-area type pre-effect is the timing When tC2 arrives, the display is started in a form that replaces the first wide-area type pre-effect (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 252(e)"), which of these pre-effects is being displayed. Even if it is during the period, during the period during which the pre-rendering is displayed, the "simulated image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 250(c), the model image (integrated model image) is displayed when the timing tC1a within the period during which the first wide-area type pre-effect is being executed. This makes it possible to recognize at a relatively early stage which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 252(c)"). In FIG. 252(c), an image HTH1 produced by the first wide-area type pre-rendering produces a “image in which the whole of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is outlined in white”. It is nothing but a blank state, and it cannot be said that it is an image that imitates the production button that is the operation target. After that, "the image A1 in which the whole of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is outlined in white" is "at least the outline of the model image (here, the integrated model image) by at least one of the decoration and the pattern. 252(d)” (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 252(d)”), suggesting that the object to be operated is the production button. From this, it can be said that such "image A2" is a simulated image that imitates the operation means that is the operation target. That is, the image A2 is executed as an effect to make it look as if it was produced by the "image HTH1 by the first wide area type pre-effect". The “contour of the model image (here, integrated model image)” means the contour of the operation receiving portion (here, the contour of the operation receiving portion and the contour of the peripheral decoration image).

However, when the timing tC2 arrives, the "image A2 as a model image (integrated model image)" and the "image HTH1 related to the first wide-area type pre-effect" which have been displayed up to that point are each hidden. Execution of the "second wide-area type pre-effect" is started in a manner that makes it difficult to see (corresponding to the "situation shown in Fig. 252(e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period during which the second wide-area type pre-effect is being executed, the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed again (the situation shown in FIG. 252(f)). 252(g)), and the timing tC4 at which the above-mentioned first acceptance allowable state occurs comes (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 252(g)"). That is, the second simulated image (FIGS. 252(f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from when the operation reception is permitted until at least when it is not permitted. An operation is accepted while the image is being displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started.

That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first reception-allowed state, the pre-rendering is executed twice, and among the pre-renderings, "before the operation reception is permitted, 252 (c), (d))”, and “second model images that continue to be displayed even after the acceptance of the operation is permitted (Figs. 252 (f) to (k)”). According to such a configuration, there is a higher degree of freedom without taking into consideration the mode that should be displayed when the reception acceptance state is occurring (results of production determination, etc.) Since it is possible to display a model image (a model image that is hidden before the operation reception is permitted (first time)) under the production design, it is possible to expand the range of production. In this sense, "a model image (first time) that is hidden before operation reception is permitted" can be displayed during the period during which operation reception is permitted. It is desirable to display it as a mode that does not exist (a mode that is different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232).

Here, the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is the same as the model image displayed during the narrow-area type pre-effect described above. Since the display state continues even after the state in which operation reception is permitted occurs, it is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 232 (in the example shown in FIG. 250, , integrated model image IGd), which is a special embodiment. On the other hand, the model image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-effect is being performed has at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. It is desirable to display an image (here, image A2) with For example, in terms of shape, the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is deformed and expressed, such as rounding the outline of the model image and using curves instead of straight lines. A method of displaying as an image can be adopted. It should be noted that, in the above-described narrow-area pre-rendering, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from those in the acceptability state does not appear.

Further, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is the plurality of images shown in FIG. Regardless of the mode of display, the model image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-effect is being performed can be displayed in one mode (same mode). It is desirable to That is, in this case, the first wide-area type pre-effect can be used solely for "indicating to which type of operation means an operation opportunity will be given soon". According to such a first wide-area type pre-effect, the player can be made to recognize the operation object without reducing the interest in the game, and thus the player can be made to recognize the operation object. From there, it will shift to the second wide-area type pre-production that suggests the degree of expectation.

It should be noted that, in order to suitably obtain such a function and effect, the operation means (sword decoration It can be said that it is more desirable to execute only when an opportunity to operate the body 5001) is given. That is, in this case, either the case where the acceptability state in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs or the acceptability state in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 occurs. However, in the first wide-area type pre-effect, operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001 out of sword decoration 5001 have the opportunity to operate. It will be executable only when granted. In this case, the first acceptability state may be generated as an acceptability state in which only the sword ornament 5001 can be given an opportunity to operate. On the other hand, the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed either when the operation button 410 is given an operation opportunity or when the sword decoration 5001 is given an operation opportunity. It is possible. At this time, the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed in the same manner when the operation button 410 is provided with the operation opportunity and when the sword decoration 5001 is provided with the operation opportunity. , or may be implemented in a different manner.

Further, when the model image (second time) displayed while the second wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is displayed as the integrated model image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the periphery decoration image. However, even in such a case, the model image (first time) displayed while the first wide-area type pre-effect is being performed is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG. may be displayed as an image that does not include In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the model image (integrated model image) will be different. Further, at this time, the simulated image may be displayed as an integrated simulated image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. may be displayed as

According to the above-described production example, in the second acceptance acceptance state shown in FIG. 249, the model image (integrated model image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptance sound is output as the acceptance acceptance sound. However, the second permissible sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state shown in FIG. 250, the model image (integrated model image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are used as the acceptor allowable sound. Output is possible. However, in the first reception acceptance state shown in FIG. 250, even if an aspect different from the special aspect (the low-expectation aspect used in FIG. 249) is displayed as the model image (integrated model image IG) 250, the acceptance allowable sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 250, and it goes without saying that the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can be output as the acceptability allowable sound.

At the start of the output of the second permissible sound (message sound), the image associated with the wide-area pre-effect remains, and it is difficult to visually recognize the mode of the model image (integrated model image IG). In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the form of the model image (integrated model image IG), the state in which only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output changes to the state in which the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, the possibility that the model image (integrated model image IG) will be displayed in a special mode can be suggested by the acceptance acceptance sound. That is, if the second allowable sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the model image (integrated model image IGd) with a special mode will be revealed. Inside, the model image (integrated model image IG) is gradually revealed.

The integrated model image IG includes the display target area (section image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated model image IG is displayed in either the low expectation mode (IGa) or the high expectation mode (IGd). Even in this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion where the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much time is left regardless of the mode of the model image.

As described above with reference to FIG. 232, the low expectation mode (IGa) and the high expectation mode (IGd) are different not only in the model image but also in the peripheral decoration image mode. Further, the operation means (effect buttons, etc.) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the model image, but the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

According to the above-described effect example, when in a predetermined game state, the reception acceptance state at the time of suppression in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific effect sound is suppressed, and the specific effect sound is suppressed. A plurality of non-suppressed reception acceptance states in which operation reception is permitted in the absence of the control are prepared. On the other hand, in the second reception-allowed state out of the unsuppressed reception-allowed states, the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd), which is a mode different from the special mode. It can be displayed with In the second reception acceptance state, the integrated model image IG is not selectively displayed from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) with different expectations excluding the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). may be displayed only. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the performance is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. 239 to 243 for the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243). ) is adopted for display as described above. However, when generating such a third acceptance acceptable state (effective period during which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease), similar to the first acceptance acceptable state, prior to this, "BGM playback sound (specified type )” is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or non-output state), and the post-operation display ( It is desirable that a post-operation effect) or a post-operation output sound be executed. In other words, when the "BGM playback sound" is suppressed (or not output) when the reception acceptance state occurs, it is expected that a highly anticipated mode (special mode) will be displayed as the integrated model image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, only the fact that the performance is inferior to the case where the "BGM playback sound" is output without suppression becomes conspicuous, and the game is played. There is concern about a decline in interest. In this regard, in the third reception-permitting state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear, and the post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even if the special mode does not appear as the integrated model image IG, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

However, regardless of whether the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state, the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" in the suppression state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation reception. It is desirable that the display change and the post-operation output sound are executed while maintaining the suppression state (or non-output state) without restarting the output in the non-suppression mode.

In addition, even if the acceptance allowable state occurs after the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" is in the suppression state (or the non-output state), when the third acceptance allowable state occurs, the Unlike the case of the 1-acceptance permitted state, the integrated model image IG is prevented from being displayed in a special mode, and can be displayed only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the "BGM playback sound (specific type of effect sound)" is set to the suppression state (or non-output state), either the first reception permission state or the third reception permission state is selected. You will be able to add fun to what happens.

In addition, in the third acceptance allowable state, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, but is executed in the valid period. 248) in which a model image (which may or may not be an integrated model image) is displayed. Even with such a configuration, it can be said that similar effects can be achieved. In this case, it goes without saying that the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of reception permission states with different occurrence conditions are prepared. However, if this is a specific type of acceptable acceptance state, it is desirable to allow the integrated model image IG to be displayed in a special mode (IGd). However, as for the acceptability state in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd), it is preferable to execute the automatic acceptance mode in order to suppress the decline in the enjoyment of the game when an operation is forgotten. is desirable.

In the production example shown in FIG. 250, the automatic button function is enabled at a predetermined timing within the set time (effective period), but when the set time (effective period) ends or after The button function may be activated to start execution of "the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period". In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the "processing from timing tC4f" shown in FIGS. 250(g) and (h).

251 and 252, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the image itself and the image behind it can be visually recognized, although it is difficult. good.

According to the production examples shown in FIGS. 249 to 252, at the time when the player's operation is accepted or the automatic button function is activated and the post-operation production is started, a model image (integrated Both the simulated image IG) and the gauge image GG are displayed in good visibility without being difficult to see due to the disappearance effect (Fig. 251 (f), See Figure 252(i)). As a result, it is possible to enjoy the effect after the operation while recognizing in which mode the model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed and how much time remains. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 251, even if the operation is accepted in the second acceptance allowable state and the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed, the background image changes before and after the post-operation effect is started. This is maintained without causing switching. On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 252, when the operation is accepted in the first acceptance permitted state and the post-operation production (first post-operation production) is executed, the post-operation production is started. It is designed to cause the background image to switch (after the operation, the space background).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and even if the operation is forgotten, the background image can be appropriately switched. can progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the reception acceptance state where the automatic reception function is not activated, the background image is not changed, so if you forget to operate the background image, the background image will not be switched or only the background image will be displayed. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

Further, in the second acceptance allowable state, after the operation is accepted (or the automatic button function is activated), a large part of the display area overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide-area disappearing effect and becomes invisible. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a slight portion that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide-area erasure effect, the image in that portion can be checked to determine the state after the operation. can be recognized, and the demerit caused by the execution of the wide-area disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, when the operation reception (or activation of the automatic button function) is made in the second reception permission state, after the operation in a mode in which the ratio of the appearance of the big hit pattern is relatively high To make the background images when the performance after the operation is executed different from each other when the performance is executed and when the performance after the operation is executed in a mode in which the ratio of appearance of the big win pattern is relatively low. is more desirable. These percentages may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself is changed when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of appearance of the big-hit patterns is relatively high, whereas the post-operation effect is performed in a mode in which the ratio of appearance of the big-hit patterns is relatively low. is executed, the background image may remain unchanged.

In the above-described production examples, when providing an operation opportunity, a case where a specific type of production sound is output in a non-suppressed mode (second acceptance allowable state) and a state where a specific type of production sound is output in a suppressed mode There are cases where it is put in a non-output state (first acceptance allowable state), and depending on the type, the ratio (expectation) at which the post-operation production is executed in a manner that appears only when the jackpot is won is different. As a result, it is possible to improve the performance when the operation opportunity is given. This percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, in the first reception permission state, when an operation opportunity is provided, the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppressed mode or is not output, and when the post-operation effect is generated by this, In accordance with this, a production device is applied so that the production sound can be heard conspicuously. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the first acceptance acceptable state occurs, if a performance is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state, the performance is accepted. Since the output state is terminated based on the operation, the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the reception allowable sound.

A plurality of types of acceptable acceptance states in which the integrated model image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd) are prepared. Then, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated in the middle. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as acceptance acceptable states in which the integrated model image IG cannot be displayed in a special mode (IGd). An acceptance acceptable state in which the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway when an operation is accepted, and an acceptance acceptable state in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated in the middle when an operation is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state ( It is desirable to include both (possible under different conditions).

As described above, acceptable reception sounds include sound effects and message sounds. In this regard, even if the integrated model image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), the message sound is always interrupted when the production is accepted in the output state, whereas the sound effect is , when the integrated model image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), when it is interrupted when the effect is accepted while in that output state (first acceptance acceptable state), and when it is not interrupted It is desirable to have time (second reception acceptance state). It is desirable that a plurality of types of acceptance acceptance states, including the first acceptance acceptance state, be prepared as the acceptance acceptance state in which the message sound is output.

250 and 252 are realized by sequentially executing the first wide-area type front effect and the second wide-area type front effect. In this respect, in both the first wide-area type pre-rendering and the second wide-area type pre-rendering, a model image (integrated model image) that imitates the operation means (operation receiving part) that is the operation target is displayed in both of these pre-renderations. However, the model image A2 displayed during the execution period of the first wide-area type pre-effect is a model image (integrated model image IG) displayed within the set time of the reception-permitting state (first reception-permitting state). , and does not gradually change to the model image (integrated model image IG).

That is, the model image A2 (Fig. 252(d)) displayed in the first wide-area type pre-effect is non-existent when the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance allowable state. It is put into a display state (invisible state). Then, after a predetermined period of time in which no model image simulating the operation target is displayed (maintained in an invisible state) (Fig. 252(e)), a model image within the execution period of the second wide-area type pre-effect is displayed. , an image different from the model image A2 displayed in the first wide-area type preliminary effect is displayed (FIG. 252(f)). Then, this "model image within the execution period of the second wide-area type pre-effect" is exactly the model image (integrated model image IG) that is displayed within the set time of the reception-permitting state (first reception-permitting state). The model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed together with the image HSE related to the second wide-area type pre-rendering in a way that straddles the occurrence of the reception-permitting state (first reception-permitting state). It becomes possible to accept the operation while it is being done. The model image (integrated model image IG) is also displayed when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect starts to be executed (Fig. 252(i)). It is displayed over the period from before the acceptability state occurs to after it ends.

Here, when the model image A2 is displayed in the wide-area type pre-rendering (first wide-area type pre-rendering), the operating means (operation receiving unit) modeled by the model image A2 will soon (other effects The operation opportunity will be given without fail. In other words, instead of generating the acceptability state while maintaining the display state of the model image A2, in the above-described production example, the model image A2 is made non-display, and in the wide-area type pre-production, "operation object After temporarily generating a state in which no simulated image that imitates is displayed, the simulated image that imitates the operation means (operation receiving part) is replaced with an image ( It is displayed as an integrated model image (IG).

According to such a configuration, operation acceptance is allowed even when a simulated image is displayed for a long time as a pre-effect in order to suggest that an acceptance acceptance state with a high degree of expectation will occur. It will be expected that the operation will be prompted without delaying the timing. That is, if a model image is displayed for a long period of time as a preliminary effect, and if the acceptability state is generated while the model image is being displayed, the timing at which operation acceptance is allowed suddenly arrives. As a result, operation delays may occur frequently even though the pre-rendering is being executed. In this regard, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptable state, a model image having a description different from the model image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is displayed. In addition to displaying, after a period of time during which no model image is displayed, a model image that is displayed within the set time of the acceptance allowable state is displayed. That is, it is possible to make the player recognize that the first reception acceptance state can occur only within the period after the model image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptance state is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an operation delay from occurring while displaying the simulated image for a long time as a pre-effect.

In order to preferably obtain such an effect, it is preferable that "the time after the second wide-area type pre-effect is executed" rather than "the time required for the first wide-area-type pre-effect" or "the time during which the model image A2 is displayed". It is better to set the "time until the 1 acceptance acceptable state occurs" and "the time from the display of the model image (integrated model image IG) until the first acceptance acceptable state occurs" to be shorter. The desirability is clear. The model image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide-area type pre-effect.

In addition, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, the model image (integrated model image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type pre-rendering should be used as the operation means (operation receiving unit) in the "operation in the movable area". and "behavior when operated" (see FIG. 233, etc.). It is more desirable to display without performing dynamic display. It should be noted that the model image (integrated model image IG) displayed in the second wide-area type pre-effect will continue its dynamic display state even after the occurrence of the first acceptability state. In addition, the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) displayed in the narrow-area pre-production also expresses the "action in the movable area" and "behavior when operated" as the operation means (operation receiving part). This is dynamically displayed, and the state of dynamic display is continued even after the occurrence of the second acceptability state.

The model image (integrated model image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252(f) and the model image (integrated model image IG) in the state shown in FIG. Although they are the same themselves, they may be made different in terms of transmittance.

As for the image KTH related to the narrow-area type preliminary effect shown in FIG. 251, it is more desirable to display it as an image of a size that can cover the entire simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) from the front side. . Then, by reducing the display area of the image KTH or increasing its transmittance, a model image (integrated model image IG ) is preferably displayed in such a manner that it gradually becomes more apparent as time elapses.

Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 associated with the wide-area pre-effect shown in FIG. 252, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the model image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the model image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the model image (integrated model image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG)). That is, the image HTH2 is displayed as an image of a size that can cover the entire model image (integrated model image IG) from the front side, similar to the image KTH related to the narrow-area type pre-rendering (Fig. 252 ( e)), by reducing its display area or increasing its transmittance, a model image (integrated model image IG) is displayed from the location where the image HTH2 was displayed. is gradually revealed as time elapses. On the other hand, since the image HTH1 is displayed so as to make the description of the model image A2 stand out, there is a demerit in making the model image difficult to visually recognize when giving an opportunity to operate it (whichever operation is performed). It becomes difficult to recognize whether an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs) can be solved.

The wide-area type pre-effect is performed by sequentially executing the first wide-area type pre-effect and the second wide-area type pre-effect. It is desirable to output by playing two sound effects/music).

In addition, in the narrow-area type pre-rendering shown in FIG. In the pre-effect, the background image that has been displayed before this is changed in the wide-area pre-effect (here, changed at the start of the wide-area pre-effect). With such a configuration, since the background change can be executed as part of the wide-area type pre-production, the pre-production with higher production is compared to the narrow-area type pre-production that only partially changes the production. It will be executed as a production. Note that the background image displayed before the narrow-area type pre-effect (Fig. 251(a)) and the background image displayed before the wide-area type pre-effect (Fig. 252 ( It may be a background image different from a)).

In the second wide-area type preliminary effect shown in FIG. 252(f), an integrated model image that is integrated with the "peripheral edge decoration image in which the partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)". A model image is displayed as IG, but in the first wide-area type pre-rendering shown in FIG. As a result, in the first wide-area type pre-effect, the player can enjoy the pre-effect without worrying about at least the remaining time. Note that the model image in which the section image KG is not decorated (depicted) may be any image in which the section image KG to be decorated (depicted) in the integrated model image IG is not displayed. In addition to a mode in which the decoration (gauge area) is not displayed, a mode in which the shape itself is different from that of the integrated model image IG may be used.

As described above, the ``acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is allowed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a suppressed mode or is not output, and is executed in an automatic acceptance mode.'' , are prepared with different generation conditions (fluctuation patterns, etc.), and "first reception permission state" is prepared as one of these reception permission states. However, in these reception acceptance states, "the first wide area type pre-production (Fig. 252 (c) to (e)) in which the model image is displayed and hidden, and the timing of occurrence of the reception acceptance state In addition to the first reception acceptable state in which the second wide-area type pre-production (Fig. 252 (e) to (g)) is performed in which the model image is displayed, "the model image is displayed and hidden The second wide-area type pre-effect (Fig. 252(e)-(g)), in which the first wide-area type pre-effect is not performed, and the model image is displayed across the occurrence timing of the reception-allowed state, is performed. It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first acceptance acceptance state, the ratio of execution of the post-operation production in a manner that appears only at the time of the big win is higher than in the specific acceptance acceptance state, so that the operation reception is allowed at a timing higher than that in the specific acceptance acceptance state. Amusement in the game can be heightened from the arrival of a significantly previous timing (the timing at which the first wide-area type pre-performance appears). In this case, the content of the second wide-area type pre-rendering performed when the first reception-permitting state occurs and the second wide-area-type pre-rendering performed when the specific reception-permitting state occurs may not necessarily be the same. It may be executed as different presentation contents (images). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is provided may be different between the first reception-permitting state and the second reception-permitting state.

As described above, the ``acceptance acceptance state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in a non-suppressed mode, and is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode'' is an occurrence condition (variation patterns, etc.) are prepared in different forms, and "second reception permission state" is prepared as one of these reception permission states.

The wide-area type pre-effect that is performed in the first acceptance allowable state is executed under the condition that the "specified type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output. (BGM reproduction)” is executed over a longer period of time than the narrow-range type pre-production (second reception acceptance state) executed while “(BGM reproduction)” is output without suppression, so the game interest is preferably maintained. be able to In particular, by executing only the first wide-area type pre-performance of the wide-area type pre-performance over a longer period of time than the narrow-area type pre-performance, the game interest is greatly enhanced before the reception permission state occurs. can be increased to The timing at which the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output may be set to arrive while the first wide-area type pre-production is being executed, or You may make it arrive before the production|presentation is started.

According to the above-described effect example, when the wide-area type pre-effect (Fig. 252) is performed when the first reception permission state occurs, the effect change including the background image is generated, whereas when the second reception permission state occurs, When the narrow-range type pre-rendering (FIG. 251) is performed, the background image is not changed, and the rendition is changed while maintaining this. In addition, in the first acceptability state that occurs while such wide-area pre-rendering is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation rendition (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether or not the operation has been performed. On the other hand, in the second acceptability state that occurs while the narrow-area type pre-rendering is being performed, the background image is not changed by the post-operation rendition, and the rendition progresses while maintaining this. there is According to such a configuration, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence of this in the first reception acceptance state, so the effect is different from that in the second reception acceptance state. It will be possible to greatly improve the performance, and it will be possible to encourage more concentration on the production related to the operation.

In the wide-area disappearing effect according to the example of presentation described above, the background image is changed accordingly (Fig. 252(j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide-area disappearing effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 252(i), execution of the post-operation effect (background announcement by the princess character) is started while the background image is not changed. Then, after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, the wide-area disappearing effect first makes the background image that was displayed in the reception-allowed state difficult to see or makes it invisible (Fig. 252 (j)). 252(k)), and then display another background image to change the background image (the situation shown in FIG. 252(k), or change the background image in the situation shown in FIG. 252(l)). Other background images may be displayed in such a manner that they are gradually revealed while the wide-area disappearing effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide-area disappearing effect is completed. may

In the example shown in FIG. 252, as the effect after the operation, first, the display change on the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started. Execution may be started first as a post-operation effect, and the display change on the liquid crystal display may be started after a delay (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

As described above, a plurality of "acceptable states in which the automatic acceptance mode is executed and the wide-area disappearing effect is executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one example, a "first reception acceptance state" is prepared. However, in these reception acceptance states, in addition to the "first reception acceptance state", the "post-operation production in the same manner as the first reception acceptance state (first operation post-production) can be executed, but the wide area disappearing effect is executed as a different image (the display timing, etc. may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation production is performed, the disappearance effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the production performance, and it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. become. The special reception acceptance state may be the specific reception acceptance state described above. The specific reception acceptance state and the special reception acceptance state are executed in the same manner as the first reception acceptance state in terms of display timing of the model image, processing related to output of reception acceptance sound, processing related to disappearance effect, etc. .

As described above, a plurality of "acceptable states in which the non-automatic acceptance mode is executed and the narrow-range type disappearance effect is executed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). "Second Acceptable State" is prepared as one of the. However, in addition to the "second reception permission state", these reception permission states include "a post-operation effect (a third post-operation effect ) can be executed, but it is desirable to include a "special reception acceptance state" in which the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed as the same image (the display timing may also be the same). That is, in this case, even if a different post-operation production is performed, the disappearance effect itself is displayed as the same image, so it is easy to be in a situation where the operation is accepted regardless of the type of post-operation production. to be able to recognize The special reception acceptance state is executed in the same manner as the second reception acceptance state in terms of display timing of the model image, processing related to reception acceptance sound output, processing related to disappearance effect, and the like.

In the narrow-range disappearance effect, even when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden after the post-operation production is started, the image KSE applied to the narrow-range disappearance effect is hidden. 251(i)). In this regard, the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation effect is started to be executed) to when the model image (integrated model image IG) is hidden is longer than the model image (integrated model image IG). ) is hidden until the image KSE to which the narrow-range disappearing effect is applied is hidden longer. According to such a configuration, the display state of the model image (integrated model image IG) is maintained even after the execution of the post-operation effect is started, so that the state thereof can be confirmed. It seems that the reason why it is difficult to reveal clearly is not due to the "simulated image whose display state is maintained", but due to the performance by the "image KSE applied to the narrow-range type disappearance effect". Since it becomes possible to play games, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest. In this case, it goes without saying that the narrow-range disappearing effect is performed by dynamic display of an image different from the model image, instead of a fade-out that ends relatively quickly. As for the "dynamic display with another image" as such a narrow-area disappearance effect, we have prepared multiple types with different expectations, and they appear selectively according to the type of acceptability state with different occurrence conditions. It is more desirable to

According to the wide-area disappearing effect according to the example of presentation described above, it is possible to expect a function that suggests that the first reception permission state has been executed in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptability state, since the operation is accepted only by the player's operation and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect will be executed without affecting the entire screen. On the other hand, it can be said that execution by a narrow-area type disappearance effect with a small image applied to the disappearance effect is superior in that the post-operation production can be immediately executed in a state of good visibility. According to such a configuration, in the case of the wide area type erasure effect, it is required to change the background image to ensure the visibility, but in the case of the narrow area type erasure effect, the background image is not changed. Visibility can be ensured only by performing the post-operation production while maintaining the .

As described above, in the second reception acceptance state, the ratio of stopping the jackpot pattern (may be 0% or 100%) is different based on the result of the production determination according to the result of the jackpot determination. , including the second mode), the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, when the first mode (relatively high rate mode) appears as the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) and the second mode (relatively low rate mode) appears, In both cases, the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, a plurality of aspects (third aspect , including the fourth mode), the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, when the third aspect (relatively high ratio aspect) appears as the post-operation effect (first operation post-effect effect) and the fourth aspect (relatively low ratio aspect) appears, When the wide-area disappearing effect is executed in mutually different aspects (images), or when the third aspect (relatively high ratio aspect) appears, the wide-area disappearing effect is performed, and the fourth aspect (relatively It is desirable to execute a narrow-range extinction effect when a low-proportion aspect appears. The narrow-range annihilation effect at this time may be the same as the narrow-range annihilation effect performed in response to the second acceptable state, or may be different.

According to such a configuration, out of the first acceptance acceptable state and the second acceptance acceptable state, in the first acceptance acceptable state in which the wide-area disappearing effect may occur, the disappearing effect itself has a degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the low visibility of the post-operation effect due to the wide-area disappearing effect. In addition to the first acceptance state and the second acceptance state, the fourth acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state, which will be described later, can be used in both the variation pattern of losing the big hit and the variation pattern of winning the big win. It can occur, and the above-mentioned first and second variation patterns, as well as the fourth and fifth variation patterns described later, are "the variation pattern at the time of the big hit and the variation pattern at the time of losing (at the time of defeat). It goes without saying that it is prepared as a pair.

Also, the second acceptance allowable state may be generated not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance acceptable state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance acceptable state is generated at a relatively late timing.

The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) of the model image (integrated model image IG) ends during the period when the disappearance effect image is displayed (the timing from when the operation is accepted until the display is hidden) may be different between the first allowable reception state and the second allowable reception state.

If the operation is accepted in the "situation where the image KTH associated with the narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. 251(d), the image KTH is not hidden. It is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while the image KTH is being displayed. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 251(f). After that, when the execution of the narrow-area disappearance effect is started, the "image KTH associated with the narrow-area preproduction effect" is made difficult or invisible by the "image KSE associated with the narrow-area disappearance effect". It is desirable to develop the production so that it will be done.

In addition, even if the operation is accepted in the "situation where the image HTH2 associated with the wide-area type pre-effect is displayed" shown in FIG. First, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is started while the image HTH2 is being displayed. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 252(i). Then, after that, when the execution of the wide area type disappearance effect is started, the "image HSE associated with the wide area type disappearance effect" makes the "image HTH2 associated with the wide area type front effect" difficult or invisible. It is desirable to develop the production in the future.

In the example shown in FIG. 250, if operation reception is allowed while the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is in a non-output state, the "specific type of effect sound ( BGM playback)” may not necessarily be re-output until the symbols are stopped. For example, at timing tC6, either the "specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction)" which is already in a non-output state or the "post-operation effect effect sound" which is started to be output when the operation is accepted. It is also possible to newly start outputting a different special effect sound. The special effect sound does not start to be output when the operation is accepted, but is started to be output based on the arrival of a predetermined timing within the variation pattern.

The image related to the wide-area type pre-effect and the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect are to be displayed until the set time of the reception allowable state ends (or until the automatic reception button is activated). good too. Also, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained until the set time of the acceptance allowable state ends (or until the automatic acceptance button is activated).

In addition, in the above-described production example, the simulated image simulating the operation receiving part is displayed in both the wide area type front production and the narrow area type front production. , is displayed in a mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) appearing during the period (first acceptance permitted state) in which operation reception is permitted. As a result, in the wide-area type pre-rendering (first wide-area type pre-rendering), even if the model image is displayed when the operation reception is not yet permitted, it will be understood that the operation reception is permitted. It is possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect (acceptance acceptance state) while making it difficult for misrecognition to occur. become. In addition, in the second wide-area type pre-rendering and narrow-area type pre-rendering, the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the form (image data) that appears during the period when operation reception is permitted (reception permitted state). This is gradually revealed as the pre-production is hidden (the display area is reduced). That is, in this case, the display state of the model image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptability state occurs continues from before to after the acceptability state occurs. This is the same for the fourth reception acceptance state, which will be described later.

249 (FIG. 251) and the production example shown in FIG. 250 (FIG. 252). Yes, at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effects such as display changes and lamp lighting) is displayed without hiding the model image (gauge image) (and dynamic display). (See Figure 251(f), Figure 252(i), etc.). After that, the execution of the extinction effect (the narrow-area erasure effect or the wide-area erasure effect) is started (see FIG. 251(g), FIG. 252(j), etc.). However, in the wide-area disappearing effect executed in a relatively large range, most of the change (post-operation effect) that has once clearly appeared becomes difficult to see, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, when the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, changes in response to the operation reception (changes in display, lamp lighting, etc., caused by the post-operation production) at least one of) will start executing, and at this point, the model image (gauge image) will not be hidden and will be displayed without being difficult to see due to the narrow-area disappearance effect On the other hand, when the wide-area disappearing effect is executed, changes in response to the operation reception (display change, lamp emission, etc.) at least one of the changes that occur) may not be initiated. That is, in this case, at the time when the change corresponding to the reception of the operation (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as a display change and lamp light emission, which is a post-operation effect) is started, the model image (gauge image) is displayed instead of being hidden, but is made difficult to see by the wide-area disappearing effect (Fig. 252(j)).

That is, when the narrow-range disappearance effect is executed, at the time when the change corresponding to the operation reception (at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation production such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp) is started, the operation The display state of the model image (gauge image) is maintained in the manner in which it was displayed before the reception was made. In this case, the model image (gauge image) does not become difficult to see due to the narrow-range disappearance effect at the time when the execution of the post-operation effect is started. On the other hand, when the wide area type disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to make it so that FIG. 250(j) appears after passing through FIG. FIG. 250(j) may appear when the execution of is started.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the acceptability state executed in the "suppressed operation acceptance effect" in which the specified type of effect sound can be suppressed, the degree of suppression is relatively high or the state of non-output. In addition to the first reception acceptance state that is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 250)" that is set to 250, the degree of suppression is relatively low "weak suppression mode (second mode )” is prepared, as described above. In this case, the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed may be a different effect sound. Just do it.

According to such a configuration, when the set time (effective period) during which operation reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide performance as to how much the specific type of performance sound is suppressed. Become.

Here, in order to preferably obtain the above effects, the degree of expectation (big hit It is desirable that the ratio of appearance of the pattern is different. Here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, the ratio (expectation) of the "post-operation production corresponding to the operation acceptance" that appears only when the jackpot is won is , When the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" occurs, the ratio (expectation) that is executed in a mode in which the "post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance" appears only when the jackpot is won is lower than ing. The percentage may be 0% or 100%.

In addition, regarding the "weakly suppressed mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)", the production according to the high-expectation fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) and the reach state are not even formed (or reach State can be formed, but does not develop into SP reach)), while it can appear in any of the productions according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, "strongly suppressed mode (first acceptance acceptable state)) ” may not occur in the low-expectation performance pattern, but may occur as a performance corresponding to the high-expectation variation pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation for a big hit when "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs is lower than when "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)" occurs. I can say.

In addition, in order to obtain the above effects more preferably, it is possible to generate a "special effect state" to which a transition can be made based on the satisfaction of a special effect condition, and in the "special effect state", the player can Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (effective period) in which an operation prompting image (simulated image, gauge display, etc.) is displayed to prompt the operation, a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM playback effect sound ) is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the reception of the operation is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", each time a set time (effective period) during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs, how much the specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed. (Which one of multiple modes including the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears) can be provided, and in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation presentation, such performance Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (to what extent is it suppressed), it is expected that the interest in the game will be further improved when the reception of the performance is permitted. In this case, the above-described second acceptance allowable state does not occur in the "special effect state", but can occur in a different effect state (normal effect state).

In addition, within the symbol variation "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" and "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" are sequentially executable variation patterns (for example, high expectation variation pattern Of these, an effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" of the side with relatively low expectations occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" of the side with relatively high expectations )”, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for the specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). become.

In addition, in order to more preferably suppress the decline in gaming interest when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)"
・ If a specific variation pattern is selected from among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination Even if any result is obtained as (announcement determination, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern will occur when it progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression Operation reception performance)”,
・Even if the above specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the production judgment (advance judgment, etc.), it will not occur even if the production of the specific fluctuation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. , When a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.), it occurs when the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" occurs in the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" is produced in the production according to the specific variation pattern. Compared to when it does not occur, when the performance is accepted in the ``strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)'', the rate at which the performance after the operation is executed in a highly expected mode (a mode that appears only at the time of the big win) It is desirable to have a high

In such a configuration, in the production corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" is When the ``weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)'' occurs, the highly expected post-operation performance is executed in the ``strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptance state)''. Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptance state)" )” occurs, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception acceptance state)" does not necessarily occur in the same variation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)". (First acceptance acceptable state)” may occur within the first variation pattern, and “weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)” may occur within the fourth variation pattern.

FIG. 253 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect settings). FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of effect in a variation pattern in which the fourth acceptable acceptance state occurs.

Now, for example, assuming that the starting condition is met (suspended digestion) in the above-mentioned "special effect state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a: First, an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the fourth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the fourth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fourth variation pattern" itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained (when the fourth condition is satisfied) in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes Secondly, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ is reached, the fourth acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the fourth post-operation effect is permitted. generate However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptance allowable state (effective period),
・Set a set time (effective period) during which operation reception is permitted while the "BGM playback sound" corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is being output in a non-suppressed manner, but within the set time (effective period) When the operation is accepted in , the "conditional suppression acceptance effect (Fig. 253 (a) and (b))”, and if no operation is detected within the set time (timings tD3 to tD4) during which operation reception is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth reception permission state "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 253(h))" that does not generate the post effect (fourth operation post effect)
It is generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the "BGM playback sound" in a weakly suppressed mode, the volume value (maximum "100") for the channel to which the "BGM playback sound" is assigned is set to a strong suppression mode (for example, , volume value (audible volume) of "0") to a weak suppression value (for example, volume value (audible volume) of "10").

According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (fourth acceptance acceptance state)", unless the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM 249, it appears as if the "non-suppressed reception effect (first acceptance permitted state)" shown in FIG. 249 is occurring. be able to That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player first recognizes that it is not a "suppressed reception effect" by changing to "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a suppressed mode". Since it becomes possible to enjoy the game, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by surprise production.

In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, a fourth variation that can occur depending on the result of the production judgment (preliminary judgment etc.) "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 253)" Patterns are designed to be selectable only when in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone, etc.). 249)” can be generated depending on the result of production judgment (advance judgment, etc.). ) should be high. According to such a configuration, when the "conditional suppression/non-automatic acceptance effect" appears, the expectations are higher than when the "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 249)" appears. Combined with the above-described surprise effect elements, it is possible to improve the game interest.

Furthermore, in order to more preferably obtain the above effects, the "strong suppression mode (first reception acceptance state)" can occur in both the "normal presentation state" and the "special presentation state." In the "normal production state", "unsuppressed / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 249 )” and “suppression (strong suppression mode)/automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 250)” can occur in sequence, and in the “special effect state”, one variation pattern (one "Conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 253)" and "Suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception performance (Fig. 250)" are sequentially performed within the production according to the variation pattern of It is desirable to allow it to occur.

Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect", when the set time (effective period) elapses without the operation being accepted, the "specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound ) is output in a weakly suppressed manner”, and the subsequent production will proceed. In other words, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed/non-automatic reception effect" or "conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state" Since it is difficult to recognize which situation it is in, the production after that will progress, so it is said that expectations are relatively low. Even when the "operation reception effect (effective period)" is generated, it is possible to positively prompt the player to perform an operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode)/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 253)" occurs, and when "unsuppressed/non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. ” occurs, the same production sound is output for the same time as the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound). (Fig. 253)" or "Unsuppressed/Unautomatic Reception Effect (Fig. 249)" is made difficult to recognize.

In addition, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)", as in the case where "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)" occurs,
a. The point that the narrow-range pre-production is performed at timing tD1 prior to acceptance of the operation,
b. When the timing tD2, which is slightly before the set time occurs, the output of the "reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is started, and the output state is maintained across the timing tD2. point,
c. The second allowable sound (e.g., message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (e.g., effect sound) is output;
d. When the timing tD2 slightly before the occurrence of the set time arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a model image (integrated model image) simulating the operating means to be operated in the operation reception effect. In addition to displaying a gauge image that suggests the remaining time until the set time has elapsed,
e. Even if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the acceptance acceptable sound in the output state is not terminated halfway.
f. At the time when the operation is accepted, the display state of the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are not hidden, and the display state is continued. g. Execution of the narrow-area disappearing effect while the model image (integrated model image) and the gauge image are displayed; and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow-area disappearance effect is executed in a different manner (image) than when the operation is accepted. Each structure is also adopted, and this also generates either "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" or "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)". I'm trying to make it difficult to recognize what I'm doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (unsuppressed mode) of the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is maintained, "a specific type of effect sound (BGM playback sound) is output in a weakly suppressed mode. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not it has been shifted to "the state where it is performed" by listening, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained every time the reception of the performance is performed.

Therefore, as a display method for a model image, a gauge image, a narrow-range type front effect, and a narrow-range type extinction effect, for example, as shown in FIG. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is desirable to adopt the same mode as the example of rendering shown in FIG. 249 also for the timing at which these images are hidden. However, the same aspect may not necessarily be adopted.

In addition, even in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) non-automatic acceptance effect (Fig. 253)", if the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation acceptance As the corresponding post-operation effect, at least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. It has become. In the drawing, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker maintain the execution state for the same amount of time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing after timing tD4, regardless of the timing within the set time (effective period) when the effect is accepted. On the other hand, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) may be maintained in an output state for a predetermined time from the timing at which the operation is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect is accepted, if the timing tD4 has not passed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output. It is required to be set to maintain the state.

In addition, regarding acceptance acceptable sounds, operation-related displays, pre-production, disappearance effects, and post-operation productions that appear in the "conditional suppression/non-automatic acceptance production (Fig. 253)", there are different production examples shown in Figs. It is possible to adopt examples and modifications as appropriate, and it is desirable to use the same technique with each other.

In this production example, the length of time during which the "BGM playback sound" is output in a weakly suppressed mode (predetermined constant time) is determined by the conditional suppression/non-automatic reception effect (second 4 acceptance acceptable state)”, even if the operation is accepted at the latest timing tD4 of the set time (effective period), the timing of ending the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound applied to the post-operation effect. It is set to arrive at the same time or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode for the "BGM playback sound" ends may be set to always be the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect ends. With any of these configurations, it is possible to highlight the post-operation effect when the effect is accepted.

By the way, when an operation acceptance effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a effect sound of BGM reproduction) is generated, the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first reception allowable state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation differs depending on whether the mode is the fourth reception acceptance state of the weak suppression mode. However, when a particular type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (strong suppression mode, non-output, or weak suppression mode). Even if you try, it is actually difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or no output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison object. This is especially true when the volume value when suppressed does not have a large difference between the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode. is preferably maintained, and the player can be attracted to the presentation.

However, in reality, if it is impossible to guess whether the player is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect element useful for guessing whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is displayed within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. We are planning to prepare the following in a chronological order.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first allowable sound output when the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs is such that even if the effect is accepted while in the output state, the output is While the sound is output for a predetermined period of time without being terminated, the first permission sound output when the first reception permission state occurs is received during the output state. Then, based on the reception of the effect, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, the first allowable sound itself has a function useful for guessing whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, so that the game can be played without being able to guess. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first reception permission state occurs, the second permission sound is output in addition to the first permission sound. By confirming whether or not sound is output, it is also possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. However, the second allowable sound may not necessarily be prepared, and only the first allowable sound may be output in both the first acceptance allowable state and the fourth acceptance allowable state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) during which reception of the performance is permitted includes the special mode in the first reception permission state. 232 (a) to (d)), whereas in the fourth reception acceptance state, any of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) excluding the special mode , it is possible to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the output of the acceptable reception sound and the operation-related display is finished, it is assumed that it is not possible to guess whether it is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is also possible to guess whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect (fourth post-operation effect) corresponding to the fourth reception acceptance state, both the "effect by the liquid crystal display" and the "effect by the effect sound" are "fixed from the time the effect is accepted." On the other hand, in the post-operation production (first post-operation production) according to the first reception acceptance state, the “production with sound production” is “a certain period of time from the time the production reception is received. However, the ``liquid crystal display effect'' is ``finished when a predetermined timing arrives''. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the first reception permission state, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" depends on the timing when the operation is accepted. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming such a deviation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to guess whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by confirming the mode of execution of the pre-staging and disappearance effects for the acceptable reception state. can also be used. That is, in the pre-staging and annihilation effects according to the fourth acceptable state, the images for the pre-staging and annihilation effects are displayed in a relatively narrow area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-staging and annihilation effects according to the first reception acceptance state, the image of the pre-staging and the image of the annihilation effect are displayed in a relatively wide area, and the background image is changed at that time. We are planning to accompany them. By confirming such a mode, it becomes possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode.

However, even if the production elements useful for guessing are scattered in chronological order in this way, some players may not notice them, and as a result, they may be in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that cannot be guessed, the interest in the game will eventually decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the fourth reception acceptance state (weak suppression mode), the production sound for BGM reproduction is produced based on the reception of the production within the set time (effective period). Set to weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state (strongly suppressed mode or non-output), when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, the effect sound for BGM reproduction is set to the strongly suppressed mode, and the strongly suppressed mode is set. A set time (effective period) occurs in the mode, and the performance can be accepted. According to such a configuration, the timing for suppressing the specific type of effect sound (for example, the effect sound of BGM reproduction) is suppressed in the fourth reception allowable state (weak suppression mode) and the first reception allowable state (strong suppression mode). are different, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode by checking the timing.

Moreover, in the fourth acceptance acceptance state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first acceptance acceptance state (strong suppression mode or no output), operation detection is not performed within the set time (effective period). When there is none, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 253(h)). That is, in this case, if no operation is detected within the set time (effective period), suppression processing (weak suppression mode) triggered by operation acceptance for a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound for BGM reproduction) is also performed. Therefore, although there is a cost of not being able to confirm the effect after the operation, it becomes possible to recognize that it was in the weak suppression mode instead of the strong suppression mode.

In addition, in the first acceptance allowable state (strongly suppressed mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" to the strongly suppressed mode is ended is the end timing of the post-operation effect. It is set as the same timing as or earlier than that. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance allowable state (weakly suppressed mode), the timing of ending the process of setting the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" to the weakly suppressed mode should come after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing at which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

Further, as described above, in the fourth reception acceptance state according to the above-described production example, regardless of the timing within the set time (valid period) at which the production reception is made, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) The length of the period in which the post-display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel remains unchanged. On the other hand, in the first acceptance allowable state, depending on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the production is accepted, the display production (liquid crystal display) after operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) , and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel.

According to such a configuration, the effect is generated in "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", and the game interest can be preferably maintained until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

It should be noted that the weak suppression mode, in which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is output at a lower degree of suppression than the strong suppression mode, is designed so that it can appear even when the opportunity to operate is not given (when the fourth reception acceptance state does not occur). may That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is in the weakly suppressed mode for a predetermined time, it is returned from the weakly suppressed mode to the non-suppressed mode without being given an opportunity to operate. Then, within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, the more the number of times the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth acceptance allowable state, the higher the rate of suppression until the symbol variation is stopped (the second 1 reception allowable state is further executed), it is possible to further improve performance through suppression of the "effect sound of BGM reproduction".

Also, the strong suppression mode for the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" may appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first reception permission state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is strongly suppressed for a predetermined period of time, the strongly suppressed mode is returned to the non-suppressed mode without being given an opportunity to operate. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs, the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is suppressed (weak) based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period). suppression mode). However, instead of this, even if the fourth reception acceptance state occurs, the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is suppressed before the set time occurs, as in the case where the first reception acceptance state occurs. A mode (weak suppression mode) may be set, and a set time (effective period) may be generated during which reception of the effect is allowed while in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.), the "description sound for BGM reproduction" is suppressed (weakly suppressed) when a predetermined timing arrives. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, the range of effects can be expanded. In the fourth acceptability state, the timing at which the "effect sound for BGM reproduction" is returned from the suppressed mode (weakly suppressed mode) to the non-suppressed mode is the same as or later than the timing at which the post-operation effect is terminated. It is desirable to

Also, in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type of effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than in the non-suppression mode, and output in an audible state. Even if the strong suppression mode is to make the "specific type of effect sound" in an inaudible state (output with no sound (audible volume is 0) or no output (end of channel assignment)) good.

In addition, in the above-described production examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth acceptance acceptable state", the operation button 410 is used only as an operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first acceptance acceptable state", as described above, the result of the announcement effect determination is Based on this, there are "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it becomes possible to easily recognize that the weak suppression mode is not the strong suppression mode. It should be noted that the effects have been received in the case of "selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The production after the corresponding operation has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
・A first operation mode in which the operation receiving part (the part that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and ・When the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving part is moved by the driving force. An operation opportunity can be provided in any one of a plurality of modes including a second operation mode of moving to a specific position. Here, the "first operation mode" assumes that the operation button 410 is given an opportunity to operate, and the "second operation mode" assumes that the sword ornament 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. The sword ornament 5001 is "a thing that can give the player an opportunity to operate while moving to a specific position". However, one operation means (one operation receiving portion) may have a "first operation mode" and a "second operation mode", and an operation opportunity may be provided by either of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first acceptability state, the sword ornament 5001 may always be given an opportunity to operate.

According to the above-described effect example, the reception acceptance state (suppress In the reception effect), the case where the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 232(d)) means that the reception acceptance state is the "first reception acceptance state (strong suppression mode)". The case where the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)) is the special mode, and the reception permission state is the "first reception permission state (strong suppression mode or non-output)" or "fourth acceptance allowable state (weak suppression mode)".

That is, in this case, when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in a special mode (Fig. 232(d)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the process will be terminated halfway. becomes (first acceptance allowable state). On the other hand, when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)), if an operation is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being output, the operation may end midway. There are also cases where the process is not terminated halfway (first reception permitted state, fourth reception permitted state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)).

Also, when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232(d)), the acceptance acceptance state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode (first acceptance acceptance state). On the other hand, when the model image (integrated model image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)), the reception permission state is executed in the automatic reception mode and in the non-automatic reception mode. will occur (first reception permission state, fourth reception permission state). According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232(a)).

In this regard, when the simulated image (integrated simulated image) is displayed in the normal mode (Fig. 232(a)), it is displayed when the first acceptability state occurs and when the fourth acceptability state occurs. may be made different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle, and whether it is executed in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode.

Further, according to the above-described production example, by confirming whether the pre-production is to be performed in the "wide-area type pre-production" or the "narrow-area type pre-production", a specific type of production sound (BGM playback) can be determined. It is possible to make it easy to confirm whether this is a "weakly suppressed mode" or a "strongly suppressed mode or non-output" when the sound) is put into the suppression mode. After that, by confirming whether or not it will be terminated halfway when the operation is performed while the reception acceptance sound is output, it is possible to determine whether it is in the "weakly suppressed mode (not terminated halfway)" or "strongly suppressed". It is possible to reconfirm whether it is a mode or non-output (end halfway through) while the post-operation effect is being performed.

Further, according to the above-described effect example, when the strong suppression mode or non-output is adopted, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM playback sound) is strongly suppressed or non-output, and the wide area type While the production is executed, when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow-range pre-production is executed while the specific type of production sound (BGM playback sound) is not in the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the effect when the narrow-range type pre-effect is performed.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the ratio of execution of the mode that appears only at the time of the big win as the post-operation effect is higher in the first acceptance acceptance state than in the second acceptance acceptance state (expectation is high). higher) is as described above. This percentage may be 0% or 100%. However, according to the above-described production examples, when the first reception permission state (special reception permission state) occurs and the second reception permission state (predetermined reception permission state) occurs before the operation is accepted. state) occurs, different production contents (acceptance acceptable sound, simulated image, pre-production, etc.) appear, so it is possible that such production contents will cause the second acceptance acceptable state (or , occurring), there is a concern that the player's interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptance acceptable states, a fifth acceptance acceptable state (specified Acceptable state) is further prepared, and the fifth acceptable state is made difficult to distinguish from the second acceptable state until the operation is accepted. After that, by realizing the development of the performance that reminds the first reception permission state, it is possible to prevent the game interest from being lowered at least until the operation is received. In order to preferably obtain such a function and effect, when the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs, the first acceptance allowable state continues until the symbol is stopped after the occurrence of the second acceptability state. It is desirable to set so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable to set the ratios of the stoppage of the jackpot symbols when the second acceptability state occurs and when the fifth acceptability state occurs so as to be different from each other. These percentages may be 0% or 100%.

While making it difficult to distinguish between the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, after the operation is received in the fifth reception permission state, the development of the performance is realized to remind the first reception permission state. As a method for doing so, for example, the same form of the acceptance acceptance sound is output when the second acceptance acceptance state occurs and when the fifth acceptance acceptance state occurs, but the first acceptance acceptance state occurs. In such a case, the mode in which the acceptance acceptable sound cannot be output in either the second acceptance acceptable state or the fifth acceptance acceptable state (for example, the type of sound as the first acceptable sound is different, and the second acceptable sound Further output mode, etc.) are output. Then, when an operation is accepted in the second acceptance allowable state, a post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while continuously outputting the sound that was in the output state at the time the operation was accepted. On the other hand, in the first acceptability state and the fifth acceptability state, when an operation is accepted, (all of) the sounds that were in the output state at the time the operation was accepted are output in a suppressed manner. A state or a non-output state is set, and a post-operation performance (a first post-operation performance or a fifth post-operation performance) is executed in the state. In this regard, if the specific effect movable body is used as an object to cause a change in both the effect after the first operation and the effect after the fifth operation, it is possible to distinguish between the second reception permitted state and the fifth reception permitted state. is made difficult, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance allowable state, it is possible to realize the progress of the performance that reminds the first acceptance allowable state. As a result, the possibility that the first reception acceptance state has occurred (the possibility that the reception acceptance sound has been misheard) becomes conscious, and it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed. .

That is, in this case, in the first acceptance allowable state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as a post-operation effect (first post-operation effect). 162 (C), (D), 163 (CC1) to (CC3), etc.) to move the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600. is possible.

On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance allowable state, at least an effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect). It is desirable to execute the effect as if the content of the effect is significantly different from the post-effect. In other words, the fifth acceptance acceptable state is strictly defined as "Even if a situation appears in which the mode of the preproduction or acceptance acceptable sound suggests the possibility of occurrence of the second acceptance acceptable state with a low degree of expectation, at least the operation reception is acceptable. It is prepared for the purpose of enabling the enjoyment of the game to be maintained until the operation is performed, and gives an erroneous recognition that the first reception permission state has occurred at the time when the post-operation effect is executed. If there is such a thing as misrecognition, it is inevitable that the interest in the game will be lowered when the erroneous recognition is noticed.

Therefore, as such a post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect with a tendency to be more suppressed than in the case of the first post-operation effect. The specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time of the change is not operated (no driving force is generated), the light emitting range is reduced, or the light emitting state is changed to the non-light emitting state. It is possible to perform as a production that causes Note that, in the effect after the second operation, a change in effect that tends to be restrained, such as a reduction in the light emitting range of the specific effect movable body or a non-light emitting state, does not occur. In this case, the specific movable decoration will have a predetermined light-emitting portion.

According to such a configuration, the effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to evoke the first reception allowable state (effect after the first operation), thereby causing the second reception allowable state (second While trying to make the player recognize that it is not the post-operation production), the content of the restrained production is gradually exposed, and it is also calmly judged that it is not the first reception allowable state (the production after the first operation). Since it becomes possible to play games, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

In addition, in order to execute the fifth after-operation effect more preferably as an effect with a tendency to be more suppressed than in the case of the first after-operation effect, it is assumed that the effect after the first operation is the operation target. The operation means (operation receiving part such as a production button) is caused to emit light (or cause a change in light emission) when the operation is accepted, and a driving means (motor, etc.) provided corresponding to the operation means ) is driven to cause a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), while in the fifth post-operation effect, the operation means (operation receiving part such as a production button) that is the operation target is operated. Triggered by the fact that the reception has been made, the light is extinguished (the light may be gradually extinguished), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving the driving means (such as a motor) provided corresponding to the operation means. (vibration, etc.) should be avoided. In this manner, the post-operation effects (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body are executed in the first reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state. By creating a mode in which the contents of the effects are opposite between the effect after the 1st operation and the effect after the 5th operation, the above-described effects can be favorably achieved.

FIG. 254 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth reception permission state occurs under the specific setting conditions (effect setting). FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fifth acceptability state occurs. The variation pattern will be described as the fifth variation pattern, but may be the first variation pattern as described above.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (suspended digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variable/non-time saving) and the "fifth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a , First, the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the fifth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

As described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254(b), when the timing tE3 after the fifth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ, the fifth operation is performed. The fifth reception permission state (effective period) is generated in which operation reception regarding the post-performance is permitted. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptance allowable state (effective period),
・"Unsuppressed acceptance allowed state ( (see FIGS. 254(a) and (b))”, and when an operation on the operation means that is the operation target is not detected within the set time (timings tE3 to tE4) during which operation reception is permitted. However, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started "automatic acceptance mode (see FIG. 254(i))".
It is generated as "unsuppressed / automatic reception effect" executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily come within the set time, and may come when or after the set time ends.

According to such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second reception acceptance state is occurring until the post-operation effect is started to be executed. Then, since the development of the performance as if recalling the first reception permission state is realized, the game interest can be preferably maintained until the performance is started after the operation. .

Also, in the fifth acceptance allowable state, similarly to the second acceptance allowable state, as shown in FIGS. ), the output of the "acceptance permissible sound (here, the first permissible sound)" is started at timing tE2, which is a little before the occurrence of ), and the output state is changed over the timing tE3 at which the set time occurs. I am trying to maintain it. The length of time from when the output of the first allowable sound is started to when the operation is accepted is also the same. In addition, the sound itself output as the first allowable sound is the same, and the point that the second allowable sound (message sound) is not output is also the same as in the second acceptance allowable state. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptance sound appears in the same manner in the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state, so that the amusement of the game can be preferably maintained. Be expected.

However, as described above, in the second reception acceptance state, the operation is performed at timing tB3a (Fig. 249(e)) when the "reception acceptance sound (first acceptance sound)" is in the output state after the set time (effective period) has occurred. When the acceptance is made, the set time itself is ended, but the "reception allowable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and is output as the first allowable sound at the timing (no operation is performed). On the other hand, in the fifth reception acceptance state, after the set time (effective period) occurs, the "acceptance acceptance sound (first When the operation is accepted at the timing tE3a (FIG. 254(e)) when the "allowable sound" is in the output state, the set time itself is ended, and the "acceptable allowable sound (first allowable sound)" In other words, this kind of behavior (halfway termination) for the "acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)" appears when an operation is accepted in the first acceptability state. Therefore (Fig. 250(e)), even though the situation is such that the fifth reception acceptance state is occurring, the effect development is realized as if the first reception acceptance state is recalled. , is expected to favorably maintain amusement.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when the operation is accepted within the set time of the fifth acceptance allowable state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is displayed as the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. A post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) by a speaker (second effect member) are generated (Fig. 254(d) reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is maintained in the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. is maintained, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

Also, although illustration is omitted, in this production example, a post-operation production (fifth post-operation production) corresponding to the fifth acceptance acceptable state and a post-operation production (first Post-operation effect), at least the "effect using the specific effect movable body" is executed. The effect contents of the "effect using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the first acceptance acceptable state and the "effect using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the fifth acceptance acceptable state are as described above. is. For example, as the effect after the first operation, a movable effect of moving the specific effect movable body to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (Figs. 162(C), (D), Figs. ), etc.) can be performed. In addition, as the effect after the fifth operation, the specific effect movable body, which was in the light emitting state at the time when the operation was accepted, is reduced in its light emitting range or changed to a non-light emitting state. It can be done as a performance.

According to such a configuration, the effect change using the specific effect movable body is caused to evoke the first reception allowable state (effect after the first operation), thereby causing the second reception allowable state (second While trying to make the player recognize that it is not the post-operation production), the content of the restrained production is gradually exposed, and it is also calmly determined that it is not the first acceptance allowable state (first operation-post production). Since it becomes possible to play games, it is expected to suppress the decline in gaming interest.

Also in the example of effect shown in FIG. 254 (fifth acceptance-allowing state), as in the example of effect (second acceptance-allowing state) shown in FIG. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a simulated image simulating the operation means to be operated, and also displays a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the set time elapses. are performed respectively. The display mode of these model images and gauge images is also the same as in the case of the second reception acceptance state, and for example, they are displayed as an integrated model image IG. It is also the same that the special mode shown in FIG. 232(d) is not displayed as the integrated model image IG. As a result, until the operation is accepted, the same aspect of the model image and the gauge image appears in the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, so that the interest in the game is preferably maintained. It is expected.

Also in this example, the timing at which the model image is displayed is set to be the same as the timing at which the reception acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) starts to be output, but it is not limited to this. may be made. Alternatively, only one of the model image and the acceptable reception sound (for example, only the model image) may be started before timing tE3. However, even if such another example or another example described above is adopted, the configuration until the operation reception is performed should be matched between the second reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state. is desirable.

In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 254(c) to (f), when timing tE3a arrives while such an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is being displayed, and an operation is accepted. is assumed. When the operation is accepted under such a situation, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example performs the fifth post-operation effect (display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration At least one of the production actions by the body) is started, but in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the production after the fifth operation is started, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even if the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tE3a), the integrated model image (specific layer) does not change due to it, and after a short time (predetermined Until the timing tE3b when the time) has passed, the "display related to the integrated model image (model image, gauge image)" in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. , and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

Then, when timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearance effect) is displayed in such a manner that a part or the whole of the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) in the display state is made difficult or invisible. make it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this production example, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearance effect) starts to be displayed. maintain state. More specifically, even under the situation where the annihilation effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer where the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) The display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, by displaying the annihilation effect on the layer above it, the model image and the gauge image will be difficult to see or will become invisible.

That is, in this case, despite the fact that the image of the annihilation effect is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making the model image or gauge image (integrated model image) difficult to see or to make it invisible, The model image and gauge image (integrated model image) displayed on the specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (lower priority side)) remain in the state when the operation reception was permitted. is maintained and no change occurs. In addition, the display of the gauge image, which continues to decrease in display area, continues across operation receptions. As a result, even in the process of making the model image and gauge image (integrated model image) difficult to see, or even in the process of making them invisible, the mode (at least part of) when operation acceptance was permitted become visible.

In addition, display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) ends during the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) during which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed. The image of the annihilation effect is displayed in a situation where the model image (model image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

Regarding the model image and the gauge image, the display method after the operation is accepted is common to the first acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state. no.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 254, similarly to the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptance allowable state occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area is displayed. Execution of the narrow-range type pre-production using only the area of is started. During the period in which the image related to the narrow-range type pre-effect is displayed, first, a simulated image (here, an integrated simulated image) simulating the operation receiving part is displayed, and the first allowable sound is displayed. and output are started (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image) is started, part or the whole of the model image (integrated model image) becomes difficult to see due to the narrow-range pre-effect image. there is That is, according to the passage of time, the display range of the image related to the narrow-area type pre-effect is reduced, or the transmittance is increased, so that the "simulated image (integrated simulated image) The visibility of the image) will be gradually increased.” In this respect, even in the fifth reception-permissible state, the narrow-area type pre-rendering is being executed and the model image (here, the integrated model image) is being displayed. The timing tE3 at which is generated arrives, and operation reception is permitted, and the narrow-range type preliminary effect is performed across the timing tE3 at which the fifth reception permitted state occurs.

Here, the image used for such a narrow-area pre-rendering may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the model image (integrated model image) is displayed. Then, the model image (integrated model image) and the image (narrow-range type pre-production) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and the visibility of the model image (integrated model image IG) in the moving image gradually increases. It may be one that expresses how it is being raised. However, it is desirable to use the same narrow-range pre-effect image corresponding to the second acceptance-permissible state as the image of the narrow-range pre-effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance-permissible state.

In addition, in the narrow-range type pre-effect, not only the image display on the effect display device 1600 but also the related effect sound may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance acceptance state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to operations, the narrow-range type pre-production It can be said that it is preferable to perform image display on the effect display device 1600 without outputting the effect sound related to this, in order to increase concentration on the effect.

In this way, the narrow-area type pre-performance that occurs before the acceptance of the operation is permitted, since the same mode appears in the second reception-permitting state and the fifth reception-permitting state, the game interest is increased. It is expected to remain well.

According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the production progresses in the same manner as the production contents shown in FIGS. Even if the player side is aware in advance that the highly anticipated first acceptance acceptance state has not occurred, it is interesting to know which of the second acceptance acceptance state and the fifth acceptance acceptance state will occur. As a result, it is expected that the decrease in interest in gaming will be suppressed.

However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth reception permission state and the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is started, the first reception permission state is entered instead of the second reception permission state. The performance will be developed in a manner reminiscent of

That is, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (accepted operation) in the fifth acceptability state, the sound ( ) are put into an output state in a strongly restrained mode or put into a non-output state to terminate this halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first acceptance allowable state), when an operation is accepted, the "first allowable sound" and "second allowable sound" that were output in the non-suppressed mode are changed to a strongly suppressed mode. 254, but in the example shown in FIG. The "BGM reproduction sound" and the "first allowable sound" which have been output in the mode are changed to the output state in the strong suppression mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. As a result, regarding (all of) the sounds that were output in the non-suppressed state before the operation was accepted, the operation acceptance is triggered in both the second acceptance-permitting state and the fifth acceptance-permitting state. 254, it becomes possible to recall the first acceptance allowable state at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. Appropriate maintenance of amusement will be expected.

In this case, it does not matter whether the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is set when the operation is accepted. It is desirable to perform the same processing in . For example, in the second reception acceptance state, if the sound that has been output in a non-suppressed mode until then is turned into a non-output state when the operation reception is triggered, even in the fifth reception acceptance state, the operation reception is the trigger. The sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode until then is put in the non-output state.

On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 254(g) to (k), it is assumed that the set time has passed (the second reception permission state has ended) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, the fifth acceptability state is executed in the automatic accept mode. Therefore, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without the player's operation being performed, it is assumed that the operation is accepted. The same processing will be executed.

Therefore, at the timing tE3c, not only does the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) start to be executed, but the sound that has been output in the non-suppressed mode (here, the BGM playback sound) is strongly suppressed. , or to a non-output state to abort them. Even in the first acceptance allowable state (FIG. 250), a predetermined sound (for example, the first allowable sound) is output in an unsuppressed manner until timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, and the timing tC4f. , it may be set to an output state in a strongly restrained mode, or set to a non-output state, and terminated halfway.

Further, at timing tE3d, while the effect after the fifth operation is already in the execution state, the execution of the "wide area type disappearance effect" is started as the disappearance effect described above. As for the "wide-area disappearing effect", the image itself may not necessarily be the same as in the case of the first reception-permitting state, but the background image that was displayed until the operation was accepted is erased with a change. It is desirable to have it executed as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that at least half or more of the display area is used for execution. As a result, the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed) is the same in both the second acceptance-allowed state and the fifth acceptance-allowed state (wide area-type disappearance effect). Therefore, after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed, the first acceptance acceptance state can be recalled, and the game interest can be preferably maintained. The manner in which such a disappearance effect is applied is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). is the same as in the case of the first acceptability state.

Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 254, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends at the timing when the "BGM playback sound" is output again in the non-suppressed mode in the fifth reception-allowed state. Although the timing tE5 is set as the timing tE5 when the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, it may be the timing that arrives while the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed. It may be the timing that comes after the end.

Also, in the first reception permission state, similarly to the fifth reception permission state, the timing at which the "BGM playback sound" is set to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set to the time when the operation is received. good too.

In the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state, a process to change the sound that has been output in the non-suppression mode to "output in the suppression mode" or "non-output state" and to change the output sound after the operation. The processing to be output does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and it is sufficient if all of these processes are started based on the acceptance of the operation.

Also, as described above, when the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance allowable state, this triggers the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emitting state to be turned off for a predetermined period of time (the fifth operation post-effect), and when the operation is accepted in the first acceptance-permitting state, this is used as a trigger to give a driving force to the specific effect movable body so that a predetermined effect action appears (after the first operation directing) is desirable. Further, at this time, in the effect after the first operation, a driving force is generated in the driving means corresponding to the operating means to be operated so that a predetermined movement (vibration or the like) appears in the operating means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such processing in the post-fifth operation effect. In this case, in the first post-operation effect, the lighting mode of the operation means that is the operation target is changed, while in the fifth after-operation effect, the light emission of the operation means that is the operation target is turned off. It is desirable to make It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance state and the fifth acceptance state can appear when the same result (for example, winning a big win) is obtained as a result of the judgment of the big win.

Further, when the movement effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the effect after the first operation, it is desirable to be able to emit light in such a manner that it does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

Further, in the effect after the first operation, the effect sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is started to be output and then continuously output, whereas in the effect after the fifth operation, the effect sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is output. is output for a predetermined period of time, it is desirable that a state in which no dramatic sound is output in a non-suppressed manner (a state in which a strongly suppressed state is output or a state in which no sound is output) appears. According to such a configuration, in the post-fifth-operation effect, while the effect sound corresponding to the reception of the operation is properly executed, there is a tendency to suppress this as compared with the case of the first-post-operation effect. As a result, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, it is desirable that the reception permission sounds output when the first reception permission state and the fifth reception permission state are generated are different. That is, as described above, in the first acceptance state, the first acceptable sound (sound effect) and the second acceptable sound (message sound) are output. The allowable sound (message sound) is not output, and the first allowable sound (effect sound) is output. However, it is desirable that the first allowable sound (sound effect) itself is also output as a different sound.

Also, as described above, in the first acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptability state (second acceptance allowable state), the same mode (shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)) as a model image (integrated model image) mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as a model image (integrated model image) in the first reception acceptance state and the fifth reception acceptance state (second reception acceptance state), the display size are made different (similar shapes), and in the fifth reception acceptance state (second reception acceptance state), it is desirable to display in a smaller form than in the first reception acceptance state. However, the sizes are displayed in the same manner in the second reception-allowed state and the fifth reception-allowed state. Note that in the first acceptance state, a special mode can be displayed as a model image (integrated model image), but in the fifth acceptance state (second acceptance state), a model image (integrated model image) can be displayed. ) is not displayed as a special mode, as described above.

In addition, in the first post-operation effect corresponding to the first acceptance allowable state, the effect sound (variation pattern It is desirable to start outputting the production sound output at a predetermined timing in the above in a non-suppressed manner (for example, return of BGM). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation acceptance ( It is desirable to prevent the production sound output at a predetermined timing within the variation pattern from being output in an unsuppressed manner. That is, in this case, after the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is set to the non-output state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation acceptance (the effect sound output at the predetermined timing within the variation pattern) is non-output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first reception permitted state, the game interest can be maintained favorably.

Further, as described above, the second acceptance acceptance state can occur in both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance acceptance state does not occur. When the state occurs, the possibility of the first acceptance allowable state occurring within the period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped may be provided. In addition, the fifth reception acceptance state can also occur in both a variation pattern in which the first reception acceptance state occurs and a variation pattern in which the first reception acceptance state does not occur, thereby generating the fifth reception acceptance state. When the game is executed, the possibility of occurrence of the first reception permission state may be provided within a period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth reception acceptance state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first reception acceptance state within the period until the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than when the second reception acceptance state occurs. should be set to This ratio may include 0% and 100%. According to such a configuration, even if the player perceives in advance that the first acceptance allowable state has not occurred before the operation is accepted, the fifth acceptability state has occurred. Since it becomes possible to look forward to the possibilities, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in games.

According to the production example described above, as a result of accepting an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)), the operation If the acceptable reception sound is not terminated in the middle based on the acceptance, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were output in the non-suppressed mode will be output in the unsuppressed mode. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 249). On the other hand, as a result of receiving an operation while the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)), If the acceptable reception sound is terminated in the middle, not only the acceptable reception sound but also other sounds (such as "BGM playback sound") that were output in the non-suppressed mode are output or not output in the strongly suppressed mode. (see FIG. 254).

According to the production example described above, in the situation where the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, as a result of the operation being accepted while the model image (integrated model image) is being displayed, the operation is accepted based on the operation acceptance. When the permissible sound is terminated in the middle, based on the operation reception, "when the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined manner and a specific effect action is generated (Fig. 250)" A case where the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body is reduced or the process of turning off the light is performed, and no effect action is caused (Fig. 254). Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the amusement of the game under the condition that the reception allowable sound is terminated in the middle. It should be noted that, in the case of ``lighting the specific effect movable body in a predetermined manner and generating a specific effect action (Fig. 250)'', non-light emission is performed by ``reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or extinguishing the light''. It is desirable to make the portion where the light is emitted also emit light.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the integrated model image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. In addition, when the model image and the gauge image are separately displayed as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

In each example described above and each example described later, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output so that there is a timing when they overlap each other. Output of the second allowable sound may be started.

In addition, in the acceptability state according to each example described above and each example described later, the model image is displayed as an integrated model image IG including the gauge image GG, but it is not necessarily displayed as an image including the gauge image GG. It doesn't have to be.

The acceptability states according to the examples described above and the examples described later can occur both in the variation pattern at the time of the big win and in the variation pattern at the time of the loss.

In each acceptance acceptable state described above and each acceptance acceptable state described later, when the post-operation production is executed, the disappearance effect is executed as an image separate from the model image. Only when the post-operation effect is not executed as a result, it is preferable to execute the extinction effect by fading out the model image itself so as not to recognize the degree of expectation. In this case, the model image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the mode in which it was in the acceptability state.

In each reception acceptance state described above and each reception acceptance state described later, even if the same reception acceptance state The type of disappearance effect may be changed depending on the degree of expectation as such a mode.

The wide-area annihilation effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow-area annihilation effect is set to less than half of the display screen. It does not have to satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half. As for the front effect, the wide area type front effect was set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area type front effect was set to less than half of the display screen. , does not necessarily satisfy the condition of more than half or less than half.

The post-operation effect may be executed only by liquid crystal display, sound output, or light emission from a lamp provided on the game board 5 . In short, any change may be made in display, sound, light emission, or the like, triggered by the reception of an operation.

Also, the “specific type of effect sound” may be a BGM playback sound that is output during normal fluctuations, or may be a BGM playback sound that is output over a plurality of fluctuations.

Further, the fourth reception-permitting state does not necessarily have to be executed in the non-automatic reception mode, and may be executed in the automatic reception mode.

In addition, a post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) when an operation is accepted in the first acceptance-permitting state (first post-operation effect) and a post-operation effect (fourth post-operation effect) when an operation is accepted in the fourth acceptance-permitting state. It is desirable to make the contents of the presentation different from each other.

In each example described above and each example described later, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, processing to reduce the visibility of the integrated model image IG (specific layer) itself (increase the transmittance, etc.) may be performed at the same time.

In each of the examples described above and each example described later, the image applied with the disappearance effect (wide-area disappearance effect, narrow-area disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance. Even if it is displayed so as to overlap the entire model image (integrated model image), it is possible to confirm the mode of the model image (integrated model image).

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the “narrow area type pre-production” means “background change (the background image that has been displayed so far is made invisible, and a new background image is displayed. It may also be referred to as "pre-production" without production). In this case, the "wide area type pre-effect" means "change of background (effect that makes the background image that was displayed until then invisible and the effect is performed with a new background image displayed) It means "pre-staging accompanied by". The background image may be a solid black or solid white image.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the aspect shown in FIG. 232(d) may be omitted as the aspect of the integrated model image. In this case, the "special mode" refers to a mode in which the shape of the operation means (the model image itself imitating the operation receiving part is the same and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (the mode shown in FIG. 232(c)). will be used.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, when a model image (integrated model image) is displayed, the model image is used as an operation means (operation receiving unit) such as "operation in a movable area" or "operation As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when In this regard, it is desirable that such dynamic display continues on the specific layer until it is hidden even after the operation is accepted.

In each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, the display method for the simulated images may be changed as appropriate to FIGS. or may be added. 212 to 248, and explanations and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM It may be appropriately changed or added to the explanatory text described in relation to "Valid period that occurs while the sound of reproduction is strongly suppressed" or the content applied to another example . 212 to 248, and explanations and other examples corresponding to these figures, "BGM It may be appropriately changed or added to the explanatory text described in relation to "Effective period that occurs while the sound of reproduction is in a non-suppressed mode" or the content applied to another example .

[Further details of effect such as effect of disappearance of model image]
As described with reference to FIG. 118 , in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production determination on the production display device 1600, the big hit determination The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which the acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the reception acceptance state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions etc. means that as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period), the effect member to be the object of the effect A post-acceptance effect (post-operation effect) that causes a predetermined change (at least one of display change in the effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and effect action by the movable decoration) is executed. Therefore, the reception permission state (effective period) itself has poor performance, and there is concern that the enjoyment of games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including the examples described above and the examples described later, the "player's operation" to be detected means that the player directly operates the "operation button 410", the "sword decoration 5001", or the like. (Pressing action or drawing action), "player's contact action on a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor, and "player in a specific space" to be detected by the non-contact sensor This means that it also includes "operation by". In short, any one or a plurality of reception means (operation means) for receiving actions (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) by the player are included in the performance. Just do it.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided. It should be noted that each performance (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. It is possible to reduce interest, or it may be selectively provided with some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects, or described as being applicable to other configurations You may make it employ|adopt the structure currently carried out suitably. Furthermore, each effect (configuration) described below is merely an example, and any configuration capable of suppressing a decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the model image displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) is displayed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. After the production has progressed (after the production change based on the acceptance has started), the model image display can be accepted even after the production has progressed based on this acceptance. The player can grasp which mode (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) was displayed during the period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the contents of the production that progresses when the reception is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as production after reception, and notice production (expectation suggestive production) ) types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (valid period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, when an action by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance effect image is displayed on the basis of the acceptance. In addition, a specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-acceptance effect image, and when the specific mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after the acceptance is made. By reducing the visibility by , it is expected to encourage the player to naturally shift the gaze target from the "simulated image display" to the "specific post-reception effect image". .

However, since the display of the model image is originally intended to be displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, if the model image is displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-reception effect image has already been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the model image display is hidden (invisible) while the specific mode is appearing, while the specific after-receipt effect is displayed. The image is intended to be displayed while the particular aspect is present. That is, in this case, after the action is accepted by the player, while the specific mode is appearing, the display effect changes from the pre-acceptance display (simulated image display) to the post-acceptance display (specific post-acceptance effect image). Since the transition is realized, it is possible to change from the pre-reception display (simulated image display) simply by confirming whether the situation is before the specific mode appears or whether the specific mode has finished appearing. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not the transition to the post-reception display (the specific post-reception effect image) has been completed.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the specific mode and the specific post-acceptance effect image appear based on acceptance. It appears before the post-effect image is displayed, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance effect image has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where the specific post-acceptance effect image has not yet been displayed, the specific mode makes it difficult to see the model image display. After receiving the reception, the effect image is likely to appear soon, and it is possible to encourage the player to prepare in advance to change the target of the player's attention from the "simulated image display that is difficult to see". .

[Configuration 2]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period (valid period) of the plurality of acceptance periods (valid period), A mode in which the first after-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, and the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize separately from the first after-reception effect image (first effect mode) can appear. Further, when an action by the player is accepted within a second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods (valid periods), a second post-acceptance effect image different from the first post-acceptance effect image is generated based on the acceptance. 2 post-reception effect image can be displayed, and apart from the second post-reception effect image, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second effect aspect) can appear. The above-mentioned "specific mode" may correspond to either the first rendering mode or the second rendering mode, or may correspond to none of them.

According to such a configuration, the model image display can be visually recognized without confirming which of the "first after-reception effect image" and the "second after-reception effect image" is displayed as the after-reception effect image. It is possible to guess the type of post-reception performance image (first post-reception performance image, second post-reception performance image) only by confirming what kind of mode the difficult mode was. That is, the mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize means that at least a part of the predetermined area in the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" where the model image display is displayed is It is realized as an image displayed in the overlapping specific area (if it overlaps with the whole from the start of appearance, a predetermined transmittance will be set), or it is a model image display and front view Needless to say, it is realized as an effect (for example, a movable body effect) using a predetermined effect object in an overlapping position. Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the target of gaze from the model image display even after the acceptance, the types of aspects (first presentation mode, second presentation mode) that appear (so as to overlap the model image display) appear at the target of gaze (first presentation mode, second presentation mode) ), so that the type of post-reception effect (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be guessed without changing the gaze point. Become

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period (valid period) of the plurality of acceptance periods (valid period), A third post-reception effect image different from the first post-reception effect image and the second post-reception effect image can be displayed based on the acceptance, but the third post-reception effect image can be displayed. Separately, the first effect mode corresponding to the first reception period can appear as a effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display of the model image.

According to such a configuration, when the first effect mode appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect images will appear. As a mode for making the model image display difficult to visually recognize, it is made possible to guess that a second post-acceptance effect image will appear when the second effect mode appears. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it is possible to recognize that the possibility of outputting the second after-reception effect image is denied. Since it is unclear which one will appear and the player can be interested in which one will appear, when a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display appears While maintaining the performance and tension of the reception, it is possible to appropriately prompt the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the performance is being executed after reception.

Here, the "post-reception effect image" is illustrated as the post-reception effect. (or executed when there is an acceptance within one acceptance period, but not when an acceptance is received within the other acceptance period), the above-described "acceptance It is also possible to replace "post-effect image" with "lamp emission" or "movable body operation". In any case, in view of the above-mentioned effects such as "be able to guess the type of production after reception without changing the gaze point", a model image display is displayed for production after reception. It is realized as being executed at a position that does not overlap (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes his gaze from the position where the simulated image display is displayed). In addition, if multiple post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body operation" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects is the above. It can be said that the above effects can be achieved if it corresponds to the "effect after reception".

If multiple post-reception effects (multiple post-reception modes) such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp emission", and "movable body operation" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, those post-reception effects ( The fact that at least one of the post-reception mode) can be equivalent to the "post-reception effect" can be applied not only to the above-described effect examples, but also to each effect example described later.

[Configuration 3]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the post-acceptance effect (of and a state where the model image display is relatively easy to see and a state where the model image display is relatively difficult to see. I have to.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is started based on the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display. . In addition, during the execution period of the special effect mode (effect after reception), by making the model image display relatively difficult to see, , so that the player's gaze target is naturally shifted to "."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, the above-mentioned special effect mode (effect after reception) does not affect the visibility of the model image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-view state) before the reception. Execution is started as follows. More specifically, the simulated image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), and the special effect mode (effect after reception) displays at least part of the predetermined area. It is not an image display that is displayed using the display, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (effect after reception), by making the model image display relatively difficult to see, it is possible to switch from the "model image display" to the "special effect mode (effect after reception)". )” to encourage the player to naturally shift the gaze target.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an order is accepted within a specific acceptance period, at least a special effect mode and a predetermined effect mode appear in parallel based on the acceptance. It has become. However, the execution of the predetermined effect mode starts after the execution of the special effect mode is started (behind the special effect mode) so as to adversely affect the visibility of the model image display (make the model image display difficult to see). It is supposed to be As a result, during the execution period of the special effect mode (effect after reception), by making the model image display relatively difficult to see, it is possible to switch from the "model image display" to the "special effect mode (effect after reception)". )” to encourage the player to naturally shift the gaze target.

It should be noted that the processing for causing the predetermined presentation mode to appear is also started upon acceptance. Therefore, a plurality of post-reception performances (a plurality of post-reception modes) including at least a special performance mode and a predetermined performance mode are performed in parallel, and the predetermined performance mode is realized as one mode of the post-reception performance. You may do so. In any case, the predetermined effect mode described in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed using at least a portion of a predetermined area in which a simulated image display is displayed, or at least a portion of the predetermined area. It is realized as an effect that is executed using the effect object that overlaps with , when viewed from the front.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), while the model image display is being displayed, Using a specific area including at least part of the predetermined area that is the display target area of the model image display, it is possible to display a "specific extinction effect display" as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. The image display is hidden while the specific disappearance effect display is being displayed after the display of the specific disappearance effect display is started.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display. In addition, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the model image display is hidden, and the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. From this, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the display of the model image is hidden is short, and the decline in the interest in the game when the display of the model image is hidden is suppressed. become nauseous.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance effect display can be displayed even after the model image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. Execution of the production is started after the acceptance. Then, the post-acceptance effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific region that is the display target region of the specific disappearance effect display, or (at least one of) the specific disappearance effect display ), and is implemented by using a production object that overlaps with the part) when viewed from the front.

According to such a configuration, among the post-acceptance effects, the specific post-acceptance effect that is executed at a position that overlaps the specific disappearance effect display when viewed from the front is watched from the position where the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. It becomes recognizable without moving ahead. That is, in this case, when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it is possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect, It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest.

[Configuration 5]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the action by the player is accepted in the acceptance period (specific acceptance period) until the model image display is hidden, the specific mode is When the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the model image display. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the indication effect display is executed in a specific indication mode based on the fact that the result of the win/lose determination is a special result (for example, a big hit, a variable probability big hit, etc.). If the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific mode is within the period from the acceptance until the model image display is hidden. It is made possible to appear in

That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the specific precursor mode, it is possible to recognize that the specific mode appears until the model image display is hidden, making it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player to pay attention to which mode the model image display appears before the player performs an action. In addition, the "specific mode" according to the configuration 5 and the "specific mode" according to the configuration 1 may be the same mode, or may be different modes, and may occur in response to different reception periods. may be

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the result of the win/lose determination is a special result (for example, a big win, a variable probability big win, etc.), an indication effect display is executed in a manner different from the specific indication manner. When the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect display (acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the specific mode is a state in which the model image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is completed, and cases where it does not appear within that period.

According to such a configuration, when the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific portent mode, the specific mode is performed until the model image display is turned off after the acceptance of the specific mode. Since it is unknown whether or not it will appear within the period of , the performance will be improved from the time it is accepted until the model image display is hidden. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension.

Configuration 5 above may be realized by replacing it with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from configuration 5 above. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period), the model image display is in a non-display state after the player's action is received. During the period until the display is completed, a specific mode may appear, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the model image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the sign effect display is a special sign mode (same as the specific ) and the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the precursor effect display, the specific mode is such that the model image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. It will not be possible to appear within the period until. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the special precursor mode, the specific mode does not appear until the model image display is hidden, making it difficult to visually recognize the model image display in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will not be abused.

In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, based on the fact that the result of the win/lose determination is a special result (for example, a big win, a variable probability big win, etc.), the sign effect display is executed in a mode different from the special sign mode. When the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the effect display (acceptance period different from the acceptance period), the specific mode is such that the model image display is hidden from the time of acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period up to and there are cases where it does not appear within that period. Even with such a configuration, when the portent effect display is executed in a mode different from the special portent mode, the model image display is turned off from the time the specific mode is accepted. Since it will be unknown whether or not it will appear within the period until, after it is accepted, the effect will be improved until the model image display is hidden. , the tension can be preferably maintained.

As for the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply the above-described or later-described configurations applicable to Configuration 5 above.

[Configuration 6]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as an indication display effect suggesting that the reception period during which the action by the player is to be received will soon occur. A specific precursor effect display among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays can be executed across the timing at which the reception period corresponding thereto occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. , the action by the player can be accepted.

That is, in this case, since the action by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (mode) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in amusement in a game caused by forgetting to confirm can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, a post-acceptance effect (for example, a special post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the acceptance is performed. Execution is started, but even at the time when the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden and is displayed.

That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the effect is started to be executed after the acceptance according to the acceptance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursor effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period (for example, the specific reception period) occurs, the reception by the reception means is permitted, or the reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to perform the process of making the acceptance acceptance sound audible, which suggests that the acceptance will be (soon), it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the acceptance action.

Acceptance acceptable tone means that even if it is realized as something that is audible before the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period (suggesting that the acceptance period will soon occur), the timing of the occurrence of the acceptance period is It is made audible in the form of straddling, and can be made audible at least halfway during the acceptance period. In addition, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 whose tone setting value can be set to "0", under the situation where the volume setting value is set to "0", although the acceptance acceptable sound is output, it is not audible. It will not be done.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the action by the player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audible (output state) within the acceptance period (for example, the specified acceptance period), the above-mentioned "model image display is Before the "appearance of making it difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect display, etc.)", and in a state where the "appearance of making it difficult to visually recognize the model image display (disappearance effect display, etc.)" has not yet appeared, the acceptance acceptable sound is played. It is designed to start executing processing for making it inaudible.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the player will be informed that the acceptance period has already ended. It will be possible to suggest suitable As a result, it is possible to display the model image in a visually pleasing manner even if the timing at which the appearance of "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is delayed. become

[Configuration 8]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of reception periods (a plurality of reception periods with different effects after reception) including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared as reception periods. During the period from when the player's action is accepted while the model image display is displayed until the model image display is hidden, the model image display becomes difficult to see. It's supposed to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the action by the player is accepted while the model image display is being displayed in the first acceptance period, the model image display is displayed in the second acceptance period. In both the case where the player's action is accepted while the game is being displayed, and the time when the model image display is hidden, the ``form in which the model image display becomes difficult to see'' appears. ing.

That is, in this case, regardless of whether it is the first reception period or the second reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display, and the reception period has ended. It becomes possible to suggest that it is in a state. The "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configuration 8 may be acceptance periods of the same type as the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configuration 2 above. However, the reception period may be of a different type.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode are prepared as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and the first mode appears during the first acceptance period. Since the second mode appears in the second acceptance period, it is possible to give the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' to have performance related to the type of the acceptance period.

Further, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 is further provided with a third mode as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". However, in the second acceptance period, the second mode appears when the application is accepted within the period, and the third mode appears when the application is not accepted within the period.

According to such a configuration, in the second acceptance period, it is determined whether or not the action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, based on the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, during the first acceptance period, it is not possible to determine whether or not the action by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period based on the appearance of the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". As a result, it is expected that the amusement of games will be improved through such effects.

It should be noted that, in each of the production examples described above and each production example described later, "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" means that the disappearing effect display is performed in a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area where the model image display is displayed. is displayed, and in addition to the mode in which an effect is executed using an effect object that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area where the model image display is displayed when viewed from the front, the model image display itself can be visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to display (for example, the display may be reduced or blurred, or the transmittance setting may be changed).

[Configuration 9]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 must be in a state in which reception by the reception means is permitted when the reception period (for example, the specific reception period) occurs, or a state in which reception by the reception means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the reception acceptance sound audible, which suggests that the reception will be (soon), the player is prevented from forgetting to perform the reception operation.

Also, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of types of indication display effects suggesting that the receiving period for receiving actions by the player will soon occur. A specific precursor effect display among the plurality of types of precursor effect displays can be executed across the timing at which the reception period corresponding thereto occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed. , the action by the player can be accepted. That is, in this case, since it is possible to accept the action by the player while it is possible to confirm which aspect is displayed as the precursor effect display, the game is played by forgetting to check the aspect of the precursor effect display. A decrease in interest can be suppressed. Note that the "specific portent effect display" according to the configuration 9 may be the same as the "specific portent effect display" according to the configuration 6, or may be a different type (mode) of the portent effect display. .

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the display of a specific precursor effect is continued even after the effect corresponding to the acceptance of the action by the player (post-acceptance effect) has progressed. By doing so, even after the acceptance is made, the player side can confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display.

However, since the sign display effect is originally displayed in a state in which acceptance is not permitted (before the acceptance period occurs), the action by the player is performed while the sign display effect is being displayed. Even if it is performed, the player may feel uneasy about whether the action has been accepted. Nevertheless, if the premonitory effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance has been made, there is a concern that it will be difficult to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made, thereby reducing the interest in the game. be.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as will be described later, when a player's action is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, the specific precursor effect will continue to be displayed after the acceptance. Although the display is displayed, a mode in which the specific portent effect display is difficult to visually recognize while the specific portent effect display is being displayed appears. Then, after the appearance of the aspect, the specific portent effect display is hidden under the condition that the specific portent effect display is made difficult to be visually recognized.

That is, in this case, even after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the precursor effect display has appeared, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), a predetermined image display can be displayed, and the simulated image display can be displayed even after the production progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player. there is Then, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a mode is made to appear that makes the model image display difficult to see while the model image display is being displayed. The "difficult to view mode" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the above-mentioned predetermined image display that can be displayed even in the pattern variation that does not occur during the reception period.

In other words, in this case, since the specific disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that is not related to the reception period, it is directly related to the reception period. The game can be progressed without adversely affecting performance that does not occur.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the first image display (predetermined image display) and the The second image display can be displayed within the acceptance period, and the specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( Retention) is assumed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility.

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, the visibility may be affected when "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears depending on the type of image display. Since there are cases where the visibility is not affected, whether or not it is necessary to check whether the image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period should be confirmed when the player performs an action. It will be possible to provide performance about whether.

However, in this case, the first image display will be displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (expectation) of the symbol variation (suggestion), and the second image display will be the symbol variation. To avoid a decrease in amusement in a game when the visibility of the second image display is affected by displaying as a display irrelevant (not suggesting) the win/loss (expectation). above is desirable.

It should be noted that when using the "specific disappearing effect display" displayed in the display screen (the effect display device 1600) as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period. is specified using a specific area including at least part of the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), which is the display target area of the model image display, while the model image display is being displayed. will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period does not occur. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is displayed in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. A predetermined image display can be displayed inside, and the model image display can be displayed even after the production progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player. . The "predetermined image display" in configuration 11 may be the same as the "predetermined image display" in configuration 10, or may be a different image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the model image display is difficult to visually recognize while the model image display is being displayed. A plurality of modes, including a first mode and a second mode, are prepared as modes that can appear and that the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.

That is, in this case, since any one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the game interest when the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize It is expected that the

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the "first mode" as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is executed, the "first mode" is the model image display and the predetermined However, when the “second mode” is executed as “a mode in which the model image display is difficult to recognize”, the “second mode” is the model image display and the predetermined Of the image display, only the model image display is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a performance as to which of the "first mode" and the "second mode" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It is hoped that it will increase interest.

It should be noted that the model image display and the predetermined image display are in a state in which either the reception period for the type corresponding to the above "first mode" or the reception period for the type corresponding to the above "second mode" is occurring. In order to improve the amusement of the game, it is desirable that the information can also be displayed.

[Configuration 12]
Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
・It is possible to generate a first reception period during which reception by the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) is permitted, and when an action by the player is accepted within the first reception period, the reception is deemed to have been made. Based on this, first reception effect execution means capable of executing the effect display after the first reception in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations (percentage of stopping the jackpot pattern), and reception means (for example, by operating button 410 or a sword ornament 5001 different from the operation button 410) can generate a second acceptance period during which acceptance by the player is permitted. When accepted, a second reception effect executing means capable of executing the effect display after the second reception in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations (percentage of stopping the jackpot pattern) based on the acceptance. It has Incidentally, the degree of expectation (percentage of stopping the jackpot symbols) may be 0% or 100%. Further, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as different types of advance notice effects. In addition, the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configuration 12 are acceptance periods of the same type as the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" according to configurations 2 and 8 above. Alternatively, reception periods of different types may be used.

Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either the action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period or the action by the player is accepted during the second acceptance period. Also, after the reception is made, it is possible to make it difficult for the model image display to be visually recognized while the model image display is being displayed.

That is, in this case, regardless of the type of acceptance period, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after acceptance has been made. In addition, since the visibility of the model image display is reduced until the model image display is hidden, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the model image display is hidden is short. Thus, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when the display of the model image is hidden.

As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the first acceptance period, the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception, and the first mode is executed as the effect display after the first reception. The same mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" in either case where the second mode, which has a higher degree of expectation than the first mode, is executed. On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode with higher expectations than the first mode (or the first mode with lower expectations than the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception. However, when the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the effect display after the second reception, "the model image display becomes difficult to see". The specific mode does not appear as a mode that makes it difficult to display, but a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image itself does not appear. As described above, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the jackpot symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the effect display after reception simply by confirming "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since there are cases where it is not possible to guess the degree, it is expected that the performance of such "a mode in which the display of the simulated image becomes difficult to visually recognize" will improve the enjoyment of the game. .

In addition, regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "specific mode" that can occur in response to the second acceptance period is "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first acceptance period. ”, it becomes possible to guess the type of reception period based on ``a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see'', and to improve the game interest. will be able to In order to obtain such a function and effect, as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", "a mode" that can occur corresponding to the first reception period is "a model image" corresponding to the second reception period. It is more desirable that the "mode in which the display becomes difficult to see" should not appear.

However, as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", the same "mode" may occur during the first acceptance period and the "mode" may occur during the second acceptance period. You can make it appear.

[Configuration 13]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. In relation to the generation, it is possible to output a reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptance sound, etc.) at least within the reception period. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance effect is generated based on the acceptance. ) can be output, and when an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect display is being displayed within the acceptance period, the acceptance is performed. to hide the reception-related effect display. Similarly, if an action by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound is audible during the acceptance period, the reception-related effect sound is made non-audible based on the acceptance. I am trying to

In the above configuration, the post-reception effect sound related to the post-reception effect is output, the reception-related effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is hidden, based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted within the reception period. Since the audible state is set, it is possible to easily recognize that the user is in the accepted state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not finished at the time when the execution of a specific post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance is started. Although it is displayed, the reception-related effect sound is terminated and made inaudible at the time when the execution of the specific post-reception effect sound corresponding to the reception is started.

According to this configuration, the reception-related effect display displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed, while the reception-related effect display is displayed within the reception period The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) is not audible at the time when the post-reception output sound is started to be executed. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-acceptance production is started, the reception-related production sound is made inaudible while the form of the reception-related production display displayed during the reception period can be confirmed. This makes it possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

Note that the non-audible state may be a state in which the reception-related effect sound output processing itself has ended, or the reception-related effect sound output processing itself may be used in each of the examples described above and in each example described later. may continue, but may not be audible by adjusting the volume to "0". In addition, in each of the above examples and each example described later, the specific post-reception production is a complex post-reception production that uses multiple effects (displays, light-emitting lamps, movable bodies, etc.) according to the reception. If it is executed as a special effect, it may correspond to "effect using a specific effect" among those effects.

[Configuration 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as the precursor effect display. It is capable of initiating an audible output (such as an acceptance tone). Then, the specific precursor effect display and reception-related effect sound can be executed across the timing at which the reception period occurs, and the specific precursor effect display is displayed and the reception-related effect sound is audible (output). , the player's actions can be accepted. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when a player's action is accepted while a specific premonition effect display is being displayed within the acceptance period, the specific action is performed based on the acceptance. Hides the sign effect display. In addition, if the player's action is accepted while the reception-related effect sound is audible during the acceptance period, the reception-related effect sound is made non-audible based on the acceptance. ing.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, the specific premonition effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even if the action by the player is accepted while the specific premonitory effect display and reception-related effect sound that have been in the execution state before the acceptance period occurs, the action is accepted. It will be possible to easily recognize that it is in a state of being The "specific precursor effect display" according to configuration 14 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (mode) of precursor effect display. good too. Further, the "reception-related effect sound" according to the configuration 14 may be the same as the "reception-related effect sound" according to the configuration 13, or may be different.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the specific premonitory effect display is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, a specific post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. It will be displayed without being terminated at the point in time. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound is terminated and rendered inaudible at the time when the execution of the specific post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started.

According to such a configuration, the specific precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs is displayed even after the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed. The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) before the period starts is not audible at the time when the post-reception output sound is started to be executed. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started, it is possible to confirm the form of the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, and at the same time, the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance period has already expired. Note that the "specific post-reception effect" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception effect" and "specific post-reception output sound" related to configuration 13, respectively. There may be one, or it may be different.

[Configuration 15]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is prepared with a plurality of reception periods in which "the content of the effect (type of effect after reception) that progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player" differs. Further, the simulated image display can be displayed even after the performance has progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, a plurality of Any one of the effects is made to appear, and the specific mode can be made to appear even when any of these effects appear.

In the above configuration, the type of presentation mode that appears based on the acceptance of the action by the player ("conversation notice" about which conversation will appear, "movable body" about whether the movable body will move) We have prepared multiple acceptance periods with different types of notice effects such as "movement notice"). In this respect, when the player's action is accepted within a specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, one of the multiple effects will appear based on the acceptance, and which of the effects will appear. It is possible to appear a specific mode even if it is That is, in this case, when any one of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear in conjunction with it, so that they are "resulting from the player's action being accepted within the specified acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a common production.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the action by the player is accepted within a special acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, special conditions (jackpot winning conditions, Inrush condition, etc.) is satisfied or not, any one of multiple modes including special modes with different appearance rates (may be 0% or 100%) can appear, and the special mode can appear When it appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the display of the model image.

According to such a configuration, a special aspect suggesting the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. , the player can enjoy the performance progressing from the display of the model image to the performance after reception (special mode) without changing the gaze point.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the above-mentioned "specific mode" appears based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted within the above-mentioned specified acceptance period, the model image display is changed to the " It is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "specific aspect". According to such a configuration, when the model image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation for granting the privilege (special acceptance period), and the above-mentioned specific mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege Due to the fact that there are cases where the display of the model image is difficult to see (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode of making the display of the model image difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)" has a production effect. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

The "specified acceptance period" for configuration 15 may be the same as the "specified acceptance period" for configurations 1, 7, and 9, or may correspond to a different acceptance period.

[Configuration 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display a remaining time suggestion display that decreases the display area of a specific image (gauge image, etc.) over time during the reception period. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the indication indicating the remaining time can be displayed even after the presentation has progressed based on the acceptance of the action by the player. Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced even while the performance is progressing, it is difficult to recognize "whether the acceptance has been made" even after the acceptance is made, creating a sense of tension. It will be expected to keep well.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific partitioned area is displayed within the display screen (effect display device 1600) as a remaining time suggestive display, and a specific image is displayed within the specific partitioned area. (Gauge images, etc.) are rendered in such a way that the display area is reduced. After the presentation progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player, the display of not only the specific image (gauge image, etc.) but also the specific partition area is continued. According to such a configuration, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is reduced because the specific partitioned area is displayed even after the effect progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player. It becomes possible to make it easier to judge whether or not the number has decreased.

It should be noted that "the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the presentation has proceeded based on the acceptance of the action by the player" means, for example, At the time when the production progresses based on this, the predetermined display area as the gauge image is left, but at a later point in time, the display area is changed to 0 (non-display). be. However, in this case, it is required that the specific partitioned area is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0. It will be hidden after the timing.

For example, as the configuration 16, when an action by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestive display (a specific image, a specific partitioned area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but the remaining time indication is hidden. Prior to hiding the time-suggestive display, regardless of how much of the display area of the specific image was left at the time of acceptance, the display area within the specific partition area is set to a specific value (predetermined value ), or only a specific partitioned area out of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). is possible.

In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the player's action is accepted (when the progress of the performance corresponding to the acceptance is started), it is executed before it is accepted. The "depiction in which the display area of the specific image is reduced" is continued without being terminated. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image having a display area of a specific value is displayed in the specific partitioned area, or only the specific partitioned area out of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing when the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is not significantly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. It will be expected that the tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize ``Is it in a state of being accepted?'' even after the is done. In addition, since the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) will be reduced significantly after the timing when the progress of the production according to the acceptance starts, It is possible to make it look as if it was just in time within the acceptance period), and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

[Configuration 17]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is prepared with a plurality of precursor effect displays as precursor effect displays suggesting that the acceptance period will occur. Regarding this point, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a specific precursor effect display among a plurality of precursor effect displays is performed, the reception period occurs for the model image display related to the reception object. It is displayed both within the precursor period before and within the acceptance period. The model image displayed during the sign period is different from the model image displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs. As a result, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the period before the reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 hides the display of the model image based on the fact that it is accepted within the acceptance period, but the model image is not displayed. It is possible to appear "a specific aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" until it is turned on. However, as will be described later, with regard to the "specific aspect of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize", when the model image display displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is hidden, the non-display I try not to appear until it is done.

According to such a configuration, during the precursor period (specific precursor effect display), the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize" that appears corresponding to the reception period does not appear, and the model image display is disabled. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the simulated image display is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) and is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know it. It becomes possible to make it difficult to cause a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended.

In addition, if a plurality of "modes that make it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" that can appear according to the reception are prepared, including the above-mentioned "specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display", In any of the aspects, it is desirable that the simulated image display that is displayed within the precursor period is not reappeared as it is hidden. However, if it is a mode different from any of the multiple modes prepared as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" according to the reception, it will not be displayed until the model image display is hidden within the precursor period. You may make it appear "the aspect which makes a model image display difficult to visually recognize". In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" exclusively for the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" appears during the precursor period , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the acceptance period has ended without the player's knowledge.

The "specific precursor effect display" according to configuration 17 may be the same as the "specific precursor effect display" according to configurations 6, 9, and 14, or may correspond to a different precursor effect display. may

[Configuration 18]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the first reception period can be generated as the reception period during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the second effect condition is satisfied. , a second acceptance period can be generated as an acceptance period during the execution period of the symbol variation. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first acceptance period can be continued even after the symbol variation that occurred during the first acceptance period is terminated and the next symbol variation is started. However, the second acceptance period does not continue until after the symbol variation that caused the second acceptance period is terminated, and is terminated before the symbol variation is terminated. It is a thing. Furthermore, the model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the action by the player is received during the first reception period, when the action is received during the second reception period Both when the action by the player is accepted within the period and when the action is accepted, the extinction presentation mode appears in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize based on the acceptance.

In other words, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the reception period has ended, while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display even after the reception has been made. , the first reception period and the second reception period.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the disappearance effect mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is when it is accepted during the first acceptance period and when it is accepted during the second acceptance period. It is to be implemented as a different aspect. In other words, in this case, based on the type of "disappearance effect mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see", it is possible to grasp whether or not the reception period will end within the pattern variation being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, the "first acceptance period and second acceptance period" according to the configuration 18 may be the same as the "first acceptance period and second acceptance period" according to the configurations 2, 8, and 12, or may be different. It may correspond to a period.

[Configuration 19]
In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) can occur, and the reception period can occur in both the first game state and the second game state. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, based on the acceptance, the "simulation image" is displayed while the model image display is displayed. A mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect mode)" can appear, and after that, the model image display is hidden.

That is, in this case, it is possible to have the effect that "even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended". , can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made within the acceptance period occurring in either the first game state or the second game state.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period among the plurality of reception periods is only in the first game state among the first game state and the second game state. Among the plurality of reception periods, the second reception period can be generated only in the second game state (jackpot game) among the first game state and the second game state. In this regard, the model image display related to the reception object is displayed both during the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first game state (when accepted in the first acceptance period), a specific "model image display" that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted in the second acceptance period) is visually recognized. A mode (disappearance production mode)" that makes it difficult to do so can appear.

According to such a configuration, without confirming the effect after reception, the first game can be performed only by confirming which mode has appeared as the "mode in which the model image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearing effect mode)". It becomes possible to grasp which state the player is in, the state or the second game state, and to improve the interest in the game.

It should be noted that even in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second acceptance period), "the model image display is difficult to visually recognize", which is different from the specific "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance effect mode)". A mode (disappearance presentation mode)" may appear.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a model image related to the reception object (such as a model image that imitates the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, the decline in the interest in the game until the performance after reception (performance after operation) is executed is suppressed. I try to suppress it. Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect and the high-expectation suppressed reception effect. . In addition, each of the production examples described above (FIGS. 144 to 195 and FIGS. 207 to 231) can also be realized by replacing the display mode of the exemplified model images with one of the integrated model images described below. This is desirable in terms of improving the amusement of the game.

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. is provided with a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in any one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) occurs, it suggests that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance is allowed. A reception permitting sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the sound output is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is possible to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of accepting acceptable state is the valid period that can occur in either the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception period). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the highly anticipated special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period) 232, and in the second-type reception acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (c)). ing. In the first type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), the "integrated model image display" in any of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, Figure 232 (a) ~ (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), "integrated model image" in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 19 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the production content that progresses when the reception is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as production after reception). ) are prepared for different reception periods (reception effects), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception effect) to a seventh reception period (reception effect) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

Here, the "conversation notice" as the production after reception suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern, etc.) depending on which conversation content appears among a plurality of conversation contents. 's "cut-in notice" suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern, etc.) depending on which cut-in image appears among multiple cut-in images, and the "movable body The "notice" suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the big-hit pattern, etc.) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

Each feature will be described for each reception period (reception effect) with reference to FIGS. 255-266. It should be noted that each acceptance period described above with reference to FIG. It may be implemented as any of the seventh reception periods.

FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination that the first condition is satisfied. 262 and 263 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and the "first fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the first variable pattern, the sound output of BGM playback according to the first variable pattern, etc.) is started ("The situation shown in FIG. 262 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “first variation pattern” itself. Become. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 262(a), for convenience of explanation, the first production display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-described "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation instead of at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings. The second performance display FE itself may or may not suggest the ratio of the appearance of the big winning symbols when the decorative symbols SZ are stopped in the variable performance.

That is, when a special result is obtained (when the first condition is satisfied) in the production determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs decoration as shown in FIG. 255(a). When the timing tF3 when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance of the symbol SZ arrives, the first reception period (effective period) is generated in which "acceptance regarding the performance after the first reception" is permitted. ("Situation shown in FIG. 262(d)"). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a reception period (effective period) in relation to the occurrence of such a first reception period. ) is about to occur, a simulated image that suggests the acceptance target (operation reception part, etc.), a gauge image that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period, and a simulated image display that makes it difficult to see. A related display (a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see), and a post-reception effect display suggesting the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to the reception are performed respectively. As described above, the model image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated model image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 before the occurrence of the first reception period arrives, the display screen (effect display device) is displayed as shown in FIGS. 1600), execution of the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is started as the precursor effect display. The "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Although the display is hidden when the timing tF3 arrives, the display may be hidden before the timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262(d), during the first reception period according to this example, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state in which the reception of actions by the player is permitted. It has become something that will never happen.

However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. When it arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first omen effect display ZEH1" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), “ At least a part of the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". As a result, during the period (timings tF2 to tF3) before the occurrence of the first acceptance period, the player is strongly interested in which object (operation receiving section) the action of the player is allowed. It is expected that forgetting to operate or erroneously operating after the occurrence of the first reception period will be less likely to occur.

In the period (timings tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first precursor effect display ZEH1” are displayed, the “integrated model image display IG” is less visible. It is more desirable to display the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" so that it tends to gradually improve toward the occurrence of the reception period, in order to improve the game interest. For example, it can be realized by gradually decreasing the display range of the "first omen effect display ZEH1" (the range overlapping with the integrated model image display IG), or by gradually increasing its transmittance. be.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 262(c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "integrated model image display IG" is , is displayed across the timing tF3 at which the first acceptance period occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when the application is accepted within the first acceptance period, or when the first acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. It should be noted that the first acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tF4 arrives when the action by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 255(b)).

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 255 and the production from FIG. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the player's action is accepted at timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255(a), the first acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player at timing tF3a, and the first acceptance period is terminated. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (first post-acceptance effect) is started.

It should be noted that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262(d) to "A1 (FIG. 263(e1)-(i1))" is relatively less expected as a post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period. 262(d) to "A2 (FIG. 263(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-effect.

However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. Accordingly, at timing tF3a, which is the point in time when the effect after the first reception is started), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. I'm trying

That is, the production after the first reception according to this embodiment includes the "production display after the first reception" using the production display device 1600 (first production device) and the second production device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable The "specific effect after the first reception" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the output sound after the first reception using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) that displays the integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display), the first effect as the effect after the first reception 1. The time at which the performance display after reception is started is delayed compared to other performance devices, and the visibility of the ``integrated model image display IG'' is maintained even after the reception is made. It has become.

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 263(e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time period during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after the reception is made. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the reception period. If the display continues in the same manner (the manners shown in FIGS. 263(e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "noticing the post-acceptance effect in the execution state is delayed".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. When a predetermined period of time elapses from timing tF3a (when timing tF3b arrives), the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first acceptance period The first aspect of the first disappearance-related display SK1) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “first elimination-related display SK1- 1” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first extinction related display SK1-1” is displayed has an “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continued to be displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period. Also, even after the first post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (timings tF3a to tF3b) Since the mode of the integrated simulated image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the first acceptance period, corresponding post-acceptance effects are shown in low-expected aspects (FIGS. 263(e1)-(i1)) and high-expected aspects (FIGS. 263(e2)-(i2)). Since the same aspect (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance-related display SK1 regardless of which of the above is executed, the effect after reception (the second effect device , third effect device) are started to be executed, the degree of expectation can be kept secret in the first effect device (effect display device 1600).

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. When the timing tf3c within the period in which the IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the first acceptance period. Execution of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" as the post-reception effect in . However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. g1), the first mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and "A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 263 (g2), the first reception A second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" are displayed, respectively, the "first reception after-reception display UG1 (first reception after-reception display UG1-1 or Execution display UG1-2) after the first acceptance is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the first acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The performance after reception (display of performance after first reception) can be started without much delay compared with other performance devices, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display after the first reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it is suggested that the first reception period has already ended. It is possible that the target of gaze is naturally shifted from the “integrated model image display IG” to the “post-first reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)”. It becomes expected (after timing tF3c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-1”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. ” is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, the “effect display UG1 after first reception (effect display UG1-1 after first reception or effect display UG1-2 after first reception) ” will be displayed.

In this regard, the “post-first reception effect display UG1” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UG1-2). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255(b), the ``effect display UG1 after the first reception'' is displayed after the ``integrated model image display IG'' and the ``first disappearance related display SK-1'' are hidden. will also run for a relatively long time.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 255) with the occurrence of the first acceptance period, and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tF3c) of the first post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tF3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a second effect device is prepared separately from the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the action by the player is performed within the first acceptance period. When it is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 255(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, the first post-reception production using the second production device (first post-reception specified effect) is started prior to the first post-reception effect (display of the effect after the first reception) using the first effect device.

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tF3a at which the reception is made in the first reception period only for a part of the effect after the first reception (display of the effect after the first reception). The effect itself after the first reception can be started without delay from the timing tF3a.

As such a second effect device, for example, it may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or it may be a movable object capable of effecting operation, , a production lamp capable of producing production light, or the like may be provided. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 263, it is assumed that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second production device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the first post-reception specific effect UGT1 (first post-reception specific effect) corresponding to the first reception period. As a specific effect UGT1-1 after the first reception, which is an aspect of the effect UGT1 with a low degree of expectation, prior to the effect after the first reception using the first effect device (effect display UG1-1 after the first reception) Execution is started. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UGT1 (first reception after the first reception) corresponding to the first reception period. As the first post-reception specific effect UGT1-2), which is a highly anticipated aspect of the post-specific effect UGT1, precedes the first post-reception effect (post-first reception effect display UG1-1) using the first effect device. and start running.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 262, apart from the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first acceptance period. The predictive effect (first specific predictive effect) is executed (FIGS. 262(b) to (d)). The first predictive effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) differs from the first predictive effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is executed even at the time of arrival, and is executed in a form that straddles the timing tF3.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further provided, and when the first reception period occurs, at the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255(d), It is assumed that the reception allowable sound is started to be output (corresponding to "a situation where ♪ is started to be output in Fig. 262(c)"). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the first reception period is audibly output across the timing tF3 (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 262(d)") at which the first reception period occurs. Thus, the action by the player can be accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 255(d), FIGS. 263(e1) to (g1), or FIGS. Even if an action is accepted by the player while the player is in the game, the acceptance acceptance sound is not terminated halfway, and is output only for a predetermined period of time. In other words, as will be described later, during the plurality of reception periods, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, an audible output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is generated based on the acceptance. is included in the acceptance period that is terminated prematurely. Therefore, when a mode of audible output of the acceptable acceptance sound appears as a result of acceptance while the acceptable acceptance tone is being audibly output within the first acceptance period, is it in a state of being accepted? It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not, and it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained.

However, in the first reception period, even if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated prematurely (the audible output state is terminated prematurely). However, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" outputted in Fig. 263 (e1) or (e2)) is started. It is a thing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255(d), the "acceptance acceptance sound" that is audibly output within the first acceptance period, and the audible sound that is the result of acceptance within the first acceptance period. Since both the "output sound after the first reception", which is the output sound, can be audibly output, it is possible to recognize whether it is within the reception period or the reception period has ended. It becomes possible to make it even more difficult to recognize.

Such an output sound after the first reception is similar to the "effect display UG1 after the first reception", as shown in FIG. -1" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time ("♪♪ is output in Fig. 263 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) equivalent to "situation"). In addition, regarding the output sound after the first reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262(d) to “A1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 255, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where the motion by the user is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the first reception period, the timing tF4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (when the first acceptance period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tF3a (first 263 (e3), similar to the production display device 1600 (first production device) at the time when the action is accepted by the player within the reception period of ), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the player's action is not accepted in time and the first acceptance period ends, the integrated model will be integrated within the first acceptance period after the end of the first acceptance period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. -2 (the second aspect of the first disappearance related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “first elimination-related display SK1- 2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first disappearance related display SK1-2” is displayed has the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the first acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made, the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to suggest that the first reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the first reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" that appears when the action by the player is not accepted within the first acceptance period is It is executed in a mode different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" that appears based on the acceptance of the action by the player within the period. As a result, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" appears, it can be suggested that the action by the player has not been accepted, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. .

After that, as shown in FIG. 263(g3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first extinction related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated model image display IG" is turned off. display. Then, after the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden in this way, the “first disappearing related display SK-2” is hidden as shown in FIG. 263(h3).

FIG. 256 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs. 264 and 265 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "second fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 264 (a) ), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "second variation pattern" itself. Become. In addition, in the example effects shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

However, in the effect related to the "second variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. The second acceptance period in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the second operation" is allowed when the timing tG3 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) arrives after the second predetermined time has passed since the effect is started. (effective period) is generated ("situation shown in FIG. 264(d)"). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, the second post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance.

In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a second reception period occurs, when the above-described first reception period occurs (Fig. 255) Similar to , related to this, a sign effect display that suggests that the reception period (effective period) will soon occur, a model image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), and the remaining time of the reception period Gauge image display that makes it difficult to see the model image display, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see), and post-reception production that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of big hit patterns that appear) according to the acceptance. Display is performed respectively. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the model image display is displayed as an "integrated model image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It may be displayed. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 before the occurrence of the second reception period arrives, the foreshadow effect is displayed as shown in FIGS. As a display, "second sign effect display ZEH2" is started to be executed. As for the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)", as in the example shown in FIG. When the timing tG2 before it occurs, it is displayed while the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is being displayed (Fig. 256(b), Fig. 264(c) )). As shown in FIG. 264(c), at least part of the area where the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area where the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” is displayed, In the case of the example shown in FIG. 262(c) (the precursor effect display corresponding to the first acceptance period), the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to see by the "second precursor effect display ZEH2". is similar to

In addition, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to span the timing tG3 (situation shown in FIG. 264(d)) at which the reception period corresponding to this (here, the second reception period) occurs. and when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), or when the second acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made 255 is the same as in the example shown in FIG. 255 (first reception period). It should be noted that the second reception period according to this example ends when the timing tG4 arrives when the action by the player is not received.

However, in the example (second acceptance period) shown in FIG. 256(b), the "second omen effect display ZEH2" corresponds to the example (first acceptance period) shown in FIG. 255(b). The mode (image display) is different from that of the "first premonition effect display ZEH1". The timing tG3 at which the reception of the information is permitted does not disappear when the timing tG3 arrives, but is displayed in a manner that straddles the timing tG3.

That is, in this case, during the second acceptance period, not only the "integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)" but also the "second omen Actions by the player can be accepted while the effect display ZEH2" is being displayed. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period has occurred, at least a part of the "integrated model image display IG" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "second precursor effect display ZEH2". It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension during the period.

Here, the "second omen effect display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 when the reception period (here, the second reception period) corresponding thereto ends, or the reception period It may be hidden at a predetermined timing within (here, the second acceptance period). In addition, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, regarding the indication of the precursor effect display (the second indication effect display ZEH2), within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), the "integrated model In order to make the area that overlaps the image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display) tend to gradually shrink, it is It is desirable to gradually improve the visibility of the image display IG' during the acceptance period. In addition, the area in which the second precursor effect display is displayed and at least part of the area in which the "integrated simulated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap each other during the entire period in which the second precursor effect display is displayed. For example, after the arrival of a predetermined timing within the reception period of the entire period, the second precursor effect display is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the area in which the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. You may do so.

Further, the second omen effect display ZEH2 according to this example is displayed when the reception is made within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), or when the reception period (here, the second reception period) is received. period), the display is hidden when the player's action is not accepted until a predetermined timing.

In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 256 and the production from FIG. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the player's action is accepted at timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256(a), the second acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player at timing tG3a, and the second acceptance period is terminated. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect) is started.

It should be noted that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264(d) to "B1 (FIG. 265(e1)-(i1))" has relatively low expectations as a post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period. 264(d) to "B2 ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 265)" corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-effect. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Then, in the example shown in FIG. 256 as well, at timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted (when the second post-acceptance effect is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated model image display IG but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is displayed at the time when the action by the player is accepted (the time at which the second post-receipt effect is started). ) at the timing tG3a, it is not hidden or made difficult to see.

That is, the effect after the second reception according to this embodiment includes the "effect display after the second reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or a movable display). It is realized as an effect in which at least the "specific effect after the second reception" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the output sound after the second reception using the third effect device (speaker) are combined. However, among these effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) that displays the integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display), the second effect as the effect after the second reception 2. The time at which the performance display after acceptance is started is delayed compared to other performance devices, so that even after the acceptance, the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second sign performance display" are displayed. It maintains the visibility of ZEH2.

According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first acceptance period described above, as shown in FIG. In which of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the simulated image display IG was displayed, and in which mode the precursor effect display (first precursor effect display ZEH1, second precursor effect display ZEH1, second precursor effect Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize whether or not it was displayed in the display ZEH2, etc., it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suitably suppressed.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to easily recognize in what manner the integrated model image display IG and the portent effect display ZEH were displayed during the acceptance period, It can be said that it is desirable to set "the time during which the integrated model image display IG and the omen effect display ZEH are displayed in an easily recognizable state" to be long. However, despite the fact that the acceptance has been made and the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG and the precursor production display ZEH are not displayed during the reception period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as when it was in, it will be difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is concern that it will be too late to notice

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 256(b) and FIG. 265(f1) or (f2), a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the action by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b arrives), the display related to the "second disappearance-related display SK2" different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". I have to.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second disappearance-related display SK2 ” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “second disappearance-related display SK2” is displayed is displayed with the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the area.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continued to be displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period. Further, even after the second post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the second disappearance-related display SK2 is displayed (timings tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second omen effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed while still being visually recognizable, and the integrated model image display IG is also made difficult to see only by the second omen effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained. It should be noted that when the reception is made after the second omen effect display ZEH2 is hidden during the second acceptance period, the second omen effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second extinction related display SK2 is displayed. Needless to say, the mode of the integrated model image display IG can be confirmed while maintaining good visibility.

Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second omen effect display (here, the second omen effect display ZEH2)" is displayed, and the "second disappearance-related display SK2" is displayed. At least part of the area where the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is made difficult to see, thereby suggesting that the post-reception effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is already being executed. is possible, and it is expected that the player's attention will naturally shift from the second precursor effect display ZEH2 to the post-acceptance effect (after timing tG3b). As a result, it is possible to continue displaying the second precursor effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-acceptance effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Also, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the sign effect display was displayed within the acceptance period. Further, even after the post-acceptance effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is started, until the predictive effect display becomes difficult to see (timings tG3a to tG3b), the predictive effect display is displayed. Since the aspect (here, the second precursor effect display ZEH2) can be confirmed while visually recognizing it well, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the second reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production, low-expected aspects (FIGS. 265(e1)-(i1)) and high-expected aspects (FIGS. 265(e2)- (i2)) appears, different forms (second disappearance-related displays SK2-1, SK2-2) appear as the second disappearance-related display SK2. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 265(f1) and (f2), the "effect display after second reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if this is the case, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1) and the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2- 2 or 2, it is possible to guess whether or not the "second post-acceptance effect display" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 256(b), FIG. When the timing tG3c within the period in which the state of being difficult to visually recognize has appeared, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second reception period. Execution of the "second reception post-effect display UG2" as a post-effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. g1), the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period. (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 265 (g2), the second reception A second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG", the "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and the "second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" Execution of the “second post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is started among the respective displays. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 continue to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the second acceptance period, the first effect device The post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display UG2) in (the effect display device 1600) can be started without much delay compared to other effect devices, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the game interest. be able to In addition, since the second reception effect display UG2 is started while the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see, the second reception period has already ended. while suggesting that the target of the player's gaze changes from "integrated model image display IG" or "second precursor effect display ZEH2" to "second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second After the reception, it is expected that the display will naturally shift to the effect display UG2-2)” (after timing tG3c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 256(b) and FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, among “integrated model image display IG”, “second omen effect display ZEH2”, and “second disappearance related display SK2”, “integrated model image display IG" and "second omen effect display ZEH2" are hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 255(b), FIG. , ``Second disappearance-related display SK2 (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)'' is hidden. 2nd post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is performed.

In this regard, the "effect display UG2 after the second reception" refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the effect display UG2-1 after the second reception or the second It is displayed in any of the post-acceptance display UG2-2). Therefore, even after the “integrated model image display IG”, the “second omen effect display ZEH2”, and the “second disappearance-related display SK2” are hidden, the “second post-acceptance effect display UG2” is not displayed. It will run for a relatively long time.

By the way, in the example of the effect corresponding to the first acceptance period described above (Figs. 262 and 263), even if the acceptance is made during the first acceptance period and the "effect display UG1 after the first acceptance" is executed, The background image is maintained without being switched before and after the "effect display UG1 after the first reception" is started. On the other hand, in the production examples (FIGS. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, when the acceptance is made during the second reception period and the "post-second reception production display UG2" is executed, The background image is switched before and after the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the conditions shown in FIGS. 265(e) and (f) (timings tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256) in which the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (the 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the “second post-reception effect display UG2” has not yet started.

In the example shown in FIG. 265, the background image is switched to the same background image for the appearance of the low-expectation aspect and the appearance of the high-expectation aspect. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Alternatively, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second acceptance period occurs, along with this, within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 256) Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tG3c) of the second post-acceptance effect (second post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the accepted timing tG3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, also in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. , the second after-reception effect (specific effect after the second reception) using the second effect device is started prior to the second after-reception effect (the effect display after the second reception) using the first effect device. I am trying to let

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tG3a at which the reception is made in the second reception period only for a part of the effect after the second reception (display of the effect after the second reception). The execution of the second post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the timing tG3a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, as described above. It may be provided as a production movable body, a production lamp capable of producing production light, or the like. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second post-reception specific effect UGT2 (second effect device) corresponding to the second reception period. As the second post-reception specific effect UGT2-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific effect UGT2, the second post-reception effect using the first effect device (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the second post-reception specific effect UGT2 ( As the second after-reception specific effect UGT2-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the second after-reception specific effect UGT2, the second after-reception effect using the first effect device (the second after-reception effect display UG2-2 ) is to be started before execution.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 264, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the second acceptance period, apart from the second omen effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). The predictive effect (second predictive specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 264(b) to (d)). The second predictive effect in the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) differs from the second predictive effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed so as to straddle the timing tG3.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the second acceptance period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tG2, the reception permission sound (corresponding to "♪" output in FIGS. 264(c) and (d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the second reception period is audibly output across the timing tG3 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIG. 264(d)") at which the second reception period occurs. Thus, the action by the player can be accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the second reception period, as reception acceptable sounds, long-term acceptable sounds that are audible for a relatively long time and short-term acceptable sounds that are audible for a relatively short time are used. are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 256(d), the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at timing tG3 when the second reception period occurs or after that.

Then, in the second acceptance period, when the action is accepted by the player while the long-time allowable sound and/or the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the action is accepted based on the acceptance. , the long-term permissible sound and/or the short-term permissible sound are terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle).

In the second acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound (long-time acceptance sound, short-time acceptance sound) is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, a second post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound (FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2)) is output based on this. ) to start audible output. That is, in this case, in the second acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, the presentation (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the acceptance period and the reception are performed. Conflict (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the second reception) performed in response is eliminated.

Such an output sound after the second reception is similar to the "effect display UG2 after the second reception", as shown in FIG. ” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in Fig. 265 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)” equivalent to ). In addition, regarding the output sound after the second reception, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264(d) to “B1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the second reception period, the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the reception allowable sounds, but these two allowable sounds may not necessarily be output. As in the reception period, only one acceptance acceptable sound may be output.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where the motion by the user is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the second acceptance period, the above timing tG4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this regard, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (when the second reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tG3a (second 265 (e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. In this example of effect, since the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at timing tG4, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after timing tG4.

According to such a configuration, even if the second reception period ends due to the player not being able to accept the action in time, after the end of the second reception period, the integrated simulation is performed within the second reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “second elimination-related display SK2- 1 or second extinction-related display SK2-2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “second extinction-related display SK2” is displayed is an “integrated model image display IG (model image display , Gauge image display)” overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the second acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made, the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the second reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the second reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second disappearance-related display SK2. If the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect progresses from FIG. 264(d) to ``B1 (FIG. This corresponds to the case (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, the case where the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second disappearance-related display SK2 when the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period means that the second acceptance period 264(d) to “B2 (FIG. 265(e2)-(i2))” (relatively expected It is equivalent to the case where high performance after reception is executed).

That is, in this case, even if the action by the player is not accepted during the second acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the second acceptance period ends. Only by confirming the mode as "second disappearance related display SK2" that appears in the second reception (second disappearance related display SK2-1, second disappearance related display SK2-2) Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 265(g3), first, out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second extinction related display SK2", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. do. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "second extinction related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 265(h3).

FIG. 257 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the third condition is satisfied as a result of determination and the third reception period (third reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the third variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the third variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "third variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the third predetermined time after the start of the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tH3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the third operation" is allowed. The third acceptance period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the third acceptance period, the third post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the third acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the third reception effect (in the first effect device 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) is the "effect display after the third reception", the "specific effect after the third reception" in the second effect device, and the "output sound after the third reception" in the third effect device). , the effects after the first reception described above ("effect display after first reception" in the first effect device, "specific effects after the first reception" in the second effect device, "first reception post-output sound”), but the rest of the configuration is basically the same.

For example, timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the display screen (effect display device 1600) starts executing the "first predictive effect display ZEH1" as the predictive effect display. It should be noted that the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. Allowable timing) tH3 is hidden. However, it is the same as in the case of the above-described first reception period in that it may be hidden before timing tH3. In any case, during the first accepting period according to this example as well, the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where acceptance of actions by the player is allowed.

Timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262(c), the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is being displayed. is displayed, and at least part of the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed. It should be noted that the configuration of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first omen effect display ZEH1" displayed in relation to the third reception period, and other examples related to them are shown in FIG. 255 and FIG. 262 and 263, so the description is omitted here.

Timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. will occur. Regarding the fact that the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when the acceptance is made within the third acceptance period, or when the third acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made. It is the same. It should be noted that the third acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tH4 arrives when the action by the player is not accepted.

Timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player, and the post-acceptance effect (the third acceptance effect) corresponding to the third acceptance period production) is started. As the third after-acceptance effect, at least a case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and a case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed are prepared. The contents of the production (the contents of the production display after reception, the specific production after reception, and the output sound after reception) are different from the above-mentioned first production after reception, but the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the multiple modes it is executed. Points and the like are the same as in the case of the above-described effect after the first reception. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". In addition, at timing tH3a when the player's action is accepted (when the third post-acceptance effect is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden. The point that the simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see is also the same as in the case of the first after-acceptance effect.

Timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first extinction-related display SK1-1 (the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (the first display corresponding to both the first reception period and the third 1 disappearance related display SK1) is started. The configuration of the "first disappearance-related display SK1" displayed in relation to the third reception period and other examples related to this are as described above with reference to FIGS. 255 and 263. Therefore, we omit it here.

According to such a configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) for "the period from when the first precursor effect display ZEH1 is displayed until when the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed", the first It is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception period and the third reception period has occurred (whether it has occurred), thereby the second production device and the third production device To improve amusement in a game by urging the player to have an interest in the game, and making the player strongly interested in which mode (the first reception performance display, the third reception performance display) will appear as the performance display after the reception. will be able to

It should be noted that even in the third reception period, the first disappearance-related display SK1 may be either a mode with a low degree of expectation or a mode with a high degree of expectation as the corresponding post-reception effect. Since the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears, even in a situation where the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is started to be executed, the first production device In (effect display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be kept secret. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and different disappearance-related displays may appear according to expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the "3rd post-receipt effect display" is displayed as the post-reception effect in the third effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the third reception period. (The type of the advance notice effect is different from the effect display after the first reception)” is started to be executed. A plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the "display of the effect after the third reception", and a mode with a low expectation and a mode with a high expectation are executed as the third after-reception effect. As described above, different modes appear as the "effect display after the third reception" depending on whether the display is performed or not.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are being displayed, the "third effect display after acceptance" is started. As a result, it is possible to create a critical situation in which it is possible to recognize which of the first acceptance period and the third acceptance period has occurred, and whether the player can recognize it. It is expected that the "simulated image display IG" will naturally shift to the "post-reception effect display" (after timing tH3c).

Also in this example, when the display related to the "third effect display after reception" is started in this way, regardless of the mode, while the "third effect display after reception" is being displayed, first, Of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearing related display SK1-1", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first extinction related display SK-1" is hidden. Effect display after the third reception” is performed.

In this regard, as described above, the "third effect display after reception" is also displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception of the action by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257(b), the "effect display after reception of the third reception" also continues after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden. , will run for a relatively long time.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third acceptance period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 257) and is limited. Various displays are performed within the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception effect (third post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tH3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted during the third accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 257(b) and (c), the third The production after the third reception (specific production after the third reception) using the second production device is started prior to the production after the third reception (the production display after the third reception) using the first production device. I have to. As for the third post-acceptance specific effect, the content of the effect is different from that of the first post-acceptance specific effect, but basically it is carried out in the same manner as the first post-acceptance specific effect.

For example, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as the third post-acceptance specific performance, and a low-expectation mode and a high-expectation mode are executed as the third post-acceptance performance. Depending on the case, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different aspect appears as the specific effect after the third reception. Also, as shown in FIGS. 257(b) and (c), the specific effect after the third reception using the second effect device is changed to the effect display after the third reception using the first effect device. It is the same as in the case of the above-described specific effect after the first reception, in that the execution is started in advance.

Also, when the third reception period occurs, as in the case of the first reception period, the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (the second effect device) displays an omen effect (common correspondence between the first reception period and the third reception period). It is desirable that the first omen specific effect to be executed) is executed. Also, in this case, the specific omen effect (first specific omen effect) on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first omen effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). It is executed even at the timing tH3 when the acceptance period occurs, and it is more desirable to execute the timing tH3 astride the timing tH3.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the third acceptance period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tH2, the output of the acceptable acceptance sound is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the third acceptance period is audibly output across the timing tH3 at which the third acceptance period occurs, and the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output. Among them, actions by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that this acceptance acceptance sound be the same as the acceptance acceptance sound that is output when the first acceptance period occurs.

However, in the third reception period, if an action by the player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance. I am trying to terminate it.

In addition, in the third reception period, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptance sound terminated halfway, but also, when the acceptance is made, , audible output of a third post-reception output sound different from the first post-reception output sound and the second post-reception output sound is started. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. Conflict (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the third reception) performed in response is eliminated.

As shown in FIG. 257(d), the output sound after the third acceptance is the same as the "effect display after the third acceptance", as shown in FIG. 1” is hidden, it will continue to be executed for a relatively long time. Also, as the third after-acceptance output sound, a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared, and as the third after-acceptance effect, a mode with a low expectation level is executed and a mode with a high expectation level is executed. It is desirable to output a different output sound (pattern) depending on the situation.

According to such a configuration, although it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the acceptance period until the timing tH3c arrives, it is difficult to recognize the occurrence of the reception period just by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600). By confirming the third effect device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the acceptance period at the time when the earlier timing tH3a has arrived. As a result, the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) can be urged to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 257, even if the action by the player is not accepted within the third acceptance period, the action by the player is basically accepted within the first acceptance period. It is the same as if it had not been done.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the third acceptance period, the above timing tH4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (when the third reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tH3a (the third When the action is accepted by the player within the reception period of ), similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden. Also, the simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (first accepting period and third The second mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1), which corresponds in common with the reception period of , is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “first elimination-related display SK1- 2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “first disappearance related display SK1-2” is displayed has the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, when the action by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type occurred during the acceptance period, so the player is strongly urged to operate. be able to In the third acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, when the action by the player is not accepted, the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears in a different mode depending on the degree of expectation. No, a mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) that appears when an acceptance is made appears.

After that, out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "first extinction related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearing related display SK-2" is hidden.

FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs. 266 and 267 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the fourth variable pattern, the sound output of BGM playback according to the fourth variable pattern, etc.) is started (situation shown in FIG. 266 (a)) , the performance (notice performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the foretell performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected ``fourth variation pattern'' itself within the execution period of the variable performance. In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 266(a), for convenience of explanation, the first production display TE ( Here, it is assumed that the above-described "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed in the middle of the fluctuation instead of at the start of the fluctuation, or may be displayed at different timings.

However, in the effect related to the "fourth variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 258, even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination), the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started. When the timing tI3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) after the fourth predetermined time has passed after the arrival of the "fourth operation The fourth acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding post-effect" is permitted is generated (situation shown in FIG. 266(d)). Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fourth acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the fourth reception effect (in the first effect device) based on the acceptance of the action by the player 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) are shown in FIG. 255 (or FIGS. 262 and 263). , the effects after the first reception described above ("effect display after first reception" in the first effect device, "specific effects after the first reception" in the second effect device, "first reception post-output sound”). In addition, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to this embodiment, a fourth disappearance-related display SK1 different from the first disappearance-related display SK1 is used as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". It is different from the case of the first reception period in that the related display SK4 appears, but the rest of the configuration is basically the same.

Below, the effects performed in relation to the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) will be described. I will omit it. In other words, for matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 258(b) and FIG. ” is executed.

Timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266(c), the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is being displayed. is displayed, and at least part of the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" is displayed.

Timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. will occur.

Timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. That is, the production progresses from the example shown in FIG. 258 or from FIG. In this example, it is assumed that the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258(a), the fourth acceptance period ends based on the acceptance of the action by the player at timing tI3a, and the fourth acceptance period is terminated. Execution of the post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance effect) is started.

It should be noted that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266(d) to "C1 (FIG. 267(e1)-(i1))" has relatively low expectations as a post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. 266(d) to "C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))" corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second mode, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-effect. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations as the post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. (i1))) may appear. In this case, even if the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period, multiple modes are not prepared according to the degree of expectation, and the same mode is always used when there is an acceptance. Aspects will be made to appear.

It should be noted that during the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 258(b), FIG. At the timing tI3a, which is the point in time when the effect after reception is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. .

Timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when the request is accepted in the fourth acceptance period, the display of the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, which is different from the first disappearance-related display SK1, is started (timing tI3b).

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth elimination-related display SK4 is displayed, and at least part of the area where the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" is displayed is displayed with the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tI3b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continued to be displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the fourth reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production, low-expected aspects (FIGS. 267(e1)-(i1)) and high-expected aspects (FIGS. 267(e2)- (i2)) appears, different forms (fourth disappearance-related displays SK4-1, SK4-2) appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 267(f1) and (f2), the "fourth effect display after reception" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even if this is the case, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is the first mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1). 2) or 2), it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "fourth post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Timing tI3c shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, while the display related to the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) is appearing, it is possible for the player to perform the operation within the fourth acceptance period. Execution of the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 266(d) to “C1 (FIGS. g1), the first mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period. (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production), as shown in FIG. 267 (g2), the fourth reception A second mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the period.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4 (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2)" are displayed, respectively, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1" The execution of the 4th post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-reception performance (fourth post-reception performance display UG4) can be started without much delay as compared with other performance devices, and the decline in game interest can be suppressed. In addition, since the effect display UG4 after the fourth reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, the player is advised that the fourth reception period has already ended. automatically shifts the gaze destination from "integrated model image display IG" to "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)". is expected (after timing tI3c).

Then, even in the effect related to the fourth reception period, the display related to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)" starts. Then, as shown in FIG. 258(b), FIG. While the effect display UG4-2)” is being displayed, first, out of the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second disappearance related display SK2”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. . Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 258(b), FIG. 4 Disappearance Related Display SK4-1 or 4th Disappearance Related Display SK4-2)” is hidden, and under the condition that visibility is good by this, “4th Reception Post Effect Display UG4 (4th Reception After-effect display UG4-1 or fourth reception-after-effect display UG4-2)” is performed.

According to such a configuration, although it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until timing tI3b arrives, the second effect device (effect display device 1600) is difficult to recognize. By confirming the third effect device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the acceptance period at the time when the earlier timing tI3a has arrived. As a result, the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) can be urged to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

Also, even if the player only looks at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 different from the above-described first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed as "integrated". This will appear as a mode in which the simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, by confirming such a mode, it is possible to recognize at an early stage which type of reception period occurred before the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is performed. become able to.

In this regard, the “fourth post-receipt effect display UG4” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UG4-2). Therefore, the "fourth post-acceptance effect display UG4" will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" are hidden. .

In this way, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even if the fourth acceptance period occurs, along with this, within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 258) Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, even when the action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 258(b) and (c), the second effect The fourth post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance specific effect) using the device is started prior to the fourth post-acceptance effect (fourth post-acceptance effect display) using the first effect device. there is

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tI3a at which the reception is received in the fourth reception period only for a part of the fourth reception production (fourth reception production display). The fourth post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the timing tI3a.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "single sword" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the fourth reception specific effect UGT4 (fourth effect) corresponding to the fourth reception period. As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-1), which is a low-expected aspect of the post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect using the first effect device (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1) Execution is started in advance. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in e2), the mode in which "two swords" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the above-mentioned fourth reception specific effect UGT4 ( As the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the fourth post-reception specific effect UGT4, the fourth post-reception effect using the first effect device (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2 ) is to be started before execution.

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, in addition to the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the fourth reception period. The predictive effect (fourth predictive specific effect) is executed (FIGS. 266(b) to (d)). Unlike the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the fourth predictive effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) differs from the first predictive effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in that the timing tI3 at which the first acceptance period occurs is It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed in a form that straddles the timing tI3.

In this embodiment, the predictive effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as a different effect (fourth specific predictive effect) from the first specific predictive effect shown in FIG. You may make it perform as the same production|presentation as the 1st precursor specific production|presentation shown. In this case, even when the second effect device is confirmed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. At tI2, the acceptance acceptance sound (corresponding to "♪" outputted in FIGS. 266(b) to (d)) is started to be output. In other words, the acceptable acceptance sound corresponding to the fourth acceptance period is audibly output across the timing tI3 (corresponding to the "situation shown in FIG. 266(d)") at which the fourth acceptance period occurs. Thus, the action by the player can be accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output.

In this regard, in the fourth reception period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway (audibly) based on the acceptance. (end of the output state in the middle).

In addition, in the fourth reception period, when an action by the player is accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptance sound terminated halfway, but also, when the acceptance is made, Based on, the audible output of the fourth post-reception output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in Fig. 267 (e1) or (e2) etc.) different from the first post-reception output sound is started. It has become. That is, in this case, in the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the presentation (display presentation) performed by the first presentation device, the effect (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the reception are performed. Conflict (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the fourth reception) performed in response is eliminated.

As shown in FIG. 258(d), similar to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4", such a fourth post-reception output sound is "integrated model image display IG" and "fourth disappearance-related display SK4". ” is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time (“Situation where ♪♪ is output in Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1)” equivalent to ). In addition, regarding the fourth post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266(d) to “C1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

Regarding the acceptable acceptance sound output corresponding to the fourth acceptance period, in order to make it difficult to recognize which of the first acceptance period and the fourth acceptance period occurs, It is desirable that the sound be the same as the acceptable acceptance sound that is output correspondingly. However, they do not necessarily have to be the same.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 258, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where the motion by the user is not accepted.

That is, in this case, after the occurrence of the fourth acceptance period, the above timing tI4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (when the fourth reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tI3a (fourth 267(e3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the fourth acceptance period ends due to the player not being able to accept the action in time, the integrated model will be integrated within the fourth acceptance period after the end of the fourth acceptance period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

That is, in the first rendering device (rendering display device 1600) according to this example, the “fourth elimination-related display SK4- 1 or second extinction-related display SK4-2” is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the “fourth extinction-related display SK4” is displayed is an “integrated model image display IG (model image display , Gauge image display)” overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made, the integrated model image display IG will continue to be displayed. By making it difficult to see, it is possible to suggest that the fourth reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1" is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. If the action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the effect progresses from FIG. 266(d) to ``C1 (FIG. This corresponds to the case (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, the case where the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 when the action by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period means that the fourth acceptance period 266(d) to “C2 (FIG. 267(e2)-(i2))” (relatively expected It is equivalent to the case where high performance after reception is executed).

That is, in this case, even if the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the fourth acceptance period ends. Only by confirming the mode as the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" that appears in the display (fourth disappearance-related display SK4-1, fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2), the effect after the fourth reception is in a mode with a low degree of expectation. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game has been executed or whether it has been executed with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 267(g3), first, out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "fourth extinction related display SK4", the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. do. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "fourth extinction related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 267(h3).

In the fourth acceptance period, as in the first acceptance period, the corresponding post-acceptance effects are low-expected aspects (Fig. 267 (e1) to (i1)) and high-expected aspects (Fig. 267). 267(e2) to (i2)), the same specific mode may appear as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the action by the player is not accepted during the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the above-described first acceptance period, the same specific mode appears as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. Become.

By the way, as described above, in both the first reception period and the fourth reception period, the first effect display TE ( Here, the above-described "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed respectively.

In this regard, when the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 262(b) and (c), the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are not obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". Further, after the first reception period has ended, as shown in FIGS. mode) and the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (a mode when not accepted) appear, but the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance-related displays. SK1 (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 or first disappearance-related display SK1-2) does not make it difficult to see.

On the other hand, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. The TE and the second effect display FE are not obscured by the "first precursor effect display ZEH1". Further, after the fourth acceptance period has ended, as shown in FIGS. -1 or the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is not obscured by the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

According to such a configuration, even if the type of the disappearance-related display SK corresponds to which type of the reception period is not stored, the second effect is produced when the disappearance-related display SK is displayed. Only by confirming whether or not the display FE is made difficult to see, it becomes possible to guess which type has occurred as the acceptance period. Further, regarding the first effect display TE, regardless of whether or not the disappearance-related display SK makes the second effect display FE difficult to see, the disappearance-related display SK does not make the first effect display TE difficult to see. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in interest in games will be suppressed.

On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the "second premonition effect display ZEH2" is displayed and then the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed. Among the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the first effect display TE can be displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed. .

That is, in this case, only by confirming whether or not the "predictive effect display" or the "receiving period" has occurred while the second effect display FE is being displayed, the type of the receiving period can be guessed (at least the first effect display). Therefore, the second effect display FE itself does not suggest the degree of expectation for the changing pattern effect. Even so, it is possible to provide an interesting effect using the second effect display FE.

Even when the second reception period occurs, the first effect display TE is difficult to see due to the precursor effect display and disappearance-related display, as in the case of the first reception period and the fourth reception period. It is designed not to be tampered with.

FIG. 259 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and as a result of fluctuation pattern determination, "5th fluctuation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as the effect depiction according to the fifth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the fifth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "fifth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "fifth variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the fifth predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ When the elapsed timing tJ3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the fifth operation" is allowed. The fifth acceptance period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the action by the player is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the fifth acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the fifth reception effect (in the first effect device "Production display after the 5th reception", "Specific production after the 5th reception" in the second production device, "Output sound after the 5th reception" in the 3rd production device) is after each reception corresponding to the other reception period It is different from the production ("post-acceptance display" in the first production device, "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Also, the "fifth precursor effect display" corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is different from each precursor effect display corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the method of displaying the "fifth post-receipt effect display" and "fifth omen effect display" themselves (the start and end times of the display, and how other images are displayed until they are hidden) 255, 256, etc.) are described in the display effect performed in relation to the first reception period and the display effect performed in relation to the second reception period (Fig. 255, Fig. 256, 262 to 265), and other configurations are basically the same.

Below, an effect performed in relation to the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect) or the second reception period (second reception effect), it may be mentioned that it is the same, but further is omitted here. In other words, for matters that are not specifically mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect) or the second reception period (second reception effect). Examples are equally applicable.

For example, timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 arrives, the display screen (effect display device 1600) starts executing the "fifth predictive effect display" as the predictive effect display.

In this regard, the “fifth portent effect display” is of a type that is displayed across timing tJ3 at which the fifth acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. 259(b). That is, although the "fifth omen effect display" differs from the above-described "second omen effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second acceptance period in terms of effect content (display image), the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image display until it is hidden, etc., "second omen effect display ZEH2" will be described with reference to FIGS. Display is performed in the same manner as described above. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

Timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "fifth omen effect display" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "model image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "fifth precursor effect display" is displayed.

Timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth acceptance period occurs while the "fifth omen effect display" and the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" are being displayed. It will happen.

Timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance effect (fifth post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the fifth acceptance period is started to be executed. It will happen. It should be noted that the fifth post-acceptance effect is similar to the first post-acceptance effect (Fig. 263) and the second post-acceptance effect (Fig. 265). In some cases, the second aspect, which is relatively expected, is executed.

Timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and timing tG3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears.

In this regard, when the acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1", which corresponds in common with the first acceptance period, is considered as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". display is started. 255 and 263 for the "first disappearance-related display SK1" or "the start and end times of display, and how it relates to other image display until it is hidden". as described with reference to Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, unlike the case of the first reception period, regarding the ``mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see'' corresponding to the fifth reception period, the effect after the fifth reception is ``relatively expected. A different mode may appear when the "first mode with a low degree of expectation" is executed and when the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed.

For example, when the "relatively high-expectation second mode" is executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" is set to "first disappearance-related display SK1 (Here, the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (Fig. 263), which is the first aspect, is displayed. On the other hand, as the effect after the fifth acceptance, the effect of "relatively low expectations" is displayed. mode" is executed, if a mode different from the "first disappearance-related display SK1-1" appears as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", the first acceptance When the ``first disappearance-related display SK1-1'' is displayed corresponding to the period, the player is made aware of the possibility that the ``second mode with relatively high expectations'' will be executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In this case, when the "second aspect with relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the fifth after-acceptance effect, the "second aspect with relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the first after-acceptance effect. It is desirable to set so that the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is higher than the time. The percentage may be 100%.

Further, when the "relatively low-expectation first mode" is executed as the fifth post-acceptance effect, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" is set to "first disappearance-related display SK1- 1", the different mode may be "the first disappearance-related display SK1-2, which is the second form of the first disappearance-related display SK1". That is, in this case, when the first extinction-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appeared as a result of being accepted in the fifth reception period, or whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appeared It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 has appeared as a result of not being in time for the reception, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "relatively high expectation second aspect" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. When the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the effect after the fifth reception is "relatively expected". In order to more appropriately make the user aware of the possibility that the "lower degree second mode" will be executed, even as the precursor effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period, instead of the "fifth precursor effect display", It is desirable to execute the "first precursor effect display ZEH1" similar to the first reception period.

In addition, when the application is accepted during the fifth acceptance period, as in the cases of the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The effect after the fifth reception (specific effect after the fifth reception) using the effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610) is changed to the effect after the fifth reception (the effect display after the fifth reception) using the first effect device Start execution in advance. It is also the same that the specific effect after the fifth reception is executed so that a different aspect appears according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (fifth specific precursor effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period. In addition, the specific predictive effect using the second effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first specific predictive effect shown in FIG. 262, instead of the fifth specific predictive effect. good too.

Further, when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 259(d), this acceptance acceptance sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 259(d), similarly to the acceptance acceptance sound that is audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs, the "long-time acceptance sound" and the "short-time acceptance sound" are audibly output as acceptance acceptance sounds. 256, 264 and Figure 256, Figure 264 and Figure H.265, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "acceptable sound". Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, with respect to the reception acceptable sound output when the fifth reception period occurs, only one reception acceptable sound is output, just like the reception acceptable sound output when the third reception period and the fourth reception period occur. is output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as being terminated halfway.

In any case, in the fifth acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated in the middle, and the acceptance is made. Sometimes this will initiate the audible output of a fifth post-reception tone that is different from the post-reception tone that is output corresponding to the other reception periods. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, the effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed within the reception period and the effect (fifth reception post-output sound) does not conflict with (overlap).

It should be noted that the fifth after-reception output sound is similar to the first after-reception output sound, the second after-reception output sound, and the like. audible output as an output sound different from that in the case of execution in the highly anticipated second mode.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 259, if the action by the player is not accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the action by the player is accepted after the fifth acceptance period occurs. The timing tJ4 arrives without delay.

In this regard, even in the fifth acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tJ4 (the time when the fifth acceptance period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action) , the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, the display of the fifth disappearance related display SK5 is started as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

As for the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" when no acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, it is provisionally accepted during the fifth acceptance period in the same way as the second acceptance period. Aspects that would have appeared if there had been (a different aspect depending on the degree of expectation) will appear. However, in the same way as in the first acceptance period, aspects that cannot appear when accepted in the fifth acceptance period may be made to appear.

FIG. 260 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "6th variation pattern" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the sixth variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM reproduction according to the sixth variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "sixth variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "sixth variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the sixth predetermined time after the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tK3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the sixth operation" is allowed. The sixth acceptance period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the player's action is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the sixth acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) according to this embodiment, the contents executed as the effect after the sixth reception (the first effect device "Effect display after 6th reception", "specific effect after 6th reception" in the second effect device, "output sound after 6th reception" in the 3rd effect device) After each reception corresponding to other reception periods It is different from the production ("post-acceptance display" in the first production device, "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the sixth acceptance period (sixth acceptance effect), the model image display (here So, I'm trying to hide the integrated model image display). However, the method of displaying the "6th reception after reception" and "simulated image display" (the start and end time of the display, and how it will be displayed with other images until it is hidden) 255, 262, and 263) are the same as those described in the display effects (FIGS. 255, 262, and 263) performed in relation to the first reception period, and other configurations are also It is basically the same as any of the methods described above.

Below, an effect performed in relation to the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the same configuration as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect), the fact that it is the same may be mentioned, but further explanation is omitted here. In other words, for matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK1 arrives, the display screen (effect display device 1600) starts executing the "first predictive effect display" as the predictive effect display.

Timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK2 arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first precursor effect display" is being displayed. At least a part of the area where the "model image display IG" is displayed overlaps the area where the "first precursor effect display" is displayed.

Timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth acceptance period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tK3a, the sixth acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance effect (sixth post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the sixth acceptance period starts to be executed. It will happen. It should be noted that the effect after the sixth reception is also similar to the effect after the first reception (Fig. 263), etc., when the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. may be executed.

However, as shown in FIG. 260, the processing related to the effects related to the sixth acceptance period does not have anything corresponding to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Display, gauge image display)" is hidden until it becomes difficult to visually recognize it. This is the same (timing tF3b does not exist) regardless of which of the "mode with low expectations" and the "mode with high expectations" appears as the effect after the sixth acceptance. The same applies to the case where the sixth reception period ends without the action by the player being accepted during the sixth reception period (timing tF3b does not exist).

According to such a configuration, in other acceptance periods, when the acceptance period ends, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is visually recognized until it is hidden. In spite of the appearance of a mode that makes it difficult to do so, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is hidden during the sixth acceptance period even if the acceptance period ends. Since the mode (disappearance-related display SK) that makes it difficult to visually recognize it will not appear until the sixth acceptance period ends (the situation where the action by the player has been accepted and deleted) ) can be made difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

In addition, when the acceptance is made during the sixth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 6th post-acceptance effect (specific effect after 6th reception) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started prior to the 6th post-acceptance effect (sixth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. . It is also the same that the specific effect after the sixth reception is executed so that a different aspect appears according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute a precursor effect (sixth precursor specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, as for the specific predictive effect using the second effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610), the same effect as the first specific predictive effect shown in FIG. 262 is executed instead of the sixth specific predictive effect. good too.

Further, when the sixth reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 260(d), this acceptance acceptance sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. 258, 266 and FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "allowable reception sound" corresponding to the fourth reception period. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, with respect to the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the sixth acceptance period occurs, two acceptable acceptance sounds are output in the same manner as the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the second acceptance period occurs. It may be output as being terminated halfway when it is terminated.

In any case, in the sixth reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output, the reception acceptance sound is not only terminated halfway, but also the acceptance is made. Sometimes this will initiate the audible output of a sixth post-reception tone that is different from the post-reception tone output corresponding to the other reception periods. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed within the reception period and an effect (sixth reception post-output sound) does not conflict with (overlap).

It should be noted that the sixth post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound. audible output as an output sound different from that in the case of execution in the highly anticipated second mode.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 260, if the action by the player is not accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the action by the player will be accepted after the sixth acceptance period occurs. The timing tK4 arrives without delay.

In this regard, even in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tK4 (when the sixth reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action) , the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. However, as described above, during the sixth acceptance period, after the timing tK4 arrives without the action by the player being accepted, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" does not appear. .

FIG. 261 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in the specific game state (for example, the normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "seventh variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the seventh variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the seventh variable pattern, etc.) is started, and the notice is given within the execution period of the variable effect. An effect (announcement effect) according to the result of effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "seventh variation pattern" itself.

However, in the effect related to the "seventh variation pattern", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the seventh predetermined time after the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ When the elapsed timing tL3 (may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state), "acceptance regarding the effect after the seventh operation" is allowed. The seventh reception period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the action by the player is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the seventh acceptance period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, the content executed as the seventh reception effect (in the first effect device "Production display after 7th reception", "Specific production after 7th reception" in the second production device, "Output sound after 7th reception" in the 3rd production device) are after each reception corresponding to other reception periods It is different from the production ("post-acceptance display" in the first production device, "post-reception specific production" in the second production device, and "post-reception output sound" in the third production device). Also, the "seventh precursor effect display" corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) is different from each precursor effect display corresponding to the other reception periods. In addition, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, even if "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", each disappearance-related display corresponding to the other reception period , a different "seventh disappearance-related display" appears. However, the method of displaying the "seventh post-acceptance display", "seventh omen effect display", and "seventh disappearance-related display" How it relates to other image display during the period, etc.) is the same as that described in any of the display effects performed in relation to each acceptance period described above, and other configurations are basically the same.

Below, an effect performed in relation to the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the same configuration as in other reception periods (other reception effects), the fact that they are the same will be mentioned, but further explanation will be omitted here. In addition, for matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect will be performed as described in the first reception period (first reception effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modifications.

For example, timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the precursor effect display is started on the display screen (the effect display device 1600).

However, as described above, during the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect), the "seventh precursor effect display" that does not correspond to other reception periods is displayed as the precursor effect display corresponding thereto. there is As shown in FIG. 261(b), the "seventh omen effect display" is of a type that is not displayed when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this. . That is, although the "seventh omen effect display" differs from the above-described "first omen effect display ZEH1" displayed corresponding to the first acceptance period in terms of effect content (display image), the "display start time and Regarding the end time and how it relates to other image displays until it is hidden, etc., it is the same as described for the "first omen effect display ZEH1" with reference to FIGS. 256 and 262. Display is performed by the method. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

Timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "seventh omen effect display" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the model image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area where the "seventh omen effect display" is displayed.

Timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed.

Timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the player's action is accepted at timing tL3a, the seventh acceptance period ends, and the post-acceptance effect (seventh post-acceptance effect) corresponding to the seventh acceptance period is started to be executed. It will happen. It should be noted that, similarly to the effects after the first acceptance (Fig. 263), the seventh after-acceptance effect is performed in the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation and in the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation. may be executed.

Timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3b arrives, "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when the acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, the "seventh disappearance-related display" that does not correspond to other acceptance periods is considered as "a form in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". is started (timing tL3b).

Here, the "seventh disappearance-related display" differs from the above-mentioned "first disappearance-related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period in terms of the effect content (display image), but the "display start time 255, FIG. 256, FIG. Display SK1” is performed by the method described above. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable. In addition, in both "when the seventh reception effect is executed as a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation" and "when it is executed as a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation", the "seventh elimination-related "Display" is the same as in the case of the first acceptance period in that it is displayed in the same manner.

However, unlike the first reception period, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see (seventh disappearance-related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period is different from the first reception period. , a different mode may appear depending on whether the "first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation" is executed or the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed.

Timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, while the display related to the "seventh disappearance-related display" (a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) is appearing, the player can Execution of the "seventh post-reception effect display" as the post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action is started.

In addition, when the reception is received during the seventh reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 7th post-acceptance effect (specific effect after 7th reception) using the sub liquid crystal 1610) is started prior to the 7th post-acceptance effect (display of 7th post-acceptance effect) using the first effect device. . It is also the same that the specific effect after the seventh reception is executed so that a different mode appears according to the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the precursor effect (seventh precursor specific effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period. In addition, regarding the omen specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610), the same effect as the first omen specific effect shown in FIG. 262 is executed instead of the seventh omen specific effect. good too.

In addition, when the seventh reception period occurs, the reception permission sound starts to be output at timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 261(d), this acceptance acceptance sound is of a type that is terminated halfway when acceptance is made. 258, 266 and FIG. 266 and FIG. 267, the audible output is performed in the same manner as described for the "allowable reception sound" corresponding to the fourth reception period. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

However, with respect to the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the seventh acceptance period occurs, two acceptable acceptance sounds are output in the same manner as the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the second acceptance period occurs. It may be output as being terminated halfway when it is terminated.

In any case, during the seventh acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the acceptance acceptance sound is being audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptance sound terminated halfway, but the acceptance is made. Occasionally, this will initiate the audible output of a seventh post-acceptance tone that is different from the post-acceptance tone output corresponding to the other acceptance periods. That is, in this case, in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptance acceptance sound) performed within the reception period and an effect (seventh reception post-output sound) does not conflict with (overlap).

It should be noted that the seventh post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound and the fourth post-acceptance output sound. audible output as an output sound different from that in the case of execution in the highly anticipated second mode.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 261, if the action by the player is not accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the action by the player is accepted after the seventh acceptance period occurs. The timing tL4 arrives without delay.

In this regard, even in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tL4 (the time when the seventh reception period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action) , the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, the display of the seventh disappearance-related display is started as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

Regarding the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" when no acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, as in the first acceptance period, Aspects that cannot sometimes appear appear. However, in the same manner as in the second acceptance period, a mode (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) that would have appeared if it had been accepted during the seventh acceptance period may appear.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, in which the first to seventh reception periods are provided, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

That is, first, regardless of which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, the model image displayed using a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) It is designed to be able to be displayed even after the effect progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player (after the change in the effect is started based on the acceptance). As a result, even after the effect has progressed based on the acceptance, the game can determine in which mode (for example, FIGS. 232(a) to 232(d)) the model image display was displayed within the acceptance period. It will be possible for people to understand

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the contents of the production that progresses when the reception is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as production after reception, notice production (expectation suggestive production) ) types) have different acceptance periods (1st acceptance period to 7th acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (production judgment). It is supposed to be.

In this regard, during the first reception period to the seventh reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after reception (the effect display after the first reception to the seventh reception) is performed based on the acceptance. Effect display after acceptance) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Among these, in the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed based on the acceptance. In addition, "a form in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is further made to appear. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display has appeared even after the acceptance is made, and until the model image display is hidden By reducing the visibility of the image display by making it difficult to see the image display (disappearance-related display), the target of the player's gaze naturally shifts from the "simulated image display" to the "post-acceptance display". It will be expected that

However, since the display of the model image is originally intended to be displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, if the model image is displayed even after the acceptance has been made, It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the effect display has already been displayed after reception, and there is a concern that the interest in the game may decrease. In this regard, when the acceptance is made during any one of the first acceptance period to the fifth acceptance period and the seventh acceptance period, the model image display is "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display )” is hidden (invisible) while the display is displayed, while the post-acceptance effect display is displayed while the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” is displayed. I'm trying to That is, in this case, after the action is accepted by the player, while the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" appears, the display before acceptance (model image display) changes to the display after acceptance The transition of the display effect to (effect display after acceptance) is realized.

It should be noted that both the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" and the "post-acceptance effect display" are common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” is, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (f1), FIG. It appears so as to make the simulated image display difficult to see when the display is in a displayed state. On the other hand, the "effect display after reception" is a situation in which a model image display is displayed, as shown in FIG. 263 (g1), FIG. 265 (g1), FIG. Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it appears so as not to make the display of the simulated image difficult to see. Further, in each of the examples described above, the "effect display after acceptance" is started to be displayed when the model image display is being displayed. The display does not necessarily start when the display is in the displayed state, and the display may start after the model image display is hidden.

In addition, regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", as a method of "appearing in a manner that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize", at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed Secondly, in addition to the method of preferentially displaying (displaying on the front layer) an image display different from the model image display, a part of the model image display is missing due to the image display different from the model image display ( It is possible to adopt a method of realizing by displaying an image (moving image) made to be visible (invisibly). It is also possible to adopt a method of changing the numerical values (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the model image display itself instead of the image display different from the model image display. On the other hand, regarding the "post-reception effect display", as a method of "appearing so that the model image display is not difficult to see", the "post-reception effect display" is added to at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed. However, in addition to the method of displaying the "post-reception effect display" (displayed in the rear layer) in a way that the model image display is prioritized, at least while the model image display is displayed It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-acceptance effect display" only in an area excluding the area where the model image display is displayed.

In addition, as a mode in which the model image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display), a method of displaying an image display different from the model image display in at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed, It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing a numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself.

In addition, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to a situation in which the ``post-acceptance display'' is not yet displayed before the ``post-acceptance display'' is displayed. It appears below. In other words, in this case, under the condition that the "post-acceptance effect display" is not yet displayed, the model image display becomes difficult to see due to the above-mentioned "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)". Therefore, even though the model image display is visible, the ``post-reception effect display'' can appear soon, and the player's gaze is changed from the ``difficult to see model image display''. You will be able to encourage them to prepare in advance.

In addition, when accepted during the first acceptance period to the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc., the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is the "post-acceptance effect display ” is displayed, and is hidden while the “post-reception effect display” is being displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, after the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is hidden, the " Since it is possible to provide the effect related to "effect display after reception", it is possible to improve the interest in the game by changing the effect during the display period.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, FIGS. As shown in 267(g1) and (h1), for the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)", not only the area where the model image display is displayed but also the model image display is displayed even in areas where is not displayed. In this area, the "post-reception effect display" is displayed in at least a part of it. At least part of the "display" is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so as to be difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' appears as one that makes not only the model image display but also the ``post-reception effect display'' difficult to see. Since it will be a thing, it is expected to improve both the performance until the model image display is hidden and the performance when the display of "effect display after reception" starts Become.

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. ” is not displayed, apart from the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, a specific effect after reception that does not make the model image display difficult to see (using the second effect device Effect after reception) can appear in a mode according to the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the specific production after reception (production after reception using the second production device) Appears in a situation where the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared before the appearance of the "appearance in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". I'm trying In addition, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) will continue until after the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)” ends. there is

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the precursor effect display is executed across the timings at which the model image display is displayed. Also, in some of the above-described production examples, as shown in FIGS. The "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" makes both the model image display and the precursor effect display difficult to see (such as the above-described priority display).

However, on the other hand, at least at the time when the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' appears, neither the model image display nor the precursor effect display overlaps with the whole of them. , at least in part to ensure unobstructed visibility. That is, by gradually deteriorating the visibility of the model image display and the omen effect display (increasing the overlapping area), the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to recognize (disappearance-related display)" is executed. there is

Also, in each of the production examples described above regarding the first reception period to the seventh reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. becomes. In this case, the dynamic display of the model image display is not terminated and continues even though "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has appeared after the acceptance. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the first reception period to the fifth reception period and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is only the model image display. In addition, the gauge image indicating the remaining time until the end of the reception period is also made difficult to see. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

Further, in the above-described effect example, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, after the first acceptance based on the acceptance The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and apart from the first post-acceptance effect display UG1, a mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) in which the model image display is difficult to see can appear. Further, when an action by the player is accepted within a second acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, a second post-acceptance effect display UG1 different from the first post-acceptance effect display UG1 is displayed based on the acceptance. The post-reception effect display UG2 can be displayed, and apart from the second post-reception effect display UG2, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second Disappearance related display SK2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the model image can be displayed without confirming which of the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception effect display. Only by confirming what kind of mode (first disappearance-related display SK1, second disappearance-related display SK2) is the form that becomes difficult to visually recognize, the type of the post-acceptance effect display can be guessed.

Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the acceptance is made. Based on this, it is possible to display a third post-reception effect display that differs from both the "first post-reception effect display UG1" and the "second post-reception effect display UG2". Separately, as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, the mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the above-described first reception period can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance-related display SK1 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third post-acceptance effect displays will appear, as a mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize. However, as a mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to guess that the second post-acceptance effect display will appear when the second disappearance-related display SK2 appears.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the "disappearance related display" is displayed (prioritized display) in an area including at least a part of the area where the simulated image display is displayed. It was decided to realize as However, it is also possible to implement an effect using an effect device (such as a movable body) located in front of the display screen at a position overlapping at least part of the model image display when viewed from the front.

In addition, even if the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) appears as the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to see", if the type of reception period is different, the pattern variation will be a big hit symbol. It is desirable that the rate (expectation) at which the is stopped is different.

In addition, in the above-described production example, although the sign effect display is the same (the first sign effect display), when the "first disappearance-related display SK1" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (the first reception period, third reception period), and when a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period), or when the mode does not appear (sixth reception period ).

In addition, in the above-described production examples, the indications of the precursor effect display (the first precursor effect display and the fourth precursor effect display) are different, but the same aspect (the first extinction-related display SK1 ) appears (first acceptance period, fifth acceptance period).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of reception period until it is grasped which type is executed as the performance after reception, and the game interest is improved. be able to

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first rendering device, there are a state in which the model image display is relatively easy to see and a state in which the model image display is relatively difficult to see.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect (post-acceptance specific effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, it is possible to determine which mode has appeared as the model image display. It is possible to confirm. In addition, by making the model image display relatively difficult to see during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, It is expected to prompt the player to naturally shift the player's gaze target to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the post-acceptance production using the second production device (post-reception specific production) is continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before the reception, and the visibility of the model image display is The execution is started so as not to affect the More specifically, the model image display is displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the after-acceptance effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is It is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, nor an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front.

In addition, in the example of effect described above, the display of the post-acceptance effect is started after the appearance timing of "the mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". ” may be displayed at the appearance timing.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' is realized as an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the ``area where the model image display is displayed''. I decided to However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the simulated image can be displayed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations. Further, according to the above-described production examples, even after acceptance, the display mode including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. is maintained and continued. Also, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display was displayed during the acceptance period.

However, in this case, when it is in the period immediately after acceptance, the post-acceptance production must be performed under such conditions (the display of the model image is maintained). That is, the range of effects is narrow, and only limited effects (effects after acceptance using only the effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, if time passes and a ``mode that makes the model image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' appears, a post-reception production will be performed under the condition that ``the visibility of the model image display may be deteriorated.'' Therefore, it becomes possible to execute the "effect display after reception in the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing step by step the two post-operation productions having different properties (the specific production after reception in the second production device, and the production display after reception in the first production device), the mode of the model image display even after acceptance. can be easily confirmed, and the role of post-operation production can also be suitably exhibited.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, when the second precursor effect display is displayed as the precursor effect display, if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" ” appears the second extinction related display SK1 (FIG. 265). Further, when the seventh omen effect display is displayed as the omen effect display, if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the seventh disappearance-related display appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It's like On the other hand, if the "first precursor effect display" different from the above "second precursor effect display" or the above-described "seventh precursor effect display" is displayed as the precursor effect display, the corresponding "first precursor effect display" is displayed within the reception period corresponding to this. When the acceptance is made, the first disappearance-related display appears (first acceptance period, third acceptance period), and the fourth disappearance-related display appears ( 4th acceptance period).

That is, in this case, when the second omen effect display or the seventh omen effect display is displayed as the omen effect display, at that time, it is recognized what kind of mode will appear as "the mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". You will be able to

Moreover, in each of the aforementioned production examples, the "first precursor effect display" different from the specific mode (here, the "second precursor effect display" or the "seventh precursor effect display") is used as the precursor effect display. is displayed, even if it is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, there is a case where "a mode in which the display of the model image becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself does not appear (6th acceptance period). there is

According to such a configuration, the precursor effect display is different from the specific aspect (here, the above-mentioned "second precursor effect display" or the above-described "seventh precursor effect display") (here, the first precursor effect display). If it is executed, whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself appears within the period from the time when the acceptance is made until the model image display is turned off. is unknown, so the production performance is improved from the time it is accepted until the model image display is hidden, and the tension can be maintained appropriately. become able to.

It should be noted that each of the production examples described above may be implemented by transforming it into the following configuration, or the following configuration (acceptance period) may be further provided as another acceptance period (another sign production display). good too. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from when the player's action is accepted until the model image display is hidden during the acceptance period, "the model image display becomes difficult to see." "mode" can appear. In this regard, in this modified example, when a specific aspect (for example, the second precursor effect display, the seventh precursor effect display, or another precursor effect display not described above) is displayed as the precursor effect display, Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself is prevented from appearing. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" does not appear until the model image display is hidden. It becomes possible to recognize that the simulated image display is not difficult to visually recognize in relation to "the aspect in which the display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

In this case, also in this modification, when the indication of the precursor effect is executed with the "first indication effect display" and is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period. When the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears (first reception period, third reception period, and fourth reception period), and the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" "This itself does not appear (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the portent effect display differs from a specific mode (for example, the second portent effect display, the seventh portent effect display, or another portent effect display not described above) (here, , first precursor effect display), it becomes unclear whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" will appear. The effect is improved until the image display is turned off, and the tension can be preferably maintained.

As for the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration applicable to the above-described configuration before deformation.

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when a specific mode (here, "second predictive effect display") is displayed as the predictive effect display, the action by the player is performed within the reception period corresponding to this. Even if the acceptance is not accepted, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is made to appear in the same mode as when the acceptance was provisionally made.

On the other hand, when a mode (here, "first portent effect display") different from the specific mode (here, "second portent effect display") is displayed as the portent effect display, the corresponding mode is displayed. a case in which a different aspect appears as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" between the case where the player's action is accepted and the case where the acceptance is not made within the acceptance period (first acceptance period, etc.); Even if the action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize'' appears in the same mode as when the acceptance was temporarily made. There is a case (fourth acceptance period, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by using the effect (predictive effect display) executed before the acceptance period occurs, the effect after the end of the acceptance period or the effect when the acceptance is not received. etc., can be increased.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, a specific mode (here, the second disappearance-related display, the fourth disappearance-related display, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc.) appears as the "mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". In the possible reception period, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway, but a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first disappearance-related display) as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" can appear, there are cases where the audible output state of the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway and cases where the audible output state of the acceptance allowable sound is not terminated midway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output state of the acceptable reception sound when the reception is accepted, a situation may arise in which it is easy to guess what kind of aspect will appear as "the aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since situations that are difficult to guess appear, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, the reception acceptable sound that can be used as such judgment material is terminated at a timing (timing within the reception period) before the timing at which the reception period ends. Since it is audibly output as sound, is it possible to accept the acceptable sound while it is in the audible output state, or is it accepted after the audible output state of the acceptable acceptable sound is completed? You will be able to play by selecting what you want to do.

It should be noted that, in each of the production examples described above, during the accepting period during which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner (eg, the second precursor effect display), a plurality of patterns (eg, FIGS. 232(a) to 232(a) to (d)) can be displayed, and during the acceptance period during which the precursor effect display is executed in a manner different from the specific aspect (for example, the first precursor effect display), the model image It is desirable to have a mode that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three modes shown in FIGS. 232(b) to (d) are not displayed, and only FIG. 232(a) is displayed). .

Further, in each of the examples of effects described above, a plurality of types are prepared as an indication display effect suggesting that a reception period in which an action by the player is to be received will soon occur in a reception period of a specific type. Of the plurality of types of precursor effect displays, specific precursor effect displays (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display) can be executed across timings at which the reception period corresponding thereto occurs. , the action by the player can be accepted while the specific premonition effect display is being displayed.

That is, in this case, since the action by the player can be accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, the type (mode) of the precursor effect display can be changed. A decline in amusement in a game caused by forgetting to confirm can be suppressed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when an action by a player is accepted while a specific precursor effect display is being displayed, an effect is started to be executed after the acceptance in response to the acceptance. Even when the performance is started, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden but displayed.

That is, in this case, the action by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is being displayed as the precursor effect display, and furthermore, the effect is started to be executed after the acceptance according to the acceptance. As a result, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game caused by forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the precursor effect display.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, among the post-reception productions, the production after reception using the second production device (specific production after reception) is a specific precursor production display (second precursor production display, fifth It is assumed that this is performed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the precursor effect display).

Further, in each of the production examples described above, among the productions after reception, the production after reception using the first production device (production display after reception) itself is a specific precursor production display (second precursor production). display, and the fifth omen effect display) are to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility (specific omen effect display is given priority over the post-reception effect display (front side display on the layer), etc. ).

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, during the acceptance period in which the precursor effect display is executed in a specific manner (for example, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display), while the precursor effect display is displayed However, when the action by the player is not accepted, the sign effect display can be hidden before the end of the corresponding acceptance period. ing. That is, in this case, the game can be played by selecting whether to start the production after acceptance with the indication of the precursor effect displayed, or to start the production after reception with the indication of the precursor effect hidden. become.

However, the execution state of a specific precursor effect display may not necessarily end within the reception period, and the execution state will not end within the reception period and will continue to be displayed until the reception period ends. It can be a thing. In this case, the specific omen effect display is displayed (prioritized display) using at least a part of the area where the model image display is displayed until the timing in the middle of the reception period corresponding to it. In a period after the timing, it is desirable to display only an area different from the area where the simulated image display is displayed.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, when the reception period occurs, a reception acceptance sound is made audible, suggesting that reception is permitted or that reception will be permitted (soon). processing is enabled. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from forgetting to perform the acceptance action.

256 to 259 and FIG. 261 among the examples of effects described above, the action by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is audible (output state) during the acceptance period. , the "aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" before the above-mentioned "appearance in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" still appears. In the non-audible state, the execution of processing for making the above-mentioned acceptable acceptance sound inaudible is started.

In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the acceptance period has already expired. can be preferably suggested to the player. This makes it difficult for inconvenience to occur even if the timing of the appearance of the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is delayed after acceptance, so that the model image display is displayed in a visually pleasing manner. be able to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, even if the player's action is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is being made audible, the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated halfway, and the acceptance acceptable sound is made audible. is being continued, a reception period (first reception period, etc.) for displaying the disappearance effect display is further prepared. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the reception has been accepted or whether the reception has not yet been made, and the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

In this regard, a reception period (FIGS. 256, 258, and 261) in which the reception permission sound is rendered inaudible when an action by the player is received while the reception permission sound is made audible, In the acceptance period (Fig. 255) in which even if an action by a player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is made audible, the acceptance acceptable sound is not made inaudible, the "simulation" that occurs corresponding to these Since the type of "image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" is different, it is possible to guess the progress of the production after that by checking the output status of the acceptable acceptance sound. Become.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, a plurality of types are prepared as acceptable acceptance sounds. In this respect, it is desirable to output the same sound as the reception acceptance sound in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of these reception periods has occurred.

On the other hand, the reception acceptable sound that is audible corresponding to the first reception period is the reception acceptance sound that is audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. It is audibly output as a sound different from the allowable sound. According to such a configuration, when the reception allowable sound is started to be output, by confirming the sound, it is possible to narrow down the candidates as to which type is occurring as the reception period to some extent. Further, when the acceptance is made while the acceptance acceptable sound is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by confirming whether the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway. It becomes possible to provide an interesting performance using.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode (here, the second precursor effect display, the fifth precursor effect display, and the seventh precursor effect display), the reception allowable sound corresponding to this is executed. is being output, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway. When the acceptance is made while the reception acceptance sound corresponding to the is being output, the reception acceptance sound is terminated in the middle (the third reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period) and in the middle There is a case where it is not finished (first acceptance period). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptable acceptance sound.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, there is a reception period in which two sounds (a long-time allowable sound and a short-time allowable sound) are output as the acceptable acceptance sound, and an acceptance period in which only one sound is output as the acceptable acceptance sound. . During the reception period, two sounds (long-term acceptable sound and short-term acceptable sound) are output as acceptance acceptable sounds. In the reception period in which only one sound is output as , there are cases where the reception is terminated in the middle when the acceptance is made while the reception allowable sound is audible, and there are cases where the reception is not terminated in the middle. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to provide an interesting performance using the acceptable acceptance sound.

Regarding the acceptance period in which two sounds with different sound data (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output as acceptance acceptable sounds, if acceptance is made while acceptable acceptance sounds are being output, two Only one of the reception acceptable sounds (long-time acceptable sound and short-time acceptable sound) may be terminated in the middle, and the other may continue without being terminated in the middle.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, the same mode appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" when the acceptance is made and when the acceptance is not made within the acceptance period. Reception period (2nd reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and when the reception is made during the reception period and when the reception is not made " Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which a different form appears as a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (disappearance-related display), It becomes possible to improve the performance when it is not done.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, when the acceptance is made during a specific acceptance period (first acceptance period, third acceptance period, etc.), "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see" , It is realized as a disappearance-related display different from the model image display, but if the acceptance is not made, the model image display itself is changed (the numerical value related to the display characteristics (transparency It is desirable to realize this by changing the rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether the acceptance has been made or the acceptance has not been made when the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. become able to.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of executing symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period occurs and symbol variations (variation patterns) in which the reception period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the display screen (effect display device 1600 ), the first effect display TE (here, equivalent to the above-described “timer effect”), which has no relation to the reception period, and the second effect display FE can be displayed. It's becoming Then, as shown in FIG. 263, when the action by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period, while the model image display is being displayed, "the model image display is The mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance-related display SK1)" appears, but the "mode that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance-related display SK1)" appears even in symbol variations that do not occur during the acceptance period. The visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that can be displayed is not affected (the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are given priority, or the first effect display TE and the disappearance-related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

That is, in this case, the disappearing effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image displays (the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE) that are not related to the acceptance period. Therefore, the game can be progressed without adversely affecting performance that is not directly related to the acceptance period.

However, if the action by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” appears, but the “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)” does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE. (It is not difficult to see), but it is displayed so as to affect the visibility of the second effect display FE (make it difficult to see).

According to such a configuration, even though the image display is not directly related to the acceptance period, the visibility may be affected when "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears depending on the type of image display. Since there are cases where the visibility is not affected, whether or not it is necessary to check whether the image display that is not directly related to the acceptance period should be confirmed when the player performs an action. It will be possible to provide performance about whether.

However, in this case, the first effect display TE is displayed as an image (suggestion) related to (expectation) of the symbol variation (suggestion), and the second effect display FE is displayed as the symbol Displaying as a display irrelevant to (not suggesting) the hit or drop (expectation) of the variation will reduce the interest in the game when the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected. It can be said that it is desirable to avoid

Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the second receiving period can be generated while the first effect display TE is being displayed, but it can be generated while the second effect display FE is being displayed. It does not occur, and occurs only when the second effect display FE is not displayed. That is, the second effect display FE can be displayed only at a relatively early stage after the start of the pattern variation, and is hidden after that, so that the effect or decoration at the beginning of the variation can be displayed. It is used to enhance In this regard, by making the second reception period possible only when the pattern variation is in a relatively late stage after the start of the pattern variation, this It will be possible to create such relationships.

As shown in FIG. 267, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance related display SK4, it is displayed again in a state that is easy to be visually recognized. . That is, in this case, it will be hidden when a predetermined timing comes after that. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of the model image display, it does not appear difficult to see.

The first effect display TE displays a predetermined effect result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation. The disappearance-related display is hidden before a predetermined timing arrives.

As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed includes at least part of the area where the second effect display FE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode with a higher priority for display than. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set for the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, so that the second effect display FE can be visually recognized through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, although it is difficult to see. can be

As shown in FIG. 267, the area where the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed includes at least part of the area where the first effect display TE is displayed. It is displayed in a mode with a lower priority for display than. At this time, it is desirable to prevent the fourth disappearance related display SK4 behind the first effect display TE from becoming visible through the first effect display TE.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 263, the first disappearance related display SK1 is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It is a thing.

In the case of the first disappearing effect display SK1 which does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the reception acceptance sound is continued without being terminated in the middle, and the fourth disappearing effect display which affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the acceptable acceptance sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it is possible to enhance the performance using the acceptable acceptance sound.

Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and both of them are dynamically displayed so as to be continued even in the situation where any disappearing effect display is displayed. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, while the model image display is being displayed, it is possible to make the "appearance in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". A plurality of modes are to be prepared as "mode (disappearance-related display)".

That is, in this case, since one of a plurality of modes appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)", it is intended to improve the interest in the game when the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. will be expected.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, when the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (fourth disappearance-related display SK4)" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period appears (Fig. 267), the fourth Disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the second effect display FE. )” appears (FIG. 263), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is executed so as to make only the model image display difficult to see between the model image display and the second effect display FE. there is

According to such a configuration, it is possible to create a performance as to which of the "first disappearance-related display SK1" and the "fourth disappearance-related display SK4" appears as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". As a result, it is expected that the interest in gaming will be improved.

In this case, the "simulated image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the first acceptance period and the "simulated image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed during the fourth acceptance period are , should be displayed in the same manner.

The model image display is hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance-related display appears, and the disappearance-related display ends. It is desirable to hide the display at a predetermined timing (before the symbol variation stops) after that.

The fourth disappearance-related display SK4 may not be an image, but may be an effect that is performed in front of the model image display and the second effect display FE in front view. However, it is desirable that the first extinction-related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

In each of the effect examples described above, the second acceptance period can occur even when the second effect display FE is in the non-display state. A special mode (second disappearance-related display SK2) that appears only during the acceptance period is prepared. In such a second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 265, when a special mode appears (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) and when it does not appear (second disappearance related display SK2-1). It is desirable to increase the rate of stopping at symbols). The percentage may be 100%. Also, in this case, it is desirable to execute a special mode precursor performance (second precursor performance display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second performance display FE is in the display state during the second acceptance period.

In each of the production examples described above, in the first reception period, the first mode (post-first reception production display UG1-1) is executed as the first reception production display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e1) (i1)), and when the second mode (post-first reception effect display UG1-2), which is more expected than the first mode, is executed as the effect display UG1 after the first reception (Fig. 263 (e2) ~ (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1) appears as the mode in which the simulated image display becomes difficult to visually recognize.

On the other hand, in the second acceptance period, the second mode (effect display after second acceptance), which has a higher expectation than the first mode (effect display UG2-1 after second acceptance), is used as the effect display UG2 after the second acceptance. UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", but the first mode as the effect display UG after the second acceptance. When (the second post-receipt effect display UG2-1) is executed, the specific mode does not appear as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and a mode different from the specific mode (the second disappearance-related display SK2- 2) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation for the effect display after reception simply by confirming "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Since there are cases where it is not possible to guess the degree, it is expected that the performance of such "a mode in which the display of the simulated image becomes difficult to visually recognize" will improve the enjoyment of the game. .

It should be noted that, as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", a "specific mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" that can occur corresponding to the second reception period. , cannot appear as a "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first acceptance period. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to guess the type of reception period based on the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

However, it is also possible to make it possible for the same mode to appear in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period as the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize".

As shown in FIG. 263, during the first acceptance period, if the acceptance is not made, a mode that cannot appear when the acceptance is made (the first disappearance-related display SK-2) was decided to appear. However, if the application is not accepted during the first acceptance period, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" itself may be prevented from appearing.

In the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations (percentages of stopping the jackpot symbols) can be selectively audibly output as acceptance acceptable sounds, and in the first acceptance period, It is desirable to allow only one aspect of acceptable sound to be audibly output. Further, in this case, any of the reception acceptable sounds (a plurality of modes) that can be audibly output in correspondence with the second reception period is different from the reception acceptance sound that is audibly output in correspondence with the first reception period. It is desirable to prepare

In each of the production examples described above, each of the first reception period to the seventh reception period is generated with a different variation pattern. It is also possible to include reception periods that are in a relationship that can occur sequentially within the pattern. That is, in this case, among the first to seventh acceptance periods, at least some of the acceptance periods can occur in a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

For example, regarding the acceptance period (second acceptance period, fourth acceptance period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, the "model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)” after the reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) that does not change according to the degree of expectation, occurs within the same symbol variation It is desirable to make it possible.

Further, regarding the acceptance period (the second acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.) in which the acceptance can be made while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the acceptance can be made while the precursor effect display is being displayed. It is desirable that the reception period (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.) occurs within the same symbol variation.

During the reception period, when the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' changes according to the level of expectation, the ``mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)'' It is possible to selectively output a plurality of acceptable acceptance sounds including a specific acceptance acceptable sound that cannot be audibly output during the unchanging acceptance period, and when the specific acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the "simulated image display is difficult to see. It is desirable that a highly anticipated mode appears as a mode (disappearance-related display).

In addition, in the acceptance period (second acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.) in which the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, The precursor effect display is executable, but a special advance notice effect is executable at a stage before the execution of the precursor effect display, and when the special advance notice effect is executed, the above-mentioned It is desirable to ensure that "a form in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)" is always executed in a highly expected form when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period.

During the reception period, when the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" changes according to the degree of expectation, a big hit is obtained as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display)". A form (for example, second disappearance-related display SK2-2, etc.) that can only appear when the player is on the screen may be prepared. In addition, it is also possible to prepare a mode (for example, second disappearance-related display SK2-1, etc.) that cannot appear when a big win is obtained.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, it is possible to display a reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) at least within the reception period in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. It is possible to output a reception-related effect sound (reception acceptance sound, etc.) at least within the reception period. Further, when an action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance effect can be output based on the acceptance, and the reception-related effect display is performed during the acceptance period. When an action by the player is accepted while a (model image display, gauge image, etc.) is being displayed, the reception-related effect display (model image display, gauge image, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. ) is hidden. Similarly, when the action by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound, etc.) is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related effect is generated based on the acceptance. Sounds (acceptable sounds, etc.) may be made inaudible.

In such a configuration, based on the acceptance of the action by the player within the acceptance period, the post-acceptance output sound related to the post-acceptance production is audibly output, and the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image display, etc.) etc.) is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is set to an inaudible state (acceptance acceptable sound, etc.), so that the reception state can be easily recognized.

In this respect, in each of the production examples described above, the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) is ended at the time when the production after reception is started in response to the reception. However, reception-related production sounds (acceptable reception sounds, etc.) may end when the reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started, and may be rendered inaudible. I'm trying to be.

According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) displayed during the reception period is displayed until after the execution of the post-reception effect is started. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related effect sound (such as reception acceptance sound) that is audible (output) during the reception period shall be made to be in an audible state at the time when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. becomes. As a result, even after the execution of the post-reception production has started, it is possible to confirm the form of the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) that was displayed during the reception period, and the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptable tone, etc.) is rendered inaudible, preferably indicating that the acceptance period has already expired.

As described above, the reception-related effect display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) is executed as a effect display suggesting the rate (expectation) of a big win. In this case, the reception-related production sound (acceptable reception sound) also differs depending on the degree of expectation (mode as a reception-related production display) suggested by the reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.) It is desirable to output

However, in each of the production examples described above, in the first reception period, the reception-related production sound (acceptance acceptable sound) is continued without ending even when the output sound starts to be executed after reception. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the user is in an accepted situation, and the tension can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above, during the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as reception-related production display (simulated image display, gauge image, etc.), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as a production display that suggests the proportion (expectation) that is. Also, during the first reception period, only one aspect of the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) appears. It is possible to suitably improve amusement in a game.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, a plurality of modes including a specific mode are prepared as the precursor effect display. An effect display (eg, a second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) can be displayed, and an audible output of a reception-related effect sound (such as a reception acceptance sound) can be initiated. Then, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) and reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) can be executed across the timing at which the reception period occurs. Actions by the player can be accepted while the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed and the reception-related effect sound (reception allowable sound) is in an audible state (output). ing. In this regard, if the action by the player is accepted while the specific mode of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is being displayed within the acceptance period, to hide the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256). In addition, if the player's action is accepted while the reception-related effect sound (reception permission sound) is audible during the reception period, the reception-related effect sound (reception permission sound) is generated based on the acceptance. sound) is made inaudible.

In the above configuration, based on the fact that the player's action is accepted within the acceptance period, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden, Since the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is set to an inaudible state, a specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: 256) and reception-related performance sound are being executed respectively, even if the player's motion is accepted, the acceptance state can be easily recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 256 and the like, the specific aspect of the precursor effect display (for example, the second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) is a post-acceptance effect corresponding to acceptance within the corresponding acceptance period. is displayed without being terminated at the time the is started to run. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound) is terminated and rendered inaudible at the time when the post-reception output sound corresponding to the reception is started.

According to such a configuration, the specific aspect of the predictive effect display (for example, the second predictive effect display: FIG. 256) that is displayed before the reception period occurs is executed after the effect is started after the reception. On the other hand, the above-mentioned reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptable sound), which is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, is audible at the time when the output sound is started after reception. It will be made so that it will no longer be. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-acceptance effect is started, it is possible to confirm the form of the precursor effect display that is displayed before the reception period occurs, and at the same time, the reception-related effect that is output before the reception period occurs. By making the sound (acceptance acceptable tone) inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance period has already ended.

The specific aspect of the sign effect display (second sign effect display ZEH2) is displayed as a different display image according to the degree of expectation, and is executed as a performance display that suggests the ratio of the big win (expectation degree). It is desirable to ensure that In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is also output in a different manner according to the degree of expectation suggested by the specific mode of the portent effect display (mode as the specific mode of the portent effect display). is desirable.

However, in each of the production examples described above, during the acceptance period in which the first indication effect display is executed, the first indication effect display can be executed only in one mode, and the percentage of big wins (expected It is designed not to be executed as a production display suggesting the degree).

In addition, during the reception period (second reception period, fifth reception period, etc.) in which multiple acceptance sounds (long-term allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) are output at the same time, the reception allowable sound is output and after the reception. Although the output sounds do not overlap, in the reception period in which only one acceptable acceptance sound is output, when the output of the acceptable acceptance sound and the post-acceptance effect sound overlap (first acceptance period), the output of the acceptable acceptance sound and a case where the post-acceptance output sound does not overlap (third acceptance period, fourth acceptance period, etc.).

The long-term allowable sound is, for example, a sound output as an effect sound (corresponding to the second allowable sound shown in FIG. 213, etc.), and the short-term allowable sound is, for example, output as a message sound. Sound (corresponding to the first allowable sound shown in FIG. 213, etc.). The case where only one reception acceptable sound is output means, for example, the case where no message sound is output and only an effect sound is output (corresponding to the case where only the first acceptable sound is output in FIG. 212, etc.). That is. It should be noted that the short permissible sound may be "sound output as sound effect" and the long permissible sound may be "sound output as message sound".

When one of the two acceptance acceptable sounds is output as a "message sound", a message image ("press It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as ". In this case, the period during which the message sound is output does not overlap with the period during which the post-acceptance effect (such as the post-acceptance output sound) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period overlaps with the period during which the performance after acceptance is executed.

In each of the production examples described above, the simulated image display is displayed as an integrated simulated image display including the gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated model image display is as described above with reference to FIG. That is, conventionally, the simulated image display was displayed separately from the gauge image, so it was difficult to make both of them difficult to see by means of an omen effect display, disappearance-related display, or the like. The gauge image may change according to the mode of the simulated image display suggesting the degree of expectation. In this regard, since it is displayed as an integrated model image display, it becomes easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the model image display and the gauge image.

It should be noted that, in each of the production examples described above, regarding the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", it was assumed that it would appear so as to make the production display difficult to see after reception. The display may be displayed so as not to be difficult to see (for example, the effect display after reception is given priority). In addition, among the plurality of reception periods, there is a reception period in which the post-reception effect display is difficult to see due to "a mode in which the model image display is difficult to see (disappearance related display)", and a reception period in which "the model image display is difficult to see. A mode (disappearance-related display)" may include a reception period during which the post-reception effect display is not difficult to see.

Moreover, it is not necessary to prepare all of the first to seventh reception periods, and it is also possible to prepare only a part of these reception periods in an appropriate combination.

Even in the first reception period, when the reception permitting sound is audibly outputted, it may be terminated halfway.

The "first omen effect display" and "seventh omen effect display" do not necessarily have to be "types that are not displayed when the acceptance period occurs and are hidden before this", For example, it may be displayed as "a type that is displayed across the timing at which the acceptance period occurs". That is, in this case, the "first omen effect display" and the "seventh omen effect display" are the above-mentioned "second omen effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period and the effect content (display image). 256, 264 and 265 for "how to start and end the display and how it relates to the display of other images until it is hidden", etc. The display is performed in the same manner as described for the “second omen effect display ZEH2”. Other examples and modifications are similarly applicable.

It goes without saying that when "at least a part" is described above and below, it is intended to include "all."

Next, a modified example of each of the production examples described above will be described. That is, FIG. 268 is a modification of the “effect when the second acceptance period occurs” shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. This is a modified example of the production of ". It should be noted that, in this modified example, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is as described above in the "examples of effects related to the second reception period (Figs. 256, 264, and 265)", and the "second reception period It is also applicable to other examples applicable to the example of production.

As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) as a fourth effect device. For convenience of explanation, the specific decorative member SDY (a blind role) is omitted in each of the above-described production examples. things). In other words, in each of the production examples described above, the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) does not operate in relation to the occurrence of the reception period.

Now, assuming that the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the modified example for the second acceptance period, first, the production determination (notice determination) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. etc.). Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 268 (a) ”).

From this point onward, it is the same as the case of FIGS. 264(b) to (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 268(b), "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Then, as shown in FIG. 268(c), "integrated model image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second omen effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated model image display IG" are being displayed in this manner, the second acceptance period occurs as shown in FIG. 268(d). becomes (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The post specific effect" and the "predictive effect" are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265). Also, the effects (acceptable sound, output sound after the second reception, etc.) using the third effect device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

Further, in this modification, even if the action by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the second 2 reception period ends, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

It should be noted that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268(d) to "D2 ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 269)" corresponds to the case where the first mode with low expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the second aspect, which has a relatively high degree of expectation, is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Also in the examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, as in the case of the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265), when the action by the player is accepted (in response to the acceptance, the effect after the second acceptance starts) At the timing tG3a, which is the point in time when the integrated model image display IG is displayed, the "integrated model image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. Not only the integrated model image display IG, but also the second precursor effect display ZEH2 is hidden at timing tG3a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect after the second acceptance is started). It is the same as the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265) in that it does not make the display difficult to see.

In addition, when the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 269), after this are the same as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265). That is, first, at timing tG3b, the display of the "second disappearance-related display SK2-1" is started as a "mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". Next, when the timing tG3c arrives, the "second post-reception effect display" is displayed as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (the effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second reception period. UG2-1” is started to be executed.

After that, as in the case of the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265), as shown in FIG. First, among "integrated model image display IG", "second precursor effect display ZEH2", and "second disappearance related display SK2-1", "integrated model image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" ” are hidden respectively. After the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second omen effect display ZEH2” are hidden, the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is hidden as shown in FIG. As a result, the display related to the “second post-reception effect display UG2-1” is performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

However, when the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 269), timing tG3b , as a mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (blind curtain) is started instead of displaying disappearance-related display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). Let That is, as shown in FIG. 269(f2), by positioning (operating) the specific decorative member SDY (a bamboo blind) so as to overlap at least a portion of the integrated model image display IG in a front view, The integrated simulated image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize".

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the expectation is higher in the case shown in FIG. 269(f2) than in the case shown in FIG. 269(f1). , it becomes possible to improve the game interest. In addition, since the action of the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) itself suggests the degree of expectation, it can also serve as a post-reception production. It becomes possible to make the simulated image display IG difficult to visually recognize. In this sense, the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY) is used as a production element that suggests the degree of expectation even in productions different from the production after reception (forecast production that suggests the degree of expectation, etc.). It is desirable to have

Next, in this way, as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is at least part of the integrated model image display IG in a front view. When the timing tG3c arrives while the execution is performed in an overlapping manner, a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the second acceptance period. Execution of the “second post-receipt effect display UG2-2” is started.

That is, in this case, the "integrated model image display IG" and the "second omen effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "fourth effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is the "integrated model image display IG". While being executed at a position overlapping at least part of the image display IG in front view, the execution of the “second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2” is started. According to such a configuration, while the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are made difficult to see by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)", the second Since the post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is started, it suggests that the second acceptance period has already ended. It is expected that the effect display ZEH2” will naturally shift to the “effect display UG2-2 after the second reception” (after timing tG3c).

Then, when the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period according to this modification ((e2) to (i2) in FIG. 269), 269(h2), when the display of the "second reception display UG2-2" is started, while the "second reception display UG2-2" is being displayed, First, "integrated model image display IG", "second omen effect display ZEH2", and "integrated model image display IG" are difficult to visually recognize (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is of the effects used)”, the “integrated model image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” are hidden, and the process ends. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" and "second precursor effect display ZEH2" are respectively hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. The "fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) effect using the fourth effect device (the specific decorative member SDY))" as the "difficult aspect" ends. That is, the specific decorative member SDY is moved to the original position so that the "effect using the fourth effect device (the specific decorative member SDY)" does not overlap the integrated model image display IG when viewed from the front. As a result, the display related to the “second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is performed under the condition that the visual recognition is good.

In addition, in the case of performing the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see" (mode with relatively high expectations (Fig. 269 ( e2) to (i2)) are for the case of performing the "effect using the first effect device (disappearance-related display)" as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize" (relatively expected It is desirable to lengthen the time from the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" to the end of this than the low mode (FIGS. 269(e1) to (i1)). In this case, when executing the "fourth effect device (specified decorative member SDY) effect using the fourth effect device (specific It became possible to improve the game interest by the performance of this itself, and after that, the "fourth production device (specific decoration member SDY) production)" was introduced. Even after the end of the game, it is expected that the "effect display UG2-2 after the second acceptance", which has been difficult to see until then, will be revealed, thereby further enhancing the interest in the game. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there is a case where a mode with a low degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception production and a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation is executed as the production after reception, The "mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize (first disappearing related display SK-1, etc.)" is executed for the same amount of time.

On the other hand, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 268(d) to “D3 (FIG. 269(e3)-(h3))”, the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period according to the modification. It is assumed that there was no

As shown in (e3) to (h3) in FIG. 269, in this modified example, if the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, in the case of the above example (FIG. 265 ( e3) to (h3)) are the same. For example, if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The mode that would have appeared if the action by had been accepted would appear.

Therefore, as shown in 269(e3) to (h3) of FIG. 269, when the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the "second extinction related display SK2-1" is displayed. If the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively low degree of expectation is being executed). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, a "fourth effect device (specified 268(d) to "D2 (FIG. 269(e2) (i2))” (when the post-acceptance effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269(g3), the "integrated model image display IG" and the "integrated model image display IG" are difficult to visually recognize (the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the fourth disappearance related display SK2-1). Of the production device (production using the specific decorative member SDY)”, first, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. -1 or production using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)” is ended.

As described above, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see” is performed as “the display in the first production device (the production display device 1600)”. 269 (e1) to (i1)), and a case of performing as ``an effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' (Fig. 269 (e2) to (i2)). In this regard, in the above-described example, the timing at which the "display on the first effect device (the effect display device 1600)" is started and the execution of the "effect using the fourth effect device (the specific decorative member SDY)" are executed. The start timing is set to be the same (timing tG3b). Execution may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before timing tG3b at which execution of "display at" is started.

According to such a configuration, depending on the type of "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize" and the degree of expectation suggested as a production after reception (the ratio of appearance of the jackpot pattern), after acceptance, "integrated Since the time until the appearance of "the aspect in which the simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see" appears, it is possible to add interest and improve the amusement of the game. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" functions as a post-reception effect in the same way as the "post-acceptance specific effect using the second effect device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

However, even in the case where the ``effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' is being executed as ``a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see'', FIG. As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least part of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display) is visible.

268 and 269, in the case where the production progresses from FIG. 268(d) to “D2 (FIG. When high post-acceptance effects are being executed), "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is not performed as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". It was decided to carry out "a production using the fourth production device (specific decorative member SDY)". However, in this case, as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specified Effect using decoration member SDY)" may be performed.

According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and the "fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) The integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to see due to both the "effect used", and it becomes possible to preferably indicate that the reception is in progress.

In this way, as "modes in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decoration When performing both of the "effect using the member SDY)", the disappearance-related display is displayed (prioritized display, etc.) so as to make at least part of the integrated model image display IG difficult to see, and the "fourth The effect using the effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is executed so as to make at least part of the integrated model image display IG and at least part of the extinction-related display difficult to see.

In this case as well, the execution of the ``effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)'' that functions as ``a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see'' is started at timing tG3a. The "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" functioning as the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" may be started at timing tG3b. .

In addition, as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance-related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decorative member 268(d) to “D1 (FIGS. 269(e1)-(i1))” (relative It will be displayed as an image display different from the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display SK2-1)" that appears in the case where the performance after reception, which is generally expected to be low, is executed). It is desirable to

Further, the fourth effect device does not necessarily have to be provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY). (for example, a flying object that can execute a flying effect on the front side of the effect display device 1600 in the front view, or light guide plate, etc.) may be used. In addition, regarding the production using the fourth production device, in addition to the case where it is executed based on the reception during the reception period, when different production conditions are satisfied (such as when a predetermined timing arrives in the specific pattern fluctuation) should also be executed.

The effect example related to the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIGS. 268 and 269. FIG.

In addition, the production examples related to the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" described with reference to FIGS. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of these reception periods.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, while the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of reception period) is being displayed, the effect display after reception However, the post-acceptance effect display is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see by the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period). (Fig. 263, Fig. 265, Fig. 267).

However, instead of this, while the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) is being displayed, the execution of the post-reception effect display is started. However, the effect display after reception is not made difficult to see by the integrated model image display IG (both the integrated model image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the reception period) (priority display, etc. ) to start the display.

Hereinafter, a case where such a configuration is applied to an example of the effect related to the second acceptance period will be described. Configurations that are not particularly mentioned are the same as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 256, 264, and 265), and can be appropriately applied to other examples.

Regarding the content of the effect until the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period according to this modification, the content of the above-described effect (FIGS. 264(a) to (d), FIG. 265(e) ) is the same as For example, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 270(e2), at the timing tG3a at which the player's action is accepted, the "integrated model image display IG" or the "second precursor effect display ZEH2" is displayed. is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not made difficult to see.

Also in this modification, there are cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-described effect content ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 265), so the description here is omitted.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "post-acceptance effect with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the after-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period, the above-described effect contents (Fig. 265 ( Instead of f2)-(i2)), the effect contents shown in FIG. 270(f2)-(i2) appear.

First, at timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. Then, the second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c within the period during which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (a form in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the player performs an action within the second acceptance period. ``Second post-reception effect display UG2'' as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance is started in the second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2). be done. Needless to say, the post-acceptance effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the player is awarded the privilege). The percentage may be 100%.

However, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes an integrated model image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second disappearance-related display SK2, etc., as shown in FIG. 270(g2). is not obscured by More specifically, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example overlaps with the area where the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2 are displayed. The integrated model image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance-related display SK2 are displayed (prioritized display) in a manner that makes them difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the effect display UG2-2 itself after the second acceptance can be made to function as "a mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see", thereby improving the game interest. You will be able to plan. It should be noted that even in the second post-receipt effect display UG2-2 according to this example, the first effect display TE (here, corresponding to the above-described "timer effect") is not displayed preferentially, and the first effect is displayed. A portion overlapping the display TE is made difficult to be visually recognized.

After that, as shown in FIG. 270(h2), first, the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden. Next, as shown in FIG. 270(i2), the second disappearance related display SK2 is hidden.

In the modification shown in FIG. 270 as well, if the action by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the same as in the above example (FIGS. 265(e3) to (h3)). . That is, when the action by the player is not accepted, the "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see" is displayed if the action by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period. A new mode will emerge.

In the example shown in FIG. 270, the second extinction-related display SK2-2 and the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 are displayed as the “mode in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to see.” However, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 may be displayed.

The effect example related to the “post-acceptance effect display” described with reference to FIG. 270 can also be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even if it is applied to the fifth reception period, the effect progresses as shown in FIG.

In addition, the effect example related to the "post-acceptance effect display" described with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect).

In the above-described modifications (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the action by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the model image display (here, integrated model image display) IG) is displayed, a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the model image display is used to make the model image display difficult to see. Second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" can be displayed, and the model image display is the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) after the display of the specific disappearance effect display (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is started. (For example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is hidden while it is being displayed.

That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display. In addition, the visibility of the model image display is reduced by a specific extinction effect display until the model image display is hidden, and the model image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. From this, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the display of the model image is hidden is short, and the decline in the interest in the game when the display of the model image is hidden is suppressed. become nauseous.

In addition, in the above-described modifications (FIGS. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, the above-mentioned "specific disappearance effect display (eg, second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" is a simulated image display (here, integrated The model image display IG) can be displayed even in a period after it is hidden, and while at least the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is displayed, A post-acceptance effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, a second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Then, with regard to the post-acceptance effect, is it displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area for the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2)? Example shown in FIG. 270), or the effect object (example shown in FIG. 269 and another example thereof) that overlaps (at least part of) the specific disappearance effect display when viewed from the front. We are trying to realize it as a thing.

According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effect that is executed at a position that overlaps the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) when viewed from the front is disappearance effect display can be recognized without moving the gaze target from the displayed position. That is, in this case, when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it is possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze destination in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-acceptance effect, It becomes possible to suitably maintain the game interest.

When a specific post-acceptance effect (for example, an effect using a specific decorative member SDY, a second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above modification appears, the rate at which benefits are given to the player increases. It may be 100%.

The specific post-acceptance effect related to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.) is executed before the model image display is hidden. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the display of the model image, it is possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance has been made even while the display of the model image is being displayed. . However, regarding the specific post-acceptance effect related to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, etc.), after the model image display is hidden Execution may be started.

In addition to the reception period during which the specific post-reception effect related to the above modification (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) can be generated, the specific post-reception effect After preparing a reception period in which a different post-reception effect can be generated, a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is displayed even if the different post-reception effect is executed. may also be displayed. The reception period in which different post-reception effects can be generated may be any one of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, in the reception period (first reception period) in which the reception allowable sound is not terminated halfway, it is desirable that the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is not displayed (separate disappearance display may be displayed)

It should be noted that in the above-mentioned modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, when the acceptance period occurs, the acceptance of the post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period is allowed, or A process is executed to make an acceptance acceptance sound audible, which suggests that the acceptance will (soon) become acceptable, so that the player may forget to perform the action for acceptance. is being suppressed.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of types of precursor effect displays. When the action by the player is accepted while the precursor effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, the specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance is made, but the specific precursor effect display (ZEH2) is displayed. A mode in which the specific portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize while the portent effect display (second portent effect display ZEH2) is being displayed appears. Then, after the appearance of the mode, the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is hidden under the condition that the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is made difficult to be visually recognized.

That is, in this case, even after the reception is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the precursor effect display has appeared, and the visibility is reduced until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to preferably indicate that the acceptance has already been made.

In the above-described modifications (FIGS. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, the aspect in which the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to visually recognize is the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display). ZEH2) is an image display (for example, a second disappearance related display SK2-2 or a post-reception effect display UG2-2), or a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display ZEH2) is on the front side. It is supposed to be a production in the production body performed in.

Further, in the modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) described above or another example thereof, the "mode of making the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) difficult to see" Not only the portent effect display ZEH2), but also the specific portent effect display and the model image display are executed so as to straddle both when viewed from the front, making it difficult to visually recognize both of them. This aspect may be performed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, it is possible to visually recognize a specific precursor effect display or a simulated image display through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable that

In addition, the "mode of making the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) difficult to see" is realized by a change in the display characteristics of the specific predictive effect display itself (transmittance change, etc.). may be

Also in the modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) described above or another example thereof, the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is hidden during the acceptance period. Then, even if the acceptance is made in the non-displayed state, "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the specific precursor effect display (second disappearance related display SK2-2, post-reception effect display UG2-2, Directing body, etc.)” is to be executed.

In addition, in the above-described first acceptance period, when an action by the player is accepted, multiple effects (effects shown in FIGS. 263(e1) to (i1), FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2)) will appear, but no matter which one of these effects appears, a specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (first reception period )) can appear. That is, in this case, when any one of the multiple effects appears, the specific mode will also appear in conjunction with it, so that they are "resulting from the player's action being accepted within the specified acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that it is a common production.

On the other hand, in the above-described second reception period, modifications (FIGS. 268 to 270), or the second reception period according to another example, when the player's action is accepted, the special condition (jackpot winning conditions, probability variable rush conditions, etc.) are different depending on whether the appearance ratio (may be 0% or 100%) special mode (for example, second disappearance related display SK2-2, specific Any one of a plurality of modes including effects using the decorative member SDY, effect display after reception (UG2-2, etc.) can appear, and when the special mode appears, the model image display becomes difficult to see. . According to such a configuration, a special aspect suggesting the degree of expectation appears before the model image display is hidden, and the special aspect makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display. , the player can enjoy the performance progressing from the display of the model image to the performance after reception (special mode) without changing the gaze point.

In this regard, even when the above specific mode (first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (first mode of first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first acceptance period)) appears, the model image display It is made difficult to visually recognize by "mode". According to such a configuration, when the model image display is difficult to see due to the above-mentioned special mode that suggests the degree of expectation for granting the privilege (special acceptance period), and the above-mentioned specific mode that does not suggest the degree of expectation for granting the privilege Due to the fact that there are cases where the display of the model image is difficult to see (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode of making the display of the model image difficult to view (specific mode, special mode)" has a production effect. It becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, when the acceptance period illustrated in each of the production examples and modifications described above occurs, a model image indicating the object (type of operation means, etc.) that is allowed to be accepted within the acceptance period is displayed. It may be displayed both during the period in which the precursor effect display before the reception period occurs and during the reception period. However, in this case, the model image display displayed during the period during which the precursor effect display is executed shall be in a different mode from the model image display displayed during the acceptance period, and the It is desirable to make it hidden.

A modification will be described below in which the method of displaying the model image in such a manner is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 271(a) to (f) and FIGS. 272(g) and (h) are modified examples of the "effect when the second acceptance period occurs" shown in FIG. (i) to (l) are modifications of the “effect when the second acceptance period occurs” shown in FIG. It should be noted that, in this modified example, the configuration that is not particularly mentioned is as described above in the "examples of effects related to the second reception period (Figs. 256, 264, and 265)", and the "second reception period It is also applicable to other examples applicable to the example of production.

Now, assuming that the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, even in the modification for the second reception period, the effect determination (notice judgment, etc.). Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the second variable pattern, the sound output of the BGM playback according to the second variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 271 (a) ”).

However, in this modified example, when the timing tG0 before the timing tG1 described above arrives, as shown in FIG. there is In the example shown in FIG. 271(b), another effect example (executing the model image display within the period during which the predictive effect display is executed and then temporarily hiding it) is used as the "advance type predictive effect display SZE". Although the image display used also in the example of the normal effect in which no such action is performed) is executed, the "advance type predictive effect display SZE" is executed in another example of effect (the predictive effect display is executed). It is desirable to display an image that cannot appear in the normal production example where the model image display is not performed within the period and then temporarily hidden.

Then, in this modified example, the model image display TMH (here, integrated model image display) appears while the “preceding type omen effect display SZE” is being displayed. That is, as shown in FIG. 271(c), at least a part of the simulated image display TMH (here, the integrated simulated image display) according to this example is made difficult to visually recognize by the "advance type precursor effect display SZE". The display is started while the Further, although the model image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated model image display, an image ( It is displayed as a model image display of a form that cannot be displayed within the reception period.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 271(d), the simulated image display TMH (here, the integrated simulated image display) is displayed in such a manner that it is not difficult to see by the "advance type omen effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "advance type omen effect display SZE" is finished, and is displayed in a manner decorated with another effect display (flame effect in the drawing).

However, as shown in Fig. 271(c), (d), etc., the model image display TMH (here, integrated model image display) that appears while the "advance type omen effect display SZE" is being displayed. is displayed in a manner different from any of the manners of model image display (Figs. 232(a) to (d)) that can be displayed during the reception period. As a result, while the model image display TMH is displayed for a relatively long time, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has not yet occurred.

Also, as will be described later, when the model image display TMH (here, the integrated model image display) appears, the above multiple modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) Among them, the simulated image display is displayed in a highly expected mode (for example, FIG. 232(d)). As a result, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game when the "advance type omen effect display SZE" is displayed. It should be noted that the modes that can be displayed as the model image display are not necessarily the above four modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)), and for example, there may be only two modes.

Then, in this modified example, when timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. A portion of the TMH becomes less visible (eg, priority display). Next, as shown in FIG. 271(f), the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire model image display TMH. TZE" is displayed, the model image display TMH is hidden.

After that, when the timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. ), the display is started with the mode with the highest degree of expectation. At the time when the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image display IG) that can be displayed within the reception period starts to be displayed, part of it is made difficult to see by the "normal type omen effect display TZE". ing.

Then, while the "normal type omen effect display TZE" and the "simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG)" are displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 272(h), the second is generated (timing tG3).

Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted. The post specific effect" and the "predictive effect" are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265). Also, the effects (acceptable sound, output sound after the second reception, etc.) using the third effect device (speaker) are executed in the same manner as in the above-described examples (FIGS. 264 and 265). ing.

Further, in this modification, even if the action by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, the second 2 reception period ends, the post-reception effect (second post-reception effect) corresponding to the second reception period is started to be executed.

Also in this modification, there are cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed and cases where the post-acceptance production with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed. The case where the post-acceptance effect with a low value is executed is the same as the above-described effect content ((e1) to (i1) in FIG. 265), so the description here is omitted.

On the other hand, in this modified example, when the "post-acceptance effect with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the after-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period, the above-described effect contents (Fig. 265 ( Instead of f2)-(i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 272(i)-(l) appear.

First, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 272(i), at the timing tG3a when the player's action is accepted, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" or the "simulated image display (here, , integrated simulated image display IG)” is not hidden, and the “normal type omen effect display TZE” and “simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG)” are made difficult to see. Nor.

However, in this example, dynamic display as a model image display is performed at the time of acceptance and after that while "model image display (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed. is designed to continue. Also, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced as time elapses.

At timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. The second disappearance-related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance-related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much display area the gauge image GG has at the time of acceptance (Fig. 272(i)), the display area becomes "0" when timing tG3b arrives. I'm trying to be According to such a configuration, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship). However, ignoring the rules up to that point, the display area suddenly decreased significantly, and as a result, "the remaining time was set to '0' by surprise, but I was lucky enough to be able to make it in time for the reception." It is possible to make the player think that the game is interesting, and to improve the amusement of the game.

Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 (a form in which the integrated model image display IG is difficult to visually recognize) arrives, the player can enter within the second acceptance period. ``Second post-reception effect display UG2'' as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the operation by is started. Needless to say, the post-acceptance effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which the player is awarded the privilege). The percentage may be 100%.

As shown in FIG. 272(k), the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 according to this modification includes the integrated model image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second extinction-related display SK2- 2, etc., but it may be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

After that, first, the integrated model image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are respectively hidden (Fig. 272(l)). Next, although illustration is omitted, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 is hidden, and as a result, the second post-acceptance effect display UG2-2 is displayed under the condition that the visibility is good. become.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as precursor effect displays suggesting that the acceptance period will occur. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), when a specific precursor effect display (FIGS. 271(b) to (f) and FIG. 272(g)) is performed among a plurality of precursor effect displays, The model image display related to the reception target is displayed both during the precursor period (model image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and during the reception period (model image display IG).

In particular, in this modified example, after the simulated image display (simulated image display TMH) is displayed during the precursor period, it is not displayed during the precursor period. As for the model image display TMH that is displayed (and hidden) only during the sign period, it is in a different form from the model image display IG that can be displayed during the acceptance period. It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time before the occurrence of .

Also in this modified example, when an application is accepted within the acceptance period, the model image display IG is hidden based on the acceptance (FIG. 272(l)). Until the model image display IG is hidden, it is possible to appear "a specific aspect (second disappearance related display SK2-2) that makes the model image display difficult to see" (Fig. 272 (j), ( k)). However, with regard to the "specific aspect that makes the model image display difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance-related display SK2-2)", the model image display TMH that is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) is not displayed. It is made so that it does not appear until it is hidden when it is turned on.

According to such a configuration, during the omen period (specific omen effect display), the "specific aspect (second disappearance-related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" that appears corresponding to the reception period ” does not appear and the model image display TMH is hidden. Therefore, even if the model image display TMH is displayed within the precursor period (specific precursor effect display) and is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player will not be aware of it. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a misunderstanding that the reception period has ended before the user has received it.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the "mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize" that can appear in response to the reception is replaced with the above-mentioned "specific mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance mode)". A plurality of related displays SK2-2)” are to be prepared. In this regard, in the modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272), none of these aspects appear when the model image display TMH displayed within the precursor period is hidden. It's becoming In the above modification, a mode different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as "a mode that makes the simulated image display difficult to visually recognize" according to the reception (normal type precursor effect display TZE) is displayed within the precursor period. Until the is hidden, it functions as a "mode of making the model image display difficult to see". In other words, in this case, since it will be recognized as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" exclusively for the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display" appears during the precursor period , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to misunderstand that the acceptance period has ended without the player's knowledge.

Further, in the above modification, the "normal type precursor effect display TZE" is displayed as the "mode of making the model image display difficult to see" until the simulated image display TMH is hidden within the precursor period. If the request is accepted within the acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed as the "mode of making the model image display difficult to see" until the model image display IG is hidden. I decided to In this regard, the period from when the "normal type omen effect display TZE" is displayed until it is hidden is the period from when the "second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed until it is hidden. It is desirable to make the length longer than the above in order to improve the amusement of the game.

When the model image display TMH is displayed within the prognostic period, in the reception period that occurs correspondingly after the model image display TMH is hidden, the reception object of the type indicated by the model image display TMH Acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for (operation means), and acceptance object (operation means) different from the type of reception object (operation means) suggested by the model image display TMH It is desirable that acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance production corresponding to the acceptance period) is not permitted. That is, in the case of the above modifications (FIGS. 271 and 272), the model image display model image display TMH displayed within the precursor period suggests the operation button 410 as an object to be accepted. During the acceptance period, no acceptance (acceptance related to post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for an acceptance object (sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410 .

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the "operation buttons 410" and the "sword ornaments 5001" as reception objects related to post-reception effects. In this regard, if the effect is executed in a manner such as "after displaying the model image display, the model image display is hidden within the precursor period", It is desirable that the side with a high probability of appearing a big hit pattern when accepted is accepted. That is, in this case, among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration body 5001", the acceptance target with a low ratio of appearance of the big hit pattern when it is accepted as the acceptance target has a corresponding acceptance period. Prior to this, an effect is not executed in such a manner as to "hide the display of the model image within the precursor period after displaying the model image".

Among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. It is also applicable to examples. In addition, the "production mode related to the omen effect" is not applied to any one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is applied to an eighth reception period (eighth reception period) that is different from any of the reception periods. It may be prepared as a variation pattern, an eighth post-acceptance effect).

Further, among the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. It is also applicable to

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of displaying a remaining time suggestive display (display including division images KG, etc.) in which the display area of a specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced over time during the acceptance period. be. In this regard, in the modified examples (FIGS. 271 and 272) described above, the indication indicating the remaining time can be displayed even after the presentation progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player. Since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the effect is progressing, it is possible to recognize "whether the acceptance has been made" even after the acceptance has been made. It will be expected that it will be difficult to do so and the tension will be maintained appropriately.

271 and 272, as the remaining time suggestive display, a specific block area (block image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600), and the specific block image KG is displayed. The display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the partition area (partition image KG). Then, after the presentation progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player, not only the specific image (gauge image GG) but also the specific partition area (section image KG) are continuously displayed. I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific partitioned area (the partitioned image KG) is displayed even after the production progresses based on the acceptance of the action by the player, the specific image (gauge image GG ) has decreased in display area.

It should be noted that ``the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the effect has been performed based on the acceptance of the action by the player'' means, for example, At the point in time when the production progresses based on this, the display area of the gauge image GG, which was left with a predetermined display area, is changed to 0 (non-display) at a later point in time. (Fig. 272(j)). However, in this case, when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, it is required that the specific division area (section image KG) is still displayed, and the specific division area (section image KG) is , after the timing when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, it is hidden.

271 and 272, when the action by the player is accepted, the indication indicating the remaining time (gauge image GG, partition image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. However, regardless of how much of the display area of the gauge image GG was left at the time of acceptance, prior to hiding the remaining time suggestive display, a specific division area (division image KG ), a specific image whose display area is set to a specific value (predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific partition area (partition image KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG, whose display area has been reduced under a certain rule with respect to the passage of time (for example, the amount of display area that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship, etc.) By ignoring the law of , the display area is suddenly greatly reduced, making people think that ``the remaining time was set to ``0'' by surprise, but I was lucky enough to make it in time for the reception.'' can be done, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, at the time when the action by the player is accepted (at the time when the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started), the execution starts before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is continued without being terminated. After that, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) having a display area of a specific value is displayed in a specific partitioned area (partitioned image KG), or a specific partitioned area (partitioned image KG) is displayed. KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG), only the specific partitioned area (the partitioned image KG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

That is, in this case, at the timing (for example, timing tG3a) when the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not greatly reduced, and the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, it is expected that even after the acceptance is made, it is difficult to recognize "whether the acceptance has been made", and the tension is preferably maintained. In addition, at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the progress of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG, etc.) is greatly reduced. is performed, it is possible to make it appear as if the acceptance is just in time within the effective period (acceptance period), and it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, as shown in FIG. 272, the model image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before and after acceptance. . In this regard, when the timing tG3b, which is a predetermined time after acceptance, arrives, regardless of the dynamic position of the model image display at the time of acceptance, it will be displayed at a specific dynamic position after acceptance. The model image display is displayed in a stationary manner (in the example shown in FIG. 272(j), when timing tG3b arrives, regardless of the button positions up to that point, the button position is at the highest position. (depicted as in ). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 272(j), after the timing tG3b, the model image display is not dynamically displayed, and is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. This makes it possible to more preferably obtain the above-described effects.

Of the modifications described above with reference to FIGS. "Dynamic display and static display related to model image display" can also be applied to reception periods different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. In addition, "depiction of the gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 272 (i) to (k))" is applied to any of the first acceptance period to the seventh acceptance period. Instead, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) different from any of these reception periods.

In addition, ``depiction of gauge image GG and partition image KG after acceptance (Fig. 272 (i) to (k))'' and ``dynamic display and static display related to model image display'' are When applying to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period is fine), it is desirable not to apply to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the reception is made, there are cases where the depiction of the gauge image GG greatly decreasing appears (Fig. 272(j)) and the case where the depiction does not appear, thereby increasing the interest in the game. You will be able to make improvements.

Even during the acceptance period when "depiction of the gauge image GG and section image KG after acceptance (Fig. 272 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display related to model image display" are not applied, After the acceptance, it is desirable to perform the drawing that reduces the display area of the gauge image GG or the dynamic display itself. In other words, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not depicted by ignoring the previous rule and is greatly reduced, and that static display is not performed.

In each of the production examples and other examples described above, and their modifications, a plurality of reception periods (for example, the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that can occur under different conditions are prepared. there is In this regard, for a predetermined reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) among the plurality of reception periods, the pattern variation that occurred during the predetermined reception period ends. , so that it can be continued even after the next symbol variation is started (that can occur across multiple variations), and a specific reception period (for example, the second reception) among the plurality of reception periods period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period, etc.), it does not continue until after the pattern variation that occurred during the specific reception period is terminated, and the pattern variation is terminated. It may be terminated earlier. In other words, in this case, the model image display related to the acceptance target is displayed during both the predetermined acceptance period and the specific acceptance period, and when the action by the player is accepted within the specified acceptance period, the specified , the model image display is not hidden at the time of acceptance, and the model image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display etc.) will appear. As a result, it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended while making it possible to confirm which mode has appeared as a model image display even after the acceptance has been made. It becomes possible to preferably obtain it during either the predetermined reception period or the specific reception period.

Further, the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period, the fourth reception period, In the case of the acceptance period and the seventh acceptance period, the aspect in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display) is when the acceptance is made in the "predetermined acceptance period" that can be maintained across multiple fluctuations, It will be executed in a different mode when the acceptance is made in the "specific acceptance period" that does not straddle multiple fluctuations. In other words, in this case, it is possible to grasp whether or not the reception period will end within the pattern variation being executed based on the type of ``a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)''. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in both the "predetermined acceptance period" that can occur across multiple fluctuations and the "specific acceptance period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, a model image display that imitates the acceptance target is displayed. The model image display may be displayed in different modes (size, position, etc. for display) for the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period." For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, when the model image display is displayed in the manner described above (displayed only at a predetermined position), it occurs in a form that spans multiple fluctuations. It is desirable that the display position of the model image display itself is changed (moving display) during the possible "predetermined reception period". According to such a configuration, even if the "predetermined acceptance period" occurs in the form of a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to urge the player to accept the offer as soon as possible.

In addition, in the "acceptance period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, there are cases where the operation button 410 is used as an acceptance target and sword ornament 5001 is used as an acceptance target. During the possible "acceptance period", the operation button 410 may be used as an acceptance target, but it is desirable not to use the sword ornament 5001 as an acceptance target.

It is desirable that the predictive effect display can be executed prior to the occurrence of the "acceptance period" that may occur across multiple fluctuations. That is, in this case, the symbol variation is terminated while the "predictive effect display" is being executed, and after the symbol variation is terminated, there is a case where the reception period corresponding to the "predictive effect display" occurs. Therefore, it is possible to preferably maintain the game interest after the symbol variation is finished.

Even in the "acceptance period (for example, the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, as described above, after the acceptance is made, the "model A mode (disappearance-related display, etc.) that makes the image display difficult to see appears. This "mode of making the model image display difficult to see (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is executed after a predetermined period of time. However, it is desirable that the "mode of making the model image display difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is continued without being terminated halfway.

"Prediction effect display" executed corresponding to "acceptance period (e.g., first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations; Regarding the aspect that makes the model image display difficult to see (such as disappearance-related display), the time from when the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped until the next symbol variation starts to be executed (the symbol in the execution state The execution period (the time from the display of the precursor effect display to the disappearance of the display), making it difficult to see the model image It is desirable that the time from the appearance of an aspect to its termination) is terminated.

As described above, in the "acceptance period (for example, the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, the corresponding "prediction effect display" and "disappearance related display" may be displayed, respectively. In this regard, if the "disappearance-related display" is displayed before the symbol change in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed ends, the same area (overlapping area) as the area where the "predictive effect display" is displayed ) to display the "disappearance-related display" in the form of using at least a part of it, and after the pattern variation in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed (the suspension is digested and the next symbol variation is started) If the "disappearance-related display" is displayed after the event, etc.), it is possible to display the "disappearance-related display" by using only an area different from the area where the "predictive effect display" was displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that this is executed over a plurality of fluctuations while paying close attention to the performance after reception.

Also, as described above, a plurality of modes (Fig. 232 (a) to (d)) with different expectations are prepared as model image display, and the "acceptance period (for example, the second acceptance period, In the fourth reception period, the seventh reception period)", the model image display is displayed as one of these modes. However, in the "acceptance period (e.g., first acceptance period, third acceptance period, fifth acceptance period, etc.)" that can occur across multiple fluctuations, a specific aspect among multiple aspects (e.g., FIG. 232 It is desirable that only the model image display of (a)) is displayed. However, the "acceptance period (for example, the second acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period)" that does not span multiple fluctuations, and the "acceptance period that can occur in a form that spans multiple fluctuations (for example, In any of the first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.), it is desirable to continue the dynamic display of the model image display after the reception.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) can be generated. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the "acceptance period" during which the post-acceptance effect can be executed when the player's action is accepted is the first game state and the second game state. It can occur in any game state. Furthermore, if the action by the player is accepted within the "acceptance period", it is assumed that the "acceptance period" occurred in either the first game state or the second game state. Also, after the acceptance, "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance-related display, etc.)" appears in the display of the model image display, and after that, the "model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize The model image display is hidden while the mode (disappearance-related display, etc.) is appearing.

That is, in this case, it is possible to have the effect that "even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the model image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period has ended". , can be obtained regardless of whether the acceptance is made within the acceptance period occurring in either the first game state or the second game state.

It should be noted that the "first game state", for example, corresponds to a normal game state (low probability, non-time saving), and the "second game state" is generated based on the result of the big hit determination ( State transition) corresponds to "a game state different from the normal game state". Any game state may be used as long as the game state is different from the normal game state.

In this regard, further explanation using the plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period, etc.) exemplified in each of the above-described production examples and other examples, and their modifications, for example, a plurality of reception Reception periods of predetermined types among the periods (for example, the first reception period, the fourth reception period, the sixth reception period, and the seventh reception period, etc., but not necessarily all of them) ) is set to occur only in the first game state out of the first game state and the second game state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third reception period among the plurality of reception periods is set to occur only in the second game state among the first game state and the second game state. Even with such a configuration, the model image display related to the reception object is divided into a reception period (first game state) of a predetermined type and a third reception period (second game state). displayed in either case. However, in the first game state (when accepted in the first acceptance period), in the second game state (when accepted in the second acceptance period) as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, the seventh disappearance-related display, etc., but not necessarily all of them) can appear.

According to such a configuration, the first game state and the second game state can be obtained simply by confirming which mode has appeared as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" without confirming the type of effect after reception. It is possible to ascertain which of the two game states the player is in, thereby improving the interest in the game.

269 and 270, the "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" also appears only when in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first accepting period). It may also be set as a “mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the game interest in the most disadvantageous state for the player (normal game state) will be favorably maintained.

Further, according to the above configuration, in the second game state (when accepted in the third acceptance period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". However, the first disappearance-related display can also appear in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is only indicated, the sense of tension can be preferably maintained. Further, even when the player is controlled to the first game state, when the first disappearance-related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility of being controlled to the second game state. Since it becomes possible to let the player enjoy the game, it is possible to maintain the interest in the game.

The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as reception periods that can occur in either the first game state or the second game state, or the first game state. Of the state and the second game state, it may occur only in the first game state.

Further, as described above, during the acceptance period that occurs in the first gaming state, the model image display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)). In this regard, during the acceptance period that occurs in the second gaming state, it is possible to display only the model image display of a specific aspect (for example, FIG. 232(a), which is an aspect with a low degree of expectation) among the plurality of aspects. desirable. According to such a configuration, even when a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIG. 232(a)) appears as the simulated image display, the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is eliminated. Since it becomes possible to make the player aware of the game, the interest in the game can be preferably maintained.

In the first game state, when the action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same mode as when the action is accepted appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" (for example, the first 2 reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and when a different aspect from the case of acceptance appears (for example, 1st reception period, etc.) However, in the second game state (third acceptance period), the same mode as in the case of acceptance must appear as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", or It is desirable to make sure that a mode different from the accepted case appears. According to such a configuration, when an action is not accepted in the first game state, the same mode as when the action is accepted appears as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". It is possible to make the player aware of the possibility that the second game state is occurring.

The reception period (third reception period) that occurs in the second game state is the same as when it is accepted as "a mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see even if it is not accepted within this period". In the case where the mode is generated as something that always appears", the reception period (third reception period) does not include "even if it is not accepted" that occurs in the first game state, "the model image display becomes difficult to see". It is desirable to set the valid time (set time) as the acceptance period longer than any of the "receiving period in which the same aspect as when accepted" always appears as the aspect.

In both the first game state and the second game state, the corresponding precursor effect display is executed before the acceptance period occurs. In this regard, in the first game state, a specific precursor effect display (second precursor effect display, fifth precursor effect display, seventh precursor effect display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second game state is executed. It is desirable to

[Special acceptance period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118 , in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (fluctuation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state becomes executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production judgment (such as the advance notice judgment), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing in the SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a performance.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period during which the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted, and the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the acceptance period. , the display changes according to the type of reception period that has occurred. In addition, during the reception period, it is possible to display a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice production judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. However, even if any result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) It is desirable to prevent it from being lost or to lower its selection ratio.

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions means that it is possible to accept changes in the display of the effect display device 1600 as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect action by the movable decoration, etc. are only generated, the reception allowable state (effective period) The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including the examples described above and the examples described later, the "player's operation" to be detected means that the player directly operates the "operation button 410", the "sword decoration 5001", or the like. (Pressing action or drawing action), "player's contact action on a specific part" to be detected by the touch sensor, and "player in a specific space" to be detected by the non-contact sensor This means that it also includes "operation by". The point is that one or a plurality of accepting means (operating means) for accepting actions by the player (pressing action, sword drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) may be provided.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special effects are provided. It should be noted that each performance (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. can be reduced, or some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects may be selectively provided, or described as being applicable to another configuration You may make it employ|adopt suitably the structure which has. Furthermore, each effect (structure) described below is merely an example, and any one structure capable of suppressing a decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases, when the first reception period occurs and when the second reception period occurs, character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Although the same action is accepted as the action by the player in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, different character information (for example, "press!", "please press", etc.) is displayed. I'm trying to In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 1-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 1-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

That is, in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change (post-acceptance display) that occurs as a result of detection of the action is requested. are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the character information displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since it is made to differ from each other according to the type (type of display after reception), operation (action by the player) while recognizing which type of display change may occur as display after reception can be performed, and it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the acceptance period is of the same type (that generates the same post-acceptance display), It is more desirable to make the character information displayed as different from each other in order to suppress operation errors by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182(c)). In the same sense, when a different action (operation mode) is requested to the player, and the acceptance period is of a different type (different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable to have the textual information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first acceptance period is requested, and the same character information and model image display as in the case of the first acceptance period are displayed. may further prepare a reception period for generating a different post-reception display. That is, in this case, just by looking at the character information and the simulated image display, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the post-reception display. be expected to maintain.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 1-A", the character information is not displayed during the first reception period until the state (valid state) in which the reception is permitted is terminated. On the other hand, during the second acceptance period, while the acceptance state (effective state) continues, the character information can be hidden during that period. You can let it be. In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, if the player does not perform an operation (predetermined action) in a relatively short time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any action (operation mode). As it becomes difficult to recognize whether the application period is valid or not, and in turn, it becomes difficult to recognize the type of application period, it is difficult to recognize the type of application period. It will be expected to preferably avoid such a situation where the tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, when the "configuration 1-A" is adopted, the second acceptance period includes a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is not displayed. , the same display change may occur regardless of whether the acceptance is made during any of these periods. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation can be performed properly as long as it is confirmed what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. This is possible, and is expected to curb the decline in interest in gaming.

[Configuration 2-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first acceptance period, only one mode of model image display can be displayed, and in the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as model image display. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, during the second acceptance period, the effect that cannot appear when the first acceptance period occurs is provided. It becomes possible to suitably improve the game interest of.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "multi-mode model image display" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern to differ depending on which model image display is displayed. It is more desirable to improve interest. Also, any one of the "plural modes of simulated image display" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period. In this case, it is desirable that the "least anticipated aspect" of the "multiple modes of simulated image display" be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 2-A", a third reception period is further provided, and only one mode is displayed as a model image display during the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be made possible. Then, during the "second receiving period" in which the model image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is terminated during the "first reception period". However, in the "third reception period", until the effective state (reception period) ends (the effective state is continued) In the meantime, the model image that has been displayed until then may be hidden. That is, in this case, even during the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which only one mode is displayed as the model image display, whether or not the model image display is hidden in the middle of the period is determined. Since the effect is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the amusement of the game until the player's operation (action) is detected. The model image display displayed during the first reception period and the model image display displayed during the third reception period may be the same, but they may not necessarily be the same, so that they are not displayed. You may suggest the possibility of being made into.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 2-A", in the third acceptance period, either the period during which the model image display is displayed or the period during which the model image display is not displayed. The same display change (post-acceptance display) may be caused even if the acceptance is made at . That is, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (acceptance period) itself will continue without any change, so the performance using the "third acceptance period" ( In creating the non-display of the model image display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

It should be noted that the "third reception period (display after third reception)" related to the configuration 2-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Configuration 3-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first acceptance period, after the model image display is displayed when the first acceptance period occurs, the model image display is not hidden until the first acceptance period ends. , it is possible to accept an action by the player while the model image display is displayed, and in the second acceptance period, it is possible to accept an action by the player while the model image display is not being displayed; The above-described "allowable reception sound" is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second reception period occurs. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 3-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, not only the "first reception period" in which the reception is performed while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output and the model image display is displayed, but the reception acceptance sound is not audibly output and Since there is a "second reception period" in which the reception is performed while the model image display is not displayed, we are aware of the possibility that the display after reception will occur at various timings unintended by the player. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-A", a third reception period is further provided, and in the second reception period, the model image is displayed from the start of the second reception period to the end of the second reception period. It is possible for the player to accept an action while the display is not displayed and the model image display is not displayed, but during the third acceptance period, the model image display is only part of the third acceptance period. It may be possible to accept actions by the player during both the period during which the model image display is hidden and the period during which the model image display is not displayed. That is, in this case, the third reception period consists of the first reception period (reception while the model image is displayed) and the second reception period (reception while the model image is not displayed). (reception at the store), so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted continues even after the model image display is hidden, the player's actions (operations) are not accepted. It is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the model image display is hidden without being displayed.

Note that the “third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)” related to the “configuration 3-A” is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

In addition, the acceptable reception sound is audibly output when the first reception period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second reception period occurs and when the third reception period occurs. . That is, there is a timing at which the model image display is displayed during the third acceptance period. In this respect, according to the above configuration for the third acceptance period, the reception permission sound is not output in accordance with the timing (or before or after) when the model image display is displayed. . As a result, in the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, the side as the first reception period (the simulated image display is displayed) and the side as the second reception period (the reception acceptance sound is output) not be played), it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Also, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 3-A" is adopted, in the third acceptance period, either the period during which the model image display is displayed or the period during which the model image display is not displayed. The same display change (post-acceptance display) may be caused even if the acceptance is made at . That is, in this case, even after the model image display is hidden, the valid state (acceptance period) itself will continue without any change, so the performance using the "third acceptance period" ( In creating the non-display of the model image display, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, in the first acceptance period, when the player's action is detected within the period, the first post-acceptance display is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but the player's action is not detected within the period. Sometimes, the display after the first reception is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output. The display after the second reception is displayed and the second reception sound is output, and even if the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the second reception is the same as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. Although the post-reception display is displayed, the second reception sound is not output. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 4-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, a performance disadvantage may occur, so the tension when the acceptance period occurs is suitable. can be maintained at

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 4-A", a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period The display after the third reception is displayed and the third reception sound is output, and even if the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the third reception is the same as when the movement by the player is detected within the period. The post-acceptance indication may be displayed and the third acceptance sound may be output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action (operation) is accepted is generated so as to produce a demerit in terms of performance. (2nd reception period) and when it occurs so as not to cause demerit of production (3rd reception period). It becomes possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game when it is not present.

Note that the “third acceptance period (display after third acceptance)” related to the “configuration 4-A” is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Configuration 5-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. During the first acceptance period, the execution of the first variation pattern is started regardless of the number of judgment information stored by the holding storage means (the number of jackpot judgments in the holding state (holding number)). And, it can occur when the first timing arrives when a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the first variation pattern is started, and the second acceptance period is the number of determination information stored by the suspension storage means (suspension When the second variation pattern is started to be executed when the number of jackpot determinations in the state (holding number) is less than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern has passed a predetermined time since the start of execution. 2 timing, but when the execution of the second variation pattern is started when the number of judgment information stored by the reserve storage means is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern is prevented from occurring even if the second timing comes after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 5-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 5-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and the number of reservations is reduced, a reception period (second reception period) of a type that has not occurred until then will occur. It is possible to expect that the player will be encouraged not to stop the game, or even if the game is stopped, it will be possible to have an interesting impression on the game at the end.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 5-A", the second variation pattern when the "number of determination information stored by the pending storage means (number of pending)" is less than a predetermined number Even if the execution is started, the number of determination information stored by the pending storage means (holding number)" increases (becomes a predetermined number or more), the second reception period may not occur at a second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern. That is, even if the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is executed when the number of reservations is decreasing, if the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation , which suggests that you are not in a position to stop playing. In this regard, according to the above configuration, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of reservations is decreasing, within the execution period of the pattern variation If the number of reservations is increased, since the second reception period is not generated when the second timing when the predetermined time has elapsed since the execution of the second variation pattern has started, the second reception period is , it can be made to function more properly as "a reception period of a type that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped".

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more preferably, even if the second reception period occurs, during the second reception period, the "determination information stored by the reservation storage means It is more desirable to end the second reception period at the time when the number of (holding number) increases.

[Configuration 6-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. The first acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner regardless of the production situation, and the second acceptance period is the specific BGM regardless of the production situation. is suppressed or made inaudible, it is possible to provide performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs by using the specific BGM. become. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 6-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In addition, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 6-A", multiple acceptance periods including the first acceptance period, the second acceptance period, and the third acceptance period will be prepared as the acceptance period. 3. The receiving period may occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or may occur after the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state, depending on the production situation. You may do so. According to such a configuration, there are cases where the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and cases where the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is suppressed or in the non-audible mode. In either case, since there is a possibility that the acceptance period is the "third acceptance period", the game interest is preferably maintained until the action (operation) by the player is accepted. be expected to do so.

It should be noted that the "third reception period (display after third reception)" related to the "configuration 6-A" is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Configuration 7-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first acceptance period, when the acceptance is made within the period, the first post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be executed, and at least the first post-acceptance display is displayed as the design for performance. During this period, the display is given priority over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second acceptance period, if the acceptance is made within the period, the second post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance can be executed, and at least the second post-acceptance display is displayed for the design for production. is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to be visually recognized by the second post-receipt display, or is hidden. It should be noted that the ``mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize'' in the configuration 7-A means that ``at least a part of the design for production is displayed according to the transmittance after the second reception, which is set to a predetermined transmittance. or a mode in which at least a part of the design for production is displayed after the second reception overlapping it, or a mode in which at least a part of the design for production is hidden, etc. ” means. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 7-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 7-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type of reception period by confirming whether or not the visibility of the design for effect is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the player's operation. become. It should be noted that the "drawing pattern" is, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-win state as an effect in the effect display device 1600. In addition, the effect of whether or not to form a ready-to-win state, a pseudo-continuous effect, It is a pattern that is also used for full rotation effects.

However, it has been confirmed that some players feel disgust at the fact that the visibility of the performance symbols deteriorates as a result of the display of the second post-acceptance display. there is Therefore, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 7-A", when the second reception display corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is displayed, the reception period different from the second reception period is generated (for example, generated in response to acceptance within the second acceptance period). Then, when the player's operation is accepted within the different period, the second post-acceptance display may be hidden with the acceptance as a trigger to make the design for performance easily visible.

For example, assuming that the second post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance within the second acceptance period is hidden after a predetermined time has passed since the display started, until the predetermined time elapses The player can hide the second post-acceptance display at that point simply by performing a predetermined operation. It should be noted that the operation required of the player to display the second post-acceptance display within the second acceptance period and the acceptance period different from the second acceptance period (acceptance period that occurs in response to acceptance within the second acceptance period) ), the operations required of the player to hide the display after the second reception may be the same operations or different operations. For example, within a reception period different from the second reception period (a reception period that occurs in response to reception within the second reception period), the player uses a plurality of operation means to hide the display after the second reception. may be required to perform an operation on each.

On the other hand, the display after the first reception may be the same time as the predetermined time from the start of display (the predetermined time until the display after the second reception is hidden), or it may be a different time. good) has passed. However, as for the display after the first reception, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the performance pattern, it is not hidden even if the player performs any operation until the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent the loss of interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

[Configuration 8-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. The first acceptance period can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, and if the acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the first acceptance period can occur. In the second reception period, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output. , even if the acceptance is made, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or the state in which it is not audibly output is maintained. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 8-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 8-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or not to be audibly output in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. be able to

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 8-A", in the first reception period, when the reception is made, all the sounds that were audibly output at that time are inaudible (only the specific BGM is audible output In the second acceptance period, all the sounds that were audibly output at that time are made inaudible (only one sound is audibly output). Sometimes only the one sound may be made inaudible. That is, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is not audibly output", and when the reception is made, it is It is possible to provide a common performance between the first reception period and the second reception period, such as making all the sounds that are played inaudible, and to improve the amusement of the game. become.

Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "Configuration 8-A", the specific BGM is made inaudible during the first reception period (during the effective period) while the reception of operations by the player is allowed. However, it is desirable to continue the reception period even in such a situation. That is, in this case, in spite of the fact that the specific BGM is rendered inaudible when the reception is made during the first reception period, no reception is made for a predetermined period of time after the occurrence of the first reception period. If not, the specific BGM will be made inaudible while the reception is not yet done, so that it will be possible to make one think that the first reception period has ended, and the game will be played. You will be able to strongly attract people's interest.

When the acceptance is made, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with this as a trigger, a "display change according to the acceptance (display after the first acceptance)" is generated in accordance with this, but the acceptance has not yet been made. When the specific BGM is made inaudible while not in use, it is desirable not to generate "display change in response to reception (display after first reception)" accordingly. In other words, in this case, the first acceptance period is continued by confirming that the specific BGM has been made inaudible, but the "display change in response to acceptance (display after first acceptance)" has not yet occurred. You will be able to make yourself aware of the possibility that you are doing it. After the specific BGM is made inaudible, if the player's operation is accepted before the end of the first acceptance period, this will be used as a trigger to "change the display in response to the acceptance (first acceptance)". To improve amusement in a game by eliminating a sense of unease (concern that the period of validity may have expired) when the specific BGM is rendered inaudible, since "post-display)" is generated. will be able to

[Composition 9-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as operation means, a plurality of operations including a first operation means (first operation receiving portion) and a second operation means (second operation receiving portion) are performed. A means is prepared, and multiple types of acceptance periods, including a specific acceptance period, are prepared as the acceptance period. During the specified acceptance period, both acceptance of an operation for the first operating means and acceptance of an operation for the second operating means are allowed as acceptances for causing display changes corresponding to the specified acceptance period. , a specific display change can occur when an operation on the first operating means is accepted, and the specific display change does not occur when an operation on the second operating means is accepted. Since it is possible to generate a display change that is different from the display, it is possible to make it interesting as to which operation means is operated. In addition, the "specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change))", "first operation means", and "second operation means" related to the configuration 9-A are the technology of the configuration 9-A. It is just a designation used to describe the idea. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "acceptance period" or "operation means" related to other configurations, or may mean a reception period or operation means different from those acceptance periods. .

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 9-A", the specific reception period is terminated when the first operation means is operated during the specific reception period, but when the second operation means is operated The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific acceptance period. In other words, in this case, as a reception period using multiple operation means, it will be possible to have unprecedented performance, so various interesting reception periods premised on such performance will be created. be able to provide.

[Configuration 10-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. During the first acceptance period, a model image display simulating the operation receiving part is displayed, and during the second acceptance period, a plurality of model image displays simulating the operation receiving part are displayed. can be executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by. Note that the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 10-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 10-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, for example, even if a plurality of operation receiving units with different required operations (for example, pushing, pulling, etc.) are prepared, the player can perform any operation. This makes it easier to recognize whether or not a valid period has expired, thereby making it difficult to cause a situation in which the operation cannot be completed in time.

Also, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 10-A" is adopted, the simulated image display is executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving unit is made movable by the player's operation". In some cases, it may not be executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation". That is, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed even under the situation where the simulated image display is displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

[Configuration 11-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operating means (a plurality of operation receiving units) including a specific operating means (specific operation receiving unit) are prepared as operating means, As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, a model image display imitating the specific operation means and a specific image corresponding to the model image display are displayed, and "specify by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time. "remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which the acceptance of the operation for the operation means is permitted" is performed, and in the second acceptance period, a model image simulating the specific operation means is displayed, but the model image is displayed. A specific image corresponding to the display is displayed, and ``remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the specific operation means is permitted by decreasing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time'' is performed. I try not to get caught. The "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 11-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 11-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, even if a simulated image display imitating the specific operation means is displayed, it is possible to accept the operation for the specific operation means by reducing the display area of the specific image according to the passage of time. Since the "remaining time specific display" suggesting the remaining time is not necessarily performed, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

As will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 11-A", during the second reception period, a specific model image display imitating a specific operation means and a special model image display imitating a special operation means different from this are displayed. is performed, the above-described "remaining time specific display" may not be performed.

That is, in this case, in the second acceptance period, although both the acceptance of an operation for the specific operation means and the acceptance of an operation for a different operation means are allowed, the above-described "remaining time specific display" is displayed. will not be performed. As a result, the second acceptance period is generated without the player being overwhelmed by the fact that both the acceptance of the operation for the specific operation means and the acceptance of the operation for the different operation means are allowed. It is possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when the user is present.

[Configuration 12-A]
Also, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the operation means, "a first operation receiving portion that is displaced by the operation by the player, and a first peripheral decorative portion provided on the peripheral edge. 1 operation means" and "second operation means having a second operation receiving portion that is displaced by a player's operation and a second peripheral decorative portion provided on the peripheral edge of the second operation receiving portion” are prepared. When displaying the first model image display that imitates the first operation means, the first operation receiving part model image that imitates the first operation receiving part and the first peripheral part that decorates the periphery of the first receiving part model image are displayed. When displaying a second model image display that simulates the second operation means, a second operation receiver model image that simulates the second operation receiver and the second receiver model image can be displayed. A second border decoration image that decorates the border can be displayed, and the first border decoration image and the second border decoration image are displayed as images different from each other. The "first operating means" and "second operating means" of the configuration 12-A are merely names used to describe the technical concept of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or "second operation means" according to other configurations, or may mean operation means on opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean an operation means different from those operation means.

According to such a configuration, even if the operation means themselves are similar, the appearance of the first operation means and the second operation means can be greatly different from each other. As a result, it is expected that it will be easy to distinguish which operating means should be operated.

Further, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 12-A" is adopted, the first peripheral edge decoration image is displayed as an image imitating the first peripheral edge decoration portion, but the second peripheral edge decoration image is displayed as the second peripheral edge decoration. The image may be displayed as an image including at least a portion imitating a peripheral decoration portion different from the portion. That is, in this case, when the "first simulated image display" having the first peripheral decoration image, which is an image obtained by simulating the first peripheral decoration, is displayed, the first operation means is given an opportunity to operate. It becomes possible to suitably recognize that it is in. On the other hand, when the "second model image display" having the second peripheral edge decoration image, which is an image that does not imitate the second peripheral edge decoration portion, is displayed, an operation opportunity is given to the second operating means. It becomes possible to provide the situation where the player is in the situation as a situation with higher performance. In this case, the "second operating means corresponding to the second model image display" has a larger operation receiving portion (first operation receiving portion) than the "first operating means corresponding to the first model image display". Even if the second peripheral edge decoration image, which is an image that does not simulate the second peripheral edge decoration portion, is displayed, for example, if it is provided as a member, it may become difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated. It is desirable to avoid

In addition, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the second operation means as a "situation with higher performance", the second peripheral decoration image is a fictitious image that does not actually exist in the game machine. It is desirable to display the image as an image simulating the decoration. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the second operating means is given an opportunity to operate, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a part imitating the second peripheral decoration. You may allow

[Configuration 13-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receiving portions including a first operation receiving portion, a second operation receiving portion, and a third operation receiving portion are prepared as operation means. As the reception period, we have prepared multiple types of reception periods, including specific reception periods. Then, during the specific reception period, display of a first simulated image simulating the first operation receiving portion, display of a second simulated image simulating the second operation receiving portion, and display of a third simulated image simulating the third operation receiving portion. are displayed, and when an operation is accepted for the first operation receiving portion among the plurality of operation receiving portions, the acceptance is displayed among the first model image display, the second model image display, and the third model image display. At least the display of the second model image and the display of the third model image imitating the operation receiving part that has not been performed are hidden. The "first operation receiving unit", "second operation receiving unit", "third operation receiving unit", and "specific reception period" related to the configuration 13-A are based on the technical concept of the configuration 13-A. It's just a nomenclature used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same thing as the "operation receiving unit" or "receiving period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different thing.

According to the above configuration, a model image display (second Since the model image display, the third model image display) are hidden, the operation receiving units (the second operation receiving unit, the third It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not a further operation is necessary for the operation receiving portion).

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 13-A", in the specific reception period, the first model image display, the second model image display, and the third model image display are displayed. Of the first operation receiving portion, the second operation receiving portion, and the third operation receiving portion, the third operation receiving portion may not be enabled (permitted) to receive the operation. That is, in this case, during the specific reception period, the first display change is generated when the operation of the first operation receiving section is received, and the second display change is generated when the operation of the second operation receiving section is received. However, since the operation to the third operation receiving section is not accepted and the display change triggered by the operation does not occur, until the operation by the player is accepted during the specific acceptance period It is possible to suitably maintain the performance and tension of the game.

[Configuration 14-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In both cases, when the first reception period occurs and when the second reception period occurs, character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Although the same action is accepted as the action by the player in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, different character information (for example, "press!", "please press", etc.) is displayed. I'm trying to The "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 14-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 14-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

That is, in the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change (post-acceptance display) that occurs as a result of detection of the action is requested. are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the character information displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since it is designed to be different according to the type (type of display after reception), operation (action by the player) while recognizing which type of display change may occur as display after reception can be performed, and it is expected that the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

In addition, when requesting a different action (operation mode) from the player, even if the acceptance period is of the same type (that generates the same post-acceptance display), the fact that the acceptance period has occurred It is more desirable to make the character information displayed as different from each other in order to suppress operation errors by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182(c)). In the same sense, when a different action (operation mode) is requested to the player, and the acceptance period is of a different type (that causes a different post-acceptance display), the acceptance period is It is desirable to have the textual information displayed in relation to what has occurred be different from each other.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the case of the first acceptance period is requested, and the same character information and model image display as in the case of the first acceptance period are displayed. may further prepare a reception period for generating a different post-reception display. That is, in this case, just by looking at the character information or the simulated image display, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the post-reception display. be expected to maintain.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 14-A", in the first reception period, the character information is not displayed until the acceptance is allowed (valid state) is terminated. On the other hand, during the second acceptance period, while the acceptance state (effective state) continues, the character information can be hidden during that period. It is more desirable to have In other words, in this case, during the second acceptance period, if the player does not perform an operation (predetermined action) in a relatively short time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any action (operation mode). As it becomes difficult to recognize whether the application period is valid or not, and in turn, it becomes difficult to recognize the type of application period, it is difficult to recognize the type of application period. It will be expected to preferably avoid such a situation that the tension is completely lost.

Although this will also be described later, when the "configuration 14-A" is adopted, the second acceptance period includes a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is not displayed. Different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the acceptance is made. In other words, in this case, a display change is prepared that cannot be confirmed unless it becomes difficult to recognize what kind of operation mode is requested (a state in which character information is not displayed). The sense of tension is preferably maintained through such performance.

When the first accepting period occurs, the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player, and the second accepting period occur. In this case, it is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed until it is hidden when the player does not perform an operation is different from each other.

[Configuration 15-A]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first acceptance period, only one mode of model image display can be displayed, and in the second acceptance period, any one of a plurality of modes can be displayed as model image display. In addition, the "first reception period (display after first reception)" and "second reception period (display after second reception)" related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical concept of the configuration 2-A. It is just a name used for Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, during the second reception period, since the effect that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, the operation (action) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to suitably improve the game interest of.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "multi-mode model image display" that can be displayed during the second reception period, it is possible to set the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit pattern to differ depending on which model image display is displayed. It is more desirable to improve interest. Also, any one of the "plural modes of simulated image display" may be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period. In this case, it is desirable that the "least anticipated aspect" of the "multiple modes of simulated image display" be the same as the "one mode" that can be displayed during the first acceptance period.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "Configuration 15-A", a third reception period is further provided, and only one mode is displayed as a model image display during the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be made possible. Then, during the "second receiving period" in which the model image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which the model image display is displayed only in one mode, the valid state (reception period) is terminated during the "first reception period". However, in the "third reception period", until the effective state (reception period) ends (the effective state is continued) In the meantime, the model image that has been displayed until then may be hidden. That is, in this case, even during the "first reception period" and the "third reception period" in which only one mode is displayed as the model image display, whether or not the model image display is hidden in the middle of the period is determined. Since the effect is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the amusement of the game until the player's operation (action) is detected. The model image display displayed during the first reception period and the model image display displayed during the third reception period may be the same, but they may not necessarily be the same, so that they are not displayed. You may suggest the possibility of being made into.

Also, as will be described later, when the "Configuration 15-A" is adopted, the third reception period includes a period during which the model image display is displayed and a period during which the model image display is not displayed. However, different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the request is accepted. In other words, in this case, a display change is prepared that cannot be confirmed unless the state (a state in which the model image display is hidden) is made aware of the possibility that the reception period has ended. The sense of tension is preferably maintained through such performance.

It should be noted that the "third reception period (display after third reception)" of the configuration 15-A is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, the first reception period or the second reception period according to other configurations) 2 acceptance period, etc.).

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a model image related to the reception object (such as a model image that imitates the operation receiving part) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated simulated image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the peripheral edge decoration image that decorates the peripheral edge of the image, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game until the display (display change) is executed after reception. I am trying to Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect and the high-expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in any one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period) occurs, it suggests that the operation acceptance is allowed or that the operation acceptance is allowed. A reception permitting sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the sound output is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each acceptance allowable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is possible to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of accepting acceptable state is the valid period that can occur in either the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception period). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

However, among the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the highly anticipated special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period) 232, and in the second-type reception acceptance state (acceptance period), it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (c)). ing. In the first type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), the "integrated model image display" in any of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, Figure 232 (a) ~ (d)) based on the result of the jackpot determination A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), "integrated model image" in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the configurations 1 to 15 will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, for each configuration described in the specification to be described below, only the corresponding configuration can be arbitrarily selected and adopted when further effects are desired.

First, specific examples of the configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception, which are performed when the reception is received). We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least reception periods A (reception effects A) to D (reception effects D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects).

With reference to FIGS. 273 to 282, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that with regard to each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. Alternatively, it may be realized as any one of reception period A (reception effect A) to reception period D (reception effect D).

FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when condition A is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period A (reception effect A) occurs. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period A (reception effect A) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect depiction according to the variable pattern A, the sound output of the specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 279(a)"), Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern A" itself. It should be noted that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 279(a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ as shown in FIG. 273(a). When timing tM2 arrives after a predetermined time A has passed since (when condition A is satisfied), the reception period A (effective period) is generated ("Fig. 279(b)”). This acceptance period A occurs in a state where the specific BGM is being output without suppression. Thus, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, the post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (situation shown in FIG. 279(c)).

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period A, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) ), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period, a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display), depending on the acceptance A post-acceptance display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is performed respectively. As described above, the model image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated model image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. Further, when a model image display is displayed instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. "Integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed so as to straddle the timing tM2 at which the acceptance period A occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is hidden when the application is accepted within the acceptance period A, or when the acceptance period A ends without the acceptance being made. It should be noted that the acceptance period A according to this example ends when the timing tM3 arrives if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 273(h)). .

In this respect, in the examples shown in FIGS. 273(a) to (g) and the examples shown in FIGS. It is assumed that That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 273(a) to (g) and FIGS. 279(b) and (c), the reception period When A is terminated, the post-reception display A (post-reception effect A) corresponding to the reception period A is started to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 279, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display A has a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, "It's a chance") may be executed, or the second mode (for example, "It's intense heat") with a relatively high degree of expectation as the post-acceptance display A may be executed.

However, although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 273(b), when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of acceptance sound A in response to the acceptance is started). At the timing tM2a, the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time period during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after the reception is made. However, despite the fact that the reception has already started and the audible output of the reception sound A has already started, the same mode as when the integrated model image display IG was during the reception period (shown in FIG. 255) 263(e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "noticing the post-reception effect (reception sound A in this case) in the execution state is delayed".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, as shown in FIG. (When the timing tM2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance-related effect (disappearance-related display A corresponding to the reception period A) is started as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The “disappearance-related effect” here means an image (another image different from the integrated model image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden. At the time when the display of the "annihilation-related effect" is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden but visible, and the integrated model is displayed while the "annihilation-related effect" is being displayed. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is being displayed, the “disappearance-related display A (disappearance EF in the drawing)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where "disappearance related display A" is displayed overlaps the area where "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed It is designed to

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to be visually recognized. It becomes possible to suggest that A is in a situation where it has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where the reception sound A has already been performed, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to see. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated simulated image display IG was displayed in A. Further, even after the processing for audibly outputting the reception sound A is started, until the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (timings tM2a to tM2b), the integrated model image display Since the mode of IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, during the reception period A, the same mode appears as the disappearance-related display A regardless of whether the corresponding post-reception display A, a mode with a low expectation or a mode with a high expectation, is executed. I'm trying As a result, even in a situation where reception sound A has started to be executed, the effect display device 1600 can keep the degree of expectation confidential.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tM2c within the period in which the player is present arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" corresponding to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period A is started. The post-acceptance display A may be a case in which a first mode with relatively low expectations (eg, "Chance!") is executed, or a second mode with relatively high expectations (eg, "Intense heat!"). ”) may be executed as described above.

That is, in this case, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" is started while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display A" are being displayed. In addition, since the "post-acceptance display A" is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the acceptance period A has already ended, and the player's attention is naturally expected to shift from "integrated model image display IG" to "post-reception display A" (after timing tM2c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-acceptance display A" is thus started, the "post-acceptance display A" is displayed as shown in FIGS. Of the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display A" among the displayed images, first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display A" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 279, illustration of the progress of these effects is omitted).

In this regard, the "post-receipt display A" is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 273(d), the "post-acceptance display A" continues for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display A" are hidden. will be executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the reception permitting sound is started to be output at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 273(f). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output across the timing tM2 at which the reception period A occurs. , the operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in the reception period A, as shown in FIG. The permissible sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined time. In other words, as will be described later, during the plurality of reception periods, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptable sound is produced based on the acceptance. An acceptance period is included during which the audible output state is prematurely terminated. Therefore, when a mode in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound is continued as a result of acceptance while the acceptance acceptable sound is being audibly output within the acceptance period A, it is determined whether or not it is in a state of being accepted. It becomes possible to make it difficult to perceive, and it is expected that the tension will be favorably maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 273(d) and 279(c), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated model image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbols SZ, but the after-acceptance display A is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbols SZ. First, the decorative pattern SZ is preferentially displayed with respect to the display A after reception. 273(d) and 279(d), the post-acceptance display A according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. .

On the other hand, FIGS. 273(h) to (n) and ``an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 279(b) to FIG. 279(d) without going through FIG. It is assumed that the action by the player is not accepted in .

That is, in this case, after the accepting period A occurs, the timing tM3 comes without accepting the action (operation) by the player (and without activating the automatic button function). In this regard, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (when the acceptance period A ends and the acceptance of the action by the player is no longer permitted) is performed at the timing tM2a (within the acceptance period A, the action by the player is As with the effect display device 1600 at the time of acceptance, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. (in the example of FIG. 255, the mode shown in FIG. 263(e3)).

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period A ends because the player's action is not received in time, the integrated model image display IG will be displayed within the reception period A after the end of the reception period A. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what form the game was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game.

Also, during the reception period A, when the action by the player is not received, as shown in FIG. The display of disappearance-related display A) corresponding to period A is not started. At this time, any technique for fading out the integrated model image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

FIG. 274 is a time chart showing an example of the effect content when condition B is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period B (second reception effect B) occurs. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period B (reception effect B) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probable variable/non-time saving), and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern B is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the variable pattern B, the sound output of the specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 280(a)"), and the variable effect is started. Within the execution period, an effect (announcement effect) according to the result of the determination of the foretell effect is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "variation pattern B" itself. Note that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 280(a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

However, in the effect related to "fluctuation pattern B", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), as shown in FIG. The acceptance period B (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding display B after acceptance" is allowed when timing tN2 (for example, timing within the SP reach state) arrives after a predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of (situation shown in FIG. 280(b)). This acceptance period B occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, the post-acceptance display is performed based on the acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 280(b), the receiving period B occurs when the decorative symbol SZ forms the ready-to-win state.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, this In relation to this, a model image display that suggests the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), a gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (the model image display is not visible) Difficult mode), and post-acceptance display suggesting the degree of expectation (proportion of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%". As described above, the model image display is displayed as an "integrated model image display IG" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It may be displayed. Further, when a model image display is displayed instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, also in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tN2 at which the acceptance period B occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is displayed when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the acceptance period B), or when the acceptance period B ends without the acceptance being made. The fact that it is hidden is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 273 (acceptance period A). It should be noted that the acceptance period B according to this example is terminated when the timing tN3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 274(h)).

Here, in the above-described "acceptance period A (see FIG. 279(b))", when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed, no character information corresponding to this is displayed. , "acceptance period B (see FIG. 280(b))", character information (here, , "Press") are displayed. That is, in the "acceptance period A" and the "acceptance period B", the same mode as the model image display (integrated model image display IG) (among the multiple modes shown in FIGS. 232(a)) is used, when the "acceptance period B" occurs, character information (here, "press") that does not appear when the "acceptance period A" occurs ) is displayed, which suggests that the degree of expectation that can be suggested as a post-reception display is different. In this example, the degree of expectation (proportion) of the appearance of the big winning symbols when the symbols are stopped is higher in the case where the acceptance period B occurs than in the case where the acceptance period A occurs. Alternatively, in the after-receipt display B corresponding to the reception period B, a mode suggesting that the expectation of the appearance of the big hit pattern is 100% can appear, whereas the reception according to the reception period A In the post-display A, it may be possible to prevent the appearance of a mode suggesting that the degree of expectation for the appearance of the jackpot pattern is 100%.

In this respect, in the examples shown in FIGS. 274(a) to (g), it is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tN2a within the acceptance period B. FIG. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 274(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at the timing tN2a, the acceptance period B ends and the After-acceptance display B (after-acceptance effect B) is started to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 280, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display B is a first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, "Destroy 10 bodies!") is executed, and the second mode (for example, "Destroy 100 bodies!"), which is relatively expected as display B after reception, is executed. there is

Although the details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the acceptance period B shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 274(b), when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of acceptance sound B in response to the acceptance is started). At timing tN2a, the integrated simulated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to easily recognize in which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer "time period during which the integrated model image display IG is displayed in an easily visible form" after the reception is made. However, despite the fact that the reception has already started and the audible output of the reception sound B has already started, the same mode as when the integrated model image display IG was during the reception period (shown in FIG. 256) 265(e1) and (e2)), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "noticing the post-acceptance effect (acceptance sound B in this case) in the execution state is delayed".

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, as shown in FIG. (When the timing tN2b arrives), the display related to the "disappearance-related display B" different from the disappearance-related display A is started as "a mode in which the integrated simulated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The "disappearance-related display (disappearance-related effect)" here means an image that is displayed for a predetermined period of time until the integrated simulated image display IG is hidden (a different image from the integrated simulated image display IG). It's about. At the time when the display of the "annihilation-related effect" is started, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden but visible, and the integrated model is displayed while the "annihilation-related effect" is being displayed. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to be visually recognized. It becomes possible to suggest that B is in a situation where it has already been executed. As a result, even in a situation where reception sound B has already been performed, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long period of time, although it is difficult to see. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated simulated image display IG was displayed in B. Further, even after the processing for audibly outputting the reception sound B is started, until the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to see (timings tN2a to tN2b), the integrated model image display Since the mode of IG can be confirmed with good visual recognition, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Also, although illustration is omitted, during the reception period B, the appearance of the disappearance-related display B differs depending on whether a mode with a low degree of expectation appears or a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as the post-reception effect B corresponding to this. (Disappearance-related displays B1, B2) are made to appear. That is, in this case, even if the "post-acceptance display B" using the effect display device 1600 is not yet started, the disappearance-related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is the first mode and the second mode. By confirming whether it appears in either mode or mode, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "post-reception display B" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. When the timing tN2c within the period in which the player is present arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display B" corresponding to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period B is started. The post-acceptance display B may be a case in which a relatively low-expected first mode (e.g., "Defeat 10 enemies!") is executed, or a relatively high-expected second mode (e.g., "100 Body attack!") may be executed as described above.

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B (disappearance-related display B1 or disappearance-related display B2)" are displayed, respectively, the "post-acceptance display B (first mode or first mode)" 2 aspect)” is started to be executed. In addition, since the post-acceptance display B is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the acceptance period B has already ended, and the player's gaze is " It is expected that the integrated model image display IG" will naturally shift to the "post-reception display B" (after timing tN2c).

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "post-acceptance display B" is thus started, the "post-acceptance display B" is displayed as shown in FIGS. Of the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display B" among the displayed images, first, the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden. After the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden. ” will be displayed (in FIG. 280, illustration of these production developments is omitted). .

In this regard, the “post-receipt display B” is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274(d), the "post-acceptance display B" continues for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display B" are hidden. will be executed over

Incidentally, in the production example (FIG. 279) corresponding to the acceptance period A described above, even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period A and the "post-acceptance display A" is executed, the "post-acceptance display A" is started. The background image is maintained without switching before and after In this regard, in the production example (FIG. 280) corresponding to the acceptance period B, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period B and the "post-acceptance display B" is executed, the "post-acceptance display B" is started. The background image may be switched before and after.

According to such a configuration, during the period (timings tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 274) in which the background image is not switched, even if there is some display change in the effect display device 1600, the "post-acceptance display B ” will be able to suggest that it is in a situation that has not yet started.

In this case, as the post-acceptance display B, the background image may be switched to the same background image depending on whether the mode with low expectations appears or the mode with high expectations appears, or the mode with low expectations appears. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on the situation and the situation where a highly expected aspect appears. Alternatively, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the reception permitting sound is started to be output at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 274(f). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the reception period B is audibly output across the timing tN2 at which the reception period B occurs. , the operation (operation) can be accepted.

Here, in the reception period B, as the reception acceptable sound, a long-time acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time. It is designed to be output. In the example shown in FIG. 274(f), the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at the timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs or after that.

Then, in the acceptance period B, when the action is accepted by the player while the long-time allowable sound and (or) the short-time allowable sound are audibly output, the long-term The time permissible sound and/or the short permissible sound are terminated prematurely (premature termination of the audible output state).

In addition, during the acceptance period B, as shown in FIG. , the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated in the middle, and audible output of the acceptance sound B is started when the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, during the reception period B, unlike the display change, the effect (acceptance acceptable sound) performed during the reception period and the effect (second reception sound) performed in response to the acceptance are performed. Conflicting (overlapping) periods will no longer occur.

In such a second reception sound, as shown in FIG. 274(g), the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance related display B" are hidden as in the case of the "post-reception display B". After that, it will be executed over a relatively long period of time. Further, with respect to the second reception sound, different output sounds (modes) may be output depending on whether the post-reception display B shows a mode with a high expectation or a mode with a low expectation. desirable. On the other hand, as for the first reception sound, the same output sound (mode) is output when the mode with high expectation appears as the post-reception display A and when the mode with low expectation appears. is desirable.

In the reception period B, the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the reception allowable sounds. Only one acceptable sound may be output as shown in FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 274(d) and 280(d), the post-acceptance display B according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated model image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-acceptance display B is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ. The post-acceptance display B according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of display, as shown in FIGS. 274(d) and 280(d). The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved.

On the other hand, FIGS. 274(h) to 274(n) assume the case where the action by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B. FIG.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period B occurs, the timing tN3 comes without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, unlike the reception period A, the reception period B is set as "the reception period for which the automatic button function described above is activated". Therefore, even if the above timing tN3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted in the reception period B, the action (operation) by the player will be performed within the reception period B thereafter. The same after-receipt display B as when there was received is generated.

However, in the reception period B according to this embodiment, although the above-described automatic button function is activated, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tN3 does not allow the player to 274(i), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, as shown in FIG. Also, the display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period B ends because the action (operation) by the player is not received in time, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period B after the end of the reception period B. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. As a "mode in which the integrated model image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", display related to disappearance-related display B is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed while the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed. At least part of the area where the "disappearance-related display B" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance period B ends without acceptance, the integrated model image display IG cannot be visually recognized. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the acceptance period B has ended. In addition, even in a situation where the reception period B has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period B.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of disappearance-related display B that appears when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B is the action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period B. ) appears if it is accepted.

That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the accepting period B, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the accepting period B ends. Only by confirming the mode of the "disappearance-related display B" that appears, it becomes possible to recognize whether the post-acceptance display B was executed in a mode with low expectations or in a mode with high expectations. As a result, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

After that, when the timing tN3b arrives, the execution of the "post-acceptance display B" is started in a manner that would have appeared if the action (operation) by the player had been accepted within the acceptance period B (FIG. 280(b)). ) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 280(c) appears regardless of whether or not there is an operation).

After that, as shown in FIGS. 274(i) to (k), out of the “integrated model image display IG” and “disappearance-related display B”, first, the “integrated model image display IG” is turned off. display. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance-related display B" is hidden.

It should be noted that the timing at which the "disappearance-related display B" appears and the timing at which the "post-acceptance display B" starts to be executed do not have to be after the timing tN3 when the acceptance period B ends, and the acceptance period B ends. It may be the timing tN3 at which it is performed, or it may be the timing earlier than that.

FIG. 275 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when condition C is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period C (reception effect C) occurs. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period C (reception effect C) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (hold digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern C" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (depiction according to the variable pattern C, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variable effect, according to the result of the notice effect determination The effect (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. Note that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 281(a), a landscape depicting a desert is displayed as the background image HG3.

However, in the effect related to the "variation pattern C", even if any result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination), the predetermined time C has passed since the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ was started. When the timing t02 (which may be the timing before the occurrence of the SP reach state or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the "acceptance of the display C after acceptance" is permitted. A reception period C (effective period) is generated. This reception period C occurs after the specific BGM is output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. Thus, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the post-acceptance display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not necessarily required, and the acceptance period C (effective period) may be generated as a result of the announcement effect determination.

In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this embodiment, when such a reception period C occurs, the degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is suggested according to the acceptance. Although the post-acceptance display C is performed, unlike the case where the above-described acceptance periods A and B occur (FIGS. 273 and 274), in relation to this, a model that suggests an acceptance target (operation receiving unit, etc.) Image display, gauge image display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, disappearance-related display that makes it difficult to see the model image display (a mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display), etc. . The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. etc. will not be performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize at what timing the reception period C starts and at which timing the reception period C ends, and even to recognize the existence of the reception period C itself. It will be done. It should be noted that the acceptance period C according to this example ends when the timing tO3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 275(h)).

In this respect, in the examples shown in FIGS. 275(a) to (g), it is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing t02a within the acceptance period C. FIG. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 275(a), based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at the timing t02a, the reception period C ends, and the reception period C starts. The post-acceptance display C (post-acceptance effect C) is started to be executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 281, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display C is a first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, A mode with a small number of ghosts appearing as a group of ghosts) is executed, or a second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation as display C after reception (for example, a mode with a large number of ghosts appearing as a group of ghosts) is executed. It is designed to be executed in some cases.

As described above, during the acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 275(c), when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, no disappearance-related display is performed. Also, when the acceptance period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 275(f), no acceptance acceptance sound is output.

As shown in FIGS. 275(d) and 281(c), the post-acceptance display C according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-acceptance display C is not preferentially displayed over the decorative symbols SZ, and the decorative symbols SZ are preferentially displayed relative to the post-acceptance display C. . 275(d) and 281(d), the post-acceptance display C according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the display was started. .

On the other hand, FIGS. 275(h) to (n) and ``an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 281(b) to FIG. 281(d) without going through FIG. It is assumed that the action by the player is not accepted in .

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period C occurs, the timing t03 comes without accepting the action (operation) by the player (and without activating the automatic button function). However, during the reception period C, since there is no display change due to the end of the period C, the timing t03 (when the reception period C ends and the action by the player is Even when the reception is no longer allowed), only the background image HG3 is played on the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

FIGS. 276 and 277 are time charts showing an example of the content of effects when condition D is satisfied as a result of determination and reception period D (reception effect D) occurs. FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period D (reception effect D) occurs.

Now, the specific game state (for example, the normal game state that is non-probability variation and non-time-saving) is established (holding digestion), and the result of the variation pattern determination is "variation pattern D1 (Fig. 276)" or Assuming that "variation pattern D2 (FIG. 277)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect depiction corresponding to the variable patterns D1 and D2, the sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started (“Situation shown in FIG. 282(a)”). ), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is added to the performance of the selected “variation pattern D1” or “variation pattern D2” itself. It will be executed. Note that in the rendering example shown in FIG. 282(a), a landscape depicting mountains and a river is displayed as the background image HG4a.

That is, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (announcement determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes decorative patterns as shown in FIGS. When the timing tP2 when the predetermined time D has passed since the start of the variable effect of SZ has arrived (when the condition D is satisfied), the reception period D (valid period) is generated (“Situation shown in FIG. 282(b)”). As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D is performed based on the acceptance (situation shown in FIG. 282(c)).

However, more precisely, when the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect is selected, the acceptance period D is set after the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, as shown in FIG. 276(a). It occurs when the timing tP2-D1 (the timing that arrives after the timing at which the ready-to-win state is formed) arrives after the time D1 has passed (when the condition D1 is established), but the ready-to-win effect is not generated. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 277(a), when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started (the condition D2 is is established).

Moreover, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect is shown in FIG. 276 (e) so that the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner, or a state of making it inaudible is generated before the timing tP2-D1 arrives. That is, in this case, the receiving period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or is rendered inaudible.

On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is generated, FIG. , the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner when the timing tP2-D2 arrives. That is, in this case, the receiving period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

In this way, the acceptance period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 when the predetermined time D1 has passed since the start of the variation performance of the variation pattern D1 for generating the ready-to-win performance, or the ready-to-win performance is not generated. Depending on whether it occurs at timing tP2-D2 when a predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the variable pattern D2, the mode of the effect differs.

First, FIG. 276 shows an example of an effect when a receiving period D occurs when a timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which a predetermined time D1 has passed since the start of the variable effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect is generated. and FIG. 282.

As shown in FIGS. 276(a) and 276(b), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a reception period D, an object to be received (an operation receiving unit, etc.) ), a gauge image that suggests the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of the jackpot pattern that appears) according to the acceptance. there is As described above, the model image display according to this embodiment is displayed as an "integrated model image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. Further, when a model image display is displayed instead of the "integrated model image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. "Integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed so as to straddle the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) at which the acceptance period D occurs. The "integrated model image display IG" is hidden (invisible) when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D, or when the acceptance period D ends without the acceptance being made. It should be noted that the acceptance period D according to this example is terminated when the timing tP3 arrives if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (see FIG. 276(h)). .

In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 276(a) to (g), and in the examples following the production route of FIG. 282(b)→FIG. 282(e)→FIG. It is assumed that an action (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tPx within period D. That is, in this case, based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player at the timing tPx, the acceptance period D ends, and the post-acceptance display D (post-acceptance effect D) corresponding to the acceptance period D is displayed. Execution is started.

Note that in the example shown in FIG. 282(c), only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. FIG. However, although illustration is omitted, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display D is a first mode with relatively low expectations (for example, A cut-in by a princess character) may be executed, or a second mode (for example, a cut-in by a samurai character), which is relatively expected as the post-acceptance display D, may be executed.

However, during the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276(b), at the time when the action (operation) by the player is received (here, timing tPx), the integrated model image display IG is hidden. In addition, the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

In addition, during the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276(c), even if a predetermined time elapses from the timing tPx at which the reception period D ends due to the acceptance of an action (operation) by the player, the disappearance-related effect is never displayed. That is, during the acceptance period D, the disappearance-related display corresponding to this (an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated simulated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated simulated image display IG)) is not prepared, and the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden.

276(b) to (d), during the reception period D, when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated model image display IG is being displayed, Execution of "post-acceptance display D" is started in response to acceptance of the action (operation).

However, during the acceptance period D, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, as shown in FIG. The display is started in such a manner that it overlaps with the entire area and is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated model image display IG. “Post-acceptance display D” may be displayed on the entire screen of effect display device 1600 .

According to such a configuration, when the display of the "post-acceptance display D" starts based on the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player, the integrated model image display IG is suddenly hidden (displayed on the layer). Even if it remains), it will be possible to provide a different performance than other reception periods that use disappearance effects. It should be noted that the post-acceptance display D according to this example is also hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the display was started.

In addition, during the reception period D, unlike the other reception periods, even if the display related to the "post-reception display D" starts based on the acceptance, the acceptance will be the trigger. The processing related to the display of the "integrated model image display IG" is not terminated. That is, in the acceptance period D, the process for displaying the "integrated model image display IG" is continued until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (here, timing tP3). is terminated when is satisfied. Note that when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the acceptance period D continues, the "integrated model image display IG" In addition to terminating the display processing, processing for terminating the acceptance period D is also performed.

That is, in the acceptance period D, when the "post-acceptance display D" starts to be displayed based on the acceptance, the period D ends based on the acceptance. , the display processing of the "integrated model image display IG" itself is not terminated, and the display on the layer is continued. However, since the "post-reception display D" is preferentially displayed over the "integrated model image display IG", the "post-reception display D" prevents the "integrated model image display IG" from 276 and 277, the period covered with diagonal lines is the simulated image display (integrated Equivalent to the period during which the model image display IG) is hidden (invisible)).

In this case, the "integrated model image display IG" may not be completely hidden, but may be made invisible through a predetermined transmittance set in the "post-reception display D".

Further, during the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 276(b), 282(b), (e), and (f), the state in which the player's actions (operations) are permitted to be accepted continues. 276 and 277), the "integrated model image display IG" is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), and the "integrated model image display IG" is changed from the non-display state. The display state may be set (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even when the "integrated model image display IG" is in the non-display state, if an action (operation) is performed by the player, the action (operation) is accepted. 282(e)→FIG. 282(c).

In this example, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, is it accepted before the "integrated model image display IG" becomes non-display (FIG. 282)? (b)→FIG. 282(c)), or whether the acceptance was made when the “integrated model image display IG” was in the non-display state (FIG. 282(e)→FIG. 282(c)), or “integrated Regardless of whether the reception was made after the "simulated image display IG" was returned to the display state again (Fig. 282(f) → Fig. 282(c)), the same mode as the "post-reception display D" (Fig. 282 ( c)) is made to appear.

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. It is possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game is suddenly replaced with the one shown in b), and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game through such a surprise performance. On the other hand, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted in a situation that seems to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period C (in the non-display state of the integrated model image display IG), the acceptance period Since the same mode (FIG. 282(c)) is displayed as the "post-acceptance display D" corresponding to D, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the background image is changed when the "integrated simulated image display IG" changes from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it is expected that an atmosphere of suddenly being replaced with another reception period can be more favorably created. become.

In particular, in this example, the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to the "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from the "background image HG3" (see FIG. 282 ( b)→FIG. 282(e)). According to such a configuration, when the "integrated model image display IG" changes to the non-display state, it is more suitable to create an atmosphere as if the acceptance period C, which may occur in the background of the desert, is suddenly replaced. will be expected.

In this example, when the "integrated model image display IG" is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 282(e)→FIG. 282(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D will be more suitably created from other reception periods (especially reception period C).

Further, as shown in FIG. 282(c), the post-acceptance display D according to this example is displayed at a position at least partially overlapping the decorative pattern SZ (displayed over the entire screen). may be)). In this example, the integrated model image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, and the post-acceptance display D is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ. The post-acceptance display D according to this example is hidden after a predetermined period of time has passed since the display started, as shown in FIG. 276(d) and FIG. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved. It should be noted that the situation shown in FIG. 282(d) shows a situation in which the production in the ready-to-win state progresses and enters into the SP ready-to-win production.

However, if the post-acceptance display D is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative pattern SZ, until the display time as the post-acceptance display D elapses, it is possible to see the effects (reach state, etc.) of the decorative pattern SZ. There is concern about a decline in interest in games due to the inability to do so.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, the player is allowed to accept an action (operation). 282(c)→FIG. 282(g). That is, in this case, depending on the player's operation, the timing at which the display of "post-acceptance display D" ends can be made to arrive early (before the display time of post-acceptance display D elapses). (Fig. 282(g)), it is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the fact that the "post-acceptance display D" makes it impossible to see the effect (ready state, etc.) of the decorative pattern SZ. .

In this example, during the acceptance period D, the operation content (press operation on the operation button 410) required to start displaying the "post-acceptance display D" and the period during which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed , and the operation contents (pressing operation on the operation button 410) required for early termination of the "post-acceptance display D" are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. may For example, while the operation content required to start displaying the "post-acceptance display D" is "pressing operation on the operation button 410", the operation content required to end the "post-acceptance display D" is It may be "sword drawing operation of sword decoration 5001", or a combination of "pressing operation on operation button 410" and "sword drawing operation of sword decoration 5001" may be used.

In any case, during the period when the "post-reception display D" is displayed, what kind of operation is required to end the "post-reception display D", as shown in FIG. 282(c)? It is desirable to clearly indicate by displaying "text information (cancellable in the figure)" or "simulated image display". In this case, it is desirable to display the "model image display" with priority over the "post-reception display D" at a position overlapping the "post-reception display D" (in the figure, "post-reception display D" is displayed at a position that does not overlap). In addition, "character information" is not prepared as a separate image from "post-reception display D", but is displayed as part of the display of "post-reception display D" itself (image on the same layer). You may make it so.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance period D occurs, as shown in FIG. It is designed to provide a performance that is common to "Period C", which also makes the "acceptance period C" conscious. Even at the timing when the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden or returned to the display state, the acceptable acceptance sound is not audibly output.

On the other hand, the examples shown in FIGS. It is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in .

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (and the automatic button function is not activated), and the above-mentioned "predetermined specific condition (here, Arrival of timing tP3)” is established. In this regard, the effect display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (when the accepting period D ends and the acceptance of the action by the player is no longer permitted) is performed at the timing tPx (within the accepting period D, the action by the player is As with the effect display device 1600 at the time of acceptance, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see. there is

According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends because the action (operation) by the player is not received in time, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period D after the end of the reception period D. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, in the acceptance period D, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. The display applied to the effect does not start. At this time, any technique for fading out the integrated model image display IG itself may be used. However, it is desirable not to display another image different from the integrated model image display IG for a predetermined time until the integrated model image display IG is hidden.

Next, an effect example when the receiving period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variable effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is shown in FIG. 277 and 282 for further details. Note that FIG. 282 assumes a case where the acceptance period D occurs after the reach state is formed, and does not correspond to the occurrence of the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 282, the reception period D is generated in a state where the ready-to-win state is not formed, and the point that the reception period D does not enter the SP ready-to-win production after the end of the reception period D is different. 282 of the same figure for convenience of explanation.

When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variable effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is reached, the reception period D is the same reception period as the reception period D described above. Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the contents of the process performed when the request is accepted and the contents of the process performed when the request is not accepted are the same as those described above.

However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that generates the ready-to-win effect, FIG. ), before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state is generated in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or made inaudible. On the other hand, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is generated, FIG. , before the timing tP2-D2 arrives, there is no situation where the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or rendered inaudible.

Therefore, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win effect is shown in FIG. 277 (e) Thus, the receiving period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

However, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has passed since the start of the fluctuation performance of the fluctuation pattern D2 that does not generate the ready-to-win production, the reception period D is being generated, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in a non-suppressed manner is changed to a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed manner or is made inaudible.

According to such a configuration, although it appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in an unsuppressed manner, after that, the specific BGM is It is as if the acceptance period B (see FIG. 274) is occurring in which the player's actions (operations) can be accepted in a state of audible output in a restrained mode, or in an inaudible state. The atmosphere changes, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in order to obtain such effects more preferably, when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period B, the expectation is high that it cannot appear when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period A (for example, a big hit pattern appears). It is desirable that the post-receipt indication may be displayed in a manner suggesting that the percentage is 100% or the like.

Further, in the reception period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reception period D occurred, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden. As described above, the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is hidden at the timing tPy when the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or made inaudible. It is set to arrive before the timing tP2a.

In the case where such a configuration is further provided, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner while the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed, or a non-audible state 274), it is expected that the atmosphere will be changed more favorably so that the reception period B (see FIG. 274) is occurring.

On the other hand, the timing tP2a at which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state is Therefore, at the timing tP2a, it is possible to more preferably provide an atmosphere as if the acceptance period C (see FIG. 275) had occurred.

In the receiving period D according to this example, when the timing tP2b arrives after a predetermined time has passed since the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden, the model image display (integrated model image display) IG) is displayed again as described above (see FIG. 282(f)). However, even after the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed again in this way, the specific BGM continues to be in a "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state". .

FIGS. 277(a) to (g) show actions (operations) by the player when the specific BGM is in "a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state" during the acceptance period D described above. is assumed to be accepted.

As shown in FIGS. 277(a) to 277(g), during reception period D, as in reception period B, specific BGM is played as shown in FIGS. Even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted while in the "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state", the specified BGM starts audible output in a non-suppressed mode with this as a trigger. Instead, it maintains "a state of audible output in a suppressed mode or a non-audible state". This also makes it possible to more preferably provide an atmosphere as if reception period B (see FIG. 274) is occurring.

FIGS. 277(a') to (g') show timing tPy at which the specific BGM is set to "a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state" in the reception period D described above. It is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted before, that is, while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

As shown in 277(a') to (g') in the same figure, during the reception period D described above, the action (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. In such a case, with the acceptance as a trigger, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode, or a state in which it is not audible." That is, in this case, when the specific BGM is "in a state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state" and is accepted, the acceptance is used as a trigger to cause the specified BGM to be audibly output in a non-suppressed mode. However, when acceptance is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, the acceptance will be used as a trigger to change the specified BGM into a state in which it is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state. ”. As a result, after the acceptance period D occurs, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation at an early stage when the action (operation) by the player can affect the specific BGM, and the acceptance period D occurs. It is possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when

As described above, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image display IG shown in FIG. 282(b))" is triggered by the acceptance. Do not terminate the processing related to the display of . That is, by preferentially displaying the "post-acceptance display D" with respect to the model image display (integrated model image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, the "model image display corresponding to the acceptance period D ( Integrated model image display IG)” is hidden (invisible).

In addition, in the "post-acceptance display D" according to this example, as also described above, the player is allowed to accept an action (operation) during the display period. The processing related to the display of the "post-acceptance display D" is terminated early (see the example of tracing the production route from FIG. 282(c) to FIG. 282(g)). Also, at this time, when the acceptance is made for the "simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG shown in FIG. 282(c))" corresponding to the post-acceptance display D and text information (cancellable), this is triggered. 282(g)).

In such a configuration, during the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, depending on the timing at which an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the "display of a model image corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated model image In a situation where the processing related to the display of "Display IG)" is being continued, it is conceivable that the processing related to the display of "Post-reception display D" may be terminated early. That is, in this case, the display of the "post-acceptance display D" that has been preferentially displayed with respect to the "simulated image display corresponding to the acceptance period D (integrated simulated image display IG shown in FIG. 282(b))" is terminated. As a result, the "simulated image display corresponding to reception period D" is displayed again. At this time, "reception period D" itself may also be generated again.

In this way, if the "receiving period D" is generated again after the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is terminated early, the processing related to the display of "post-reception display D" is terminated early. Even after the ``post-acceptance display D'' is displayed again, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted again within the ``acceptance period D'' generated again by this. become. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the "post-acceptance display D" is erroneously terminated early.

273 to 282, variation patterns A to C, D1, and D2 are selected as variation patterns, and a predetermined period of time A to D has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. described above as occurring from time to time. However, the reception periods A to D do not have to occur only when different variation patterns are selected. For example, as described later, when one variation pattern is selected, this triggers may be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

Also, as described above, the reception period D occurs as a reception period having a special property compared to the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such a reception period D may be set as a reception period that can occur only when the number of pending calls is less than a predetermined number. That is, in this case, when the number of reservations becomes less than a predetermined number as a result of the player's attempt to interrupt the game, the reception period D occurs, and it is as if the reception periods A to C are changed each time. Since a special performance will be provided, it can be expected to encourage the game not to be stopped, or even if the game is stopped, the impression that the game was interesting Finally you will be able to hold it.

FIGS. 278(a) and 278(b) are tables showing examples of settings related to conditions for generating the reception periods A to D when these effects are realized.

First, FIG. 278(a) is a table that is referred to when the pending number is any one of "2" to "4" in completing the pending. That is, in this case, even if the pattern variation corresponding to the pending digestion is started, the number of pending does not become "0", it is one of "1" to "3", and the risk of stopping the game is Since it is in a low situation, even if any of the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" is executed as the variation pattern, the acceptance period D will not occur. .

More specifically, when the number of holds is either "2" to "4" when the hold is digested and the first variation pattern is executed, the result of the production judgment (advance judgment) is 70% None of the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate, and only the reception period A among the reception periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30% as a result of the effect determination (advance judgment).

In addition, when the number of reservations is in any of "2" to "4", the reservation is digested and the second variation pattern is executed. Among A to D, only reception period C occurs, and reception period A and reception period C occur at a rate of 50% as a result of performance determination (announcement determination).

In addition, when the number of reservations is in any of "2" to "4", when the reservation is digested and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period at a rate of 10% as a result of the production judgment (advance judgment) B and reception period C are generated, and reception period A, reception period B, and reception period C are generated at a rate of 90% as a result of performance determination (notice determination).

It should be noted that the reception period A is, even if any of the "first fluctuation pattern", "second fluctuation pattern", and "third fluctuation pattern" with different fluctuation times is selected, 5 from the start of fluctuation It can occur when seconds have passed, and the reception period C is 15 seconds after the start of fluctuation, regardless of which of the "second fluctuation pattern" and "third fluctuation pattern" is selected. The receiving period B can occur when 35 seconds have passed since the start of variation when the "third variation pattern" is selected.

In addition, reception periods B and C are not subject to production judgment (advance judgment), and are always generated when the corresponding variation pattern is selected. It is subject to judgment (advance judgment), and can occur only when a special result is obtained in the production judgment. However, the receiving periods B and C may be subject to the performance determination (previous notice determination), or the receiving period A may not be subject to the effect determination (previous notice determination).

Next, FIG. 278(b) is a table to be referred to when the pending number is "1" when the pending is consumed. That is, in this case, the number of reservations becomes "0" when the symbol variation corresponding to the reserved digestion is started, and there is a risk that the game will be stopped unless a new suspension is added within the execution period of the symbol variation. , Any of all the variation patterns including "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" that are selected as variation patterns are executed, the acceptance period It is designed to generate D.

More specifically, when the hold is digested and the first variation pattern is executed when the number of holds is "1", the acceptance period A to D at a rate of 70% as a result of the production determination (notice determination) Of these, only reception period D occurs, and reception period A and reception period D occur at a rate of 30% as a result of performance determination (notice determination).

In addition, when the number of reservations is "1" and the second variation pattern is executed after the suspension is completed, the reception period C and the reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the production judgment (advance judgment). However, reception period A, reception period C, and reception period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of performance determination (advance determination).

Further, when the hold is digested when the number of holds is "1" and the third variation pattern is executed, the reception period B, reception period C, and Acceptance period D occurs, and acceptance period A, acceptance period B, acceptance period C, and acceptance period D occur at a rate of 90% as a result of performance determination (announcement determination).

In this embodiment, the "first variation pattern" is a variation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the "second variation pattern" and "third variation pattern" are set as variation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the "first variation pattern" is selected, the acceptance period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG. On the other hand, when "second variation pattern" or "third variation pattern" is selected, reception period D occurs in the manner described with reference to FIG.

In addition, the acceptance period A, the acceptance period B, and the acceptance period C have a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) after the pattern variation starts, regardless of the type of variation pattern or the number of reservations. While each can be generated when it has passed, the reception period D is the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern, depending on which one is selected. The time from start to occurrence (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) is different.

That is, in this case, since it is possible to generate the reception period D aiming for each type of variation pattern at a timing that does not get in the way in relation to the content of the effect, the reception period D can be set in any of all the variation patterns. can also be favorably generated.

In the production example described above, the reception period includes reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 2-A") and reception period B (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 2-A"). We are preparing a reception period for. In this regard, during reception period A, only one mode (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 232(a)) can be displayed as model image display (here, integrated model image display IG). During the acceptance period B, multiple modes of simulated image display (integrated simulated image displays IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) are prepared. A mode according to the result of determination (advance determination) is selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, during the acceptance period B, the performance that cannot appear when the acceptance period A occurs is provided. It becomes possible to suitably improve interest.

It should be noted that, with respect to the "multiple patterns of model image display" that can be displayed during the acceptance period B, it is desirable to make the degree of expectation for the appearance of a big hit different depending on which one of the model images is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the Also, any one of the “plural modes of model image display” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the acceptance period A. In this case, it is desirable that the “least expected mode” of the “multiple modes of simulated image display” be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the reception period A.

In addition, in the example of the production described above, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 2-A") is further provided, and the reception period A and the reception period D have only one mode as a model image display. is made visible. In the "receiving period B" in which the model image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, the model image display is not hidden until the valid state ends. On the other hand, of the "acceptance period A" and the "acceptance period B" in which the model image display is displayed only in one mode, in the "acceptance period A", the valid state (acceptance period) is terminated. However, in the "acceptance period B", until the valid state (acceptance period) ends (while the valid state continues) 282(e)). That is, in this case, even in the "reception period A" and the "reception period D" in which only one mode is displayed as the model image display, the effect of whether or not the model image display is hidden in the middle is provided, it is possible to suitably improve the amusement of the game until the operation (action) by the player is detected.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after reception display) is generated (production progress shown in Fig. 282(b)→(c), Fig. 282(e)→(c)). That is, in this case, even after the display of the model image is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change. In creating the non-display of image display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

Further, in the example of the effect described above, during the reception period D, after the model image display is hidden in the middle of the reception period D, the model image display is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the reception period D has ended even though the reception period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by displaying the simulated image display again. You will be able to

In addition, in the above-described effect example, only one mode of display of the model image is allowed to be displayed in the "acceptance period A" and the "acceptance period D". The content of the display change that appears when the display is changed is different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to provide interest in what kind of display changes will appear when the acceptance is made.

Further, in the above-described effect example, in the "acceptance period D", during the period in which the model image display is displayed, the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to be accepted is made to emit light, This may prompt the player to perform an action (operation). Also, in this case, even during the period during which the model image display is hidden in the "reception period D", the operation means (here Then, the operation button 410) may be made to emit light. In this regard, in the "acceptance period C", if the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to be accepted is not illuminated, it is possible to determine which type of acceptance period is occurring. be able to suggest.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A or reception period B (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 3-A") and reception period C (second reception period of "configuration 3-A") (equivalent to the reception period) are available. Then, during the reception period A or the reception period B, after the simulated image display (here, the integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, the reception period A or the reception period B The model image display is not hidden until the display of the model image is completed, and it is possible to accept actions by the player while the model image display is being displayed (FIGS. 273, 274, and 279, FIG. 280, etc.), and during the acceptance period C, it is possible to accept actions (operations) by the player while the simulated image display is not displayed (see FIGS. 275, 281, etc.). The "allowable reception sound" is audibly output when reception period A or reception period B occurs, but is not audibly output when reception period C occurs.

According to such a configuration, not only the "reception period A or reception period B" in which reception is performed while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output and the model image display is displayed, but the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output. Since "acceptance period C" is prepared in which the acceptance is performed while the game is not displayed and the simulated image is not displayed, the possibility that the post-acceptance display will occur at various timings unintended by the player is eliminated. It becomes possible to raise awareness, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of "Configuration 3-A") is further provided, and the reception period C occurs in the reception period C (Fig. 275, Fig. 281). The model image display is not displayed from the start to the end, and it is possible to accept the action (operation) by the player while the model image display is not displayed. 282), the model image display is hidden only for a part of the reception period D, and the period during which the model image display is displayed and the period during which the model image display is not displayed are divided. In either case, it may be possible to accept actions (operations) by the player. That is, in this case, the reception period D is divided into reception periods A and B (reception while the model image display is displayed) and reception period C (reception while the model image display is not displayed). (reception of the game), so it is possible to improve the game interest. In addition, since there is a possibility that the state in which the player's actions (operations) are accepted continues even after the model image display is hidden, the player's actions (operations) are not accepted. It is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the model image display is hidden without being displayed.

In addition, the acceptable reception sound is audibly output when the reception periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when the reception period C occurs and when the reception period D occurs. That is, in this case, in the reception period D, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the side of the reception periods A and B (the simulated image display is displayed) and the side of the reception period C (the reception allowable sound It is not output), so it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the reception period D, the same display change (after reception display). That is, in this case, even after the display of the model image is hidden, the valid state (reception period) itself will continue without any change. In creating the non-display of image display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the example of effect described above, the background image that appears when reception period A or reception period B occurs (FIGS. 279 and 280) and the background image that appears when reception period C occurs ( Fig. 281) was made different. This makes it possible to give the impression that "the background image differs according to the type of reception period."

In this regard, in the above-described effect example, the background image changes during the acceptance period D, and the model image display is turned off from the period in which the model image display is displayed in accordance with the timing of the change. Since the transition is made to the period to be displayed, it is possible to provide performance as if transitioning to a different reception period within the reception period D. - 特許庁

Furthermore, during the acceptance period D, the background image that has been changed once is restored. Since the period is shifted to the displayed period, it is possible to provide performance in the reception period D as if the user were returned to the reception period before the transition.

It should be noted that the background image changes within the acceptance period D when a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. When the action (operation) by the player was previously accepted, the background image does not change even after a predetermined time has passed since the occurrence of the period D. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background image from changing to a different one while the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D is being executed, and the interest in the game can be preferably maintained.

In addition, in the above-described effect examples, during the acceptance periods A, B, and D, the model image display is hidden when the acceptance is made while the model image display is being displayed. At that time, during reception periods A and B, the "disappearing EF" is displayed as an image different from the display of the model image in accordance with hiding the display of the model image, but during the reception period D, the display of the model image is displayed. In accordance with the non-display, the "disappearing EF" as an image different from the model image display is not displayed. That is, in this case, if the "disappearing EF" does not appear when the acceptance is made, it becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" has occurred. While providing both aspects of A and B, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in interest in the game due to the complete incomprehension of which acceptance period has occurred.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A or reception period B (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 5-A") and reception period D (second reception period of "configuration 5-A" (equivalent to the reception period) are available. The reception period A or the reception period B is the number shown in FIG. 3 variation pattern (corresponding to the first variation pattern of "configuration 5-A") is started to be executed, the timing after a predetermined time has passed since the execution of the third variation pattern (in FIG. 278, reception period A In the case of , it is the timing 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and in the case of the reception period B, it can occur when the timing 35 seconds after the start of the fluctuation) arrives, and the reception period D is When the number of judgment information (the number of jackpot judgments in the pending state (holding number)) stored by the holding storage means is less than "2" (i.e., "1"), this is digested and the holding number becomes " 0" state shown in FIG. 278 (corresponding to the second variation pattern of "configuration 5-A") is started to be executed, a predetermined time after the start of execution of the second variation pattern It can occur when the elapsed timing (in FIG. 278(b), timing 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) arrives, but the number of determination information stored by the reserve storage means is "2" or more. When the execution of the second variation pattern is started at a certain time, even if the timing when the predetermined time has passed since the execution of the second variation pattern is started, it is prevented from occurring (see FIG. 278 (a) reference).

According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and as a result, the number of reservations disappears, the reception period (reception period D) of the type that has not occurred until then occurs, so the game is stopped. The player can expect to be prompted not to play the game, or even if the game is stopped, the game can be given an interesting impression at the end.

It should be noted that, in the production example described above, when the "number of determination information stored by the pending storage means (number of pending)" is less than "2" (i.e. "1"), this is digested and the number of pending is " 0” state, even if the second variation pattern is started to be executed, the timing (in FIG. 278 (b), 30 seconds from the start of variation) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started to be executed When the "number of judgment information stored by the pending storage means (holding number)" increases before the elapsed timing) has arrived (when the holding number changes from "0" to "1" or more), The acceptance period D may not occur when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern started to be executed.

That is, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) starts to be executed in the state of "0" when the number of reservations is "1", it is within the execution period of the symbol variation If the number of holdings increases at , it suggests that the player is not going to quit the game. In this respect, according to the above configuration, even if the pattern variation (second variation pattern) starts to be executed in a state where the number of reservations is "0", the number of reservations is increased within the execution period of the pattern variation. 278(b), even if a predetermined time has passed since the start of execution of the second variation pattern (in FIG. 278(b), the timing has passed 30 seconds from the start of the variation), the reception period D is not generated. Therefore, the acceptance period D can be made to function more properly as "a type of acceptance period that can appear only when the game is about to be stopped".

In order to more preferably obtain such effects, even if the acceptance period D occurs, during the acceptance period D "the number of judgment information stored by the suspension storage means (suspension It is more desirable to terminate the acceptance period D (end the state in which acceptance is permitted) at the time when the number) increases.

Furthermore, even in a situation where the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D and the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance is being executed, the "stored by the pending storage means" is displayed before the display time has elapsed. When the number of judgment information to be received (holding number) increases, the post-acceptance display may be terminated (not displayed) at that time.

In addition, in the production example described above, during the reception period D, the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. It also occurs when the timing after 10 seconds has passed (on the condition that the number of reservations is 0). and,
・The timing (in FIG. 278(b), the timing after 30 seconds have passed since the start of variation) comes after the second variation pattern (variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. If the reception period D occurs when the reception period D occurs, the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D is generated while the non-audible state is maintained. (see Figure 276),
The timing (in FIG. 278(b), the timing after 10 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation) comes after the first fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 278 (variation pattern that does not form a reach state) has started execution If the reception period D occurs when the specific BGM is not set to an audible state, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output, and within the reception period D that has occurred Make specific BGM inaudible (see Figure 277)
It is supposed to have a configuration such as

According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period D occurs, it appears as if the acceptance period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. 274, which occurs while the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state. It will be possible to plan Also, the reception period D, which seemed to have occurred during the reception period A (see FIG. 273), will appear as if it has changed to the reception period B within the reception period D. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example of effect described above, after the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. If an acceptance is made while the BGM is being output, the audible output of the specific BGM is terminated at the time of acceptance (see FIG. 277). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be ended with the reception as a trigger, and the audible output may be continued thereafter. For example, even in the example of FIG. 277(e′), instead of setting the specific BGM to the suppression mode or the inaudible state at the accepted timing tPx, timing tPy shown in FIG. 277(e) (previously The specified BGM may be suppressed or made inaudible based on the arrival of the predetermined timing. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM will be suppressed or made inaudible in the middle of the display period of the post-acceptance display D, and an interesting performance can be provided.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 6-A") and reception period B (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 6-A" ) are available. The acceptance period A can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, regardless of the production situation (the result of the judgment of the big hit, the result of the judgment of the production, etc.). Receiving period B can be generated after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible regardless of the performance status (the result of judging the big hit, the result of the performance judgment, etc.). , it becomes possible to provide performance related to the type of reception period before the reception period occurs by using the specific BGM.

In addition, in the production example described above, as the reception period, reception period D (equivalent to the third reception period of "Configuration 6-A") is further provided, and the reception period D is the production situation (the result of the jackpot determination , the result of production judgment, etc.), it may occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode, or it may occur after the specific BGM is in a suppressed mode or in a non-audible state. I made it

More specifically, a predetermined time (in FIG. 278(b), 10 seconds) has elapsed since the symbol variation of the first variation pattern (see FIG. 278(b), etc.) that does not form a ready-to-reach state is started to be executed. When reception period D occurs, the reception period D is generated while specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner (see FIG. 277). On the other hand, for a predetermined time after the pattern variation of the second variation pattern or the third variation pattern (see FIG. 278 (b), etc.) that forms the reach state (see FIG. 278 (b)), the second variation 30 seconds in the case of the pattern, and 50 seconds in the case of the third variation pattern), if the acceptance period D occurs when the specified BGM is suppressed or made inaudible, then the acceptance period D is generated (see FIG. 276).

According to such a configuration, there are cases in which the acceptance period occurs while the specific BGM is being audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and cases in which the acceptance period occurs after the specific BGM is in the suppression mode or in the non-audible state. In either case, since there is a possibility that the acceptance period is "acceptance period D", the game interest is preferably maintained until the action (operation) by the player is accepted. will be expected.

It should be noted that, even during the reception period A, if an abnormal condition occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is set to the suppression mode or inaudible state. obtain. However, the above-mentioned "acceptance period A" can occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, regardless of the production situation (the result of the judgment of the big hit, the result of the production judgment, etc.). ' means that 'when reception period A occurs in a situation where an abnormality is not reported and the production is proceeding properly, the specific BGM is always audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. Generate the acceptance period A."

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 7-A") and reception period D (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 7-A" ) are available. In the acceptance period A, if the acceptance is made within the period, the post-acceptance display A corresponding to the acceptance can be executed, and at least the post-acceptance display A is displayed as the design for production (decoration pattern SZ). 279(c), it is given priority over the post-acceptance display A (see FIG. 279(c)). On the other hand, in the acceptance period D, if the acceptance is made within the period, the post-acceptance display D can be executed according to the acceptance, and the design for production (decorative pattern SZ) is at least the post-acceptance display D. While it is displayed, it is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to be visually recognized by the post-reception display D, or it is hidden (see FIG. 282(c)).

It should be noted that the ``mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize'' here means that ``at least a part of the design for production (decorative pattern SZ) is set to a predetermined transmittance through the post-reception display D, and the amount corresponding to the transmittance or a mode in which at least a part of the design for production (decorative design SZ) is superimposed on it is made invisible by display D after reception, or at least one of the design for production (decorative design SZ) The mode in which the part is hidden, etc.”.

According to such a configuration, by confirming whether or not the visibility of the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the action (operation) by the player, the reception period can be determined. It becomes possible to recognize the type of It should be noted that the "design for effect (decorative pattern SZ)" is, for example, a pattern that forms a ready-to-win state as an effect in the effect display device 1600. , It is a pattern that is also used for pseudo-continuous production, full rotation production, etc.

However, some players may feel disgust at the fact that the visibility of such performance symbols (decorative symbols SZ) is deteriorated due to the display of the post-acceptance display D. has been confirmed. In this regard, in the above-described effect example, when the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance within the acceptance period D is displayed, an acceptance period different from the acceptance period D is generated (for example, according to the acceptance within the acceptance period D When an operation by a player is accepted within the different acceptance period, the post-acceptance display D is hidden (processing related to the display of the post-acceptance display D ), thereby making it easier to visually recognize the design for production (decorative design SZ) (see the progress of production shown in FIG. 282(c)→FIG. 282(g)).

According to such a configuration, if the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance within the acceptance period D is "not displayed when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display", a predetermined time Until the time elapses, the player can hide the post-reception display D simply by performing a predetermined operation at that time. It should be noted that an action (operation) required of the player to display the post-acceptance display D within the acceptance period D and an acceptance period different from the acceptance period D (an acceptance period that occurs in response to an acceptance within the acceptance period D) The actions (operations) required of the player to hide the display D after reception may be the same actions (operations) or different actions (operations). It should be noted that the "acceptance period different from the acceptance period D" ends when the post-acceptance display D disappears.

On the other hand, the post-reception display A is also displayed for a predetermined period of time (the time may be the same as or different from the predetermined period of time until the post-reception display D is hidden). is hidden when . However, the post-receipt display A, which does not deteriorate the visibility of the effect pattern (decorative pattern SZ), is hidden even if the player performs any operation until a predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable to prevent the player from losing interest in the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against his/her intention.

In addition, in the above-described production example, a reception period B is further provided as the reception period, and in the reception period B, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display B can be executed according to the reception. , At least while the post-reception display B is displayed, the performance pattern (decorative pattern SZ) is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to see by the post-reception display B, or is hidden. (See FIG. 280(c)).

However, in the production example described above, the "post-acceptance display B" and the "post-acceptance display D" are common in that they affect the visibility of the production pattern (decorative pattern SZ). First, the post-reception display B is "hidden when a predetermined time (which may be different from the time until the post-reception display D is hidden) has elapsed since the start of display". If so, even if the player performs any operation before the predetermined time elapses, the post-acceptance display B will not be hidden due to this as a trigger. As a result, it is possible to provide a performance as to whether or not the visibility of the design for performance (decorative design SZ) is affected by the display after reception, and whether or not it can be improved.

It is preferable that the acceptance period B is set as an acceptance period in which the above-described automatic button function is activated, and the acceptance period D is set as an acceptance period in which the above-described automatic button function is not activated.

Also, in the production example described above, first, as the reception period, the reception period D (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 8-A") and the reception period B (equivalent to the second reception period of "configuration 8-A" ) are available. The reception period D can occur while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, and if reception is made while the specific BGM is being audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. Triggered by this, the specific BGM is made non-audible (see FIG. 277), and during the receiving period B, the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressed mode is either audibly output in the suppressed mode or is not audibly output. After that, the acceptance is permitted, and even if the acceptance is made, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or the state in which it is not audibly output is maintained (see FIG. 274).

According to such a configuration, it is interesting to determine at what timing the specific BGM is set to be audibly output in a suppressed manner or not to be audibly output in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. be able to

Further, in the above-described effect example, when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, all the sounds that have been audibly output until then, including the effect sound different from the specific BGM, are made inaudible, and during the acceptance period B , when the acceptance is made, all the sounds (acceptance acceptable sounds, etc.) that were audibly output at that time are made inaudible. That is, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is not audibly output", and when the reception is made, it is It becomes possible to provide a common performance between the reception period D and the reception period B, such as making all the sounds that are played inaudible, and to improve the amusement of the game. .

Further, as described above, during the acceptance period D, while the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed (in the middle of the effective period), a situation occurs in which the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output. (See FIG. 276(e)), but the acceptance period is continued even in this situation (See FIG. 282(e)). In other words, in this case, in spite of the fact that the specific BGM is rendered inaudible when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, if the acceptance is not made for a predetermined period of time after the occurrence of the acceptance period D, Since the specific BGM is made inaudible while the acceptance is not yet made, it becomes possible to make the player think that the acceptance period D has ended, and the player's interest is increased. will be able to strongly attract

In particular, in the above-described effect example, since the background image is changed in accordance with the timing at which the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception has not yet been performed, a reception period different from the reception period D occurs. The performance will be provided as if you are doing it.

In addition, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible with the reception as a trigger (see Fig. 277), "display change according to reception (display D after reception)" is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the acceptance has not yet been made (see Fig. 277), "display change according to acceptance (display D after acceptance)" is generated accordingly. I tried not to. That is, in this case, when the specified BGM is made inaudible, the reception period D is terminated by confirming that the "display change in response to reception (display D after reception)" has not yet occurred. You will be able to make them aware of the possibility that they are not. Then, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, if an action (operation) by the player is accepted before the end of the acceptance period D, this serves as a trigger for "display change in response to acceptance (acceptance Since the post-display D)" is generated, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

Further, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period B, a predetermined effect sound (for example, a reception acceptance sound) is audibly output until the timing tM3 at which the period ends. When the performance sound is made inaudible, the reception of actions (operations) by the player is not permitted, so that it is easy to determine whether or not the reception period B continues. to be able to recognize It should be noted that in the above-described effect example, the acceptance period B is set as the acceptance period during which the above-described automatic button function is activated. It's becoming

In addition, in the example of effect described above, reception period B occurs, for example, when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has passed since the third variation pattern shown in FIG. is made inaudible before the elapse of a predetermined time after the start of the third variation pattern, but for the reception period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible after the start of the third variation pattern. It is desirable to prevent it from occurring between According to such a configuration, in the third variation pattern, after the specific BGM is made inaudible, reception period B first occurs, and the specific BGM is made inaudible even after that. Since the reception period D can be expected to occur further, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the example of the effect described above, the reception period D can occur only when the number of reservations is less than the predetermined number, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern shown in FIG. In both the variation pattern and the third variation pattern, it is assumed that it can occur when the time set for each has elapsed since the symbol variation started, but in any variation pattern, other It is desirable to set it so that it occurs after the acceptance period (acceptance periods A to C, etc.). That is, in this case, the receiving period D having a special effect can be made to function as the last receiving period for the player who is about to stop the game, so that the game is not stopped. It becomes possible to expect prompting, or, even if the game is stopped, it becomes possible to have an interesting impression on the game at the end.

During the acceptance period D, the post-acceptance display D appears for a specified time after acceptance, but when the specified time elapses and the post-acceptance display D is hidden, it is desirable that the specified BGM is not restarted. In this case, it is more desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol variation is started.

Next, examples in which the above configurations 1, 14, and 15 are embodied will be described in order as modified examples of the above-described production examples.

That is, in the example of the effect described above, when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is displayed within the acceptance period D, and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the model image display is hidden The same post-acceptance display D is generated in . However, in lieu of this, within the acceptance period D, when the acceptance is made during the period during which the display of the model image is displayed, and when the acceptance is made during the period during which the display of the model image is hidden may generate different post-acceptance displays.

That is, in this case, the acceptance period D is, more strictly speaking, a "acceptance period D1" during which the model image is displayed, and a "acceptance period D2" during which the model image is not displayed. When an application is accepted during the acceptance period D1, the corresponding post-acceptance display D1 is displayed. After the reception, the display D2 is displayed.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 282 and the like is modified as described above.

283 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 283 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. It is possible to apply

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 283, first, the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283(b)), and when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D1, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D1 D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 283(c)).

On the other hand, after the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283(b)), when a predetermined time elapses without acceptance (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives). , the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 283(e)). 282 and the like, it is different from the example shown in FIG. are the same. However, in this modified example, when the model image display is hidden (see FIG. 283(e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and a different "acceptance period D2" occurs. It is designed to

That is, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" during which the model image display is hidden, the post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" is displayed. (See FIG. 283(h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise. It is possible to improve amusement in a game through a realistic presentation.

Moreover, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) changes to the non-display state, it is expected to more preferably create an atmosphere in which the reception period is suddenly replaced with another reception period. It will be done.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 282, from the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers, to the "background image HG4b" depicting a desert different from the "background image HG3" (FIG. 283(b)→FIG. 283(e)). According to such a configuration, when the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is changed to the non-display state, the atmosphere of a sudden change from the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert can be improved. It will be expected to produce well.

Also, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example has different contents from the "group notice" of the "post-reception display C" shown in FIG. , and the content is somewhat reminiscent of "Display after reception C", and this also makes it more suitable for the atmosphere that suddenly changes from the reception period C that can occur in the background of the desert. will be expected to produce

Further, in this example, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs 276 and 277 (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 has arrived). become.

It should be noted that when a predetermined period of time elapses without any action (operation) by the player being accepted after the acceptance period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives), FIG. 283 (f ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again and the state is returned to the state in which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 283(e)→FIG. 283(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D1 will be more favorably created from the other reception periods.

When the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 283(f)) that occurs again in this way, the acceptance period D1 The post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the request is displayed (see FIG. 283(c)).

Needless to say, such acceptance periods D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) are similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG.

According to the modification shown in FIG. 283, during the acceptance period D (corresponding to the third acceptance period of “configuration 15-A”), the period during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed, There are periods during which the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is not displayed. and "acceptance period D2". That is, in this case, there is a change in the display that cannot be confirmed unless the state (a state in which the display of the model image is hidden) is made to make one aware of the possibility that the acceptance period D has ended (the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2). Since the display change when the game is played is prepared, the sense of tension can be preferably maintained through such performance.

Further, in the above-described effect example, the receiving period D includes "a period during which the model image is displayed" and "a period during which the model image is not displayed". However, instead of this, in the reception period D, "the period during which the text information related to the acceptance is displayed" and "the period during which the text information related to the acceptance is not displayed" You may make it so that there is "the period during which it is held."

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example in which the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 282 and the like is modified as described above.

284 will be described below, but the same configuration as that shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282 will not be particularly mentioned. That is, the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 284 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. .

However, in the reception period D (see FIG. 284(b)) shown in FIG. Character information (here, "Please press") related to pressing is displayed.

That is, as described above, the text information related to acceptance being permitted cannot be displayed during the acceptance period A (see FIG. 279(b)) with relatively low expectations. It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 280(b)) in which the degree of expectation is relatively high. Therefore, by displaying such character information (here, "Please press") during the reception period D, it is expected that the game interest will be improved.

However, during the acceptance period D according to this modified example, as shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), the character information related to acceptance being permitted (here, "Please press") is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), and the character information is changed from the non-display state to the display state (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even if the character information (here, "press me") is in the non-display state, if the action (operation) is performed by the player, the action (operation) will be accepted. Based on the acceptance, the post-acceptance display D will be performed (see the example of tracing the production route from FIG. 284(e) to FIG. 284(c)).

In this example, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the character information (here, "Please press") related to acceptance is in the non-display state. (Fig. 284(b) -> Fig. 284(c)), or was the character information (here, "Please press") in the non-display state? (Fig. 284(e) -> Fig. 284(c)), or whether the character information (here, "Please press") is returned to the display state and then accepted (Fig. 284(f) -> Fig. 284(c)). 284(c)), the same mode (FIG. 284(c)) is made to appear as "post-acceptance display D".

According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. (See FIG. 279(b)), it is possible to provide an atmosphere as if the characters were suddenly replaced with each other. On the other hand, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted in a situation (character information non-display state) that seems to have suddenly changed from the acceptance period A, it corresponds to the acceptance period D. Since the same mode (FIG. 284(c)) is displayed as the "post-acceptance display D", it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted changes to the non-display state, it is possible to more preferably create an atmosphere in which another acceptance period is suddenly replaced. come to be expected.

In particular, in this example, the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers is changed to the "background image HG4c" depicting mountains different from the "background image HG1" (see FIG. 284 ( b)→FIG. 284(e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information related to the fact that acceptance is permitted changes to the non-display state, it is possible to create an atmosphere in which the acceptance period A, which may occur in the background of mountains, is suddenly replaced with the character information. It is expected that it will be produced more favorably.

Note that, in this example, when the character information related to acceptance being permitted is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also returned from "background image HG4c" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 284(e)→FIG. 284(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D will be more suitably created from other reception periods (especially reception period A).

Needless to say, such reception period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG.

According to the modification shown in FIG. We have prepared multiple acceptance periods, including the equivalent period). In both cases, when reception period B occurs and when reception period D occurs, character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period. Although the same action (pressing action on the operation button 410) is accepted as an action by the player in the period B and the acceptance period D, different character information ("press" in the acceptance period B, "Please press") is displayed.

That is, in the reception period B and the reception period D, although the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the display change (post-reception display B, D) that occurs as a result of detection of the action ) are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same action (operation mode), the character information displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since it is made to differ from each other according to the type (type of display after reception), it is possible to recognize which type of display change (post-reception display B, D) may occur as display after reception. It becomes possible to perform operations (actions by the player) with , and it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

In addition, the same operation (operation mode) as in the reception period B is requested, and the same character information and model image display as in the reception period B are displayed. A reception period for generating the post-display may be further prepared. That is, in this case, just by looking at the character information or the simulated image display, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is to be executed as the post-reception display. be expected to maintain.

Further, according to the above-described modified example, during the reception period B, the character information is not hidden until the state in which the reception is permitted (valid state) ends. In the reception period D, the character information can be hidden while the reception is allowed (effective state). In other words, in this case, during the reception period D, the player is requested to perform any action (operation mode) unless the operation (predetermined action) is performed relatively quickly after the occurrence of the period. As it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, and by extension it becomes difficult to recognize the type of reception period, there is a sense of tension depending on the situation where text information is displayed. It becomes expected to favorably avoid such things as disappearing altogether.

Further, in the modified example described above, the acceptance period D includes a period during which the character information is displayed (see FIG. 284(b)) and a period during which the character information is not displayed (see FIG. 284(e)). ), the same display change (see FIG. 284(c)) is made to occur even if the acceptance is made in any of these periods. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation can be performed properly as long as it is confirmed what kind of operation mode is requested while the character information is displayed. This is possible, and is expected to curb the decline in interest in gaming.

Further, in the modified example described above, during the acceptance period D, the character information is hidden and then displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "receiving period D" has suddenly changed to the "receiving period A" in which the character information is not displayed, the character information is displayed again to correct the misunderstanding. be able to dissolve.

Further, in the modified example described above, the background image is changed during the acceptance period D, and the character information is displayed as non-display in accordance with the timing of the change. We are trying to move to the period to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to preferably give an impression as if the acceptance period D has shifted to a different acceptance period.

In the effect example described with reference to FIG. The same post-acceptance display D is generated when the acceptance is made within the period in which the character information related to the presence is hidden. However, instead of this, when the acceptance is made within the period during which the text information related to acceptance is displayed within the acceptance period D, and A different post-reception display may be generated depending on whether the reception is performed during the period in which the character information is hidden.

That is, in this case, the reception period D is, more strictly speaking, a "reception period D1" which is a period during which text information related to acceptance is displayed, and a period related to acceptance. It consists of two types of reception periods such as "reception period D2" which is a period in which the character information is hidden, and when reception is made during the reception period D1, a post-reception display D1 corresponding to this is displayed. When the application is accepted during the acceptance period D2, the corresponding post-acceptance display D2 is displayed.

FIG. 285 is a diagram showing an example in which the reception period D shown in FIG. 284 and the like is modified as described above.

285 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, FIG. 282, and FIG. That is, the acceptance period D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 285 is basically the same as the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 284, and can be similarly applied to other examples. .

However, in the production example shown in FIG. 285, first, the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285(b)), and when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D1, the post-acceptance display corresponding to the acceptance period D1 D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 285(c)).

On the other hand, after the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285(b)), when a predetermined time elapses without acceptance (when timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives). , the character information (here, "Please press") related to acceptance being allowed is hidden (see FIG. 285(e)). As for the fact that even under such a situation (where the character information related to acceptance being allowed is not displayed), acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is allowed. It is the same as the case of the production example shown in . However, in this modified example, when the character information related to acceptance being permitted is hidden (see FIG. 285(e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and this , a different "acceptance period D2" occurs.

That is, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted during the "acceptance period D2" in which the character information related to acceptance being permitted is not displayed, after the acceptance corresponding to the "acceptance period D2" Display D2 is displayed (see FIG. 285(h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise. It is possible to improve amusement in a game through a realistic presentation.

Moreover, in the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the character information associated with acceptance being permitted changes to the non-display state, the acceptance period A in which the character information is in the non-display state is suddenly replaced. It will be expected to create a better atmosphere.

In particular, in this example, as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 284, from the "background image HG4a" depicting mountains and rivers, to the "background image HG4c" depicting mountains different from the "background image HG1" (FIG. 285(b)→FIG. 285(e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information (here, "Please press") changes to the non-display state, the atmosphere of a sudden change from reception period A, which can occur in the background of mountains, can be improved. It will be expected to produce well.

Also, the "post-reception display D2" according to this example has different contents from the "conversation notice" of the "post-reception display A" shown in FIG. , and the content is somewhat reminiscent of "Display after reception A", and this also makes it more suitable for the atmosphere of a sudden change from the reception period A, in which the text information is hidden. It is expected that the

Further, in this example, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" that was displayed during the acceptance period D1. , a post-acceptance display D2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed. As a result, instead of a post-reception display that has nothing to do with the reception period D1 (for example, a post-reception display according to the reception period C), a post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more precisely, the reception period D1 occurs 276 and 277 (when the timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 has arrived). become.

It should be noted that when a predetermined period of time elapses after the acceptance period D2 has occurred and the action (operation) by the player has not been accepted (when timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 arrives), FIG. 285 (f ), the acceptance period D1 occurs again, and the state is returned to the state in which "character information related to acceptance being permitted" is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from “background image HG4c” to “background image HG4a” (FIG. 285(e)→FIG. 285(f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the initial reception period D1 will be more favorably created from the other reception periods.

If the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 285(f)) that occurs again in this way, the acceptance period D1 The post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to the request is displayed (see FIG. 285(c)).

Needless to say, such acceptance periods D (acceptance periods D1 and D2) are similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG.

According to the modified example shown in FIG. 285, during the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of "configuration 14-A"), "character information related to acceptance being permitted" is displayed. There is a period and a period during which "character information related to acceptance is permitted" is not displayed, but these periods are made to function as "reception period D1" and "reception period D2", A different display change is caused depending on which of the "acceptance period D1" and "acceptance period D2" is accepted. In other words, in this case, when the "character information related to acceptance is allowed" is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a acceptance period different from the acceptance period that has occurred until then. Since it will occur, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance even when the action (operation) by the player is not readily accepted.

In the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the "post-reception display" is started to be displayed when the model image display is displayed. The display does not necessarily start when the model image is displayed, and the display may start after the model image is hidden.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. Alternatively, it may be displayed later than that.

Also, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed as described above with reference to FIGS. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic display of the simulated image display is continued even after the reception, even if the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears.

273 to 285, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" is not only a model image display, but also a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the acceptance period ends. It was decided to make it difficult to visually recognize this. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

273 to 285, during the acceptance period D, even if the acceptance is made within this period, the display processing related to the model image display (character information in the modified example) is ended. I tried not to let it. That is, by preferentially displaying the display D after reception over the model image display (character information in the modification), which is kept in the display state on the layer, the model image display (character information in the modification) is hidden (invisible). However, even when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D, the display processing related to the display of the model image (character information in the modified example) may be ended with this as a trigger.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) simulating the operation receiving part to be operated is displayed during the acceptance period. The model image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized by, for example, replacing it with an arrow notation that prompts an operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 277, if the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner during the reception period D and is accepted, whether the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode is triggered by the acceptance. , or made non-audible, the specific BGM may be made non-audible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not it has been accepted. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the voice may be rendered inaudible during the execution period of the display after reception, and it is expected that the performance will be improved.

In addition, in the production examples shown in FIGS. It may be displayed according to the timing of occurrence. Further, depending on the type of acceptance period, it may be displayed before the occurrence of the acceptance period, or may be displayed in time with the occurrence of the acceptance period. In short, if the reception can be performed while the background images are being displayed, the above-described effects related to the background images can be obtained.

273 to 285, the acceptance period C is assumed to occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or rendered inaudible. , may occur when specific BGM is output in a non-suppressed manner.

273 to 285, in the acceptance period D, a period during which a model image display (in the modified example, text information related to acceptance being allowed) is displayed; These periods are defined as the period when the player makes an action (operation) after confirming that the model image display (or character information) is hidden. Even if it starts, it is set as a sufficient time for acceptance in the non-display state, and after confirming that the model image display (or character information) has been returned to the display state, the game Even if the user starts the operation (operation), it is set as a time sufficient for acceptance in the display state, and it has no technical significance except for display methods such as so-called "blinking display". It is clear that it has

For example, during reception period D, the time period during which the model image display (or character information) is set to "hidden state" and the "non-display state" is maintained is set as reception period A or reception period B. It is desirable to set a time value that is more than half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, after the model image display (or character information) is returned to the display state, the time for which the display state is maintained is half the time set as the reception period A or reception period B (for example, 3 seconds). It is desirable to set a time value of 1.5 seconds or more. It is desirable to set a time value that is more than half (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or reception period B.

Alternatively, the time from when the model image display (or character information) is displayed until it is hidden, or after the model image display (or character information) is in the "hidden state" Regarding the time to maintain the display state and the time to maintain the display state after the model image display (or character information) is returned to the display state, the shortest time for pattern variation (required for shortened variation time) may be set as a time value above. This is because such a time value is set as a time value that is sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol variation and that allows the symbol variation to be terminated early.

Next, specific examples of the configurations 4, 9 to 13 will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception, which are performed when the reception is received). We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the reception period A (reception effect A) to reception period D (reception effect D) described above, a reception period E is further prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects). I'm doing it.

Features of the reception period E will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. FIG. It should be noted that each reception period described above with reference to FIG. E).

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which reception period E (reception effect E) occurs.

Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (hold digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and "variation pattern E" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E is performed. After that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (depiction according to the variable pattern E, sound output of specific BGM playback, etc.) is started ("situation shown in FIG. 286(a)"), Within the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) corresponding to the result of the determination of the preliminary performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "variation pattern E" itself. It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 286(a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 282(a) is displayed.

Here, when a special result is obtained in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a reaches a timing when a predetermined time E has passed since the start of the variation performance of the decorative symbol SZ. (when condition E is established), the acceptance period E (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding display E after acceptance" is allowed is generated ("situation shown in FIG. 286(e)").

In this respect, when the reception period E occurs, the precursor display corresponding to the reception period E is performed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 286(b), the character KI of "Kunoichi" appears. Then, as shown in FIG. 286(c), the character KI throws a smoke ball to cause smoke. Then, as shown in FIG. 286(d), the character KI speaks a line such as "press the button and call that person" is displayed. At this time, the expanding "smoke" is depicted and a "simulated image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "simulated image display" are difficult to see due to the priority display of the character KI and dialogue. has been Then, when the reception period E occurs after such precursor display (FIGS. 286(b) to (d)) is performed, the character KI and the lines are hidden, thereby clearly displaying the "simulated image display". It will be done.

In this example, "character KI" and "smoke" are preferentially displayed with respect to the background image HG4a and decoration image SZ. Further, "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), thereby changing the background image from "background image HG4a" to "smoke". That is, in this case, "smoke" functions as a "background image" to be changed. "Smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the reception period E (it does not have to be displayed as a precursor display).

Here, as shown in FIG. 286(e), during the reception period E according to this example, the "integrated model image display IG" modeled on the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 were modeled as model image displays. A "sword decoration image SYG" and a "special model image TM" imitating the special operation means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed respectively. In this example, a plurality of each of the "integrated model image display IG", the "sword decoration image SYG", and the "special model image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one by one. .

In this case, during the reception period E, the player is prompted to operate the "operation button 410", the "sword ornament 5001", and the "special operation means 1410". As a result, the player determines which one of the "operation button 410", "sword ornament 5001", and "special operation means 1410" should be operated.

In this regard, when the operation of the "operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. Along with audible output of E1, there is a display change (post-acceptance display E1) in which "an image suggesting that the integrated model image display IG is correct" and a "samurai character" are displayed, and " A background change to the background image HG5” or the like occurs. After the "post-acceptance display E1" is thus displayed, the effect progresses while the "background image HG5" is being displayed.

On the other hand, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. , and the acceptance period E is not terminated (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). In other words, during the acceptance period E, the "special model image TM" modeled after the "special operation means 1410" is displayed even though the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object to be accepted. . According to such a configuration, during the reception period E, a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means set as the object of reception during the reception period E, and the Since the simulated image display (special simulated image TM) imitating the operation means not set as the object of acceptance during the reception period E will be mixed, the tension that makes it difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity in the presence of In addition, regarding the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, the operation for the "special operation means 1410" is accepted, but this triggers no reception sound. In addition, no display change is caused and the reception period E is not terminated (the same state as when no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). good.

On the other hand, if the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. In addition to the audible output, a display change (post-acceptance display E2) in which the character KI speaks a line such as "Let's start again!" is generated. At this time, the background image does not change.

That is, after the "post-acceptance display E2" is displayed, the set time (remaining time) as the acceptance period E is reset instead of progressing the effect, thereby the remaining time as the acceptance period E. is returned to the state immediately after the acceptance period E occurs (it can also be said that "the acceptance period E occurs again"). According to such a configuration, even if an operation for making the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) appear is not performed, and as a result the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) cannot be displayed, the remaining time is Since it becomes possible to redo the "acceptance period E" from the initial state in which is not consumed, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

It should be noted that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is not "the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted once", but "the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is performed a predetermined number of times". It may be "accepted as much as possible".

By the way, if an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, it goes without saying that the remaining time as the reception period E is not reset.

Then, as a result of performing an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" during the acceptance period E, the remaining time as the acceptance period E was returned to the state immediately after the occurrence of the acceptance period E (reception period E occurred again). ), depending on whether the operation on the "operation button 410", the operation on the "sword ornament 5001", or the operation on the "special operation means 1410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the same operation as described above A phenomenon occurs (FIGS. 286(f), (g), (i)).

However, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, the manner in which the action (operation) by the player is accepted as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance and the set time When an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-acceptance display D corresponding to the acceptance is made different from the display D1, D2, etc.). According to such a configuration, since the appearance of the post-acceptance display D without resetting generates a dramatic value, the tension during the acceptance period E is suitable. can be maintained at

On the other hand, ``an example of progressing from FIG. It is assumed that none of them are accepted.

That is, in this case, after the acceptance period E occurs, the action (operation) by the player is not accepted and the remaining time is completely consumed, and the acceptance period E ends. In this regard, the reception period E is set as "the reception period for which the above-described automatic button function is activated". Therefore, during the acceptance period E, even if the remaining time is exhausted without accepting any of the "operation on the operation button 410" and the "operation on the sword decoration 5001", the , the same post-acceptance display E as when there is an action (operation) by the player within the acceptance period E is generated.

However, if neither the "operation on the operation button 410" nor the "operation on the sword decoration 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E. However, the reception sound E (ping-pong) that is the same as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E is not audibly output. there is

According to such a configuration, while displaying the same post-acceptance display E as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted within the acceptance period E, the selective operation by the player succeeds. Since it is possible to suggest that the "post-acceptance display E" is not displayed as , it is expected to encourage more active operations when the acceptance period E occurs again. Become so.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the reception period E, it is made difficult to recognize how much time is left as the reception period E, and the post-reception display E1 is displayed. A hint is given as to which operation mode (operation type) is required for this purpose.

287(a) to (d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows a change.

As described above, during the acceptance period E, the "integrated model image display IG" modeled on the operation button 410, the "sword ornament image SYG" modeled on the sword ornament 5001, and the special operation means ("PUSH" in the figure) A "special model image TM" modeled after the button 1410 described above is displayed.

That is, in the acceptance period E, although multiple types of model image displays are displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is one of the multiple types of model image displays. Only one (integrated model image display IG) is associated. This makes it possible to imply that the operating means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" among the plurality of types of model image displays should be operated.

In addition, as time elapses in the reception period E, the "integrated model image display IG" changes to "movement when receiving an operation by the player" as shown in FIGS. 287(a) to (d). A portion of the operation button 410 imitating the “operation receiving portion” (button model image BMG) is dynamically displayed as if the user is performing the operation. The contents of this dynamic display are the same as those described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234, and the same applies to the case where the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285.

However, in this production example, the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special image TM" among the multiple types of simulated image displays are the parts imitating the "operation receiving part" of the sword decoration 5001, and the special The part imitating the "operation receiving part" of the operation means 1410 is not displayed dynamically, but displayed statically. It should be noted that the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" may be changed in light emission mode such as blinking light emission.

According to such a configuration, only the "integrated model image display IG" out of the plurality of types of model image displays expresses the "movement when receiving an operation by the player". It is possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the "integrated model image display IG" among the model image displays of the type should be operated.

Further, as described above, during the reception period E, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG used to indicate the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, such a gauge image GG is usually rendered such that its display area gradually decreases as time elapses after the acceptance period has occurred. , is used to indicate how much time is left as the reception period. The use of such a gauge image GG is the same when the "gauge image GG (here, integrated model image display IG)" is displayed in the production examples shown in FIGS. be.

However, during the reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 287(a) to 287(d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, "the time has passed since the reception period occurred. Among them, there is no depiction that gradually reduces the display area. That is, in the reception period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is maintained at the maximum value from the start of the period to the end of the period. there is According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E, and it is possible to preferably maintain a sense of tension. come to be expected.

In particular, in the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time as the reception period E by performing an operation on the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, Since there is no depiction that increases the display area of the gauge image GG, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained by making it difficult to recognize that the remaining time as the reception period E has been reset. It will be done.

287(a) to (d), "dynamic display related to integrated model image display IG" is repeated until reception period E ends. Therefore, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" is terminated with the acceptance as a trigger. However, if an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410 during the acceptance period E, the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" will not be terminated with this as a trigger. Also, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the processing for generating the post-acceptance display D2 is performed, but the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" is terminated. There is no need to change the display or start over from the beginning, and only the "dynamic display related to the integrated model image display IG" that has been performed up to that point is continued.

According to the production example described above, first, as the reception period, reception period A (equivalent to the first reception period of "configuration 4-A") and reception period E (second reception period of "configuration 4-A") We have multiple acceptance periods, including: In the reception period A (FIGS. 273 and 279), when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display A is displayed and the reception sound A is output. When the action (operation) by the player is not detected, the post-reception display A is not displayed and the reception sound A is not output. When the action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even if the action (operation) by the player is not detected within the period The same post-acceptance display E1 as when an action (operation) by the player is detected is displayed, but the acceptance sound E1 is not output.

According to such a configuration, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the reception period E, a demerit in performance may occur, so that the tension when the reception period E occurs. can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the production example described above, the reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of "configuration 4-A") is further provided, and in the reception period B (Fig. 274, Fig. 280), the game is played within the period. When the action (operation) by the player is detected, the display B after reception is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even if the action by the player is not detected within the period, the action by the player is made within the period. The same post-receipt display B as when (operation) is detected is displayed, and a reception sound B is output. In other words, in this case, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (post-acceptance change) as when the action (operation) is accepted is caused to cause a demerit in terms of performance. (reception period E) and when it is generated so as not to cause a demerit in production (reception period B), so while maintaining the tension when the reception period occurs, It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the period.

In addition, in the above-described production example, during the reception period A (Fig. 279), the character information related to acceptance is not displayed, and the reception period B (Fig. 280) and reception period E (Fig. 286) are displayed. ) displays textual information related to acceptance being allowed. In this respect, the character information displayed during the acceptance period B and the character information displayed during the acceptance period E are made different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, by confirming the presence or absence of "textual information related to acceptance being permitted", the reception for which the automatic button function is to be activated is checked. It becomes possible to recognize whether it is a period or not. In addition, if "character information related to acceptance is allowed" is displayed when the acceptance period occurs, by checking the type of the character information, It becomes possible to recognize the type of

As described above, during the reception period B, the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is activated (see FIG. 274(j)). In this respect, in the above-described production example, during the reception period E (Fig. 286), when the automatic button function is activated (such as when progressing from (e) to (h) in Fig. 286), the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" should not appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type of acceptance period based on whether or not the "disappearance effect (disappearance-related display)" appears when the automatic button function is activated. .

In the acceptance period E (Fig. 286), even when an action (operation) by the player is accepted and the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is hidden in response to this, " It is also possible to prevent the "annihilation effect (annihilation-related display)" from appearing.

As described above, during the acceptance period B, the model image display (integrated model image display IG) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232). On the other hand, during the reception period A and the reception period E, it is desirable that the model image display is displayed only in one mode.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the background image is not changed (see FIG. 279) based on the reception of the operation by the player during the reception period A, and during the reception periods B and E, the player The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation by . According to such a configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the automatic button function is activated and the post-acceptance display is displayed, so that the game interest can be improved.

However, during the acceptance period E, even if an action (operation) by the player is accepted, if this is due to an operation on the "sword ornament 5001", the post-acceptance display E2 is displayed. changed the background image to a different background image. According to such a configuration, while the post-acceptance display E2 corresponding to the acceptance is displayed, the player can confirm that the background image that should be changed has not yet been changed. It becomes possible to recognize that the period E has not yet ended.

During the acceptance period E, a plurality of objects (operation button 410 and sword ornament 5001, but may also include special operation means 1410) serve as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player. is set, and the case where the player's action (operation) on the operation button 410 among the plurality of objects is accepted differs from the case where the player's action (operation) on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted. Added reception sound. As a result, it is possible to suitably suggest that different performances will be produced depending on which one of the plurality of objects is operated.

It should be noted that in the reception period B, based on the result of the performance judgment (jackpot judgment), the case where the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output, and the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A A different "reception sound B" may be audibly output in some cases.

Also, in the above-described effect example, during the reception period E, the player is given a plurality of options (here, operating the operation button 410, operating the sword ornament 5001, or operating the special operation means 1410). or not) is presented, and different displays (post-reception displays E1, E2) appear as post-reception displays depending on which of these options is selected by the player's action (operation). Then, when none of the plurality of options is selected within the period (here, when none of the actions (operations) by the player is detected), a specific option out of the plurality of options is displayed after reception. is selected (here, when the operation button 410 is operated) (post-acceptance display E1) appears.

According to such a configuration, when no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same post-reception display is always displayed. will be able to encourage

In addition, in the above-described production example, the operation means are the operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving part) of "configuration 9-A") and the sword ornament 5001 (of "configuration 9-A"). A plurality of operation means including a second operation means (corresponding to the second operation receiving unit) are prepared, and as the acceptance period, a plurality of We have different acceptance periods. During the acceptance period E, both the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of an operation on the sword decoration 5001 are allowed as acceptances for causing display changes corresponding to the acceptance period E. When an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated, and when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted, the post-acceptance display E1 (specific display change) can be generated. Since it is possible to generate a display change (post-reception display E2) different from the post-reception display E1 (specific display change), it is possible to make it interesting as to which operation means to operate. will be able to

In addition, during the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is ended with this as a trigger, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not ended with this as a trigger, I tried to extend the remaining time in reverse. More specifically, when the operation button 410 is operated during the acceptance period E, the remaining time as the acceptance period E1 is not used up. That is, in this case, since it becomes possible to give unprecedented performance as reception period E using a plurality of operation means, various interesting performances based on such performance are possible. be able to provide.

However, in the reception period E according to the above-described production example, it is possible to extend the remaining time as the reception period E simply by performing an operation on the sword ornament 5001, so the tension is preferably maintained. I have concerns that I can't. Therefore, a reception period F that is different from the reception period E is further provided. and a "special model image TM" modeled after the special operating means (the button labeled "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed. Also, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period F, the same as in the case of the above-described acceptance period E (see FIG. 286),
When the operation of the "operation button 410" is accepted, the acceptance sound F1 is audibly output and the post-acceptance display F1 is displayed based on the acceptance,
・If an operation is performed on the "special operation means 1410", no reception sound will be generated, no display change will occur, and the reception period E may be terminated. (no reaction occurs, the same as if no operation was performed),
・When the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, a reception sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change (post-acceptance display) different from the above-mentioned post-acceptance display F1 F2) is displayed. In addition, during the reception period F, even if an operation on the "sword decoration 5001" is accepted, the remaining time as the reception period F is not reset (extended), and the reception period F You may make it continue digesting the remaining time as it is. That is, in this case, if an operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period F, the post-acceptance display F2 is displayed with this as a trigger. The remaining time is not reset, and the reception period F continues thereafter (of course, reception of operations on the operation button 410 is also permitted).

According to such a configuration, the player is presented with options of "operate the operation button 410", "operate the sword ornament 5001", and "operate the special operation means 1410". Even if the acceptance period occurs, the remaining time as the acceptance period is not necessarily reset (extended) when the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, so the tension is preferable. will be expected to remain at

As with the reception period E, it is desirable that the reception period F is set as a target for which the above-described automatic button function is activated. Also when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, similarly to when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period F It is desirable to display the "post-acceptance display F1" that appears in . However, at this time, if the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, unlike the case of the reception period E (the reception sound E1 is not audibly output), the reception sound F1 should be audibly output. is more desirable.

According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period ends without any acceptance, it is possible to suggest which of acceptance period E or acceptance period F the acceptance period was. Since it becomes, it becomes possible to suppress the decline in game interest.

In this case, even during the acceptance period F, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed as a simulated image display that simulates the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated model image display IG is It is desirable to prevent the display area from decreasing over time.

In addition, in reception period F, as in reception period E, although a plurality of types of simulated image displays are displayed, a plurality of gauge images (predetermined images) GG used to indicate the remaining time are displayed. It is desirable to associate only one of the types of model image display (integrated model image display IG).

Also, during the acceptance period F, as in the case of the acceptance period E, as time elapses during the acceptance period F, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed as shown in FIGS. 2, dynamically display a part (button model image BMG) imitating the "operation receiving part" of the operation button 410 as if "the movement when receiving the operation by the player" is performed, The "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are the part that imitates the "operation receiving part" of the sword decoration body 5001 and the part that imitates the "operation receiving part" of the special operation means 1410. It is desirable that it should be statically displayed rather than displayed.

It should be noted that during the acceptance period E and the acceptance period F, it is not necessary to display a simulated image (special simulated image TM) imitating the special operation means 1410, and the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the special operation means 1410 itself. may be omitted.

In addition, in the production example described above, as the reception period, "reception period A or reception period B or reception period D (equivalent to the first reception period of 'configuration 10-A')" and "reception period E ("configuration 10- A” corresponds to the second reception period)”. Then, during the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), a specific model image display (here, the integrated model image display IG) is displayed as a model image display imitating the operation receiving part, and during the reception period E, A plurality of simulated image displays (here, an integrated simulated image display IG, a sword decoration image SYG, and a special simulated image TM) are displayed as simulated image displays imitating the operation receiving portion, and the simulated image displays are displayed by the player's operation. It is made executable as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable.

In this respect, in the above-described effect example, when the simulated image display is executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation" (for example, during the acceptance period A, B, E) and a case where it is not executed as "dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation" (for example, reception period E). That is, in this case, not only is it easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed even under the situation where the simulated image display is displayed, but also what kind of operation should be performed. Therefore, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained until the player's operation is accepted.

In particular, in the above-described effect example, a plurality of operation receiving units including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are prepared, and during the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the sword decoration 5001 is simulated. An image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is performed. is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable by .

On the other hand, during the acceptance period E, at least both a model image display (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 and a model image display (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword ornament 5001 are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated model image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) is made movable by the player's operation. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is performed, there are cases where this is executed as dynamic display and cases where it is not executed as dynamic display. It becomes possible to realize it, and it is expected to improve the amusement of the game.

Moreover, during the acceptance period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) can be generated with this as a trigger, and corresponds to the model image display (here, sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When an operation is performed on the operation receiving portion (here, the sword ornament 5001) and the operation is accepted, the second display change (post-acceptance display E2) can be generated with this as a trigger. In other words, in this case, regardless of whether or not dynamic display is being performed, the post-reception display corresponding to the type of the receiving side will appear. It becomes possible to give "meaning in production" to the display. For example, even if an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed , it is possible to give surprise to the occurrence of a display change triggered by this.

In addition, in the above-described production example, a plurality of operation reception units including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and during the reception period A (or reception periods B and D), the special operation means 1410 is simulated. An image display (special model image TM) is not performed, and a model image display (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is performed. is executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable by .

On the other hand, during the acceptance period E, at least both a model image display imitating the operation button 410 (integrated model image display IG) and a model image display imitating the special operation means 1410 (special model image TM) are displayed. , one of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (here, the integrated model image display IG) depicts the movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by the player's operation. Although it is executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated model image display IG and the special model image TM (here, the special model image TM) is made movable by the player's operation. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is performed, there are cases where this is executed as dynamic display and cases where it is not executed as dynamic display. It becomes possible to realize it, and it is expected to improve the amusement of the game.

Moreover, during the acceptance period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the simulated image display (here, integrated simulated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this happens, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) can be generated, and the operation receiving unit ( Here, when an operation is performed on the special operation means 1410), no display change (post-acceptance display) triggered by this is caused. That is, in this case, even if the model image display (here, the special model image TM) is displayed within the reception period, it is not necessarily accepted when the corresponding operation receiving unit (special operation means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately during the reception period.

In this case, when the special operation means 1410 is operated during the acceptance period A (or acceptance periods B and D) in which the special model image TM is not displayed, the display change (post-acceptance display) triggered by this operation is performed. It will not occur. However, during the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D) during which the special model image TM is not displayed, when the special operation means 1410 is operated, a display change (post-reception display) occurs. You can let it run. According to such a configuration, the validity of the operation cannot be judged only by the presence or absence of the display of the simulated image display, so that the sense of tension can be preferably maintained.

In the production example described above, during the acceptance period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special model image TM are displayed as still images. However, regarding the sword decoration image SYG and the special model image TM, the operation receiving unit (the sword decoration body 5001 in the case of the sword decoration image SYG, and the special operation means 1410 in the case of the special model image TM) is operated by the player's operation. It is acceptable as long as it is not executed as a dynamic display depicting the movement when it is made movable, for example, it may be a movement (such as rotation) that is different from the movement when the operation receiving part is made movable by the player's operation. Alternatively, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

In addition, in the above-described production example, first, a plurality of operation means (plurality of operation receiving units) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation receiving unit) of “Configuration 11-A”) are prepared. , and the acceptance period includes acceptance period A or acceptance period B (equivalent to the first acceptance period of "configuration 11-A") and acceptance period E (equivalent to the second acceptance period of "configuration 11-A"). We have multiple acceptance periods. During reception period A (or reception period B), a model image display (button model image BMG) imitating the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button model image BMG are displayed. , ``remaining time specific display indicating the remaining time during which the operation button 41 is allowed to be operated by decreasing the display area of the gauge image GG with the lapse of time'' is performed.

On the other hand, during the reception period E, a button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed. The "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time during which the button 41 is allowed to be operated is not performed.

According to such a configuration, even if the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) imitating the operation button 410 is displayed, "the display area of the gauge image GG is Since the "remaining time specific display" indicating the remaining time during which the operation of the button 41 is allowed to be accepted is not necessarily performed, the sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs can be preferably maintained. become.

In addition, in the production example described above, during the acceptance period E, a button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) that imitates the operation button 410 and an operation means (sword ornament 5001) that is different from this image are modeled. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (remaining time specific display described above) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed. ing. That is, in this case, in the acceptance period E, both the acceptance of an operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of an operation on a different operation means (sword ornament 5001) are permitted. "Remaining time specific display" will not be performed. As a result, the player will not be overwhelmed by the fact that both the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of the sword ornament 5001 are permitted, and the reception period E will not occur. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension.

In addition, even in a situation where the remaining time display (remaining time specific display described above) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed, the remaining time as the reception period E It goes without saying that it is declining.

Further, in the above-described effect example, during the acceptance period E, the button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 may be displayed as an image integrated with the periphery decoration image SSG that partitions and forms the display area of the gauge image GG. and However, the gauge image GG is displayed so as to maintain its display area without decreasing its display area over time. That is, in this case, even though the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the reception period E is reduced, so a large display area of the gauge image GG remains. It becomes expected to maintain the tension when it is in a good condition. The gauge image GG does not reduce its display area until the remaining time as the reception period E becomes "0" and this is not displayed.

Further, in the above-described production example, during the acceptance period E, only the button model image BMG among the button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that simulates the sword decoration body 5001 is used as the rest. It is displayed as an image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and thus whether or not the acceptance of operation on the sword decoration body 5001 is validated). Therefore, it becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension.

In this case, of the button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that simulates the sword decoration body 5001, only the button model image BMG is used to display the remaining time even during the acceptance period F described above. It is desirable to display as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used.

In addition, it is possible to generate a reception period G regarding the post-reception display G, and during the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration body 5001 is not displayed, and the button model image BMG imitating the operation button 410 is integrated as described above. It should be displayed as a model image display IG. However, in reception period G, unlike reception period A and reception period B, the display area of the gauge image GG in the integrated model image display IG does not decrease over time, and the display area is maintained. Make it visible in the form. According to such a configuration, even if there occurs a reception period during which only the button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) is displayed as the model image display, the display area of the gauge image GG does not necessarily increase. Since it does not decrease, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension during the reception period.

In the production example described above, during the acceptance periods E, F, and G, the integrated model image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a model image display imitating the operation button 410, and then the gauge By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is made difficult to recognize the remaining time as the reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in reception periods E, F, and G, unlike the reception period A and reception period B (integrated model image display IG), the model image display that simulates the operation button 410 is displayed as a "gauge The remaining time may be prevented from being displayed by displaying an image that does not include the image GG. That is, in this case, during reception periods E, F, and G, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position within the display area.

When the model image display that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed as "an image that does not include the gauge image GG", the "image that does not include the gauge image GG" is the "button model included in the integrated model image display IG". It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image including at least the image "BMG". That is, in this case, when the button model image BMG is displayed, it may be displayed either as an image integrated with the gauge image GG or as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG. , the tension when the reception period occurs can be preferably maintained.

Moreover, in the above-described production example, at least the following operation means are prepared as the operation means.
・Handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of “Configuration 12-A”) that is displaced by being operated by the player, and the handle portion 5012 that is provided on the peripheral edge and is not displaced even if it is operated. A sword decoration 5001 (corresponding to the first operating means of "Construction 12-A") having a sheath 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration of "Construction 12-A") (see FIG. 146, etc.), and An operation button 410 (corresponding to the second operation receiving portion of “configuration 12-A”) that is displaced by receiving an operation by a player, and a frame that is provided on the periphery and does not displace even if the operation button 410 is operated. A production operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operation means of "configuration 12-A") having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decoration part of "configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 44, etc.).

When displaying the sword decoration image SYG that simulates the sword decoration body 5001, the handle portion simulated image (corresponding to the first receiving portion simulated image of "Configuration 12-A") that simulates the handle portion 5012, and the handle portion It is possible to display a handle periphery decoration image (corresponding to the first periphery decoration image of “configuration 12-A”) that decorates the periphery of the model image (see FIG. When displaying an image display (here, an integrated model image display IG), a button model image BMG (corresponding to the second receiving part model image of “Configuration 12-A”) that simulates the operation button 410 and the button model A peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge of the image BMG can be displayed (see FIG. 287, etc.), and the handle peripheral edge decoration image and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG are displayed as different images.

According to such a configuration, since the peripheral edge decoration images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operating means itself is similar, the case where the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the integrated model image display IG are displayed. It is expected that it will be possible to make the appearance of the display and the display largely different from each other, and that it will be easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

Further, in the above-described rendering example, the handle periphery decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a portion imitating a decoration part that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1, and is displayed as an image display imitating the sheath part 5020. Although it is displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated simulated image display IG is displayed as an image including at least a part imitating a decoration portion that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1 . That is, in this case, when the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed, it is possible to appropriately recognize that the sword decoration 5001 is given an opportunity to operate. On the other hand, when the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the production operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a situation with higher production. will be able to In this case, the "effect operation unit 400" is provided as a member having an operation receiving part (operation button 410) larger than the "sword decoration body 5001". It is desirable to prevent difficulty in recognizing which operation means should be operated even if the peripheral edge decoration image SSG including at least the part imitating the is displayed.

In this way, in order to provide a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a "situation with a higher effect", the peripheral decoration image SSG It is desirable to display an image imitating a fictitious decorative portion that does not actually exist on the machine 1 . However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is in a situation where an operation opportunity is given, a portion imitating the frame unit 415 is included in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. may be included.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, of the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG in the integrated model image display IG, only the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is displayed for the remaining time. is formed, and the display area can be used to display the remaining time, as described above.

It should be noted that the "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an image display in which a patterned handle image simulating the handle 5012 and a handle periphery decoration image decorating the periphery of the patterned handle 5012 are integrated. "Integrated model image display IG" is displayed as an image display in which a button model image BMG that simulates the operation button 410 and a periphery decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button model image BMG are integrated. . In this regard, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not have separate "handle pattern image" and "handle peripheral edge decoration image" as its image data, and they are integrated as one image data. It is prepared. Similarly, for the image data of the "integrated model image display IG", the "button model image BMG" and the "peripheral decoration image SSG" are not provided separately, but prepared as one image data that integrates them. It is supposed to be

In addition, in the above-described effect example, first, as the operation receiving portion, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of “configuration 13-A”), the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration 5001 (“ Prepare a plurality of operation receiving parts including the second operation receiving part of "Configuration 13-A") and the operation receiving part of the special operation means 1410 (corresponding to the third operation receiving part of "Configuration 13-A") As the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including the reception period E (equivalent to the specific reception period of “configuration 13-A”) are prepared. Then, during the reception period E (Fig. 286), the "integrated model image display IG (inside button model image BMG)" that simulates the operation button 410, and the "sword decoration image SYG (inside the handle part)" that simulates the handle 5012 Periphery decorative image)" and a "special model image TM" imitating the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410 are both displayed. Among the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM", "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" that imitate the operation receiving part that is not accepted is hidden at least (see FIG. 286).

According to the above configuration, a simulated image display (sword decoration image SYG, special model image TM) will be hidden, so the operation receiving part (handle 5012 of sword decoration 5001, special operation It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not a further operation is required for the operation receiving portion of the means 1410 .

In addition, during the reception period E, although the "integrated model image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special model image TM" are displayed, the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, the special operation Of the means 1410, the special operation means 1410 does not validate (permit) operation acceptance (acceptance regarding display after acceptance). That is, as described above, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated, and when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, the second display is generated. Although a change (post-acceptance display E2) is generated, no operation for the special operation means 1410 is accepted, and no display change triggered by the operation occurs. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance and tension until the player's operation is accepted in the acceptance period E.

In addition, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, a second display change (post-acceptance display E2) occurs. Neither the "decorative image SYG" nor the "special model image TM" are hidden, and their display states are continued (Fig. 286(i)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to generate a display change that is significantly different from when the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

In particular, during the acceptance period E, when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, this is used as a trigger to increase the remaining time of the acceptance period E (Fig. 286 (i) → ( In progress to e)), it is expected to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the lack of remaining time in realizing the performance that requires further operations.

Further, in the example of effect described above, during the acceptance period E, when an operation to the operation button 410 is accepted, the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is generated. E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and both the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special model image TM" are hidden (Fig. 286 ( f)). As a result, even after the operation has been accepted while a plurality of simulated images are being displayed, the post-acceptance display E1 that has occurred due to the acceptance of the operation on the operation button 410 is recognized. be able to

Also, at this time, since the “integrated model image display IG” is displayed at a position different from the position displayed during the reception period E (Fig. 286(f)), the reception period E ends. It becomes possible to suggest that it is in a state where

Further, in the example of the effect described above, when the remaining time in the reception period E runs out, the above-described automatic button function is activated, and the operation of the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period E. The same display screen appears as (see FIG. 286(h)). In this case also, in the state where the first display change (post-acceptance display E1) is occurring, the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special model image TM" are displayed. Since both of them are hidden, it becomes possible to recognize that the post-acceptance display E1 corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed.

It should be noted that, during reception period D shown in FIG. may also be hidden at the timing when the character information is hidden. In this case, when the character information (press) is returned to the display state, the model image display is also returned to the display state (Fig. 284(f)).

[Operation reception presentation with characteristic image display status]
As explained by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, variation as to which one of a plurality of variation patterns is to be executed is based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the starting winning (holding digestion). Pattern judgment can be executed. Then, when one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern It is possible to execute a production judgment (such as advance notice judgment) as to which of the expected productions (such as advance notice production) is to appear selectively. It should be noted that depending on the result of this production determination, all of the plurality of expected productions prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern (notice production, etc.) may be sequentially executed, or None of the expected effects (notice effects, etc.) may be executed.

And as described above, when such production determination (fluctuation pattern judgment, advance notice judgment, etc.) is performed, by performing control to display the production content according to the result of the production judgment on the production display device 1600, the big hit judgment The variable production by the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected production (preliminary production) related to the background depiction (background advance notice), movable body operation (role production), and the like. As a result, as a result of execution of the variation effect by the decorative pattern together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, etc., when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the player can enjoy the big win game and the high prize as a privilege. Transition to the probability game state is made executable.

In such a configuration, the variable performance by the decorative pattern is provided as a performance having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit has been obtained as a result of the judgment of a big hit", and the background depiction, the movement of the movable body, etc. is provided as an effect having "the function of suggesting the degree of expectation, that is, the ratio (including 0% and 100%) of the fact that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player enjoys the game through these effects.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a result of the determination of the variation pattern, it is specified among the highly expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach effects with background changes, etc.) If the variation pattern is selected, even if any result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.), when the pattern production based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach (predetermined condition is established), it is possible to generate an acceptance acceptance state (effective period) in which the acceptance of the performance is allowed.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a predetermined variation pattern is selected from among the low-expectation variation patterns (non-reach variation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the determination of the variation pattern. Even in the case, when a special result is obtained in the production determination (preliminary judgment etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the pattern production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing (predetermined condition is established Then), it is possible to generate an acceptance allowable state (effective period) in which the performance acceptance is allowed. However, when a predetermined variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination, even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing, the reception acceptance state (effective period) does not occur. . In addition, the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the reception acceptance state (valid period) that occurs when the pattern effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. This is executed as an effect (effect after acceptance).

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is possible to generate an acceptance period during which the player's actions (operations) are allowed to be accepted, and the player's actions (operations) are accepted within the acceptance period. Then, a display change (post-acceptance effect) is caused in accordance with the type of acceptance period that has occurred.

Further, during the acceptance period, an action target indication indicating which one is the "target of the player's action" can be displayed. Such an action target display can be, for example, a model image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is expressed as an image. In particular, the "action object display" according to this production example is displayed as a "simulated image display" having a plurality of modes that imitate the player's action target and have different expectations.

In addition, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which the action (operation) by the player is allowed to be received can be displayed. Such a remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image is reduced over time. In particular, in this production example, at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has a plurality of aspects (for example, the reduction speed of the display area of the gauge image, the suggestion of the degree of expectation, the suggestion of the type of operation means, etc.). prepared and implemented in any of these modes.

In addition, even if any result is obtained as a notice effect judgment, at a predetermined timing during SP reach, regarding the fluctuation pattern that generates the acceptance acceptable state (effective period), in addition to the above "specific fluctuation pattern" may also be provided. No matter which result is obtained as a result of the advance notice effect judgment, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at the predetermined timing is not included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). or it may be included but its selection rate (occurrence rate) should be low (though not necessarily).

By the way, the acceptability state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions means that it is possible to accept changes in the display of the effect display device 1600 as long as the player's operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Post-display (post-operation display) is executed, or changes in the effect sound of the speaker, changes in the light emission of the lamp, and the effect of the movable decorative body are generated. The performance itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decrease.

In addition, including each example described above and each example described later, the "operation (action) by the player" to be detected means that the player It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pressing action or drawing action) by the touch sensor, but also the "player's contact action on a specific part" that is detected by the touch sensor, and the "in a specific space" that is detected by the non-contact sensor. It also means that the player's actions in In short, it is sufficient that one or a plurality of accepting means (operating means) for accepting actions (pressing action, drawing action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) by the player are provided.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the state of the model image display when providing the player with an operation opportunity (action opportunity) is designed to have the following special effects. I have to. It should be noted that each performance (each configuration) described below does not necessarily have to include all of these configurations. can be reduced, or some configurations that are considered necessary to obtain further effects may be selectively provided, or applicable to other configurations (applicable desirable) may be employed as appropriate. Furthermore, each effect (structure) described below is merely an example, and any one structure capable of suppressing a decline in interest in the game related to the acceptance period may be provided.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, without displaying an action target display (for example, a model image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the player's action and have different expectations), A plurality of reception periods are prepared, including a specific reception period in which "reception validity determination in which an action by a player is regarded as a valid action" is allowed. It should be noted that the “specified reception period” for the configuration 1-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" related to other configurations, or it may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" related to other configurations. good. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from which timing the reception validity judgment is permitted, and furthermore, it is difficult to recognize whether the reception validity judgment is already permitted. There is a concern that only players who are sensitive to performance can enjoy it."

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, upon occurrence of such a specific reception period, a reception acceptance sound indicating that reception validity determination is permitted, or a reception acceptance sound indicating that reception validity determination is permitted. can be output, the action target display (for example, a model image display that imitates the target of the player's action and has multiple modes with different expectations) is not displayed. Although there are still situations in which it is not possible to sufficiently recognize the target of the player's action, there are situations where the player is required to perform some action (situation where the player is given an opportunity to operate). It becomes possible to recognize one thing, and thereby many players are expected to enjoy the presentation.

Note that the acceptable acceptance sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be generated before the specified acceptance period and terminated before the specified acceptance period, or may be generated at the timing of occurrence of the specified acceptance period. , or may occur after the timing of occurrence of the specific reception period and end within the specific reception period. The acceptability sound may be realized as a sound that always gives (or gives) some action opportunity (operating opportunity) to the player when it is output. In addition, the "state in which the operation object display (simulated image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B. It is acceptable as long as it cannot be visually recognized on the screen. For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer.

In addition, it is desirable that the acceptable acceptance sound that is output when the specific acceptance period occurs is a sound that is also output (as the acceptable acceptance sound) when other acceptance periods occur. For example, if the acceptance acceptable sound is output even when the acceptance period in which the same action opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific acceptance period occurs occurs, the action target display (for example, a model image display) is displayed. Even if it is not given, it is possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) is to be given (given). In addition, for example, if the acceptable reception sound is output even when a reception period in which an action opportunity (operation opportunity) different from the specific reception period occurs occurs, an operation target display (for example, a model image display) ) is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given. are in a state of being

As will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 1-B", when the specific acceptance period occurs, first, the display of the operation target (for example, the display of the simulated image) is hidden (not displayed). Let the state appear. After that, while the specified acceptance period continues, a second display state in which an operation target display (for example, a simulated image display) is displayed may appear. That is, in this case, during the specific acceptance period, it will appear as a so-called "hidden button" at first, and only players who are sensitive to such effects can enjoy it. However, while the specified acceptance period continues (before the set time (effective time) has expired), the display of the operation target (for example, the display of a simulated image) must be displayed. Therefore, many players, even if they are not sensitive to the performance, can notice this (the specific acceptance period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, it is expected that through such performance, the ability to see that a so-called "hidden button" is occurring will be nurtured.

Also, at this time, it is desirable that in the second display state, the action target display can be displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations. That is, on the player side, if an action is accepted in the second display state even though the action was not accepted in the first display state, an action object display (for example, a model image display) is displayed. Until then, it is feared that the fact that the specific reception period has not been recognized will be revealed to the surroundings, and that the insensitivity to such effects will be revealed, which will reduce the interest in the game. In this regard, in the second display state, if the display of the action object is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectations, even if the player accepts the action in the second display state, the "first I was aware that I was in a state where action acceptance was permitted from the time I was in the display state, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the display of the action object (for example, display of a simulated image), so in the first display state , it will be possible to make it look like the player did not dare to accept the action.

In addition, due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the player can accurately recognize from which timing the specific reception period in which the "reception validity determination that the player's movement is a valid movement" has occurred. It is difficult. In this case, if an action (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the "reception validity judgment" will not be made, and it will be said that "I thought that the specific reception period occurred, but I was mistaken." There is a concern that the player may mistakenly think that the specified acceptance period has ended without the player performing an action (operation). Therefore, when adopting the "configuration 1-B", even if there is an action (operation) by the player before the specific reception period, the action (operation) is "reception validity determination" at that time. However, after the start of the specified acceptance period, the player's actions (operations) performed before the specified acceptance period are targeted (based on) "reception validity judgment" It should be possible to According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed slightly before the specific reception period occurs, it can be accepted after the specific reception period has occurred. , and by extension, it becomes possible to execute the post-acceptance production triggered by this. However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not a reception period has occurred in which the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" is permitted. It will be required to execute it regardless.

Further, at this time, an action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period is not performed in the second display state after the occurrence of the specific reception period, but in the first display state. It is desirable to be able to accept (acceptance validity judgment) as validity judgment in the state. According to such a configuration, it is the timing (for example, the timing at which the first display state (specified reception period) occurs) after a short period of time has passed since the action (operation) was performed by the player, and the action target display (For example, display of a model image) is not displayed, it is determined that reception is valid, and the execution of the effect after reception is started. As a result, instead of the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) despite the display of the action object (for example, a simulated image display), the state in which the player's action is properly accepted It becomes possible to suggest that it is in, and it becomes possible to improve the amusement of the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. In the first acceptance period, regardless of the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is the valid action" is made, the action target is displayed (here, the target of the action by the player is simulated). A model image display having a plurality of modes with different expectations) is always displayed, and in the second reception period, regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination is made, the operation target display (here, A model image display that simulates the target of the player's action and has a plurality of modes with different expectations is always prevented from being displayed. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 2-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of receiving periods with completely different performances, it is possible to give a clear distinction in requesting an action (giving an opportunity to operate) to the player. It is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Also, as will be described later, when the "configuration 2-B" is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, the action (operation) by the player is regarded as a valid action (valid operation). Depending on when the reception validity determination is made, there may be a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed and a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is not displayed. It should be noted that the "third reception period" for the configuration 2-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "third reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean a different reception period, or a reception period different from these reception periods may mean

According to such a configuration, regardless of the timing at which reception validity determination is made, it appears as if the "first reception period" in which the operation target display (simulated image display) is always displayed is occurring. Or, it can be made to appear as if there is a "second reception period" in which the operation target display (simulated image display) is not always displayed regardless of the timing at which reception validity determination is made, The sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs can be preferably maintained through the performance of such uncertainties.

[Configuration 3-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. After one reception, the effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The performance after the second reception can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 3-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, whether the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period or the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, the reception validity determination is performed, at least one of the display target areas (specific areas) of the action target display (here, a simulated image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the action target of the player and have different expectations) Since it is possible to execute the extinction EF effect using the part, it is easy to recognize that the acceptance validity determination has been properly made (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). be able to

Note that the disappearing EF effect is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the action target display (simulated image display). It does not necessarily have to be displayed. In addition, the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-described "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". A mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including the In addition to the mode in which the operation target display (simulated image display) itself is difficult to see (for example, the display is reduced or blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed), the display is changed (changed) and displayed. It may be an aspect.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 3-B", in the first reception period, at what timing is the reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid operation (valid operation)? Depending on the operation, there may be a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed and a case where the operation object display (simulated image display) is not displayed.

In this case, first, when reception validity determination is made in a situation where an action object display (simulated image display) is displayed, the action object display (simulated image display) is displayed in a specific area triggered by this. To execute a disappearing EF effect in a predetermined area including at least a part of. On the other hand, even if the reception validity determination is made in a situation where the action target display (simulated image display) is not displayed, this will trigger the extinction EF effect to be performed under the above-mentioned situation (action target display is displayed), it is desirable to execute in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made even in a situation where the operation target display (simulated image display) is not displayed. . In addition, if the reception validity determination is made in a situation where the action target display (simulated image display) is not displayed, the first reception period will end without the action target display being displayed, and the disappearing EF effect will be executed using at least a portion of the area where the action target display was to be displayed.

Also, at this time, during the second reception period, regardless of the timing at which reception validity determination is made to make the action (operation) by the player a valid action (valid operation), the action object display (simulated image display) is always displayed. It is desirable to make it visible. By preparing such a "second reception period in which the display of the object to be operated (simulated image display) is always displayed" separately from the above-described first reception period, the disappearing EF effect is executed. Concurrently, it is possible to provide performance with a sense of security, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, an operation target display (here, an operation by the player A simulated image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the target and have different expectations) can be displayed using at least a specific area, and the action by the player while the simulated image display is displayed is an effective action. When the "receipt validity determination" is made, it is possible to put the operation target display (simulated image display) into a non-display state based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. In addition, if the "reception validity determination" is made while the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed within the acceptance period, the operation object display (simulated image display) is hidden. At least part of the specific area can be used to execute the disappearing EF effect.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period as reception periods. Then, during the specific reception period, the game performed in a state where the action target display (here, a model image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the player's action and have different expectations) is not displayed. It is possible to make a "receipt validity determination" in which the motion by the player is a valid motion, and when the reception validity determination is made, the extinction EF effect is not executed. It should be noted that the “specified reception period” for the configuration 4-B is merely a name used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to other configurations, or may mean a different reception period.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" is properly performed (the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted). As a result, it is expected that the tension during the specific reception period, in which the player secretly asks for an action (secretly gives an opportunity to operate), is maintained even after the reception validity determination is made. Become.

Even when the disappearing EF effect is displayed, the action target display (simulated image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed. In addition, the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-described "mode in which the model image display becomes difficult to see". A mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including the In addition to the mode in which the operation target display (simulated image display) itself is difficult to see (for example, the display is reduced or blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed), the display is changed (changed) and displayed. It may be an aspect.

Further, as will be described later, when the "configuration 4-B" is adopted, the "specified reception period" may be set as the first reception period. Then, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period (specified reception period) and the second reception period are prepared. It may be possible to determine whether reception is valid by determining that a player's action performed in a state where the image display) is not displayed as a valid action. Then, in the first reception period, when it is determined that the reception validity is determined to be the valid movement of the action performed by the player in the state where the display of the action object (simulated image display) is not displayed, the disappearing EF effect is executed. First, in the second reception period, if it is determined that the reception validity is determined to be a valid movement by the player's action performed in a state in which the action object display is not displayed, the disappearing EF effect may be executed. good. In this case, the terms "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the first acceptance period (specified acceptance period) and the second acceptance period are set until the player performs an action in a state where the action target display (simulated image display) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which one has occurred, but after the reception valid judgment is made that this is a valid operation, which of the first reception period (specified reception period) and the second reception period has occurred? can be recognized, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

[Configuration 5-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. It should be noted that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" relating to the configuration 5-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

Then, in the first reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is made, the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when execution is started, the display of the action object (here, the model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is in a state of being displayed instead of being hidden. In the second reception period, if the "reception validity judgment that the action by the player is a valid movement" is made, the above-mentioned reception effect based on the reception validity judgment (post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period ) is started, the action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is displayed instead of being hidden. Don't let that be the case.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-acceptance effect based on the "acceptance validity determination" is started, the action target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the action by the player and have different expectations) ) is visible, and an action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the target of the action by the player and has multiple modes with different expectations) is visible. Since there is a case where it is not, it is expected that the tension after the performance after reception is started will be preferably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 5-B", within the first reception period, depending on the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made, When the operation object display (simulated image display) is not hidden and is displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. It is desirable that there are cases where the operation target display (simulated image display) is in a non-display state.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among multiple modes, the after-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after it is displayed, it will inevitably reduce the interest in the game.

For example, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) has a “low-expectation first mode” and a “low-expectation first mode” within its effective period (first reception period). 2 mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expected mode). When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, at this time If the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation mode 1", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the model image display. I can say. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the model image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so the model image display should be hidden. It can be said that it is desirable to allow this to continue without interruption.

Alternatively, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some of the players feel that " As an "excuse", it seems that there are people who want to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the performance after reception is started, Even when the model image display is displayed in the ``second aspect with high expectation'', some players feel ``irritated'' when the post-reception production is executed in the ``low expectation aspect''. In order to suppress this, it is thought that there are people who want to hide the display of the model image so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display the model image through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. To be able to substantially select whether to start execution of the performance after reception in the displayed state or start execution of the performance after reception in the state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 6-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 6-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

Then, in the first reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is made, the above-mentioned post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). (multiple modes with different degrees are prepared) may be displayed instead of being hidden, and during the second reception period, "Reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made. In this case, the remaining time is displayed (for example, a gauge image displayed within a frame image is displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. It is a depiction that decreases the area as time passes, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as at least one mode of the frame image and the gauge image) is not hidden but displayed. I try not to.

According to such a configuration, the remaining time display (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced as time passes after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started. It is a depiction that makes it possible, and a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared as at least one mode of the frame image and the gauge image), and the remaining time display (for example, in the frame image It is a depiction in which the display area of the displayed gauge image decreases over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as at least one mode of the frame image and the gauge image) is not visible. Since there will be cases, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the after-reception production is started.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 6-B", within the first reception period, depending on the timing at which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" is made, At the time when the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed instead of being hidden. It is desirable that there are cases where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed.

That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the plurality of modes, the after-reception effect (first It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the start of execution of the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period If the presentation continues to be displayed even after the performance is started, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) has at least one of the frame image and the gauge image within its effective period (first reception period) as the "first mode with low expectations" and " Even if it is displayed as "low expectation second mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a high expectation mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expectation mode) It's becoming When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, at this time If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, the frame image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation" at this time. If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation. And it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some players believe that the post-acceptance effect is executed in the "mode with low expectations". As an 'excuse' when it's gone, a person who wants to keep the frame image and the gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and are kept displayed at the time when the performance is started after the acceptance. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation", some players think that the effect after acceptance is a "mode with a low degree of expectation". , the frame image and the gauge image should be hidden so that they cannot be seen when the post-acceptance effect is started. It seems that there are people

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can use the frame image and the gauge through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. It is possible to substantially select whether to start the execution of the post-acceptance production while the image is displayed or to start the execution of the after-acceptance production while the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and cannot be visually recognized. As a result, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

[Configuration 7-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. After one reception, the effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The performance after the second reception can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the execution of the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started. At the time when the action target display (here, the model image display imitating the target of the action by the player and having a plurality of modes with different expectations) may not be displayed and may be in a non-display state. be. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , the action target display (here, a model image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the player's action target and have different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a non-display state. there is

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible, and the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible. ) is not made visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 7-B", if "reception valid determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives , the operation target display (simulated image display) is hidden and displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed. However, after the arrival of the predetermined timing within the first acceptance period, if "the reception validity determination is made that the player's action is a valid action", the action target display (simulated image display) is displayed. It is desirable that the performance is started after acceptance in the above.

That is, from the player's point of view, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among multiple modes, the after-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after it is displayed, it will inevitably reduce the interest in the game.

For example, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) has a “low-expectation first mode” and a “low-expectation first mode” within its effective period (first reception period). 2 mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expected mode). When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, at this time If the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation mode 1", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the model image display. I can say. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the model image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so the model image display should be hidden. It can be said that it is desirable to allow this to continue without interruption.

Alternatively, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some of the players feel that " As an "excuse", it seems that there are people who want to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the performance after reception is started, Even when the model image display is displayed in the ``second aspect with high expectation'', some players feel ``irritated'' when the post-reception production is executed in the ``low expectation aspect''. In order to suppress this, it is thought that there are people who want to hide the display of the model image so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "validate the action by the player" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If it is possible to make the reception valid determination as an action", it is possible to start executing the effect after reception in a state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and Until the timing arrives, when the ``receipt valid determination that the action by the player is a valid action'' is not made, at that point, the execution of the post-reception production starts while the model image display is not displayed. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

[Configuration 8-B]
As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period are prepared as acceptance periods. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. After one reception, the effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the second reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The performance after the second reception can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. Note that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" for the configuration 7-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the execution of the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started. At the point of time, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases over time, and as an aspect of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, the degree of expectation is are prepared in a plurality of different modes) are not displayed and may be in a non-display state. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed within a frame image is reduced over time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image has multiple modes with different expectations. prepared) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) can be visually recognized, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are not made visible in some cases, it is expected that the tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Also, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the "Configuration 8-B", the case where "receipt valid determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives , the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is in a non-display state at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be displayed. However, after the arrival of the predetermined timing within the first reception period, if "reception valid determination is made with the player's movement as a valid movement", the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) will be displayed. It is desirable that the post-acceptance effect be started while the display is in the displayed state.

That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the plurality of modes, the after-reception effect (first It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the start of execution of the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance period, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period If the presentation continues to be displayed even after the performance is started, the interest in the game will inevitably decrease.

For example, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) has at least one of the frame image and the gauge image within its effective period (first reception period) as the “first mode with low expectations” and “ Even if it is displayed as "low expectation second mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a high expectation mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expectation mode) It's becoming When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game by itself. If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, the frame image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation" at this time. If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation. And it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the gauge image.

Alternatively, even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some of the players believe that the post-acceptance production is executed in the "mode with low expectations". As an 'excuse' when it's gone, a person who wants to keep the frame image and the gauge image in a state where they are not hidden and are kept displayed at the time when the performance is started after the acceptance. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation", some players think that the effect after reception is "a mode with a low degree of expectation". , the frame image and the gauge image should be hidden so that they cannot be seen when the post-acceptance production starts. It seems that there are people

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can "activate the action by the player" until the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. If "receipt valid determination" is performed as an action, the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and it is possible to start executing the effect after reception in a state where it is not visible, and within the first reception period. When the ``reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action'' is not made until the predetermined timing of , the frame image and the gauge image are not displayed at that time. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the performance will start to be executed, a person who desires such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind thereafter.

[Configuration 9-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, during the acceptance period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, an operation target display (here, an operation by the player It is possible to display a model image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the target and have different expectations using at least a specific area. During the reception period, when a "reception validity determination" is made that the action by the player is a valid operation, it is possible to execute a post-reception effect according to the type of the reception period based on the reception validity determination. be done. Further, even at the time when the execution of the presentation after acceptance is started, there is a case where the operation target display (simulated image display) is not hidden but displayed.

In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of acceptance periods including a first acceptance period and a second acceptance period as acceptance periods. Then, in both cases where the "valid reception determination" is made within the first acceptance period and when the "valid reception judgment" is made within the second acceptance period, the "valid reception judgment" is made. , the disappearance EF effect can be executed using at least part of the specific area. It should be noted that the "first acceptance period" and "second acceptance period" relating to the configuration 9-B are merely names used to explain the technical concept of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "first reception period" or "second reception period" according to other configurations, or it may mean reception periods on the opposite sides of each other. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

According to such a configuration, the acceptance validity determination is properly made under the action acceptance conditions suggested by the simulated image display (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the action by the player). You can easily recognize what has happened.

Note that the disappearing EF effect includes, for example, the above-described "mode in which the action object display (simulated image display) is difficult to visually recognize". A mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the area, or an effect object that overlaps at least a part of the specific area in which the action object display (simulated image display) is displayed when viewed from the front is used. In addition to the mode in which the effect is executed, the display of the operation target (simulated image display) itself is changed to a display that is difficult to see (for example, the display is reduced, blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed). ) to display.

As will be described later, in the case of adopting the "configuration 9-B", in the first reception period, depending on the timing at which the "reception validity determination" that the action by the player is a valid action is made, the first reception period At the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to one reception period starts to be executed, the action target display (simulated image display) is not hidden and is displayed, and the action target display (simulated image display) is displayed. It may be in a non-visible state (invisible state).

That is, from the player's point of view, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production (corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display this even after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started, in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among multiple modes, the after-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception validity judgment" starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after it is displayed, it will inevitably reduce the interest in the game.

For example, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) has a “low-expectation first mode” and a “low-expectation first mode” within its effective period (first reception period). 2 mode", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a highly expected mode (furthermore, a possibility that it will be executed in a low expected mode). When the post-acceptance effect (the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the first acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, even though this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, at this time If the model image display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation mode 1", it is clear that the interest in the game will be reduced, so it is desirable to hide the model image display. I can say. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation, at this time, the model image is displayed in the "second mode with a high degree of expectation". If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to appropriately suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with a low degree of expectation, so the model image display should be hidden. It can be said that it is desirable to allow this to continue without interruption.

Alternatively, even when the model image display is displayed in the "first aspect with low expectations", some players have a feeling that " As an "excuse", it seems that there are people who want to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the performance after reception is started, Even when the model image display is displayed in the ``second mode with high expectations'', some players feel ``irritated'' when the post-reception production is executed in the ``mode with low expectations''. In order to suppress this, it is thought that there are people who want to hide the display of the model image so that it cannot be visually recognized at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display the model image through the timing at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period. To be able to substantially select whether to start execution of the performance after reception in the displayed state or start execution of the performance after reception in the state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized. Therefore, it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

Also, as will be described later, when adopting the "configuration 9-B", in the second reception period, regardless of the timing at which the "reception validity determination" that the action by the player is a valid action is made, At the time when the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the second acceptance period starts to be executed, the display of the action object (the model image display) may always be displayed.

According to such a configuration, it is not always possible to select whether or not to display the target display (simulated image display) at the time of starting the execution of the effect after reception. It becomes possible to suitably maintain the tension within the period.

[Other configurations]
In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception allowable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a model image display related to the reception target (a model image simulating an operation receiving part, etc.) is displayed. By displaying as an integrated model image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image display, the interest in the game is reduced until the display (display change) is executed after reception. is being suppressed. Regarding such an integrated model image display, the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the pattern effect progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and the fluctuation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to display it in both the operation reception effect (reception period) and the low-expectation non-suppressed reception effect and the high-expectation suppressed reception effect. .

It should be noted that the "integrated simulated image display" according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. For example, a display target area for a gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided within the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different degrees of expectation are prepared as the "integrated simulated image display", and it is also the same that the display is made in any one of these modes.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example as well, when the reception permitted state (reception period) occurs, it suggests that the operation reception is permitted or that the operation reception is permitted. A reception permitting sound is output, thereby making it difficult to forget to operate. Here, "acceptable sound" means whether or not the acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) always occurs while the sound is being output (while the sound data is assigned) when the output of the sound is started. , is a sound in which an acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) has already occurred. In other words, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output under a situation in which an effect that has nothing to do with the acceptable reception state (acceptance period) is being performed.

Further, each reception allowable state (each reception period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type is assumed to occur when a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but a low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern) is a valid period that cannot occur (a valid period generated based on the establishment of a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expectation variation pattern) in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). In addition, the second type of reception acceptance state is the valid period that can occur in both the high-expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) and the low-expected fluctuation pattern (occurred as a result of advance notice determination validity period, etc.).

The "integrated simulated image display" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first-type and second-type reception permission states (reception period). Here, both the first-type acceptance allowable state (acceptance period) and the second-type acceptability state (acceptance period) are acceptance states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, the operation button 410). Since it is assumed that this occurs in the allowable state (acceptance period), the "integrated simulated image display" displayed during the acceptance period is an image simulating the same operation means (operation button 410).

Of the multiple modes prepared as "integrated simulated image display", the highly expected special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232(d)) is the first type reception acceptance state (reception period) In the second type reception acceptance state (reception period), it can be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to 232(c)). (this configuration is not essential). In this case, in the first type acceptance acceptance state (acceptance period), any of the multiple modes including the special mode (for example, FIGS. A determination is made as to whether or not to display the "display", and the "integrated model image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), "integrated model image" in any of the multiple modes (for example, FIGS. may be determined whether to display, and the "integrated simulated image display" may be displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

The details of the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be described below with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely described as the best embodiment, and does not necessarily have to be provided. That is, each configuration described in the specification described below corresponds to any one of the above "configuration 1-B" to "configuration 9-B" when it is desired to obtain further effects It is possible to arbitrarily select and adopt only the configuration that

First, an example that embodies the above "Configuration 1-B" to "Configuration 4-B" will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception, which are performed when the reception is received). We have prepared multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), at least the 1B reception period (1B post-reception effects), the 2B reception period (2B post-reception effects), and the 3B reception period (3B post-reception effects). I have it ready.

With reference to FIGS. 288 to 303, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. It may be prepared as a reception period separate from the production), or the 1B reception period (production after the 1B reception), the 2B reception period (the production after the 2B reception), the 3B reception period ( 3B post-acceptance effect) may be realized as any one of them. Further, in order to realize each invention described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each acceptance period described above with reference to FIG. 287. You can choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 288 to 290 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 1B is satisfied as a result of determination (big win determination or effect determination) and the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs. . FIGS. 297 and 298 are diagrams showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "1B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1B variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 1B variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1B variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 297 (a) ), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected "1B variation pattern" itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 288(a), when the timing tQ2 comes after the 1B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 1B is satisfied). , generates the 1B acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 1B acceptance" is permitted ("situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and (c)"). As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period (if the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 1B post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 1B reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases as time passes Depiction), disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to acceptance (reception validity determination) are to be carried out respectively. As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1B reception period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIGS. 1 effect device), as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. The integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at timing tQ2, or may appear before timing tQ2 and straddle timing tQ2. may be displayed in It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (reception valid determination) within the 1B acceptance period or when the acceptance (reception valid determination) is made. is hidden when the 1B acceptance period ends without The 1B acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tQ3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 288(a)).

Also, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) can be any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) and (d)). FIG. 297(b) shows a case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a). FIG. 297(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232(d). In addition, during the 1B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. may be made.

FIG. 288 assumes a case where "receipt valid determination is made that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" when the relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period arrives. there is That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 288(a), the 1B reception period ends and the 1B reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made) at timing tQ2a. Execution of the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In addition, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIGS. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period. "0%" or "100%" may be included.

Here, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 288, at timing tQ2a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect after the 1B acceptance is started in response to the acceptance), the "Integration In addition to not hiding the model image display IG, the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

That is, the 1B after-reception production according to this embodiment includes the "1B after-reception production display" using the production display device 1600 (first production device) and the second production device (for example, a sub liquid crystal, a movable ``Specific effect after reception of 1B'' using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the effect sound after reception of 1B using the 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect at least. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an effect in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing of starting execution of the "first post-reception effect display" as the 1B post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made by .

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 298 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, the "integrated model image display It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the reception period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is a concern that

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 288(b) and FIG. (When the timing tQ2b arrives), display related to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF Effect)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tQ2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continued to be displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production (1B post-reception production), a low-expectation aspect (Fig. 298 (d1) to (h1)) appears, and a high-expectation aspect ( 298(d2) to (h2)), different forms (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2) appear as disappearance-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 298(e1) and (e2), the "effect display after receiving 1B" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the disappearance-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed as "first disappearance-related display SKB1" or "second disappearance-related display SKB2". As a result, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "1B post-reception effect display" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 288(b), FIG. When the timing tQ2c within the period in which the mode appears), the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 1B reception period. Execution of "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character)) is the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. 298 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, respectively, the "1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1 ( Execution of "1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1" or "1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2") is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 1B reception period, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-effect (1B post-receipt effect display UGB1 can be started without a large delay compared to other effect devices, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. Since the effect display UGB1 after the 1B reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, it suggests that the 1B reception period has already ended, and the player's gaze target is changed. is expected to naturally shift from the "integrated model image display IG" to the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)". (after timing tQ2c).

On the other hand, for the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. (it does not necessarily have to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and "1st B The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGB1 (first B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or first B post-reception effect display UGB1-2). As a result, even though the execution of the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period. This makes it easier to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)" is started in this way, 288(b) and FIG. 298(g1) or (g2), the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 -2)” is displayed, first, among the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 288(b), FIG. "Display SKB1 or second disappearance related display SKB2" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B Post-acceptance display UGB1-2)” will be displayed.

In this regard, the “1B post-reception effect display UGB1” refers to a plurality of modes (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UGB1-2). Therefore, the "1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In addition, in the production examples (FIGS. 297 and 298) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period, when the acceptance is made within the 1B acceptance period and the "1B reception after-acceptance display UGB1" is executed, the "1B The background image is switched before and after the post-acceptance effect display UGB1” is started.

According to such a configuration, under the circumstances shown in FIGS. 298(d) and (e) (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in FIG. 288) where the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (the 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1" has not yet started.

Note that in this production example, the timing ( Although the display is started at a timing (timing tQ2c) later than the timing tQ2b), the timing (timing tQ2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed. The display may be started at the same timing (timing tQ2b).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 298, as an effect after acceptance, the background image is switched to the same background image when a low-expectation aspect appears and when a high-expectation aspect appears. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Alternatively, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 288) accompanying this, In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tQ2c) of the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tQ2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. The 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 1B post-reception performance (1B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tQ2a at which the reception is received in the 1B reception period only for a part of the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display). As for the 1B post-receipt effect itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tQ2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTB1 (first reception As a 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-1), which is a low-expected mode of the post-specific effect UTB1, precede the 1B post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1) using the first effect device. and start running. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTB1 after the 1B reception corresponding to the 1B reception period. As the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1, the 1B post-reception effect using the first effect device (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2) Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 297, apart from the "integrated model image display IG" in effect display device 1600 (first effect device), sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has a 1B acceptance period. An effect within the acceptance period is executed to indicate that it has occurred (FIGS. 297(b) and (c)). The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 297 (b) ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 297(c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, during the 1B acceptance period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and The same mode appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, if "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1B receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display "integrated model image display IG ” continues (while the degree of expectation for the post-reception production has not yet been suggested), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) shows a different mode according to the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, as the 1B post-acceptance specific production UTB1, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "1B post-acceptance specific production UTB1-1" and the "1B post-acceptance specific production UTB1-2" appears. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTB1 after receiving the first B reception. For example, as the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1, only “1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2” is provided, and depending on whether or not the “1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2” appears, the degree of expectation (big hit is obtained) may be suggested. In other words, in this case, it is suggested that when the "1B post-acceptance specific effect UTB1-2" appears, expectations are higher than when the "1B post-acceptance specific effect UTB1-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 1B reception period occurs, timing tQ1 shown in FIG. , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 1B reception period is audibly output across the timing tQ2 at which the 1B reception period occurs (corresponding to "situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and (c)"). In this way, the action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1B reception period, as reception acceptable sounds, a first long acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 288(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after timing tQ2 when the first B reception period occurs.

Then, in the 1B reception period, when the action is accepted by the player while the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are audibly output, the action is accepted based on the acceptance. , the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle).

In this regard, as for the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, as shown in FIG. )) and a case of execution (audible output) in a highly expected manner (case shown in FIG. 297(c)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG", the reception (reception Since it will be executed as something that cannot be confirmed when the validity judgment) is made, there is tension about when to make the acceptance (validity judgment) within the acceptance period It becomes expected to maintain good feeling.

Further, in the 1B acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while acceptance acceptance sounds (first long acceptance sound and first short acceptance sound) are audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the reception is made, the audible output of the 1B post-reception effect sound is started based on the reception. The 1B post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period, unlike the case of the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 1B).

As shown in FIG. 288(d), the 1B post-acceptance effect sound is the same as the 1B post-acceptance effect display UGB1, as shown in FIG. 288(d). Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 1B post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297(b) to “E1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sounds. Only allowable sounds may be output.

In addition, when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the 1B reception period, the third production device can hear not only the 1B post-reception production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E2 (FIG. 298(d2) to (h2))" (if the expectation is relatively high as the reception after reception) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1B reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to preferably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 289 assumes a case where "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made when such a relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B accepting period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 289(a), the 1B reception period ends and the 1B reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made) at timing tQ2A. Execution of the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 1B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B reception period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289(a), when the production progresses from FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIGS. When the degree of expectation is low), and when the production progresses from FIG. , and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect will be executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG. 288 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, since the reception (reception validity determination) was made at the relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period, in the situation shown in FIG. The display area of is further reduced. Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the first short permissible sound is not terminated halfway (halfway termination of the audible output state) due to the acceptance (validation of acceptance determination).

Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, the time period during which the "first B post-acceptance effect display" based on acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. will be destroyed. In other words, the "1B specific effect after reception" and "1B effect sound after reception" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of acceptance (reception validity determination). On the other hand, the "1B effect display after acceptance" is terminated (not displayed) when a predetermined timing tQ4 within the variation pattern arrives, regardless of the timing at which acceptance (validation of acceptance) is made. It is a thing. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension as to at what timing during the reception period the reception (reception validity determination) is to be made is preferably maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 290 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 290, after the occurrence of the 1B acceptance period, the above-described timing tQ3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tQ3 (when the 1B receiving period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept actions (operations)), the timing tQ2a and the Effect display device 1600 (first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 298(d3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 1B reception period ends, the integration is performed within the 1B reception period after the end of the 1B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1B reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. It becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period has ended by making it difficult to receive the request. Also, even in a situation where the 1B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let That is, in this case, if the action (operation) by the player has been accepted within the 1B acceptance period, it is expected that the player will sense the possibility that the effect after the 1B acceptance suggests that the degree of expectation is low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to prompt the player to think that he or she did not need to perform the action (operation) within the 1B acceptance period, and the game interest is lowered when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period. is expected to suppress

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "second disappearance-related display SKB2" may be displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). A mode different from both the first disappearance-related display SKB1 and the second disappearance-related display SKB2 may be displayed.

In addition, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is assumed to be accepted when the action (operation) is accepted. It may be performed in any manner that it may appear. That is, in this case, the case where the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 297(b) to "E1 (FIGS. 298(d1)-(h1))" means the case where the production has progressed (when the production after reception with relatively low expectations is executed) becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. b) to "E2 ((d2) to (h2) in FIG. 298)" (when a relatively high-expectation post-acceptance production is executed). . That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 1B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the 1B acceptance period ends. Whether the 1B post-acceptance effect was executed in a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode by simply confirming the mode of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears in the can be recognized, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 298(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (the first disappearance-related display SKB1 in the figure)", first, the "integration Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the form shown in FIG. 232(d) (see FIG. 297(c)). When the situation shown in FIG. 297(c) appears, the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is the aspect as "image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same aspect.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 297(c) to “E1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 297(c) to "E2'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 297(c) to “E3′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only.

FIGS. 291 to 293 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 2B is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 2B reception period (2B reception effect) occurs. . FIG. 299 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 2B reception period (2B reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and "2nd B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (announcement effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second B variation pattern. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 2B change pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2B change pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 299 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “2B variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 291(a), when timing tR2 comes after the 2B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 2B is satisfied). , generate the 2B acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 2B acceptance" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2B acceptance period (if acceptance is determined to be valid), the 2B post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). become.

However, in the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the 1B reception period occurs, the reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is suggested in relation to the occurrence of the 2B reception period. and the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the acceptance period (effective period) (depiction that the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases according to the passage of time), , disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is not displayed.

More specifically, in the 2B variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. The timing tR2 arrives while the performance situation in which the gauge image )”) is not displayed is maintained, and the 2B acceptance period occurs. Then, the 2B acceptance period ends when the timing tR3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 291(a)).

Such a 2B reception period is called a so-called "hidden button", and from what timing is "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is allowed (2B reception period has occurred), whether the "reception validity determination" is permitted (whether the 2B acceptance period is occurring), or at what timing "the player's action is a valid action No operation-related information is provided, such as whether the reception validity judgment "to be in a state where it is not allowed (whether the 2B reception period ends)." Therefore, it can be said that the 2B acceptance period can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such effects.

FIG. 291 assumes a case in which "reception validity determination is made in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" when the relatively early timing tR2a arrives during the 2B reception period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 291(a), the 2B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tR2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2B reception period is started to be executed.

299(a) to FIG. 299(b), (c), the 2B post-reception production corresponding to the 2B reception period (“2B post-reception production display” or “second 2B specific effect after reception”, “2B effect sound after reception”, etc.), which are relatively highly expected, are executed respectively. As the 2B post-acceptance effects ("2B post-acceptance display", "2B post-acceptance specific effects", "2B post-acceptance effects", etc.), the first modes with relatively low expectations are executed. 299(a) in the omitted mode (first mode with low expectation), the performance progresses to the situation where the performance after the reception of the 2B is executed. There are also cases where there is. However, regarding such a 2B reception period, when the ``reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action'' is made, the 2B post-reception effect ("2B post-reception effect display" or " 299(b), (c) shows whether or not an effect (post-reception effect (1B reception It may be realized as a type in which the low-expectation mode as the post-effect display, the 1B post-acceptance specific effect, and the 1B post-acceptance effect sound is not prepared). The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, even in this production example (2B acceptance period), as shown in FIGS. At timing tR2a, which is the point in time when the post-reception effect is started), the “2B post-reception effect display UGB2 (group notice effect)” of the 2B post-reception effect is not executed, and the “2B specific effect after reception UTB2-2” and “2B post-acceptance effect sound (high expectation mode)” are to be executed. According to such a configuration, since the production progresses in the same manner as in the case of the 1B reception-after-reception production, the above-described effects can be similarly obtained.

However, in this production example (2B reception period), as shown in FIGS. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) described above is not executed. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the 2B reception period, it is greatly delayed to notice it only by looking at the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). becomes. In this case, combined with the fact that the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is not displayed, the situation where the 2B acceptance period does not occur It can be said that the game is realized as an effect with a high degree of difficulty in playing the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 291(b) and FIG. ``Second B post-reception effect display UGB2 (in the figure, a highly anticipated group preview effect by a ghost character, The execution of the 2B post-acceptance effect display UGB2-2)” is started. 291(b) and FIG. 299(d), the "2B post-acceptance effect display UGB2" thus started is performed for a predetermined time from the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). It will be terminated (hidden) when (a certain amount of time) has passed.

Note that in the production example (FIG. 299) corresponding to the 2B reception period, unlike the case of the 1B reception period, the background image is switched when the "2B post-reception production display UGB2" is executed. This also makes it difficult to recognize that the application has been accepted.

Also, when an action by the player is accepted within the 2B accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 291(b) and (c) and FIGS. Based on this, the 2B post-reception effect using the second effect device (2B post-reception specific effect) precedes the 2B post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. to start execution.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. The mode in which "ghost" is displayed in 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the degree of expectation of the above-mentioned 2B post-reception specific effect UTB2 (2B post-reception specific effect UTB2) corresponding to the 2B reception period is high. As the 2B post-reception specific effect UTB2-2), execution is started prior to the 2B post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect display UGB2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the explanation of the case where the low-expectation aspect is executed as the 2B post-acceptance effect is omitted, but the “2B post-acceptance effect display” and the “2B post-acceptance specific effect UTB2” are the low-expectation modes. is basically the same as when it is run in the high-expectancy mode.

Further, as shown in FIG. 299(a), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also does not execute the effect within the reception period, which suggests that the 2B reception period has occurred.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). However, when the 2B acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIG. I try to make it difficult to recognize.

Further, in the 1B reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the 2B post-reception effect sound is started based on the reception. The 2B post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output).

In addition, when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the 2B reception period, the third production device can hear not only the 2B post-reception production sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2B post-reception effect is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation or a mode with a low degree of expectation.

On the other hand, FIG. 292 assumes a case where "reception validity determination is made with the action (operation) by the player as a valid action" when such a relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 292(a), the 2B reception period ends and the 2B reception period ends based on the fact that the player's action is accepted (reception validity determination is made) at timing tR2A. Execution of the post-reception effect (2B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2B reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 2B reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tR2A within the 2B reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tR2a within the 2B reception period. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 292(a) as well, when the production progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIGS. ) and the case where the illustration is omitted (the degree of expectation is relatively low as the performance after reception), and the first production device, the second production device, and the third production device basically , the effect is executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG. 291 and the like.

In particular, in the 2B reception period, unlike the 1B reception period, the "2B post-reception effect display" is similar to the "2B post-reception specific effect" and "2B post-reception effect sound". Since it is executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time (reception validity judgment) is made, the mode as a post-reception production is also at the timing when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made. are the same regardless.

It should be noted that the "second B post-reception effect display", the "second B post-reception specific effect", and the "second B post-reception effect sound" may be performed only for a certain period of time set for each. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 293 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 299(a) to FIG. Validity judgment) is not made.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 293, after the occurrence of the 2B acceptance period, the above-described timing tR3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in the 2B acceptance period, no effect related to its occurrence or termination is executed, as shown in FIG.

According to such a configuration, the player does not know that the 2B reception period has occurred or that the action (operation) has not been possible. A decrease in interest in the game is suppressed.

FIGS. 294 to 296 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 3B is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 3B reception period (3B reception effect) occurs. . FIGS. 300 and 301 are diagrams showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 3B reception period (3B reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-variable and non-time saving), and the "3rd B fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3B variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 3B variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3B variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 300 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “3B variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 294(a), when the timing tS2 comes after the 3B predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 3B is satisfied). , generate the 3B acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 3B acceptance" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period (if the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 3B post-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). become.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 3B reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases as time passes Depiction), disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to acceptance (reception validity determination) are to be carried out respectively. As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

However, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button production)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button production)". It is realized as a special production that combines both.

More specifically, during the 3B reception period, as shown in FIGS. and gauge image)”) is not yet displayed (timing tS2). That is, in this case, the player is secretly provided with an action opportunity (operating opportunity), and a so-called "hidden button effect" is provided.

In this regard, the effect of such a "hidden button effect" continues only until timing X when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 296(b). That is, when the timing X within the 3B acceptance period arrives, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" or "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)” is displayed, whereby an action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player while the integrated model image display IG is being displayed. will move to It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) displayed in this way is displayed when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made within the 3B acceptance period, ) is not performed and the 3B reception period ends, the display is hidden. The 3B acceptance period according to this example ends when the timing tS3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) (see FIG. 296(a), etc.).

According to such a 3B reception period, during the period from the occurrence of the 3B reception period to the arrival of the timing X, while the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, it is in the "first display state". ``Direction as a so-called hidden button'' that allows the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is provided, and from the timing X to the end of the 3B reception period, integrated simulation In the "second display state" in which the image display IG is displayed, a "performance as a so-called normal button" is provided, which allows acceptance of actions (operations) by the player. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the performance of the above-described "1B reception period (so-called normal button presentation)" and the performance of the above-described "2B reception period (so-called hidden button presentation)". It has come to be realized as a special performance that combines both sex and sexuality, and it is expected that this will improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the "second display state" of the 3B reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in multiple modes (for example, FIG. 232 (a ) or (c)), and FIG. FIG. 300(c) shows the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232(c). is equivalent to Also during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. may be made.

FIG. 294 shows that while the above-described "first display state (see, for example, FIG. 300(a))" appears during the 3B reception period (timing tS2a in the figure), "game It is assumed that "reception validity determination" is made in which the action (operation) by the person is the valid action. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294(a), the 3B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tS2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started to be executed.

In addition, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 300(a) to "F1 (FIGS. 301(d1) to 301(h1))", the above-mentioned "first display state" appears during the 3B acceptance period. Among them, as a result of "determination of validity of reception", it corresponds to the case where the first mode with relatively low expectation is executed as "3B post-reception effect", and from FIG. 300(a) to "F2 ( (d2) ~ Fig. 301 (h2))” is an example in which the “reception validity determination” is made while the “first display state” is appearing during the 3B reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with relatively high expectations is executed as the 3B post-acceptance effect. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

Here, in this example of effect, as shown in FIG. 294, at timing tS2a at the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the effect after the 3B acceptance is started in response to the acceptance), The "integrated model image display IG", which has been hidden until then, can now be displayed.

That is, when the player performs an action (operation) while the above-mentioned "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (when "reception valid determination" is made), the player An operation (operation) is performed without recognizing which mode appears as the simulated image display IG (simulated image display, frame image, gauge image). In this regard, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted, the "integrated model image display IG", which has been hidden until then, can be displayed. Assuming that the "second display state" is tentatively set during the period, it becomes possible to recognize which mode appears as the "integrated simulated image display IG".

That is, the 3B after-reception effect according to this embodiment includes the "3B after-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable At least the "3B post-reception specific effect" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the 3B post-reception effect sound using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an effect in which an integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing of starting execution of the "3rd post-reception effect display" as the 3B post-reception effect is delayed compared to other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made by .

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 301(d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period, 232(a) to (d)), the player will be able to easily recognize which one of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232(a) to (d)) the integrated model image display IG is to be displayed. , it is expected to suitably suppress the decline in game interest.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, it is necessary to consider the "integrated model image display" after the acceptance. It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG is in the above-mentioned "second display state". If it continues to be displayed in the same mode as it was at some point, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is concern that it will be delayed.

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 294(b) and FIG. (When the timing tS2b arrives), the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes the model image display difficult to see is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF Effect)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG is displayed after the reception is made in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period, By making the integrated model image display IG difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to suggest that the post-acceptance effects (the second effect device and the third effect device) are already being executed.

In addition, if the acceptance is made in the above-mentioned "first display state" that provides the performance as a "so-called hidden button" during the 3B acceptance period, either the 2B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period Although it is difficult to recognize whether it was accepted in the 3B acceptance period, the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2B acceptance period appears. You will be able to recognize that there is

In addition, during the 3B acceptance period, a low-expectation aspect (FIGS. 301(d1)-(h1)) and a high-expectation aspect (FIGS. 301(d2)-(h2)) appear as effects after the 3B reception. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as when appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1B reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), after the acceptance is made within the 3B reception period, the "disappearance Since it is less important to pay attention to the related display (disappearing EF effect)", it is accepted when it is in the "first display state" that provides the effect as a "so-called hidden button" during the 3B reception period. is made, the integrated model image display IG can be watched favorably after the acceptance is made.

In addition, in the 3B reception period according to this production example, the after-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the 1B reception period is expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. The "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when executed in a high degree mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the performance after the reception is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. You will be able to plan.

Note that the extinction-related display (extinction EF effect) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period does not necessarily have to be the “second extinction-related display SKB2”. For example, as a disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period, it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKB1" to be used is used, whether the acceptance is made during the 1B acceptance period or the acceptance is made during the 3B acceptance period It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 294(b), FIG. When the timing tS2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the 3B acceptance period. Execution of the "3B effect display UGB3 (conversation notice) after reception" as the effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1, which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. 300(a) to "F2 ((d2) to (h2) in FIG. 301)" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as an effect after reception), FIG. 301(f2) , the second mode (here, the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2 which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" are displayed, respectively, the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 ("3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1" or "3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2") is started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 3B reception period, the reception by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) The post-effect (3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3) can be started without a large delay compared to other effect devices, and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed. Since the effect display UGB3 after the 3B reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see, it suggests that the 3B reception period has already ended, and the target of the player's gaze is indicated. is expected to naturally shift from "integrated model image display IG" to "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)". (after timing tS2c).

On the other hand, for the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. (it does not necessarily have to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and "3rd B The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2). As a result, even when the execution of the "3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3 (3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the acceptance period. This makes it easy to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)" is started in this way, , as shown in FIG. 294(b) and FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, among the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 294(b), FIG. "Display SKB2)" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 -2)” will be displayed.

In this regard, the “3B post-reception effect display UGB3” refers to a plurality of modes (here, 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-acceptance display UGB3-2). Therefore, the “3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3” will continue to be executed for a relatively long time even after the “integrated model image display IG” and “disappearance-related display” are hidden.

It should be noted that in the production example (FIGS. 300 and 301) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period, even if the acceptance is made during the 3B acceptance period and the "3B post-acceptance production display UGB3" is executed, the "3B The background image is not switched before and after the 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3” is started. According to such a configuration, when compared with the 1B acceptance period, even if the acceptance is made in the "second display state", the 3B acceptance period also has the effect of a "so-called hidden button". It becomes possible to suggest that the application has been accepted during the acceptance period. In addition, when compared with the above-mentioned 2B reception period, it seems that the production progresses as a result of accepting with the "so-called hidden button" even while the "3B post-reception production display UGB3" is being executed. It is possible to show

In this example of effect, the display of the "3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3" starts at a timing (timing tS2c) later than the timing (timing tS2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same timing (timing tS2b) as the timing (timing tS2b) at which the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKB2)” starts to be displayed.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 3B reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 294), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tS2c) of the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tS2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when an action by the player is accepted within the 3B reception period, as shown in FIGS. A 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to the 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tS2a at which the acceptance is made in the 3B acceptance period only for a part of the 3B post-acceptance effect (3B post-acceptance effect display). As for the 3B post-receipt effect itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tS2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the above-mentioned 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3 (3rd post-reception specific effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period. As a 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-1), which is an aspect with a low degree of expectation of UTB3, it is executed prior to the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to start. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in d2), the mode in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTB3 after the 3B reception corresponding to the 3B reception period (after the 3B reception). As a 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific effect UTB3, precedes the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2) using the first effect device. is to start running.

Note that, in the example of effect shown in FIG. 301, in the "first display state" of the 3B reception period, it is suggested that the 3B reception period is also occurring in the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). The effect within the receiving period is not executed, and the above-mentioned "second display state" in the 3B receiving period suggests that the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is also in a state where the 3B receiving period has occurred. An effect within the acceptance period is executed (FIGS. 300(b) and (c)). The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 300 (b)). ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 300(c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, when the player is in the "second display state" during the 3B reception period in which an action opportunity (operating opportunity) is given to the player, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed at the degree of expectation. Accordingly, different aspects appear, and the same aspect appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made while in the "second display state" during the 3B receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first While the display related to the "integrated model image display IG" is continued in the production device) (while the degree of expectation as the production after reception has not yet been suggested), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) Different aspects will appear depending on the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain performance information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate performance device from time to time rather than watching only the performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, as the 3B post-acceptance specific production UTB3, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "3B post-acceptance specific production UTB3-1" and "3B post-acceptance specific production UTB3-2" appears. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the 3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3. For example, as the 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3, only “3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2” is provided, and depending on whether or not the “3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2” appears, the degree of expectation (big hit is obtained) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when the "3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3-2" appears, the expectations are higher than when the "3B post-acceptance specific effect UTB3-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 3B reception period occurs, timing tS1 shown in FIG. , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. The reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period spans both the timing tS2 at which the 3B reception period occurs and the timing X at which the "first display state" transitions to the "second display state". , and the action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly outputted. However, the acceptable reception sound may be audibly output across the timing X, and may not necessarily be audibly output across the timing tS2.

Here, in the 3B reception period, as the reception allowable sound, a third allowable sound different from the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest that the 3B acceptance period, which has the effect of a "so-called hidden button" instead of the period, will occur (or that it is occurring). However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period may be executed with either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

In the 3B acceptance period, when the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) is audibly output, it means that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the reception permission sound is not terminated in the middle (midway termination of the audible output state). It becomes possible to suggest that a period occurs (or is occurring). However, it is also possible to terminate the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3B reception period halfway based on the acceptance.

In this regard, as for the acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period, as shown in FIG. It is desirable to have (the case shown in FIG. 300(b)) and the case where it is executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner (the case shown in FIG. 300(c)). In other words, in this case, the acceptance acceptance sound suggests the degree of expectation within the acceptance period, but unlike the "integrated model image display IG", it is confirmed when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made. Since it will be executed as if it will be impossible to do so, it is expected to maintain a sense of tension as to when the acceptance (reception validity determination) will be made during the acceptance period. become.

Also, during the 3B reception period, if the player accepts an action while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output, the reception acceptance sound is not only terminated halfway, but also the acceptance is made. , the audible output of the effect sound is started after receiving the 3B above. The 3B post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, unlike the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 3B).

As shown in FIG. 294(d), the 3B post-acceptance effect sound is the same as the 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3, as shown in FIG. 294(d). Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 3B post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F1 (Fig. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In addition, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 3B acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 3B post-acceptance effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. , audible output in the same manner as in the example where the production progresses from FIG. It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is accepted (reception valid determination) in a reception period different from the 3B reception period (for example, the 1B reception period, or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). audible output (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to preferably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 295 shows a state in which the "second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 300(b) and (c))" appears during the 3B acceptance period ( , timing tS2A), it is assumed that "receiving validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 295(a), the 3B acceptance period ends based on the fact that the player's action (operation) is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tS2A. At the same time, the post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started to be executed.

In this respect, in the 3B reception period, reception (reception validity determination ) is made, after the acceptance is made, while the above "first display state (see, for example, FIG. 300(a))" is appearing within the 3B acceptance period The effect is developed in the same manner as when acceptance (validation of acceptance) is made. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 295(a), when the production progresses from FIG. 300(b) to "F1 (FIGS. 300 (b) to "F2 ((d2) to (h2) of 301 (301(d2) to (h2))" (when the expectation is relatively high as a post-reception production). , and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect will be executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG. 294 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 295, in the situation shown in FIG. The display area of is reduced.

Also, in the 3B acceptance period, the "3B post-reception effect display" is similar to the "3B post-reception specific effect" and "3B post-reception effect sound", etc., from the time of acceptance (reception validity determination). Since it is executed for a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time), the aspect of the post-acceptance effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made.

It should be noted that the "3B post-reception effect display", "3B post-reception specific effect", and "3B post-reception effect sound" may be executed only for a certain period of time set respectively. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 296 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 296, after the occurrence of the 3B receiving period, the above-described timing tS3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being received. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tS3 (when the 3B acceptance period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer allowed), timing tS2a and Effect display device 1600 (first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 301(d3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 3B reception period ends, the integration is performed within the 3B reception period after the end of the 3B reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the end of the 3B acceptance period without acceptance, the integrated model image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to access, it is possible to suggest that the 3B acceptance period has expired. Also, even in a situation where the 3B reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let

It is desirable that the "third extinction-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the 1B acceptance period. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B reception period, the reception period is the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". It can be suggested that both the above-mentioned "second B acceptance period (so-called hidden button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" were combined.

Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 3B acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 301(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (the third disappearance-related display SKB3 in the figure)", first, the "integration Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3B reception period according to this example, when the "second display state" is reached, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. 232(a). As described above, it may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIG. 300(c)) instead of the mode (see FIG. 300(b)). When the situation shown in FIG. 300(c) appears, the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is the aspect as "image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same aspect.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 300(c) to “F1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 300(c) to “F2′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 301(c) to "F3'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, in which the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period are prepared, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the contents of the production that progresses when the reception is received (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as effects after acceptance, notice production (expectation suggestive production) (Type of ) are prepared for multiple acceptance periods (1B acceptance period to 3B acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment). It has become.

In this regard, in the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after the reception (the effect display after the 1B reception to the effect display after the 3B reception effect display) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, not only is the effect display after acceptance based on the acceptance performed, but also the "disappearance related display ( disappearing EF effect)” is made to appear further. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which aspect of the model image display has appeared even after the acceptance is made, and until the model image display is hidden By reducing the visibility of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) by making it difficult to see (disappearance related display), we changed from "simulated image display" to "post-acceptance display". It is expected that the target of gaze by the player will be naturally shifted to . It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be used in common for a plurality of reception periods in which the content of the effect that progresses when received is different (Fig. 298 ( e2) and FIG. 301(e2), etc.).

However, since the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, the model image display will continue after the acceptance. or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display according to the reception has been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. be. In this regard, when the acceptance is made in either the 1B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are changed to "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, Gauge image) is hidden (invisible) while the mode (disappearance-related display) that makes it difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" appears, while the effect display after reception is "simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed while the mode (disappearance-related display) is appearing. In other words, in this case, after the player accepts the action, while "an aspect (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see" appears, A shift in the display effect from the previous display (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance effect display) is realized.

It should be noted that both the mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display) and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed based on acceptance. common point. However, the ``mode (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' is, for example, shown in FIG. When a model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear to make it difficult to see. It is what is done. On the other hand, "effect display after reception" means display of a model image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), as shown in Fig. 298 (f1) or Fig. 298 (f2). Even if it is displayed in such a situation, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear so as not to be difficult to see. Further, in each of the examples described above, the display of the "effect display after reception" is started when the model image display or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is being displayed. "Post effect display" does not necessarily have to be displayed when the model image display is displayed, and should be displayed after the model image display is hidden. good too.

In addition, regarding "modes in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", "make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", at least part of the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) In addition to the method of realizing priority display (display on the front layer) of a different image display from It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (moving image) that is made to appear partially missing (invisible) in the time display (frame image, gauge image), or the like. In addition, it is not a separate image display from the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance etc.) can also be adopted. On the other hand, regarding the "effect display after reception", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "reception effect display" is displayed, but the " In addition to the method realized by displaying (displaying on the rear layer) "effect display after reception", at least while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in an area other than the displayed area.

In addition, as a form (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see, the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the display of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing the numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the characteristic.

Further, the ``mode in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to the ``reception display'' before the ``reception display'' is displayed. "Post-effect display" appears in a situation where it has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, under the condition that the "effect display after acceptance" is not yet displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are replaced with the above "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)." ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, so while making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) visible, “post-reception effect display " is likely to appear soon, so that the player's attention is changed from "a simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that is difficult to see". You will be able to encourage

In addition, when accepted during the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period, etc., the "mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "effect display after reception" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "effect display after reception" is displayed, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, we will be able to provide the performance related to the "post-reception display" in a wider range, so we will improve the game interest by changing the performance during such a display period. be able to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in FIGS. Mode (disappearance related display)", not only the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, at least part of the "effect display after reception" is displayed. (disappearance-related display)” is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least part of the “post-acceptance effect display” is difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) makes not only the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-acceptance effect display" difficult to see. Since it will appear, the effect until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden, and the effect when the display of "effect display after reception" starts It is expected to improve both sexuality and

Also, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect), a specific effect after reception (using the second effect device) that does not make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more likely than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) to appear. The previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is terminated.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Also, in each of the above-described effect examples regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, as for the model image display, it is desirable that the dynamic display is not terminated and continues even when the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after the acceptance.

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a model image display, but also a gauge that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. It was decided to make it difficult to visually recognize this also about the image. As a result, even if the gauge image is displayed even after acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if there is remaining time left.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, "the third operation" is performed based on the acceptance. 3B Post-reception effect display UGB3" can be displayed, but apart from the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3, the mode (second disappearance Related display SKB2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear which of the first and third B post-acceptance effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKB1 appears, It is possible to guess that the effect display UGB1 will appear after the 1B acceptance.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (prioritized display ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen must be executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize by

Even if the same aspect (second disappearance-related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the reception period type is different, the big hit pattern will be stopped due to the pattern change. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations) of

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first production device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively visible. It is made to have a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image ), it is possible to confirm which aspect appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made relatively difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally shifted from the "first effect device" to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the production after reception using the second production device (specific production after reception) is a model image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before it is accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600). The after-acceptance effect (specific after-acceptance effect) is not an image display that is displayed using at least part of the predetermined area, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, the post-acceptance effect display is started after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may make it start.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the "simulated image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used as the integrated simulated image display IG in a plurality of modes with different expectations (integrated simulated image It can be displayed by any of the displays IGa to IGd). Further, according to the above-described production examples, even after acceptance, the display mode including display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc. is maintained and continued. Also, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the acceptance period.

However, in this case, when it is in the period immediately after acceptance, the production after acceptance must be performed under such conditions (maintaining the display of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) You won't get it. That is, the range of effects is narrow, and only limited effects (effects after acceptance using only the effect device different from the first effect device) can be executed. However, when the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) appears after time passes, after accepting it under the condition that "the visibility of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated" Since it is possible to produce an effect, it becomes possible to execute the "effect display after reception by the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing step by step the two post-operation productions having different properties (the specific production after reception in the second production device, and the production display after reception in the first production device), the mode of the model image display even after acceptance. can be easily confirmed, and the role of post-operation production can also be suitably exhibited.

As described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed.

In addition, in the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the target of the action (operation) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different actions may be requested. However, when a different action is desired, the action target display (simulated image display) is also displayed as a different display.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the above-described "first reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is allowed without displaying the model image display (or the remaining time display). A plurality of reception periods are prepared including the 3B reception period (FIGS. 294 to 296) having "display state". In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, the reception validity determination is permitted or the reception validity determination is permitted. Since it is possible to output a reception acceptable sound that suggests that the player is not displaying the simulated image display, it is not possible to fully recognize which one is the target of the action by the player. However, it became possible to recognize that the player is in a situation where some kind of action is required (a situation in which an opportunity to operate is given), and as a result, many players You will be expected to enjoy the performance. As a result, unlike the 2B reception period, even though it is a reception period in which the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid movement" is allowed without displaying the model image display, the so-called hidden button can be used. Even a player who is insensitive to performance can enjoy the game. However, the acceptable reception sound may not be output when the 3B reception period occurs. In addition, "the state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" means that the model image display (or the remaining time display) cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. good. For example, it includes a state in which an image is displayed on a layer but is not visible due to priority display of an image on another layer. In addition, "simulated image display (or remaining time display)" here means an image displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d). is doing. Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine which of these modes is being displayed, it can be said that it is in a "state in which the model image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" (conversely, For example, if it is possible to determine which of these modes the display is in, even if it is not displayed in a visually pleasing mode, the state in which the "simulated image display (or remaining time display) is displayed" ”).

In addition, it was decided that the acceptable reception sound output when the 3B acceptance period occurs is realized as the "third acceptance sound", but it is also output (as acceptance acceptance sound) when other reception periods occur. It is desirable that the sound be For example, if the reception allowable sound is output even when a reception period in which the same action opportunity (for example, pressing operation on the operation button 410) as the 3B reception period occurs occurs, a model image display is displayed. Even if it is not given, it is possible to suitably suggest to the player which action opportunity (operation opportunity) is to be given (given). In addition, for example, if the acceptable reception sound is output even when a reception period occurs during which an action opportunity (for example, sheathing the sword ornament 5001) different from the 3B reception period occurs, While it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given while the model image display is not displayed, some action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given (given state).

Also, in the 3B reception period according to the above effect example, as shown in FIG. 296 and the like, first, the "first display state" in which the model image is not displayed appears. Thereafter, while the 3B reception period continues, the "second display state" in which the model image display is displayed appears. In other words, in this case, during the 3B reception period, it is initially generated as a so-called "hidden button", which can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to such effects. However, while the 3B acceptance period continues (before the set time (valid time) has expired), the model image display is displayed, so it is sensitive to the production. Even without it, many players will be able to notice this (3B reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, it is expected that through such performance, the ability to see that a so-called "hidden button" is occurring will be nurtured.

Also, at this time, in the "second display state", as shown in FIGS. is desirable. That is, if the player does not accept the action in the "first display state" but accepts the action in the "second display state", it will take time until the model image is displayed. It is feared that the fact that the player could not recognize that the 3B reception period had occurred during the interval would be revealed to the surroundings, and that the lack of sensitivity to such effects would lead to a decrease in interest in the game. In this regard, in the "second display state", if the simulated image display is displayed in one of a plurality of different expectations (modes), the player can operate in the "second display state". Even if you accept it, "I was aware that I was in a state where I was allowed to accept actions from the time I was in the first display state, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the model image display, so in the first display state , it will be possible to make it look like the player did not dare to accept the action.

In addition, in the 3B reception period (first display state), due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the 3B reception that allows the "reception validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action" from any timing. It is difficult for the player to accurately recognize whether the period has occurred. In this case, if an operation (operation) is performed a little before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the ``reception validity determination'' is not made, and the ``I thought the 3B reception period occurred, but There is a concern that the player may mistakenly think, "I was mistaken," and that the 3B reception period may end without the player performing an action (operation).

Therefore, in the 3B reception period, the action (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tS2 at which the state (3B reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is the valid action" is permitted occurs. Even if there is, the action (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity determination" at that time, but when the 3B reception period starts (or after that), the 3B reception It is desirable to make it possible to target (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the period as "reception validity determination".

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the 3B reception period in which "reception validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" is allowed has occurred. You will be required to do so regardless of whether or not you do.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 294, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tS2, this will be detected. However, when the action (operation) by the player is thus detected, the 3B reception period has not yet occurred. No “validity determination” is made. However, the presence of this detection information is stored as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the detection information stored as the above-mentioned memory (history) within the 3B reception period Based on this, "receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made. Then, the 3B post-acceptance effect is executed based on the "acceptance validity determination" thus obtained.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it can be accepted within the 3B reception period, As a result, it becomes possible to execute the post-acceptance production (3B post-acceptance production) triggered by this. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of accepting an action even while the so-called "hidden button" effect (first display state) is realized.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period (before a predetermined time or more), it is possible to prevent the performance after the 3B reception from being executed with this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may be applied in the same way during the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period, or may not be applied. You may do so.

Also, at this time, regarding the action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period, the action (operation) is not in the above-mentioned "second display state" after the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period, It is desirable that the validity determination can be accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the "first display state". According to such a configuration, it is the timing (for example, the timing at which the first display state (3B reception period) occurs) after a short time has passed since the action (operation) by the player, and the model image is displayed. While the display is not displayed, it is determined that reception is valid, and the performance after reception is started. This suggests that the player's actions are properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) despite the display of the model image. can be done, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the above-described production examples (FIGS. 294, 300, 301, etc.), the case where the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and the 3B reception In the case where an acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made while in the "second display state" within the period, the same mode will appear as the 3B post-acceptance production in response to the acceptance (Fig. 300 and Fig. 301, etc.). However, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, and if the acceptance (reception valid In order to improve the performance of the receiving period having the "first display state" and the "second display state", it is more desirable to make the content of the performance different between the case where the determination is made and the case where the judgment is made. .

For example, in the above-described production examples (FIGS. 294, 300, 301, etc.), even if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, Similar to the case where acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "second display state" within the 3B acceptance period, after the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made, (not displayed until then) ) Integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed (Fig. 300 (a) to "F1 (Fig. 301 (d1) to Fig. 301 ( h1))”, or from FIG. 300(a) to “F2 (FIGS. 301(d2) to 301(h2))”). However, instead of this, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, this will be used as a trigger after the acceptance (reception validity determination) It is desirable not to display the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)).

According to such a configuration, from the player's side, it is possible to accept in the "first display state" where it is relatively difficult to accept due to the effect of the "so-called hidden button". It becomes possible to show the surrounding people that it is in a successful situation (by progressing the production while the model image display is not displayed) after the reception (reception validity judgment) is made, and the game becomes possible. It becomes possible to improve interest.

However, at this time, regarding the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect), even if it is accepted (acceptance validity determination) when it is in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated model image While the display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (invisible), it is desirable to display it visibly. In other words, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (invisible), If the integrated model image display IG is not displayed even after the acceptance is made, it is determined whether the acceptance period occurred as the 2B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period (first display state). It becomes difficult to distinguish whether it occurred as In this regard, even if the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) 2 display state”, the reception period is generated as the 3B reception period (first display state) instead of the 2B reception period. be able to suggest

In an example employing these configurations, if acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state (see FIG. 300(a))" within the 3B acceptance period, the ) ~ (h1) or Fig. 301 (d2) ~ (h2), etc., the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It will be done in the absence of That is, when reception validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in any of the multiple modes. After the acceptance, the performance will start to be executed, and if the acceptance is determined to be valid in the second display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. Execution of the post-acceptance effect is started in the state displayed by any of the modes.

Alternatively, in the "first display state" during the 3B reception period,
・Even if the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, the 3B acceptance without displaying the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) after the acceptance is made A first period (first state, first timing) during which the post-production is executed;
・When the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the display of the integrated simulated image display IG and the execution of the 3B post-acceptance effect are performed in parallel with a second period (second state, second timing). can be For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) occurs first, and then the second period (second state, second timing) occurs. According to such a configuration, since the contents of the presentation differ depending on the timing at which the acceptance is made in the first display state, it is possible to improve the presentation during the acceptance period having the "first display state." It is expected that

At least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing) is included in the "first display state" of the 3B acceptance period. may be included.

In the 3B reception period according to the above-described effect example, if the set time elapses without the player's action being accepted (Fig. 296 (f)), it is the same as when the reception is made within the 3B reception period. Prevented the production after reception from being executed (automatic reception production functioned). However, the 3B reception period may be generated as an object for which the automatic reception effect functions. In this case, automatic reception is not performed in the first display state, but in the second display state. Further, the first reception period may be generated as a target for which the automatic reception effect functions.

Also, in the 3B acceptance period, the timing at which the automatic acceptance is performed may differ according to the state of the effect (the state that the player can set). However, regardless of the timing of the automatic reception, the same post-reception effect as when the automatic reception is performed in the above "second display state" and the reception is made within the 3B reception period. should start running.

In addition, when the above-mentioned "second display state" occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already occurred before this, but with respect to the gauge image, The display (depiction of reducing the area described above) may be started from the state where the display area is the maximum value within the frame (it may be started from the state where the area has already been reduced). According to such a configuration, even if the remaining time as the acceptance period is actually already reduced, by starting to display the area of the gauge image from the maximum value, the game interest can be enhanced. Decrease is suppressed. It is also possible to make the reception period appear as if it is the 1B reception period.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1B reception period and the 2B reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the 1B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed (see FIGS. 288, 289, etc.), and in the 2B reception period, the integrated model image display is performed regardless of the timing at which the reception validity determination is made. IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always prevented from being displayed (see FIGS. 291, 292, etc.).

According to such a configuration, by providing two types of receiving periods with completely different performances, it is possible to give a clear distinction in requesting an action (giving an opportunity to operate) to the player. It is expected that the game interest will be improved.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a 3B reception period. Depending on the timing, the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may be displayed, or the integrated model image display IG (model image display or , Remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) may not be displayed.

According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when the "reception validity determination" is made. or the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (Frame image, gauge image)) can be shown as if the "2B acceptance period" is always occurring, and through the production of such uncertainty, the acceptance period is It becomes possible to suitably maintain the feeling of tension when it occurs.

In the 1B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 297 and 300, integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image))) can be displayed. That is, in the 1B reception period according to the above-described effect example, the special mode (integrated model image display IGd) shown in FIG. 232(d) can be displayed, but the special mode does not appear in the 3B reception period It is something that cannot be obtained. According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is shown in FIG. 232(a) (integrated model image display IGa). When it is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize which of the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period has occurred, and the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) )) is displayed in the special mode (integrated simulated image display IGd) shown in FIG.

In addition, during the 2B reception period, the acceptable reception sound is not output, and during the 3B reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound is output even when the acceptance is made without the acceptance and the effect after the acceptance is executed accordingly. That is, in this case, it can be suggested that the reception period occurred as the 3B reception period (first display state) instead of the 2B reception period.

In addition, the "reception sound", which is output in the same manner regardless of the mode (expectation) of the performance after reception, is output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, and is not output during the 2B reception period. good too. It is desirable to output the same mode as the "reception sound" in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period. However, such a "reception sound" does not necessarily have to be output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

In addition, it is desirable to be able to display a disappearing EF effect (for example, the first disappearing-related display SKB1) that cannot appear during the 3B accepting period during the 1B accepting period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring instead of the 3B reception period through the type of disappearing EF effect.

In addition, it is desirable to display the extinction EF effect (for example, the second extinction-related display SKB2) that can appear in the third B reception period during the 1B reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period has occurred.

In the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001, etc.) to which the action opportunity is given may be the same or different. good too. However, if the target to which the action opportunity is given is different, the action target display (simulated image display) will be displayed as a different one.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of acceptance periods including the 1B acceptance period and the 3B acceptance period are prepared as the acceptance period. Then, when a "reception validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 1B reception period, the first reception is performed in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the reception validity determination being made. 1B After-acceptance effect can be executed, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3B reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. 3B post-reception production can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, whether the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1B reception period or the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3B reception period, the reception validity determination Based on that, at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is used to perform the disappearing EF effect. Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the acceptance validity determination is appropriately made (the acceptance period is terminated due to the acceptance of the operation by the player).

Also, as described above, in the 3B reception period, at what timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) is the acceptance validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation)? , the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image)) may not be displayed. In this case, first, when the reception validity judgment is made under the situation where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, this is used as a trigger An extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least part of a specific area where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. On the other hand, even if the reception validity judgment is made in the situation where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this is a trigger As such, it is desirable to execute the disappearing EF effect in the same manner as when the reception validity determination is made under the situation where the integrated model image display IG is displayed. According to such a configuration, even in a situation where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, it is possible to favorably suggest that the reception validity determination is secretly made. It should be noted that if it is determined that the reception is valid in a situation where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed, the first acceptance period ends without the integrated model image display IG being displayed, and the EF disappears. The effect is executed using at least part of the area where the integrated model image display IG was to be displayed.

Also, at this time, during the 1B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing at which acceptance validity determination is made to make an action (operation) by the player a valid action (valid operation). It is desirable to By preparing the 1B reception period in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed separately from the 3B reception period described above, combined with the configuration in which the disappearing EF effect is executed, it is safe It becomes possible to provide a feeling performance, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the 1B reception period, if the corresponding post-reception production is executed in the high expectation mode (Fig. 298 (f2) to (h2)), the specific mode (Fig. 298 (e2) to (g2)) appear, but if different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode (FIG. 298 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the extinction EF effect, and a different mode (FIG. 298 ( It is desirable that e1) to (g1)) appear or that the disappearing EF effect itself does not appear. According to such a configuration, when the extinction EF performance is executed corresponding to the 3B reception period, it is possible to give an image as if a high-expectation performance is being executed, and the amusement of the game is lowered. can be suppressed.

In the 1B reception period, the acceptable reception sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3B reception period, the acceptable reception sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptance acceptance sound having the "one aspect" is output, the possibility of occurrence of the 3B acceptance period having the effect of "a so-called hidden button" is conscious. Since it becomes possible to make the user wear the clothes, the feeling of tension can be preferably maintained. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the 1B acceptance period occurs. Also, in this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" be output as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained even in a situation where the acceptable acceptance sound is output in the mode with the lowest degree of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period may occur sequentially within the specific variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the 1B acceptance period occurs after the 3B acceptance period occurs. Further, in this case, the 1B acceptance period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the 2B reception period can occur between the occurrence of the 3B reception period and the occurrence of the 1B reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the portent effect output when the 1B reception period occurs and the portent effect output when the 3B reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period will occur by the precursor effect.

In addition, during the 3B reception period, as the disappearance EF effect, if there is a reception, a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) will appear, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the third disappearance It is desirable that the associated indication SKB3) appears or does not appear at all. On the other hand, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the extinction EF effect. That is, in the 3B reception period that combines the performance of the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button production)" and the performance of the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button production)", It can be said that forgetting to operate (end of the reception period without reception) is more likely to occur than in the above-described "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". In this respect, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3B reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKB2) when the reception is made will not appear. It becomes possible to appeal to the players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to operate, and after that, it is possible to suitably maintain the tension when the acceptance period occurs. Become. On the other hand, during the 1B reception period, there is no element that is likely to be forgotten to operate. Nevertheless, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player dared to choose "not to perform the action" in the game. If "appealing that the player is in a situation where the player forgets to operate", the interest in the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the extinction EF effect.

In particular, in the 1B reception period according to the above-described production example, the mode of the extinction EF production is different according to the mode (expectation) of the production after the 1B reception (see FIG. 298). Therefore, in the 1B acceptance period, even if there is no acceptance, if the same mode as when the acceptance is made appears as the extinction EF effect, after the 1B acceptance that appeared when the acceptance was made It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) of the performance, and to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, during the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, the player who performed in a state where the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed "Receiving validity determination" is possible in which the action of .

According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the "reception validity determination" is properly performed (the reception period has ended due to the player's operation being accepted). Thus, it is expected that the tension of the 2B acceptance period, in which the player secretly asks for an action (secretly grants an opportunity to operate), is maintained even after the acceptance validity determination is made. become.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed during both the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period. It is possible to determine whether reception is valid by determining that the player's action performed in the state is a valid action. Then, in the 2B acceptance period, when the acceptance validity determination is made that the action performed by the player in the state where the integrated model image display IG) is not displayed is made as a valid action, the disappearing EF effect is not executed. , In the 3B reception period, when the reception validity determination is made that the action performed by the player in the state where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed is a valid action, the disappearing EF effect is executed. did.

According to such a configuration, while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, until the player performs an action, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period is occurring, but after the reception validity determination is made that this is a valid operation, the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period Since it becomes possible to recognize which has occurred, it becomes possible to prompt the player to take action.

Further, when the 4B condition is satisfied, the 4B acceptance period may be allowed to occur. Even during this 4B reception period, the action performed by the player while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is regarded as a valid action. Acceptance validity determination is possible. During the 4B acceptance period, acceptance is valid, in which actions performed by the player while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) are not displayed are valid actions. When the determination is made, the extinction EF effect is executed as in the case of the 3B reception period. However, in the 4B receiving period, the extinction EF effect is executed in a different mode depending on the mode (expectation) of the corresponding 4B post-receiving effect. According to such a configuration, while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, until the player performs an action, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period, the 3B reception period, and the 4B reception period is occurring, but after the reception validity determination is made that this is a valid operation, the 2B reception period and the 4th B reception period. In addition to being able to recognize which of the 3B reception period and the 4th reception period occurred, in the case of the 4th reception period, it will be possible to suggest the degree of expectation .

During the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the operation receiving section when an action by the player is received. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image are continued.

In addition, each production example and another example described above may be realized by modifying the following configuration, and the following configuration (reception period) may be changed to another reception period (different type of production after reception). You may make it further provide as an omen effect display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the 1B acceptance period, the 2B acceptance period, and the 3B acceptance period are accepted as the acceptance period during which the action (operation) by the player is accepted. I have it. Among these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearing EF effect can be executed based on the reception (reception validity determination) of the action (operation) by the player, and in the 2B reception period. As described above, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination), the disappearing EF effect is not executed.

In this regard, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period, the degree of expectation (jackpot pattern Appearance ratio) is low, and the 1B post-reception production is executed in a high degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) in the same manner. You may do so. When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. h2) appears, and regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1B reception period (modes shown in FIGS. 298(d3) to (g3)), the disappearing EF As the effect, one predetermined mode will always appear. In other words, the 1B reception period means that no matter at which timing within the period the reception (reception validity determination) is made (and even if the reception is not made), the integrated model The display of the image display IG (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continued. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "in which form the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided by the annihilation EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, in such a 1B reception period, any aspect (the aspect shown in FIGS. 298(d1) to (h1), the aspect shown in FIGS. 298(d2) to (h2)) as the production after the 1B reception Appears, and regardless of whether the acceptance is made within the 1B acceptance period (modes shown in FIGS. 298 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearance EF production is predetermined By ensuring that one aspect always appears, the concerns described above can be resolved.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the degree of expectation for the effect after the 3B acceptance (the jackpot pattern is The annihilation EF performance can be executed in different modes depending on whether it is performed in a mode with a low appearance rate or when the performance after receiving the 3B reception is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of the jackpot pattern). You may do so. The 3B reception period has a performance with a "so-called hidden button", and it can be said that it is positioned as a "reception period with a high degree of difficulty", so even after the reception is made, Different effect information can be obtained from both the mode of the simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode of the extinction EF effect. It is desirable in terms of stimulating the performance to the audience.

It should be noted that when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. It is desirable to be different from any of the multiple aspects of. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the acceptance period is the effect of the above-mentioned "1B acceptance period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception It is possible to suggest that it had both the effect of "period (so-called hidden button effect)".

Further, as described above, in another example for the 3B acceptance period, when acceptance is made in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (simulated Image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) will not be displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "in which mode the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information (expectation level information regarding post-acceptance performance) by disappearing EF performance in order to improve the game interest.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. can be This makes it possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3B acceptance period, the acceptance period will be the above-mentioned "1B acceptance period ( It can be suggested that both the performance of the so-called normal button performance) and the performance of the above-described ``2B acceptance period (so-called hidden button performance)'' were not combined.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in the same mode as the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. may According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a situation in which an acceptance has been made, so it is possible to enhance the performance as a "so-called hidden button".

As for these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-described production examples and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-described production example or another example thereof.

Next, a case where some of the modifications described above are applied to the above-described production examples will be described. That is, FIG. 302 is a modification of the "effect that appears when the acceptance is made during the 1B acceptance period or when the acceptance is not made" shown in FIG. 298, and FIG. This is a modified example of "effect that appears when acceptance is made in the 3B acceptance period or when acceptance is not made". In addition, in this modified example, for the configuration not particularly mentioned, "Example of production related to 1B acceptance period (Figs. 288 to 290, Figure 297, Figure 298)" 296, Figures 300, and 301)", and is applicable to the "example of presentation regarding the 1B reception period" and the "example of presentation regarding the 3B reception period". is also applicable.

In the modification shown in FIG. 302, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 1B acceptance period, the 1B post-acceptance effect is expected based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). When it is executed in a mode with a low degree (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIG. 302 (d1) to (h1)), and a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) after receiving the 1B reception ( 302(d2)-(h2)), the extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as in the case where it is executed. Here, the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 302, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 1B acceptance period (see FIGS. 302(d3) to (g3)), As the extinction EF effect, there appears a mode that does not appear when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period. Here, the third disappearance-related display SKB3 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 303, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the 3B acceptance is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). When the post-production is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 303(d1) to (h1)), and the degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) of the 3B post-reception production 303 (see d2 ~ (h2)) and when executed in a high mode (see d2 ~ (h2)) is designed to be executed in a different mode EF effect.Here, expectations (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 303(d1) to (h1)), the first extinction-related display SKB1 is executed as the extinction EF effect, and executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of big hit symbols). 303 (see d2 to (h2)), the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

Further, in the modification shown in FIG. 303, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period (see FIGS. 303(d3) to (g3)), As the extinguishment EF effect, the mode that appears when it is assumed that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 303(d3) to (g3), since the first disappearance-related display SKB1 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the action (operation) by the player is accepted ( 303 (d1) to (h1), it becomes possible to recognize that the development progress shown in FIGS. 303(d1) to (h1) has occurred. On the other hand, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (receipt validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, and the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the 3B acceptance period If the action (operation) by the player has been accepted (acceptance validity determination), it can be recognized that the development progress shown in FIGS. 303 (d2) to (h2) has occurred. .

In the 1B reception period according to such a modification, as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, a post-reception effect corresponding to the 3B reception period according to the modification (after the 3B reception A "second disappearance-related display SKB2" that is displayed when the effect is executed in a highly anticipated mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period according to the modification, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image that the performance after reception is executed in a highly expected manner, and the game is played. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 3B receiving period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKB2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period according to the modification, the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a mode with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKB1" displayed at the time is used, is it accepted in the 1B reception period according to the modification, or is it in the state of being accepted in the 1B reception period according to the modification? It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the application has been accepted during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to display it.

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed in relation to the 3B acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B reception period, the reception period is the above-mentioned "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)". It can be suggested that it did not have both the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)" and the effect of the above-mentioned "2B acceptance period (so-called hidden button effect)".

Further, it is preferable that the "third disappearance-related display SKB3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 1B acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

By the way, for the 3B acceptance period according to this modification, if acceptance is made in the "first display state", "integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, 303(d1)-(h1) or 303(d2)-(h2), etc. is performed while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. That is, when reception validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in any of the multiple modes. After the acceptance, the performance will start to be executed, and if the acceptance is determined to be valid in the second display state, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will be displayed. Execution of the post-acceptance effect is started in the state displayed by any of the modes.

Also in the 3B reception period according to this modification, the player receives the signal before the timing tS2 when the state (3B reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is the valid action" is permitted occurs. Even if there is an action (operation) by ), and the configuration according to the above another example, such that it is possible to make a "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3B reception period. Alternatively, it is possible to apply a configuration related to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

In the 3B reception period according to the modification, when a low-expectation aspect appears as the 3B post-reception production ((d1) to (h1) in FIG. 303), the first disappearance-related display SKB1 is executed as the disappearance EF production. However, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

In addition, during the 1B reception period according to the above modification, as the extinction EF effect, a specific mode appears when there is reception (FIGS. 302(d1)-(h1) and FIGS. 302(d2)-(h2)). When there is no acceptance, a mode different from the specific mode appears (FIGS. 302(d3) to (g3)), but the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no acceptance.

In addition, in the 1B reception period according to the modification, the second disappearance-related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect) when there is a reception, but it is different from the second disappearance-related display SKB2. may be performed in any manner. For example, even if it is executed in the first extinction related display SKB1, whether the acceptance is made during the 1B acceptance period or the acceptance is made during the 3B acceptance period. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Next, specific examples of the above "Configuration 5-B" to "Configuration 9-B" will be described. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has production contents (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable object notice, etc. as productions after reception) that progress when the reception is received. There are multiple reception periods (reception effects) with different types), and it is possible to generate a type of reception period (reception effect) according to the result of the judgment (jackpot judgment, production judgment, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception effects), at least the 1C reception period (1C post-reception effects), the 2C reception period (2C post-reception effects), and the 3C reception period (3C post-reception effects). I have it ready.

With reference to FIGS. 304 to 318, the characteristics of each reception period (reception effect) will be described. It should be noted that the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. Production) may be prepared as a reception period separate from the 1C reception period (1C reception production), 2C reception period (2C reception production), 3C reception period ( 3C post-acceptance effect) may be implemented as any one of them. In addition, in order to realize the inventions described below, it is sufficient to have only the necessary configuration among the configurations described below, and these are not necessarily required for each acceptance period described above with reference to up to FIG. 303. You can choose not to prepare.

FIGS. 304 to 306 are time charts showing an example of the effect content when condition 1C is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 1C reception period (1C reception effect) occurs. . 313 and 314 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is established (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probable variable / non-time saving), and "1C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (announcement effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 1C variation pattern. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 1C variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 1C variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 313 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable effect, the effect (notice effect) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice effect is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “1C variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 304(a), when the timing tT2 comes after the 1C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 1C is satisfied). , generates the 1C acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance of performance after 1C acceptance" is permitted ("situation shown in FIGS. 297(b) and (c)"). As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period (if the acceptance is determined to be valid), the 1C reception after-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). become.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 1C reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit etc.), the remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases as time passes Depiction), disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the model image display, 1C post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to acceptance (reception validity determination) are to be carried out respectively. As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

More specifically, first, when the 1C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIGS. 1 effect device), as the integrated model image display IG, "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. The integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at the timing tT2, or may appear before the timing tT2 and straddle the timing tT2. may be displayed in It should be noted that the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is accepted (reception validity determination) within the 1C reception period or when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. is hidden when the 1C reception period ends without The 1C reception period according to this example ends when the timing tT3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 304(a)).

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) can be any of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232(a) and (d)) FIG. 313(b) shows a case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a) FIG. 313(c) corresponds to the case where the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232(d). It should be noted that during the 1C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in one of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. may be made.

FIG. 304 assumes a case where "receipt valid determination is made with the action (operation) by the player as a valid action" when the relatively early timing tT2a within the 1C reception period arrives. there is That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 304(a), based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted at timing tT2a (acceptance validity determination has been made), the 1C accepting period ends and the Execution of the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is started.

It should be noted that an example in which the production progresses from FIG. This corresponds to the case where the first mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is executed, and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIGS. This corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the after-reception effect (1C after-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period. "0%" or "100%" may be included.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period, as shown in FIG. 304, at timing tT2a when the action by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after the reception of the 1C in response to the acceptance), The "simulated image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated simulated image display IG is not made difficult to see.

That is, the effect after receiving the 1C according to this embodiment includes the "effect display after receiving the 1C" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and the second effect device (for example, sub liquid crystal, movable At least the "specific effect after reception of 1C" using the body, effect lamps, etc.) and the effect sound after reception of 1C using the third effect device (speaker) are realized as a combined effect. (It may not necessarily be realized as a composite effect by three effect devices), but among those effect devices, an effect in which the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed In the display device 1600 (first effect device), the timing of starting the execution of the "first reception effect display" as the 1C post-reception effect is delayed compared to the other effect devices. The visibility of the "integrated model image display IG" is intentionally maintained even after the acceptance is made by .

According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 314 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is displayed in a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 ( Since the player can easily recognize which one of a) to (d)) was displayed, it is expected that the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed appropriately. become.

Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of the mode in which the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, the "integrated model image display It can be said that it is desirable to set a longer time period during which the IG is displayed in an easily visible form. However, even though the acceptance has been made and the post-acceptance production (second production device, third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG is during the reception period. If it continues to be displayed in the same mode, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the acceptance has been made. There is a concern that

Therefore, in the examples shown in FIG. 304(b) and FIG. (When the timing tT2b arrives), display related to disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “extinction related display (extinction EF Effect)” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is “integrated model image display IG (simulated image display, gauge image display)”. overlaps the area where is displayed.

With such a configuration, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to see. It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the gaze of the player will naturally shift from the integrated model image display IG to the post-acceptance effects (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even in a situation where the post-acceptance production (the second production device and the third production device) has already been executed, the integrated model image display IG can be continued to be displayed for a relatively long time although it is difficult to visually recognize it. is made possible, it is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

In addition, in the 1C reception period, as the corresponding post-reception production (1C post-reception production), a low-expectation mode (Fig. 314 (d1) to (h1)) appears, and a high-expectation mode ( 314(d2) to (h2)), different forms (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2) appear as disappearance-related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 314(e1) and (e2), the "effect display after reception of 1C" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has not yet started. Even so, it is confirmed whether the disappearance-related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is displayed as "first disappearance-related display SKC1" or "second disappearance-related display SKC2". As a result, it becomes possible to guess whether or not the "effect display after reception of 1C" will be executed in a highly expected mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 304(b), FIG. When the timing tT2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the action by the player within the 1C reception period. Execution of "1C post-acceptance display UGC1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character)) is the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. 314 (f2 ), the second mode (here, the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2 as a cut-in effect by the samurai character) is displayed as the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" are displayed, respectively, the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 ( Execution of "1C post-acceptance display UGC1-1" or "1C post-acceptance display UGC1-2") is started. As a result, even if the integrated model image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time after being accepted within the 1C reception period, the reception by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) After production (1C reception after reception production display UGC1 can be started without a large delay compared to other production devices, it is possible to suppress the decline in game interest. Since the effect display UGC1 after the 1C reception is started while the integrated model image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, it suggests that the 1C reception period has already ended, and the player's gaze target is indicated. is naturally shifted from "integrated model image display IG" to "1C post-reception production display UGC1 (1C post-reception production display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception production display UGC1-2)". (after timing tT2c).

On the other hand, for the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)", the area where the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. When displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated model image display IG", and "1st C The “integrated model image display IG” is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2). As a result, even when the execution of the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)" is started, the integrated model image is displayed within the reception period. This makes it easy to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 304(b) and FIG. -2)” is displayed, first, among the “integrated model image display IG” and the “disappearance-related display”, the “integrated model image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 304(b), FIG. Display SKC1 or second disappearance-related display SKC2" is hidden, and under the condition that visibility is good, "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C Effect Display UGC1-2)” after reception is performed.

In this regard, the “1C post-accepting effect display UGC1” refers to a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, the 1C post-accepting effect display UGC1-1 or 1C It is displayed in one of the post-acceptance display UGC1-2). Therefore, the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

Further, in the production example (FIGS. 313 and 314) corresponding to the 1C reception period, when the reception is made within the 1C reception period and the "production display UGC1 after reception of the 1C" is executed, the "1C The background image is switched before and after the "post-acceptance effect display UGC1" is started.

According to such a configuration, under the circumstances shown in FIGS. 314(d) and 314(e) (timings tT2a to tT2b shown in FIG. 304) where the background image is not switched, the effect display device 1600 (the 1 effect device), even if there is a change in effect, it is possible to suggest that the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1" has not yet started.

It should be noted that, in this production example, the timing of the start of display of the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is changed to "display UGC1 after reception of 1C" and "change background" ( Although the display is started at a timing (timing tT2c) later than the timing tT2b), the timing (timing tT2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed. The display may be started at the same timing (timing tT2b).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 314, the background image is switched to the same background image for the appearance of a low-expectation aspect and the appearance of a high-expectation aspect as an effect after reception. The background image may be switched to a different one depending on whether the aspect with a low degree of expectation appears or the aspect with a high degree of expectation appears. Alternatively, the background image may be switched when a mode with a high degree of expectation appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with a low degree of expectation appears.

Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1C reception period occurs, it is within a limited time (bold line shown in FIG. 304), In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decline in the interest in the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tT2c) of the 1C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display) in response to the acceptance is set earlier than the received timing tT2a. The reality is that it has to be delayed.

Therefore, in this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 1C reception period, as shown in FIGS. 304(b) and (c), A 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception specific performance) using a second performance device is started prior to a 1C post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tT2a at which the reception is received in the 1C reception period only for a part of the 1C post-reception effect (display of the 1C post-reception effect). Execution of the 1C post-receipt effect itself can be started without delay from the same timing tT2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "women's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTC1 after the 1C reception corresponding to the 1C reception period. As the 1C post-reception specific effect UTB1-1), which is a mode with a low degree of expectation of the post-specific effect UTC1, precede the 1C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1) using the first effect device. and start running. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. d2), the mode in which "men's kimono" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTC1 (second As the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1, the 1C post-reception effect using the first effect device (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2) Execution is started prior to .

In addition, in the effect example shown in FIG. 313, apart from the "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has a 1C reception period. An effect within the acceptance period is executed to indicate that it has occurred (FIGS. 313(b) and (c)). The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 313 (b) ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 313(c)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, during the 1C acceptance period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes according to the degree of expectation, and The same mode appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, if "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 1C receiving period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) will display "integrated model image display IG ” continues (while the degree of expectation for the post-reception production has not yet been suggested), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation. Become. According to such a configuration, performance information can be obtained more quickly by watching an appropriate performance device from time to time than by watching only performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "specific production UTC1-1 after the reception of the 1C" and the "specific production UTC1-2 after the reception of the 1C" appears as the specific production UTC1 after the reception of the 1C. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC1 after receiving the 1C. For example, as the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1, only “1C post-reception specific effect UTC1-2” is provided, and depending on whether or not the 1C post-reception specific effect UTC1 appears ratio) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the specific effect UTC 1-2 after receiving the 1st C" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTC 1-2 after receiving the 1st C" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 1C reception period occurs, timing tT1 shown in FIG. , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 1C reception period is audibly output across the timing tT2 (corresponding to "situation shown in FIGS. 313(b) and 313(c)") at which the 1C reception period occurs. The action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output.

Here, in the 1C reception period, as reception acceptable sounds, a first long acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short acceptable sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time and are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 304(d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after timing tT2 when the first C reception period occurs.

Then, in the 1C acceptance period, when the action is accepted by the player while the first long allowable sound and/or the first short allowable sound are audibly output, the action is accepted based on the acceptance. , the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound are terminated in the middle (the audible output state is terminated in the middle).

In this regard, as for the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound, as shown in FIG. )) and a case of execution (audible output) in a highly expected manner (case shown in FIG. 313(c)). That is, in this case, although the first long permissible sound and/or the first short permissible sound suggest the degree of expectation within the reception period, unlike the "integrated model image display IG", the reception (reception Since it will be executed as something that cannot be confirmed if the validity judgment) is made, there is tension about when to make the acceptance (validity judgment) within the acceptance period It becomes expected to maintain good feeling.

Further, in the 1C acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while acceptance acceptance sounds (first long acceptance sound and first short acceptance sound) are audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is terminated halfway. In addition, when the acceptance is made, the audible output of the 1C post-acceptance effect sound is started based on the acceptance. The 1C post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output). That is, in this case, in the 1C reception period, unlike the production (display production) performed by the first production device, the production (acceptance acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance There is no conflict (overlapping) with the effect to be performed (effect sound after reception of 1C).

As shown in FIG. 304(d), such a 1C post-acceptance effect sound is an “integrated model image display IG” or a “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF Effect)” will continue to be executed for a relatively long period of time even after it is hidden. In addition, regarding the 1C post-reception production sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313(b) to “G1 (FIG. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

In the 1C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are output as the reception permissible sounds, respectively. Only allowable sounds may be output.

Further, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 1C acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 1C post-reception effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G2 (FIGS. 314(d2) to (h2))" (in the case where the expectation is relatively high as a post-acceptance production) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in a reception period different from the 1C reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to preferably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, FIG. 305 assumes a case where "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made when such a relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C accepting period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 305(a), based on the fact that the action by the player has been accepted at timing tT2A (reception validity determination has been made), the 1C reception period ends and the Execution of the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 1C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tT2A within the 1C reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tT2a within the 1C reception period. Therefore, even in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305(a), when the production progresses from FIG. 313(b) to "G1 (FIGS. When the expectation is low), and when the production progresses from FIG. , and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect will be executed with the contents as described with reference to FIG. 304 etc. .

However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305, in the situation shown in FIG. The display area of is further reduced. Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 314, as shown in FIG. Therefore, the first short permissible sound is not terminated halfway (halfway termination of the audible output state) due to the acceptance (validation of acceptance).

Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305, the time period during which the “1C post-acceptance effect display” based on acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is displayed is shorter than in the example shown in FIG. will be destroyed. In other words, the "specific effect after reception of 1C" and the "effect sound after reception of 1C" are executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of acceptance (determination of acceptance validity). On the other hand, the "1C effect display after reception" is terminated (not displayed) when a predetermined timing tT4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of the timing at which the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It is a thing. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the sense of tension regarding at what timing during the reception period the reception (reception validity determination) is to be made is maintained.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 306 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 306, after the occurrence of the 1C reception period, the above timing tT3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tT3 (when the 1C reception period ends and the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player is no longer permitted), the timing tT2a and the Effect display device 1600 (first effect device ), as shown in FIG. 314(d3), the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 1C reception period ends, after the end of the 1C reception period, the integration is performed within the 1C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 1C reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to accept the request, it becomes possible to suggest that the 1C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 1C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue to display the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "first disappearance-related display SKC1" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let That is, in this case, if the action (operation) by the player has been accepted within the 1C acceptance period, it is expected that the player will perceive the possibility that the effect after the 1C acceptance suggests that the degree of expectation is low. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to prompt the player to think that he or she did not need to perform the action (operation) within the 1C acceptance period, and the game interest is lowered when the action (operation) is not accepted within the 1C acceptance period. is expected to suppress

However, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the "second disappearance-related display SKC2" may be displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). A mode different from both the first disappearance related display SKC1 and the second disappearance related display SKC2 may be displayed.

In addition, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is assumed to be accepted when the action (operation) is accepted. It may be performed in any manner that it may appear. That is, in this case, the case where the "first disappearance related display SKC1" appears in the situation shown in FIG. It means the case where the production progresses from 313(b) to "G1 (FIGS. 314(d1) to (h1))" (when the production after reception with relatively low expectations is executed) becomes. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. b) to "G2 ((d2) to (h2) in FIG. 314)" (when a relatively high-expectation post-acceptance production is executed). . That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted during the 1C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is hidden after the 1C acceptance period ends. Just by confirming the mode as "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears as a can be recognized, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

After that, as shown in FIG. 314(f3), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (the first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)", the "integrated Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 1C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the mode shown in FIG. 232(d) (see FIG. 297(c)). When the situation shown in FIG. 313(c) appears, the situation shown in FIG. The only difference is the aspect as "image)", and otherwise the production progresses in the same aspect.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 313(c) to “G1′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 313(c) to "G2'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 313(c) to “G3′”, the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGd". Only.

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the 1C post-reception production (display UGC after 1C reception, specific production UTC after 1C reception, production sound after 1C reception) is described above. It was decided to execute with the same production content (type) as the 1B post-reception production corresponding to the 1B reception period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception effects (post-reception display, post-reception specific effects, and post-reception sound effects) have different effects (types) between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

Also, in the 1C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-described 1B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

FIGS. 307 to 309 are time charts showing an example of the content of effects when condition 2C is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 2C reception period (2C reception effect) occurs. . FIG. 315 is a diagram showing an effect example in a variation pattern in which the 2C reception period (2C reception effect) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and the "2nd C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second C variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 2C variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 2C variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 315 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “2C variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 307(a), when the timing tU2 comes after the 2C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 2C is satisfied). , generate the 2C acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 2C acceptance" is permitted. As a result, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 2C acceptance period (if the acceptance is judged to be valid), the 2C reception after-acceptance effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity judgment). become.

However, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the 1C reception period occurs, when the operation by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) ), the integrated model image display IG (“model image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed.

More specifically, in the 2C fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 307(b) and 315(b), when the timing tU2 arrives, the 2C reception period occurs, and the integrated model image display IG (" "Simulated image display" and "Remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") are displayed. The 2C reception period ends when the timing tU3 arrives when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception validity determination) (see FIG. 307(a)).

FIG. 307 assumes a case in which "receiving valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made when the relatively early timing tU2a arrives during the 2C accepting period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 307(a), the 2C acceptance period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tU2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2C reception period is started to be executed.

It should be noted that an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 315(b) to FIG. This corresponds to a case in which the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as "effect", "effect sound after 2B acceptance", etc.). As the 2C post-reception effects ("2C post-reception effect display", "2C post-reception specific effects", "2C post-reception sound effects", etc.), the first modes with relatively low expectations are executed. 315(b), the omitted mode (the first mode with a low degree of expectation) is executed after receiving the 2C. There are cases where there is. However, regarding such a 2C reception period, when the "reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made, the effect after the 2C reception ("effect display after the 2C reception" or " 315(c) shows whether or not the 2C post-acceptance specific effect, 2C post-reception effect sound, etc.) is executed in the manner shown in FIG. 315(c). It may be realized as a type in which the low-expectation mode as the 1C post-acceptance specific effect, 1C post-acceptance effect sound) is not prepared. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

In this regard, in this production example (2C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIGS. At timing tU2a, which is the point in time when the production is started after receiving 2C in response to , the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") is displayed. there is no FIG. 315(c) more strictly shows the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tU2c shown in FIG. 307(c). That is, at the timing tU2a, among the effects after the reception of the 2C, the "effect display UGC2 after the reception of the 2C (group notice effect)" is not executed, and the "specific effects after the reception of the 2C UTC2-2" and the effects of the "2C reception Post-production sound (high expectation mode)" is executed. According to such a configuration, since the production progresses in the same manner as in the case of the production after reception of the 1C, it is possible to obtain the above-described effects in the same manner.

Therefore, in this production example (2C reception period), as shown in FIGS. The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) described above is not executed. This is because, at the timing when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after receiving the 2C reception in response to the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG (“model image display” or “remaining image display”) This is because the time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed, and there is no need to make it difficult to see.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 307(b) and FIG. ``2C post-reception effect display UGC2 (in the figure, a group announcement effect by a ghost character, which is a highly anticipated mode, 2C after receiving the effect display UGC2-2)”. 307(b) and 315(d), the "2C post-reception effect display UGC2" started in this manner is executed for a predetermined time from the reception (reception validity determination). It will be terminated (hidden) when (a certain amount of time) has passed.

It should be noted that in the effect example (Fig. 315) corresponding to the 2C reception period, unlike the case of the 1C reception period, the background image is switched when the "effect display UGC2 after the 2C reception" is executed. never.

Further, when the action by the player is accepted within the 2C accepting period, as shown in FIGS. 307(b) and (c), the second effect device is used based on the acceptance The 2C post-reception performance (2C post-reception specific performance) is started prior to the 2C post-reception performance (2C post-reception performance display) using the first performance device.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light-emitting effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 315(b) to FIG. is displayed as the above-mentioned post-2C reception specific effect UTC2 corresponding to the 2C reception period (2-2C post-reception specific effect UTC2-2, which is a high-expectation mode of the post-2C reception specific effect UTC2). , execution is started prior to the 2C post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect display UGC2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the explanation of the case where the low-expectation aspect is executed as the effect after receiving the 2C reception will be omitted, but the “display after the 2C reception effect” and the “specific effect UTC2 after the 2C reception” are the low-expectation modes. , and is basically the same as when it is run in the high-expectancy mode.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker). However, when the 2C reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 307(d), no reception permission sound is output.

Further, in the 1C reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the 2C post-reception effect sound is started based on the reception. The 2C post-acceptance production sound is executed in such a way as to suggest the degree of expectation. output).

In addition, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 2C acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 2C post-reception effect sound that suggests the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" that does not suggest the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the 2C post-reception effect is executed in a high-expectation mode or a low-expectation mode.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 308 and the progress from FIGS. 315(b) and (e) to FIG. It is assumed that a reception validity determination is made in which an action (operation) by the player is regarded as a valid action. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 308(a), the 2C accepting period ends and the 2C accepting period ends based on the fact that the action by the player is accepted at timing tU2A (acceptance valid determination is made). Execution of the post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2C reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 2C reception period, even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tU2A within the 2C reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing) Even if there is), basically, the production progresses in the same manner as when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively early timing tU2a within the 2C reception period. Therefore, at the time when the operation by the player is accepted (receipt validity determination) (or at the time when the performance is started after the acceptance), the integrated model image display IG ("model image display" or "remaining time display ( The frame image and the gauge image)”) are never displayed. 308(a), 315(b) and 315(e) to FIG. 315(c). is omitted (when the degree of expectation is relatively low as an effect after reception), basically, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, see FIG. 307 etc. The performance will be executed with the contents as explained while doing so.

In particular, in the 2C reception period, unlike the 1C reception period, the "effect display after the 2C reception" is the same as the "specific effect after the 2C reception" or the "effect sound after the 2C reception". Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time (reception validity judgment) is made, the mode as a post-reception production is also at the timing when the reception (reception validity judgment) is made. are the same regardless.

It should be noted that the "2C post-reception effect display", "2C post-reception specific effect", and "2C post-reception effect sound" may be performed for a certain period of time set respectively. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 309 and the example in which the production progresses from FIGS. 315(b) and (e) to FIG. This assumes a case where the request is not accepted (determination of validity of acceptance).

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 309, after the occurrence of the 2C acceptance period, the above-mentioned timing tU3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in the 2C accepting period, no effect related to the end is executed as shown in FIG. 309 .

In addition, in the 2C reception period, only one mode (integrated model image display IGb (see FIG. 232(b)) in FIG. 315) is displayed as the model image display. The integrated model image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed during the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period. However, the 2C reception period is the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made (or the time when the performance after reception is started), regardless of the timing of the reception (reception validity determination). ) is characterized in that no model image display (gauge image) is displayed. Therefore, during the 2C acceptance period, any mode may appear as the model image display, or any of a plurality of modes may be displayed. Also, during the 2C reception period, the model image display may not be displayed, and the gauge image may be displayed. Also, during the 2C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, and a model image display may be displayed. Further, neither the model image display nor the gauge image may be displayed during the 2C reception period.

In addition, according to the above-mentioned feature of the 2C reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to concentrate only on the mode of production after reception without worrying about the mode of the model image display (gauge image). become. In this case, even if the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, the 2C reception period should not be subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. is desirable. As a result, the case where the performance after reception occurs is limited to the case where the player himself/herself who has confirmed the performance mode during the 2C reception period operates it, so the 2C reception period has ended. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the non-display of the model image or the gauge image at the point in time or thereafter.

FIGS. 310 to 312 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when condition 3C is satisfied as a result of determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 3C reception period (3C reception effect) occurs. . FIGS. 316 to 318 are diagrams showing examples of effects in variation patterns in which the 3C reception period (3C reception effects) occurs.

Now, the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, normal game state that is non-probability variable / non-time saving), and "3rd C fluctuation pattern" is selected as a result of fluctuation pattern determination Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, effect determination (previous effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third C variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variable effect of the decorative pattern SZ (such as effect depiction according to the 3C variable pattern, sound output of BGM playback according to the 3C variable pattern, etc.) is started ("Situation shown in FIG. 316 (a) ”), during the execution period of the variable performance, the performance (forecast performance) according to the result of the determination of the previous notice performance is additionally executed to the performance of the selected “3rd C variation pattern” itself. Become.

That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 310(a), when the timing tV2 comes after the 3C predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (when the condition 3C is satisfied). , generate the 3C acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding the effect after the 3C acceptance" is permitted. As a result, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C accepting period (if acceptance is determined to be valid), the 3C post-accepting effect is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance valid determination). become.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 3C reception period, the reception object (operation receiving unit etc.) Suggested action target display (simulated image display), Remaining time display that suggests the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image according to the passage of time), Disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to see the model image display, and 1C reception post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) according to the acceptance (reception validity determination). It is designed to be As described above, the simulated image display according to this embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (description that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed within the frame image as time passes). However, it is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. This also applies to other acceptance periods.

In this regard, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C reception period (at the time of reception (or at the time of execution of the production after reception), the model image display and gauge Effect in which the image is displayed) and the effect due to the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance), a model image display or gauge image is displayed. It is realized as a special production that combines both the performance that has not been done).

More specifically, when the 3C acceptance period occurs during which the player is allowed to accept an operation, first, as shown in FIG. 310(b) and FIG. ("simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)") are displayed (timing tV2). However, during the 3C reception period, depending on at what timing during the 3C reception period the operation by the player was accepted (reception validity determination), the time point (or acceptance At the time when the post-production starts to be executed), there are cases where the model image display and the gauge image are displayed and cases where the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed.

As will be described later, in this production example, as shown in FIG. If the operation is accepted (reception validity judgment), the model image display or gauge image will be displayed at the time the acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made (or at the time when the production starts after reception). If the operation by the player is accepted (receipt A model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time point when the validity determination is made (or at the time point when the performance is started after acceptance). However, such an aspect is only an example. At the time when the post-effect starts to be executed), the model image display and the gauge image are in a non-display state (not displayed), and it is accepted at a second timing different from the first timing within the 3C acceptance period (acceptance When the acceptance (validity judgment) is made (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance), a model image display or a gauge image may be displayed.

According to such a 3C reception period, during the period from the occurrence of the 3C reception period to the arrival of the timing Y, even if the reception is made, the production after the 3C reception is integrated. The execution of the image display IG is started in a non-display state (invisible state), and the reception is performed from the timing Y to the timing tV3 when the 3C reception period ends. Execution of the 3C post-receipt production in response to the response is started in a state where the integrated model image display IG is displayed (it is sufficient if at least a part of the integrated model image display IG is visible). . As a result, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C reception period (at the time of reception (or at the time when the performance is started after reception), the model image display and gauge Effect in which the image is displayed) and the effect due to the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the performance is started after acceptance), a model image display or gauge image is displayed. It will be realized as a special effect that combines both the performance that is not performed), and it is expected that this will improve the game interest.

That is, in this case, through the adjustment of the operation timing for the 3C acceptance period, the player can visually recognize the form of the integrated model image display IG (model image display or gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C acceptance period. In order to start execution of the effect after receiving the 3C while the integrated model image display IG (model image display and gauge image) is displayed, or to concentrate on the effect after receiving the 3C It is now possible to substantially select whether to hide the integrated model image display IG (model image display or gauge image) and start executing the effect after receiving the 3rd C. You will be able to make improvements.

In order to more preferably realize such effects, in the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is used in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations. 232(a), (c)), and FIG. , gauge image) is displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(a), and FIG. 232(c)). Also during the 3C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. may be made.

Then, in FIG. 310, during the "first period (first state) (see, for example, FIG. 316(b))" of the 3C receiving period (timing tV2a in the figure), It is assumed that a "receipt valid determination that the player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310(a), the 3C acceptance period ends based on the fact that the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination is made) at timing tV2a. At the same time, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started to be executed.

It should be noted that an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H1 (FIGS. 317(d1) to 317(h1))" is the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" of the 3C receiving period. 316(b) to "H2 ( Figure 317 (d2) to Figure 317 (h2))” is an example in which the “valid reception determination” is made during the “first period (first state)” of the 3C reception period. As a result, this corresponds to the case where the second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the "3C post-acceptance effect". The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, when the "reception validity determination" is made during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period, the following is performed in FIG. 310(b), FIG. d2), at the timing tV2a when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (when the effect is started after receiving the 3C in response to the acceptance), the "integrated model image display IG" is displayed. is hidden and not displayed (made invisible).

According to such a configuration, when the action (operation) is performed by the player during the "first period (first state)" of the 3C reception period ("reception validity determination" is made case), the player performs a post-reception production (here, after the 3rd C reception It becomes possible to enjoy the specific performance UTC3).

In this regard, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, even if the action (operation) is performed by the player during the "first period (first state)", the reception is performed. When a predetermined time elapses from timing tV2a (when timing tV2b arrives), as shown in (e1) or (e2) of FIG. .

That is, in the 3C reception period according to this example, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted in the above-described "first period (first state)", at the timing tV2b, "integrated Even though the imitation image display IG (simulation image display, gauge image display) is already not displayed (invisible state), the ``disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)'' will start to be displayed. , and at least part of the area where the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)" was displayed. It is designed to

According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suggest that the post-acceptance effect is being executed in association with the proper acceptance of the action by the player.

Also, during the 3C reception period, the performance as the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the production starts after reception), the model image display and gauge image are displayed. If the acceptance is made during the above "first period (first state)" that provides a performance without performance), in which state is the acceptance made, the 2C acceptance period or the 3C acceptance period? is difficult to recognize, but by the appearance of the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" that cannot appear during the 2C reception period, it is possible to recognize that the reception has been made during the 3C reception period. become.

In addition, in the 3C acceptance period, a case where a low-expectation aspect (FIGS. 317(d1)-(h1)) appears as an effect after the 3C-acceptance and a high-expectation aspect (FIGS. 317(d2)-(h2)) The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as when appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1C reception period (when the appearance of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), after the acceptance is made within the 3C reception period, the "disappearance Since the importance of paying attention to "related display (disappearing EF effect)" decreases, coupled with the fact that the model image display (gauge image) is not displayed, concentrate on what kind of mode will appear as the effect display UGC after receiving the 3C You will be able to

In addition, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, the after-reception production (1C post-reception production) corresponding to the 1C reception period is expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. A "second disappearance related display SKC2" that is displayed when executed in a high degree mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 3C reception period, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the performance after the reception is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, thereby improving the amusement of the game. You will be able to plan.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 3C receiving period does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKC2”. For example, as a disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period, it is displayed when the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. The "first disappearance-related display SKC1" may be used, or a mode that does not correspond to the first C acceptance period may be used as the disappearance-related display.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 310(b), FIG. When the timing tV2c within the period in which the mode) appears, the first effect device (effect display device 1600) responds to the acceptance of the action (operation) by the player within the 3C acceptance period. Execution of the "3C post-acceptance-after-effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" as the effect is started. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1, which is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. 316(a) to "H2 (FIGS. 317(d2)-(h2))" (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as production after reception), FIG. 317(f2) , the second mode (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2, which is a conversation notice referring to "chance") is displayed as the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. It is designed to be

That is, in this case, while the "integrated model image display IG" is not displayed and the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display Execution of the post-acceptance display UGC3-1 or the 3C post-acceptance display UGC3-2 is started.

In this regard, the “3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (“3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1” or “3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2”) is a “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2). is displayed so as to overlap at least part of the displayed area (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" The "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is preferentially displayed. In this way, by making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the gaze target (the effect display UGC3 after the reception of the 3rd C), it is possible to encourage further concentration.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is started, , as shown in FIG. 310(b), FIG. Or, while the 3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3-2)” is displayed, the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)” is hidden, and this makes it visible. Originally, the display related to "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is performed.

In this regard, the “3C post-accepting effect display UGC3” refers to a plurality of modes (here, the 3C post-accepting effect display UGC3-1 Or it is displayed by either the 3C post-acceptance display UGC3-2). Therefore, the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3" will be executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" are hidden.

In this production example, the display of the "3rd C reception after-reception display UGC3" starts at a timing (timing tV2c) later than the timing (timing tV2b) at which the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" starts to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same timing (timing tV2b) as the timing (timing tV2b) at which the “disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)” is started.

In this example, when the player's action is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 310(b) and (c), based on the acceptance, 3C post-reception performance (3C post-reception specific performance) using the second performance device is started prior to 3B post-reception performance (3B post-reception performance display) using the first performance device. I'm trying

According to such a configuration, even if the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) performs the disappearance-related display and then performs the effect display after the 3C reception, the effect after the 3C reception is performed. As for itself, execution can be started without delay from the same timing tV2a.

Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub-liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or may be a movable object capable of effecting operations, or It may be provided as a production lamp capable of emitting light. In any case, it is provided so that effects (display effects, movable effects, light emission effects, etc.) can be performed in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may include "0%" or "100%".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. , the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) corresponds to the above-mentioned 3C reception specific effect UTC3 (3rd reception specific effect after reception) corresponding to the 3C reception period As a 3C post-reception specific effect UTC3-1), which is an aspect of UTC3 with a low degree of expectation, it is executed prior to the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1) using the first effect device. It is supposed to start. On the other hand, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. As shown in d2), the mode in which "good luck" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the specific effect UTC3 after the 3C reception corresponding to the 3C reception period (after the 3C reception) As a 3C post-reception specific effect UTC3-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the specific effect UTC3, precedes the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2) using the first effect device is to start running.

In addition, in the production example shown in FIG. 317, when it is in the above "first period (first state)" during the 3C reception period (FIG. 317(b)), period (second state)” and (Fig. 317(c)), the receiving period suggesting that the 3C receiving period has occurred in the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device). An internal production is to be executed. The effect within the reception period on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is a mode in which the “integrated model image display IG” on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is less expected (see FIG. 316 (b) ) and the highly expected mode (see FIG. 316(d)) are displayed in the same mode.

That is, in this case, during the 3C receiving period in which the player is provided with an action opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and sub In the liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device), the same mode appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the ``receipt validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action'' is made during the 3C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) ``integrated model image Display IG" is hidden (while the degree of expectation as an effect after reception has not yet been suggested), and a different aspect appears on the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) according to the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, performance information can be obtained more quickly by watching an appropriate performance device from time to time than by watching only performance by one performance device. Since it becomes like this, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In this production example, the degree of expectation is suggested by which of the "specific production UTC3-1 after reception of 3C" and the "specific production UTC3-2 after reception of 3C" appears as the specific production UTC3 after reception of 3C. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC3 after receiving the 3C. For example, as the specific effect UTC3 after receiving the 3C, only the “specific effect after receiving the 3C UTBC-2” is provided. is obtained) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "3C acceptance specific effect UTBC-2" appears, expectations are higher than when "3C acceptance specific effect UTBC-2" does not appear. Become.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is further provided with a third effect device (speaker), and when the 3C reception period occurs, the timing tV1 shown in FIG. , the reception allowable sound is started to be output. The acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 3C reception period is audible in a manner straddling both the timing tV2 at which the 3C reception period occurs and the timing Y at which the "first period" shifts to the "second period". The action (operation) by the player can be accepted while the reception acceptance sound is audibly output. However, the acceptable acceptance sound may be audibly output across the timing Y, and may not necessarily be audibly output across the timing tV2.

Here, in the 3C reception period, as the reception allowable sound, a third allowable sound different from both the first long allowable sound and the first short allowable sound is audibly output. It becomes possible to suggest the occurrence (or occurrence) of the 3C receiving period having a plurality of effects instead of the period. However, the reception allowable sound corresponding to the 3C reception period may be executed with either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

In the 3C acceptance period, if the player accepts an action while the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) is audibly output, it means that the acceptance has been made. Based on this, the acceptable acceptance sound is not terminated midway (midway termination of the audible output state), and this also causes a 3C reception period having a plurality of effects instead of the 1C reception period. (or what is happening). However, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may also be terminated halfway based on acceptance.

In this regard, as for the acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) corresponding to the 3C acceptance period, as shown in FIG. It is desirable that there are two cases (the case shown in FIG. 316(b)) and the other case (the case shown in FIG. 316(d)) that is executed (audible output) in a highly expected manner.

The 3C post-reception effect sound is similar to the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, as shown in FIG. 310(d). Even after is hidden, it will continue to run for a relatively long time. In addition, regarding the 3C post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 316 (a) to “H1 (Fig. case) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

Further, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the 3C acceptance period, the 3rd effect device can hear not only the 3C post-reception effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation, but also the "reception sound" not suggesting the degree of expectation. It will be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316(b) to "H2 (FIGS. 317(d2) to (h2))" (in the case where the expectation is relatively high as an after-reception production) audible output in the same manner It is what is done. Such a "reception sound" is accepted (reception valid determination) in a reception period different from the 3C reception period (for example, the 1C reception period, or a predetermined reception period different from each reception period described above). audible output (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how novel the performance after reception is performed, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed when the "reception sound" is audibly output. Since it becomes possible to preferably recognize that it is in, it is possible to encourage concentration on the content of the presentation after reception.

On the other hand, from FIG. 311, FIG. 316(b), (c) to "H3 (FIG. 318(d3)-(h3))" or "H4 (FIG. 318(d4)-(h4))" An example that progresses is that in the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (timing tV2A in the figure), "the action (operation) by the player is an effective action It is assumed that the reception validity judgment is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 311(a), FIGS. 318(d3) to (h3) or FIGS. Based on the fact that reception validity is determined, the 3C reception period ends, and the execution of the post-reception performance (3C post-reception performance) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started.

In this respect, in the 3C reception period, if the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (shown in FIG. 316(c) Even if the acceptance is made in the state where the acceptance is made), after the acceptance is made, basically, within the 3B acceptance period, in the above "first period (first state)" The effect is developed in the same manner as when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made (when acceptance is made in the state shown in FIG. 316(b)). Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 311(a) as well, from FIG. (h3))”), and the case where the production progresses in a relatively high-expectation mode as the production after reception from FIG. 316(c) (“H4 (FIG. (h4))”), and basically, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, while referring to FIG. The production is executed with the contents as described.

However, as described above, the 3C reception period according to this embodiment is the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C reception period (effect in which a model image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the production after reception is started to be executed. As a special effect that combines both the performance of the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (the performance that the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the production starts after reception) If the reception (reception validity determination) is made during the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (shown in FIG. 316(c) If the reception is made in a state where it is accepted), the performance of the above-mentioned "1C reception period" (the performance of displaying a model image or a gauge image at the time when the performance starts to be executed after reception) appears. It has become a thing.

Therefore, it is clear by comparing "FIGS. 318 (d3) to (h3) or (d4) to (h4)" with "FIGS. 317 (d1) to (h1) or (d2) to (h2)". As described above, when acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period (reception is accepted in the state shown in FIG. 316(c) If it is done), the integrated model image display IG will not be hidden and will continue to be displayed at the time when the execution of the 3C post-acceptance effect is started.

It should be noted that such an integrated model image display IG is displayed at the time when the execution of the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" is started (see FIG. 311 and FIG. 318 (f3) or (f4)). is not hidden and continues to be displayed. The integrated model image display IG is not displayed preferentially with respect to the "second extinction related display SKC2", but is displayed behind it, but with respect to the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" It is designed to be preferentially displayed, thereby making it easy to recognize in which mode it was displayed during the acceptance period.

Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the above "second period (second state)" within the 3C reception period, in this way "after the 3C reception 311 (b), FIG. 318 (g3) or (g4) is started. , while the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is being displayed, first, "Integration "Integrated model image display IG" out of "model image display IG" and "disappearance-related display" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 311(b), FIG. "Display SKC2" is hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3- 2)” is displayed.

Other production modes when acceptance is made in the second period (second state) within the 3C reception period (for example, specific production after reception, disappearance related display, display production after reception, allowable sound, production after reception, The reception sound, etc.) are as explained with reference to FIG. 317 (or are the same as the example of the effect shown in FIG. 301), so the explanation here is omitted.

It should be noted that in the production examples (FIGS. 316 to 318) corresponding to the 3C reception period, even if the reception is made within the 3C reception period and the "production display UGC3 after the 3C reception is executed", the "3C reception period" is executed. The background image is not switched before and after the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3' is started. According to such a configuration, the integrated model image display IG is displayed when the acceptance is made during the 1C acceptance period and when the acceptance is made during the second period within the 3C acceptance period. Although it is common in that the production is started after reception while the reception is in, by confirming whether the background image changes according to the reception, the above 1C reception period and the 3C reception period It becomes possible to recognize which one of and has occurred. On the other hand, when the acceptance is made during the 2C acceptance period and the case where the acceptance is made during the first period within the 3C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is not displayed. In common in that the post-effect is started to be executed, by confirming whether or not the "disappearance-related display" is executed in response to the reception, the above-mentioned 2C reception period and the 3C reception period It becomes possible to recognize which one of and has occurred.

Also, in the 3C reception period, the "effect display after reception of 3C" is similar to the "specific effect after reception of 3C" and "effect sound after reception of 3C", etc. Since it is executed for a predetermined period of time (fixed period of time), the aspect of the post-acceptance effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made.

It should be noted that the "3C post-reception effect display", the "3C post-reception specific effect", and the "3C post-reception sound effect" may be performed only for a certain period of time set for each. It does not have to be finished at the same time.

On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 312 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and reception (reception validity determination) is not performed.

That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 312, after the occurrence of the 3C receiving period, the above-mentioned timing tV3 arrives without the action (operation) by the player being received. In this regard, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tV3 (when the 3rd C acceptance period ends and the acceptance of actions (operations) by the player is no longer permitted), timing tV2A, etc. Similar to the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time when the action (operation) by the player is accepted in the second period within the 3C acceptance period, the effect shown in FIG. Thus, the integrated model image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated model image display IG is not made difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted in time and the 3C reception period ends, after the end of the 3C reception period, integration is performed within the 3C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the model image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

After that, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. (Disappearance EF effect) is started.

That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)” is displayed, the “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect )” is displayed, and at least part of the area where the “disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)” is displayed is the “integrated model image display IG (model image display, gauge image display)”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

According to such a configuration, even if the integrated simulated image display IG continues to be displayed after the 3C reception period ends without acceptance, the integrated simulated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to access, it is possible to suggest that the 3C reception period has ended. Also, even in a situation where the 3C reception period has already ended, it will be possible to continue displaying the integrated model image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to see. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the inability to recognize in which mode the integrated model image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). We are planning to let

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the 1C acceptance period. In other words, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the same as the above-mentioned "performance by the 1C acceptance period (at the time of acceptance ( Or, at the time when the performance starts to be executed after acceptance), the performance in which the model image display or the gauge image is displayed), and the performance due to the above-mentioned "2C reception period" (at the time when the reception is made (or reception It is possible to suggest that both the performance characteristics in which the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the post-effect starts to be executed) were combined.

Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C accepting period. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 3C acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

After that, as shown in FIG. 318(f5), out of the "integrated model image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (the third disappearance related display SKC3 in the figure)", the "integrated Hide the model image display IG. Then, after the "integrated model image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. It will be displayed.

By the way, in the 3C reception period according to this example, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the mode shown in FIG. (c)) and may be displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 232(c) (see FIGS. 316(d) and (e)), as described above. When the situations shown in FIGS. 316(d) and 316(e) appear, the situations shown in FIGS. Model image display, frame image, gauge image)” is different, but the production is progressed in the same manner.

For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 316(d) to “H1′”, the contents and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 316(d) to "H2'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 316(e) to "H3'", the contents and basics that the production progresses from FIG. 316(c) to "H3 (FIGS. are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 316(e) to "H4'", the contents and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only. Also, when the production progresses from FIG. 316(e) to "H5'", the content and basic are substantially the same, and the mode of "integrated model image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated model image display IGa" to "integrated model image display IGc". Only.

In addition, in the 3C reception period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the 3C reception production (display UGC after 3C reception, specific production UTC after 3C reception, production sound after 3C reception) is described above. It was decided to execute with the same production content (type) as the 3B post-reception production corresponding to the 3B reception period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception effects (post-reception display, post-reception specific effects, post-reception sound effects) have different effects (types) between the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

Also, in the 3C receiving period according to this production example, for convenience of explanation, the disappearance-related display SKC is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-described 3B receiving period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same between the 3B acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period.

According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application, in which the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period are prepared, the following excellent effects can be obtained.

First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the content of the production that progresses when the reception is received (cut-in notice, group notice, conversation notice, etc. as production after reception, notice production (expectation suggestive production) (Type of ) are prepared for multiple acceptance periods (1C acceptance period to 3C acceptance period), and it is possible to generate a type acceptance period (effective period) according to the result of the judgment (effect judgment). It has become.

In this regard, in the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, when the action by the player is accepted, the effect display after reception (the effect display after the 1C reception to the effect display after the 3C reception effect display) can be displayed in the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, when an action by the player is accepted, not only is the post-acceptance effect display displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance-related display ( disappearing EF effect)” is made to appear further. That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which aspect has appeared as the model image display (or gauge image), as well as the model image display (or gauge image) Until the is hidden, the visibility is reduced by ``a form that makes it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance related display)''. It is expected that the player's gaze target will naturally shift from the "simulated image display (or gauge image)" to the "post-acceptance display". It should be noted that the "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be used in common for a plurality of reception periods in which the content of the effect that progresses when received is different (Fig. 314 ( e2) and FIG. 317(e2), etc.).

However, since the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the acceptance period when the acceptance has not yet been made, the model image display will continue after the acceptance. or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception display according to the reception has been displayed, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decrease. be. In this regard, when the reception is made in either the 1C reception period or the 3C reception period (second period), the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as "model image display and remaining time While the display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden (invisible) while the display (frame image, gauge image) is difficult to see (disappearance-related display), The time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed while the mode (disappearance-related display) is appearing. In other words, in this case, after the player accepts the action, while "an aspect (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see" appears, A shift in the display effect from the previous display (simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the post-acceptance display (post-acceptance effect display) is realized.

It should be noted that both the mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display) and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed based on acceptance. point in common. However, the ``mode (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see'' is, for example, shown in FIG. When a model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear to make it difficult to see. It is what is done. On the other hand, "effect display after reception" means display of a model image or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), as shown in Fig. 314 (f1) or Fig. 318 (f3). Even if it is displayed in such a situation, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) appear so as not to be difficult to see.

In this regard, in the above-described example, if the acceptance is made in the first period of the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance-related display and the post-acceptance effect display are displayed as a model image, as shown in FIG. And the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is started while it is already hidden, so the player concentrates on ``what kind of effect display will appear after reception?'' be able to In addition, a model image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed by adjusting whether the operation is to be accepted in the first period or the second period within the 3C acceptance period. Either make it so that the post-acceptance display starts executing while the state continues, or hide the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) before executing the post-acceptance display. It is now possible to select whether to start the game, and it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, regarding "modes in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)", "make the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", at least part of the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) In addition to the method of realizing priority display (display on the front layer) of a different image display from It is possible to adopt a method of displaying an image (moving image) that is made to appear partially missing (invisible) in the time display (frame image, gauge image), or the like. In addition, it is not a separate image display from the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but the numerical value (transmittance etc.) can also be adopted. On the other hand, regarding the "effect display after reception", as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)", model image display and remaining time display (frame image , gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the "reception effect display" is displayed, but the " In addition to the method realized by displaying (displaying on the rear layer) "effect display after reception", at least while the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, the model image display It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in an area other than the displayed area.

In addition, as a form (disappearance-related display) in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see, the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in at least a part of the display of the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself It is also possible to adopt both a method of changing the numerical value (transmittance, etc.) related to the characteristic.

Further, the ``mode in which the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (disappearance-related display)'' refers to the ``reception display'' before the ``reception display'' is displayed. "Post-effect display" appears in a situation where it has not yet been displayed. That is, in this case, under the condition that the "effect display after acceptance" is not yet displayed, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are replaced with the above "model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)." ) becomes difficult to see (disappearance-related display)”, so while making the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) visible, “post-reception effect display " is likely to appear soon, so that the player's attention is changed from "a simulated image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) that is difficult to see". You will be able to encourage

Also, if it is accepted during the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period (second period), etc., "a mode in which the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) become difficult to see (disappearance-related display)" can be displayed even after the "effect display after reception" is displayed, and is hidden while the "effect display after reception" is displayed. As a result, during the period when the "effect display after reception" is displayed, the "mode that makes it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance-related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, we will be able to provide the performance related to the "post-reception display" in a wider range, so we will improve the game interest by changing the performance during such a display period. be able to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in FIGS. Mode (disappearance related display)", not only the area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but also the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in areas that are not displayed. In this area, at least part of the "effect display after reception" is displayed. (disappearance-related display)” is displayed (for example, displayed in the rear layer) so that at least part of the “post-acceptance effect display” is difficult to see.

According to such a configuration, the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) makes not only the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but also the "post-reception effect display" difficult to see. Since it will appear, the effect until the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is hidden, and the effect when the display of "effect display after reception" starts It is expected to improve both sexuality and

Further, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the "post-reception production display" is displayed before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. In the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), a specific effect after reception (using a second effect device) that does not make it difficult to see the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to appear after the reception. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-acceptance production prior to this without interfering with the production of the first production device.

In addition, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more likely than the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) to appear. The previous disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. Further, the post-acceptance specific effect (post-acceptance effect using the second effect device) is continued until after the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is terminated.

According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes complicated effects in the first effect device can enjoy the effect after reception by the second effect device having simplified effects. It is possible to improve amusement in games for various types of players.

Also, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the simulated image display is displayed by dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, after acceptance, the dynamic display of the model image is not terminated (until it is hidden) even though the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) appears. It is desirable to

In addition, in each of the production examples described above regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a model image display, but also a gauge that suggests the remaining time until the reception period ends. It was also decided to make it difficult to visually recognize the image. As a result, even when the gauge image is displayed even after the acceptance, it is possible to prevent it from appearing as if the remaining time remains.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period among the plurality of acceptance periods, the "third 3C post-reception effect display UGC3" can be displayed, but apart from the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, the mode (second disappearance Related display SKC2) can appear.

According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance-related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1C and 3C post-acceptance effect displays will appear, but when the first disappearance-related display SKC1 appears, It is possible to guess that the effect display UGC1 will appear after receiving the first C.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (prioritized display ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen must be executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when viewed from the front. It is also possible to realize by

Even if the same aspect (second disappearance-related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), if the reception period type is different, the big hit pattern will be stopped due to the pattern change. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations) of

In addition, in the example of the production described above, it is possible to execute the production after reception (specific production after reception) using the second production device, and the production after reception (specific production after reception) is executed using the second production device. During the period, in the first production device, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively visible. It is made to have a state where it is difficult to visually recognize it.

That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (specific post-reception effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image ), it is possible to confirm which aspect appeared. Also, during the execution period of the post-acceptance effect (specific post-acceptance effect) using the second effect device, the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made relatively difficult to visually recognize. As a result, it is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally shifted from the "first effect device" to the "second effect device".

In the production example described above, the production after reception using the second production device (specific production after reception) is a model image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easy-to-see state) from before it is accepted, and the remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area within the display screen (effect display device 1600). The after-acceptance effect (specific after-acceptance effect) is not an image display that is displayed using at least part of the predetermined area, nor is it an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area when viewed from the front. It is.

Also, in the example of the effect described above, the post-acceptance effect display is started after the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), but it is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). You may make it start.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "area where the model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". It was decided to realize it as an image display to be displayed. However, in this case, it is desirable to display the image so that the area displayed in the "area where the simulated image is displayed" tends to gradually expand over time.

Further, as described above, the "simulated image display" and the "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" according to this embodiment can be used as the integrated simulated image display IG in a plurality of modes with different expectations (integrated simulated image It can be displayed by any of the displays IGa to IGd). Further, according to each of the production examples described above, the display mode, including the display position, size, dynamic depiction, etc., may be maintained and continued even after acceptance. After that, it is possible to recognize in what manner the model image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed within the acceptance period.

As described above, the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be displayed separately, or the "simulated image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, when the "simulated image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is in a non-display state, it means that the state is invisible to the player. For example, it is displayed on the layer, but by giving priority to other image display, the "model image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" are not visible. Meaning. However, if at least a part of the "simulated image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player side, this is the "simulated image display" or "remaining time display" (frame image, gauge image)” is made visible, so the “model image display” and “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” are hidden. It can be said that it is in a state where the display is continued.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the post-acceptance specific production may be realized not by the second production device but by the first production device (within the display screen of the production display device 1600).

In addition, in the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period, the target of the action (operation) by the player may not necessarily be the same, and different actions may be requested. However, when a different action is desired, the action target display (simulated image display) and remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are also displayed as different displays.

By the way, if it is desired that the reception (reception validity determination) is performed in the first period (first state) of the 3C reception period, the reception validity determination is made to the player until the timing Y arrives. will be required to ensure that However, if the 3C reception period is set as "a valid period that lasts for 3 seconds", the first period (first state) can only have a period of about 1 second. becomes. That is, in this case, it is assumed that the player will act (operate) slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period due to impatience due to having to act (operate) within such a short time. be. In this case, even if the player tries to redo the action, if the timing Y has already arrived by then, there is a concern that the player will not be able to play the game as he/she wants, and that the interest in the game will decrease.

Therefore, in the 3C reception period, the action (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tV2 at which the state (3C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the player's action is the valid action" is permitted occurs. Even if there is, the action (operation) is not regarded as "reception validity determination" at that time, but when the 3C reception period starts (or after that), the 3C reception It is desirable to make it possible to target (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the period as "reception validity determination".

However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not an action (operation) has been performed by the player is based on whether or not the 3C reception period has occurred in which "reception validity determination in which the player's action is a valid action" is permitted. You will be required to do so regardless of whether or not you do.

For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 304, even if the player performs an action (operation) slightly before timing tV2, this will be detected. However, when the action (operation) by the player is thus detected, the 3C reception period has not yet occurred. No “validity determination” is made. However, the presence of this detection information is stored as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the 3C reception period, the detection information stored as the memory (history) within the 3C reception period Based on this, "receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made. Then, the 3C post-acceptance effect is executed based on the "acceptance valid determination" thus obtained.

According to such a configuration, even if an operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, it can be accepted within the 3C reception period. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the post-acceptance effect (3C post-acceptance effect) triggered by this. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty of accepting the action even while the performance (first period) described above is realized.

However, if the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period (before a predetermined time or more), it is possible to prevent the performance after the 3C reception from being executed with this as a trigger. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value to be stored as detection information.

Note that the configuration when the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period may be applied in the same way during the 1C reception period and the 2C reception period, or may not be applied. You may do so.

Also, at this time, regarding the action (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3C reception period, the action (operation) is changed to the "second period (second state)" after the occurrence of the 3C reception period. , it is desirable to be able to accept the validity determination (reception validity determination) in the above-mentioned "first period (first state)". According to such a configuration, acceptance validity is determined at the timing when a little time has passed since the action (operation) by the player is performed, and the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started. As a result, it can be suggested that the player's actions are properly accepted, rather than the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no action (operation) even though the acceptance period has occurred. It becomes possible to do so, and it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including the 2C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period are accepted as acceptance (acceptance validity determination) of actions (operations) by the player. We have a reception period. Then, if the "reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period ) is started to be executed, an action target display (here, a model image display that imitates the action (operation) target by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations (FIGS. 232(a) to ( d))) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see FIG. 318), and during the 2C reception period, "receipt validity judgment that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action ” is performed, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect (2C post-reception effect corresponding to the 2C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the action target display (here, the action by the player ( The model image display (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) that imitates the target of the operation) and has multiple modes with different expectations (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is not hidden and is never displayed. (Even if the acceptance is made at any timing, the model image display is in a non-display state at the time when the performance after acceptance is started) (see FIG. 315).

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-acceptance effect based on the "acceptance validity determination" is started, the action target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the target of the action by the player and have different expectations) (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is visible, and the action target display (here, the target of the player's action is simulated and the degree of expectation Since there are cases where the simulated image display (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d))) having multiple different modes is not visible, the tension after the production is started after reception is expected to be well maintained.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception is determined depending on at which timing (see FIGS. 310 and 311) the "reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion" is made. At the time when the post-acceptance effect (3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) based on the validity determination is started to be executed, the action object display ((see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is not displayed. (See FIG. 318), and when the operation object display ((See FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is hidden (FIG. 317). (see ).

That is, from the player's side, the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" among the multiple modes (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d)). When it is done, continuing to display this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the ``reception validity determination'' is started improves the game interest. It can be said that it is certainly preferable in terms of planning. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (during the 3rd C reception period If the corresponding 3C post-acceptance effect) is continued to be displayed even after the start of execution, the game will inevitably lose interest in the game.

For example, the after-reception effect (the 3C after-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that, within its effective period (the 3C reception period), the simulated image display is the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 316(b) )” or “second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(d))”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations possible to run in a less aggressive manner). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be lowered. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the display of the model image. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 316(d))”, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the model image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 316(b))", some players believe that the effect after reception is a "mode with a low degree of expectation". As an "excuse" when it is executed with, at the time when the execution of the effect after receiving is started, the model image display is not hidden and the display state is continued. Even if the model image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316(d))", some players may feel that the effect after the reception is not performed. In order to suppress ``frustration'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the model image display is hidden and cannot be seen at the time when the production after reception is started. It seems that there are those who wish to stay.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3C reception period occurs, the player can make a simulation through the timing (see FIGS. Either the after-acceptance production is started while the image display is displayed (see FIG. 318), or the after-acceptance production is started while the model image display is hidden and cannot be seen (see FIG. 317). See) can be substantially selected, it is expected that the interest in the game will be favorably maintained.

Further, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and (in the example shown in FIG. 315, the integrated simulated image display IGB), and the "reception valid determination" was made at any timing However, at the time when the performance after reception (2C performance after reception) based on the validity determination of reception is started, the display of the action object is not displayed and is always in a non-display state. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period occurs from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is provided to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Regarding the 3C reception period, even if the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. (It may be a target for which the above-described automatic reception function is activated). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, the operation object display (model image display) is always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the execution of the post-3C acceptance effect is started by the automatic acceptance function before the player notices, the operation object display (simulated image display) is displayed in any mode during the 3C acceptance period. It becomes possible to easily recognize what has been displayed.

Further, when the "3C reception period" is targeted for the above-described automatic reception function, multiple different timings may be prepared according to the production mode or the like as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated, when the effect after the 3C reception is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period It is desirable that the action object display (simulated image display) is always displayed at the time when the effect after 3C acceptance is executed.

However, during the 2C acceptance period, when the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-acceptance effect (2C post-acceptance effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (not subject to activation of the automatic reception function described above).

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the execution of the effect after the 3C reception is started while the operation object display (simulated image display) is being displayed (see FIG. 318), the operation In either case where the execution of the 3C post-reception effect is started while the target display (simulated image display) is hidden (see FIG. 317), the 3C post-reception effect (3C Post-reception specific effect UTC3, 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, 3C post-reception effect sound, etc.) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect mode and play a game from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the effect after the reception of the 3C.

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the execution of the effect after the 3C reception is started while the operation object display (simulated image display) is being displayed (see FIG. 318), the operation In both the case where the target display (simulated image display) is hidden and the execution of the 3C post-acceptance effect is started (see FIG. 317), the same mode as the disappearance-related display (second Disappearance-related display SKC2) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception is properly performed in the 3C reception period, regardless of which mode the production progresses.

In the above effect example, in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, the 1C reception period is further prepared. Even in the case of the timing of , the display of the action object is not hidden and is always kept displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on the reception validity determination is started. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the performance of the 1C reception period and the performance of the 2C reception period, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game. .

Further, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) and 313(c) (integrated simulated image display IGd in the example shown in FIG. 313(c)). That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is given to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is also displayed in a mode (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b)) that can be displayed in the 3C reception period. It is something that can be done. That is, in this case, when the integrated simulated image display IGa is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring. The tension within the period is preferably maintained.

Note that during the 3C reception period, the integrated simulated image display IGc shown in FIG. one mode) may be always displayed.

Also, prior to the occurrence of the 3C acceptance period, a specific precursor effect display may be displayed to suggest that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. However, in this case, if the target display (simulated image display) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception effect is started, the 3C post-reception effect is started. It is desirable that there are cases where the specific portent effect display is displayed and cases where the specific portent effect display is not displayed. On the other hand, if the action target display (simulated image display) is in a non-display state at the time when the 3C post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, a specific precursor is displayed at the time when the 3C post-accept effect is started to be executed It is desirable to ensure that the effect display is always displayed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of acceptance periods including the 2C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period are accepted as acceptance (acceptance validity determination) of actions (operations) by the player. We have a reception period. Then, if the "reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception performance based on the reception validity determination (1C post-reception performance corresponding to the 1C reception period ) is started to be executed, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image decreases over time, and at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image , multiple modes with different expectations are prepared) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see FIG. 318), and during the 2C reception period, "Action (operation) by player is performed, the remaining time display ( For example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time, and multiple modes with different expectations are prepared as modes of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. ) is not hidden and is never displayed (regardless of the timing of acceptance, the frame image and gauge image are in a hidden state at the time the production is started after acceptance) (see Figure 315). The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated model image display IG. A plurality of modes) are prepared as a frame image that forms the .

According to such a configuration, the remaining time display (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced as time passes after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started. It is a depiction that makes it possible, and as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of aspects with different expectations are prepared (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)))). Since there are cases where the display of the remaining time is not made visible, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, the reception is determined depending on at which timing (see FIGS. 310 and 311) the "reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion" is made. The remaining time display ((see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is not displayed at the time when the performance after reception based on the validity determination (3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) starts to be executed. (see FIG. 318), and when the remaining time display ((see FIGS. 232(a) to (d))) is hidden (see FIG. 317 (see ).

That is, from the player's side, the remaining time display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" among multiple modes (see FIGS. 232(a) to (d)). When it is done, continuing to display this even after the execution of the post-reception performance (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the 'reception validity determination' is started improves the game interest. It can be said that it is certainly preferable in terms of planning. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 316 (b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (during the 3C reception period If it continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3C post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed, it inevitably lowers the interest in the game.

For example, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) within the effective period (3C reception period) is "the first mode (see FIG. 316(b))" and "second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(d))", it will be executed in a mode with high expectations. It is designed to have the potential (and even the possibility of being executed in a manner with low expectations). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", the game interest is reduced. Therefore, it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 316 (d))”, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed, it is possible to reduce the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a manner with low expectations. Since it is possible to suitably suppress the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), it can be said that it is desirable to continue this display without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some players do not want the effect after reception. As an ``excuse'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time when the production after reception is started. It seems that there are people who want to keep the display state continued, and the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed, some players do not want the post-acceptance effect to be executed in order to suppress their “frustration” when the post-acceptance effect is executed in a “mode with low expectations.” Some people may want to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) at the time of starting so that it cannot be visually recognized.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3C reception period occurs, the player can wait until the timing (see FIGS. 310 and 311) at which the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period. Either the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started while the time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed (see Fig. 318), or the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and cannot be seen. Since it becomes possible to substantially select whether to start the execution of the effect after reception in the state (see FIG. 317), it is expected that the game interest will be favorably maintained.

In addition, in the 2C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) , and the integrated simulated image display IGc) shown in FIG. 316(d) (in the example shown in FIG. Even if the reception validity judgment is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the execution of the post-reception production (2C post-reception production) based on the reception validity judgment is started. I always make sure it's hidden. That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period occurs from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is provided to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

Regarding the 3C acceptance period, even if the action (operation) by the player is not performed, the same post-acceptance effect (3C post-acceptance effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. (It may be a target for which the above-described automatic reception function is activated). However, in this case, when the production after the 3C acceptance is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the remaining time display (gauge image , frame image) is always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the execution of the post-3C reception effect is started by the automatic reception function before the player notices, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in any of the 3C reception periods. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether it was displayed in a mode.

Further, when the "3C reception period" is targeted for the above-described automatic reception function, multiple different timings may be prepared according to the production mode or the like as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated. However, regardless of the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated, when the effect after the 3C reception is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period It is desirable to ensure that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time when the effect after 3C acceptance is executed.

However, during the 2C acceptance period, when the action (operation) is not performed by the player, the same post-acceptance effect (2C post-acceptance effect) as when the action (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable to prevent this from happening (not subject to activation of the automatic reception function described above).

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the production is started after the 3C reception while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318). , When the production is started after receiving the 3C while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see FIG. 317), after receiving the 3C Effect (specific effect UTC3 after reception of 3C, effect display UGC3 after reception of 3C, effect sound after reception of 3C, etc.) itself is the same. Therefore, it is possible to select an effect mode and play a game from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the effect after the reception of the 3C.

Further, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the production is started after the 3C reception while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed (see FIG. 318). , when the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and the execution of the 3C after reception production is started (see FIG. 317), the disappearance related display is the same. A mode (second extinction related display SKC2) is displayed. As a result, it is possible to favorably suggest that the acceptance has been properly made in the 3C acceptance period, regardless of which mode the presentation progresses.

In the above effect example, in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period, the 1C reception period is further prepared. Even if it is done at the timing of , the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will not be hidden and will always be displayed at the time when the production after reception based on the reception validity judgment is started. I'm trying to be. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the performance of the 1C reception period and the performance of the 2C reception period, the amusement of the game can be improved. .

In addition, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model image display IGa shown in FIG. 316(b) , and the integrated simulated image display IGc) shown in FIG. 316(d) (in the example shown in FIG. . That is, in this case, it becomes possible to suggest which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring from the time when the reception period in which the opportunity to operate is given to the player occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the game interest.

On the other hand, in the 1C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the 3C reception period (integrated model shown in FIG. 316(b) It can also be displayed by the image display IGa). That is, in this case, when the integrated simulated image display IGa is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period is occurring. The tension within the period is preferably maintained.

It should be noted that during the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IGc shown in FIG. The integrated model image display IGa (one aspect) may be always displayed.

Also, prior to the occurrence of the 3C accepting period, a specific premonition effect display may be displayed to suggest that the player will be given an opportunity to operate. However, in this case, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and continues to be displayed at the time when the performance after receiving the 3C is started, the performance after receiving the 3C is executed. It is desirable that there are cases where a specific portent effect display is displayed and cases where a specific portent effect display is not displayed at the time of starting. On the other hand, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is in a non-display state at the time when the effect after receiving the 3C is started to be executed, it is specified at the time when the effect after receiving the 3C is started. It is desirable to ensure that the foreshadowing display of is always displayed.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes with different expectations (Fig. 317 (d1) ~ (h1) in the low expectation mode shown in Figure 317 (d2) ~ (h2) high expectation mode shown in either) 3C reception after production can be executed, 1C reception period 314 (d1) to ( 314 (d2) to (h2)), the effect after reception of the 1C can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the action target display (here, the model image display imitating the target of the player's action and having a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and is in a non-display state. Sometimes. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , the action target display (here, a model image display having a plurality of modes that imitate the player's action target and have different expectations) is not displayed and is not in a non-display state. there is The simulated image display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated simulated image display IG, and as its mode, a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) are prepared.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible, and the display of the action object (simulated image display) is made visible. ) is not made visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be preferably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "a reception valid determination is made that the player's movement is a valid movement" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (Fig. 310), the operation target display (model image display) is turned off at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although it is not displayed, if ``receiving valid determination is made that the action by the player is a valid action'' after the arrival of timing Y within the 3C receiving period (see FIG. 311), the action target While the display (simulated image display) is being displayed, the performance after receiving the 3C is started to be executed.

That is, from the player's side, when the simulated image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" among the plurality of modes, after reception based on "reception validity determination" It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display the effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) even after the start of execution in order to improve the amusement of the game. However, when the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))" among multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" (during the 3rd C reception period If it continues to be displayed even after the corresponding 3C post-acceptance effect) is started to be executed, it inevitably lowers the interest in the game.

For example, the after-reception effect (the 3C after-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that, within its effective period (the 3C reception period), the simulated image display is the first mode with low expectations (Fig. 316(b) )” or “second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(d))”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations possible to run in a less aggressive manner). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the model image display continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", it is clear that the interest in the game will be lowered. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the display of the model image. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 316(d))”, it is possible to suitably suppress the decline in the interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the model image without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the model image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(b))", some of the players think that the effect after reception is the "mode with low expectations". As an "excuse" when it is executed in , I would like to keep the display state of the model image not hidden at the time when the production after reception is started. Even if the model image display is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))", some players may think that the production after reception is not performed. In order to suppress ``frustration'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the model image display is hidden and cannot be seen at the time when the production after reception is started. It seems that there are those who wish to stay.

In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3C reception period) occurs, the player can "validate the action by the player" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If it is possible to execute the reception validity judgment as an operation, the execution of the effect after reception can be started in a state where the model image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and the timing within the 3C reception period When the ``receipt validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion'' is not made until Y arrives, the execution of the post-reception production starts while the model image display is not displayed at that time. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right to select whether or not to start the effect after reception while the model image display is displayed". During the reception period, the player is not given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the model image display is displayed", and the production after reception is performed while the model image display is always displayed. It will act as a starter.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period that grants such a right of choice, if the action (operation) by the player is not received within the 3C reception period (if there is no reception validity judgment), the reception validity judgment is made. In the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception production as when the reception is performed is not executed (the automatic production function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable to execute the same post-reception production as when reception validity judgment is made (automatic production function is validated). According to such a configuration, when the 3C acceptance period occurs, compensation for forgetting to operate is not performed in exchange for granting the above-mentioned right of choice. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the performance itself after the reception is not performed unless a judgment such as ``Which one to select'' is made within a limited time, and the sense of tension is preferably imparted. will be able to On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned option is not granted, but even if the reception is not made in time for the reception within the 1C reception period, the post-reception production will be executed properly. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained. It should be noted that in this case, if the post-acceptance effect when an operation is forgotten during the 1C reception period is started while the display of the model image continues, the operation can be included even when the operation is forgotten. It is possible to prevent the above option from being granted.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when "reception validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes with different expectations (Fig. 317 (d1) ~ (h1) in the low expectation mode shown in Figure 317 (d2) ~ (h2) high expectation mode shown in either) 3C reception after production can be executed, 1C reception period 314 (d1) to ( 314 (d2) to (h2)), the effect after reception of the 1C can be executed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). are prepared in a plurality of modes with different degrees) are not displayed and may be in a non-display state. On the other hand, if the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started , Remaining time display (for example, a depiction in which the display area of a gauge image displayed in a frame image is reduced over time), and as aspects of at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, there are multiple aspects with different expectations. prepared) are not displayed and are not in a hidden state. The remaining time display according to the above-described embodiment is displayed as an integrated simulated image display IG, and as its mode, a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 232(a) to (d) are prepared.

According to such a configuration, after the execution of the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) can be visually recognized, and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are not visible in some cases, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained after the execution of the post-acceptance effect is started.

Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, if "reception valid determination is made that the player's movement is a valid movement" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives (Fig. 310), the remaining time display (the frame image and the gauge image are not displayed) at the time when the execution of the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. Although it is not displayed, in the case that "receipt valid determination is made that the player's motion is a valid motion" after the arrival of timing Y within the 3C reception period (see FIG. 311), the remaining In the state where the time display (the frame image and the gauge image are displayed), the performance is started after receiving the 3rd C.

That is, from the player's point of view, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316(d))" among the plurality of modes, "the ” (the 3C post-reception performance corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on ”, it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the execution is started. . However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (b))" among the multiple modes, the after-reception production based on the "reception validity determination" ( If the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) continues to be displayed even after the start of execution, it inevitably lowers the interest in the game.

For example, the post-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is such that the remaining time display within its effective period (3C reception period) is "low expectation first mode (Fig. 316 (b) )” or “second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316(d))”, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (furthermore, expectations possible to run in a less aggressive manner). Then, when the post-acceptance effect (the 3C post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3C acceptance period) is executed in a manner with a high degree of expectation, although this alone is sufficient to improve the amusement of the game, At this time, if the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the "low expectation first mode (see FIG. 316(b))", it is clear that the game interest will be lowered. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even if the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the "high-expectation second mode (Fig. 316(d))”, it is possible to suitably suppress the decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the post-acceptance effect with a low degree of expectation. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the display of the remaining time without hiding it.

Alternatively, even if the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316(b))", some of the players think that the effect after reception is "mode with low expectation". As an ``excuse'' when it is executed in , I want to keep the remaining time display in a state where it is not hidden and is displayed at the time when the execution of the effect after reception is started. Even if the remaining time display is displayed in the ``second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316(d))'', some players will not be able to see the effect after reception. In order to suppress ``frustration'' when it is executed in a ``mode with low expectations'', the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized at the time when the performance after reception is started to be executed. It seems that there are those who wish to stay.

In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (3C reception period) occurs, the player can "validate the action by the player" until the timing Y within the 3C reception period arrives. If it is possible to execute the reception validity judgment as an operation, the execution of the effect after reception can be started in a state where the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized, and the timing within the 3C reception period When the ``determination of reception validity with the player's motion as a valid motion'' is not performed until Y arrives, the performance after reception is started while the remaining time display is not displayed at that time. Since it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, those who seek such performance will be able to enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

According to such a configuration, during the 3C reception period, the player is given the "right of choice as to whether or not to start the effect after reception while the remaining time display is displayed". During the reception period, the player is not given the "right to choose whether or not to start the production after reception while the remaining time display is displayed", and the production after reception is performed while the remaining time display is always displayed. It will act as a starter.

In this regard, in the 3C reception period that grants such a right of choice, if the action (operation) by the player is not received within the 3C reception period (if there is no reception validity judgment), the reception validity judgment is made. In the 1C reception period in which the same post-reception production as when the reception is performed is not executed (the automatic production function is not activated) and such selection rights are not granted, the action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (if there is no reception validity determination), it is desirable to execute the same post-reception production as when reception validity judgment is made (automatic production function is validated). According to such a configuration, when the 3C acceptance period occurs, compensation for forgetting to operate is not performed in exchange for granting the above-mentioned right of choice. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the performance itself after the reception is not performed unless a judgment such as ``Which one to select'' is made within a limited time, and the sense of tension is preferably imparted. will be able to On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, the above-mentioned option is not granted, but even if the reception is not made in time for the reception within the 1C reception period, the post-reception production will be executed properly. Therefore, it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained. In this case, if the post-acceptance effect when an operation is forgotten during the 1C acceptance period is started while the display of the remaining time is continued, even when the operation is forgotten. It is possible to prevent the above option from being granted.

Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are prepared as reception periods. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least a specific region. Then, when the "reception validity determination in which the motion by the player is the valid motion" is made within the 1C reception period, based on the reception validity determination, the second mode is selected in any one of a plurality of modes with different expectations. The effect can be executed after receiving 1C, and when "receipt validity determination in which the player's motion is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the degree of expectation is increased based on the acceptance validity determination. The production after the reception of the 3C can be executed in any one of a plurality of different modes. In addition, the integrated model image display IG (model image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) at the time when the performance after receiving the 1st C starts to be executed and the time when the performance after receiving the 3rd C is started to be executed ) is not hidden but displayed.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, both when "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period and when "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the reception validity judgment Based on that, at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated simulated image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is used to perform the disappearing EF effect. Since it is made executable, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the acceptance validity determination is appropriately made (the acceptance period is terminated due to the acceptance of the operation by the player).

Also, as described above, in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period depends on at which timing (first period, second period, etc.) the "reception validity determination" for validating the action by the player is made. A case where the integrated model image display IG is not hidden and displayed at the time when the execution of the effect after receiving the 3C corresponding to 3C starts, and a state where the integrated model image display IG is not displayed (visible In some cases, it is in a state where it cannot be done. On the other hand, in the 1C acceptance period, the integrated model image display IG is always displayed regardless of the timing of acceptance validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation). It has become so. By preparing the 1C reception period in which such an integrated model image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-described 3C reception period, coupled with the configuration in which the disappearing EF effect is executed, a sense of security is provided. It is possible to provide a certain performance, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game interest.

In the 1C reception period, when the corresponding post-reception production (1C post-reception production) is executed in the high expectation mode (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2), the disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) A specific mode (FIGS. 314(e2) to (g2)) that is also used in the 3C reception period appears, but if it is different from the high expectation mode, a specific mode (FIGS. 314(e2) to 314(e2) to (g2)) does not appear and a different aspect (FIGS. 314(e1)-(g1)) appears, or the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) itself does not appear. According to this configuration, when the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed corresponding to the 3C reception period, it is possible to give an image as if the high-expectation effect is being executed, and the game is played. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease in interest.

In the 1C reception period, the acceptable reception sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the 3C reception period, the acceptable reception sound may be output in only "one mode". According to such a configuration, when the acceptable acceptance sound having the "one mode" is output, the player is made aware of the possibility that the 3C acceptance period having the above-mentioned two effects is occurring. Since it becomes possible to do so, it becomes possible to maintain a sense of tension in a suitable manner. The "one aspect" may be selectively output (by determination) even when the 1C acceptance period occurs. In this case, it is desirable that the "one mode" be output as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be favorably maintained even in a situation where the acceptable acceptance sound is output in the mode with the lowest degree of expectation.

When a specific variation pattern is selected, both the 1C acceptance period and the 3C acceptance period may occur sequentially within the specified variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the 1C reception period occurs after the 3C reception period occurs. Also, in this case, a 1C acceptance period may occur. In this case, it is desirable to allow the 2C reception period to occur between the occurrence of the 3C reception period and the occurrence of the 1C reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the portent effect output when the 1C reception period occurs and the portent effect output when the 3C reception period occurs are different from each other. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest which of the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period will occur by the precursor effect.

In addition, during the 3C reception period, as a disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display), when there is a reception, a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2) appears, and when there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode ( For example, it is desired that the third extinction related indication SKC3) appears or does not appear at all. On the other hand, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display). That is, the performance of the above-mentioned "1st C reception period" (the performance of displaying a model image or a gauge image at the time when the performance after reception is started) and the performance of the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" In the 3C reception period, which has both of the characteristics (the performance in which the model image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time when the performance starts to be executed after reception), it may be difficult to select the performance. Therefore, it can be said that forgetting to operate (end of the reception period without reception) occurs more easily than in the above-described "1C reception period". In this regard, according to the above configuration, if the operation is forgotten during the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance-related display SKC2) does not appear when the reception is made. It becomes possible to appeal to the players that they are in a situation where they have forgotten to operate, and after that, it is possible to suitably maintain the tension when the acceptance period occurs. Become. On the other hand, during the 1C reception period, there is no element that is likely to be forgotten to operate. Nevertheless, if the action is not accepted, there is a possibility that the player dared to choose "not to perform the action" in the game. If "appealing that the player is in a situation where the player forgets to operate", the interest in the game may be lowered. Therefore, in the 1C reception period, even if there is no reception, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made appears as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display).

In particular, during the 1C reception period according to the above-described production example, the mode of the disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) differs according to the mode (expectation) of the production after the 1C reception (see FIG. 314). reference). Therefore, in the 1C acceptance period, even if there is no acceptance, if the same mode as when the acceptance is made appears as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display), it will appear when the acceptance is made. It becomes possible to recognize the aspect (expectation level) of the effect after receiving the 1C reception, and to improve the amusement of the game.

During the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed on the operation receiving unit when the player's action is accepted. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing movement and the area reduction of the gauge image are continued.

In addition, each production example and another example described above may be realized by transforming it into the following configuration, and the following configuration (reception period) is further used as another reception period with a different type of production after reception. You may prepare. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least the 1C reception period, the 2C reception period, and the 3C reception period are accepted as the reception period during which the action (operation) by the player is accepted. I have. Among these, in the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) can be executed based on the reception of the action (operation) by the player (reception validity determination), As described above, in the 2C acceptance period, even if the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination), the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is not executed.

In this regard, if the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 1C reception period, the degree of expectation (jackpot pattern disappearance EF production (disappearance-related display) in the same manner in the case where it is executed in a mode with a low rate of appearance) and the case where the production after the 1C reception is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) may be made executable. Also, when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 314, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 314 regardless of whether the mode shown in ~ (h2)) appears, and whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1C reception period (mode shown in Figure 314 (d3) ~ (g3)), It is desirable to ensure that one predetermined aspect of the disappearing EF effect appears without fail. In other words, the 1C acceptance period means that no matter when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at any timing within the period (and even if the acceptance is not made), the period will be After the end, the display of the integrated model image display IG (model image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continued. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "in which form the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided by the annihilation EF effect, there is a concern that the effect will become too complicated. In this regard, according to the 1C reception period, any of the modes (the modes shown in FIGS. 314(d1) to (h1), the modes shown in FIGS. 314(d2) to (h2), mode) appears, and regardless of whether or not the acceptance is made within the 1C acceptance period (modes shown in FIGS. The above-described concerns can be resolved because the one mode selected will always appear.

In addition, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) during the 3C reception period, the degree of expectation (the jackpot pattern is The annihilation EF performance can be executed in different modes depending on whether it is performed in a mode with a low appearance rate) or when the performance after receiving the 3rd C reception is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (rate of appearance of the jackpot pattern). You may do so. The 3rd C reception period has the two performances mentioned above, and it can be said that it is positioned as a "reception period with a high degree of difficulty" for that amount, so even after the reception is made, it will be an integrated model. Making it possible for the player to obtain different effect information from both the form of the image display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the form of the extinction EF effect. It is desirable in terms of providing stimulus for production.

It should be noted that when such a configuration is applied to the examples shown in FIGS. It is desirable to make it different from any of the multiple modes as EF effects. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the acceptance period is different from the performance by the above-mentioned "1C reception period" and the performance by the above-mentioned "2C reception period". It becomes possible to suggest that it was a combination of both.

Also, as described above, in another example for the 3C reception period, when the reception is made in the "first period (first state)" within the 3C reception period, the integrated model image is displayed after the reception is made. The display IG (simulated image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) will not be displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "in which mode the integrated model image display IG (model image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Under such circumstances, it is desirable to provide information (expectation level information regarding post-acceptance performance) by disappearing EF performance in order to improve the game interest.

Further, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1C acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. can be This makes it possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "1C acceptance period" It can be suggested that both the performance by the above and the performance by the above-mentioned "2nd C reception period" were not combined.

Further, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period, the disappearing EF effect is executed in the same mode as the mode that appears when the acceptance is made. may

As for these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of these configurations to the above-described production examples and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-described production example or another example thereof.

Next, a case where some of the above modifications are applied to the above-described production examples will be described. That is, FIG. 319 is a modification of the "effect that appears when the acceptance is made during the 1C reception period or when the acceptance is not made" shown in FIG. 314, and FIGS. (Reception in the 1st period) and FIG. be. It should be noted that, in this modified example, for configurations that are not particularly mentioned, "examples of effects related to the 1C reception period (Figs. 304 to 306, 313, and 314)" 312, Figures 316 to 318)", and can be applied to the "example of presentation regarding the 1st C reception period" and the "example of presentation regarding the 3rd C reception period". is also applicable.

In the modification shown in FIG. 319, when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1C acceptance period, the 1C post-acceptance effect is expected based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). degree (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) is executed in a low mode (see FIG. 319 (d1) to (h1)), and a mode with a high degree of expectation (percentage of the appearance of the jackpot pattern) after receiving the 1C reception ( 319 (d2) to (h2)), the disappearance EF effect (disappearance-related display) is executed in the same mode. Here, the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

However, in the modification shown in FIG. 319, if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 1C acceptance period (see FIGS. 319(d3) to (g3)), As the extinction EF effect, there appears a mode that does not appear when the action (operation) by the player is accepted (acceptance validity determination) in the 1C acceptance period. Here, the third disappearance-related display SKC3 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIGS. 320 and 321, when an action (operation) by the player is accepted (reception validity determination) in the 3C reception period, based on the acceptance (reception validity determination) When the effect after receiving the 3C reception is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (proportion of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 320 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 321 (d3) to (h3)), 3C reception after production is executed in a high mode of expectation (proportion of appearance of the big hit pattern) (see Figure 320 (d2) ~ (h2) and Figure 321 (d4) ~ (h4)) different mode , the disappearing EF effect is executed. Here, when it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (percentage of appearance of the jackpot pattern) (see FIGS. 320 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 321 (d3) to (h3)), the second EF effect is eliminated. When 1 disappearance related display SKC1 is executed and executed in a high mode of expectation (percentage of appearance of jackpot patterns) (see FIGS. 320 (d2) to (h2) and FIGS. 321 (d4) to (h4)) Second disappearance related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect. As described above, FIGS. 320(d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 320(d2) to (h2) show effects that appear when acceptance is made in the first period within the 3C acceptance period according to the modification. Figures 321 (d3) to (h3) and Figures 321 (d4) to (h4) show the contents of progress. It shows the progress of the production that appears in

In addition, in the modification shown in FIGS. 320 and 321, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C accepting period (see FIGS. 321(d5) to (g5) ), as a disappearing EF effect, appears in the form that would have appeared if the player's action (operation) had been accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 321(d5) to (g5), since the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the action (operation) by the player is accepted ( 321 (d3) to (h3) (If the reception is in the first period, the production progress shown in (d1) to (h1) in FIG. 320). It becomes possible to recognize that has occurred. On the other hand, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period, and the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the 3C acceptance period 321 (d4) to (h4), the performance progress shown in FIGS. ) to (h2), it becomes possible to recognize that the development progress shown in (h2)) has occurred.

In the 1C reception period according to such a modification, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when the reception is made, the after-reception production corresponding to the above-mentioned 3C reception period (after the 3C reception A "second disappearance-related display SKC2" that is displayed when the performance) is executed in a manner with high expectations is used. That is, in this case, in the 1C reception period according to the modification, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the performance after reception is executed in a highly expected manner, and the game is played. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third C receiving period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKC2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period according to the modification, the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is executed in a manner with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKC1" displayed at the time is used, is it accepted in the 1C reception period according to the modification, or is it in the state of being accepted in the 1C reception period according to the modification? It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the application has been accepted during the acceptance period.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, when the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C reception period, the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to display it.

It is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed in relation to the 3C acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, even if the action (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, the reception period is the effect of the above-mentioned "1C reception period" and the above-mentioned "1C reception period". It will be possible to suggest that it did not have both the performance of the 2C reception period.

Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance-related display SKC3" is not displayed when an action (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest more preferably that the 1C acceptance period has ended without acceptance being made.

Also in the 3C reception period according to this modification, the player receives the signal before the timing tV2 at which the state (3C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the action by the player is the valid action" is permitted occurs. Even if there is an action (operation) by ), and the configuration according to the above another example, such as making it possible to make "reception validity determination" targeting (based on) actions (operations) by the player performed before the 3C reception period. etc. can be applied.

In the 3C reception period according to the above modification, if a low-expectation aspect appears as the production after the 3C reception (see Figure 320 (d1) ~ (h1) or Figure 321 (d3) ~ (h3)), disappear Although the first disappearance related display SKC1 is executed as the EF effect, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

Also, in the 1C reception period according to the above modification, as the disappearance EF effect, a specific mode appears when there is reception (FIGS. 319(d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 319(d2) to (h2)). 319(d3)-(g3)), the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear when there is no acceptance.

Also, in the 1C reception period according to the modification, the second disappearance-related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect) when there is a reception, but it is different from the second disappearance-related display SKC2. may be performed in any manner. For example, even if it is executed with the first disappearance related display SKC1, whether the acceptance is made during the 1C acceptance period or the acceptance is made during the 3C acceptance period. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to several embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design changes are possible.

For example, in each of the above-described examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, there are cases where a display such as "Auto button is being set" is displayed, but this display does not necessarily have to be performed. In particular, if the pachinko machine 1 is not a pachinko machine set to an automatic performance mode, but a pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic performance function can always be activated and the processing itself such as "setting to the performance state" is not installed, It is desirable to prevent the display such as "Auto button being set" from being displayed. In the pachinko machine 1, which does not have a process itself such as "setting to the effect state", the effective period during which the automatic effect function is performed and the automatic effect function are determined according to the type of operation reception effect that the player's operation is permitted. A period of validity that is not played may occur.

Further, in each of the production examples described above, the "simulated image" may be any image that prompts the player to perform an operation. It does not have to be displayed as an image imitating the operation means.

Also, when adopting the automatic effect function in each of the above-described effect examples, the timing of automatically generating (automatically accepting) the operation acceptance within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. may be In order to appropriately provide the player with an opportunity to operate, it is necessary to detect an operation when an operation is not detected until a predetermined timing arrives after half or more of the operation valid period has elapsed. It is desirable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception), and the post-operation production is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, an operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when an operation is not detected until the remaining time within the operation valid period reaches one frame, and a post-operation effect is produced based on the automatically generated operation reception. It can be said that it is the most desirable to start. In addition, in each of the above-mentioned examples of effects related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden even after the effective period ends and is maintained, the operation is performed in accordance with the timing when the effective period ends. It is desirable to perform an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration, turning off the LED, etc.). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously, it is expected to prevent misrecognition by the player, such as "Isn't the valid period continuing?" Become so.

It should be noted that, in the above-mentioned and later-described production examples, such as the production example described with reference to FIG. 209, the " The time from the timing when the operation is detected to the timing when the model image (or bar display) is hidden (period of timing tf2 to tf4, period of timing tg3 to tg5, period of timing th3 to th4, etc.) , there may be at least a few frames (for example, two frames) of time. Alternatively, there may be only one frame's worth of time. Even if there is such a time, the period during which the model image (or bar display) is displayed overlaps with the period after the post-operation effect is started, and some players can recognize this. In some cases.

In each of the production examples described above, when "period" and "time" are described, they may be the minimum unit of "period" or "time" in terms of control. It also means time.

Also, in the explanation example of the "help image that encourages understanding of the production", a ruler was exemplified as the "reference image showing the unit of length in the horizontal direction", but other images should be used. may In short, when the player operates, it is sufficient that the displayed image appears without being affected by the special effect. Display images for the purpose of performance (for example, images that suggest the degree of expectation, images that suggest the current state of production, images that suggest the state of production settings, etc.) are drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. It should be noted that such an image does not necessarily have to be drawn by one, and may be drawn so as to extend horizontally as a whole by arranging a plurality of images side by side.

In addition, in the explanation example of "preventing pranks on multiple operation means", pranks are very different from fraudulent acts such as using magnets. It can also lead to profits. Therefore, the images that appear when the player's operation is detected (including the images that appear in the process of making the specific moving image appear) should be realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. good too. In short, when the player operates a plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), "in the effect display device 1600, the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is executed. Display (playback) a specific video that cannot appear in the )” state, “Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, changes to the volume setting value for the output volume of the sound effects will not be accepted, and the current volume setting value will not be displayed”, “Brightness adjustment Even if the button is operated, changes to the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the production lamp are not accepted, and the current brightness setting value is not displayed." I wish I had. In this case, the player can voluntarily generate a function-restricted period during which the above-mentioned specific moving image is played by operating a plurality of operating means according to a predetermined pattern (procedure). is.

In addition, in the explanation example of "prevention of mischief for a plurality of operation means", in the state in which the variable display of decorative symbols is performed, the partial restriction period may be always controlled.

In addition, regarding the explanation example of "noise prevention by adjustment confirmation sound at the time of opening", the point is to control to the normal state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. A game machine controlled to a normal state after passing through a limit state in which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and the limit state is terminated early when a game is started in the limit state. The length of time to be maintained in the restricted state can be set appropriately (anything from several seconds to several hours). good. If the length of time during which the restricted state is maintained is set to be too short, the above effects will not be achieved during the game period immediately after the store opens. can suppress this.

In addition, in the explanation example of "the control applied to the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the effect importance degree", when the first special symbol is fluctuating and the second special symbol is fluctuating, under advantageous conditions No volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output during the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the side on which the game is allowed, but during the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the side on which the game is allowed under unfavorable conditions. A case where a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt this technology to a gaming machine that does not have the second special symbol. While the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that is allowed to play under advantageous conditions does not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound, the side that is allowed to play under disadvantageous conditions is not output. A configuration may be adopted in which a sound volume adjustment confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output during the fluctuation of the specific pattern.

In addition, in the explanation example of "the period during which operation reception is permitted (effective period) and its own performance", the acceptance permission sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation acceptance presentation and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception presentation The effect sound may be different from the acceptable reception sound. In addition, in FIG. 210, the reception acceptable sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11), but as "one sound data" spanning the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. You may make it output.

A model image that imitates an operation receiving part that receives an operation and a border decoration image that decorates the periphery of the model image may be separately prepared as image data, and the image data may be combined and displayed as an integrated model image. good.

In the example shown in FIG. 232, when an operation opportunity is given to one operation means, the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 232(a) and (c)), and 232(b) and (d)). However, when the "normal button model image BMGa" is displayed (FIGS. 232(a) and (c)), the first operating means (first operation receiving section) is given an opportunity to operate, and the "special button When the model image BMGb' is displayed (FIGS. 232(b) and (d)), for a second operating means (second operation receiving section) different from the first operating means (first operation receiving section) You may make it give an operation opportunity.

In each of the explanation examples described above, the members (operating means) prepared as operation targets include items that require a pressing operation (pressing action) (such as buttons) and items that require an inserting/removing operation (inserting/extracting action) (a Decoration, etc.), or may be realized as a device (proximity sensor, etc.) that requires a player's action such as non-contact or touch.

The peripheral edge decoration image SSG does not imitate the peripheral edge decoration part actually provided on the periphery of "the operation receiving part to which the operation opportunity is given", but at least part of it imitates the peripheral edge decoration part. It is acceptable as long as it does not have a rim, and there may be a part that imitates the peripheral decorative part.

Regarding the second valid period in which the operation-related images (integrated model image IG, etc.) are displayed in a "display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image GG" and the valid period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, Instead of a finite one in which a predetermined set time is set, it may be infinitely continued as long as a predetermined condition irrelevant to the passage of time is not satisfied.

When displaying the specific image TG within the effective period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

As for the "automatic reception effect" described from FIG. 232 onwards, any of the implementation methods for the "automatic reception effect" exemplified earlier may be employed. Any of the above-described realization methods may be adopted as to how the model image and the gauge image are displayed when the automatic reception presentation is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect occurs, the type of effect state at the time of occurrence, or the type of the reception effect (effect after operation) itself, or the reception effect Even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the same post-operation effect as when there was an operation is executed ("automatic effect function" is activated) depending on the conditions under which If there is no operation by the player within the validity period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" may not be activated). The timing at which the automatic effect function is activated may be at a predetermined timing within the effective period, at the end of the effective period, or after a short period of time has passed after the effective period ends. may be

The reception periods illustrated in the above-described production examples (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 282 to 287, the reception periods F and G, etc.) are not necessarily the production according to the result of the big hit determination (production determination). It does not have to occur within the pattern. For example, during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed (for example, the period in which the jackpot game is performed, various interval periods, etc.) (predetermined conditions are (based on what was established). In this case, ``after x seconds from the start of variation'' shown in FIG. The timing "after x seconds" may arrive, and the acceptance period D may be generated at that timing. According to such a configuration, since the reception period D occurs after the pattern variation is stopped with the hold being "0", it is possible to keep the player who wants to stop the game. become. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the fluctuation stops" instead of "x seconds after the fluctuation starts".

In addition, the reception period illustrated in each of the production examples described above (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. It does not necessarily have to be set as "elapsed time value", and when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted in the big winning opening), the acceptance period is set. It may be terminated.

At the timing shown in FIG. 316(b), as shown in FIG. 300(a), the operation target display (simulated image display) and remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) are in a non-display state and cannot be visually recognized. state.

Also, in each of the production examples described above, the disappearance EF production (such as a disappearance effect image) is a production after reception (a conversation notice that indicates the degree of expectation depending on which conversation appears, whether the movable body will operate, etc.) It is commonly used for multiple reception periods with different types, such as a movable effect that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not, a cut-in notice that indicates the degree of expectation depending on which mode the cut-in display appears, etc.) (can be executed in the same presentation mode), and thereby makes it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed (the reception period is finished). In other words, since the performance after acceptance differs depending on the type of acceptance period, when you see the content of the presentation, is it being performed within the acceptance period, or is the acceptance period over? It is difficult to recognize whether this is done in conjunction with In this respect, regardless of the type of reception period, by preparing a disappearing EF effect that can appear in a common (same) production mode when the reception period ends, the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed and the post-reception production is performed. is being executed. However, as a gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), it is sufficient if a common disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, etc.) is executed in multiple types of post-acceptance effects, for example, a specific type of post-acceptance effect occurs. A dedicated annihilation EF effect that can be executed only occasionally may be prepared.

In addition, regarding the items described as "preferable" in the above-mentioned production examples, modifications, notes, etc., it only describes further effects when the same configuration is provided, and the same configuration , needless to say.

That is, in the embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same effects can be obtained.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 main body frame 5 game board 5a game area 1402 normal symbol indicator 1403 first special symbol indicator 1404 first special reservation number indicator 1405 second special symbol indicator 1406 second special reservation Number indicator 1407 Round indicator 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 2001 General winning opening 2002 First starting opening 2003 Gate section 2004 Second starting opening 2005 Big winning opening

Claims (1)

a determination means for determining;
Privilege granting means capable of granting a privilege based on the determination result of the determination means being a special result;
A reception state can be generated, and when reception validity determination is made to make a specific action by a player as a valid operation in the reception state , a reception state execution capable of executing a post-reception change according to the type of the generated reception state . means and
a display device having a display area in which a display image is displayed;
an action target display means capable of displaying , in the display area, an action target display suggesting the target of a specific action by the player;
A plurality of reception states including a specific reception state are prepared as the reception state ,
The display area includes a specific display area,
The specific reception state can occur while the operation target display is not displayed using the specific display area , and when the specific reception state occurs, the reception validity determination is permitted. or an acceptance acceptance sound that suggests that the acceptance validity determination will be allowed,
In the specific reception state, a first specific allowable section in which the reception validity determination is allowed while the operation target display is not displayed using the specific display area, and the operation target display is the specific display. and a second specific allowable section in which the acceptance validity determination is permitted in the display using the area, and in the second specific allowable section, the degree of expectation that the determination result is the special result The operation target display can be displayed using the specific display area in any one of a plurality of different aspects of
When the reception validity determination is made in the first specific allowable section in the specific reception state, the operation target display is moved to the specific display area at the time when the change after reception according to the reception validity determination is started to be executed. is not displayed using , but when the acceptance validity determination is made in the second specified allowable interval, the operation target display is changed to the specified is displayed using the display area of
moreover,
a holding storage means capable of storing determination information used for determination by the determination means;
symbol variation execution means capable of selecting one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the determination information stored by the reserve storage means and executing symbol variation in the selected variation pattern;
with
The plurality of reception states further include a special reception state,
The special acceptance state is a case in which specific BGM is audibly output after a predetermined time has passed since the execution of symbol variation in the first variation pattern is started, and a second variation pattern different from the first variation pattern. There are both cases where the specified BGM is in an inaudible state when a specified period of time has elapsed since the start of execution of the symbol variation in the second variation pattern,
moreover,
When the special reception state occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output and the reception validity determination is made in the special reception state; In the case where a reception state occurs and the reception validity determination is made in the special reception state, the same aspect can appear as the change after the reception.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images